Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
v e r s i o n 3.1.0
AT310_TRG_E1
Atoll 3.1.0
AT310_TRG_E1 Technical Reference Guide
200 South Wacker Drive 7 rue des Briquetiers Suite 302, 3/F, West Tower,
Suite 3100 31700 Blagnac Jiadu Commercial Building,
Chicago, IL 60606 France No.66 Jianzhong Road,
USA Tianhe Hi-Tech Industrial Zone,
Guangzhou, 510665,
People’s Republic of China
+1 312 674 4800 +33 (0) 562 747 210 +86 20 8553 8938
+1 312 674 4847 +33 (0) 562 747 211 +86 20 8553 8285
+1 888 GoAtoll (+1 888 462 8655) +33 (0) 562 747 225 +86 20 8557 0016
www.forsk.com
3
Atoll 3.1.0
Technical Reference Guide © Forsk 2011
The software described in this document is provided under a licence agreement. The software may only be used/copied under the terms and
conditions of the licence agreement. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced or distributed in any form without prior
authorisation from Forsk.
The product or brand names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective registering parties.
The Atoll Technical Reference Guide is divided into three parts with each part comprising similar topics. The first part contains descriptions of
general terms, entities, ideas and concepts in Atoll that are encountered throughout its use. It is followed by the second part that consists of
descriptions of entities common to all types of networks and the algorithms that are technology independent and are available in any network
type. Lastly, the guide provides detailed descriptions of each basic type of network that can be modelled and studied in Atoll.
4
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Gudie
AT310_TRG_E1 Table of Contents
Table of Contents
5
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Table of Contents © Forsk 2011
6
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Gudie
AT310_TRG_E1 Table of Contents
3.1.2.1.4 Best Signal Level per HCS Layer and a Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3.1.2.1.5 Second Best Signal Level per HCS Layer and a Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3.1.2.1.6 HCS Servers and a Margin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.1.2.1.7 Highest Priority HCS Server and a Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.1.2.1.8 Best Idle Mode Reselection Criterion (C2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.1.2.2 Coverage Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3.1.2.2.1 Coverage Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3.1.2.2.2 Display Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3.2 Interference-based Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
3.2.1 Carrier-to-Interference Ratio Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
3.2.2 Point Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3.2.3 Interference-based Coverage Predictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3.2.3.1 Service Area Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3.2.3.2 Coverage Area Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3.2.3.2.1 Interference Condition Satisfied by At Least One TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3.2.3.2.2 Interference Condition Satisfied by The Worst TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
3.2.3.3 Coverage Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
3.2.3.3.1 Coverage Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
3.2.3.3.2 Display Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
3.3 GPRS/EDGE Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
3.3.1 Coding Scheme Selection and Throughput Calculation Without Ideal Link Adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
3.3.1.1 Calculations Based on C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
3.3.1.2 Calculations Based on C/I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
3.3.1.3 Calculations Based on C/(I+N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
3.3.2 Coding Scheme Selection and Throughput Calculation With Ideal Link Adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3.3.2.1 Calculations Based on C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3.3.2.2 Calculations Based on C/I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3.3.2.3 Calculations Based on C/(I+N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3.3.3 Application Throughput Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
3.3.4 BLER Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
3.3.5 GPRS/EDGE Coverage Predictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
3.3.5.1 Service Area Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
3.3.5.1.1 All Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
3.3.5.1.2 Best Signal Level and a Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
3.3.5.1.3 Second Best Signal Level and a Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
3.3.5.1.4 Best Signal Level per HCS Layer and a Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
3.3.5.1.5 Second Best Signal Level per HCS Layer and a Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
3.3.5.1.6 HCS Servers and a Margin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3.3.5.1.7 Highest Priority HCS Server and a Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3.3.5.1.8 Best Idle Mode Reselection Criterion (C2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3.3.5.2 Coverage Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
3.3.5.2.1 Coverage Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
3.3.5.2.2 Display Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
3.4 Codec Mode Selection and CQI Calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
3.4.1 Circuit Quality Indicator Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3.4.2 CQI Calculation Without Ideal Link Adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3.4.2.1 Calculations Based on C/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3.4.2.2 Calculations Based on C/(I+N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3.4.3 CQI Calculation With Ideal Link Adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3.4.3.1 Calculations Based on C/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3.4.3.2 Calculations Based on C/(I+N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3.4.4 Circuit Quality Indicators Coverage Predictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
3.4.4.1 Service Area Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
3.4.4.1.1 All Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
3.4.4.1.2 Best Signal Level and a Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
3.4.4.1.3 Second Best Signal Level and a Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
3.4.4.1.4 Best Signal Level per HCS Layer and a Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
3.4.4.1.5 Second Best Signal Level per HCS Layer and a Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
3.4.4.1.6 HCS Servers and a Margin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
3.4.4.1.7 Highest Priority HCS Server and a Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3.4.4.2 Coverage Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3.4.4.2.1 Coverage Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3.4.4.2.2 Display Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3.5 Traffic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.5.1 Traffic Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.5.1.1 Normal Cells (Nonconcentric, No HCS Layer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.5.1.1.1 Circuit Switched Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
7
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Table of Contents © Forsk 2011
8
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Gudie
AT310_TRG_E1 Table of Contents
9
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Table of Contents © Forsk 2011
10
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Gudie
AT310_TRG_E1 Table of Contents
11
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Table of Contents © Forsk 2011
12
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Gudie
AT310_TRG_E1 Table of Contents
13
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Table of Contents © Forsk 2011
14
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Gudie
AT310_TRG_E1 Table of Contents
15
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Table of Contents © Forsk 2011
16
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Gudie
AT310_TRG_E1 Table of Contents
9.9.6.5 Traffic and Pilot C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (DL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
9.9.6.6 Traffic Signal Level Calculation (UL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
9.9.6.7 Traffic Noise Calculation (UL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
9.9.6.8 Traffic Interference Calculation (UL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
9.9.6.8.1 Traffic Interference Signal Levels Calculation (UL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
9.9.6.8.2 Noise Rise Calculation (UL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
9.9.6.9 Traffic C/N Calculation (UL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
9.9.6.10 Traffic C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (UL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
9.9.7 Throughput Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
9.9.7.1 Calculation of Total Cell Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
9.9.7.1.1 Calculation of Sampling Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
9.9.7.1.2 Calculation of Symbol Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
9.9.7.1.3 Calculation of Total Cell Resources - TDD Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
9.9.7.1.4 Calculation of Total Cell Resources - FDD Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
9.9.7.2 Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, and Allocated Bandwidth Throughput Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
9.9.8 Scheduling and Radio Resource Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
9.9.8.1 Scheduling and Radio Resource Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
9.9.8.2 User Throughput Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
9.10 Automatic Planning Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
9.10.1 Automatic Neighbour Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
9.10.2 Automatic Inter-technology Neighbour Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
9.10.3 Automatic Frequency Planning Using the AFP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
9.10.3.1 Constraint and Relationship Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
9.10.3.2 Cost Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
9.10.3.3 AFP Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
9.10.4 Automatic Preamble Index Planning Using the AFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
9.10.4.1 Constraint and Relationship Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
9.10.4.2 Cost Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
9.10.4.3 AFP Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
9.10.5 Automatic Zone PermBase Planning Using the AFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
9.10.5.1 Constraint and Relationship Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
9.10.5.2 Cost Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
9.10.5.3 AFP Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
9.10.6 Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
9.10.6.1 Interference Matrix Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
9.10.6.2 Distance Importance Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
17
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Table of Contents © Forsk 2011
18
Chapter 1
Antennas and
Equipment
This chapter provides information about the calculations related to antennas In this chapter, the following are explained:
and other equipment in radio networks.
• "Antenna Attenuation" on page 21
• "Antenna Pattern Smoothing" on page 23
• "Power Received From Secondary Antennas" on
page 25
• "Transmitter Radio Equipment" on page 26
• "Repeaters and Remote Antennas" on page 28
• "Beamforming Smart Antenna Models" on
page 41
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
aRx and eRx are respectively the azimuth and tilt of the receiver (Rx) in the coordinate system S 0 ( x, y, z ) .
d is the distance between the transmitter (Tx) and the receiver (Rx).
x Rx cos ( e Rx ) ⋅ sin ( a Rx ) ⋅ d
y Rx = cos ( e Rx ) ⋅ cos ( a Rx ) ⋅ d (1)
z Rx – sin ( e Rx ) ⋅ d
Let az and el respectively be the azimuth and tilt of the receiver in the transmitter antenna coordinate system S Tx ( x'', y'', z'' ) .
These angles describe the direction of the transmitter-receiver path in the transmitter antenna coordinate system. Therefore,
the receiver coordinates in S Tx ( x'', y'', z'' ) are:
and
21
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment © Forsk 2011
x'' 1 0 0 x'
y'' = 0 cos ( e Tx ) – sin ( e Tx ) • y' (4)
z'' 0 sin ( e Tx ) cos ( e Tx ) z'
Therefore, the relation between the system S 0 ( x, y, z ) and the transmitter antenna system S Tx ( x'', y'', z'' ) is:
We get,
Then, substituting the receiver coordinates in the system S0 from Eq. (1) and the receiver coordinates in the system STx from
Eq. (2) in Eq. (6) leads to a system where two solutions are possible:
1
az = atan ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
cos ( e Tx ) sin ( e Tx ) ⋅ tan ( e Rx )
----------------------------------- + ----------------------------------------------
tan ( a Rx – a Tx ) sin ( a Rx – a Tx )
and
180 – az az
L antTx ( az, el ) = H ( az ) – ----------------------- ⋅ ( H ( 0 ) – V ( el ) ) + --------- ⋅ ( H ( 180 ) – V ( 180 – el ) )
180 180
Atoll assumes that the horizontal and vertical patterns are cross-sections of a 3D pattern. In other words, the description of
the antenna pattern must satisfy the following: H(0)=V(0) and H(180)=V(180)
In case of an electrical tilt, α, the horizontal pattern is a conical section with an elevation of α degrees off the horizontal plane.
Here, horizontal and vertical patterns must satisfy the following: H(0)=V(α) and H(180)=V(180-α)
If the constraints listed above are satisfied, this implies that:
• Interpolated horizontal and vertical patterns respectively fit in with the entered horizontal and vertical patterns, even
in case of electrical tilt, and
• The contribution of both the vertical pattern back and front parts are taken into account.
Otherwise, only the second point is guaranteed.
22
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
23
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment © Forsk 2011
Atoll first determines the peaks and nulls in the part of the pattern to be smoothed by verifying the slopes of the pattern curve
at each angle.
Then, Atoll verifies whether the difference of attenuation at a given angle is DPeak-to-Null less than the before and after it. This
comparison determines the nulls to be smoothed (NSmoothing).
24
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
Once the nulls are known, Atoll applies the smoothing algorithm to all the attenuation values at all the angles between the
first peak, the null, and the last peak.
Smoothing Algorithm
For all nulls n ∈ N Smoothing surrounded by two peaks P1 and P2 at angles α 1 and α 2 ,
A α2 – A α 1
- ⋅ ( i – α 1 )
A i, Smoothed = A i – F Smoothing A i – A α + ----------------------
1 α2 – α1
Where,
i is the angle in degrees from α 1 to α 2 incremented by 1 degree,
G ant – m Tx G ant – i
Tx
P ⋅
1 – X i
⋅ ----------------------
L Tx P Tx ⋅ X i ⋅ --------------------
Tx
L Tx
i
------------------------------------------------------------------ + -----------------------------------------
L ant – m ( az m, el m ) L ant – i ( az i, el i )
Tx i Tx
P rec = - (not in dB1)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
L model
Where,
PTx is the transmitter power (Ppilot in UMTS HSPA and CDMA2000, PP-CCPCH in TD-SCDMA, PPreamble in WiMAX, and PDLRS in
LTE),
i is the secondary antenna index,
xi is the percentage of power dedicated to the secondary antenna, i,
The definition of angles, az and el, depends on the used calculation method.
• Method 1 (must be indicated in an Atoll.ini file):
• azm: the difference between the receiver antenna azimuth and azimuth of the transmitter main antenna,
• elm: the difference between the receiver antenna tilt and tilt of the transmitter main antenna,
• azi : the difference between the receiver antenna azimuth and azimuth of the transmitter secondary antenna, i,
• eli : the difference between the receiver antenna tilt and tilt of the transmitter secondary antenna, i,
• Method 2 (default):
• azm : the receiver azimuth in the coordinate system of the transmitter main antenna,
• elm : the receiver tilt in the coordinate system of the transmitter main antenna,
• azi : the receiver azimuth in the coordinate system of the transmitter secondary antenna, i,
• eli : the receiver tilt in the coordinate system of the transmitter secondary antenna, i.
1. Formula cannot be directly calculated from components stated in dB and must be converted in linear values.
25
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment © Forsk 2011
In Atoll, the transmitter-equipment pair is modelled a single entity. The entry to the BTS is considered the reference point
which is the location of the transmission/reception parameters.
• According to the book “Radio network planning and optimisation for UMTS” by Laiho
J., Wacker A., Novosad T., the noise figure corresponds to the loss in case of passive
components. Therefore, feeder noise figure is equal to the cable uplink losses.
UL
NF Feeder = L Feeder
• Loss and gain inputs specified in ATL documents must be positive values.
Where,
DL
• L TMA is the TMA transmission loss.
DL DL DL DL DL DL
• L Feeder is the feeder transmission loss ( L Feeder = L Feeder × I Feeder + L Connector , where L Feeder , I Feeder and L Connector
are respectively the feeder loss per metre, the transmission feeder length in metre and the connector transmission
loss).
DL
• L Misc are the miscellaneous transmission losses.
DL
• L BTS – Conf are the losses due to BTS configuration (BTS property).
Where,
UL
• L Misc are the miscellaneous reception losses (Transmitter property).
26
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
UL UL UL UL UL
• L Feeder are the feeder reception losses ( L Feeder = L Feeder × I Feeder + L Connector , where L Feeder , I Feeder and
UL
L Connector are respectively the feeder loss per metre (Feeder property), the reception feeder length in metre
(Transmitter property) and the connector reception losses.
UL
• L BTS – Conf are the losses due to BTS configuration (BTS property).
UL
• G Ant – div is the antenna diversity gain (Transmitter property). This gain does not exist in WiMAX and LTE documents.
• NR Repeaters is the noise rise at transmitter due to repeaters. This parameter is taken into account only if the
transmitter has active repeater(s). The noise rise at transmitter due to repeaters is calculated as follows:
1
NR Repeaters = 10 × Log 1 +
NIM
------------------
Rp
r r
For each active repeater ( k ), Atoll calculates a noise injection margin ( NIM Rp ). This is the difference between the
k
donor transmitter noise figure ( NF TX ) and the repeater noise figure received at the donor.
Rp k TX – Rp k
NIM Rp = NF TX – NF Rp + G amp – L
r k
Where,
• For each active repeater ( k ), Atoll converts the noise injection margin ( NIM Rp ) to Watt. Then, it uses the values
k
to calculate the noise rise at the donor transmitter due to active repeaters ( NR Repeaters ).
• G TMA is the gain due to TMA, which is calculated as follows:
WithoutTMA WithTMA
G TMA = NF Composite – NF Composite
WithTMA WithoutTMA
Where NF Composite and NF Composite are the composite noise figures with and without TMA respectively.
Friis' equation is used to calculate the composite noise figure when there is a TMA.
NF NF Feeder NF BTS
-------------------
TMA --------------------------
10
-----------------
10
= 10 × Log 10 - + -----------------------------------------------
WithTMA 10 10 – 1 10 – 1
NF Composite + ---------------------------------
UL UL UL
G TMA
----------------
G TMA
---------------- ----------------------
G Feeder
10
10
10
10
× 10
10
WithoutTMA
And, NF Composite = NF BTS + NF Feeder
Where,
27
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment © Forsk 2011
DL DL DL DL
L Total – DL = L TMA + L Feeder + L Misc + L BTS – Conf
Where,
DL
• L TMA is the TMA transmission loss.
DL DL DL DL DL DL
• L Feeder is the feeder transmission loss ( L Feeder = L Feeder × I Feeder + L Connector , where L Feeder , I Feeder and L Connector
are respectively the feeder loss per metre, the transmission feeder length in metre and the connector transmission
losses).
DL
• L Misc are the miscellaneous transmission losses.
DL
• L BTS – Conf are the losses due to BTS configuration (BTS property).
If a pixel/mobile Mi receives signals from the donor D and its repeater R, the total signal
D R
strength is the sum of the two signals: C DL ( ic ) + C DL ( ic )
The received signal level (dBm) from a pixel/mobile Mi at a donor D via a repeater or remote antenna R (see Figure 1.6 on
page 30) is calculated as follows:
Mi Mi R – Mi Mi Mi Mi Mi
R
C UL = P UL + G Total – UL – L Path – M Shadowing – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
Here:
D
• P DL ( ic ) is the downlink transmission power of a donor D on carrier ic.
Mi
• P UL is the uplink transmission power of a pixel/mobile Mi.
28
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
R
• G Total – DL is the total downlink gain, user-defined or calculated as explained in "Downlink Total Gain Calculation" on
page 30.
R
• G Total – UL is the total uplink gain, user-defined or calculated as explained in "Uplink Total Gain Calculation" on
page 32.
R–M
i
• L Path is the path loss (dB) calculated as follows:
R – Mi
R
L Path = L Model + L Ant , with:
Mi
For calculating the useful signal level from the best serving cell, L Ant is determined in the
direction (H,V) = (0,0) from the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi. For
Mi
calculating the interfering signal level from any interferer, L Ant is determined in the
direction of the interfering cell from the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi,
while the antenna is pointed towards Mi’s best serving cell.
M
i
• L Body is the body loss defined for the service used by the pixel/mobile Mi.
Mi Mi Mi Mi
L ,G , L Ant , and L Body are not used in all the calculations. For more information, see
the technology-specific chapters.
29
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment © Forsk 2011
Figure 1.6: UMTS, CDMA2000, TD-SCDMA, WiMAX, and LTE: Signal Level Calculation
Over-the-Air Repeaters
R D D D–R R R R R R
G Total – DL = – L Total – DL + G Ant – L Model + G Donor – Ant – LDonor + G Amp – LCov + G Cov – Ant
RX – Feeder TX – Feeder
30
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
Here:
D
• L Total – DL are the total downlink losses of the donor D.
D
• G Ant is the gain of the antenna used at the donor D.
D–R
• L Model is the path loss between the donor D and the repeater or remote antenna R. This can be user-defined or
calculated using the selected propagation model. If you do not select a propagation model, the propagation losses
between the donor and the repeater or remote antenna are calculated using the ITU 526-5 propagation model.
R
• G Donor – Ant is the gain of the donor-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
R
• LDonor are the donor-side reception feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
RX – Feeder
R
• G Amp is the amplifier gain of the repeater R. For remote antennas, this is 0.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side transmission feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
TX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
Secondary antennas are fully supported in the evaluation of the repeater gains.
R D–R R R R
G Total – DL = – L MW + G Amp – LCov + G Cov – Ant
TX – Feeder
Here:
D–R
• L MW are the user-defined microwave link losses between the donor D and the repeater or remote antenna R.
R
• G Amp is the amplifier gain of the repeater R. For remote antennas, this is 0.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side transmission feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
TX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
R D–R R R R
G Total – DL = – L Fibre + G Amp – LCov + G Cov – Ant
TX – Feeder
31
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment © Forsk 2011
Figure 1.9: Downlink Total Gain: Optical Fibre Link Repeaters or Remote Antennas
Here:
D–R
• L Fibre are the user-defined optical fibre link losses between the donor D and the repeater or remote antenna R.
R
• G Amp is the amplifier gain of the repeater R. For remote antennas, this is 0.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side transmission feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
TX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
Atoll verifies that the downlink power after amplification is consistent with the repeater equipment limitation.
D R R R R
P DL ( ic ) + G Total – DL ≤ P Max + G Cov – Ant – LCov
TX – Feeder
Here:
D
• P DL ( ic ) is the downlink transmission power of a donor D on carrier ic. When the donor has more than one cell, Atoll
considers the highest power.
R
• G Total – DL is the total downlink gain, user-defined or calculated as explained in "Downlink Total Gain Calculation" on
page 30.
R
• P Max is the maximum downlink power allowed by the equipment.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side transmission feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
TX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
Over-the-Air Repeaters
R D D D–R R R R R R
G Total – UL = – L Total – UL + G Ant – L Model + G Donor – Ant – LDonor + G Amp – LCov + G Cov – Ant
TX – Feeder RX – Feeder
32
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
Here:
D
• L Total – UL are the total uplink losses of the donor D.
D
• G Ant is the gain of the antenna used at the donor D.
D–R
• L Model is the path loss between the donor D and the repeater or remote antenna R. This can be user-defined or
calculated using the selected propagation model. If you do not select a propagation model, the propagation losses
between the donor and the repeater or remote antenna are calculated using the ITU 526-5 propagation model.
R
• G Donor – Ant is the gain of the donor-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
R
• LDonor are the donor-side transmission feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
TX – Feeder
R
• G Amp is the amplifier gain of the repeater R. For remote antennas, this is 0.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side reception feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
RX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
Secondary antennas are fully supported in the evaluation of the repeater gains.
R D–R R R R
G Total – UL = – L MW + G Amp – LCov + G Cov – Ant
RX – Feeder
Here:
D–R
• L MW are the user-defined microwave link losses between the donor D and the repeater or remote antenna R.
R
• G Amp is the amplifier gain of the repeater R. For remote antennas, this is 0.
33
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment © Forsk 2011
R
• LCov are the coverage-side reception feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
RX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
R D–R R R R
G Total – UL = – L Fibre + G Amp – LCov + G Cov – Ant
RX – Feeder
Figure 1.12: Uplink Total Gain: Optical Fibre Link Repeaters and Remote Antennas
Here:
D–R
• L Fibre are the user-defined optical fibre link losses between the donor D and the repeater or remote antenna R.
R
• G Amp is the amplifier gain of the repeater R. For remote antennas, this is 0.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side reception feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
RX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
The total pathloss, L Total , is calculated by computing a downlink budget. If we take the case of a CDMA project, without
considering any shadowing margin or indoor loss, the power received from the donor transmitter, Txd on a carrier ic, at the
mobile receiver can be stated as (for a link over the air):
D D
D ( P Pilot ( ic ) ⋅ G Ant )
P Rec ( ic ) = -------------------------------------------
D D – Mi
-
( L Total –DL ⋅ L Path )
Where,
34
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
D
P Rec ( ic ) is the carrier power received at the receiver from the donor transmitter on a carrier ic (in W)
D
P Pilot ( ic ) is the pilot power of the donor transmitter on the carrier ic (in W)
D
G Ant is the donor transmitter antenna gain.
D
L Total – DL is the transmission feeder loss of the donor transmitter.
D – Mi
L Path is the path loss between the donor transmitter and the mobile receiver.
Similarly, the power received at the mobile receiver from the repeater R is:
D R
R ( P Pilot ( ic ) ⋅ G Total – DL )
P Rec ( ic ) = ------------------------------------------------------
R – Mi
L Path
Where,
R
P Rec ( ic ) is the carrier power received at the mobile receiver from the repeater on a carrier ic (in W)
D
P Pilot ( ic ) is the pilot power of the donor transmitter on the carrier ic (in W)
R
G Total – DL is the output downlink total gain of repeater linked to a donor transmitter with an air link.
R – Mi
L Path is the path loss between the repeater and the mobile receiver
So, the total carrier power received at the mobile receiver is:
D R
D–R R R D G Ant G Total – DL
P Rec ( ic ) = P Rec ( ic ) + P Rec ( ic ) = P Pilot ( ic ) ⋅ ---------------------------------------------
D D – Mi R – Mi
-
- + ----------------------
( L Total – DL ⋅ L Path ) L Path
Since,
D D
P Pilot ( ic ) ⋅ G Ant
L Total = ------------------------------------------------
D–R
D
L Total – DL ⋅ P Rec ( ic )
Therefore,
D D
P Pilot ( ic ) ⋅ G Ant
L Total = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
D R
-
D D G Ant G Total – DL
L Total – DL ⋅ P Pilot ( ic ) ⋅ --------------------------------------------- - + -----------------------
( L DTotal – DL ⋅ L DPath – Mi
)
R – Mi
L Path
Hence,
Txd
G ant
L total = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Txd Rpk
-
Txd G ant G total – Air – DL
L total – DL ⋅ ------------------------------------------------ - + --------------------------------
( L Txd
total – DL ⋅ L path
Txd – Rx
)
Rpk – Rx
L path
This total path loss depends on the location of the mobile receiver in realistic network scenarios. As a mobile in the donor
transmitter/repeater coverage area is likely to be far from the repeater/donor transmitter coverage area, the respective
pathloss value will be very large. This implies that we can study the two cases separately without influencing the results much.
• Case 1: Receiver in Donor Transmitter Coverage Area
R
R – Mi G Total – DL
L Path is likely to be very high, so the term ----------------------
R – Mi
- can be ignored. This implies that:
L Path
D – Mi
L Total = L Path
Considering this total pathloss value, the total received power in the uplink and in the downlink can be stated as:
D D D D
D ( P Pilot ( ic ) ⋅ G Ant ) ( P Pilot ( ic ) ⋅ G Ant )
P Rec – DL ( ic ) = -------------------------------------------
D
- = ---------------------------------------------
D D – Mi
-
( L Total – DL ⋅ L Total ) ( L Total – DL ⋅ L Path )
35
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment © Forsk 2011
Mi D Mi D
D ( P Output ( ic ) ⋅ G Ant ) ( P Output ( ic ) ⋅ G Ant )
P Rec – UL ( ic ) = ----------------------------------------------
D
- = ----------------------------------------------
D D – Mi
-
( L Total – UL ⋅ L Total ) ( L Total – UL ⋅ L Path )
Where,
Mi
P Output ( ic ) is the transmitted power from the mobile terminal on the carrier ic (in W)
D
L Total – UL is the reception feeder loss of the transmitter
D D
G Ant G Ant
R
- = -------------------------------------------------
L Total = ------------------------------------------------------------ R R
-
D G Total – DL G Total – DL ⋅ L Total – DL
L Total – DL ⋅ ---------------------- - --------------------------------------------------
R – Mi
L RPath – Mi
L Path
D D D R
D ( P Pilot ( ic ) ⋅ G Ant ) ( P Pilot ( ic ) ⋅ G Total )
P Rec – DL ( ic ) = -------------------------------------------
D
- = --------------------------------------------
R – Mi
-
( L Total – DL ⋅ L Total ) ( L Path )
Mi D Mi R D
D ( P Output ( ic ) ⋅ G Ant ) ( P Output ( ic ) ⋅ G Total ) L Total – DL
P Rec – UL = ---------------------------------------------- - ⋅ ----------------------
- = -------------------------------------------------
D R – Mi D
( L Total – UL ⋅ L Total ) ( L Path ) L Total – UL
Where,
Mi
P Output ( ic ) is the transmitted power from the mobile terminal (in W)
D
L Total – UL is the reception feeder loss of the transmitter
In the uplink, the quality level at the transmitter on a traffic channel is:
E b
---- C
--- W
N t UL = I ⋅ R
- -----
Where,
C is the carrier power received from the mobile terminal (in W)
I is the total interference (in W)
W is the spreading bandwidth (Hz)
R is the effective service data rate in the uplink (bits/s)
(W/R is the service processing gain in the uplink)
C and I are both evaluated at the same reference point, which is the entry of BTS using the following formulas.
Mi D
P Output ⋅ G Ant
C = P Total – UL = ---------------------------------------
D
L Total – UL ⋅ L Total
I = I Total + N 0
Where,
I Total is the sum of the signals received from mobile terminals inside the same cell and those outside (in W)
36
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
And,
D
N 0 = NF ⋅ K ⋅ T ⋅ W
Where,
D
NF is the noise figure of the transmitter equipment at the reference point, i.e. the entry of the BTS
K is Boltzman constant
T is the ambient temperature (in K)
Hence
BTS
N 0 = NF ⋅K⋅T⋅W
If a pixel/mobile Mi receives signals from the donor D and its repeater R, the total signal
D R
strength is the sum of the two signals: C DL ( tt ) + C DL ( tt )
Here:
R
• EIRP DL ( tt ) is the effective isotropic radiated power of the repeater or remote antenna R on the TRX type tt. It can be
user-defined or calculated as explained in "EIRP Calculation" on page 38.
• the downlink transmission power of a donor D on carrier ic.
• ΔP ( tt ) is the power offset defined for the TRX type tt.
R – Mi
• L Path is the path loss (dB) calculated as follows:
R – Mi
R
L Path = L Model + L Ant , with:
37
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment © Forsk 2011
s
Figure 1.13: GSM: Signal Level Calculation
Over-the-Air Repeaters
R D D D D–R R R R R R
EIRP DL ( tt ) = P DL – L Total – DL + G Ant – L Model + G Donor – Ant – LDonor + G Amp – LCov + G Cov – Ant
RX – Feeder TX – Feeder
Here:
D
• P DL is the downlink transmission power of the donor D.
D
• L Total – DL are the total downlink losses of the donor D.
38
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
D
• G Ant is the gain of the antenna used at the donor D.
D–R
• L Model is the path loss between the donor D and the repeater or remote antenna R. This can be user-defined or
calculated using the selected propagation model. If you do not select a propagation model, the propagation losses
between the donor and the repeater or remote antenna are calculated using the ITU 526-5 propagation model.
R
• G Donor – Ant is the gain of the donor-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
R
• LDonor are the donor-side reception feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
RX – Feeder
R
• G Amp is the amplifier gain of the repeater R. For remote antennas, this is 0.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side transmission feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
TX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
Secondary antennas are fully supported in the evaluation of the repeater gains.
R D D–R R R R
EIRP DL ( tt ) = P DL – L MW + G Amp – LCov + G Cov – Ant
TX – Feeder
Here:
D
• P DL is the downlink transmission power of the donor D.
D–R
• L MW are the user-defined microwave link losses between the donor D and the repeater or remote antenna R.
R
• G Amp is the amplifier gain of the repeater R. For remote antennas, this is 0.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side transmission feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
TX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
R D D–R R R R
EIRP DL ( tt ) = P DL – L Fibre + G Amp – LCov + G Cov – Ant
TX – Feeder
39
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment © Forsk 2011
Figure 1.16: Downlink Total Gain: Optical Fibre Link Repeaters or Remote Antennas
Here:
D
• P DL is the downlink transmission power of the donor D.
D–R
• L Fibre are the user-defined optical fibre link losses between the donor D and the repeater or remote antenna R.
R
• G Amp is the amplifier gain of the repeater R. For remote antennas, this is 0.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side transmission feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
TX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
Atoll verifies that the EIRP after amplification is consistent with the repeater equipment limitation.
R R R R
EIRP DL ( tt ) ≤ P Max + G Cov – Ant – LCov
TX – Feeder
Here:
R
• EIRP DL ( tt ) is the effective isotropic radiated power of the repeater R on the TRX type tt.
R
• P Max is the maximum downlink power allowed by the equipment.
R
• LCov are the coverage-side transmission feeder losses for the repeater or remote antenna R.
TX – Feeder
R
• G Cov – Ant is the gain of the coverage-side antenna used at the repeater or remote antenna R.
40
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
Since this parameter depends on the difference of heights/altitudes between the donor transmitter and the repeater, it can
be automatically calculated in the repeater’s Donor side properties. If the height/altitude of the antenna is modified, the
corresponding tilt angle can be found out and applied using the Calculate button.
Example
The tilt angle repeater’s donor-side antenna in the above figure would be:
R D
R H Donor – Ant – H Ant
T Donor – Ant = atan -------------------------------------------
D–R
-
D
As obvious, this angle will be negative for uptilts and positive for downtilts of the antenna.
Here:
R
• H Donor – Ant is the height of the donor-side antenna of the repeater or remote antenna R.
D
• H Ant is the height of the antenna of the donor D.
D–R
• D is the distance between the antenna of the donor D and the antenna of the repeater or remote antenna R.
41
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment © Forsk 2011
1.6.1.1 Definitions
Name Value Unit Description
2π 2π 2π T
j ⋅ ------ ⋅ d ⋅ sin θ j ⋅ ------ ⋅ 2d ⋅ sin θ j ⋅ ------ ⋅ ( E SA – 1 )d ⋅ sin θ
λ λ λ Steering vector for the direction of θ
Sθ 1, e ,e , ..., e None
2π
– j ⋅ ------ ⋅ nd ⋅ sin θ
λ
e
wn None Complex smart antenna weight
– j ⋅ π ⋅ n ⋅ sin θ λ
e with d = ---
2
42
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
K
Average downlink array correlation
--1- ⋅
R Avg
K Rk None matrix over a simulation (K
iterations)
k=1
pj ⋅ Sj ⋅ Sj
2 H
RN Rn + RI = σn ⋅I+ None Total noise correlation matrix
j=1
2
Rn σn ⋅ I None Thermal noise correlation matrix
pj ⋅ Sj ⋅ Sj
H
RI None Interference correlation matrix
j=1
H
PN w ⋅ RN ⋅ w W Total uplink noise power
P p θ ⋅ E SA
SA
Q UL -----θ- = -------------------------- None
Signal quality in the uplink
PN H
w ⋅ RN ⋅ w (TD-SCDMA)
--1- ⋅
RN
Avg K RN k W Average noise correlation matrix
k=1
H 2
I UL ( ϕ ) w ⋅ RN ⋅ w – σn W Uplink interference
Avg
2
I UL ( ϕ ) + σ n Angular distribution of uplink noise
NR UL ( ϕ ) --------------------------- None
σn
2 rise
E SA
μθ -----------------------------
H
- None MMSE optimization constant
–1
Sθ ⋅ RN ⋅ Sθ
43
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment © Forsk 2011
pj ⋅ Sj ⋅ Sj
2 H
RN Rn + RI = σn ⋅I+ None Total noise correlation matrix
j=1
2
Rn σn ⋅ I None Thermal noise correlation matrix
pj ⋅ Sj ⋅ Sj
H
RI None Interference correlation matrix
j=1
E SA
I UL ( ϕ ) - – σ 2n
------------------------------------
H –1 W Uplink interference
Sϕ ⋅ RN ⋅ Sϕ
Avg
2
I UL ( ϕ ) + σ n Angular distribution of uplink noise
NR UL ( ϕ ) --------------------------- None
σn
2 rise
Beamforming dynamically creates a beam towards the served user. The smart antenna processor applies complex weights,
w n , to each antenna element in order to form a beam towards the served user. The magnitude of these complex weights is
44
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
set to 1. The beamforming is performed using only the phase of the complex weights. The steering vector, S θ , representing
the complex weights for forming a beam towards the served user, i.e., at the angle of arrival θ is given by:
2π 2π 2π T
j ⋅ ------ ⋅ d ⋅ sin θ j ⋅ ------ ⋅ 2d ⋅ sin θ j ⋅ ------ ⋅ ( E – 1 )d ⋅ sin θ
λ λ λ SA
S θ = 1, e ,e , ..., e
Therefore, the complex weight at any nth antenna element can be given by:
2π
– j ⋅ ------ ⋅ nd ⋅ sin θ
λ
wn = e
λ – j ⋅ π ⋅ n ⋅ sin θ
In Atoll, d = --- , therefore, w n = e .
2
Where H represents the Hilbert transform, which is the complex conjugate transpose of a matrix, g n ( ϕ ) is the gain of the nth
antenna element in the direction ϕ , and R θ is the array correlation matrix for a given user direction θ , given by:
H
Rθ = Sθ ⋅ Sθ
For the direction of the served user, i.e., θ , the smart antenna gain is calculated as follows:
H H H 2
G SA ( θ ) = g n ( θ ) ⋅ S θ ⋅ R θ ⋅ S θ = g n ( θ ) ⋅ S θ ⋅ S θ ⋅ S θ ⋅ S θ = g n ( θ ) ⋅ E SA
The smart antenna gain includes the gain of the beamforming as well as the gain of power combination.
The smart antenna gain in dB will be G SA ( ϕ ) = 10 × Log ( G SA ( ϕ ) ) .
The smart antenna is able to form the beam only in the horizontal plane, therefore, the vertical pattern is assumed to remain
the same.
Cell transmission power is fed to each antenna element of the smart antenna system. Since each element transmits the same
input power, this results in a gain due to power combination, i.e., the powers fed to each antenna element are combined for
transmission.
During Monte Carlo simulations, Atoll calculates the smart antenna gains (array correlation matrix R θ ) for each served mobile
in a cell’s coverage area in each iteration. The sum of these array correlation matrices for all the users served in one iteration
k is calculated as follows:
J
Rk = pj ⋅ Rj
j=1
Where R k for any cell is the downlink array correlation matrix for iteration k, J is the number of served mobiles during the
iteration, p j is the EIRP transmitted towards the mobile j, and R j is the array correlation matrix for the mobile j.
Atoll calculates a moving average of the array correlation matrices calculated in each iteration. At the end of a simulation with
K iterations, the average downlink array correlation matrix for any cell is given by:
K
1
R Avg = --- ⋅
K Rk
k=1
45
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment © Forsk 2011
Let w represent the vector of ESA complex weights for the beamformer. w is given by:
Sθ
w = ------------
E SA
The total noise received in the uplink, i.e., interference and thermal noise, is stored in a total noise correlation matrix, R N .
The total noise correlation matrix is the sum of the thermal noise correlation matrix R n , and the interference correlation
matrix R I , given by:
pj ⋅ Sj ⋅ Sj
2 H
RN = Rn + RI = σn ⋅I+
j=1
pj ⋅ Sj ⋅ Sj
2 H
Where R n = σ n ⋅ I and R I =
j=1
2
σ n is the thermal noise power. I is the identity matrix. p j is the power received by one element of the smart antenna from
the jth interfering mobile. S j is the steering vector in the direction of the jth interfering mobile, ϕ . J is the total number of
interfering mobiles.
The total noise power, including thermal noise and interference from all uplink interferers, received by a cell is given by:
H
PN = w ⋅ RN ⋅ w
And, the total power received from the served user is given by:
H H
P θ = p θ ⋅ w ⋅ S θ ⋅ S θ ⋅ w = p θ ⋅ E SA
Where p θ is the power received by one element of the smart antenna from the served user.
46
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
From the above equation, we can determine the uplink smart antenna beamforming gain in the direction of the served user,
which equals the number of smart antenna elements, i.e., G SA = E SA .
The noise correlation matrix R N for each iteration k includes the effect of the matrix calculated for the previous iteration. The
result is the angular distribution of the uplink load (TD-SCDMA) or the uplink noise rise (WiMAX), which is calculated from the
noise correlation matrix obtained at the end of the last iteration of a Monte Carlo simulation. This angular distribution of the
uplink load (TD-SCDMA) or the uplink noise rise (WiMAX) can be stored in the Cells table. The average of the noise correlation
matrices is calculated as follows:
K
1
RN
Avg
= --- ⋅
K RN k
k=1
Where R N is the average of the noise correlation matrices of all the iterations from k = 1 to K, and R N is the noise
Avg k
Where I UL ( ϕ ) is the interfering signal in the direction ϕ , ESA is the number of smart antenna elements, S ϕ is the steering
2
vector in the direction ϕ , and σ n is the thermal noise power.
In TD-SCDMA, the uplink load is calculated from the average noise correlation matrix. In WiMAX, the angular distribution of
the uplink noise rise is given by:
2
I UL ( ϕ ) + σ n
NRUL ( ϕ ) = ---------------------------
2
σn
Let ŵ represent the vector of ESA complex weights for the beamformer. ŵ is given by:
47
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment © Forsk 2011
–1
ŵ = μ θ ⋅ R N ⋅ S θ
Where S θ is the steering vector in the direction of the served user, θ . μ θ , which is a constant value for a given useful signal
that optimizes the beamformer weights. It is given by the equation:
E SA
μ θ = -----------------------------
H
-
–1
Sθ ⋅ RN ⋅ Sθ
–1
R N is the inverse of the total noise correlation matrix. The total noise correlation matrix is the sum of the thermal noise
correlation matrix R n , and the interference correlation matrix R I , given by:
pj ⋅ Sj ⋅ Sj
2 H
RN = Rn + RI = σn ⋅I+
j=1
pj ⋅ Sj ⋅ Sj
2 H
Where R n = σn ⋅ I and R I =
j=1
2
σ n is the thermal noise power. I is the identity matrix. p j is the power received by one element of the smart antenna from
the jth interfering mobile. S j is the steering vector in the direction of the jth interfering mobile, ϕ . J is the total number of
interfering mobiles.
The total noise power, including thermal noise and interference from all uplink interferers, received by a cell is given by:
2 H –1
P̂ N = μ θ ⋅ S θ ⋅ R N ⋅ S θ
And, the total power received from the served user is given by:
2 H –1 2
P̂ θ = p θ ⋅ μ θ ⋅ ( S θ ⋅ R N ⋅ S θ )
Where p θ is the power received by one element of the smart antenna from the served user.
P̂
Q UL = -----θ- = p θ ⋅ S θ ⋅ R N ⋅ S θ
SA H –1
P̂ N
P̂
CINR UL = -----θ- = p θ ⋅ S θ ⋅ R N ⋅ S θ
H –1
P̂ N
From the above equation, we can determine the uplink smart antenna beamforming gain in the direction of the served user.
RSCP TCH – UL (TD-SCDMA) or C UL (WiMAX) can be calculated from the above equation by considering the interference and
–1
noise to be null, i.e., R N = I . This gives:
H
In TD-SCDMA, RSCP TCH – UL = p θ ⋅ S θ ⋅ I ⋅ S θ = p θ ⋅ E SA
H
In WiMAX, C UL = p θ ⋅ S θ ⋅ I ⋅ S θ = p θ ⋅ E SA
From the above equation, the uplink smart antenna beamforming gain equals the number of smart antenna elements, i.e.,
G SA = E SA .
–1
The inverse noise correlation matrix R N for each iteration k includes the effect of the matrix calculated for the previous
iteration. Hence, Atoll is able to calculate an average of the smart antenna interference-cancellation effect. The result is the
angular distribution of the uplink load (TD-SCDMA) or the uplink noise rise (WiMAX), which is calculated from the inverse of
the noise correlation matrix obtained at the end of the last iteration of a Monte Carlo simulation. This angular distribution of
the uplink load (TD-SCDMA) or the uplink noise rise (WiMAX) can be stored in the Cells table. The average of the inverse noise
correlation matrices is calculated as follows:
48
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment
K
1
RN
–1 –1
RN = --- ⋅
Avg K k
k=1
–1 –1
Where R N is the average of the inverse noise correlation matrices of all the iterations from k = 1 to K, and R N is the
Avg k
Where I UL ( ϕ ) is the interfering signal in the direction ϕ , ESA is the number of smart antenna elements, S ϕ is the steering
2
vector in the direction ϕ , and σ n is the thermal noise power.
In TD-SCDMA, the uplink load is calculated from the average inverse noise correlation matrix. In WiMAX, the angular
distribution of the uplink noise rise is given by:
2
I UL ( ϕ ) + σ n
NRUL ( ϕ ) = ---------------------------
2
σn
49
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 1: Antennas and Equipment © Forsk 2011
50
Chapter 2
Radio Propagation
This chapter provides information about propagation models and
calculations related to path loss.
2 Radio Propagation
Path loss calculations are carried out between a transmitter and a reciever using propagation models and other calculations
related to radio wave propagation such as diffraction and shadow fading. Propagation models are mathematical
representations of the average loss in signal strength over distance. Diffraction loss and shadow fading margins are added to
this average loss in order to get more precise path loss values.
Path loss matrices are calculated for each transmitter and their results used in other calculations (coverage predictions, Monte
Carlo simulations, point analysis, etc.). The method of calculation may differ depending on the analysis being performed:
Receiver Profile
Analysis type Calculation Result
position extraction
Centre of each bin
Based on path loss One value for the bin’s
Coverage predictions inside the calculation
matrices Radiala surface area
area
Different values inside
Point analysis (Profile) Anywhere Real-time Systematic
a calculation bin
Anywhere inside the Based on path loss One value for the bin’s
Point analysis (other)
calculation areas matrices Radiala surface area
Monte Carlo Based on path loss One value at the
simulations
Mobile coordinates
matrices Radiala mobile location
One value at the
Subscriber lists Subscriber coordinates Real-time Radiala subscriber location
a. With the Standard Propagation Model, you can choose between radial or systematic.
This chapter describes the various propagation models available in Atoll, and other radio wave propagation phenomena such
as diffraction and shadow fading.
1. Atoll draws a vertical line through S. This line respectively intersects (S’1,S’’1) and (S’2, S’’2) lines at S1 and S2.
53
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
If you do not have any clutter height file, Atoll takes clutter height information in clutter classes file. In this case, clutter height
is an average height related to a clutter class.
Atoll draws radials from the site (where transmitter is located) to each calculation bin located along the transmitter
calculation area border. In other words, Atoll determines a geographic profile between site and each bin centre.
54
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
Transmitter location
Radials (Atoll extracts a geographic profile for each radial)
Centres of bins located on the calculation border
Receiver location
Depending on the calculation being carried out, the receiver may be located at the centre of a calculation bin (coverage
predictions) or anywhere within a calculation bin. Atoll uses the profile nearest to the receiver for calculations (the receiver
is assumed to be located on the profile).
Atoll extracts a precise geographic profile between the site and the receiver.
55
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
Transmitter location
Geographic profile
Receiver location
56
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
The profile resolution does not depend on the geographic layer order in the Geo tab of the Explorer window.
However, the geographic layer order has influence on the usage of the data. For example, when DTM 1 is on the top
of DTM 2, Atoll will use DTM 1 for extracting the profile where DTM a is available and it will use DTM 2 elsewhere.
To get ground altitude every 25 m, Atoll uses the bilinear interpolation method described in "Ground Altitude
Determination" on page 53.
> Clutter
> Clutter (20m)
57
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
Okumura-Hata Cost-Hata
Parameters
f ≤1500 MHz f > 1500 MHz
A1 69.55 49.30
A2 26.16 33.90
A3 -13.82 -13.82
B1 44.90 44.90
B2 -6.55 -6.55
B3 0 0
When receiver antenna height equals 1.5m, a(hRx) is close to 0 dB regardless of frequency.
58
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
1st step: For each calculation bin, Atoll determines the clutter bin on which the receiver is located. This clutter bin corresponds
to a clutter class. Then, it uses the Hata formula assigned to this clutter class to evaluate L model1 .
2nd step: This step depends on whether the ‘Add diffraction loss’ option is checked.
• If the ‘Add diffraction loss’ option is unchecked, Atoll stops calculations.
L model = L model1
where:
E is the field strength for 1 kW ERP
f is the frequency (MHz).
h Tx is the transmitter antenna height above ground (m) (Hb notation is also used in Atoll)
As described above, the Hata formula is valid for urban environment. For other environments and mobile antenna heights,
corrective formulas must be applied.
L model1 = Lu – a ( h Rx ) for large city and urban environments
59
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
2
L model1 = Lu – a ( h Rx ) – 2 log ------ – 5.4 for suburban area
f
28
2
L model1 = Lu – a ( h Rx ) – 4.78 ( log f ) + 18.33 log f – 40.94 for rural area
In the formulas above, a ( h Rx ) is the environment correction and is defined according to the area size.
Distance Correction
1st step: For each calculation bin, Atoll determines the clutter bin on which the receiver is located. This clutter bin corresponds
to a clutter class. Then, it uses the ITU 529-3 formula assigned to this clutter class to evaluate L model1 .
2nd step: This step depends on whether the ‘Add diffraction loss’ option is checked.
• If the ‘Add diffraction loss’ option is unchecked, Atoll stops calculations.
L model = L model1
with,
K1: constant offset (dB).
K2: multiplying factor for log(d).
d: distance between the receiver and the transmitter (m).
K3: multiplying factor for log(HTxeff).
HTxeff: effective height of the transmitter antenna (m).
K4: multiplying factor for diffraction calculation. K4 has to be a positive number.
Diffraction loss: loss due to diffraction over an obstructed path (dB).
60
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
The transmitter antenna height is determined relative to an average ground height calculated along the profile between a
transmitter and a receiver. The profile length depends on distance min and distance max values and is limited by the
transmitter and receiver locations. Distance min and Distance max are minimum and maximum distances from the transmitter
respectively.
H Txeff = H Tx + ( H 0Tx – H 0 )
where,
H 0Tx is the ground height (ground elevation) above sea level at transmitter (m).
H 0 is the average ground height above sea level along the profile (m).
If the profile is not located between the transmitter and the receiver, HTxeff equals HTx
only.
The transmitter antenna height is calculated using the ground slope at receiver.
H Txeff = ( H Tx + H 0Tx ) – H 0Rx + K × d
where,
H 0Rx is the ground height (ground elevation) above sea level at receiver (m).
61
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
K is the ground slope calculated over a user-defined distance (Distance min). In this case, Distance min is a distance from
receiver.
Spot Ht
Absolute Spot Ht
Distance min and distance max are set to 3000 and 15000 m according to ITU
recommendations (low frequency broadcast f < 500 Mhz) and to 0 and 15000 m
according Okumura recommendations (high frequency mobile telephony).
These values are only used in the two last methods and have different meanings according to the method.
Atoll offers a new method called “Enhanced slope at receiver” to evaluate the effective transmitter antenna height.
Let x-axis and y-axis respectively represent positions and heights. We assume that x-axis is oriented from the transmitter
(origin) towards the receiver.
This calculation is achieved in several steps:
1. Atoll determines line of sight between transmitter and receiver.
The LOS line equation is:
( ( H 0Tx + H Tx ) – ( H 0Rx + H Rx ) )
Los ( i ) = ( H 0Tx + H Tx ) – -----------------------------------------------------------------------
- Res ( i )
d
where,
62
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
3. Hills and mountains are already taken into account in diffraction calculations. Therefore, in order for them not to
unfavourably influence the regression line calculation, Atoll filters the terrain profile.
Atoll calculates two filtered terrain profiles; one established from the transmitter and another from the receiver. It
determines filtered height of every profile point. Profile points are evenly spaced on the basis of profile resolution. To
determine filtered terrain height at a point, Atoll evaluates ground slope between two points and compares it with a
threshold set to 0.05; where three cases are possible.
Some notations defined hereafter are used in next part.
H orig is the original height. Original terrain height is determined from extracted ground profile.
H orig ( i ) – H orig ( i – 1 )
i. If H orig ( i ) > H orig ( i – 1 ) and ---------------------------------------------------
- ≤ 0.05 ,
Res
H orig ( i ) – H orig ( i – 1 )
- > 0.05
ii. If H orig ( i ) > H orig ( i – 1 ) and ---------------------------------------------------
Res
H orig ( i ) – H orig ( i + 1 )
i. - ≤ 0.05 ,
If H orig ( i ) > H orig ( i + 1 ) and ---------------------------------------------------
Res
H orig ( i ) – H orig ( i + 1 )
ii. If H orig ( i ) > H orig ( i + 1 ) and ---------------------------------------------------- > 0.05
Res
Then, for every point of profile, Atoll compares the two filtered heights and chooses the higher one.
4. Atoll determines the influence area, R. It corresponds to the distance from receiver at which the original terrain profile
plus 30 metres intersects the LOS line for the first time (when beginning from transmitter).
The influence area must satisfy additional conditions:
• R ≥ 3000m
63
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
• R ≥ 0.01 ⋅ d
• R must contain at least three bins.
• When several influence areas are possible, Atoll chooses the highest one.
• If d < 3000m, R = d.
5. Atoll performs a linear regression on the filtered profile within R in order to determine a regression line.
The regression line equation is:
y = ax + b
( d ( i ) – dm ) ( Hfilt ( i ) – Hm )
i
a = --------------------------------------------------------------------- and b = H m – ad m
2
( d ( i ) – dm )
i
where,
1
H m = ---
n Hfilt ( i )
i
i is the point index. Only points within R are taken into account.
R
d m = d – ---
2
regr ( i ) = a ⋅ ( i ⋅ Res ) + b
H 0Tx + H Tx – b
H Txeff = ---------------------------------
-
2
1+a
If HTxeff is less than 20m, Atoll recalculates it with a new influence area, which begins at transmitter.
7. If H Txeff is still less than 20m (even negative), Atoll evaluates path loss using H Txeff = 20m and applies a correction
factor.
Therefore, if H Txeff < 20m ,
d 20 ⋅ ( 1 – ( H Txeff – 20 ) )
where, K lowant = -------5- – ( 0.3 ⋅ ( H Txeff – 20 ) ) – -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
10 9.63 + ----------- d -
⋅ 6.93 +
d -
-----------
1000 1000
where,
H Rx is the receiver antenna height above the ground (m).
H 0Rx is the ground height (ground elevation) above sea level at the receiver (m).
64
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
H 0Tx is the ground height (ground elevation) above sea level at the transmitter (m).
The calculation of effective antenna heights ( H Rxeff and H Txeff ) is based on extracted
DTM profiles. They are not properly performed if you have not imported heights (DTM
file) beforehand.
When the transmitter and the receiver are not in line of sight, the path loss formula is:
L model = K 1, NLOS + K 2, NLOS log ( d ) + K 3 log ( H Txeff ) + K 4 ⋅ Diffraction + K 5 log ( H Txeff ) log ( d ) + K 6 ⋅ H Rx + K clutter f ( clutter )
K hill, LOS is determined in three steps. Influence area, R, and regression line are supposed available.
1st step: For every profile point within influence area, Atoll calculates height deviation between the original terrain profile and
regression line. Then, it sorts points according to the deviation and draws two lines (parallel to the regression line), one which
is exceeded by 10% of the profile points and the other one by 90%.
2nd step: Atoll evaluates the terrain roughness, Δh; it is the distance between the two lines.
If 0 < Δh ≤ 20m , K h = 0
2
Else K h = 7.73 ( log ( Δh ) ) – 15.29 log ( Δh ) + 6.746
2 H 0Rx + H Rx – regr ( i Rx )
Else K hf = – 2 ⋅ ( – 1.616 ( log ( Δh ) ) + 14.75 log ( Δh ) – 11.21 ) ⋅ -----------------------------------------------------
-
Δh
iRx is the point index at receiver.
2.5.2.5 Diffraction
Four methods are available to calculate diffraction loss over the transmitter-receiver profile.
Along the transmitter-receiver profile, you may consider:
• Either ground altitude and clutter height (Consider heights in diffraction option),
In this case, Atoll uses clutter height information from clutter heights file if available in the .atl document. Otherwise,
it considers average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes file description.
• Or only ground altitude.
where,
L: loss due to clutter defined in the Clutter tab by the user (in dB).
w: weight determined through the weighting function.
n: number of points taken into account over the profile. Points are evenly spaced depending on the profile resolution.
Four weighting functions are available:
65
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
1
• Uniform weighting function: w i = ---
n
di
• Triangular weighting function: w i = ------------
n
-
dj
j=1
• d i = D – d' i , where d’i is the distance between the receiver and the ith point and D is the maximum distance defined.
di
log ---- + 1
D
• Logarithmic weighting function: w i = ------------------------------------
n
d
log ----j + 1
D
j=1
di
----
D
e –1
• Exponential weighting function: w i = ------------------------
d n
----j
D
e –1
j=1
The chart below shows the weight variation with the distance for each weighting function.
2.5.2.7 Recommendations
Beware that the clutter influence may be taken into account in two terms, Diffraction loss and f(clutter) at the same time. To
avoid this, we advise:
1. Not to consider clutter heights to evaluate diffraction loss over the transmitter-receiver profile if you specify losses
per clutter class.
This approach is recommended if the clutter height information is statistical (clutter roughly defined, no altitude).
Or
2. Not to define any loss per clutter class if you take clutter heights into account in the diffraction loss.
In this case, f(clutter)=0. Losses due to clutter are only taken into account in the computed Diffraction loss term.
This approach is recommended if the clutter height information is either semi-deterministic (clutter roughly defined,
altitude defined with an average height per clutter class) or deterministic (clutter sharply defined, altitude defined
with an average height per clutter class or - even better - via a clutter height file).
In case of semi-deterministic clutter information, specify receiver clearance (m) per clutter class. Both ground altitude and
clutter height are considered along the whole transmitter-receiver profile except over a specific distance around the receiver
(clearance), where Atoll proceeds as if there was only the DTM map. The clearance information is used to model streets.
66
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
In the above figure, the ground altitude and clutter height (in this case, average height specified for each clutter class in the
clutter classes map description) are taken into account along the profile.
Clearance definition is not necessary in case of deterministic clutter height information. Clutter height information is accurate
enough to be used directly without additional information such as clearance. Two cases can be considered:
1. If the receiver is in the street (clutter height lower than receiver height), Atoll calculates the path loss by considering
potentially some diffraction loss at reception.
2. If the receiver is supposed to be inside a building (clutter height higher than receiver height), Atoll does not consider
any difraction (and clearance) from the building but takes into account the indoor loss as an additional penetration
loss.
• To consider indoor losses in building only when using a deterministic clutter map
(clutter height map), the 'Indoor Coverage' box must not be checked in predictions
unless this loss will be counted twice inside buildings (on the entire reception clutter
class and not only inside the building).
• Even with no clearance, the clutter height (extracted either from clutter class or
clutter height folders) is never considered at the last profile point.
67
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
A is the values of parameter associated variables (log(d), log(heff), etc.) at each measurement point, and
b is the vector of measurement values.
The vector x0 is the set of parameters found at the end of the calibration.
The theoretical mathematical solution of this problem was found by Gauss (around 1830). Further enhancements to the
original method were proposed in the 60's in order to solve the numerical instability problem.
In 1974, Lawson & Hanson [2] proposed a theoretical solution of the least-square problem with general linear inequality
constraints on the vector x0. Atoll implementation is based on this method, which is explained in detail in [1].
References:
[1] Björck A. “Numerical Methods for Least Square Problems”, SIAM, 1996.
[2] Lawson C.L., Hanson R.J. “Solving Least Squares Problems”, SIAM, 1974.
It is recommended to set K6 to 0, and use K7 instead of K6. K6 is a multiplicative coefficient to a value in dB, which means that
slight variations in K6 have considerable impact on the path loss.
K1 depends on the frequency and the technology. Here are some sample values:
The above K1 values for WiMAX are extrapolated estimates for different frequency ranges. It is highly recommended to
calibrate the SPM using measurement data collected on the field for WiMAX networks before using the SPM for predictions.
All K paramaters can be defined by the automatic calibration wizard. Since Kclutter is a constant, its value is strongly dependant
on the values given to the losses per clutter classes. From experience, typical losses (in dB) per clutter class are:
68
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
These values have to be entered only when considering statistical clutter class maps only.
The Standard Propagation Model is derived from the Hata formulae, valid for urban
environments. The above values are normalized for urban clutter types (0 dB for urban
clutter class). Positive values correspond to more dense clutter classes and negative
values to less dense clutter classes.
69
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
• It is not possible to calibrate the unmasked version of the SPM using measurement
data.
• You can also use Atoll.ini options, AngleCalculation = 2000 and AngleCalculation =
3000, for calculating unmasked path losses and angles of incidence, respectively.
These options are only available for the propagation models available with Atoll by
default. Please refer to the Administrator Manual for details.
• Using the SPM, you can also calculate the angles of incidence by creating a new
instance of the SPM with the following characteristics:
Type: Atoll.StdPropagModelIncidence.1
Signature: {659F0B9E-2810-4e59-9F0D-DA9E78E1E64B}
• The "masked" version of the algorithm has not been changed. It still takes into
account Atoll.ini options. However, the "unmasked" version does not take Atoll.ini
options into account.
• It’s highly recommended to use one method (Atoll.ini options) or the other one (new
identifier & signature) but not to combine both.
Where L FS is the free space loss calculated using the formula entered in the model properties, L Diff is the diffraction loss
calculated using the 3-obstacle Deygout method, and F Diff is the diffraction multiplying factor defined in the model
properties.
For free space loss calculation, see "Free Space Loss" on page 81.
Diffraction
Atoll calculates diffraction loss along the transmitter-receiver profile built from DTM and clutter maps. Therefore, losses due
to clutter are taken into account in diffraction losses. Atoll takes clutter height information from the clutter heights file if
available in the .atl document. Otherwise, it considers average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter
classes file description.
The Deygout construction (considering 3 obstacles) is used. This method is described under "Diffraction" on page 81. The final
diffraction losses are determined by multiplying the diffraction losses calculated using the Deygout method by the Diffraction
multiplying factor defined in the model properties.
• Receiver Clearance
Define receiver clearance (m) per clutter class when clutter height information is either statistical or semi-
deterministic. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific
distance around the receiver (clearance), where Atoll proceeds as if there was only the DTM map (see SPM part). Atoll
uses the clearance information to model streets.
If the clutter is deterministic, do not define any receiver clearance (m) per clutter class. In this case, clutter height
information is accurate enough to be used directly without additional information such as clearance (Atoll can locate
streets).
• Receiver Height
Entering receiver height per clutter class enables Atoll to consider the fact that receivers are fixed and located on the
roofs.
• Visibility
If the option ‘Line of sight only’ is not selected, Atoll computes Lmodel on each calculation bin using the formula defined
above. When selecting the option ‘Line of sight only’, Atoll checks for each calculation bin if the Diffraction loss (as
defined in the Diffraction loss: Deygout part) calculated along profile equals 0.
• In this case, receiver is considered in ‘line of sight’ and Atoll computes Lmodel on each calculation bin using the
formula defined above.
70
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
Where L FS is the free space loss calculated using the formula entered in the model properties and L Diff is the diffraction loss
calculated using the 3-obstacle Deygout method.
For free space loss calculation, see "Free Space Loss" on page 81.
Diffraction
Atoll calculates diffraction loss along the transmitter-receiver profile is built from the DTM map. The Deygout construction
(considering 3 obstacles), with or without correction, is used. These methods are described under "Diffraction" on page 81.
For free space loss calculation, see "Free Space Loss" on page 81.
where,
Cn is the field strength received in dBμV/m,
In the following part, let us assume that Cn=En(d,HTxeff) (where En(d,HTxeff) is the field received in dBμV/m) is read from
charts for a distance, d (in km), and an effective transmitter antenna height, HTxeff (in m).
First of all, Atoll evaluates the effective transmitter antenna height, H Txeff , as follows:
71
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
where,
H 0Tx is the ground height (ground elevation) above sea level at the transmitter (m).
H 0 ( 3 ;d ) is the average ground height (m) above sea level for the profile between a point 3 km from transmitter and
the receiver (located at d km from transmitter).
H 0 ( 3 ;15 ) is the average ground height (m) above sea level for the profile between a point 3 km and another 15 km
from transmitter.
Then, depending on d and HTxeff, Atoll determines Cn using bilinear interpolation as follows.
Therefore,
If HTxeff < 37.5
• AHRxeff Calculation
H Rx
= --- ⋅ 20 ⋅ log -------
c
AH -
Rxeff 6 10
where,
HRx is the user-defined receiver height,
c values are provided in the recommendation 370-7; for example, c=4 in a rural case.
• Acl Calculation
2
If f ≤ 300 MHz, A cl = 8.1 – [ 6.9 + 20 log ( ( ( ν – 0.1 ) + 1 ) + ( ν – 0.1 ) ) ]
2
Otherwise, A cl = 14.9 – [ 6.9 + 20 log ( ( ( ν – 0.1 ) + 1 ) + ( ν – 0.1 ) ) ]
f
With ν = – θ ⋅ 4000 ⋅ ---------
300
where,
θ is the clearance angle (in radians) determined according to the recommendation 370-7 (figure 19),
72
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
4πd 0
Where A = 20 ⋅ Log 10 ------------ . This is a fixed quantity which depends upon the frequency of operation. d is the distance
λ
between the base station antenna and the receiver terminal and d0 is a fixed reference distance (100 m). a(HBS) is the
correction factor for base station antenna heights, HBS:
c
a ( H BS ) = a – b ⋅ H BS + --------
H BS
Where 10 m ≤ HBS ≤ 80 m , and a, b, and c are correction coefficients which depend on the SUI terrain type.
The Erceg-Greenstein propagation model is further developed through the correction factors introduced by the Stanford
University Interim model. The standards proposed by the IEEE working group 802.16 include channel models developed by
Stanford University. The basic path loss equation with correction factors is presented below:
Where a(f) is the correction factor for the operating frequency, a ( f ) = 6 ⋅ Log 10 ------------ , with f being the operating
f
2000
HR
frequency in MHz. a(HR) is the correction factor for the receiver antenna height, a ( H R ) = X ⋅ Log 10 ------ , where d depends
2
on the terrain type.
• a(HR) = 0 for HR = 2 m.
• References:
• [1] V. Erceg et. al, “An empirically based path loss model for wireless channels in
suburban environments,” IEEE J. Select Areas Commun., vol. 17, no. 7, July 1999,
pp. 1205-1211.
• [2] Abhayawardhana, V.S.; Wassell, I.J.; Crosby, D.; Sellars, M.P.; Brown, M.G.;
"Comparison of empirical propagation path loss models for fixed wireless access
systems," Vehicular Technology Conference, 2005. IEEE 61st Volume 1, 30 May-1
June 2005 Page(s):73 - 77 Vol. 1
2. The word ‘terrain’ is used in the original definition of the model rather than ‘environment’. Hence it is used
interchangeably with ‘environment’ in this description.
73
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
4πd
PL = 20 ⋅ Log 10 -----------0- + 10 ⋅ a ( H BS ) ⋅ Log 10 ----- + a ( f ) – a ( H R )
d
(1)
λ d 0
Where,
• f is the operating frequency in MHz
• d is the distance from the transmitter to the received in m in equation (1) and in km in equation (2)
• HBS is the transmitter height in m
• HR is the receiver height in m
The above equation is divided into two parts in Atoll:
PL = Lu – a ( H R )
Where,
Lu = – 7.366 + 26 ⋅ Log 10 ( f ) + 10 ⋅ a ( H BS ) ⋅ ( 1 + Log 10 ( d ) )
The above path loss formulas are valid for d > d0, i.e. d > 100 m. For d < 100 m, the path loss has been restricted to the free
space path loss with correction factors for operating frequency and receiver height:
4⋅π⋅d 4⋅π⋅d
PL = 20 ⋅ Log 10 ------------------ + a ( f ) – a ( H R ) instead of PL = 20 ⋅ Log 10 ------------------
λ λ
Where a(f) and a(Hr) have the same definition as given above. Simplifying the above equation, we get,
PL = 12.634 + 26 ⋅ Log 10 ( f ) + 20 ⋅ Log 10 ( d ) – a ( H R ) , or Lu = 12.634 + 26 ⋅ Log 10 ( f ) + 20 ⋅ Log 10 ( d )
The above equation is not user-modifiable in Atoll except for the coefficient of Log 10 ( f ) , i.e. 26. Atoll uses the same
coefficient as the one you enter for Log 10 ( f ) in Atoll for the case d > d0.
1st step: For each pixel in the calculation radius, Atoll determines the clutter bin on which the receiver is located. This clutter
bin corresponds to a clutter class. Atoll uses the Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) path loss formula assigned to this clutter class to
evaluate path loss.
2nd step: This step depends on whether the ‘Add diffraction loss’ option is selected or not.
• If the ‘Add diffraction loss’ option is not selected, 1st step gives the final path loss result.
• If the ‘Add diffraction loss’ option is selected, Atoll proceeds as follows:
a. It extracts a geographic profile between the transmitter and the receiver using the radial calculation method.
b. It determines the largest obstacle along the profile in accordance with the Deygout method and evaluates losses
due to diffraction L Diffraction . For more information on the Deygout method, see "3 Knife-edge Deygout Method"
on page 82.
The final path loss is the sum of the path loss determined in 1st step and L Diffraction .
74
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
Shadow fading is computed in Atoll independent of the propagation model. For more information on the shadow fading
calculation, see "Shadow Fading Model" on page 85.
The graphs provided for 100 MHz are applicable to frequencies from 30 to 300 MHz, those for 600 MHz are applicable
to frequencies from 300 to 1000 MHz, and the graphs for 1000 MHz are applicable to frequencies from 1000 to
3000 MHz. The method for interpolation is described in the recommendations (Annex 5, § 6).
• Transmitter antenna heights, h 1 : 10, 20, 37.5, 75, 150, 300, 600, and 1200 m
For any values of h 1 from 10 to 3000 m, an interpolation or extrapolation from the appropriate two curves is used, as
described in the recommendations (Annex 5, § 4.1). For h 1 below 10 m, the extrapolation to be applied is given in
Annex 5, § 4.2. It is possible for the value of h 1 to be negative, in which case the method is given in Annex 5, § 4.3.
For land paths, the graphs represent field strength values for a receiver antenna height above ground, equal to the
representative height of the clutter around the receiver. The minimum value of the representative height of clutter is
10 m. For sea paths, the graphs represent field strength values for a receiver antenna height of 10 m.
For other values of receiver antenna height, a correction is applied according to the environment of the receiver. The
method for calculating this correction is given in Annex 5, § 9.
These recommendations are not valid for transmitter-receiver distances less than 1 km or greater than 1000 km. Therefore in
Atoll, the path loss between a transmitter and a receiver over less than 1 km is the same as the path loss over 1 km. Similarly,
the path loss between a transmitter and a receiver over more than 1000 km is the same as the path loss over 1000 km.
Moreover, these recommendations are not valid for transmitter antenna heights less than the average clutter height
surrounding the transmitter.
• The cold sea graphs are used for calculations over warm and cold sea both.
• The mixture of land and sea paths is not supported by Atoll.
Once f n1 and f n1 are known, along with the information about the percentage of time t and the type of path (land or sea),
the sets of graphs which will be used for the calculation are also known.
75
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
E Max = E FS + E SE = 106.9 – 20 × Log ( d ) + 2.38 { 1 – exp ( – d ⁄ 8.94 ) } × Log ( 50 ⁄ t ) for sea paths.
Where E FS is the free space field strength for 1 kW ERP, E SE is an enhancement for sea graphs.
• Sea paths
h 1 = Max ( 1, h a )
Here, all antenna heights (i.e., h 1 , h eff , and h a ) are in expressed in m. h a is the antenna height above ground and h eff is the
effective height of the transmitter antenna, which is its height over the average level of the ground between distances of
0.2 × d and d km from the transmitter in the direction of the receiver.
If the value of h 1 coincides with one of the eight heights for which the field strength graphs are provided, namely 10, 20, 37.5,
75, 150, 300, 600, and 1200 m, the required field strength is obtained directly from the corresponding graph. Otherwise:
• If 10 m < h 1 < 3000 m
The field strength is interpolated or extrapolated from field strengths obtained from two curves using the following
equation:
Log ( h 1 ⁄ h Low )
E h1 = E Low + ( E Up – E Low ) × -------------------------------------
-
Log ( h Up ⁄ h Low )
Where h Low = 600 m if h 1 > 1200 m , otherwise h Low is the nearest nominal effective height below h 1 ,
h Up = 1200 m if h 1 > 1200 m , otherwise h Up is the nearest nominal effective height above h 1 , E Low is the field
strength value for h Low at the required distance, and E Up is the field strength value for h Up at the required distance.
• If 0 m < h 1 < 10 m
• For land path if the transmitter-receiver distance is less than the smooth-Earth horizon distance
d H ( h 1 ) = 4.1 × h 1 , i.e., if d < 4.1 × h 1 ,
E h1 = E 10 ( d H ( 10 ) ) + E 10 ( d ) – E 10 ( d H ( h 1 ) ) , or
• For land path if the transmitter-receiver distance is greater than or equal to the smooth-Earth horizon distance
d H ( h 1 ) = 4.1 × h 1 , i.e., if d ≥ 4.1 × h 1 ,
Where E x ( y ) is the field strength value read for the transmitter-receiver distance of y from the graph available
for the transmitter antenna height of x.
76
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
If in the above equation, d H ( 10 ) + d – d H ( h 1 ) > 1000 km even though d ≤ 1000 km , the field strength is
determined from linear extrapolation for Log (distance) of the graph given by:
Log ( d ⁄ D Low )
E h1 = E Low + ( E Up – E Low ) × --------------------------------------
-
Log ( D Up ⁄ D Low )
Where D Low is penultimate tabulation distance (km), D Up is the final tabulation distance (km), E Low is the field
strength value for D Low , and E Up is the field strength value for D Up .
• For sea path, h 1 should not be less than 1 m. This calculation requires the distance at which the path has 0.6 of
the first Fresnel zone just unobstructed by the sea surface. This distance is given by:
D h1 = D 0.6 ( f, h 1, ( h 2 = 10 m ) ) (km)
Df × Dh
Where D 0.6 = Max 0.001, ----------------- (km) with D f = 0.0000389 × f × h 1 × h 2 (frequency-dependent term), and
D f + D h
If d > D h1 the 0.6 Fresnel clearance distance for the sea path where the transmitter antenna height is 20 m is also
calculated as:
D 20 = D 0.6 ( f, ( h 1 = 20 m ), ( h 2 = 10 m ) ) (km)
Once D h1 and D 20 are known, the field strength for the required distance is given by:
E Max for d ≤ D h1
Log ( d ⁄ D h1 )
E h1 = E D + ( E D – E D ) × ----------------------------------
- for D h1 < d < D 20
h1 20 h1 Log ( D 20 ⁄ D h1 )
E' × ( 1 – F S ) + E'' × F S for d ≥ D 20
Where E Max is the maximum field strength at the required distance as calculated in "Step 2: Calculation of
Maximum Field Strength" on page 76, E D is E Max for d = D h1 ,
h1
Log ( h1 ⁄ 10 ) Log ( h1 ⁄ 10 )
ED = E 10 ( D 20 ) + ( E 20 ( D 20 ) – E 10 ( D 20 ) ) × ------------------------------- , E' = E 10 ( d ) + ( E 20 ( d ) – E 10 ( d ) ) × ------------------------------- , and
20 Log ( 20 ⁄ 10 ) Log ( 20 ⁄ 10 )
E'' is the field strength calculated as described for land paths. E 10 ( y ) and E 20 ( y ) are field strengths interpolated
for distance y and h 1 = 10 m and 20 m , respectively, and F S = ( d – D 20 ) ⁄ d .
• If h 1 < 0 m
A correction is applied to the field strength, E h1 , calculated in the above description in order to take into account the
diffraction and tropospheric scattering. This correction is the maximum of the diffraction correction,, and
tropospheric scattering correction, .
2
Where C h1d = 6.03 – J ( ν ) with J ( ν ) = [ 6.9 + 20 × Log ( ( ν – 0.1 ) + 1 + ν – 0.1 ) ] and ν = K ν × θ eff2 ,
–h1
θ eff2 = arc tan -----------
- , and K ν is 1.35 for 100 MHz, 3.31 for 600 MHz, 6.00 for 2000 MHz.
9000
θe 180 × d-
C h1t = 30 × Log ----------------------
- with θ e = -------------------- , a = 6370 km (radius of the Earth), and k = 4 ⁄ 3 is the
θ e + θ eff2 a×π×k
effective Earth radius factor for mean refractivity conditions.
In the field strength graphs in the recommendations, the field strength is plotted against distance from 1 km to 1000 km. The
distance values for which field strengths are tabulated are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25,
30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300,
325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 475, 500, 525, 550, 575, 600, 625, 650, 675, 700, 725, 750, 775, 800, 825, 850, 875, 900, 925,
950, 975, 1000. If the transmitter-receiver distance is a value from this list, then interpolation of field strength is not required
and the field strength can be directly read from the graphs.
77
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
If the transmitter-receiver distance does not coincide with the list of distances for which the field strengths are accurately
available from the graphs, the field strength are linearly interpolated or extrapolated for the logarithm of the distance using
the following equation:
Log ( d ⁄ d Low )
E d = E Low + ( E Up – E Low ) × -------------------------------------
-
Log ( d Up ⁄ d Low )
Where d Low is the lower value of the nearest tabulated distance to d , d Up is the higher value of the nearest tabulated
distance to d , E Low is the field strength value for d Low , and E Up is the field strength value for d Up .
The field strength at the transmission frequency is interpolated from the graphs available for the upper and lower nominal
frequencies as follows:
Log ( f ⁄ fLow )
E f = E Low + ( E Up – E Low ) × -----------------------------------
Log ( f Up ⁄ f Low )
Where f Low is the lower nominal frequency (100 MHz if f < 600 MHz, 600 MHz otherwise), f Up is the higher nominal
frequency (600 MHz if f < 600 MHz, 2000 MHz otherwise), E Low is the field strength value for f Low , and E Up is the field
strength value for f Up .
In the case of transmission frequencies below 100 MHz or above 2000 MHz, the field strength values are extrapolated from
the two nearer nominal frequency values. The above equation is used for all land paths and sea paths.
The receiver antenna height correction depends on the type of path and clutter in which the receiver is located. The field
strength values given by the graphs for land paths are for a reference receiver antenna at a height, R (m), representative of
the height of the clutter surrounding the receiver, subject to a minimum height value of 10 m. Examples of reference heights
are 20 m for an urban area, 30 m for a dense urban area, and 10 m for a suburban area. For sea paths the notional value of R
is 10 m.
For land paths, the elevation angle of the arriving ray is taken into account by calculating a modified representative clutter
( 1000 × d × R – 15 × h 1 )
height R' , given by R' = Max 1, ----------------------------------------------------------- .
1000 × d – 15
R' – h 2
With J ( ν ) = [ 6.9 + 20 × Log ( ( ν – 0.1 ) + 1 + ν – 0.1 ) ] and ν = 0.0108 × f × ( R' – h 2 ) × arc tan --------------- .
2
27
78
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
D f × D h
d 10 = D 0.6 ( f, h 1, ( h 2 = 10 m ) ) and d h2 = D 0.6 ( f, h 1, h 2 ) (km), respectively. Here D 0.6 = Max 0.001, ----------------
- as
D f + D h
explained earlier.
h2
• If h 2 > 10 m , C Receiver = ( 3.2 + 6.2 × Log ( f ) ) × Log ------
10
h2
• If h 2 < 10 m and d > d 10 , C Receiver = ( 3.2 + 6.2 × Log ( f ) ) × Log ------
10
• If h 2 < 10 m and d < d 10 and d < d h2 , C Receiver = 0
h2 Log ( d ⁄ d h2 )
• If h 2 < 10 m and d < d 10 and d > d h2 , C Receiver = ( 3.2 + 6.2 × Log ( f ) ) × Log ------ × ----------------------------------
10 Log ( d 10 ⁄ d h2 )
This correction is only applied when the path loss is to be calculated over land paths, over a transmitter-receiver distance less
than 15 km, in urban and suburban zones. This correction takes into account the presence of buildings in these zones. The
buildings are assumed to be of uniform height.
The correction represents a reduction in the field strength due to building clutter. It is added to the field strength and is given
by:
C Building = – 3.3 ( Log ( f ) ) ( 1 – 0.85 × Log ( d ) ) ( 1 – 0.46 × Log ( 1 + h a – R ) )
Where h a is the antenna height above the ground, and R is the clutter height of the clutter class where the receiver is located.
This correction is only applied when d < 15 km and h 1 – R < 150 m .
This correction is only applied when the path loss is to be calculated over land paths, and over a transmitter-receiver distance
less than 16 km. This correction gives more precise field strength prediction over small reception areas. The correction is
added to the field strength and is given by:
C Clearance = J ( ν' ) – J ( ν )
2
Where J ( ν ) = [ 6.9 + 20 × Log ( ( ν – 0.1 ) + 1 + ν – 0.1 ) ] , ν' = 0.036 × f , and ν = 0.065 × θ Clearance × f
• θ : The elevation angle of the line from the receiver which just clears all terrain obstructions in the direction of the
transmitter over a distance of up to 16 km but not going beyond the transmitter.
h 1S – h 2S
• θ Ref : The reference angle, θ Ref = arc tan --------------------
- .
1000 × d
Where h 1S and h 2S are the heights of the transmitter and the receiver above sea level, respectively.
The resulting field strength is given by E = Min ( E Calc, E Max ) , from which the path loss (basic transmission loss, L B ) is
calculated as follows:
L B = 139 – E + 20 × Log ( f )
79
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
The Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model requires detailed information about the environment, such as widths of the streets
where the receiver is located, the angles formed by the street axes and the directions of the incident waves, heights of the
buildings close to the receiver, etc. The path loss formula for the Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model is [1]:
H 2
L Model = 100 – 7.1 × Log ( W ) + 0.023 × ϕ + 1.4 × Log ( h s ) + 6.1 × Log ( H 1 ) – 24.37 – 3.7 × -------- × Log ( h b ) +
h b0
13 × ( Log ( f ) – 3.23 )
[ 43.2 – 3.1 × Log ( h b ) ] × Log ( d ) + 20 × Log ( f ) + e
Where,
• W is the width (in meters) of the streets where the receiver is located
• ϕ is the angle (in degrees) formed by the street axes and the direction of the incident wave
• hs is the height (in meters) of the buildings close to the receiver
• H1 is the average height (in meters) of the buildings close to the receiver
• hb is the height (in meters) of the transmitter antenna with respect to the observer
• hb0 is the height (in meters) of the transmitter antenna with respect to the ground level
• H is the average height (in meters) of the buildings close to the base station
• d is the separation (in kilometres) between the transmitter and the receiver
• f is the frequency (in MHz)
The Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model is valid for:
5m <W< 50 m
0° <ϕ < 90°
5m < hs < 80 m
5m < H1 < 50 m
20 m < hb < 100 m
0.5 km <d< 10 km
450 MHz <f< 2200 MHz
h b0 ≥ H
Studies [2] have shown that the Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model can be extended to frequencies higher than 3 GHz, which
also allows a simplification in terms of the input required by the model.
The path loss formula for the extended Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model is:
L Model = 54 + 40 × Log ( d ) – 30 × Log ( h b ) + 21 × Log ( f ) + a
H hm
a = a ( H 0 ) + a ( W ) + a ( h m ) = 11 × Log -----0- – 7.1 × Log ------ – 5 × Log ------
W -
20 20 1.5
• W is the width (in meters) of the streets where the receiver is located
• H0 (= hs = H1) is the height (in meters) of the buildings close to the receiver
• hb (= hb0) is the height (in meters) of the transmitter antenna with respect to the ground
• hm is the height (in meters) of the receiver antenna
• H is the average height (in meters) of the buildings close to the base station
• d is the separation (in metres) between the transmitter and the receiver
• f is the frequency (in GHz)
The extended Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model is valid for:
5m <W< 50 m
10 m < H0 < 30 m
10 m < hb < 100 m
0.1 km <d< 3 km
0.8 GHz <f< 8 GHz
1.5 m < hm < 5m
80
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
Studies also show that above 3 GHz, the path loss predicted by the extended model is almost independant of the input
parameters such as street widths and angles. Therefore, the extended Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model can be simplified
to the extended Sakagami propagation model:
L Model = 54 + 40 × Log ( d ) – 30 × Log ( h b ) + 21 × Log ( f ) – 5 × Log ( h m )
The path loss calculation formula of the Sakagami extended propagation model resembles the formula of the Standard
Propagation Model. In Atoll, this model is in fact a copy of the Standard Propagation Model with the following values assigned
to the K coefficients:
65.4
K1
(calculated for 3.5 GHz)
K2 40
K3 -30
K4 0
K5 0
K6 0
K7 -5
For more information on the Standard Propagation Model, see "Standard Propagation Model (SPM)" on page 60.
References:
• [1] Manuel F. Catedra, Jesus Perez-Arriaga, "Cell Planning for Wireless
Communications," Artech House Publishers, 1999.
• [2] Koshiro Kitao, Shinichi Ichitsubo, "Path Loss Prediction Formula for Urban and
Suburban Areas for 4G Systems," IEEE, 2006.
where,
f is the frequency in MHz,
d is the Tx-Rx distance in km,
Free space loss is stated in dB.
2.13 Diffraction
The calculation of diffraction is based on ITU 526-5 recommendations. General method for one or more obstacles (knife-edge
diffraction) is used to evaluate diffraction losses (Diffraction loss in dB). Four construction modes are implemented in Atoll.
All of them are based on this same physical principle presented hereafter, but differ in the way they consider one or several
obstacles. Calculations take the earth curvature into account through the effective Earth radius concept (K factor=1.333).
81
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
c0 ⋅ n ⋅ d1 ⋅ d2
R = --------------------------------
f ⋅ ( d1 + d2 )
where,
n is the Fresnel zone index,
h
We have: ν = ---
r
where,
R
r = -------
2
h is the obstruction height (height from the obstacle top to the Tx-Rx axis).
Hence,
2
For 1 knife-edge method, if ν ≥ – 0.7 , J ( ν ) = 6.9 + 20 ⋅ log ( ( ν – 0.1 ) + 1 + ( ν – 0.1 ) )
Else, J ( ν ) = 0
82
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
1 Obstacle
A straight line between transmitter and receiver is drawn and the height of the obstacle above the Tx-Rx axis, hi, is calculated.
The obstruction position, di, is also recorded. νi are evaluated from these data. The point with the highest ν value is termed
the principal edge, p, and the corresponding loss is J(νp).
Therefore, we have
DiffractionLoss = J ( ν P )
3 Obstacles
Then, the main edge (point p) is considered as a secondary transmitter or receiver. Therefore, the profile is divided in two
parts: one half profile, between the transmitter and the knife-edge section, another half, constituted by the knife-edge-
receiver section.
The same procedure is repeated on each half profile to determine the edge with the higher ν. The two obstacles found, (points
t and r), are called ‘secondary edges’. Losses induced by the secondary edges, J(νt) and J(νr), are then calculated.
Once the edge hierarchy is determined, the total loss is evaluated by adding all the intermediary losses obtained.
Therefore, if ν P > 0
we have DiffractionLoss = J ( ν P ) + J ( ν t ) + J ( ν r )
83
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
In case of ITU 526-5 and WLL propagation models, Diffraction loss term is determined as
follows:
• If ν P > – 0.78 , we have DiffractionLoss = J ( ν P ) + ( J ( ν t ) + J ( ν r ) ) ⋅ t
• Otherwise DiffractionLoss = 0
J ( νP )
Here, t = min -----------
-, 1
6
Therefore, we have
DiffractionLoss = J ( ν P ) + J ( ν t ) + J ( ν r )
we have DiffractionLoss = J ( ν P ) + J ( ν t ) + J ( ν r ) + C
Otherwise DiffractionLoss = J ( ν P ) + C
In case of ITU 526-5 propagation model, Diffraction loss term is determined as follows:
• If ν P > – 0.78 , we have DiffractionLoss = J ( ν P ) + t ⋅ ( J ( ν t ) + J ( ν r ) + C )
• Otherwise DiffractionLoss = 0
J ( νP )
Here, t = min -----------
-, 1 and C = 8.0 + 0.04d with d = distance stated in km between
6
the transmitter and the receiver.
84
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
intersection point between the two horizon lines above the Tx-Rx axis, hh, is calculated. The position dh is recorded and then,
from these values, νh and J(νh) are evaluated using the same previous formulas.
Therefore, we have
DiffractionLoss = J ( ν h )
85
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
Different clutter types have different shadowing effects. Therefore, each clutter type in Atoll can have a different standard
deviation representing its shadowing characteristics. For different standard deviations, the shape of the Gaussian distribution
curve remains similar, as shown in Figure 2.17 on page 85.
The accuracy of this model depends upon:
• The suitability of the range of standard deviation used for each clutter class,
• The definition (bin size) of the digital map,
• How up-to-date the digital map is,
• The number of clutter classes,
• The accuracy of assignment of clutter classes.
Shadowing is applied to the predicted path loss differently depending on the technology, and whether it is applied to
predictions or simulations. The following sections explain how shadowing margins are calculated and applied to different
technology documents.
Shadowing margins are calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability. The cell edge coverage probability is the
probability of coverage at a pixel located at the cell edge, and corresponds to the reliability of coverage that you are planning
to achieve at the cell edge. For example, a cell edge coverage probability of 75 % means that the users located at the cell edge
will receive adequate signal level during 75 % of the time. Therefore, a coverage prediction with a cell edge coverage
probability of x % means that the signal level predicted on each pixel is reliable x % of the time, and the overall predicted
coverage area is reliable at least x % of the time.
References:
• [1] Saunders S. “Antennas and propagation for Wireless Communication Systems”
pp. 180-198
• [2] Holma H., Toskala A. “WCDMA for UMTS”
• [3] Jhong S., Leonard M. “CDMA systems engineering handbook” pp. 309-315, 1051-
1053”
• [4] Remy J.G., Cueugnet J., Siben C. “Systèmes de radiocommunications avec les
mobiles” pp. 309-310
• [5] Laiho J., Wacker A., Novosad T. “Radio network planning and optimisation for
UMTS” pp. 80-81
The shadowing margins are calculated as explained in "Shadowing Margin Calculation in Predictions" on page 90, and applied
to signal level or C/I as explained below.
• Signal Level-Based Predictions
Signal level-based predictions include coverage predictions (Coverage by Transmitter, Coverage by Signal Level, and
Overlapping Zones) and calculations in point analysis tabs (Profile and Reception) that require calculation of the
received signal level only, and do not depend on interference.
In these calculations (signal level calculations), a shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – model ) is applied to the received
signal level calculated for each pixel. The shadowing margin is calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability,
and depends on the model standard deviation ( σ model in dB) associated to the clutter class where the receiver is
located.
• Interference-Based Predictions
Interference-based predictions include coverage predictions (Coverage by C/I Level, Interfered Zones, Coverage by
GPRS/EDGE Coding Scheme, RLC/MAC Throughout/Timeslot, Application Throughput/Timeslot, Circuit Quality
Indicator Analysis) and calculations in point analysis window’s Interference tab that require calculation of the received
signal level and interference received from other base stations.
In these calculations, ( C ⁄ I calculations), the shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – C ⁄ I ) is applied to the ratio of the carrier
power (C) and the interfering signal levels (I) received from the interfering base stations. This shadowing margin is
calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability and depends on the C/I standard deviation ( σ C ⁄ I in dB) associated
to the clutter class where the receiver is located.
The shadowing margins are calculated as explained in "Shadowing Margin Calculation in Predictions" on page 90 and
"Shadowing Margin Calculation in Monte-Carlo Simulations" on page 92, and applied to signal level, Ec/I0, or Eb/Nt as
explained below.
• Signal Level-Based Predictions
86
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
Signal level-based predictions include coverage predictions (Coverage by Transmitter, Coverage by Signal Level, and
Overlapping Zones) and calculations in point analysis tabs (Profile and Reception) that require calculation of the
received signal level only, and do not depend on interference.
In these calculations (signal level calculations), a shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – model ) is applied to the received
signal level calculated for each pixel. The shadowing margin is calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability,
and depends on the model standard deviation ( σ model in dB) associated to the clutter class where the receiver is
located.
• Interference+noise-Based Predictions
Interference+noise-based predictions include coverage predictions (Pilot Quality Analysis, Downlink Total Noise,
Service Area Analyses, Handoff Status, etc.) and point analysis (AS Analysis tab) that require calculation of the received
signal level and interference and noise received from other base stations.
TD-SCDMA Documents
The shadowing margins are calculated as explained in "Shadowing Margin Calculation in Predictions" on page 90 and
"Shadowing Margin Calculation in Monte-Carlo Simulations" on page 92, and applied to signal level or interference+noise
predictions as explained below.
• Signal Level-Based Predictions
Signal level-based predictions include coverage predictions (Best Server and RSCP P-CCPCH Coverages, P-CCPCG
Pollution Analysis, Baton Handover Coverage, DwPCH and UpPCH Coverages, Cell to Cell Interference, and Scrambling
Code Interference) and calculations in point analysis tabs (Profile and Reception) that require calculation of the
received signal level only, and do not depend on interference.
In these calculations (signal level calculations), a shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – model ) is applied to the received
signal level calculated for each pixel. The shadowing margin is calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability,
and depends on the model standard deviation ( σ model in dB) associated to the clutter class where the receiver is
located.
• Interference+noise-Based Predictions
Interference+noise-based predictions include coverage predictions (P-CCPCH Eb/Nt and C/I Coverages, Service Area
Analsyses for downlink and uplink Eb/Nt and C/I, etc.) that require calculation of the received signal level and
interference received from other base stations.
M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) ) are applied to Eb/Nt. These shadowing margins are calculated for a given cell edge coverage
UL
87
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
WiMAX Documents
The shadowing margins are calculated as explained in "Shadowing Margin Calculation in Predictions" on page 90 and
"Shadowing Margin Calculation in Monte-Carlo Simulations" on page 92 , and applied to signal level or C/(I+N) as explained
below.
• Signal Level-Based Predictions
Signal level-based predictions include coverage predictions (Coverage by Transmitter, Coverage by Signal Level, and
Overlapping Zones) and calculations in point analysis tabs (Profile and Reception) that require calculation of the
received signal level only, and do not depend on interference.
In these calculations (signal level calculations), a shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – model ) is applied to the received
signal level calculated for each pixel. The shadowing margin is calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability,
and depends on the model standard deviation ( σ model in dB) associated to the clutter class where the receiver is
located.
• Interference+noise-Based Predictions
Interference-based predictions include coverage predictions (Coverage by C/(I+N) Level, Coverage by Bearer,
Coverage by Throughput, etc.) that require calculation of the received signal level and interference.
In these calculations, (C/(I+N) calculations), in addition to the shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – model ) applied to the
received signal level calculated for each pixel, the ratio M Shadowing – model – M Shadowing – C ⁄ I is applied to the
interfering signal levels (I). M Shadowing – C ⁄ I is calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability and depends on the
C/I standard deviation ( σ C ⁄ I in dB) associated to the clutter class where the receiver is located.
The reason why the ratio M Shadowing – model – M Shadowing – C ⁄ I is used can be understood from the following
derivation (linear, not it dB):
Inputs
C = mC × CP
C C
--- = m C ⁄ I × ----P-
I IP
C mC × CP mC
I = ----------------------- = ---------------------- -×I
- = ----------
CP CP mC ⁄ I P
m C ⁄ I × ----- m C ⁄ I × -----
IP IP
mC
Where ----------- corresponds to M Shadowing – model – M Shadowing – C ⁄ I in dB.
mC ⁄ I
C - mC × CP
--------------- = -------------------------------------
(I + N) m
----------
C
m C ⁄ I × P + N
- I
• Monte-Carlo Simulations
88
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
Random values for shadowing margins are calculated for each transmitter-receiver link and applied to the predicted
signal level. A shadowing margin for each transmitter-receiver link in each simulation is obtained by taking a random
value from the probability density distribution for the appropriate clutter class. The probability distribution is a log-
normal distribution as explained above.
LTE Documents
The shadowing margins are calculated as explained in "Shadowing Margin Calculation in Predictions" on page 90 and
"Shadowing Margin Calculation in Monte-Carlo Simulations" on page 92 , and applied to signal level or C/(I+N) as explained
below.
• Signal Level-Based Predictions
Signal level-based predictions include coverage predictions (Coverage by Transmitter, Coverage by Signal Level, and
Overlapping Zones) and calculations in point analysis tabs (Profile and Reception) that require calculation of the
received signal level only, and do not depend on interference.
In these calculations (signal level calculations), a shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – model ) is applied to the signal level
calculated for each pixel. The shadowing margin is calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability, and depends
on the model standard deviation ( σ model in dB) associated to the clutter class where the receiver is located.
• Interference+noise-Based Predictions
Interference-based predictions include coverage predictions (Coverage by C/(I+N) Level, Coverage by Bearer,
Coverage by Throughput, etc.) that require calculation of the received signal level and received interference.
In these calculations, (C/(I+N) calculations), in addition to the shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – model ) applied to the
signal level calculated for each pixel, the ratio M Shadowing – model – M Shadowing – C ⁄ I is applied to the interfering signal
levels (I). M Shadowing – C ⁄ I is calculated for a given cell edge coverage probability and depends on the C/I standard
deviation ( σ C ⁄ I in dB) associated to the clutter class where the receiver is located.
The reason why the ratio M Shadowing – model – M Shadowing – C ⁄ I is used can be understood from the following
derivation (linear, not it dB):
Inputs
C = mC × CP
C C
--- = m C ⁄ I × ----P-
I IP
C mC × CP mC
I = ----------------------- = ---------------------- -×I
- = ----------
CP CP mC ⁄ I P
mC ⁄ I × ----- mC ⁄ I × ----
-
IP IP
mC
Where ----------- corresponds to M Shadowing – model – M Shadowing – C ⁄ I in dB.
mC ⁄ I
89
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
C - mC × CP
--------------- = -------------------------------------
(I + N) mC
----------
m C ⁄ I × P + N
- I
• Monte-Carlo Simulations
Random values for shadowing margins are calculated for each transmitter-receiver link and applied to the predicted
signal level. A shadowing margin for each transmitter-receiver link in each simulation is obtained by taking a random
value from the probability density distribution for the appropriate clutter class. The probability distribution is a log-
normal distribution as explained above.
σ Ec ⁄ Io M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io Ec/I0
UMTS HSPA
σ ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) Eb/Nt (DL)
DL DL
σ Ec ⁄ Io M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io Ec/I0
CDMA2000
σ ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) Eb/Nt (DL)
DL DL
where,
• Lpath is the predicted path loss,
90
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
∞ 2
x
– -----
dx = Q --------
1 z
2
P L ( x > z ) = ---------- × e
2π σ dB
z
----------
σ dB
where,
• P rec is the signal level predicted at the receiver. P rec = P' Tx – L path – M Shadowing
• P' Tx = EIRP + G antRx – L Rx
• EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the transmitter.
• L Rx are receiver losses.
• G antRx is the receiver antenna gain.
A lookup table is used for mapping the values of Q vs. a set of cell edge coverage probabilities.
M Shadowing
Figure 2.18: Normalised Margin M arg in = --------------------------
-
σ dB
In interference-based predictions, where signal to noise ratio is calculated, the shadowing margin is only applied to the signal
from the interfered transmitter (C). We consider that the interference value is not altered by the shadowing margin. Random
variations also exist in the interfering signals, but taking only the average interference gives accurate results. [3] explains how
a certain level of interference is maintained by congestion control in CDMA-based networks.
91
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
Here, ξ is a zero mean gaussian random variable G ( 0, σ dB ) representing variation due to shadowing. It can be expressed as
the sum of two uncorrelated zero mean gaussian random variables, ξ L and ξ P . ξ L models the error related to the receiver’s
location (surrounding environment), and remains the same for all links between the receiver and the base stations from which
it is receiving signals. ξ P models the error related to the path between the transmitter and the receiver.
2
ξ 2 = ξ L + ξ P for link 2
i
Standard deviations of ξ L ( σ L ) and ξ P ( σ P ) can be calculated from ξ i , the model standard deviation ( σ model ) , and the
correlation coefficient ( ρ ) between ξ 1 and ξ 2 .
2 2 2
σ model = σ L + σ P
2
σL
ρ = ---------------
2
-
σ model
Therefore,
2 2
σ P = σ model × ( 1 – ρ )
2 2
σ L = σ model × ρ
σ model σ model
σ L = ---------------
- and σ P = ---------------
-
2 2
Receiver
Therefore, to model shadowing error common to all the signals received at a receiver ( E Shadowing – model ), values are
randomly generated for each receiver. These values have a zero-mean gaussian distribution with a standard deviation of
σ model
- , where ( σ model ) is the model standard deviation associated with the receiver’s clutter class.
---------------
2
Next, Atoll generates another random value for each transmitter-receiver pair. This values represents the shadowing error
Path
not related to the location of the receiver ( E Shadowing – model ). These values also have a zero-mean gaussian distribution with
σ model
a standard deviation ---------------
- .
2
So, we have:
Receiver Path
E Shadowing – model = E Shadowing – model + E Shadowing – model
Random shadowing error has its mean value at zero. Hence, this shadowing modelling method has no impact on the simulated
network load. On the other hand, as shadowing errors on the transmitter-receiver links are uncorrelated, the method
influences the calculated macro-diversity gain in case the mobile is in soft handover.
92
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
The calculation and use of macro-diversity gains can be disabled through the Atoll.ini file.
For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
ξ is a zero mean gaussian random variable G ( 0, σ dB ) representing variation due to shadowing. It can be expressed as the
sum of two uncorrelated zero mean gaussian random variables, ξ L and ξ P . ξ L models error related to the receiver local
environment; it is the same whichever the link. ξ P models error related to the path between transmitter and receiver.
2
ξ 2 = ξ L + ξ P for the link 2
Knowing ξ i , the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation ( σ ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) ) and the correlation coefficient ρ between ξ 1 and ξ 2 , we can
UL
calculate standard deviations of ξ L ( σ L ) and ξ P ( σ P ) (assuming all ξ P have the same standard deviations).
We have:
2 2 2
σ ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) = σL + σP
UL
2
σL
ρ = -----------------------
2
-
σ ( Eb ⁄ Nt )
UL
Therefore,
2 2
σ P = σ ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) × (1 – ρ)
UL
2 2
σ L = σ ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) ×ρ
UL
In technologies supporting soft handoff (UMTS and CDMA2000), cell is interference limited. As for one link, to ensure a
required cell edge coverage probability R L for the prediction, we add to each link budget a shadowing margin,
2signals
M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) .
UL
Prediction reliability in order to have Eb/Nt higher or equal to Eb/Nt from the best server can be expressed as:
Cd
-------1 = P' Tx1 – L 1 – N 1 ≥ CI 1pred ⇔ ξ 1 ≤ P' Tx1 – L path – N 1 – CI 1pred
N1 1
or
Cd
-------2 = P' Tx2 – L 2 – N 2 ≥ CI 1pred ⇔ ξ 2 ≤ P' Tx2 – L path – N 2 – CI 1pred
N2 2
where
i
CI pred is the quality level (signal to noise ratio) predicted at the receiver for link i.
93
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
2signals i
M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) = P' Txi – L path – N i – CI pred
UL i
and
2 1 2
Δ 1 = CI pred – CI pred
2
Δ 1 is the minimum needed margin on each link.
Therefore, the probability of having a quality at least equal to the best predicted one is:
noMRC 2signals Cd 1
Cd
1
RL ( M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) ) = 1 – P L1, L2 -------1 < CI pred, -------2 < CI pred
UL 1N N 2
1 2
We can express it using ξ L , ξ P and ξ P
Pξ
ξ >
2signals
M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) , ξ 2 > M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt )
2signals
– Δ 1 ξ L = Δ L
2
1,ξ 2 1 UL UL
1 2signals 2 2signals 2
= Pξ ( ΔL ) × P 1 2 ( ξP > M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) – Δ L, ξ P > M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) – Δ1 – ΔL )
L ξ P, ξ P UL UL
Pξ
ξ >
2signals
M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) , ξ 2 > M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt )
2signals
– Δ 1 ξ L = Δ L
2
1, ξ 2 1 UL UL
1 2signals 2 2signals 2
= P ξ ( Δ L ) × P ξ ( Δ P > M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) – Δ L ) ×P ξ ( Δ P > M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) –Δ1 – Δ L )
L P UL P UL
noMRC 2signals
RL ( M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) )
UL
∞
= 1 – P ξ ( Δ L ) × P ξ ( Δ P > M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) – Δ L ) × P ξ ( Δ P > M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) – Δ 1 – Δ L ) dΔ L
1 2signals 2 2signals 2
L P UL P UL
–∞
i 2signals
P ξ ( Δ P > M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) – ΔL )
P UL
2
∞
–x
---------- 2signals
2σ P
2
M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) UL – Δ L
= -----------------
1
σ 2π e dx = Q ----------------------------------------------------------------
σP
P M 2signals
– Δ L
Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt )
UL
Then, we have:
noMRC 2signals
RL ( M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) )
UL
∞ 2signals 2signals 2
M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt )UL – Δ L M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt )UL – Δ 1 – Δ L
= 1 – P ξ ( Δ L ) × Q ---------------------------------------------------------------- × Q ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- dΔ L
L σP σP
–∞
If we introduce user defined standard deviation ( σ ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) ) and correlation coefficient ( ρ ) , and consider that P ξ is a
UL L
Gaussian pdf:
noMRC 2signals
RL ( M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) )
UL
2
∞ –xL
M 2signals M 2signals 2
--------- Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) UL – x L σ ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) UL ρ Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) UL – x L σ ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) UL ρ – Δ 1
× Q ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- × Q ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ dx L
1
2
= 1 – ---------- e
2π σ ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) 1–ρ σ ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) 1–ρ
–∞ UL UL
94
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
We can generalize the previous expression to n signals (n is the number of available signals - Atoll may consider up to 3
signals):
noMRC nsignals
RL ( M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) )
UL
2
∞ –xL nsignals
M Shadowing nsignals 2
--------- – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) UL – x L σ ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) UL ρ M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) UL – x L σ ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) UL ρ – Δ 1
1
2
= 1 – ---------- e × Q ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- × Q ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ dx L
2π σ ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) 1–ρ σ ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) 1–ρ
–∞ UL UL
The case where softer handoff occurs (two signals from co-site cells) is equivalent to the one signal case. The Softer/soft case
is equivalent to the two signals case. For the path associated with the softer recombination, we will use combined SNR to
calculate the availability of the link.
There is currently no agreed model for predicting correlation coefficient ( ρ ) between ξ 1 and ξ 2 . Two key variables influence
correlation:
• The angle between the two signals. If this angle is small, correlation is high.
• The relative values of the two signal lengths. If angle is 0 and lengths are the same, correlation is zero. Correlation is
different from zero when path lengths differ.
A simple model has been found [1]:
ϕT γ
ρ = -----
D1
------- when φ T ≤ φ ≤ π
ϕ D2
ϕ T is a function of the mean size of obstacles near the receiver and γ is also linked to the receiver environment.
In a normal handover status, assuming a hexagonal design for sites, ϕ is close to π (+/- π/3) and D1/D2 is close to 1.
π
In [1,5], ρ = 0.5 when γ = 0.3 and ϕ T = ------ .
10
ξ is a zero mean gaussian random variable G ( 0, σ dB ) representing variation due to shadowing. It can be expressed as the
sum of two uncorrelated zero mean gaussian random variables, ξ L and ξ P . ξ L models the error related to the receiver local
environment, which is the same for all links. ξ P models the error related to the path between the transmitter and the
receiver.
Therefore, in case of two links, we have:
95
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
1
ξ 1 = ξ L + ξ P for the link 1
2
ξ 2 = ξ L + ξ P for the link 2
Knowing ξ i , the Ec/Io standard deviation ( σ Ec ⁄ I o ) and the correlation coefficient ρ between ξ 1 and ξ 2 , we can calculate
standard deviations of ξ L ( σ L ) and ξ P ( σ P ) (assuming all ξ P have the same standard deviations).
We have:
2 2 2
σ Ec ⁄ I o = σ L + σ P
2
σL
ρ = -------------
2
-
σ Ec ⁄ I o
Therefore,
2 2
σ P = σ Ec ⁄ I o × ( 1 – ρ )
2 2
σ L = σ Ec ⁄ I o × ρ
2 Available Signals
In technologies supporting soft handoff (UMTS and CDMA2000) cells are interference limited. As for one link, to ensure a
2signals
required cell edge coverage probability R L for the prediction, we add a shadowing margin, M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io , to each link
budget.
Ec 1 Ec 1 Ec 1
-------- = P pilot – L 1 – Io ≥ ----- ⇔ ξ 1 ≤ P pilot – L m – Io – -----
Io 1 Io pred 1 1 Io pred
Or
Ec 2 Ec 1 Ec 1
-------- = P pilot – L 2 – Io ≥ ----- ⇔ ξ 2 ≤ P pilot – L m – Io – -----
Io 2 Io pred 2 2 Io pred
We note:
1
M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io = P pilot – L m – Io – -----
2signals Ec
i i Io pred
Ec 1 Ec 2
Δ 1 = ----- – -----
2
Io pred Io pred
2
Δ 1 is the minimum needed margin on each link.
Therefore, probability of having a quality at least equal to the best predicted one is:
Ec Ec 1 Ec Ec 1
( M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io ) = 1 – P L1, L2 -------1- < ----- , -------2- < -----
noMRC 2signals
RL
Io Io pred Io Io pred
1 2
We can express it by using ξ L , ξ P and ξ P
2signals 2signals 2
P ξ1, ξ2 ( ξ 1 > M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io, ξ 2 > M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io – Δ 1 ξ L = Δ L )
1 2signals 2 2signals 2
= Pξ ( ΔL ) × P 1 2 ( ξP > M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io – Δ L, ξ P > M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io – Δ 1– Δ L )
L ξ P, ξ P
2signals 2signals 2
P ξ1, ξ2 ( ξ 1 > M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io, ξ 2 > M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io – Δ 1 ξ L = Δ L)
1 2signals 2 2signals 2
= P ξ ( Δ L ) × P ξ ( Δ P > M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io – Δ L ) × P ξ ( Δ P > M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io – Δ 1 – Δ L )
L P P
96
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
noMRC 2signals
RL ( M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io )
∞
2
–x -
∞ ---------
2 2signals
1 2σ M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io – Δ L
i 2signals P
P ξ ( Δ P > M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io – Δ L ) = ----------------- e dx = Q -----------------------------------------------------
-
P σ P 2π σP
γ SHO – Δ L
Then, we have:
∞ 2signals 2signals 2
M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io – Δ L M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io – Δ 1 – Δ L
noMRC 2signals
RL ( M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io ) = 1– P ξ ( Δ L ) × Q ------------------------------------------------------ × Q ------------------------------------------------------------------ dΔ L
L σ P σP
–∞
If we introduce a user defined Ec/Io standard deviation ( σ ) and a correlation coefficient ( ρ ) and consider that P ξ is a
L
Gaussian pdf:
noMRC 2signals
RL ( M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io )
2
∞ –xL
2signals 2signals 2
1
--------- M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io – x L σ Ec ⁄ I o ρ M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io – Δ 1 – x L σ Ec ⁄ I o ρ
2
= 1 – ---------- e × Q ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- × Q ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- dx L
2π σ Ec ⁄ I o 1 – ρ σ Ec ⁄ I o 1 – ρ
–∞
n Available Signals
We can generalize the previous expression for n signals (n is the number of available signals - Atoll may consider up to 3
signals):
noMRC nsignals
RL ( M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io )
2
∞ –xL
nsignals n nsignals i
1
--------- M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io – x L σ Ec ⁄ I o ρ M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io – Δ 1 – x L σ Ec ⁄ I o ρ
∏
2
= 1 – ---------- e × Q ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
- x Q ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- dx L
2π σ Ec ⁄ I o 1 – ρ σ Ec ⁄ I o 1 – ρ
–∞ i=2
2
Δ 1 =1 dB
2
Δ 1 =5 dB
2
Δ 1 =10 dB
97
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
2 signals
3
Δ 1 =5 dB
3
Δ 1 =10 dB
Figure 2.20: Margin - Probability (Case of 3 Signals with sigma = 8dB, delta1 = 1dB)
2 signals
3
Δ 1 =5 dB
3
Δ 1 =10 dB
Figure 2.21: Margin - Probability (Case of 3 Signals with sigma = 8dB, delta1 = 2dB)
For further information about determination of the correlation coefficient, please see "Correlation Coefficient Determination"
on page 98.
98
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
Computation zone
Rectangle containing the computation zone(s)
Calculation area defined (square)
Transmitter
99
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
Path loss
Downtilta Invalid
matrices
Sufficient Not necessary
Path loss
Azimutha Invalid
matrices
Sufficient Not necessary
Path loss
% Power (secondary antennas) Invalid Sufficient Not necessary
matrices
Path loss
Site position/altitude Invalid Sufficient Not necessary
matrices
Path loss
Grid resolution (main or extended) Invalid Sufficient Not necessary
matrices
Path loss
Propagation model (main or extended) Invalid Sufficient Not necessary
matrices
Path loss
Propagation model parameters Invalid Sufficient Not necessary
matrices
Calculation areas Coverage
Valid Sufficient Not necessary
(Calculation areas gets smaller) predictions
Calculation areas Path loss
Invalid Sufficient Not necessary
(Calculation areas gets larger) matrices
Path loss
Receiver height Invalid Sufficient Not necessary
matrices
Coverage
Receiver losses Valid Sufficient Not necessary
predictions
Coverage
Receiver gain Valid Sufficient Not necessary
predictions
Coverage
Receiver antenna Valid Sufficient Not necessary
predictions
Path loss
Geographic layer order Invalid
matrices Insufficientb Necessary
Path loss
Geographic file resolution Invalid
matrices Insufficientb Necessary
Path loss
New DTM map Invalid
matrices Insufficientb Necessary
Path loss
Clutter class edition Invalid
matrices Insufficientb Necessary
Coverage
Coverage prediction resolution Valid Sufficient Not necessary
predictions
Coverage
Cell edge coverage probability Valid Sufficient Not necessary
predictions
Coverage
Coverage prediction conditions Valid Sufficient Not necessary
predictions
Coverage
Coverage prediction display options Valid Sufficient Not necessary
predictions
a. Modification of any parameter related to main or other antennas makes matrix invalid.
b. Except if this action has an impact on the site positions/altitudes.
100
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
For more information on the tuning files, see the Administrator Manual.
E = --- ×
1
n ei
i
Ri = ( 1 – Di ) × ( M – g – Pi ) so R i = ( 1 – D i ) × ( M – g – ( P i + E))
new old
101
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
When several ellipses overlap a pathloss bin, the final tuned path loss is given by:
( 1 – d j )P j
tuned
j
Pi = -------------------------------------------------
tuned
n –
d j
j
where :
M d represents the contribution of the donor transmitter in the measured value.
If C d and C r represent respectively the filtered signal level from the donor transmitter and the repeater on a pixel, one can
define the contribution of each element as follows:
Cd Cr
M d = M × ---------------- and M r = M × ---------------- .
Cd + Cr Cd + Cr
Following the path loss tuning process described in "Transmitter Path Loss Tuning" on page 101, the donor transmitter (resp.
the repeater) is then tuned using M d (resp. M r ) values.
Here, D is the distance from the pixel to be coloured to each pixel within the bounding box and X is the value at that pixel.
In other words, the pixel will be coloured by the most representative value within this bounding box.
102
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
The user-defined filtering percentage Y gives the size of the bounding box: Y ⁄ 10 pixels in each direction. In other words, the
bounding box is increased by one pixel every 10 % (since Y is defined as a percentage).
Smoothing by Percentage
2 Z
The user-defined smoothing percentage Z gives the approximation tolerance: ------- × R × ------ , where R is the user-defined
2 20
export resolution. Tolerance is the interval within which Atoll tries to reduce the number of points.
For example, for three successive points, A1, A2, and A3 as shown in Figure 2.26 on page 103, A2 will be deleted if within this
tolerance (and A1 and A3 will be directly linked) and A2 will be conserved if outside this tolerance.
103
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
The second method consists in defining a maximum number of points to be deleted. This number of points helps the algorithm
to determine the optimised tolerance (see "Smoothing by Percentage" on page 103) such that, with this obtained tolerance,
the number of points to be deleted will be lower than this value.
Let’s consider the following example ( 1 ). Starting from the maximum possible tolerance, the number of points to be filtered
out are estimated (circled in red in the following example ( 2 )). If this number is greater than the maximum number of points
defined by the user, Atoll reduces the tolerance until reaching the requested maximum number of points or less ( 3 ). The
first the number of points respecting the constraint is obtained, smoothing is applied by deleting these points and linking the
remaining closest points ( 4 ).
1 2
3 4
104
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 2: Radio Propagation
105
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2: Radio Propagation © Forsk 2011
106
Chapter 3
GSM GPRS EDGE
Networks
This chapter describes GSM GPRS EDGE calculations. In this chapter, the following are explained:
• "Signal Level Calculations" on page 109
• "Interference-based Calculations" on page 114
• "GPRS/EDGE Calculations" on page 119
• "Codec Mode Selection and CQI Calculations" on
page 128
• "Traffic Analysis" on page 135
• "Network Dimensioning" on page 147
• "Key Performance Indicators Calculation" on
page 156
• "Neighbour Allocation" on page 159
• "AFP Appendices" on page 164
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
• All the calculations are performed on TBC (to be calculated) transmitters. For the
definition of TBC transmitters please refer to "Path Loss Matrices" on page 98.
• Logarithms used in this chapter (Log function) are base-10 unless stated otherwise.
Txi Txi
Path loss ( L path ) L path = L model + L ant
Tx
Txi Txi
Txi
Total losses ( L total ) L total = ( L path + M Shadowing – model + L Indoor + L Tx + L Rx ) – ( G ant + G ant )
Tx Rx
Where,
• EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the transmitter,
• L model is the loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated by the propagation model,
• L ant is the transmitter antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns),
Tx
• M Shadowing – model is the shadowing margin. This parameter is taken into account when the option “Shadowing taken
into account” is selected,
• L Indoor are the indoor losses, taken into account when the option “Indoor coverage” is selected,
• L Rx are the receiver losses,
• G ant is the receiver antenna gain,
Rx
• ΔP is the power offset defined for the selected TRX type in the transmitter property dialog,
• tt is the TRX type (in the GSM GPRS EDGE.mdb document template, there are three possible TRX types, BCCH, TCH and
inner TCH).
If the power reduction values defined for all the subcells are the same, the received signal level from the selected transmitter
will be the same for all TRX types.
109
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
If the power reduction values defined for all the subcells are the same, the received signal level from the selected transmitter
will be the same for all TRX types.
Reception level bars are displayed in the order of decreasing signal level. The number of displayed bars depends on the signal
level received from the best server. Bars are only displayed for transmitters whose signal level is within a 30 dB margin from
the best server signal level.
You can use a value other than 30 dB for the margin from the best server signal level, for
example a smaller value for improving the calculation speed. For more information on
defining a different value for this margin, see the Administrator Manual.
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec ( tt ) can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total or L path .
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec ( tt ) can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total or L path .
j≠i
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
110
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec ( tt ) can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total or L path .
Txi nd Txj
And P rec ( tt ) ≥ 2 Best ( P rec ( tt ) ) – M
j≠i
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the second highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the second highest or within a 2 dB
margin from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 3rd best servers.
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec ( tt ) can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total or L path .
j≠i
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
3.1.2.1.5 Second Best Signal Level per HCS Layer and a Margin
For each HCS layer, k, the service area of Txi corresponds to the pixels where:
Txi
MinimumThreshold ≤ P rec ( tt ) < MaximumThreshold
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec ( tt ) can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total or L path .
Txi nd Txj
And P rec ( BCCH ) ≥ 2 Best ( P rec ( BCCH ) ) – M
j≠i
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the second highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the second highest or within a 2 dB
margin from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 3rd best servers.
111
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec ( tt ) can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total or L path .
j≠i
Txi
And the received P rec ( tt ) exceeds the reception threshold defined per HCS layer.
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec ( tt ) can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total or L path .
j≠i
And Txi belongs to the HCS layer with the highest priority. The highest priority is defined by the priority field (0: lowest).
Txi
And the received P rec ( tt ) exceeds the reception threshold defined per HCS layer.
In the case two layers have the same priority, the traffic is served by the transmitter for
which the difference between the received signal strength and the HCS threshold is the
highest. The way the competition is managed between layers with the same priority can
be modified. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
112
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
The reselection criterion C2 is used for cell reselection only and is defined by:
C2 = C1 + CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET
Where CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET is the Cell Reselect Offset defined for the transmitter.
The service area of Txi corresponds to the pixels where:
Txi
MinimumThreshold ≤ P rec ( BCCH ) < MaximumThreshold
Txi
For pure signal level-based calculations (not C/I or C/(I+N)), P rec ( tt ) can be replaced
Txi Txi
with L total or L path .
Atoll calculates signal level received from the transmitter on each pixel of each transmitter service area. A pixel of a service
area is coloured if the signal level is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (pixel colour depends on signal
level). Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many
layers as transmitter service areas. Each layer shows the different signal levels available in the transmitter service area.
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter service area. When other
serviceWhen other service areas overlap the studied one, Atoll chooses the highest value. A pixel of a service area is coloured
if the signal level is greater than or equal to the defined thresholds (the pixel colour depends on the signal level). Coverage
consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as defined
thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the signal level from the best server exceeds a defined minimum
threshold.
Atoll calculates path loss from the transmitter on each pixel of each transmitter service area. A pixel of a service area is
coloured if path loss is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (pixel colour depends on path loss). Coverage
consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as service
areas. Each layer shows the different path loss levels in the transmitter service area.
Atoll calculates total losses from the transmitter on each pixel of each transmitter service area. A pixel of a service area is
coloured if total losses is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (pixel colour depends on total losses).
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers
as service areas. Each layer shows the different total losses levels in the transmitter service area.
113
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter service area. When other service
areas overlap the studied one, Atoll determines the best transmitter and evaluates path loss from the best transmitter. A pixel
of a service area is coloured if the path loss is greater than or equal to the defined thresholds (pixel colour depends on path
loss). Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many
layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the path loss from the best server exceeds a defined
minimum threshold.
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter service area. Where service areas
overlap the studied one, Atoll determines the best transmitter and evaluates total losses from the best transmitter. A pixel of
a service area is coloured if the total losses is greater than or equal to the defined thresholds (pixel colour depends on total
losses). Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many
layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the total losses from the best server exceed a defined
minimum threshold.
Number of Servers
Atoll evaluates how many service areas cover a pixel in order to determine the number of servers. The pixel colour depends
on the number of servers. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed.
There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the number of servers is greater than
or equal to a defined minimum threshold.
On each pixel of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels where the signal level from this
transmitter fulfils signal conditions defined in Conditions tab with different cell edge coverage probabilities. There is one
coverage area per transmitter in the explorer.
On each pixel of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels where the best signal level received
fulfils signal conditions defined in Conditions tab. There is one coverage area per cell edge coverage probability in the explorer.
Best C2 (dBm)
Atoll calculates C2 values received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter service area. When other service areas
overlap the studied one, Atoll chooses the highest value. A pixel of a service area is coloured if the C2 value is greater than or
equal to the defined thresholds (the pixel colour depends on the C2 value). Coverage consists of several independent layers
whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to
an area where the best C2 value exceeds a defined minimum threshold.
A wide-ranging definition of an MSA, Mobile Station Allocation, can be that it is a list of channels and an associated MAIO.
More precisely, for different frequency hopping modes, this definition can be:
• Non-hopping (NH): An MSA is the channel assigned to a TRX used by a mobile.
• Baseband hopping (BBH): An MSA is the Mobile Allocation List (MAL) and the TRX index.
114
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
• Synthesised frequency hopping (SFH): An MSA is the Mobile Allocation List (MAL) and the Mobile Allocation Index
Offset (MAIO).
From the point of view of a mobile station, BBH and SFH work in the same way.
C v ( m )
Several MSAs, m, are related to a transmitter. Therefore, Atoll calculates the C/I --------------
- for each victim transmitter
Iv ( m )
v with MSA m (m ∈ MSAS(v)).
C v ( m )
Atoll considers the most interfered MSA, therefore, the displayed C/I or C/(I+N) are --- = Min --------------
C
- or
I v k Iv ( m )
-----------------
C Cv ( m )
I + N tot = Min ----------------------------- , respectively. If the Detailed Results check box is selected, the C/I values for all
v k Iv ( m ) + N
tot
MSAs are displayed.
• i is any potential interfering transmitter (TBC transmitters whose calculation areas intersect the service area of v),
• MSAS(i) is the set of MSAs related to potential interferers i,
• INT(v) is the set of transmitters that interfere v,
v
• C ( m ) is the carrier power level received from v on m,
v
• I ( m ) corresponds to the interference received from interfering transmitters i on m,
• M Shadowing used in the C/I calculation is based on the C/I standard deviation.
The C/I shadowing margin is applied on the carrier power level. The interference levels
are not changed.
Calculations
The carrier power level is the power received from the victim transmitter at the receiver.
v v
C ( m ) = P rec ( m )
If the interference conditions are based on C/(I+N), Atoll takes the total noise N tot into account. The total noise is the sum of
the thermal noise N thermal (-121 dBm by default or user-defined), the noise figure NF, and the inter-technology downlink
v, DL
noise rise NR inter – techno log y .
v, DL
N tot = N thermal + NF + NR inter – techno log y
Interference can be received from interfering transmitters i on co-channel and adjacent channels. Interference may also be
received from the transmitters of another technology.
115
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
v v v DL i v
Therefore, I m = I co m + I adj m + I inter – techno log y – G PC – G Div
i v
where G PC is the average power control gain defined for the interfering transmitter i and G Div is the diversity gain defined
for the considered subcell.
Each interference component is explained below.
Co- and Adjacent Channel Interference:
v
I co ( m ) is the interference received at v on m on co-channel, given by:
v, i
v i
I co ( m ) = p m, n × P rec ( n ) × T i ( n )
i ∈ INT ( v ) n ∈ MSAS ( i ) co
v
I adj ( m ) is the interference received at v on m on adjacent channels, given by:
i
v, i P rec ( n )
v
I adj ( m ) = p m, n × ----------------
- × T i ( n )
F adj
i ∈ INT ( v ) n ∈ MSAS ( i )
i
Here, P rec ( n ) is the carrier power level received from i on n.
i i
T i ( n ) = L traffic ( n ) × f act ( n )
i
L traffic ( n ) is the traffic load defined for the MSA n or i. It can be set to 100% in the coverage prediction properties.
i
f act ( n ) is the activity factor defined for the MSA n of i. If the subcell (i,tt) supports DTX, the value specified in the
coverage prediction properties is used. Otherwise, the activity factor is 1.
BCCH TRXs are always on. Therefore, DTX and traffic loads do not impact the interference
i i
from BCCH. In other words, f act ( n ) = 1 and L traffic ( n ) = 1 for the BCCH TRXs of the
interferers.
v, i
p m, n is the probability of having a co- or adjacent channel collision between MSAs n and m, depending on the used
frequency hopping mode.
• Collision Probability for Non Hopping Mode:
v, i
p m, n = 1
The probability of collision is the ratio of the number of collisions to the number of occurences:
v, i n collision
p m, n = ----------------------
-
n occurence
The probibility of collision depends on the correlation between m and n. There can be two cases:
i. MSAs m and n are correlated
m and n must have identical HSN and synchronisation. The number of occurrences depends on the MAL size,
MAIO, and MAIO’.
Example:
116
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
Here, the number of occurrences is 3, the number of co-channel collisions is 1, and the number of adjacent
channel collisions is 1. Therefore,
v, i 1 v, i 1
( p m, n ) co = --- and ( p m, n ) adj = ---
3 3
Here, the number of occurrences is 9, the number of co-channel collisions is 1, and the number of adjacent
channel collisions is 3. Therefore,
v, i 1 v, i 1
( p m, n ) co = --- and ( p m, n ) adj = ---
9 3
Diversity gain:
v
G Div is the diversity gain defined for the victim subcell.
Two types of diversity modes can be defined. In Tx Diversity, the signal is transmitted as many times that there are
antennas. In, the signal is successively transmitted on the various antennas.
For Tx Diversity mode, the diversity gain is defined as:
v Tx_Div
G Div = 3dB + G clutter
Tx_Div
where G clutter is the additional transmit diversity gain defined for the clutter class on which is located m.
Ant_Div
where G clutter is the antenna hopping gain defined for the clutter class on which is located m.
th Tx
Where ic i is the i frequency used by the transmitter Tx within its list of frequencies, P Transmitted ( ic i ) is the total
Tx Tx
transmitted Tx power on ic i , L total are the total losses between the transmitter Tx and the receiver, and ICP ic , f is
i
the inter-technology channel protection between the frequencies used by the transmitter Tx and the victim
transmitter v.
117
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
• In case of frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional
load.
• In the ICP, the frequency gap is based on the defined base frequency for each
technology (e.g., 935 MHz in GSM 900)
• Neither DTX nor traffic load of TRXs are taken into account to evaluate interference
i i
levels. Therefore, we have T i ( n ) = L traffic ( n ) × f act ( n ) = 1 .
• The C/I shadowing margin is applied on the carrier power level. The interference
levels are not changed.
118
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
Where, TRXj is the TRX (belonging to Txi) with the worst C/I or C/(I+N) at the pixel.
C/I Level
Each pixel of the transmitter coverage area is coloured if the calculated C/I (or C/(I+N)) level is greater than or equal to the
specified minimum thresholds (pixel colour depends on C/I (or C/(I+N)) level). Coverage consists of several independent layers
whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as transmitter coverage areas. Each layer shows
the different C/I levels available in the transmitter coverage area.
Atoll compares calculated C/I (or C/(I+N)) levels received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter coverage area
where coverage areas overlap the studied one and chooses the highest value. A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the C/
I (or C/(I+N)) level is greater than or equal to the specified thresholds (the pixel colour depends on the C/I (or C/(I+N)) level).
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers
as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the highest received C/I level exceeds a defined minimum
threshold.
Atoll compares C/I (or C/(I+N)) levels received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter coverage area where the
coverage areas overlap the studied one and chooses the lowest value. A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the C/I (or C/
(I+N)) level is greater than or equal to the specified thresholds (the pixel colour depends on the C/I (or C/(I+N)) level). Coverage
consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as defined
thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the lowest received C/I level exceeds a defined minimum threshold.
119
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
terminal type. If both the transmitter and the terminal type do not have any GPRS/EDGE configuration assigned to them, no
coding scheme selection and throughput calculation is carried out.
In the following calculations, we assume that:
Txi
• P rec ( TRX ) is the signal level received from the selected TRX type (tt) or on all the TRXs of Txi on each pixel of the Txi
coverage area,
Txi
• P Backoff ( TRX ) is the Power Backoff defined for the subcell for 8PSK, 16QAM, or 32QAM modulations,
• CS is the set of all available coding schemes,
• ( Reception Threshold ) CS are the values of reception thresholds for the coding schemes available in the GPRS/EDGE
configuration,
• C
--- Threshold are the values of C/I thresholds for the coding schemes available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration,
I CS
• ----------
C-
Threshold
I + N CS are the values of C/(I+N) thresholds for the coding schemes available in the GPRS/EDGE
configuration,
• The priorities of the coding scheme lists are as follows: DBS > DAS > MCS > CS.
When the calculations are based on C/I and C/(I+N):
• Atoll calculates the carrier-to-interference ratio for all the GPRS/EDGE TBC transmitters but takes into account all the
TBC transmitters (GSM and GPRS/EDGE) to evaluate the interference.
• The reception thresholds given for signal level C are internally converted to C/N thresholds (where N is the thermal
noise defined in the document database at -121 dBm by default) in order to be indexed by C/(I+N) values. C/I
thresholds are also indexed by the C/(I+N) value.
The selection of coding schemes is mainly based on the radio conditions mentionned
above. Nevertheless, you can optionally define some specific coding scheme graphs
accoding to a specific hopping mode, mobility type, frequency band and MAL. As an
example, you can model the gain due to longer MALs in coding scheme selection.
For more information on interference (I) calculation, see "Carrier-to-Interference Ratio Calculation" on page 114.
Atoll selects a coding scheme, cs, from among the coding schemes available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration, such that:
The selected coding scheme, cs, is the coding scheme with the lowest coding scheme number from the lowest priority coding
scheme list.
Throughput Calculation
Once the coding scheme cs is selected, Atoll reads the corresponding throughput value for the received signal level from the
Throughput=f(C) graph associated with cs.
Atoll selects two coding schemes from among the coding schemes available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration, such that:
120
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
And, cs C ⁄ I = Lowest CS Txi Txi
P ( TRX ) – P ( TRX )
------------------------------------------------------------------------- > --- Threshold
rec Backoff C
I I CS
csC is the coding scheme determined from the signal level, and csC/I is the coding scheme determined from the C/I level. Both
coding schemes are the coding schemes with the lowest coding scheme number from the lowest priority coding scheme list.
The selected coding scheme, cs, is the coding scheme with the lower coding scheme number among csC and csC/I:
cs = Min ( cs C, cs C ⁄ I ) .
For the coding scheme csC determined above, a throughput value, TPC, corresponding to the signal level is determined from
the TP = f(C) graph.
For the coding scheme csC/I determined above, a throughput value, TPC/I, corresponding to the C/I is determined from the TP
= f(C/I) graph.
The resulting throughput TP is the lower of the two values, TPC and TPC/I: TP = Min ( TP C, TP C ⁄ I ) .
Atoll selects two coding schemes from among the coding schemes available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration, such that:
For each TRX type, tt, cs C ⁄ N = Lowest CS Txi Txi
P rec ( TRX ) – P Backoff ( TRX )
C
------------------------------------------------------------------------- > ----------- Threshold
N I + N CS
And, cs C ⁄ ( I + N ) = Lowest CS Txi Txi
P rec ( TRX ) – P Backoff ( TRX )
------------------------------------------------------------------------- > ---------- Threshold
C-
I+N I + N CS
csC/N is the coding scheme determined from the C/N, and csC/(I+N) is the coding scheme determined from the C/(I+N) level.
Both coding schemes are the coding schemes with the lowest coding scheme numbers from the lowest priority coding scheme
list.
The selected coding scheme, cs, is the coding scheme with the higher coding scheme number among csC/N and csC/(I+N):
cs = Max ( cs C ⁄ N, cs C ⁄ ( I + N ) ) .
For the coding scheme csC/N determined above, the TP = f(C) graph is internally converted to TP = f(C/N) graph. A throughput
value, TPC/N, corresponding to the C/(I+N) is determined from the TP = f(C/N) graph.
For the coding scheme csC/(I+N) determined above, the TP = f(C/I) graph is internally converted to TP = f(C/(I+N)) graph. A
throughput value, TPC/(I+N), corresponding to the C/(I+N) is determined from the TP = f(C/(I+N)) graph.
The final throughput is computed by interpolating between the throughput values obtained from these two graphs. The
throughput interpolation method consists in interpolating TPC/N and TPC/(I+N) according to the respective weights of I and N
values.
The resulting throughput TP is given by: TP = α × TP C ⁄ N + ( 1 – α ) × TP C ⁄ ( I + N )
pN
Where α = -------------------- , pN is the thermal noise power (value in Watts), and p(I+N) is the interferences + thermal noise power
p(I + N)
(value in Watts).
121
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
For the received signal level, and coding schemes whose reception thresholds are lower than the received signal level, Atoll
determines the highest throughput from the TP=f ( C ) graphs available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration.
The selected coding scheme, cs, is the one corresponding to the highest throughput calculated above.
If there are more than one coding schemes providing the highest throughput at the pixel, the selected coding scheme, cs, is
the one with the lowest coding scheme number from the lowest priority coding scheme list.
For the received signal level, and coding schemes whose reception thresholds are lower than the received signal level, Atoll
determines the highest throughput from the TP=f ( C ) graphs available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration.
For the received C/I, and coding schemes whose C/I thresholds are lower than the received C/I, Atoll determines the highest
throughput from the TP=f ( C ⁄ I ) graphs available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration.
Txi Txi
P rec ( TRX ) – P Backoff ( TRX )
TP C ⁄ I = Highest TP=f C ⁄ I = ---------------------------------------------------------------
- ∀ CS Txi Txi
I P rec ( TRX ) – P Backoff ( TRX )
------------------------------------------------------------------------- > C
--- Threshold
I I CS
The resulting throughput TP is the lower of the two values, TPC and TPC/I.
TP = Min ( TP C, TP C ⁄ I )
The selected coding scheme, cs, is the one corresponding to the lower of the two highest throughputs calculated above.
If there are more than one coding schemes providing the highest throughputs at the pixel, the selected coding scheme, cs, is
the one with the lowest coding scheme number from the lowest priority coding scheme list.
Atoll internally converts the TP = f(C) graphs into TP = f(C/N) graphs. For the received C/(I+N), and coding schemes whose C/
(I+N) thresholds are lower than the received C/(I+N), Atoll determines the highest throughput from the TP = f(C/N) graphs
available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration.
Txi Txi
C P rec ( TRX ) – P Backoff ( TRX )
- ∀ CS
TP C ⁄ N = Highest TP=f --- = --------------------------------------------------------------- Txi Txi
N I+N P rec ( TRX ) – P Backoff ( TRX )
C
------------------------------------------------------------------------- > ----------- Threshold
I+N I + N CS
Atoll internally converts the TP = f(C/I) graphs into TP = f(C/(I+N)) graphs. For the received C/(I+N), and coding schemes whose
C/(I+N) thresholds are lower than the received C/(I+N), Atoll determines the highest throughput from the TP = f(C/(I+N))
graphs available in the GPRS/EDGE configuration.
122
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
Txi Txi
C P rec ( TRX ) – P Backoff ( TRX )
- ∀ CS
TP C ⁄ ( I + N ) = Highest TP=f ----------- = --------------------------------------------------------------- Txi Txi
I + N I+N P ( TRX ) – P ( TRX )
------------------------------------------------------------------------- > ----------- Threshold
rec Backoff C
I+N I + N CS
The final throughput is computed by interpolating between the throughput values obtained from these two graphs. The
throughput interpolation method consists in interpolating TPC/N and TPC/(I+N) according to the respective weights of I and N
values.
The resulting throughput TP is given by: TP = α × TP C ⁄ N + ( 1 – α ) × TP C ⁄ ( I + N )
pN
Where α = -------------------- , pN is the thermal noise power (value in Watts), and p(I+N) is the interferences + thermal noise power
p(I + N)
(value in Watts).
The selected coding scheme, cs, is the one corresponding to the higher of the two highest throughputs calculated above.
If there are more than one coding schemes providing the highest throughputs at the pixel, the selected coding scheme, cs, is
the one with the highest coding scheme number from the highest priority coding scheme list.
Where TP RLC ⁄ MAC is the RLC/MAC throughput, and TP Offset and SF are the throughput offset (kbps) and the throughput
scaling factor (%) defined for the selected service.
TP
--------------- If ( TP ≤ TP MAX )
BLER = TP MAX
0 If ( TP > TP MAX )
Where TP is the throughput per timeslot calculated for a pixel and TPMAX is the maximum throughput per timeslot read from
the GPRS/EDGE configuration used for the calculations.
123
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
• Each transmitter, Txi, belongs to a Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) layer, k, with a defined priority and a defined
reception threshold.
• Each transmitter, Txi, is GPRS/EDGE-capable.
• No max range is set.
j≠i
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
Txi nd Txj
And P rec ( tt ) ≥ 2 Best ( P rec ( tt ) ) – M
j≠i
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the second highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the second highest or within a 2 dB
margin from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 3rd best servers.
j≠i
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
3.3.5.1.5 Second Best Signal Level per HCS Layer and a Margin
For each HCS layer, k, the service area of Txi corresponds to the pixels where:
Txi
SubcellReceptionThreshold ≤ P rec ( tt )
124
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
Txi nd Txj
And P rec ( BCCH ) ≥ 2 Best ( P rec ( BCCH ) ) – M
j≠i
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the second highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the second highest or within a 2 dB
margin from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 3rd best servers.
j≠i
Txi
And the received P rec ( tt ) exceeds the reception threshold defined per HCS layer.
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
j≠i
And Txi belongs to the HCS layer with the highest priority. The highest priority is defined by the priority field (0: lowest).
Txi
And the received P rec ( tt ) exceeds the reception threshold defined per HCS layer.
In the case two layers have the same priority, the traffic is served by the transmitter for
which the difference between the received signal strength and the HCS threshold is the
highest. The way the competition is managed between layers with the same priority can
be modified. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
125
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
The reselection criterion C2 is used for cell reselection only and is defined by:
C2 = C1 + CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET
Where CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET is the Cell Reselect Offset defined for the transmitter.
The service area of Txi corresponds to the pixels where:
Txi
SubcellReceptionThreshold ≤ P rec ( BCCH )
Only the pixels with a coding scheme assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the assigned coding scheme.
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers
as transmitter coverage areas. Each layer shows the coding schemes available in the transmitter coverage area.
On each pixel, Atoll chooses the highest coding scheme available from the TRXs of different transmitters covering that pixel.
Only the pixels with a coding scheme assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the assigned coding scheme.
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers
as possible coding schemes. Each layer shows the areas where a given coding scheme can be used.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot from any transmitter covering that
pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot. Coverage
consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as
transmitter coverage areas and throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the RLC/MAC throughput that a transmitter
can provide on one timeslot.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated highest RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot from any transmitter
covering that pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the highest RLC/MAC throughput
per timeslot. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are
as many layers as throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the best RLC/MAC throughput that any transmitter can
provide on one timeslot.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated average RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot from all the transmitters
covering that pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the average RLC/MAC throughput
per timeslot. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are
as many layers as throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the average RLC/MAC throughput that all the transmitters
can provide on one timeslot.
126
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated application throughput per timeslot from any transmitter covering
that pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the application throughput per timeslot.
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers
as transmitter coverage areas and throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the application throughput that a
transmitter can provide on one timeslot.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated highest application throughput per timeslot from any transmitter
covering that pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the highest application throughput
per timeslot. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are
as many layers as throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the best application throughput that any transmitter can
provide on one timeslot.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated average application throughput per timeslot from all the transmitters
covering that pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the average application throughput
per timeslot. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are
as many layers as throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the average application throughput that all the
transmitters can provide on one timeslot.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated application throughput from any transmitter covering that pixel
exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the application throughput for all the timeslots
supported by the selected terminal type (Number of Simultaneous Carriers x Number of DL Timeslots). The number of DL
timeslots is the minimum between the number of DL timeslots defined in the selected terminal and service. Coverage consists
of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as transmitter
coverage areas and throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the application throughput that a transmitter can provide
on all available timeslots in the terminal.
Packet Throughput and Quality Analysis: Best Max Application Throughput (kbps)
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated highest application throughput from any transmitter covering that
pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the highest application throughput for all the
timeslots supported by the selected terminal type (Number of Simultaneous Carriers x Number of DL Timeslots). The number
of DL timeslots is the minimum between the number of DL timeslots defined in the selected terminal and service. Coverage
consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as
throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the highest application throughput that any transmitter can provide on all
available timeslots in the terminal.
Packet Throughput and Quality Analysis: Average Max Application Throughput (kbps)
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated average application throughput from all the transmitters covering
that pixel exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the average application throughput for all the
timeslots supported by the selected terminal type (Number of Simultaneous Carriers x Number of DL Timeslots). The number
of DL timeslots is the minimum between the number of DL timeslots defined in the selected terminal and service. Coverage
consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as
throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the average application throughput that all the transmitters can provide on
all available timeslots in the terminal.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated user throughput from any transmitter covering that pixel exceeds the
defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the user throughput for all the timeslots supported by the selected
terminal type (Number of Simultaneous Carriers x Number of DL Timeslots). The number of DL timeslots is the minimum
between the number of DL timeslots defined in the selected terminal and service. The user throughput is calculated by
applying the throughput reduction factor, determined using the selected dimensioning model, to the application throughput.
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers
as transmitter coverage areas and throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the user throughput that a transmitter can
provide on all available timeslots in the terminal.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated highest user throughput from any transmitter covering that pixel
exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the highest user throughput for all the timeslots
127
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
supported by the selected terminal type (Number of Simultaneous Carriers x Number of DL Timeslots). The number of DL
timeslots is the minimum between the number of DL timeslots defined in the selected terminal and service. The user
throughput is calculated by applying the throughput reduction factor, determined using the selected dimensioning model, to
the application throughput. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be
managed. There are as many layers as throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the highest user throughput that any
transmitter can provide on all available timeslots in the terminal.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated average user throughput from all the transmitters covering that pixel
exceeds the defined minimum threshold. The pixel colour depends on the average user throughput for all the timeslots
supported by the selected terminal type (Number of Simultaneous Carriers x Number of DL Timeslots). The number of DL
timeslots is the minimum between the number of DL timeslots defined in the selected terminal and service. The user
throughput is calculated by applying the throughput reduction factor, determined using the selected dimensioning model, to
the application throughput. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be
managed. There are as many layers as throughput display thresholds. Each layer shows the average user throughput that all
the transmitters can provide on all available timeslots in the terminal.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated BLER from any transmitter exceeds the defined minimum threshold.
The pixel colour depends on the BLER. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map window
can be managed. There are as many layers as transmitter coverage areas and BLER display thresholds. Each layer shows the
BLERs that the covered pixels experience on one timeslot.
A pixel of the coverage area is coloured if the calculated highest BLER from all the transmitters exceeds the defined minimum
threshold. The pixel colour depends on the BLER. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map
window can be managed. There are as many layers as BLER display thresholds. Each layer shows the BLER that the covered
pixels experience on one timeslot.
128
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
129
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
The selection of codec modes is mainly based on the radio conditions mentionned above.
Nevertheless, you can optionally define some specific codec mode graphs accoding to a
specific hopping mode, mobility type, frequency band and MAL. As an example, you can
model the gain due to longer MALs in codec mode selection.
For more information on interference (I) calculation, see "Carrier-to-Interference Ratio Calculation" on page 114.
Ideal link adaptation for circuit quality indicator studies is defined at the codec configuration level. If the ideal link adaptation
option is checked, Atoll will select the codec mode, for the transmitter under study, according to the codec quality graphs (CQI
= f(C/N) and CQI = f(C/I)) related to the defined reference CQI, which may be different from the CQI being calculated.
Otherwise, Atoll will use the adaptation thresholds defined in the Adaptation Thresholds tab to determine the codec mode
to be used in the studies.
130
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
For each TRX type, tt, cm = Highest Priority CM Txi
P ( TRX )
--------------------------- > ( Adaptation Threshold )
rec
N CM
Txi
P rec ( TRX )
For ------------------------ , Atoll determines the CQI from the CQI=f(C/N) graph associated to the selected codec mode, cm.
N
For each TRX type, tt, cm = Highest Priority CM
Txi
P rec ( TRX )
--------------------------- > ( Adaptation Threshold )
I+N CM
Txi
P rec ( TRX )
For -----------------------
- , Atoll determines the CQI from the CQI=f(C/I) graph associated to the selected codec mode, cm.
I+N
For each TRX type, tt, cm = Highest Priority CM , for MOS
P
Txi
( )
TRX
CQI Ref = Highest CQI=f --- = ---------------------------
C rec
N N tot
Or, cm = Highest Priority CM , for BER and FER
P Txi ( TRX )
CQI Ref = Lowest CQI=f --- = ---------------------------
C rec
N N tot
Where, cm is the codec mode with the highest priority among the set of codec modes CM for which the reference CQI gives
Txi
P rec ( TRX )
the highest or the lowest value at the received C/N level, -----------------------
-.
N tot
If more than one codec mode graphs give the same value for reference CQI, then Atoll selects the codec mode with the highest
priority.
From the CQI = f(C/N) graph associated to the selected codec mode cm, Atoll evaluates the CQI for which the study was
Txi
P rec ( TRX )
performed corresponding to ------------------------ for the selected codec mode.
N tot
131
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
For each TRX type, tt, cm = Highest Priority CM , for MOS
P Txi ( TRX )
= Highest CQI=f --- = ---------------------------
C rec
CQI
Ref I I+N
tot
Or, cm = Highest Priority CM , for BER and FER
P
Txi
( TRX )
CQI = Lowest CQI=f --- = ---------------------------
C rec
Ref I I+N
tot
Where, cm is the codec mode with the highest priority among the set of codec modes CM for which the reference CQI gives
Txi
P rec ( TRX )
the highest or the lowest value at the received C/(I+N) level, -----------------------
-.
I + N tot
If more than one codec mode graphs give the same value for reference CQI, then Atoll selects the codec mode with the highest
priority.
From the CQI = f(C/I) graph associated to the selected codec mode cm (indexed with the C/(I+N) values), Atoll evaluates the
Txi
P rec ( TRX )
CQI for which the study was performed corresponding to -----------------------
- for the selected codec mode.
I + N tot
j≠i
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
132
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
Txi nd Txj
And P rec ( BCCH ) ≥ 2 Best ( P rec ( BCCH ) ) – M
j≠i
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the second highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the second highest or within a 2 dB
margin from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 3rd best servers.
j≠i
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
3.4.4.1.5 Second Best Signal Level per HCS Layer and a Margin
For each HCS layer, k, the service area of Txi corresponds to the pixels where:
Txi
SubcellReceptionThreshold ≤ Prec ( BCCH )
Txi nd Txj
And P rec ( BCCH ) ≥ 2 Best ( P rec ( BCCH ) ) – M
j≠i
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the second highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the second highest or within a 2 dB
margin from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 3rd best servers.
j≠i
Txi
And the received P rec ( BCCH ) exceeds the reception threshold defined per HCS layer.
133
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
j≠i
And Txi belongs to the HCS layer with the highest priority. The highest priority is defined by the priority field (0: lowest).
Txi
And the received P rec ( BCCH ) exceeds the reception threshold defined per HCS layer.
In the case two layers have the same priority, the traffic is served by the transmitter for
which the difference between the received signal strength and the HCS threshold is the
highest. The way the competition is managed between layers with the same priority can
be modified. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is either the highest or within a 2 dB margin
from the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received signal level from Txi is 2 dB higher than the signal levels from
transmitters which are 2nd best servers.
BER
Only the pixels with a codec mode assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the BER value. Coverage consists of
several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as transmitter
coverage areas and BER display thresholds. Each layer shows the BER in the transmitter coverage area.
FER
Only the pixels with a codec mode assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the FER value. Coverage consists of
several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as transmitter
coverage areas and FER display thresholds. Each layer shows the FER in the transmitter coverage area.
MOS
Only the pixels with a codec mode assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the MOS value. Coverage consists of
several independent layers whose visibility in the map window can be managed. There are as many layers as transmitter
coverage areas and MOS display thresholds. Each layer shows the MOS in the transmitter coverage area.
134
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
Max BER
Only the pixels with a codec mode assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the highest BER value among the BER
values for all the transmitters covering the pixel. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map
window can be managed. There are as many layers as BER display thresholds. Each layer shows the BER value.
Max FER
Only the pixels with a codec mode assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the highest FER value among the FER
values for all the transmitters covering the pixel. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map
window can be managed. There are as many layers as FER display thresholds. Each layer shows the FER value.
Max MOS
Only the pixels with a codec mode assigned are coloured. The pixel colour depends on the highest MOS value among the MOS
values for all the transmitters covering the pixel. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the map
window can be managed. There are as many layers as MOS display thresholds. Each layer shows the MOS value.
• If no focus zone exists in the .atl document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
• For details of the average timeslot capacity calculation, see the Network
Dimensioning section (calculation of minimum reduction factor).
135
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
Where Sup,m is the TCH service area containing the user profile up with the mobility m and D is the user profile density.
For each behaviour described in the user profile up, Atoll calculates the probability for the user to be connected with a given
service using a terminal t.
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up ( c, t ), m , in Erlangs for the subcell (Txi, TCH) service area.
136
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up ( p, t ), m , in kbits/s for the subcell (Txi, TCH) service area.
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up ( p, t ), m , in kbits/s for the subcell (Txi, TCH) service area.
• Traffic overflowing from the TCH_INNER to the TCH is not uniformly spread over the
TCH service area. It is still located on the TCH_INNER service area.
Number of subscribers ( X up, m ) for each TCH_INNER (Txi, TCH_INNER) and TCH (Txi, TCH) subcell, per user profile up with a
given mobility m, is inferred as:
X up, m ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) = S up, m ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) × D
S up, m ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) and S up, m ( Txi,TCH ) respectively refer to the TCH_INNER and TCH subcell service areas containing the
user profile up with the mobility m. D is the user profile density.
For each user of the user profile up using a circuit switched service c with a terminal t, Atoll calculates the probability ( p up ( c, t ) )
of the user being connected. Calculations are detailed in "Circuit Switched Services" on page 135.
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up ( c, t ), m , in Erlangs in the (Txi, TCH_INNER) and (Txi, TCH) subcell service areas.
Where O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell.
For each user of the user profile up using a max rate packet switched service p with a terminal t, probability of the user being
connected ( p up ( p, t ) ) is calculated as explained in "Packet Switched Services" on page 135.
137
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up ( p, t ), m , in kbits/s in the (Txi, TCH_INNER) and (Txi, TCH) subcell service areas.
Where O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell.
For each user of the user profile up using a constant bit packet switched service p with a terminal t, probability of the user
being connected ( p up ( p, t ) ) is calculated as explained in "Packet Switched Services" on page 135.
Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up ( p, t ), m , in kbits/s in the (Txi, TCH_INNER) and (Txi, TCH) subcell service areas.
Where O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell.
Normal Cells
Atoll distributes traffic on the TCH service areas. The traffic capture is calculated with the option “Best signal level per HCS
macro
layer” meaning that there is an overlap between HCS layers service areas. Let S overlapping ( Txj, TCH ) denote this area (TCH
service area of the macro layer overlapped by the TCH service area of the micro layer). Traffic on the overlapping area is
distributed to the TCH subcell of the micro layer because it has a higher priority. On this area, traffic of the micro layer may
overflow to the macro layer. In this case, the traffic demand is the same on the TCH subcell of the micro layer but increases
on the TCH subcell of the macro layer.
Traffic overflowing to the macro layer is not uniformly spread over the TCH service area
of Txj. It is only located on the overlapping area.
Atoll evaluates the traffic demand on the micro layer (higher priority) as explained above. For further details, please refer to
formulas for normal cells. Then, it proceeds with the macro layer (lower priority).
macro
Number of subscribers ( X up, m ) for each TCH subcell (Txj, TCH) of the macro layer, per user profile up with the mobility m, is
inferred as:
macro macro macro
X up, m ( Txj, TCH ) = [ S up, m ( Txj, TCH ) – S up, m – overlapping ( Txj, TCH ) ] × D
macro
Where S up, m ( Txj, TCH ) is the TCH service area of Txj containing the user profile up with the mobility m and D is the profile
density.
For each user described in the user profile up with the circuit switched service c and the terminal t, the probability for the user
being connected ( p up ( c, t ) ) is calculated as explained in "Circuit Switched Services" on page 135.
macro
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up ( c, t ), m , in Erlangs in the subcell (Txj, TCH) service area.
138
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
macro
macro macro micro S up,m – overlapping ( Txj, TCH )
D up ( c, t ),m ( Txj, TCH ) = X up, m (Txj, TCH ) × p up ( c, t ) + D up ( c, t ),m (Txi, TCH ) × ------------------------------------------------------------------
micro
× Omax (Txi, TCH )
S up, m ( Txi, TCH )
For each user described in the user profile up with the packet switched service p and the terminal t, probability for the user
to be connected ( p up ( p, t ) ) is calculated as explained in "Packet Switched Services" on page 135.
macro
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up ( p, t ), m , in kbits/s in the subcell (Txj, TCH) service area.
macro
macro macro micro S up,m – overlapping ( Txj, TCH )
D up ( p, t ),m ( Txj, TCH ) = X up, m (Txj, TCH ) × p up ( p, t ) + D up ( p, t ),m (Txi, TCH ) × ------------------------------------------------------------------
micro
× Omax (Txi, TCH )
S up, m ( Txi, TCH )
Where O max ( Txi, TCH ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi (micro
micro
layer) and S up, m ( Txi, TCH ) is the TCH service area of Txi containing the user profile up with the mobility m.
Concentric Cells
Atoll evaluates the traffic demand on the micro layer (higher priority HCS layer) as explained above. For further details, please
refer to formulas given in case of concentric cells. Then, it proceeds with the macro layer (lower priority HCS layer).
The traffic capture is calculated with the option “Best signal level per HCS layer”. It means that there are overlapping areas
between HCS layers where traffic is spread according to the layer priority. On these areas, traffic of the higher priority layer
may overflow.
The TCH_INNER service area of the macro layer is overlapped by the micro layer. This area consists of two parts: an area
macro
overlapped by the TCH service area of the micro layer S overlapping – ( Txi, TCH ) ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) and another overlapped by the
macro
TCH_INNER service area of the micro layer S overlapping – ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) .
macro
S 2 = S up, m – overlapping – ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) ( Txj,TCH_INNER )
macro
S 3 = S up, m – overlapping – ( Txi, TCH ) ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) – S 2
macro
Where S up, m ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) is the TCH_INNER subcell service area of Txj containing the user profile up with the mobility
m. We only consider the overlapping areas containing the user profile up with the mobility m.
macro
On S1, the number of subscribers per user profile up with a given mobility m ( X up, m ) is inferred:
macro
X up, m ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) = S 1 × D
139
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
S2
R 2 = -------------------------------------------------------
micro
-
S up, m ( Txi,TCH_INNER )
The traffic spread over the ring served by the TCH subcell of the micro layer only may overflow on S3 proportional to R3.
S3
R 3 = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
micro micro
-
S up, m ( Txi,TCH ) – S up, m ( Txi,TCH_INNER )
micro micro
Where S up, m ( Txi,TCH ) and S up, m ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) are the TCH and TCH_INNER service areas of Txi respectively containing
the user profile up with the mobility m.
For each user described in the user profile up with a circuit switched service c and a terminal t, the probability for the user
being connected ( p up ( c, t ) ) is calculated as explained in "Circuit Switched Services" on page 135. Then, Atoll evaluates the
macro
traffic demand, D up ( c, t ), m , in Erlangs in the subcell (Txj, TCH_INNER) service area.
macro
X up, m ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) × p up ( c, t ) +
macro
D up ( c, t ), m ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) = R × D micro ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) × O ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) × O ( Txi,TCH ) +
2 up ( c, t ), m max max
micro
R 3 × X up, m ( Txi, TCH ) × p up ( c, t ) × O max ( Txi, TCH )
For each user described in the user profile up with a packet switched service p and a terminal t, probability for the user to be
connected ( p up ( p, t ) ) is calculated as explained in "Packet Switched Services" on page 135.
macro
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up ( p, t ), m , stated in kbits/s in the subcell (Txj, TCH_INNER) service area.
macro
X up, m ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) × p up ( p, t ) +
macro
D up ( p, t ), m ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) = R × D micro
2 up ( p, t ), m ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) × O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) × O max ( Txi,TCH ) +
micro
R 3 × X up, m ( Txi, TCH ) × p up ( p, t ) × O max ( Txi, TCH )
Where O max ( Txi, TCH ) and O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) are the maximum rates of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the
TCH and TCH_INNER subcells of Txi respectively.
The area of the TCH ring of the macro layer is overlapped by the micro layer. There are two parts: an area overlapped by the
macro
TCH service area of the micro layer S overlapping – ( Txi, TCH ) ( Txj,TCH -- TCH_INNER ) and another one by the TCH_INNER service
macro
area of the micro layer S overlapping – ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) ( Txj,TCH -- TCH_INNER ) .
macro
S' 2 = S up, m – overlapping – ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) ( Txj,TCH -- TCH_INNER )
macro
S' 3 = S up, m – overlapping – ( Txi, TCH ) ( Txj,TCH -- TCH_INNER ) – S' 2
macro macro
Where S up, m ( Txj,TCH ) and S up, m ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) are the TCH and TCH_INNER subcell service areas of Txj respectively.
We only consider the overlapping areas containing the user profile up with the mobility m.
macro
On S’1, the number of subscribers per user profile up with a given mobility m ( X up, m ) is inferred:
macro
X up, m ( Txj,TCH ) = S' 1 × D
140
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
S' 2
R' 2 = -------------------------------------------------------
micro
-
S up, m ( Txi,TCH_INNER )
The traffic spread over the ring served by the TCH subcell of the micro layer only may overflow on S’3 proportional to R’3.
S' 3
R' 3 = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
micro micro
-
S up, m ( Txi,TCH ) – S up, m ( Txi,TCH_INNER )
micro micro
Where S up, m ( Txi,TCH ) and S up, m ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) are the TCH and TCH_INNER service areas of Txi respectively containing
the user profile up with the mobility m.
For each user described in the user profile up with a circuit switched service c and a terminal t, the probability for the user
being connected ( p up ( c, t ) ) is calculated as explained in "Circuit Switched Services" on page 135.
macro
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up ( c, t ), m , in Erlangs in the subcell (Txj, TCH) service area.
macro
X up, m ( Txj, TCH ) × p up ( c, t ) +
macro
macro D up ( c, t ), m ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) × O max ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) +
D up ( c, t ), m ( Txj, TCH ) =
micro
R' 2 × D up ( c, t ), m ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) × O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) × O max ( Txi,TCH ) +
micro
R' 3 × X up, m ( Txi, TCH ) × p up ( c, t ), m × O max ( Txi, TCH )
For each user described in the user profile up with a packet switched service p and a terminal t, the probability for the user
being connected ( p up ( p, t ) ) is calculated as explained in "Packet Switched Services" on page 135.
macro
Then, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, D up ( p, t ), m , in kbits/s in the subcell (Txj, TCH) service area.
macro
X up, m ( Txj, TCH ) × p up ( p, t ) +
macro
macro D up ( p, t ), m ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) × O max ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) +
D up ( p, t ), m ( Txj, TCH ) =
micro
R' 2 × D up ( p, t ), m ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) × O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) × O max ( Txi,TCH ) +
micro
R' 3 × X up, m ( Txi, TCH ) × p up ( p, t ), m × O max ( Txi, TCH )
Where O max ( Txi,TCH ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi (micro layer),
O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) the maximum rate of traffic overflow indicated for the TCH_INNER subcell of Txi (macro layer),
O max ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) the maximum rate of traffic overflow indicated for the TCH_INNER subcell of Txj (macro layer) and
micro
X up, m ( Txi, TCH ) the number of subscribers with the user profile up and mobility m on the TCH service area of Txi (as
explained in "Concentric Cells" on page 135).
Let T p ( Txi, TCH ) denote the throughput of the packet switched service (Max Bit Rate), p, on the TCH subcell of Txi.
Let E p ( Txi, TCH ) denote the Erlangs for the packet switched service (Constant Bit Rate), p, on the TCH subcell of Txi.
We assume that 100% of users have the terminal, t, and the mobility type, m.
141
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
For each packet switched service (Max Bit Rate), p, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, Dp,t,m, in kbits/s in the subcell (Txi, TCH)
service area.
D p, t, m ( Txi, TCH ) = T p ( Txi, TCH )
For each packet switched service (Constant Bit Rate), p, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, Dp,t,m, in kbits/s in the subcell (Txi,
TCH) service area.
D p, t, m ( Txi, TCH ) = E p ( Txi, TCH ) × TP p, GBR
where TPp, GBR is the guaranteed bit rate of the constant bit rate packet switched service p.
Traffic overflowing from the TCH_INNER to the TCH is not uniformly spread over the TCH
service area. It is only located on the TCH_INNER service area.
For each circuit switched service, c, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, Dc,t,m, in Erlangs in the subcell, (Txi, TCH_INNER) and
(Txi, TCH), service areas.
S ( Txi,TCH_INNER )
D c, t, m ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) = -------------------------------------------- × E c ( Txi, TCH )
S ( Txi, TCH )
and
(--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
S ( Txi,TCH ) – S ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) )-
× E c ( Txi, TCH ) +
D c, t, m ( Txi,TCH ) = S ( Txi, TCH )
D c, t, m ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) × O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER )
For each packet switched service (Max Bit Rate), p, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, Dp,t,m, in kbits/s in the subcell, (Txi,
TCH_INNER) and (Txi, TCH), service areas.
S ( Txi,TCH_INNER )
D p, t, m ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) = -------------------------------------------- × T p ( Txi, TCH )
S ( Txi, TCH )
and
(--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
S ( Txi,TCH ) – S ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) )-
× T p ( Txi, TCH ) +
D p, t, m ( Txi,TCH ) = S ( Txi, TCH )
D p, t, m ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) × O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER )
Where O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell,
S ( Txi,TCH ) and S ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) are the TCH and TCH_INNER service areas of Txi respectively.
For each packet switched service (Constant Bit Rate), p, Atoll evaluates the traffic demand, Dp,t,m, in kbits/s in the subcell, (Txi,
TCH_INNER) and (Txi, TCH), service areas.
S ( Txi,TCH_INNER )
D p, t, m ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) = -------------------------------------------- × E p ( Txi, TCH ) × TP p, GBR
S ( Txi, TCH )
and
(--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
S ( Txi,TCH ) – S ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) )-
× E p ( Txi, TCH ) × TP p, GBR +
D p, t, m ( Txi,TCH ) = S ( Txi, TCH )
D p, t, m ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) × O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER )
Where O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell,
S ( Txi,TCH ) and S ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) are the TCH and TCH_INNER service areas of Txi respectively.
142
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
Normal Cells
Atoll distributes traffic on the TCH service areas. The traffic capture is calculated with the option “HCS Servers”. It means that
macro
there is an overlapping area between HCS layers. Let S overlapping ( Txj, TCH ) denote the TCH service area of the macro layer
overlapped by the TCH service area of the micro layer. Traffic on the overlapping area is distributed to the TCH subcell of the
micro layer (higher priority layer). On this area, traffic of the micro layer may overflow to the macro layer. In this case, the
traffic demand is the same on the TCH subcell of the micro layer but rises on the TCH subcell of the macro layer.
Traffic overflowing on the macro layer is not uniformly spread over the TCH service area
of Txj. It is only located on the overlapping area.
Atoll starts evaluating the traffic demand on the micro layer (highest priority HCS layer).
micro
For each circuit switched service, c, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D c, t, m , in Erlangs in the subcell (Txi, TCH) service area.
micro
D c, t, m ( Txi, TCH ) = E c ( Txi, TCH )
micro
For each packet switched service (Max Bit Rate), p, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D p, t, m , in kbits/s in the subcell (Txi,
TCH) service area.
micro
D p, t, m ( Txi, TCH ) = T p ( Txi, TCH )
micro
For each packet switched service (Constant Bit Rate), p, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D p, t, m , in kbits/s in the subcell
(Txi, TCH) service area.
micro
D p, t, m ( Txi, TCH ) = E p ( Txi, TCH ) × TP p, GBR
Then, Atoll proceeds with the macro layer (lower priority HCS layer).
macro
For each circuit switched service, c, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D c, t, m , in Erlangs in the subcell (Txj, TCH) service area.
macro
macro micro S overlapping ( Txj, TCH )
D c, t, m ( Txj, TCH ) = E c ( Txj, TCH ) + D c, t, m ( Txi, TCH ) × ----------------------------------------------------
micro
- × O max ( Txi, TCH )
S ( Txi, TCH )
macro
For each packet switched service (Max Bit Rate), p, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D p, t, m , in kbits/s in the subcell (Txj,
TCH) service area.
macro
macro micro S overlapping ( Txj, TCH )
D p, t, m ( Txj, TCH ) = T p ( Txj, TCH ) + D p, t, m ( Txi, TCH ) × ----------------------------------------------------
micro
- × O max ( Txi, TCH )
S ( Txi, TCH )
Where O max ( Txi, TCH ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi (micro cell) and
micro
S ( Txi, TCH ) the TCH service area of Txi.
macro
For each packet switched service (Constant Bit Rate), p, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D p, t, m , in kbits/s in the subcell
(Txj, TCH) service area.
macro
macro micro S overlapping ( Txj, TCH )
D p, t, m ( Txj, TCH ) = E p ( Txi, TCH ) × TP p, GBR + D p, t, m ( Txi, TCH ) × ----------------------------------------------------
micro
- × O max ( Txi, TCH )
S ( Txi, TCH )
Where O max ( Txi, TCH ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi (micro cell) and
micro
S ( Txi, TCH ) the TCH service area of Txi.
143
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
You can restrict the traffic assignement of each traffic map to a specific HCS layer in the
running options of the traffic capture. If you do so, no overflow occurs between HCS
layers and the only overflow which is considered occurs within concentric cells (See
"Concentric Cells" on page 135).
Concentric Cells
Atoll evaluates the traffic demand on the micro layer as explained above in case of concentric cells and then proceeds with
the macro layer (lower priority layer).
The traffic capture is calculated with the option “HCS Servers”. It means that there is overlapping areas between HCS layers
where traffic is spread over according to the layer priority. On these areas, traffic of the higher priority layer may overflow.
The TCH_INNER service area of the macro layer is overlapped by the micro layer. This area consists of two parts: an area
macro
overlapped by the TCH service area of the micro layer S overlapping – ( Txi, TCH ) ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) and another overlapped by the
macro
TCH_INNER service area of the micro layer S overlapping – ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) .
macro
S 2 = S overlapping – ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) ( Txj,TCH_INNER )
macro
S 3 = S overlapping – ( Txi, TCH ) ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) – S 2
macro
Where S ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) is the TCH_INNER subcell service area of Txj.
The traffic specified for Txj in the map description ( E c ( Txj, TCH ) ) is spread over S1 proportionally to R1.
S1
R 1 = -------------------------------------
map
S ( Txj, TCH )
map
S ( Txj, TCH ) is the TCH service area of Txj in the traffic map with the option “Best signal level of the highest priority layer”.
The traffic spread over the TCH_INNER service area of the micro layer may overflow to the TCH subcell. The traffic overflowing
to the TCH subcell is located on the TCH_INNER service area. On S2, the TCH subcell traffic coming from the TCH_INNER subcell
traffic overflow may overflow proportional to R2.
S2
R 2 = -------------------------------------------------------
micro
-
S ( Txi,TCH_INNER )
144
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
The traffic spread over the ring only served by the TCH subcell of the micro layer may overflow on S3 proportional to R3.
S3
R 3 = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
micro micro
-
S ( Txi,TCH ) – S ( Txi,TCH_INNER )
macro
For each circuit switched service, c, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D c, t, m , in Erlangs in the subcell (Txj, TCH_INNER)
service area.
R 1 × E c ( Txj, TCH ) +
micro
macro R 2 × D c, t, m ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) × O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) × O max ( Txi, TCH ) +
D c, t, m ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) =
micro micro
(S ( Txi, TCH ) – S ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) )
R 3 × ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
micro
- × E c ( Txi, TCH ) × O max ( Txi, TCH )
S ( Txi, TCH )
macro
For each packet switched service (Max Bit Rate), p, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D p, t, m , in kbits/s in the subcell (Txj,
TCH_INNER) service area.
R 1 × T p ( Txj, TCH ) +
micro
macro R 2 × D p, t, m ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) × O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) × O max ( Txi, TCH ) +
D p, t, m ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) =
micro micro
(S ( Txi, TCH ) – S ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) -)
R 3 × ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
micro
× T p ( Txi, TCH ) × O max ( Txi, TCH )
S ( Txi, TCH )
Where O max ( Txi, TCH ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi,
O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell of Txi and
micro
S ( Txi, TCH ) is the TCH subcell service area of Txi.
macro
For each packet switched service (Constant Bit Rate), p, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D p, t, m , in kbits/s in the subcell
(Txj, TCH_INNER) service area.
Where O max ( Txi, TCH ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi,
O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell of Txi and
micro
S ( Txi, TCH ) is the TCH subcell service area of Txi.
The area of the TCH ring of the macro layer is overlapped by the micro layer. There are two parts: an area overlapped by the
macro
TCH service area of the micro layer S overlapping – ( Txi, TCH ) ( Txj,TCH -- TCH_INNER ) and another overlapped by the TCH_INNER
macro
service area of the micro layer S overlapping – ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) ( Txj,TCH -- TCH_INNER ) .
macro
S' 2 = S overlapping – ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) ( Txj,TCH -- TCH_INNER )
macro
S' 3 = S overlapping – ( Txi, TCH ) ( Txj,TCH -- TCH_INNER ) – S' 2
macro macro
Where S ( Txj, TCH ) and S ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) are the TCH and TCH_INNER subcell service areas of Txj respectively.
The traffic specified for Txj in the map description ( E c ( Txj, TCH ) ) is spread over S’1 proportional to R’1.
145
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
S' 1
R' 1 = -------------------------------------
map
S ( Txj, TCH )
map
S ( Txj, TCH ) is the TCH service area of Txj in the traffic map with the option “Best signal level of the highest priority layer”.
The traffic spread over the TCH_INNER service area of the micro layer may overflow to the TCH subcell. The traffic overflowing
to the TCH subcell is located on the TCH_INNER service area. On S’2, the TCH subcell traffic coming from the TCH_INNER
subcell traffic overflow may overflow proportional to R’2.
S' 2
R' 2 = -------------------------------------------------------
micro
-
S ( Txi,TCH_INNER )
The traffic spread over the ring only served by the TCH subcell of the micro layer may overflow on S’3 proportional to R’3.
S' 3
R' 3 = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
micro micro
-
S ( Txi,TCH ) – S ( Txi,TCH_INNER )
macro
For each circuit switched service, c, Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D c, t, m , in Erlangs in the subcell (Txj, TCH) service area.
macro
For each packet switched service (Max Bit Rate), p,Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D p, t, m , in kbits/s in the subcell (Txj,
TCH) service area.
Where O max ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell of
Txj, O max ( Txi, TCH ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi,
O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell of Txi,
micro micro
S ( Txi,TCH ) is the TCH subcell service area of Txi and S ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) is the TCH_INNER subcell service area of Txi.
macro
For each packet switched service (Constant Bit Rate), p,Atoll calculates the traffic demand, D p, t, m , in kbits/s in the subcell
(Txj, TCH) service area.
146
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
Where O max ( Txj,TCH_INNER ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell of
Txj, O max ( Txi, TCH ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH subcell of Txi,
O max ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) is the maximum rate of traffic overflow (stated in %) specified for the TCH_INNER subcell of Txi,
micro micro
S ( Txi,TCH ) is the TCH subcell service area of Txi and S ( Txi,TCH_INNER ) is the TCH_INNER subcell service area of Txi.
3.6.1.2.1 Throughput
Throughput is defined as the amount of data delivered to the Logical Link Control Layer in a given unit of time. Each temporary
block flow (TBF), and hence each user, has an associated measured throughput sample in a given network. Each network will
have a different throughput probability distribution depending on the load and network configuration. Instead of using the
precise probability distributions, it is more practical to compute the average and percentile throughput values.
In GPRS, the resources are shared between the users being served, and consequently, the throughput is reduced as the
number of active users increases. This reduction in user perceived throughput is modelled through a reduction factor. The
throughput experienced by a user accessing a particular service can be calculated as:
User throughput = Number of allocated timeslots x Timeslot capacity x Reduction Factor
Or
147
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
Timeslot Capacity
The timeslot capacity is the average throughput per fully utilized timeslot. It represents the average throughput from the
network point of view. It mainly depends on the network’s propagation conditions and criteria in the coverage area of a
transmitter (carrier power, carrier-to-interference distribution, etc.). It is a measure of how much data the network is able to
transfer with 1 data Erlang, or in other words, how efficiently the hardware resources are being utilized by the network. It may
also depend on the RLC protocol efficiency.
Atoll computes the average timeslot capacity during the traffic analysis and is used to determine the minimum throughput
reduction factor. But since this information is displayed in the network dimensioning results (only due to relevance), this
information has been considered as a part of the network dimensioning process in this document.
Timeslot Utilisation
Timeslot utilization takes into account the average number of timeslots that are available for packet switched traffic. It is a
measure of how much the network is loaded with data services. Networks with timeslot utilisation close to 100% are close to
saturation and the end-user performance is likely to be very poor.
In Atoll this parameter is termed as the Load (Traffic load for circuit switched traffic and packet switched traffic load for packet
switched traffic). It is described in more detail in the Network dimensioning steps section.
Reduction Factor
Reduction factor takes into account the user throughput reduction due to timeslot sharing among many users. The figure
below shows how the peak throughput available per timeslot is reduced by interference and sharing.Reduction factor is a
function of the number of timeslots assigned to a user (Nu), number of timeslots available in the system (Ns) and the average
system packet switched traffic load (Lp) (utilization of resources in the system). Data Erlangs or data traffic is given by:
Data Erlangs = L P × N S
More precisely, the reduction factor is a function of the ratio Ns/Nu (Np). Np models the equivalent timeslots that are available
for the packet switched traffic in the system. For example, a 24-timeslot system with each user assigned 3 timeslots per
connection can be modelled by a single timeslot connection system with 8 timeslots in total.
The formula for reduction factor can be derived following the same hypotheses followed by Erlang in the derivation of the
blocking probability formulas (Erlang B and Erlang C).
Let X be a random variable that measures the reduction factor in a certain system state:
0 if n = 0
1 if 0 < n ≤ N P
X≡
NP
------ if n > N P
n
Where n is the instantaneous number of connections in the system. The throughput reduction factor is defined as:
∞
P( X= n)
RF ≡ X ⋅ --------------------
P(X= 0)
-
n=0
Or,
148
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
∞
P(X= n)
RF = X ⋅ ---------------------------
∞
-
P( X= i)
n=0
i 0
Here, P(X=n) is the probability function of having n connections in the system. Under the same assumptions as those of the
Erlang formulas, the probability function can be written as:
n
( LP ⋅ NP )
-----------------------
n!
P( X= n) = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NP
if 0 ≤ n ≤ N P
∞
i i
( LP ⋅ NP ) ( LP ⋅ NP )
---------------------
i!
+ ------------------------------
( i – NP )
i=0 i = NP + 1 N P! ⋅ N P
n
( LP ⋅ NP )
------------------------------
( i – NP )
N P! ⋅ N P
P ( X = n ) = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
N
if n > N P
P ∞
i i
( LP ⋅ NP ) ( LP ⋅ NP )
---------------------
i!
+ ------------------------------
( i – NP )
i=0 i = NP + 1 N P! ⋅ N P
This formula is not directly applicable in any software application due to the summations up to infinity. Atoll uses the following
version of this formula that is exactly the same formula without the summation overflow problem.
NP ( NP + 1 ) N
n P
n
( LP ⋅ NP ) NP L
----------------------- – ------------------- ⋅ ln ( 1 – L P ) + ----P
n! N P! n
n =1 n=1 -
RF = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
N
P NP
n
( LP ⋅ NP ) ( LP ⋅ NP ) LP
n! N P!
- ⋅ -------------
----------------------- + -------------------------
1 – LP
-
n=1
The default quality curves for the Reduction Factor have been derived using the above formula. Each curve is for a fixed
number of timeslots available for packet switched traffic (Np) describing the reduction factor at different values of packet
switched traffic load (Lp). The figure below contains all the reduction factor quality curves in Atoll. The Maximum reduction
factor can be 1, implying a maximum throughput, and the minimum can be 0, implying a saturated system with no data
throughput.
149
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
Figure 3.9: Reduction Factor for Different Packet Switched Traffic Loads (Lp, X-axis)
Each curve in the above figure represents an equivalent number of packet switched timeslots, NP.
3.6.1.2.2 Delay
Delay is the time required for an LLC PDU to be completely transferred from the SGSN to the MS, or vice versa. As the delay
is a function of the delays and the losses incurred at the packet level, the network parameters, such as the packet queue
length, and different protocol properties, such as the size of the LLC PDU, become important. It is also quite dependent upon
the radio access round trip time (RA RTT) and has a considerable impact on the application level performance viewed by the
user.
The delay parameter is a user level parameter rather than being a network level quantity, like throughput per cell, timeslot
capacity, TBF blocking and reduction factor, hence it is difficult to model and is currently under study. Hence, no default curve
is presently available for delay in Atoll.
P(X= n) for n = ( M ⋅ N P ) + 1
n
( LP ⋅ NP )
------------------------------
( i – NP )
N P! ⋅ N P
P(X= n) = N
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
P ∞
i i
( LP ⋅ NP ) ( LP ⋅ NP )
---------------------
i!
+ ------------------------------
( i – NP )
i=0 i = NP + 1 N P! ⋅ N P
150
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
∞
n
( LP ⋅ NP )
∞ -------------------------------
(1 – N )
P
-
n = M⋅N +1 P N ! ⋅ N P
P ( X = n ) = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
P
BP = N
-
P ∞
i i
n = M⋅N+1 ( LP ⋅ NP ) ( LP ⋅ NP )
--------------------- +
i! -------------------------------
( 1 – NP )
-
i=0 i = NP N
+1 P ! ⋅ N P
Eliminating the summations to infinity, the blocking probability can be stated in a simpler form:
M⋅N
P
( LP ⋅ NP ) LP
- ⋅ -------------
----------------------------------------- -
(M ⋅ N – N ) 1 – L
P P
N P! ⋅ N P P
BP = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
N
P NP
i
( LP ⋅ NP ) ( LP ⋅ NP ) LP
--------------------- + -------------------------- ⋅ -------------
i! N P! 1 – LP
-
i=0
The above formula has been used to generate the default quality curves for blocking probability in Atoll.
These graphs are generated for a user multiplexing factor of 8 users per timeslot. Each curve represents an equivalent number
of packet switched timeslots, NP.
The curves depict the blocking probabilities for different number of available connections (Np) at different packet switched
traffic loads (Lp) for a fixed user multiplexing factor of 8. The figure below contains all the blocking probability curves for
packet switched traffic dimensioning in Atoll. The blocking probability increases with the packet switched traffic load, which
implies that as the packet switched traffic increases for a given number of timeslots, the system starts to get more and more
loaded, hence there is higher probability of having a temporary block flow placed in a waiting queue.
Figure 3.10: Blocking Probability for Different Packet Switched Traffic Loads (Lp, X-axis)
151
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
On the whole, following are the inputs and outputs of the network dimensioning process:
3.6.2.1.1 Inputs
• Circuit switched traffic demand
• Packet switched traffic demand
• Timeslot configurations defined for each subcell
• Target traffic overflow rate and Half-rate traffic ratio for each subcell
• Service availability criteria: minimum required throughput per user, maximum permissible delay, maximum allowable
blocking probability etc.
• Dimensioning model parameters: Maximum number of TRXs per transmitter, dimensioning model for circuit switched
traffic, number of minimum dedicated packet switched timeslots per transmitter, maximum number of TRXs added
for packet switched services, KPIs to consider, and their quality curves.
3.6.2.1.2 Outputs
• Number of required TRXs per transmitter
• Number of required shared, circuit switched and packet switched timeslots
• Traffic load
• Served circuit switched traffic
• Served packet switched traffic
• Effective rate of traffic overflow
• Actual KPI values: throughput reduction factor, delay and blocking probability
152
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
If the user-defined target rate of traffic overflow per subcell, OTarget, is greater than the maximum blocking rate defined in the
services properties, it is going to be taken as the Grade of Service required for that subcell instead of the maximum blocking
rate of the service.
For the blocking probability GoS and circuit switched traffic demand TDC, Atoll determines the required number of timeslots
TSreq. C for each subcell using formulas described below. In fact, Atoll searches for TSreq. C value until the defined grade of
service is reached.
For Erlang B, we have:
TSreqC
( TD C )
----------------------------
( TS reqC )!
GoS = TS
------------------------------
reqC
k
( TD C )
---------------
k!
-
k=0
For Erlang C, we have:
TSreqC
( TD C )
GoS = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TS –1
-
reqC
k
TS reqC TD C ( TD C )
( TD C ) + ( TS reqC )! ⋅ 1 – --------------
- ⋅
----------------
TS reqC k!
k=0
Atoll considers the effect of half-rate circuit switched traffic by taking into account a user-defined percentage of half-rate
traffic. Atoll computes the effective equivalent number of full-rate timeslots that will be required to carry the total traffic with
the defined percentage of half-rate traffic.
If the number of timeslots required to accommodate the full-rate circuit switched traffic is TSreq. FR, and the percentage of
half-rate traffic within the subcell is defined by HR, then the effective number of equivalent full-rate circuit switched timeslots
TSeff. that can carry this traffic mix is calculated by:
Atoll employs this simplified approach to integrating half-rate circuit switched traffic, which provides approximately the same
results as obtained by using the half-rate traffic charts.
3.6.2.2.3 Step 3: Effective CS Blocking, Effective CS Traffic Overflow and Served CS Traffic
In this step, the previously calculated number of required TRXs is used to compute the effective blocking rate for the circuit
switched traffic. This is performed by using the Erlang B or Erlang C formula with the circuit switched traffic demand and the
number of required TRXs as inputs and computing the Grade of Service (or blocking probability). It then calculates the
effective traffic overflow rate, Oeff..
In case of Erlang B formula, the effective rate of traffic overflow for the circuit switched traffic is the same as the circuit
switched blocking rate. While in case of the Erlang C model, the circuit switched traffic is supposed to be placed in an infinite-
length waiting queue. This implies that there is no overflow in this case.
From this data, it also computes the served circuit switched traffic. This is the difference of the circuit switched traffic demand
and the percentage of traffic that overflows from the subcell to other subcells calculated above. Hence, for an effective traffic
overflow rate of Oeff. and the circuit switched traffic demand of TDC, the served circuit switched traffic STC is computed as:
153
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
ST C = TD C ⋅ ( 1 – O eff )
TS C = TS S + TS C, dedicated
( ST C – TS C, dedicated + TD P )
Timeslots
L P = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
TS P
The second important parameter for the calculation of Reduction Factor, Delay and Blocking Probability is the equivalent
number of available timeslots for packet switched traffic, i.e. NP. This is computed by dividing the total number of timeslots
available for carrying packet switched traffic by the number of downlink timeslots defined in the mobile terminal properties.
So, NP is calculated at this stage as:
TS P
N P = -----------------------
-
TS Terminal
Where, TSTerminal is the number of timeslots that a terminal will use in packet switched calls.
The number timeslots that a terminal can use in packet switched calls is the product of the number of available DL timeslots
for packet-switched services (on a frame) and the number of simultaneous carriers (in case of EDGE evolution).
The number of timeslots that a terminal will use in packet switched calls is determined by taking the lower of the maximum
number of timeslots on a carrier for packet switched service defined in the service properties and the maximum number of
timeslots that a mobile terminal can use for packet switched services (see above) on acarrier.
TS Terminal = min ( TS Max, Service, TS Max, TerminalType )
Here, the min(X,Y) function yields the lower value among X and Y as result.
Now, knowing the packet switched traffic load, LP, and the equivalent number of available timeslots, NP, Atoll finds out the
KPIs that have been selected before launching the dimensioning process using the quality curves stored in the dimensioning
model.
This particular part of this step can be iterative if the KPIs to consider in dimensioning are not satisfied in the first try. If the
KPIs calculated above are within acceptable limits as defined by the user, it means that the dimensioning process has
acceptable results. If these KPIs are not satisfied, then Atoll increases the number of TRXs calculated for carrying packet
switched traffic by 1 (each increment adding 8 more timeslots for carrying packet switched traffic as the least unit that can be
physically added or removed is a TRX) and resumes the computations from Step 3. It then recalculates the packet switched
traffic load, LP, and the equivalent number of available timeslots, NP. Then it recomputes the KPIs with these new values of LP
and NP. If the KPIs are within satisfactory limits the results are considered to be acceptable. Otherwise, Atoll performs another
iteration to find the best possible results.
154
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
The calculated values of all the KPIs are compared with the ones defined in the service properties. The values for maximum
Delay and Blocking probability are defined directly in the properties but the minimum throughput reduction factor is
calculated by Atoll using the user’s inputs: minimum throughput per user and required availability. This calculation is in fact
performed during the traffic analysis process, but since it is relevant to the dimensioning procedure, it is displayed in a column
in the dimensioning results so that the user can easily compare the minimum requirement on the reduction factor KPI with
the resulting one. If dimensioning is not based on a traffic analysis, the minimum throughput reduction factor is a user-defined
parameter.
The minimum throughput reduction factor is computed using the input data: minimum required throughput per user defined
in the service properties, the average throughput per timeslot deduced from the throughput curves stored in the GPRS/EDGE
configuration properties for each coding scheme, the total number of downlink timeslots defined in the properties of the
mobile terminal (See TS Max, TerminalType defintion above) and the required availability defined in the service properties.
It is at the stage of calculating the average timeslot capacity per transmitter that Atoll studies each covered pixel for carrier
power or carrier-to-interference ratio. According to the measured carrier power or carrier-to-interference ratio, Atoll deduces
the maximum throughput available on that pixel through the throughput vs. C or throughput vs. C/I curves of the GPRS/EDGE
configuration.
The throughput per timeslot per pixel TPTS, Pixel can be either a function of carrier power C, or carrier power C and the carrier-
to-interference ratio C/I, depending on the user-defined traffic analysis RF conditions criteria. Therefore,
TP TS, Pixel = f ( C )
Or
Once the minimum reduction factor for each pixel is known, Atoll calculates the global minimum reduction factor that is
satisfied by the percentage of covered pixels defined in the required availability. The following example may help in
understanding the concept and calculation method.
Example: Let the total number of pixels, covered by a subcell S, be 1050. The reliability level set to 90%. This implies that the
required minimum throughput for the given service will be available at 90% of the pixels covered. This, in turn, implies that
there will be a certain limit on the reduction factor, i.e. if the actual reduction factor in that subcell becomes less than a
minimum required, the service will not be satisfactory.
Atoll computes the minimum reduction factor at each pixel using the formula mentioned above, and outputs the following
results:
RFmin Number of pixels
0.3 189
0.36 57
0.5 20
0.6 200
0.72 473
0.9 23
0.98 87
So for a reliability level of 90%, the corresponding RFmin will be the one provided at least 90% of the pixels covered, i.e. 945
pixels. The corresponding value of the resulting RFmin in this example hence turns out to be 0.9, since this value covers 962
pixels in total. Only 87 of the covered pixels imply an RFmin of 0.98. These will be the pixels that do not provide satisfactory
service.
This calculation is performed for each service type available in the subcell coverage area. The final minimum throughput
reduction factor is the highest one amongst all calculated for each service separately.
155
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
The minimum throughput reduction factor RFmin value is a minimum requirement that must be fulfilled by the network
dimensioning process when the Reduction Factor KPI is selected in the dimensioning model.
Where,
• STC is the served circuit switched traffic
• STP is the served packet switched traffic
• TSC, dedicated is the number of dedicated circuit switched timeslots
• TSP, dedicated is the number of dedicated packet switched timeslots
• TSS is the number of shared timeslots
156
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
Then, the number of timeslots available for the circuit switched traffic, TSC, is defined as:
TS C = TS S + TS C, dedicated
And the number of timeslots available for the packet switched traffic, TSP, is given by:
TS P = TS S + TS P, dedicated
3.7.1.1 Erlang B
Under the current conditions of circuit switched traffic demand, TDC, and the number of timeslots available for the circuit
switched traffic, TSC, the percentage of blocked circuit switched traffic can be computed through:
TS C
( TD C )
---------------------
( TS C )!
% of blocked traffic = --------------------------
TS
C
k
( TD C )
----------------
k!
k=0
In a network dimensioning based on Erlang B model, the circuit switched traffic overflow rate, OC, is the same as the
percentage of traffic blocked by the subcell calculated above.
3.7.1.2 Erlang C
Similarly, under the current conditions of circuit switched traffic demand, TDC, and the number of timeslots available for the
circuit switched traffic, TSC, the percentage of delayed circuit switched traffic can be computed through:
TS C
( TD C )
% of traffic delayed = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TS – 1
-
C
k
TS C TD C ( TD C )
( TD C ) + ( TS C )! ⋅ 1 – --------- ⋅ ----------------
TS C k!
k=0
If the circuit switched traffic demand, TDC, is higher than the number of timeslots available to accommodate circuit switched
traffic, the column for this result will be empty signifying that there is a percentage of circuit switched traffic actually being
rejected rather than just being delayed under the principle of Erlang C model.
The circuit switched traffic overflow rate, OC, will be 0 if the circuit switched traffic demand, TDC, is less than the number of
timeslots available for the circuit switched traffic, TSC.
If, on the other hand, the circuit switched traffic demand, TDC, is higher than the number of timeslots available to carry the
circuit switched traffic, TSC, then there will be a certain percentage of circuit switched traffic that will overflow from the
subcell. This circuit switched traffic overflow rate, OC, is calculated as:
TD C – TS C
O C = -----------------------
TD C
ST C = TD C ⋅ ( 1 – O C )
TD T = TD C + TD P
157
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
3.7.2.1.4 Delay
Again for a 100% loaded or saturated subcell, the delay at the packet switched service user end will be infinite as there is no
data transfer (throughput = 0).
ST P = TD P ⋅ ( 1 – O P )
( ST C – TS C, dedicated + TD P )
Timeslots
L P = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
TS P
The second parameter for computing the KPIs from the quality curves of the dimensioning model is the number of equivalent
timeslots available for the packet switched data traffic, NP, which is calculated in the same manner as in the dimensioning
process as well:
TS P
N P = -----------------------
-
TS Terminal
These parameters calculated, now Atoll can compute the required KPIs through their respective quality curves.
158
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
TD T
Traffic Load = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
TS C, dedicated + TS P, dedicated + TS S
3.7.2.2.4 Delay
The resulting delay the subcell is calculated through the delay quality curve for given packet switched traffic load, LP, and
number of equivalent timeslots, NP.
If no focus zone exists in the .atl document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
159
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
Force adjacent transmitters as neighbours: This option enables you to force transmitters geographically adjacent to the
reference transmitter in the candidate neighbour list. This constraints can be weighted among the others and ranks the
neighbours through the importance field (see after).
• When this option is checked, adjacent cells are sorted and listed from the most
adjacent to the least, depending on the above criterion. Adjacence is relative to the
number of pixels satisfying the criterion.
• This criteria is only applicable to transmitters belonging to the same HCS layer. The
geographic adjacency criteria is not the same in 3G (UMTS HSPA, CDMA2000)
projects.
Force neighbour symmetry: This option enables user to force the reciprocity of a neighbourhood link. Therefore, if the
reference transmitter is a candidate neighbour of another transmitter, the later will be considered as candidate neighbour of
the reference transmitter.
Force exceptional pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbourhood relationships. Therefore, you may
force/forbid a transmitter to be candidate neighbour of the reference transmitter.
Delete existing neighbours: When selecting the Delete existing neighbours option, Atoll deletes all the current neighbours and
carries out a new neighbour allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept.
• There must be an overlapping zone ( S A ∩ S B ) with a given cell edge coverage probability where:
• SA is the area where the received signal level from the transmitter A is greater than a minimum signal level. SA is the
coverage area of reference transmitter A restricted between two boundaries; the first boundary represents the start
of the handover area (best server area of A plus the handover margin named “handover start”) and the second
boundary shows the end of the handover area (best server area of A plus the margin called “handover end”)
• SB is the coverage area where the candidate transmitter B is the best server.
SA ∩ SB
Atoll calculates either the percentage of covered area ( ------------------ × 100 ) if the option “Take into account Covered Area” is
SA
selected, or the percentage of traffic covered on the overlapping area S A ∩ S B for the option “Take into account Covered
Traffic”. Then, it compares this value to the % minimum covered area (minimum percentage of covered area for the option
“Take into account Covered Area” or minimum percentage of covered traffic for the option “Take into account Covered
Traffic”). If this percentage is not exceeded, the candidate neighbour B is discarded.
The coverage condition can be weighted among the others and ranks the neighbours through the importance field (see
number 4 below).
160
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
• The importance values are used by the allocation algorithm to rank the neighbours according to the allocation reason,
and to quantify the neighbour importance.
Atoll lists all neighbours and ranks them by importance value so as to eliminate some of them from the neighbour list if the
maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to each transmitter is exceeded. If we consider the case for which there are
15 candidate neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to the reference transmitter is 8. Among
these 15 candidate neighbours, only 8 (having the highest importances) will be allocated to the reference transmitter.
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site, adjacent, coverage or symmetric. For neighbours accepted for co-site,
adjacency and coverage reasons, Atoll displays the percentage of area meeting the coverage conditions (or the percentage of
covered traffic on this area) and the corresponding surface area (km2) (or the traffic covered on the area in Erlangs), the
percentage of area meeting the adjacency conditions and the corresponding surface area (km2). Finally, if cells have previous
allocations in the list, neighbours are marked as existing.
161
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers the following factors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
162
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
d
( Di ) = 1 – -----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Appendix: Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter
Distance" on page 163.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours, adjacent neighbours, and neighbours allocated based on coverage
overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
• The default value of Min(O) = 1% ensures that neighbours selected for symmetry will
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selected for symmetry will have an importance field greater than 0% only if there is
some coverage overlapping.
• By adding an option in the atoll.ini file, the neighbour allocation and importance
calculation can be based on the distance criterion only. For more information, see the
Administrator Manual.
d = D × ( 1 + x × cos β – x × cos α )
where x = 0.3% so that the maximum D variation does not exceed 1%.
163
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other will have a smaller effective distance than the real physical
distance. It is this effective distance that will be taken into account rather than the real distance.
For example:
• When i is NH, A i, g = 1 ⇔ g is a single member group containing one of the frequencies assigned at TRGi.
A i, g = Number of TRXs in TRGi ⇔ g is the set of frequencies assigned to TRXs of TRGi. (|g| = number of TRXs in
TRGi).
When we talk about "TRXs of i using g", and in the case of BBH, then there are |g| such virtual TRXs, each using
the entire group g and having a virtual MAIO [0, |g| - 1].
• When i is SFH, A i, g must be less than or equal to the umber of TRXs in TRGi. A i, g = n ⇔ g is the set of frequencies
assigned to n TRXs of TRGi.
We assume all the groups assigned to TRGi to have the same length.
A communication uses the group g in TRGi if its mobile allocation is g. The probability to be interfered is denoted by P i, i', g ( A )
(i’ is the TRX index). Different TRX indexes may have different MAIOs. P i, i', g ( A ) is a function of the whole frequency
164
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
assignment. The precise definition of the term “to be interfered” is provided afterwards. The probability penalty due to
violating a separation constraint is P i, i', g ( A ) . It is a function of the whole frequency assignment as well.
where,
Ψ mis represents the missing TRX cost component
Ψ comp represents the additional cost component (interference, cost of changing a TRX)
Ψ mis = ( MIS_TRX i × λ ) × TL i × CF i × TS i
i ∈ TRGs
Ψ corr = ( CORR_TRX i × Ω ) × TL i × CF i × TS i
i ∈ TRGs
Ψ dom = ( DOM_TRX i × ω ) × TL i × CF i × TS i
i ∈ TRGs
Ψ sep =
δ' i, i', g ( A ) × TL i × CF i × TS i
i ∈ TRGs
ARFCN
g∈2
i' ∈ TRXs of i using g
Ψ comp =
δ'' i, i', g ( A ) × TL i × CF i × TS i
i ∈ TRGs
ARFCN
g∈2
i' ∈ TRXs of i using g
• λ is the cost value for a missing TRX. This value can vary between 0 and 10. The default cost value is set to 1 and can
be modified in the AFP module properties dialog.
165
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
If i’ is valid, the algorithm evaluates the cost of a valid TRX. This cost has two components, δ' i, i', g ( A ) and δ'' i, i', g ( A ) .
• δ'' i, i', g ( A ) is complementary probability penalty due to interference and the cost of modifying a TRX.
If the option “Take into account the cost of all the TRXs” available in the AFP module properties dialog is selected,
then,
Or if the option “Do not include the cost of TRXs having reached their quality target” available in the AFP module
properties dialog is selected, the algorithm compares P' i, i', g ( A ) + P'' i, i', g ( A ) with the quality target specified for i,
P MAX :
Then δ' i, i', g ( A ) = P' i, i', g ( A ) and δ'' i, i', g ( A ) = P'' i, i', g ( A ) .
Otherwise,
P' i, i', g ( A ) is the same as δ' i, i', g ( A ) (separation violation probability penalty) and P'' i, i', g ( A ) the same as δ'' i, i', g ( A )
(complementary probability penalty due to interference and the cost of modifying a TRX) in most cases. These are explained
in detail in the next sections.
The AFP module properties dialog takes probability percentages as inputs while this
document deals in probability values.
ξ ii'kgg'k' is considered to be the effect of a separation violation on the i' th TRX of TRGi assigned the group g, caused by the
k' th TRX of TRGk assigned the group g' .
γ denotes the overall weight of the separation violation cost component. This value can be between 0 and 1, set to 1 by
default. It can be modified in the AFP module properties dialog.
166
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
γik represents the weight of the specific separation constraint between i and k. This specific weight depends on the type of
separation violation and follows the following priority rule:
1. Exceptional pairs
2. Co-transmitters
3. Co-site
4. Neighbours
For example, if a pair of subcells are co-site and neighbours at the same time, they will be considered as co-site because higher
priority. Hence, γik of these subcells will be the weight of co-site relations. If only a neighbour relation exists between two
subcells, then γik will be further weighted by the neighbour relation importance. The value of γik remains between 0 and 1.
The default weights of each type of separation are available in the Separation cost tab.
If ATOM ( i ) ≠ ATOM ( k )
SEP i, k, f – f'
f∈g
f' ∈ g'
Then ξ ii'kgg'k' = γ × γik × ----------------------------------------- , which is same for all values of k.
g × g'
If ATOM ( i ) = ATOM ( k )
SEP i, k, g υ – g' τ
f_n ∈ { 0, 1, ..., F_N – 1 }
Then ξ ii'kgg'k' = γ × γik × ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
F_N
In the above equations, F_N ( g ) is the number of frames in the MAL g. F_N ( g ) = g .
th
While υ = ( f_n + MAIO A ) modulo F_N and g υ is the υ frequency in g,
i, g, i'
th
And τ = ( f_n + MAIO A ) modulo F_N and g' τ is the τ frequency in g’.
k, g', k'
In addition, frequencies belonging to a MAL with a low fractional load, and breaking a separation constraint, should not be
weighted equally as in a non-hopping separation breaking case. Therefore, the cost is weighted by an interferer diversity gain.
1
Ĝ i, k, g, g' = -----------------------------------------------------------
( 0.1 × SEP_GAIN ( i, k, g , g' ) )
-
10
The separation gain, denoted by SEP_GAIN ( i, k, g , g' ) is basically a function of the MAL length (and, of course, of the
hopping mode). With frequency hopping, the effects of DTX and traffic load become more significant (due to the consideration
of the average case instead of the worst case). For this reason, it is possible to consider these effects in
SEP_GAIN ( i, k, g , g' ) through the relevant option available in the Advanced tab of the AFP module properties dialog.
Without this option, the SEP_GAIN ( i, k, g , g' ) is:
I_DIV ( g ) is the user defined interferer diversity gain (dB) for a given MAL length. It is used in P i, i', g ( A ) definition as well.
On the other hand, if this option is selected, the SEP_GAIN ( i, k, g , g' ) becomes,
( 2 + ASYN_GAIN ( i, k, g' ) )
SEP_GAIN ( i, k, g , g' ) = I_DIV ( g ) +0.5 × TSU_GAIN ( k ) × min 10, 4 + ( 2 + I_DIV ( g ) ) × -----------------------------------------------------------------
4
167
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
More than one separation violations may exist for a TRX. Many “small” Ĝ i, k, g, g' and ξ' ii'kgg' have to be combined to form one
cost element, the P' i, i', g ( A ) . This is done through iterating over all violating assignments and by summing up an equivalent
to the probability of not being violated while considering each separation violation as an independent probability event. This
sum is naturally limited to 100% of the TRX traffic, and is given by,
1 –
∏ ( 1 – ξ ii'kgg'k' × Ĝ i, k, g, g' )
P' i, i', g ( A ) =
k ∈ TRGs
g' ∈ 2
ARFCN
k' ∈ TRXs of k using g'
In the above formula, if ( k = i ) , then ( k' ≠ i' ) , so that interference with itself is not taken into account.
Interference histograms are described in User Manual (GSM GPRS EDGE project
management, GSM GPRS EDGE network optimisation, GSM GPRS EDGE generic AFP
management). Interference histograms can also be exported to files. For further
description, refer to "Interferences" on page 173.
• The QMINi C/I quality indicator corresponds to the accumulated interference level of all interferers while the C/I
interference histograms correspond to pair-wise interferences.
• Both QMINi and the histograms correspond to a single frequency. In case of a MAL containing more than one
frequencies, interferences on several different frequencies of a MAL must be combined.
This estimation, presented below, is the simplest possible as it solves the first problem by linear summation and
truncation at the value of 1 and it solves the second problem by averaging and adding the two diversity gains:
Hereafter, α denotes the global weight of interference cost component. This value can vary between 0 and 1 and is set to
0.35 by default, which can be modified in the AFP module properties dialog.
Let F_N ( g ) be the number of frames in the MAL g. F_N ( g ) = g .
Let MAIO A be the j’th MAIO of A k, g' , where j is one of the { 0, 1, ..., A k, g' – 1 } TRXs.
k, g', j
As said earlier, in case of BBH, we consider g' virtual TRXs, the jth TRX has the MAIO j.
Similar to the definition of ξ ii'kgg'k' , ξ' ii'kgg'k' is defined as an interference event. ξ' ii'kgg'k' is the effect interference on the i' th
TRX of TRGi assigned the group g, caused by the k' th TRX of TRGk assigned the group g' .
168
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
If ATOM ( i ) ≠ ATOM ( k )
If ATOM ( i ) = ATOM ( k )
Then,
Since F_N ( g ) = F_N ( g' ) , these are both represented by F_N .
f' = g' τ ,
Therefore, we have, P'' i, i', g ( A ) = 1 – ( 1 – P' i, i', g ( A ) ) ×
∏ ( 1 – ξ ii'kgg'k' ) – P' i, i', g ( A )
k ∈ TRGs
ARFCN
g' ∈ 2
k' ∈ TRXs of k using g'
In the above formula, if ( i = k ) , then ( k' ≠ i' ) , so that interference with itself is not taken into account.
The sum is limited to 100% of the TRX traffic. INTERF_GAIN ( i, k, g , g' ) is quite similar to SEP_GAIN ( i, k, g , g' ) . The only
difference is the frequency diversity gain, F_DIV ( g ) , added to SEP_GAIN ( i, k, g , g' ) .
169
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
Figure 3.15: The Advanced tab of the AFP module Properties dialogue
The Interference Diversity Gain table lists the values of I_DIV provided as a functions of MAL length. This gain is applied to the
interference cost component and to the separation constraint violation cost component. Therefore, it provides a means to
model the non-linear FER effects and interference diversity both. The default values in this table correspond to the curve
y = 2 × log 10 ( x ) . This equation generates values somewhat lower than empirical best-found values (this is because we
prefer a slightly pessimistic cost function to be on the safe side).
The other table contains the F_DIV values, which are the same as the I_DIV values by default.
170
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
WE = d ( i ) × ts ( i ) × L ( i ) × CF ( i )
i=0
With the optimisation of the number of TRXs, the network’s weighted Erlangs are calculated as follows:
n
WE = nb ( i ) × ts ( i ) × { BL ( nb ) + L ( nb ) } × CF ( i )
i=0
BL ( nb ) and L ( nb ) represent the load estimation and the blocked load estimation of the AFP. They are calculated at traffic
pool level for the vector {nb(0), nb(1), nb(2), …, nb(n)} as follows:
HR
PS + CS × 1 – -------------
2
BL ( nb ) + L ( nb ) = ---------------------------------------------------------------
n
nb ( i ) × ts ( i )
Max 1,
i=0
n
Where HR = Max i = 0 ( HR ( i ) )
BL ( nb ) is determined from the above equation once L ( nb ) is known. L ( nb ) is obtained from the Erlang B equation applied
to the traffic pool demand and the total number of timeslots (TTS):
n
nb ( i ) × ts ( i )
TTS = Max 1,
------------------------------
HR
i = 0 1 – -------------
2
The above equations give the number of served circuit-switched timeslots (SCS):
SCS + SPS
L ( nb ) = ---------------------------------------------------------------
n
Max 1, nb ( i ) × ts ( i )
i=0
BL ( nb ) is given by:
PS + CS × 1 – -------------
HR
2
BL ( nb ) = --------------------------------------------------------------- – L ( nb )
n
Max 1, nb ( i ) × ts ( i )
i=0
171
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
Once L ( nb ) and BL ( nb ) are known, L ( nb ) replaces TLi in the cost function (See "The AFP Cost Function" on page 164), and
BL ( nb ) is used to generate a new cost component, the blocked Erlangs of the pool:
n
nb ( i ) × ts ( i ) × BL ( nb ) × CF ( i )
i=0
n
d ( i ) × ts ( i )
• TTS' : TTS' = Max 1,
----------------------------
HR
i = 0 1 – -------------
2
• MB: Maximum blocking rate (between 0 and 1).
The ratio of packet-switched demand is given by:
PS
R = -----------------------------------------------------
PS + CS × 1 – -------------
HR
2
Here, we assume that a traffic load of 1 is generated by a demand of (1+MB)*TTS’ which generates a blocking rate of MB. In
other words, the ratio is calculated so that the worst case blocking rate is BM, giving a load of 1.
The following equations are solved to find PS’, CS’, and R’, which are calculated for a traffic load of 1.
MB = ErlangB ( CS', TTS' )
PS'
R' = -------------------------------------------------------
PS' + CS' × 1 – -------------
HR
2
PS'
( 1 + MB ) × TTS' = ---------------------------- + CS'
1 – -------------
HR
2
When the traffic load of a pool is not 1, PS is different from PS’ and CS is different from CS’. Here, however, we assume that
R’ = R. This assumption implies that R is more or less the same as MB for big traffic pools and considerably larger than MB for
smaller pools.
The following equations are solved to find PS, CS, and R, which are calculated for the actual traffic loads.
PS
R = -----------------------------------------------------
PS + CS × 1 – -------------
HR
2
n
SPS = Min PS, Max 1, d ( i ) × ts ( i ) – SCS
i=0
n
SCS + SPS = d ( i ) × ts ( i ) × L ( i )
i=0
The above five equations are solved to get the values of the five variables PS, PC, P Blocking , SCS, SPS, and calculate the cost.
172
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
L ( nb )
Effective Overflow rate = 1 – --------------------------------------
L ( nb ) + BL ( nb )
Output: New values for CS and PS.
3.9.3 Interferences
This appendix provides a high-level overview of interferences taken into account by the AFP.
Figure 3.16: The cumulative density of C/I levels between [TX1, BCCH] and [TX2, BCCH]
In this case, we observe that the probability for C/I (BCCH of TX2 effecting the BCCH of TX1) being greater than 0 is
100% (which is normal because TX1 is the Best Server). The probability of having a C/I value at least equal to 31 dB is
31.1%. For a required C/I level of 12 dB on the BCCH of TX1, the interference probability is 6.5% (as this requirement
is fulfilled with a probability of 93.5%).
173
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
The subcell power offset does not enter the calculation results in the .clc file. It is added
later by the AFP interface. On the other hand, its influence on the subcell service zone is
taken into account in the .clc file.
174
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks
175
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3: GSM GPRS EDGE Networks © Forsk 2011
176
Chapter 4
UMTS HSPA Networks
This chapter describes UMTS HSPA calculations.
Total losses ( L total ) in dBm L total = ( L path + L Tx + L term + L indoor + M Shadowing – model ) – ( G Tx + G term )
where,
EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the transmitter,
ic is a carrier number,
L model is the loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated by the propagation model,
M Shadowing – model is the shadowing margin. This parameter is taken into account when the option “Shadowing taken into
account” is selected,
L Indoor are the indoor losses, taken into account when the option “Indoor coverage” is selected,
L Tx is the transmitter loss ( L Tx = L total – DL ). For information on calculating transmitter loss, see "UMTS, CDMA2000, TD-
SCDMA, WiMAX, and LTE Documents" on page 26.
For a selected transmitter, it is also possible to study the path loss, L path , or the total
losses, L total . Path loss and total losses are the same on any carrier.
179
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
• For a selected transmitter, it is also possible to study the path loss, L path , or the total
losses, L total . Path loss and total losses are the same on any carrier.
• You can use a value other than 30 dB for the margin from the best server signal level,
for example a smaller value for improving the calculation speed. For more
information on defining a different value for this margin, see the Administrator
Manual.
And
j≠i
• If the margin equals 0 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received from
Txi is the highest.
• If the margin is set to 2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
from Txi is either the highest or 2dB lower than the highest.
• If the margin is set to -2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
from Txi is 2dB higher than the signal levels from transmitters, which are 2nd best
servers.
180
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
And
Txi nd Txj
P rec ( ic ) ≥ 2 Best ( P rec ( ic ) ) – M
j≠i
• If the margin equals 0 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received from
Txi is the second highest.
• If the margin is set to 2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
from Txi is either the second highest or 2dB lower than the second highest.
• If the margin is set to -2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
from Txi is 2dB higher than the signal levels from transmitters, which are 3rd best
servers.
Atoll calculates signal level received from the transmitter on each pixel of each transmitter service area. A pixel of a service
area is coloured if the signal level is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (pixel colour depends on signal
level). Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many
layers as transmitter service areas. Each layer shows the different signal levels available in the transmitter service area.
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter service area. Where other service
areas overlap the studied one, Atoll chooses the highest value. A pixel of a service area is coloured if the signal level is greater
than or equal to the defined thresholds (the pixel colour depends on the signal level). Coverage consists of several
independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each
layer corresponds to an area where the signal level from the best server exceeds a defined minimum threshold.
Atoll calculates path loss from the transmitter on each pixel of each transmitter service area. A pixel of a service area is
coloured if path loss is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (pixel colour depends on path loss). Coverage
consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as service
areas. Each layer shows the different path loss levels in the transmitter service area.
Atoll calculates total losses from the transmitter on each pixel of each transmitter service area. A pixel of a service area is
coloured if total losses is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (pixel colour depends on total losses).
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers
as service areas. Each layer shows the different total losses levels in the transmitter service area.
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter service area. Where other service
areas overlap the studied one, Atoll determines the best transmitter and evaluates path loss from the best transmitter. A pixel
181
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
of a service area is coloured if the path loss is greater than or equal to the defined thresholds (pixel colour depends on path
loss). Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many
layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the path loss from the best server exceeds a defined
minimum threshold.
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each pixel of each transmitter service area. Where service areas
overlap the studied one, Atoll determines the best transmitter and evaluates total losses from the best transmitter. A pixel of
a service area is coloured if the total losses is greater than or equal to the defined thresholds (pixel colour depends on total
losses). Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many
layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the total losses from the best server exceed a defined
minimum threshold.
Number of Servers
Atoll evaluates how many service areas cover a pixel in order to determine the number of servers. The pixel colour depends
on the number of servers. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed.
There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the number of servers is greater than
or equal to a defined minimum threshold.
On each pixel of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels where the signal level from this
transmitter fulfils signal conditions defined in Conditions tab with different Cell edge coverage probabilities. There is one
coverage area per transmitter in the explorer.
On each pixel of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels where the best signal level received
fulfils signal conditions defined in Conditions tab. There is one coverage area per cell edge coverage probability in the explorer.
4.2.1 Inputs
This table lists simulation and prediction inputs (calculation options, quality targets, active set management conditions, etc.).
Term
F MUD Terminal parameter - HSDPA properties None MUD factor
req
Q pilot E----c Mobility parameter None
Ec/I0 target on downlink for the best
I 0 threshold server
DL E b
----
DL
-
Q req N t req (Reception equipment, R99 bearer, Mobility) parameter None Eb/Nt target on downlink
182
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
UL E b
UL
----
Q req - (Reception equipment, R99 bearer, Mobility) parameter None Eb/Nt target on uplink
N t req
183
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
Cell parameter
Tx, UL
NR inter – techno log y Only used in uplink interference-based calculations of the Monte- None Inter-technology uplink noise rise
Carlo simulation
Tx Tx, UL
N0 NF Tx × K × T × W × NR inter – techno log y W Thermal noise at transmitter
Term Tx, DL
N0 NF Term × K × T × W × NR inter – techno log y W Thermal noise at terminal
Rc –3
W ⋅ 10 W bps Chip rate
UL
f rake efficiency Site equipment parameter None Uplink rake receiver efficiency factor
184
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
UL
f act Service parameter kbps Uplink activity factor for the service
W
Gp
UL ------------------- None Service uplink processing gain
UL
R nominal
DL
R RLC – peak RLC peak rate supported by the
HSDPA bearer parameter kbps
( I HSDPABearer ) HSDPA bearer
DL
Without MIMO: R RLC – peak ( I HSDPABearer )
DL
DL With MIMO (transmit diversity): R RLC – peak ( I HSDPABearer ) RLC peak rate provided to the user in
R RLC – peak ( Tx, ic ) kbps
With MIMO (spatial multiplexing): the cell (Txi,ic) in the downlink
DL Max
R RLC – peak ( I HSDPABearer ) × ( 1 + f SM – Gain × ( G SM – 1 ) ) )
DL
R RLC – peak ( Tx, ic )
ic ∈ Tx
185
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
UL
R RLC – peak RLC peak rate supported by the
HSUPA bearer parameter kbps
( I HSUPABearer ) HSUPA bearer
UL
R Guaranteed HSUPA bearer consumption for a
C HSUPABearer ---------------------------------------------------------
- % packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate)
UL
R RLC – peak ( I HSUPABearer ) service user
UL Minimum RLC throughput supported
T RLC – Min HSUPA study result kbps
by the HSUPA bearer
UL Average RLC throughput supported
T RLC – Av HSUPA study result kbps
by the HSUPA bearer
UL MAC rate supported by the HSUPA
R MAC HSUPA study result kbps
bearer
ΔR Service parameter (for HSDPA only) kbps Throughput offset
Cell parameter (user-defined or simulation result) (for HSDPA only) Available cell HSDPA power
P HSDPA ( Txi, ic ) W HSDPA: High Speed Downlink Packet
P HS – PDSCH ( Txi, ic ) + n HS – SCCH × P HS – SCCH ( Txi, ic )
Access
186
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
min
P term Terminal parameter W Minimum terminal power allowed
max
P term Terminal parameter W Maximum terminal power allowed
UL
G Div R99 bearer parameter - Depends on the transmitter Rx diversity None Gain due to receive diversity
187
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and DL Eb/Nt DL Eb/Nt Shadowing margin
DL
None
standard deviation Only used in prediction studies
M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and UL Eb/Nt UL Eb/Nt Shadowing margin
UL
None
standard deviation Only used in prediction studies
UL npaths
G macro – diversity = M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) – M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt )
UL UL UL UL quality gain due to signal diversity
G macro – diversity None
n=2 or 3 in soft handoffc.
Global parameter (default value)
Random shadowing error drawn
E Shadowing Simulation result None during Monte-Carlo simulation
Only used in simulations
In prediction studiesd
P pilot ( Txi, ic )
P c ( Txi, ic ) -------------------------------- W Chip power received at terminal
LT
188
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
a. L Tx = L total – UL on uplink and L Tx = L total – DL on downlink. For information on calculating transmitter losses on uplink and downlink,
see "UMTS, CDMA2000, TD-SCDMA, WiMAX, and LTE Documents" on page 26.
npaths
b. M Shadowing –Ec ⁄ Io corresponds to the shadowing margin evaluated from the shadowing error probability density function (n paths) in case
of downlink Ec/I0 modelling.
npaths
c. M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) corresponds to the shadowing margin evaluated from the shadowing error probability density function (n paths) in
UL
case of uplink soft handoff modelling.
d. In uplink prediction studies, only carrier power level is downgraded by the shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) ). In downlink
UL
prediction studies, carrier power level and intra-cell interference are downgraded by the shadowing model ( M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) or
DL
M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io ) while extra-cell interference level is not. Therefore, M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) or M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io is set to 1 in downlink
DL
extra-cell interference calculation.
Tx Downlink inter-technology
P Transmitted ( ic i )
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) --------------------------------------
Tx
L total × ICP ic , ic
Tx, m W interference at terminal on carrier ic
ni i a
Without Pilot:
DL DL DL DL
I intra ( txi, ic ) + I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic )
Term
DL + N0 – ( 1 – α ) × ρ BTS × P c ( txi, ic ) Total received noise at terminal on
I 0 ( ic ) W
carrier ic
DL DL DL
P tot ( txi, ic ) + I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic )
Total noise:
DL Term
+ I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N 0
189
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
a. In the case of an interfering GSM external network in frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional load.
a. In the case of an interfering GSM external network in frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional load.
b. Calculation option may be selected in the Global parameters tab. The chosen option will be taken into account only in simulations. In point
analysis and coverage studies, Atoll uses the option “Total noise” to evaluate DL and UL Eb/Nt.
190
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Pb
UL
( ic adj )
UL Uplink inter-carrier interference at
I inter – carrier ( txi, ic ) term W
txj, ∀j
terminal on carrier ic
-----------------------------------
-
RF ( ic, ic adj )
UL
No HO: Q tch ( txi, ic )
UL UL
Softer HO: f rake efficiency × Q tch ( txk, ic )
tx k ∈ ActiveSet
( samesite )
UL
× G macro – diversity
UL
UL Q ( ic )
G SHO --------------------------------------------------- None Soft handover gain on uplink
UL
Q tch ( BestServer, ic )
a. Calculation option may be selected in the Global parameters tab. The chosen option will be taken into account only in simulations. In point
analysis and coverage studies, Atoll uses the option “Total noise” to evaluate DL and UL Eb/Nt.
191
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
The pilot quality from the best serving cell must exceed the Ec/I0 threshold. Best server cell is the one with the highest
pilot quality.
• Other cells in the active set
• Must use the same carrier as the best server,
• The pilot quality difference between other candidate cells and the best server must be less than the AS threshold
specified for the best server,
• Other candidate cells must belong to the neighbour list of the best server if it is located on a site where the
equipment imposes this restriction (the “restricted to neighbours” option selected in the equipment properties).
4.4 Simulations
The simulation process consists of two steps:
1. Obtaining a realistic user distribution
Atoll generates a user distribution using a Monte-Carlo algorithm, which requires traffic maps and data as input. The
resulting user distribution complies with the traffic database and maps provided to the algorithm.
Each user is assigned a service, a mobility type, and an activity status by random trial, according to a probability law
that uses the traffic database.
The user activity status is an important output of the random trial and has direct consequences on the next step of
the simulation and on the network interferences. A user may be either active or inactive. Both active and inactive
users consume radio resources and create interference.
Then, Atoll randomly assigns a shadowing error to each user using the probability distribution that describes the
shadowing effect.
Finally, another random trial determines user positions in their respective traffic zone and whether they are indoors
or outdoors (according to the clutter weighting and the indoor ratio per clutter class defined for the traffic maps).
2. Power control simulation
Atoll determines the total number of users attempting connection in each simulation
based on the Poisson distribution. This may lead to slight variations in the total numbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulation of a group, add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0
192
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
• When user profile traffic maps are composed of lines, the number of subscribers (X)
per user profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (D)
(nb of subscribers per km) as follows: X = L × D
• The number of subscribers (X) is an input when a user profile traffic map is composed
of points.
For each behaviour described in a user profile, according to the service, frequency use and exchange volume, Atoll calculates
the probability for the user being active in uplink and in downlink at an instant t.
N call × d
p o = -------------------
-
3600
ni = X × p0
Next, we can take into account activity periods during the connection in order to determine the activity status of each user.
• Calculation of activity probabilities:
UL DL
Probability of being inactive on UL and DL: p inactive = ( 1 – f act ) × ( 1 – f act )
UL DL
Probability of being active on UL only: p UL = f act × ( 1 – f act )
DL UL
Probability of being active on DL only: p DL = f act × ( 1 – f act )
UL DL
Probability of being active both on UL and DL: p UL + DL = f act × f act
UL DL
Where, f act and f act are respectively the UL and DL activity factors defined for the circuit switched service i.
Therefore, a user when he is connected can have four different activity status: either active on both links, or inactive on both
links, or active on UL only, or active on DL only.
A packet session consists of several packet calls separated by a reading time. Each packet call is defined by its size and may be
divided in packets of fixed size (1500 Bytes) separated by an inter arrival time.
In Atoll, a packet session is described by following parameters:
UL
N packet –c all : Average number of packet calls on the uplink during a session,
193
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
DL
N packet –c all : Average number of packet calls on the downlink during a session,
UL
ΔT packet – call : Average time (millisecond) between two packets calls on the uplink ,
DL
ΔT packet – call : Average time (millisecond) between two packets calls on the downlink ,
UL
ΔT packet : Average time (millisecond) between two packets on the uplink ,
DL
ΔT packet : Average time (millisecond) between two packets on the downlink ,
UL
S packet : Packet size (Bytes) on uplink,
DL
S packet : Packet size (Bytes) on downlink.
The number of users and their distribution per activity status is determined as follows:
• Calculation of the average packet call size (kBytes):
UL V UL DL V DL
S packet –c all = ----------------------------------------
UL UL
and S packet –c all = ----------------------------------------
DL DL
N packet –c all × f eff N packet –c all × f eff
UL DL
Where f eff and f eff are the UL and DL efficiency factors defined for the packet switched service j.
UL DL
For packet (HSDPA) and packet (HSPA) services, f eff and f eff are set to 1.
1kBytes = 1024Bytes.
194
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
UL UL DL DL
UL UL N packet × S packet × 8 N packet × S packet × 8
- and ( D DL
( D Activity ) session = N packet –c all × ------------------------------------------------
DL
Activity ) session = N packet – c all × ------------------------------------------------
-
UL DL
R average × 1000 R average × 1000
UL DL
Where R average and R average are the uplink and downlink average requested rates defined for the service j.
UL N sess N sess
- × D UL
p Connection = -----------
DL DL
Connection and p Connection = ------------ × D Connection
3600 3600
• Calculation of the probability of being connected:
UL DL
p Connected = 1 – ( 1 – p Connection ) × ( 1 – p Connection )
Therefore, the number of users who want to get the service j is:
n j = X × p Connected
As you can see on the picture above, we have to consider three possible cases when a user is connected:
• 2nd case: At a given time, packet are uploaded (no packet is downloaded).
Here, the probability of being connected is:
UL DL
UL p Connection × ( 1 – p Connection )
p Connected = -----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
p Connected
• 3rd case: At a given time, packet are downloaded (no packet is uploaded).
In this case, the probability of being connected is:
DL UL
DL p Connection × ( 1 – p Connection )
p Connected = -----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
p Connected
Now, we have to take into account activity periods during the connection in order to determine the activity status of each
user.
• Calculation of the probability of being active:
UL DL
UL ( D Activity ) session DL ( D Activity ) session
f = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UL UL
and f = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DL DL
( ( D Inactivity ) session + ( D Activity ) session ) ( ( D Inactivity ) session + ( D Activity ) session )
Therefore, we have:
The user can be active on DL and inactive on UL; this probability is:
1 DL UL UL + DL
p DL = f × ( 1 – f ) × p Connected
195
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
• 2nd case: At a given time, packet are uploaded (no packet is downloaded).
The user can be active on UL and inactive on DL; this probability is:
2 UL UL
p UL = f × p Connected
• 3rd case: At a given time, packet are downloaded (no packet is uploaded).
The user can be active on DL and inactive on UL; this probability is:
3 DL DL
p DL = f × p Connected
1 2
Number of users active on UL and inactive on DL: n j ( UL ) = n j × ( p UL + p UL )
1 3
Number of users active on DL and inactive on UL: n j ( DL ) = n j × ( p DL + p DL )
1
Number of users active on UL and DL: n j ( UL + DL ) = n j × p UL + DL
Therefore, a user when he is connected can have four different activity status: either active on both links, or inactive on both
links, or active on UL only, or active on DL only.
The user distribution per service and the activity status distribution between the users
are average distributions. And the service and the activity status of each user are
randomly drawn in each simulation. Therefore, if you compute several simulations at
once, the average number of users per service and average numbers of inactive, active
on UL, active on DL and active on UL and DL users, respectively, will correspond to
calculated distributions. But if you check each simulation, the user distribution between
services as well as the activity status distribution between users is different in each of
them.
UL
Rt is the kbits per second transmitted in UL in the Txi cell to supply the service.
DL
Rt is the kbits per second transmitted in DL in the Txi cell to supply the service.
DL
R average is the downlink average requested rate defined for the service,
UL
R average is the uplink average requested rate defined for the service.
196
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
UL DL
Probability of being active in UL only: p UL = f act × ( 1 – f act )
DL UL
Probability of being active in DL only: p DL = f act × ( 1 – f act )
UL DL
Probability of being active both in UL and DL: p UL + DL = f act × f act
UL DL
Where, f act and f act are respectively the UL and DL activity factors defined for the service i.
( p DL + p UL + DL ) × ( n j ( UL ) + n j ( DL ) + n j ( UL + DL ) ) = N DL
Therefore, we have:
N UL × p UL + DL N DL × p UL + DL
Number of users active in UL and DL both: n i ( UL + DL ) = min ---------------------------------, --------------------------------
p UL + p UL + DL p DL + p UL + DL
inactive ( n j ( UL ) + n j ( DL ) + n j ( UL + DL ) )
Number of inactive users in UL and DL: n i - × p inactive
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 – p inactive
Therefore, a connected user can have four different activity status: either active in both links, or inactive in both links, or active
in UL only, or active in DL only.
Atoll takes into account activity periods during the connection in order to determine the activity status of each user.
Activity probabilities are calculated as follows:
UL DL
Probability of being inactive in UL and DL: p inactive = ( 1 – f act ) × ( 1 – f act )
UL DL
Probability of being active in UL only: p UL = f act × ( 1 – f act )
DL UL
Probability of being active in DL only: p DL = f act × ( 1 – f act )
UL DL
Probability of being active both in UL and DL: p UL + DL = f act × f act
UL DL
Where, f act and f act are respectively the UL and DL activity factors defined for the service i.
197
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
Therefore, a connected user can have four different activity status: either active in both links, or inactive in both links, or active
in UL only, or active in DL only.
The activity status distribution between users is an average distribution. In fact, in each
simulation, the activity status of each user is randomly drawn. Therefore, if you compute
several simulations at once, average numbers of inactive, active on UL, active on DL and
active on UL and DL users correspond to the calculated distribution. But if you check each
simulation, the activity status distribution between users is different in each of them.
198
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Initialisation
R99 part
HSDPA part
Mobile Scheduling
HSUPA part
Admission Control
Convergence Study
As shown in Figure 4.2 on page 199, the simulation algorithm is divided in three parts. All users are evaluated by the R99 part
of the algorithm. HSDPA and HSUPA bearer users, unless they have been rejected during the R99 part of the algorithm, are
then evaluated by the HSDPA part of the algorithm. Finally, HSUPA bearer users, unless they have been rejected during the
R99 or HSDPA parts of the algorithm, are then evaluated by the HSUPA part of the algorithm.
The steps of this algorithm are detailed below.
UL intra UL extra
UL
Uplink powers received by the base station txi on carrier ic m , I tot ( txi, ic m ) , I tot ( txi, ic m ) and I inter – carrier ( txi, ic m )
are initialised to 0 W (i.e. no connected mobile).
UL
UL I tot ( txi, ic m )
Therefore, we have: ( X R99 ( txi, ic m ) ) k = -------------------------------
UL
- = 0
N tot ( txi, ic m )
199
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
For each transmitter txi containing Mb in its calculation area and working on the main frequency band supported by the Mb’s
terminal (i.e. either f1 for a single frequency band network, or f1 or f2 for a dual-band terminal with the configuration 1, or f1
for a dual-band terminal with the configuration 2).
α × ρ BTS × P c ( txi, M b, ic )
Calculation of Q pilot ( txi, ic, Mb ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Term
-
k DL DL DL DL
P tot ( txi, ic ) + I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N 0
For each carrier ic, selection of the transmitter with the highest Q pilot ( txi, Mb, ic ) , ( tx BS, ic ) ( M i ) .
k
UL
ΔX corresponds to the load rise due to the mobile. For information on how this parameter is calculated, see "Admission
Control in the R99 Part" on page 241.
Rejection of bad candidate cells if the pilot is not received or if the uplink load factor is exceeded during the admission load
control (if simulation respects a loading factor constraint and Mb was not connected in previous iteration)
pilot
If Q pilot ( tx BS, M b, ic ) < Q req ( Mobility ( M b ) ) then (txBS,ic) is rejected by Mb
k
UL UL
If ( X R99 ( tx BS, ic ) )k > X max , then (txBS,ic) is rejected by Mb
Else
Keep (txBS,ic) as good candidate cell
For dual band terminals with the configuration 1 or terminals working on one frequency band only, if no good candidate cell
has been selected, Mb has failed to be connected to the network and is rejected.
For dual band terminals with the configuration 2, if no good candidate cell has been selected, try to connect Mb to transmitters
txi containing Mb in their calculation area and working on the secondary frequency band supported by the Mb’s terminal (i.e.
f2). If no good candidate cell has been selected, Mb has failed to be connected to the network and is rejected.
For each NodeB having candidate cells, determination of the best carrier, icBS, within the set of candidate cells of the
NodeB.
For DC-HSDPA users, this carrier is referred to as the "anchor" carrier.
200
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Else the carrier selection mode defined for the site equipment is considered.
If carrier selection mode is “Min. UL Load Factor”
UL
ic BS ( M b ) is the carrier where we obtain the lowest ( X R99 ( tx BS, ic ) ) k
Endif
Determination of the best serving cell, (txBS,icBS)
max
(tx BS,ic BS)k ( M b ) is the best serving cell ( BestCell k ( M b ) ) and its pilot quality is Q pilot ( M b )
k
In the following lines, we will consider ic as the carrier used by the best serving cell
Selection of the second serving cell for DC-HSDPA (Dual-cell HSDPA) users
If Mb is a DC-HSDPA user and if txBS supports DC-HSDPA and has several carriers, selection of the second carrier, ic2.
For each carrier other than the best serving carrier, icp, calculation of Q pilot ( tx BS, ic p, M b )
k
pilot
If Q pilot ( tx BS, ic 2, M b ) < Q req ( Mobility ( M b ) ) then (txBS,ic2) is rejected by Mb
k
Else
Keep (txBS,ic2) as second serving cell
For each station txi containing Mb in its calculation area, using ic , and, if neighbours are used, neighbour of BestCell k ( M b )
α × ρ BTS × P c ( txi, M b, ic )
Calculation of Q pilot ( txi, Mb, ic ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DL DL DL DL Term
-
k P tot ( txi, ic ) + I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N 0
Rejection of txi from the active set if difference with the best server is too high
max
If Q pilot ( M b ) – Q pilot ( txi, M b, ic ) > AS_Th ( BestCell k ( M b ) ) then txi is rejected
k k
EndFor
201
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
R99 – req
Calculation of the terminal power required by Mb to obtain the R99 radio bearer: P term ( M b, ic ) k
UL UL UL
P b – DPDCH ( txi, M b, ic ) = P b – R99 ( txi, M b, ic ) × ( 1 – r c )
UL UL UL
P b – DPCCH ( txi, M b, ic ) = P b – R99 ( txi, M b, ic ) × r c
UL UL UL
P b – R99 ( txi, M b, ic ) = P b – DPCCH ( txi, M b, ic ) + P b – DPDCH ( txi, M b, ic ) if the user is active,
UL UL
P b – R99 ( txi, M b, ic ) = P b – DPCCH ( txi, M b, ic ) if the user is inactive,
UL
UL ρ term × P b – DPDCH ( txi, M b, ic ) k
Q tch ( txi, - × G UL
M b, ic ) k = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UL
p ( Service ( M b ) ) × G div
UL Tx UL
N tot ( txi, ic ) – ( 1 – F MUD ) × ρ term × P b – R99 ( txi, M b, ic ) k – 1
End For
If (Mb is in not in handoff)
UL UL
Q k ( M b ) = Q tch ( txi, M b, ic ) k
UL UL UL
Q k ( M b ) = f rake efficiency × Q tch ( txi, M b, ic ) k
txi ∈ ActiveSet
UL UL UL
Qk ( Mb ) = Max ( Q tch ( txi, M b, ic ) k ) × ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links
txi ∈ ActiveSet
UL UL UL
Qk ( Mb ) = Max ( Q tch ( txi, M b, ic ) k ) × ( G macro – diversity ) 3 links
txi ∈ ActiveSet
UL
UL UL UL UL
Q k ( M b ) = Max f rake efficiency × Q tch ( ic ), Q tch ( ic ) × ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links
other site
txi ∈ ActiveSet
( samesite )
End If
UL
req Q req ( Service ( M b ), Mobility ( M b ) )
- × P req
P term – R99 ( M b, ic ) k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- term – R99 ( M b, ic ) k – 1
UL
Qk ( Mb )
202
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
UL UL
req Q req ( Service ( M b ), Mobility ( M b ) ) × ΔQ req ( ( Service ( M b ), Mobility ( M b ) ) )
- × P req
P term – R99 ( M b, ic ) k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ term – R99 ( M b, ic ) k – 1
UL
Qk ( Mb )
req max
If P term – R99 ( M b, ic ) k > P term ( M b ) then Mb cannot select any cell and its active set is cleared
UL UL
If R nominal ( M b ) ≥ R max ( txi, ic ) then Mb cannot be connected
Endif
If (mobile does not use a packet switched service that is inactive on the downlink)
For each cell (txi,ic) in Mb active set
Calculation of quality level on (txi,ic) traffic channel at Mb with the minimum power allowed on traffic channel for the Mb
service
min
DL P tch ( Service ( M b ) )
P b ( txi, M b, ic ) = -----------------------------------------------
L T ( txi, M b )
DL
DL ρ BTS × P b ( txi, M b, ic ) k
- × G DL
Q tch ( txi, M b, ic ) k = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DL
p ( Service ( M b ) ) × G div
DL DL
N tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – F ortho ) × ρ BTS × P b ( txi, M b, ic ) k – 1
End For
DL DL DL
Q k ( M b ) = f rake efficiency × Q tch ( txi, M b, ic ) k
txi ∈ ActiveSet
Do
For each cell (txi,ic) in Mb active set
Calculation of the required power for DL traffic channel between (txi,ic) and Mb:
DL
req Q req ( Service ( M b ), Mobility ( M b ) )
- × P min
P tch ( txi, M b, ic ) k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- tch ( Service ( M b ) )
DL
Qk ( Mb )
203
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
DL max
Recalculation of a decreased Q req (a part of the required quality is managed by the cells set to P tch )
req
DL P tch ( Service ( M b ) )
P b ( txi, M b, ic ) = ----------------------------------------------
L T ( txi, M b )
DL
DL ρ BTS × P b ( txi, M b, ic )
Q tch ( txi, - × G DL
M b, ic ) k = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DL
p ( Service ( M b ) ) × G div
DL DL
N tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – F ortho ) × ρ BTS × P b ( txi, M b, ic )
DL DL DL
If the user is inactive, then his contribution to interference in the calculation of N tot ( ic ) is P b ( txi, M b, ic ) × r c .
EndFor
DL DL DL
Q k ( M b ) = f rake efficiency × Q tch ( txi, M b, ic ) k
txi ∈ ActiveSet
DL DL
While Q k ( M b ) < Q req ( Service ( M b ), Mobility ( M b ) ) and Mb active set is not empty
DL DL
If R nominal ( M b ) ≥ R max ( txi, ic ) then Mb cannot be connected
Endif
Update of interference on active mobiles only (old contributions of mobiles and stations are replaced by the new ones).
For each cell (txi,ic)
UL
Update of N tot ( txi, ic )
EndFor
For each mobile Mi
DL
Update of N tot ( ic )
EndFor
EndFor
Control of Radio Resource Limits (OVSF Codes, Cell Power, Channel Elements, Iub Backhaul Throughput)
Rejection of the mobile with the lowest service priority starting from the last admitted
EndFor
For each cell (txi,ic)
Codes Codes
While N ( txi, ic ) k > N max ( txi, ic )
Rejection of the mobile with the lowest service priority starting from the last admitted
EndFor
For each NodeB, Ni
CE – DL CE – DL
While N ( N i ) k > N max ( Ni )
Rejection of the mobile with the lowest service priority starting from the last admitted
CE – UL CE – UL
While N ( N i ) k > N max ( Ni )
Rejection of the mobile with the lowest service priority starting from the last admitted
EndFor
204
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Rejection of the mobile with the lowest service priority starting from the last admitted
UL UL
While T Iub ( N I ) k > T Iub – m ax ( N I )
Rejection of the mobile with the lowest service priority starting from the last admitted
EndFor
UL UL
For each cell (txi,ic) with X R99 ( txi, ic ) > X max
Rejection of the mobile with the lowest service priority starting from the last admitted
EndFor
UL UL
While at least one cell with X R99 ( txi, ic ) > X max exists.
• In case of a static HSDPA power allocation strategy, Atoll checks in the simulation that:
DL
P tx ( ic ) ≤ P max ( ic ) × %Power max
where:
DL
%Powermax is the maximum DL load allowed.
• In case of dynamic HSDPA power allocation strategy, Atoll checks in the simulation that:
DL
P tx – R99 ( ic ) + P HSUPA ( ic ) ≤ P max ( ic ) × %Power max
4.4.2.3.2 Number of HS-SCCH Channels and Maximum Number of HSDPA Bearer Users
The number of HS-SCCH channels ( n HS – SCCH ) is the maximum number of HS-SCCH channels that the cell can manage. This
parameter is used to manage the number of packet (HSDPA) and packet (HSPA) service users simultaneously connected to an
HSDPA bearer. This parameter is not taken into account for packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users as HS-SCCH-less
operation (i.e., HS-DSCH transmissions without any accompanying HS-SCCH) is performed.
Each packet (HSDPA) and packet (HSPA) service user consumes one HS-SCCH channel. Therefore, at a time (over a
transmission time interval), the number of these users connected to an HSDPA bearer cannot exceed the number of HS-SCCH
channels per cell.
The maximum number of HSDPA users ( n max ) corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA bearer users that the cell can
support. Here, all HSDPA bearer users, i.e., packet (HSDPA) service users, packet (HSPA) service users and packet (HSPA -
Constant Bit Rate) service users, are taken into consideration.
Let us assume there are 30 HSDPA bearer users in the cell:
• 10 packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users with any activity status.
205
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
• All packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users may be served if there are enough HSDPA power, Iub backhaul
throughput and OVSF codes available in order for them to obtain the lowest HSDPA bearer that provides a RLC peak
rate higher or equal to the guaranted bit rate defined for the service. In this case, they will be connected. Else, they
will be rejected.
• Then, among the packet (HSDPA) and packet (HSPA) service users:
• The first four users may be simultaneously served if there are enough HSDPA power, Iub backhaul throughput and
OVSF codes available in order for them to obtain an HSDPA bearer. In this case, they will be connected. Else, they
will be delayed.
• The next eleven ones will be delayed since there are no longer HS-SCCH channels available. Their connection
status will be "HS-SCCH Channels Saturation".
• Finally, the last five users will be rejected beacuse the maximum number of HSDPA user has been fixed to 25. Their
connection status will be "HSDPA Scheduler Saturation".
Let us focus on the ten packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users mentionned in the example of the previous paragraph
"Number of HS-SCCH Channels and Maximum Number of HSDPA Bearer Users" on page 205. Fast link adaptation is carried
out on these users in order to determine if they can obtain an HSDPA bearer that provides a RLC peak rate higher or equal to
the service guaranteed bit rate. As HS-SCCH less operation is performed, only HSDPA bearers using the QPSK modulation and
two HS-PDSCH channels at the maximum can be selected and allocated to the users. The users are processed in the order
established during the generation of the user distribution and the cell’s available HSDPA power is shared between them as
explained below. Several Packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users can share the same HSDPA bearer. Then, Atoll
calculates the HSDPA bearer consumption ( C in %) for each user and takes into account this parameter when it determines
the resources consumed by the user (i.e., the HSDPA power used, the number of OVSF codes and the Iub backhaul
throughput).
In the bearer allocation process shown below, the 10 packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users are represented by Mj,
with j = 1 to 10. And, the initial values of their respective HSDPA powers is 0, i.e. PHSDPA(B(MX)) = 0, where X = 0 to 10. These
power values are assigned one by one by the scheduler, so that with their allocated values, looped back to the starting point,
are used in successive steps.
206
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Figure 4.4: HSDPA Bearer Allocation Process for Packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) Service Users
After processing the packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users, the scheduler share the cell’s remaining resources
between packet (HSDPA) and packet (HSPA) service users. Let us focus on the packet (HSDPA) and packet (HSPA) service users,
especially on the first four users mentionned in the example of the previous paragraph, "Number of HS-SCCH Channels and
Maximum Number of HSDPA Bearer Users" on page 205. A new fast link adaptation is carried out on these users in order to
determine if they can obtain an HSDPA bearer. They are processed in the order defined by the scheduler and the cell’s HSDPA
power available after all Packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users have been served is shared between them as
explained below.
In the bearer allocation process shown below, the 4 packet (HSDPA) and packet (HSPA) service users are represented by Mj,
with j = 1 to 4. And, the initial values of their respective HSDPA powers is 0, i.e. PHSDPA(B(MX)) = 0, where X = 0 to 4. These
power values are assigned one by one by the scheduler, so that with their allocated values, looped back to the starting point,
are used in successive steps.
207
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
Figure 4.5: HSDPA Bearer Allocation Process for Packet (HSDPA) and Packet (HSPA) Service Users
208
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
When the option “CQI based on CPICH quality” is selected, Atoll proceeds as follows.
1. CPICH Quality Calculation
Two options, available in Global parameters, may be used to calculate Nt: option Without useful signal or option Total noise.
Therefore, we have:
ρ BTS × α × P c ( ic )
-----
Ec-
( ic )
i
- for the total noise option,
= -----------------------------------------
Nt pilot DL
N tot ( ic )
And
ρ BTS × α × P c ( ic )
-----
Ec-
( ic )
i
= --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- for the without useful signal option.
Nt pilot DL
N tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – α ) × ρ BTS × P c ( ic )
i
With
DL DL DL DL DL term
N tot ( ic ) = I intra ( ic ) + I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N 0
DL DL P SCH ( ic ) DL P SCH ( ic )
I intra ( ic ) = P tot ( ic ) + ρ BTS × ( 1 – F MUD ) × ( 1 – α ) × P tot ( ic ) – -------------------- – ρ BTS × P tot ( ic ) – --------------------
DL term
LT LT
txi txi txi
DL DL
I extra ( ic ) = P tot ( ic )
txj, j ≠ i
Ptot ( icadj )
DL
DL , ∀j
I inter – carrier ( ic ) = txj
------------------------------------
RF ( ic, ic adj )
RF ( ic, ic adj ) is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on ic.
Tx
P Transmitted ( ic i )
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) = --------------------------------------
Tx Tx, m
ni
L total × ICP ic , ic
i
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx, m
ICPic , ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i
P pilot ( ic )
P c ( ic ) = ---------------------
-
i LT
i
term
ρ BTS , α and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 182.
209
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
Atoll performs intra-cell interference computations based on the total power. You can
instruct Atoll to use maximum power by adding the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[CDMA]
PmaxInIntraItf = 1
In this case, Atoll considers the following formula:
( CQI ) pilot = f ------ ( ic ) . This table is defined for the terminal reception equipment and the selected mobility.
Ec
Nt pilot
P HS – SCCH ( ic ) is the HS-SCCH power on carrier ic. It is either fixed by the user (when the option “HS-SCCH Power Dynamic
Allocation”in the cell property dialogue is unchecked) or dynamically calculated (when the option “HS-SCCH Power Dynamic
Allocation” is selected).
req
In this case, the HS-SCCH power is controlled so as to reach the required HS-SCCH Ec/Nt (noted ------ ( ic )
Ec
). It is
Nt HS – SCCH
specified in mobility properties.
We have:
ρ BTS × P c ( ic )
-----
Ec-
( ic )
i
- for the total noise option,
= -------------------------------
Nt HS – SCCH DL
N tot ( ic )
And
ρ BTS × P c ( ic )
-----
Ec-
( ic ) = i
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- for the without useful signal option.
Nt HS – SCCH DL term
N tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – F ortho ) × ( 1 – F MUD ) × ρ BTS × P c ( ic )
i
With
DL DL DL DL DL term
N tot ( ic ) = I intra ( ic ) + I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N 0
DL DL
I extra ( ic ) = P tot ( ic )
txj, j ≠ i
Ptot ( icadj )
DL
DL , ∀j
I inter – carrier ( ic ) = txj
------------------------------------
RF ( ic, ic adj )
RF ( ic, ic adj ) is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on ic.
Tx
P Transmitted ( ic i )
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) = --------------------------------------
Tx Tx, m
ni
L total × ICP ic , ic
i
210
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx, m
ICPic , ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i
P HS – SCCH ( ic )
P c ( ic ) = -------------------------------
-
i LT
i
and
L path × L Tx × L term × L body × L indoor × E Shadowing 4
L T = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- ( )
G Tx × G term
term term
ρ BTS , F ortho , F MUD and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 182.
Therefore,
req
-----
Ec-
( ic ) × N tot ( ic )
DL
Nt HS – SCCH
P HS – SCCH ( ic ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------ × L T for the total noise option,
ρ BTS i
And
req
-----
Ec-
( ic )
DL
× N tot ( ic )
Nt HS – SCCH
P HS – SCCH ( ic ) = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
req
- × L T for the without useful signal option.
ρ × 1 + (1 – F term Ec i
BTS ortho ) × ( 1 – F MUD ) × ------ ( ic )
Nt HS – SCCH
P HSDPA ( ic ) is the power available for HSDPA on the carrier ic. This parameter is either a simulation output, or a user-defined
cell input.
P HSDPA ( ic ) = P HS – PDSCH ( ic ) + n HS – SCCH × P HS – SCCH ( ic )
Therefore, we have:
P HS – PDSCH ( ic ) = P HSDPA ( ic ) – n HS – SCCH × P HS – SCCH ( ic )
We have:
ρ BTS × P c ( ic )
-----
Ec-
( ic )
i
- for the total noise option,
= -------------------------------
Nt HS – PDSCH DL
N tot ( ic )
And
ρ BTS × P c ( ic )
-----
Ec-
( ic ) i
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- for the without useful signal option.
Nt HS – PDSCH P c ( ic )
DL term i
N tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – F ortho ) × ( 1 – F MUD ) × ρ BTS × ---------------
n
Here, Atoll works on the assumption that five HS-PDSCH channels are used (n=5).
With
211
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
DL DL DL DL DL term
N tot ( ic ) = I intra ( ic ) + I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N 0
DL DL
I extra ( ic ) ) = P tot ( ic )
txj, j ≠ i
Ptot ( icadj )
DL
DL , ∀j
I inter – carrier ( ic ) = txj
------------------------------------
RF ( ic, ic adj )
RF ( ic, ic adj ) is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on ic.
Tx
P Transmitted ( ic i )
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) = --------------------------------------
Tx Tx, m
ni
L total × ICP ic , ic
i
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx, m
ICP ic , ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i
P HS – PDSCH ( ic )
P c ( ic ) = ----------------------------------
-
i LT
i
And
L path × L Tx × L term × L body × L indoor × E Shadowing 5
L T = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- ( )
G Tx × G term
term term
ρ BTS , F ortho , F MUD and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 182.
Atoll performs intra-cell interference computations based on the total power. You can
instruct Atoll to use maximum power by adding the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[CDMA]
PmaxInIntraItf = 1
In this case, Atoll considers the following formula:
212
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Atoll selects the HSDPA bearer associated to this CQI (in the table Best Bearer=f(HS-PDSCH CQI) defined for the terminal
reception equipment and the user mobility) and compatible with the user equipment and cell capabilities.
HSDPA bearers can be classified into two categories:
• HSDPA bearers using QPSK and 16QAM modulations: They can be selected for all users connected to HSPA and HSPA+
capable cells. The number of HS-PDSCH channels required by the bearer must not exceed the maximum number of
HS-PDSCH codes available for the cell.
For packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users, HS-SCCH-less operation (i.e., HS-DSCH transmissions without any
accompanying HS-SCCH) is performed. In this case, the UE is not informed about the transmission format and has to
revert to blind decoding of the transport format used on the HS-DSCH. Complexity of blind detections in the UE is
decreased by limiting the transmission formats that can be used (i.e., the HSDPA bearers available). Therefore, only
HSDPA bearers using the QPSK modulation and two HS-PDSCH channels at the maximum can be selected and
allocated to these users. Additionally, the selected HSDPA bearer must provide a RLC peak rate higher or equal to the
guaranted bit rate defined for the service.
• HSDPA bearers using 64QAM modulation (improvement introduced by the release 7 of the 3GPP UTRA specifications,
referred to as HSPA+): These HSDPA bearers can be allocated to packet (HSDPA) and packet (HSPA) users connected
to cells with HSPA+ capabilities only. The number of HS-PDSCH channels required by the bearer must not exceed the
maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes available for the cell. These HSDPA bearers cannot be allocated to packet (HSPA
- Constant Bit Rate) service users.
Atoll considers an HSDPA bearer as compatible with the user equipment if:
• The transport block size does not exceed the maximum transport block size supported by the user equipment.
• The number of HS-PDSCH channels required by the bearer does not exceed the maximum number of HS-PDSCH
channels that the terminal can use.
• The modulation is supported by the user equipment.
When there are several HSDPA bearers compatible, Atoll selects the HSDPA bearer that provides the highest RLC peak rate.
When several HSDPA bearers can supply the same RLC peak rate, Atoll chooses the HSDPA bearer with the highest modulation
scheme. Finally, if no HSDPA bearer is compatible, Atoll allocates a lower HSDPA bearer compatible with the user equipment
and cell capabilities which needs fewer resources.
Let’s consider the following examples.
Example1: One packet (HSDPA) user with category 13 user equipment and a 50km/h mobility.
The user equipment capabilities are:
• Maximum transport block size: 35280 bits
• Maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels: 15
• Highest modulation supported: 64QAM
• MIMO Support: No
The cell to which the user is connected supports HSPA+ functionalities (i.e. 64QAM modulation in the DL and MIMO systems)
and the maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels is 15.
1st case: The CQI experienced by the user equals 26. Therefore, Atoll can choose between two HSDPA bearers, the bearer
indexes 26 and 31.
Characteristics of the bearer index 26 are:
• Transport block size: 17237 bits
213
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
2nd case: The CQI experienced by the user equals 27. Therefore, Atoll can choose between two HSDPA bearers, the bearer
indexes 27 and 32.
Characteristics of the bearer index 27 are:
• Transport block size: 21754 bits
• Number of HS-PDSCH channels used: 15
• 16QAM modulation is used
• RLC Peak Rate: 10.24 Mb/s
Characteristics of the bearer index 32 are:
• Transport block size: 21768 bits
• Number of HS-PDSCH channels used: 12
• 64QAM modulation is used
• RLC Peak Rate: 10.24 Mb/s
Both HSDPA bearers are compatible with the user equipment and cell capabilities and the RLC peak rate they provide is the
same. Atoll selects the HSDPA bearer using the highest modulation scheme, i.e. the bearer index 32.
Example 2: One packet (HSDPA) user experiencing a CQI of 26.
Therefore, Atoll can choose between two HSDPA bearers, the bearer indexes 26 and 31.
Characteristics of the bearer index 26 are:
• Transport block size: 17237 bits
• Number of HS-PDSCH channels used: 12
• 16QAM modulation is used
• RLC Peak Rate: 8.32 Mb/s
Characteristics of the bearer index 31 are:
• Transport block size: 15776 bits
• Number of HS-PDSCH channels used: 10
• 64QAM modulation is used
• RLC Peak Rate: 7.36 Mb/s
214
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
1st case: The user equipment category is 9. The cell to which the user is connected supports HSPA+ functionalities (i.e. 64QAM
modulation in the DL and MIMO systems) and the maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels is 15.
The user equipment characteristics are the following:
• Maximum transport block size: 20251 bits
• Maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels: 15
• Highest modulation supported: 16QAM
• MIMO Support: No
The bearer index 31 cannot be selected because it requires a modulation scheme not supported by the terminal. Only the
bearer index 26 is compatible with the user equipment capabilities. Atoll selects it.
2nd case: The user equipment category is 8. The cell to which the user is connected supports HSPA+ functionalities (i.e. 64QAM
modulation in the DL and MIMO systems) and the maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels is 15.
The user equipment characteristics are the following:
• Maximum transport block size: 14411 bits
• Maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels: 10
• Highest modulation supported: 16QAM
• MIMO Support: No
Here, none of HSDPA bearers are compatible with the user equipment capabilities.
The bearer index 31 cannot be selected because it requires a modulation scheme not supported by the terminal. With the
bearer index 26, the number of HS-PDSCH channels (12) exceeds the maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels the terminal
can use (10), and the transport block size (17237 bits) exceeds the maximum transport block size (14411 bits) the terminal can
carried.
In the HSDPA Radio Bearer table, Atoll selects a lower HSDPA bearer compatible with cell and UE category capabilities. It
selects the bearer index 25.
• The number of HS-PDSCH channels (10) does not exceed the maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels the terminal
can use (10) and the maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels available at the cell level (15),
• The transport block size (14411 bits) does not exceed the maximum transport block size (14411 bits) the terminal can
carried.
• 16QAM modulation is supported by the terminal and the cell.
3rd case: The user equipment category is 13. The cell to which the user is connected supports HSPA functionalities and the
maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels is 15.
The user equipment capabilities are:
• Maximum transport block size: 35280 bits
• Maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels:15
• Highest modulation supported: 64QAM
• MIMO Support: No
The bearer index 31 cannot be selected because it requires a modulation scheme not supported by the cell. On the other hand,
the bearer index 26 is compatible with cell and UE category capabilities. Therefore, it is allocated.
6. HS-PDSCH Quality Update
Once the bearer selected, Atoll exactly knows the number of HS-PDSCH channels. Therefore, when the method “Without
useful signal” is used, it may recalculate the HS-PDSCH quality with the real number of HS-PDSCH channels (A default value
(5) was taken into account in the first HS-PDSCH quality calculation).
When the option “CQI based on HS-PDSCH quality” is selected, Atoll proceeds as follows.
1. HS-PDSCH Quality Calculation
Atoll proceeds as follows:
P HS – SCCH ( ic ) is the HS-SCCH power on carrier ic. It is either fixed by the user (when the option “HS-SCCH Power Dynamic
Allocation”in the cell property dialogue is unchecked) or dynamically calculated (when the option “HS-SCCH Power Dynamic
Allocation” is selected).
req
In this case, the HS-SCCH power is controlled so as to reach the required HS-SCCH Ec/Nt (noted ------ ( ic )
Ec
). It is
Nt HS – SCCH
specified in mobility properties.
We have:
215
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
ρ BTS × P c ( ic )
-----
Ec-
( ic )
i
- for the total noise option,
= -------------------------------
Nt HS – SCCH DL
N tot ( ic )
And
ρ BTS × P c ( ic )
-----
Ec-
( ic ) = i
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- for the without useful signal option.
Nt HS – SCCH DL term
N tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – F ortho ) × ( 1 – F MUD ) × ρ BTS × P c ( ic )
i
With
DL DL DL DL DL term
N tot ( ic ) = I intra ( ic ) + I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N 0
DL DL
I extra ( ic ) = P tot ( ic )
txj, j ≠ i
Ptot ( icadj )
DL
DL , ∀j
I inter – carrier ( ic ) = txj
------------------------------------
RF ( ic, ic adj )
RF ( ic, ic adj ) is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on ic.
Tx
P Transmitted ( ic i )
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) = --------------------------------------
Tx Tx, m
ni
L total × ICP ic , ic
i
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx, m
ICP ic , ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i
P HS – SCCH ( ic )
P c ( ic ) = -------------------------------
-
i LT
i
And
L path × L Tx × L term × L body × L indoor × E Shadowing 6
L T = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- ( )
G Tx × G term
term term
ρ BTS , F ortho , F MUD and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 182.
Therefore,
req
-----
Ec-
( ic ) × N tot ( ic )
DL
Nt HS – SCCH
P HS – SCCH ( ic ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------ × L T for the total noise option,
ρ BTS i
And
216
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
req
-----
Ec-
( ic )
DL
× N tot ( ic )
Nt HS – SCCH
P HS – SCCH ( ic ) = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
req
- × L T for the without useful signal option.
ρ × 1 + (1 – F term Ec i
BTS ortho ) × ( 1 – F MUD ) × ------ ( ic )
Nt HS – SCCH
P HSDPA ( ic ) is the power available for HSDPA on the carrier ic. This parameter is either a simulation output, or a user-defined
cell input.
P HSDPA ( ic ) = P HS – PDSCH ( ic ) + n HS – SCCH × P HS – SCCH ( ic )
Therefore, we have:
P HS – PDSCH ( ic ) = P HSDPA ( ic ) – n HS – SCCH × P HS – SCCH ( ic )
Two options, available in Global parameters, may be used to calculate Nt: option Without useful signal or option Total noise.
We have:
ρ BTS × P c ( ic )
-----
Ec-
( ic ) = i
-------------------------------
- for the total noise option,
Nt HS – PDSCH DL
N tot ( ic )
And
ρ BTS × P c ( ic )
-----
Ec-
( ic )
i
- for the without useful signal option.
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nt HS – PDSCH P c ( ic )
DL term i
N tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – F ortho ) × ( 1 – F MUD ) × ρ BTS × ---------------
n
Here, Atoll works on the assumption that five HS-PDSCH channels are used (n=5). Then, it calculates the HS-PDSCH CQI and
the bearer to be used. Once the bearer selected, Atoll exactly knows the number of HS-PDSCH channels and recalculates the
HS-PDSCH quality with the real number of HS-PDSCH channels.
With
DL DL DL DL DL term
N tot ( ic ) = I intra ( ic ) + I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N 0
DL DL
I extra ( ic ) ) = P tot ( ic )
txj, j ≠ i
Ptot ( icadj )
DL
DL , ∀j
I inter – carrier ( ic ) = txj
------------------------------------
RF ( ic, ic adj )
RF ( ic, ic adj ) is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on ic.
Tx
P Transmitted ( ic i )
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) = --------------------------------------
Tx Tx, m
ni
L total × ICP ic , ic
i
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
217
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
Tx, m
ICP ic , ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i
P HS – PDSCH ( ic )
P c ( ic ) = ----------------------------------
-
i LT
i
And
L path × L Tx × L term × L body × L indoor × E Shadowing 7
L T = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- ( )
G Tx × G term
term term
ρ BTS , F ortho , F MUD and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 182.
Atoll performs intra-cell interference computations based on the total power. You can
instruct Atoll to use maximum power by adding the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[CDMA]
PmaxInIntraItf = 1
In this case, Atoll considers the following formula:
( CQI ) HS – PDSCH = f ------ ( ic ) . This table is defined for the terminal reception equipment and the specified
Ec
Nt HS – PDSCH
mobility.
3. HSDPA Bearer Selection
The bearer is selected as described in "HSDPA Bearer Selection" on page 212.
If the user is connected to a cell that supports HSPA+ with transmit diversity and if he has a MIMO-capable terminal (i.e., a
terminal with an HSDPA UE category supporting MIMO), he will benefit from downlink diversity gain on the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt.
-----
Ec-
( ic ) = ------ ( ic )
Ec DL DL
+ G TD + ΔG TD in dB
Nt HS – PDSCH Nt HS – PDSCH
Where
DL
G TD is the downlink transmit diversity gain (in dB) corresponding to the numbers of transmission and reception antenna ports
(respectively defined in the transmitter and terminal properties).
DL
ΔG TD is the additional diversity gain in downlink (in dB). It is defined for the clutter class of the user.
If the user is connected to a cell that supports HSPA+ with spatial multiplexing and if he has a MIMO-capable terminal (i.e., a
terminal with an HSDPA UE category supporting MIMO), he will benefit from the spatial multiplexing gain in its RLC peak rate.
In this case, the RLC peak rate obtained by the user is the following:
DL DL Max
R RLC – peak = R RLC – peak ( Index HSDPABearer ) × ( 1 + f SM – Gain × ( G SM – 1 ) )
Where
218
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
DL
R RLC – peak ( Index HSDPABearer ) is the RLC peak rate that the selected HSDPA bearer ( Index HSDPABearer ) can provide in the cell
(Txi, ic). It is read in the HSDPA Radio Bearer table.
Max
G SM is the maximum spatial multiplexing gain (in dB) for a given number of transmission and reception antennas
(respectively defined in the transmitter and terminal properties).
f SM – Gain is the spatial multiplexing gain factor defined for the clutter
Max C/I
15 users (where 15 corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined) enters the scheduler in the same order as
in the simulation. Then, they are sorted in descending order by the channel quality indicator (CQI), i.e. in a best bearer
descending order.
DL Obtained Rate
Mobiles Simulation Rank Best Bearer (kbps) Connection Status
(kbps)
M1 2 2400 2400+3.4 Connected
M2 15 2400 1440+3.4 Connected
M3 8 2080 160+3.4 Connected
M4 9 2080 3.4 Delayed
M5 10 2080 3.4 Delayed
M6 12 2080 3.4 Delayed
M7 13 2080 3.4 Delayed
M8 14 2080 3.4 Delayed
M9 7 1920 3.4 Delayed
M10 1 1600 3.4 Delayed
M11 3 1600 3.4 Delayed
M12 4 1600 3.4 Delayed
M13 5 1600 3.4 Delayed
M14 6 1600 3.4 Delayed
M15 11 1440 3.4 Delayed
M16 16 2080 0 Scheduler Saturation
Round Robin
Users are taken into account in the same order than the one in the simulation (random order).
DL Obtained Rate
Mobiles Simulation Rank Best Bearer (kbps) Connection Status
(kbps)
M1 1 1600 1600+3.4 Connected
M2 2 2400 960+3.4 Connected
M3 3 1600 3.4 Delayed
M4 4 1600 3.4 Delayed
M5 5 1600 3.4 Delayed
M6 6 1600 3.4 Delayed
M7 7 1920 3.4 Delayed
219
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
DL Obtained Rate
Mobiles Simulation Rank Best Bearer (kbps) Connection Status
(kbps)
M8 8 2080 3.4 Delayed
M9 9 2080 3.4 Delayed
M10 10 2080 3.4 Delayed
M11 11 1440 3.4 Delayed
M12 12 2080 3.4 Delayed
M13 13 2080 3.4 Delayed
M14 14 2080 3.4 Delayed
M15 15 2400 3.4 Delayed
M16 16 2080 0 Scheduler Saturation
Proportional Fair
15 users (where 15 corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined) enters the scheduler in the same order as
in the simulation. Then, they are sorted in an ascending order according to a new random parameter which corresponds to a
combination of the user rank in the simulation and the channel quality indicator (CQI).
For a user i, the random parameter RP i is calculated as follows:
Simu CQI
RP i = 50 × R i + 50 × R i
Where,
Simu
Ri is the user rank in the simulation.
CQI
Ri is the user rank according to the CQI.
You can change the default weights by editing the atoll.ini file. For more information, see
the Administrator Manual.
220
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users have the highest priority and are processed first, in the order established
during the generation of the user distribution. After processing the packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users, the
scheduler ranks the remaining HSDPA bearer users (i.e., packet (HSDPA) and packet (HSPA) service users) according to the
selected scheduling technique (Max C/I, Round Robin and Proportional Fair). After the HSDPA users have been ranked, the
scheduler allocates HSDPA resources to each user following the calculated order as long as there are resources available. Even
if there is a unique list of users at the transmitter level, the resources of each cell are not shared and each carrier has its own
pool of resources (number of HS-SCCH channels, maximum number of HSDPA users, HSDPA power, number of OVSF codes).
Only site-level resources (such as the Iub throughput and the channel elements) are shared between the users of the two cells.
Let us consider a dual-cell HSDPA transmitter with 16 packet (HSDPA) and packet (HSPA) service users. There is no packet
(HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service user. All users are active in DL and connected to the A-DCH R99 bearer. Among the users,
there are 6 dual-cell HSDPA users (i.e., terminal with UE categories 21 to 24).
Simulation Rank Dual-cell HSDPA Support Carriers Comments
1 Yes 1 and 2 Anchor carrier: 2
2 No 2
3 No 1
4 Yes 1 and 2 Anchor carrier: 2
5 No 1
6 No 2
7 No 1
8 No 2
9 Yes 1 and 2 Anchor carrier: 1
10 No 1
11 No 2
12 Yes 1 and 2 Anchor carrier: 1
13 No 2
14 Yes 1 and 2 Anchor carrier: 1
15 No 1
16 Yes 1 and 2 Anchor carrier: 2
In each cell, the number of HS-SCCH channels and the maximum number of HSDPA bearer users have been respectively set
to 4 and 7.
The scheduling algorithms defined for the two cells are the same as the one selected for the transmitter.
Each dual-cell HSDPA user is counted twice, once in each cell, as he may be assigned two different HSDPA bearers in the two
cells. Therefore, the scheduler manages the users ranked 1st to 11th (i.e. 4 single-carrier users connected to the first carrier,
4 single-carrier users connected to the second carrier and 3 dual-cell users). Users ranked 12th to 16th are rejected because
the maximum number of HSDPA bearer users that the scheduler can manage in a cell is exceeded.
Impact the scheduling algorithms have on the simulation results is described in the tables below.
Max C/I
7 users from each cell (where 7 corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined for each cell), i.e., a total of 14
users enter the scheduler in the same order as in the simulation. Then, they are sorted in the order of decreasing channel
quality indicator (CQI), i.e. in a best bearer descending order.
221
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
• The user ranked 4th (here M2) is connected to an HSDPA bearer in each cell. He obtains a total DL data rate of 4323.4
kbps (2403.4+1920).
• The user ranked 9th (here M4) is connected to an HSDPA bearer in each cell. He obtains a total DL data rate of 2083.4
kbps (963.4+1120).
• The first user (here M9) is delayed in the two cells. He obtains a total DL data rate of 3.4 kbps.
Round Robin
7 users from each cell (where 7 corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined for each cell), i.e., a total of 14
users enter the scheduler in the same order as in the simulation.
Simulation Best Bearer DL Obtained Connection
Mobiles Carrier CQI
Rank (kbps) Rate (kbps) Status
M1
1 1 12 800 800 Connected
(DC-HSDPA)
M1
2 1 13 960 960+3.4 Connected
(DC-HSDPA)
M2 2 2 15 1440 1440+3.4 Connected
M3 1 3 16 1600 1600+3.4 Connected
M4
2 4 19 2400 1600+3.4 Connected
(DC-HSDPA)
M4
1 4 17 1920 960 Connected
(DC-HSDPA)
M5 1 5 21 3040 480+3.4 Connected
M6 2 6 13 960 160+3.4 Connected
M7 1 7 14 1120 3.4 Delayed
M8 2 8 18 2080 3.4 Delayed
M9
2 9 16 1600 0 Delayed
(DC-HSDPA)
222
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Proportional Fair
7 users from each cell (where 7 corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined for each cell), i.e., a total of 14
users enter the scheduler in the same order as in the simulation. Then, they are sorted in an ascending order according to a
new random parameter which corresponds to a combination of the user rank in the simulation and the channel quality
indicator (CQI).
For a user i, the random parameter RPi is calculated as follows:
Simu CQI
RPi = 50 × R i + 50 × R i
Where,
Simu
Ri is the user rank in the simulation.
CQI
Ri is the user rank according to the CQI.
You can change the default weights by editing the atoll.ini file. For more information, see
the Administrator Manual.
DL
Simulation Best Bearer Connection
Mobiles Carrier CQI CQI Rank RP Obtained
Rank (kbps) Status
Rate (kbps)
M1
2 4 19 2 300 2400 2400+3.4 Connected
DC-HSDPA
M2 1 5 21 1 300 3040 3040+3.4 Connected
M1
1 4 17 4 400 1920 1440 Connected
DC-HSDPA
M3 1 3 16 6 450 1600 800+3.4 Connected
M4 2 2 15 8 500 1440 1120+3.4 Connected
M5 2 8 18 3 550 2080 800+3.4 Connected
M6
2 1 13 11 600 960 480+3.4 Connected
DC-HSDPA
223
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
DL
Simulation Best Bearer Connection
Mobiles Carrier CQI CQI Rank RP Obtained
Rank (kbps) Status
Rate (kbps)
M6
1 1 12 13 700 800 0 Delayed
DC-HSDPA
M7
1 9 17 5 700 1920 3.4 Delayed
DC-HSDPA
M8 1 7 14 9 800 1120 3.4 Delayed
M7
2 9 16 7 800 1600 0 Delayed
DC-HSDPA
M9 2 6 13 12 900 960 3.4 Delayed
M10 1 10 14 10 1000 1120 3.4 Delayed
M11 2 11 12 14 1250 800 3.4 Delayed
M12 1 14 1120 Scheduler Scheduler
12 0 0
(DC-HSDPA) 2 15 1440 Saturation Saturation
Scheduler Scheduler
M13 2 13 17 1920 0 0
Saturation Saturation
M14 1 13 960 Scheduler Scheduler
14 0 0
(DC-HSDPA) 2 15 1440 Saturation Saturation
Scheduler Scheduler
M15 1 15 17 1920 0 0
Saturation Saturation
M16 1 12 800 Scheduler Scheduler
16 0 0
(DC-HSDPA) 2 14 1120 Saturation Saturation
• The user ranked 4th (here M1) is connected to an HSDPA bearer in each cell. He obtains a total DL data rate of 3843.4
kbps (2403.4+1440).
• The first user (here M6) is connected to an HSDPA bearer in his anchor cell and delayed in the other cell. He obtains a
total DL data rate of 483.4 kbps (483.4+0).
• The user ranked 9th (here M7) is delayed in the two cells. He obtains a total DL data rate of 3.4 kbps.
224
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Evaluation by the
HSDPA
Mobiles Service Simulation Rank HSUPA part of the
Connection Status
algorithm
M7 Packet (HSPA) 5 Connected Yes
M8 Packet (HSPA) 6 Delayed Yes
M9 Packet (HSPA) 8 Delayed Yes
M10 Packet (HSPA) 10 Delayed Yes
M11 Packet (HSPA) 11 Delayed No
M12 Packet (HSPA) 12 Rejected No
HSUPA bearer characteristics are provided in the HSUPA Bearer table. An HSUPA bearer is described with following
characteristics:
• Radio Bearer Index: The bearer index number.
• TTI Duration (ms): The TTI duration in ms. The TTI can be 2 or 10 ms.
• Transport Block Size (Bits): The transport block size in bits.
• Number of E-DPDCH Codes: The number of E-DPDCH channels used.
• Minimum Spreading Factor: The smallest spreading factor used.
• Modulation: the modulation used (QPSK or 16QAM)
• RLC Peak Rate (bps): The RLC peak rate represents the peak rate without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing,
etc.).
HSUPA bearers can be classified into two categories:
• HSUPA bearers using QPSK modulation: They can be selected for users connected to HSPA and HSPA+ capable cells.
• HSUPA bearers using 16QAM modulation (improvement introduced by the release 7 of the 3GPP UTRA specifications,
referred to as HSPA+). These HSUPA bearers can be allocated to users connected to cells with HSPA+ capabilities only.
Atoll considers an HSUPA bearer as compatible with the category 3 user equipment if:
• The TTI duration used by the bearer is supported by the user equipment (10 ms).
• The transport block size does not exceed the maximum transport block size supported by the user equipment (14484
bits):
• The number of E-DPDCH channels required by the bearer does not exceed the maximum number of E-DPDCH channels
that the terminal can use (2).
225
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
• The minimum spreading factor used by the bearer is not less than the smallest spreading factor supported by the
terminal (4).
• The modulation required by the bearer is supported by the terminal.
The HSUPA bearers compatible with category 3 user equiment are framed in red:
Then, during admission control, Atoll checks that the lowest compaƟble bearer in terms of the required E-DPDCH Ec Nt does
not require a terminal power higher than the maximum terminal power allowed.
Atoll uses the HSUPA Bearer Selection table. Among the compatible HSUPA bearers, Atoll chooses the one with the lowest
required Ec/Nt threshold.
Here, this is the index 1 HSUPA bearer; the required Ec/Nt threshold to obtain this bearer is -21.7dB.
Ec req
Then, from the required Ec/Nt threshold, ------
req
, Atoll calculates the required terminal power, P term – HSUPA .
Nt E – DPDCH
Ec req
P term – HSUPA = ------
req UL
× L T × N tot
Nt E – DPDCH
With
UL UL extra
UL tx intra UL tx
N tot ( ic ) = ( 1 – F MUD × ρ term ) × I tot ( ic ) + I tot ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + N 0
UL intra UL extra
tx UL tx
ρ term , F MUD , I tot , I tot , I inter – carrier and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 182.
226
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
req
Atoll rejects the user if the terminal power required to obtain the lowest compatible HSUPA bearer ( P term – HSUPA ) exceeds
the maximum terminal power (his connection status is "HSUPA Admission Rejection").
At the end of this step, the number of non-rejected HSUPA bearer users is n HSUPA . All of them will be connected to an HSUPA
bearer at the end.
Let us focus on the three packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users mentionned in the example of the previous paragraph
"HSUPA Part of the Algorithm" on page 224. We assume that all of them have been admitted. Noise rise scheduling and radio
resource control are carried out on each user in order to determine the best HSUPA bearer that the user can obtain. Several
Packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users can share the same HSUPA bearer. Then, Atoll calculates the HSUPA bearer
consumption ( C in %) for each user and takes into account this parameter when it determines the resources consumed by
the user (i.e., the terminal power used, the number of channel elements and the Iub backhaul throughput).
In the bearer allocation process shown below, the 3 packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users are represented by Mj,
with j = 1 to 3.
227
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
Figure 4.11: HSUPA Bearer Allocation Process for Packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) Service Users
Let us focus on the seven packet (HSPA) service users mentionned in the example of the previous paragraph "HSUPA Part of
the Algorithm" on page 224. We assume that all of them have been admitted. Noise rise scheduling and radio resource control
are carried out on each user in order to determine the best HSUPA bearer that the user can obtain.
In the bearer allocation process shown below, the 7 packet (HSPA) service users are represented by Mj, with j = 1 to 7.
For the user, Mj, with j varying from 1 to 7:
Figure 4.12: HSUPA Bearer Allocation Process for Packet (HSPA) Service Users
228
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
The obtained HSUPA radio bearer is the bearer that the user obtains after noise rise scheduling and radio resource control.
Packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users have the highest priority and are processed first. Therefore, after the admission
control, the noise rise scheduling algorithm attempts to evenly share the remaining cell load between the packet (HSPA -
Constant Bit Rate) service users admitted in admission control; in terms of HSUPA, each user is allocated a right to produce
UL
interference. The remaining cell load factor on uplink ( ΔX HSPA – CBR ( txi, ic ) ) depends on the maximum load factor allowed on
uplink and how much uplink load is produced by the served R99 traffic. It can be expressed as follows:
UL UL UL
ΔX HSPA – CBR ( txi, ic ) = X max ( txi, ic ) – X R99 ( txi, ic )
Then, Atoll evenly shares the remaining cell load factor between the packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users admitted
during the previous step ( n HSPA – CBR ).
UL
UL ΔX HSPA – CBR ( txi, ic )
ΔX user ( txi, ic ) = ------------------------------------------------
n HSPA – CBR
Ec max
From this value, Atoll calculates the maximum E-DPDCH Ec Nt allowed ( ------ ) for each packet (HSPA - Constant Bit
Nt E – DPDCH
Rate) service user. For further information on the calculation, see "Uplink Load Factor Due to One User" on page 246.
Ec- max
----- 1
-------------------------------------------
- for the Without useful signal option
Nt E – DPDCH = F UL
( txi , ic )
---------------------------------- – 1
UL
ΔX user ( txi, ic )
UL
Ec max
----- ΔX user
- = --------------- for the Total noise option
Nt E – DPDCH F
UL
Then, it selects an HSUPA bearer. The allocaƟon depends on the maximum E-DPDCH Ec Nt allowed and on UE and cell capa-
bilities. Atoll selects the best HSUPA bearer from the HSUPA compatible bearers. This is the HSUPA bearer ( Index HSUPABearer )
UL
R RLC – peak ( Index HSUPABearer )
with the highest potential throughput ( ----------------------------------------------------------------------- ) where:
N Rtx ( Index HSUPABearer )
Ec- req
----- Ec max
• ≤ ------
Nt E – DPDCH Nt E – DPDCH
req max
• And P term – HSUPA ≤ P term
Ec req
When several HSUPA bearers are available, Atoll selects the one with the lowest ------ .
Nt E – DPDCH
After the noise rise scheduling, Atoll carries out radio resource control, verifying if enough channel elements and Iub backhaul
throughput are available for the HSUPA bearer assigned to the user. For information on radio resource control, see "Radio
Resource Control" on page 232.
After processing all packet (HSPA - Constant bit rate) service users, Atoll carries out noise rise scheduling and radio resource
control on packet (HSPA) service users. During the noise rise scheduling, Atoll distributes the remaining cell load factor
available after all packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users have been served. It can be expressed as follows:
UL UL UL UL
ΔX HSPA ( txi, ic ) = X max ( txi, ic ) – X R99 ( txi, ic ) – X HSPA – CBR ( txi, ic )
The remaining cell load factor is shared equally between the admitted packet (HSPA) service users ( n HSPA ).
UL
UL ΔX HSPA ( txi, ic )
ΔX user ( txi, ic ) = ------------------------------------
n HSPA
Ec max
From this value, Atoll calculates the maximum E-DPDCH Ec Nt allowed ( ------ ) as explained above and selects an
Nt E – DPDCH
HSUPA bearer for each packet (HSPA) service user. After the noise rise scheduling, Atoll carries out radio resource control on
packet (HSPA) service users. For information on radio resource control, see "Radio Resource Control" on page 232.
229
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
Example: We have a cell with six packet (HSPA) service users and no packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) user. All packet (HSPA)
service users have been admitted.
The remaining cell load factor equal to 0.6 is shared between the packet (HSPA) service users. Therefore, the UL load factor
alloted to each user is 0.1. Let’s take the cell UL reuse factor equal to 1.5. Atoll calculates the maximum E-DPDCH Ec Nt
allowed (the Without useful signal option is selected).
max
We have: ------
Ec
= -11.5 dB
Nt E – DPDCH
Here, the obtained HSUPA bearer is the index 5 HSUPA bearer. It provides a potential throughput of 128 kbps and requires
E-DPDCH Ec Nt of -13 dB (lower than -11.5 dB) and a terminal power lower than the maximum terminal power allowed.
. Required Ec/Nt Potential Throughput
HSUPA Bearers Index Nb of Retransmissions RLC Peak Rate (kbps)
Threshold (dB) (kbps)
1 -21.7 2 32 16
2 -19 2 64 32
3 -16.1 2 128 64
4 -13.9 2 192 96
5 -13 2 256 128
6 -10.1 2 512 256
7 -8 2 768 384
8 -7 2 1024 512
With HSUPA, uplink soft handover impacts the scheduling operation. While HSDPA sends data from one cell only, with HSUPA
all cells in the active set receive the transmission from the terminal. Therefore, all the cells are impacted by the transmission
in terms of noise rise.
For each HSUPA capable cell of the active set ( tx k, ic ) , Atoll calculates the maximum E-DPDCH Ec Nt allowed
Ec max
( ------ ( tx , ic ) ) as explained in "HSUPA Bearer Allocation Process" on page 227.
Nt E – DPDCH k
For each cell of the active set ( tx k, ic ) , Atoll calculates the maximum terminal power allowed to obtain an HSUPA radio bearer
max
( P term – HSUPA ( tx k, ic ) ).
max
P term – HSUPA ( tx k, ic ) = min ------ ( tx , ic ) × L T × N tot , P term
max Ec UL max
Nt E – DPDCH k
With
UL intra UL extra tx
UL tx UL
N tot ( ic ) = ( 1 – F MUD × ρ term ) × I tot ( ic ) + I tot ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + N 0
UL intra UL extra
tx UL tx
ρ term , F MUD , I tot , I tot , I inter – carrier and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 182.
As HSUPA bearer users in soft handover use the lowest granted noise rise, Atoll chooses the lowest of maximum terminal
power allowed for each cell of the active set ( tx k, ic ) .
max max
P term – HSUPA = min ( P term – HSUPA ( tx k, ic ) )
tx k ∈ AS
230
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
max
Once Atoll knows the selected maximum terminal power ( P term – HSUPA ), it recalculates the maximum E-DPDCH Ec Nt allowed
max
( ------
Ec
( tx , ic ) ) for each HSUPA capable cell of the active set.
Nt E – DPDCH k
max
Ec- max
----- P term – HSUPA
Nt E – DPDCH ( tx k, ic ) =
-----------------------------
-
UL
L T × N tot
max
Then, Atoll calculates the maximum E-DPDCH Ec Nt allowed ( ------
Ec
) aŌer signal recombinaƟon of all HSUPA capable
Nt E – DPDCH
cells of the active set 10.
max max
-----
Ec- -----
Ec-
UL
= f rake efficiency × ( tx , ic )
Nt E – DPDCH Nt E – DPDCH k
tx ∈ ActiveSet
k
( samesite )
For softer-soft handover (2/3), it depends on if the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters). If selected,
we have:
Ec max max
For softer (1/2) and softer-softer (1/3) handovers: ------ -----
Ec-
UL
= f rake efficiency × Nt E – DPDCH ( tx k, ic )
Nt E – DPDCH
tx k ∈ ActiveSet
( samesite )
max
Ec- max
For soft-soft handover (3/3): ------ Max -----
Ec UL
Nt E – DPDCH ( tx k, ic ) × ( G macro – diversity ) 3links
=
Nt E – DPDCH tx k ∈ ActiveSet
For softer-soft handover (2/3), it depends on if the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters). If selected,
we have:
Max
-----
Ec- max UL Ec- max Ec- max
Nt E – DPDCH
= tx k ,tx l ∈ ActiveSet rake efficiency
f × ----- (
Nt E – DPDCH k
tx , ic ) , ----- (
Nt E – DPDCH l
tx , ic )
tx k ∈ samesite tx k
tx ∈ othersite
l
UL
× ( G macro – diversity ) 2links
max
Ec- max
Else, we have: ------ Max ----- ( tx , ic ) × ( G macro – diversity ) 2links
Ec UL
=
Nt E – DPDCH Nt E – DPDCH k
txk ∈ ActiveSet
231
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
Max
-----
Ec- max UL Ec- max
----- Ec
max
Nt E – DPDCH = tx ,tx ∈ ActiveSet f rake efficiency ×
k l Nt E – DPDCH ( tx k, ic ), Nt E – DPDCH ( tx l, ic )
------
tx ∈ samesite tx
k k
tx ∈ othersite
l
max
Ec- max
Else, we have: ------ Max ----- ( tx , ic )
Ec
=
Nt E – DPDCH Nt E – DPDCH k
txk ∈ ActiveSet
Then, Atoll selects an HSUPA bearer as previously explained in "HSUPA Bearer Allocation Process" on page 227. The allocation
depends on the maximum E-DPDCH Ec Nt allowed and on UE and cell capabiliƟes. Atoll selects the best HSUPA bearer from
the HSUPA compatible bearers. This is the HSUPA bearer ( Index HSUPABearer ) with the highest potential throughput
UL
R RLC – peak ( Index HSUPABearer )
( ----------------------------------------------------------------------- ) where:
N Rtx ( Index HSUPABearer )
Ec- req
----- Ec- max
-----
• Nt E – DPDCH ≤ Nt E – DPDCH
Ec req
When several HSUPA bearers are available, Atoll selects the one with the lowest ------ .
Nt E – DPDCH
The requested HSUPA radio bearer is selected from the HSUPA bearers compatible with the user equipment. Atoll determines
the HSUPA bearer the user would obtain by considering the entire remaining load of the cell. The user is treated as if he is the
only user in the cell. Therefore, if we go on with the previous example, the maximum E-DPDCH Ec Nt allowed is equal to -1.8
dB and the requested HSUPA bearer is the index 7 HSUPA bearer. It requires E-DPDCH Ec Nt of -8 dB (lower than -1.8 dB) and
a terminal power lower than the maximum terminal power allowed.
DL DL
max P tx ( ic ) k – P tx ( ic ) k – 1 max N user ( ic ) k – N user ( ic ) k – 1
Δ DL
= max int Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
× 100 , int Stations
- × 100
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
P tx ( ic ) k DL
N user ( ic ) k
UL UL UL UL
max I tot ( ic ) k – I tot ( ic ) k – 1 max N user ( ic ) k – N user ( ic ) k – 1
Δ UL Stations
- × 100 , int ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- × 100
= max int ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Stations
UL
I tot ( ic ) k UL
N user ( ic ) k
1st case: Between two successive iterations, Δ UL and Δ DL are lower ( ≤ ) than their respective thresholds (defined when
creating a simulation).
The simulation has reached convergence.
Example: Let us assume that the maximum number of iterations is 100, UL and DL convergence thresholds are set to 5. If
Δ UL ≤ 5 and Δ DL ≤ 5 between the 4th and the 5th iteration, Atoll stops the algorithm after the 5th iteration. Convergence has
been reached.
2nd case: After 30 iterations, Δ UL and/or Δ DL are still higher than their respective thresholds and from the 30th iteration, Δ UL
and/or Δ DL do not decrease during the next 15 successive iterations.
232
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
1. After the 30th iteration, Δ UL and/or Δ DL equal 100 and do not decrease during the next 15 successive iterations: Atoll
stops the algorithm at the 46th iteration. Convergence has not been reached.
2. After the 30th iteration, Δ UL and/or Δ DL equal 80, they start decreasing slowly until the 40th iteration (without going
under the thresholds) and then, do not change during 15 successive iterations: Atoll stops the algorithm at the 56th
iteration without reaching convergence.
4.4.3 Results
4.4.3.1 R99 Related Results
This table contains some R99 specific simulation results provided in the Cells and Mobiles tabs of the simulation property
dialogue.
DL
P ( txi, ic ) – P SCH ( txi, ic )
P tot ( txi, ic ) – F ortho × ρ BTS × tot
DL -----------------------------
- Downlink intra-cell interference at
DL
I intra ( txi, ic ) LT None
txi terminal on carrier ic
DL
– ( 1 – F ortho ) × ρ BTS × P b ( txi, ic )
Tx Downlink inter-technology
P Transmitted ( ic i )
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) --------------------------------------
Tx
L total × ICP n , ic
Tx, m W interference at terminal on carrier ic
ni i a
Pb
UL
( ic adj )
UL Uplink inter-carrier interference at
I inter – carrier ( txi, ic ) term W
txj, ∀j
terminal on carrier ic
-----------------------------------
-
RF ( ic, ic adj )
233
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
UL
I tot ( txi, ic )
UL
F ( txi, ic ) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- None Cell uplink reuse factor on carrier ic
UL intra
Tx
I tot ( txi, ic ) × ( 1 – F MUD × ρ term )
DL
DL
I tot ( ic )
F ( txi, ic ) -----------------------------
DL
- None Downlink reuse factor on a carrier ic
I intra ( txi, ic )
DL DL
NR ( txi, ic ) – 10 log ( 1 – X ( txi, ic ) ) dB Noise rise on downlink
UL UL
NR ( txi, ic ) – 10 log ( 1 – X ( txi, ic ) ) dB Noise rise on uplink
a. In the case of an interfering GSM external network in frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional load.
234
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
• Or rejected for the following reasons: the maximum number of HSUPA users per cell is exceeded, the terminal power
required to obtain the lowest compatible HSUPA bearer exceeds the maximum terminal power, there are no more
channel elements available, the maximum Iub backhaul throughput allowed on the site in the uplink is exceeded, the
lowest compatible HSUPA bearer they can obtain does not provide a RLC peak rate higher than the guaranted bit rate
(only for packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users).
In the following parts, a dual-cell HSDPA user refers to a user which has a dual-cell HSDPA-capable terminal and which is
simultaneously connected to two HSDPA cells of a transmitter supporting dual-cell HSDPA mode.
DL DL UL UL
R R99 = R nominal ( R99 Bearer ) and R R99 = R nominal ( R99 Bearer )
Active Active
users users
DL UL
R nominal ( R99 Bearer ) is the downlink nominal rate of the user R99 radio bearer and R nominal ( R99 Bearer ) is the uplink
nominal rate of the user R99 radio bearer.
• The number of connected users with an HSDPA bearer (result of the HSDPA part) and the downlink rate they generate.
Packet (HSDPA), packet (HSPA) and packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users are considered since they all
request an HSDPA bearer. On the other hand, only active users are taken into consideration in the downlink rate
DL
calculation ( R HSDPA ).
DL DL
R HSDPA = R RLC – peak
Active
users
DL
R RLC – peak is the RLC peak rate provided in the downlink.
• The number of connected HSUPA bearer users (result of the HSUPA part). Only packet (HSPA) and packet (HSPA -
Constant Bit Rate) service users are considered.
UL
In addition, Atoll indicates the uplink data rate generated by active users connected with an HSUPA bearer ( R HSUPA ):
UL UL
R HSUPA = R RLC – peak
Active
users
UL
R RLC – peak is the RLC peak rate provided in the uplink.
4.4.3.2.2Mobiles Tab
In the Mobiles tab, Atoll indicates for each user:
UL DL
• The uplink and downlink total requested rates in kbps (respectively, R requested ( M b ) and R requested ( M b ) )
For circuit and packet (R99) service users, the DL and UL total requested rates correspond to the DL and UL nominal rates of
the R99 bearer associated to the service.
DL DL
R requested ( M b ) = R nominal ( R99 Bearer )
UL UL
R requested ( M b ) = R nominal ( R99 Bearer )
For packet (HSDPA) service users, the uplink requested rate corresponds to the nominal rate of ADPCH R99 radio bearer and
the downlink requested rate is the sum of the ADPCH radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate(s) that the selected
235
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
HSDPA radio bearer(s) can provide. Here, the user is treated as if he is the only user in the cell and then, Atoll determines the
HSDPA bearer the user would obtain by considering the entire HSDPA power available of the cell.
DL DL DL
R requested ( M b ) = R nominal ( ADPCH R99 Bearer ) + R RLC – peak for single-carrier users
DL DL DL
R requested ( M b ) = R nominal ( ADPCH R99 Bearer ) AnchorCell + R RLC – peak ( c ) for dual-carrier users
c ∈ Serving Cells
UL UL
R requested ( M b ) = R nominal ( ADPCH R99 Bearer )
For HSUPA bearer users (i.e., packet (HSPA) and packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users), the uplink requested rate is
equal to the sum of the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate of the requested HSUPA radio bearer.
The requested HSUPA radio bearer is selected from the HSUPA bearers compatible with the user equipment. Here, the user
is treated as if he is the only user in the cell and then, Atoll determines the HSUPA bearer the user would obtain by considering
the entire remaining load of the cell. The downlink requested rate is the sum of the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer nominal rate
and the RLC peak rate(s) that the requested HSDPA radio bearer(s) can provide. The requested HSDPA radio bearer is
determined as explained in the previous paragraph.
DL DL DL
R requested ( M b ) = R nominal ( ADPCH – EDPCCH R99 Bearer ) + R RLC – peak for single-carrier users
DL DL DL
R requested ( M b ) = R nominal ( ADPCH – EDPCCH R99 Bearer ) AnchorCell + R RLC – peak ( c ) for dual-carrier users
c ∈ Serving cells
UL UL UL
R requested ( M b ) = R nominal ( ADPCH – EDPCCH R99 Bearer ) + R RLC – peak
UL DL
• The uplink and downlink total obtained rates in kbps (respectively, R obtained ( M b ) and R obtained ( M b ) )
For circuit and packet (R99) service users, the obtained rate is the same as the requested rate if he is connected without being
downgraded. Otherwise, the obtained rate is lower (it corresponds to the nominal rate of the selected R99 bearer). If the user
is rejected, the obtained rate is zero.
In the downlink, HSDPA bearer users can be connected to a single cell or to two cells of the same transmitter when the user
has a dual-cell HSDPA-capable terminal and when the transmitter supports the dual-cell HSDPA mode.
For a single-carrier packet (HSDPA) service user connected to an HSDPA bearer, the downlink obtained rate corresponds to
the instantaneous rate; this is the sum of the A-DPCH radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate provided by the
selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource control. If the user is delayed (he is only connected to an R99
radio bearer), downlink obtained rate corresponds to the downlink nominal rate of the ADPCH radio bearer. Finally, if the user
is rejected either in the R99 part or in the HSDPA part (i.e., because the HSDPA scheduler is saturated), the downlink obtained
rate is zero.
For a dual-carrier packet (HSDPA) service user connected to two HSDPA bearers, the downlink obtained rate corresponds to
the instantaneous rate; this is the sum of the nominal rate provided by the A-DPCH radio bearer in the anchor cell and the RLC
peak rates provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearers after scheduling and radio resource control. If the user is connected
to one cell and delayed in the other cell, the downlink obtained rate is the sum of the nominal rate provided by the A-DPCH
radio bearer in the anchor cell and the RLC peak rate provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio
resource control. If the user is delayed in the two cells (he is only connected to an R99 radio bearer in the anchor cell), the
downlink obtained rate corresponds to the downlink nominal rate of the ADPCH radio bearer in the anchor cell. Finally, if the
user is rejected either in the R99 part or in the HSDPA part (i.e., because the HSDPA scheduler is saturated), the downlink
obtained rate is zero.
In the uplink, packet (HSDPA) service users can only have a single-carrier connection. When the user is either connected or
delayed, the uplink obtained rate corresponds to the uplink nominal rate of the ADPCH radio bearer. If the user is rejected
either in the R99 part or in the HSDPA part (i.e., because the HSDPA scheduler is saturated), the uplink obtained rate is zero.
For a single-carrier packet (HSPA) service user, on downlink, if the user is connected to an HSDPA bearer, the downlink
obtained rate corresponds to the instantaneous rate. The instantaneous rate is the sum of the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer
nominal rate and the RLC peak rate provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource control.
If the user is delayed, the downlink obtained rate corresponds to the downlink nominal rate of ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer.
If the user is rejected, the downlink obtained rate is "0."
For a dual-carrier packet (HSPA) service user connected to two HSDPA bearers, the downlink obtained rate corresponds to the
instantaneous rate; this is the sum of the nominal rate provided by the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer in the anchor cell and the
RLC peak rates provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearers after scheduling and radio resource control. If the user is
connected to one cell and delayed in the other cell, the downlink obtained rate is the sum of the nominal rate provided by the
ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer in the anchor cell and the RLC peak rate provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after
scheduling and radio resource control. If the user is delayed in the two cells (he is only connected to an R99 radio bearer in
the anchor cell), the downlink obtained rate corresponds to the downlink nominal rate of the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer in
the anchor cell. Finally, if the user is rejected, the downlink obtained rate is zero.
236
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
In uplink, packet (HSPA) service users can only have a single-carrier connection. When the user is connected to an HSUPA
bearer, the uplink obtained rate is the sum of the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate provided
by the selected HSUPA radio bearer after noise rise scheduling. If the user is rejected, the uplink obtained rate is zero.
For a connected packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service user, the uplink and downlink total obtained rates are the sum of
the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer nominal rate and the guaranteed bit rate defined for the service. If the user is rejected, the
uplink and downlink total obtained rates are "0".
• The mobile total power ( P term )
UL
P term = P term – R99 × f act –EDPCCH + P term – HSUPA for packet (HSPA) service users
UL
P term = P term – R99 × f act –EDPCCH + P term – HSUPA × C HSDPABearer for packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users
UL
For packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users, f act –EDPCCH = 0.1 .
And
P term = P term – R99 for circuit and packet (R99) service users and packet (HSDPA) service users
DL
• The HSDPA application throughput in kbps ( T application ( M b ) )
This is the net HSDPA throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.).
DL
R RLC – peak ( c ) × ( 1 – BLER HSDPA )
DL ∈ Serving cells
T application ( M b ) = c------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- × SF Rate – ΔR
ΔTTI
Where:
DL
R RLC – peak is the RLC peak rate provided to the user by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource
control.
BLER HSDPA is read in the quality graph defined for the triplet “reception equipment-selected bearer-mobility” (HSDPA Quality
Graphs tab in the Reception equipment properties). This graph describes the variation of BLER as a function of the measured
quality (HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt). Knowing the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt, Atoll calculates the corresponding BLER.
SF Rate and ΔR represent the scaling factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control) throughput
and the throughput offset respectively. These two parameters model the header information and other supplementary data
that does not appear at the application level. They are defined in the service properties.
ΔTTI is the minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used; it is defined in the terminal user
equipment category properties.
• The number of OVSF codes
This is the number of 512-bit length OVSF codes consumed by the user.
• The required HSDPA power in dBm ( ( P HSDPA ) required )
It corresponds to the HSDPA power required to provide the HSDPA bearer user with the downlink requested rate. The
downlink requested rate is the data rate the user would obtain if he was the only user in the cell. In this case, Atoll determines
the HSDPA bearer the user would obtain by considering the entire HSDPA power available of the cell.
( P HSDPA ) required = ( P HS – PDSCH ) used + n HS – SCCH × P HS – SCCH
( P HS – PDSCH )used is the HS-PDSCH power required to obtain the selected HSDPA bearer (in dBm). If the HSDPA bearer
allocated to the user is the best one, ( P HS – PDSCH ) used corresponds to the available HS-PDSCH power of the cell. On the other
hand, if the HSDPA bearer has been downgraded in order to be compliant with cell and UE capabilities or for another reason,
( P HS – PDSCH )used will be lower than the available HS-PDSCH power of the cell.
This is the HSDPA power required to provide the HSDPA bearer user with the downlink obtained rate. The downlink obtained
rateis the data rate experienced by the user after scheduling and radio resource control.
237
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
( P HSDPA ) served = ( P HS – PDSCH ) used + n HS – SCCH × P HS – SCCH for packet (HSDPA) and packet (HSPA) service users
And
( P HSDPA ) served = ( P HS – PDSCH ) used × C HSDPABearer for packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users
Where
( P HS – PDSCH ) used is the HS-PDSCH power required to obtain the selected HSDPA bearer.
This is the net HSUPA throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.).
UL
UL R RLC – peak ( M b ) × ( 1 – BLER HSUPA ) × SF Rate – ΔR
T application ( M b ) = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
N Rtx
Where:
UL
R RLC – peak is the RLC peak rate provided by the selected HSUPA radio bearer after noise rise scheduling.
BLER HSUPA is the residual BLER after N Rtx retransmissions. It is read in the quality graph defined for the quartet “reception
equipment-selected bearer-number of retransmissions-mobility” (HSUPA Quality Graphs tab in the Reception equipment
properties). This graph describes the variation of BLER as a function of the measured quality (E-DPDCH Ec/Nt). Knowing the E-
DPDCH Ec/Nt, Atoll calculates the corresponding BLER.
SF Rate and ΔR respectively represent the scaling factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control)
throughput and the throughput offset. These two parameters model the header information and other supplementary data
that does not appear at the application level. They are defined in the service properties.
N Rtx is the maximum number of retransmissions for the obtained HSUPA bearer. This figure is read in the HSUPA Bearer
Selection table.
The following columns appear if, when creating the simulation, you select "Detailed information about mobiles":
• The uplink and downlink requested RLC peak rates (kbps)
Downlink and uplink requested RLC peak rates are not calculated for circuit and packet (R99) service users.
For packet (HSDPA) service users, the uplink RLC peak rate is not calculated and the downlink requested RLC peak rate is the
data rate that the selected HSDPA radio bearer(s) can provide. Here, the user is treated as if he is the only user in the cell and
then, Atoll determines the HSDPA bearer he would obtain by considering the entire HSDPA power available of the cell.
For HSUPA bearer users (i.e., packet (HSPA) and packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users), the requested uplink RLC
peak rate is the data rate of the requested HSUPA radio bearer. The requested HSUPA radio bearer is selected from the HSUPA
bearers compatible with the user equipment. Here, the user is treated as if he is the only user in the cell and then, Atoll
determines the HSUPA bearer the user would obtain by considering the entire remaining load of the cell. If the user is
connected to one or two HSDPA bearers in the downlink, the downlink requested RLC peak rate is the rate that the requested
HSDPA radio bearer(s) can provide. The requested HSDPA radio bearer is determined as explained in the previous paragraph.
• The uplink and downlink obtained RLC peak rate (kbps)
Downlink and uplink obtained RLC peak rates are not calculated for circuit and packet (R99) service users.
For a packet (HSDPA) service user connected to one or two HSDPA bearers, the uplink obtained RLC peak rate is not calculated,
and the downlink obtained RLC peak rate is the data rate provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer(s) after scheduling and
radio resource control.
For a connected packet (HSPA) service user, on uplink, if the user is connected to an HSUPA bearer, the obtained uplink RLC
peak rate is the rate provided by the selected HSUPA radio bearer after noise rise scheduling. On downlink, if the user is
connected to one or two HSDPA bearers, the downlink obtained RLC peak rate is the rate provided by the selected HSDPA
radio bearer(s) after scheduling and radio resource control.
For a connected packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service user, the uplink and downlink obtained RLC peak rates are the uplink
and downlink guaranteed bit rates defined for the service.
238
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
This is:
• Either a fixed value in case of a static HSDPA power allocation strategy,
• Or a simulation result when the option "HSDPA Power Dynamic Allocation" is selected. We have:
P HSDPA ( c ) = P max ( c ) – P Headroom ( c ) – P tx – R99 ( c ) – P HSUPA ( c )
DL
with P tx – R99 ( c ) = P pilot ( c ) + P SCH ( c ) + P OtherCCH ( c ) + P tch ( c ) + P tch ( c ) × f act – ADPCH
tch used for tch used for
R99 users HSPA users
It corresponds to the number of connected HSDPA bearer users that the cell supports at a time, i.e. within one transmission
time interval. All these users are connected to the cell at the end of the HSDPA part of the simulation; they have a connection
with the R99 bearer and an HSDPA bearer. Dual-carrier HSDPA bearer users are accounted for once in each serving cell.
DL
• The instantaneous HSDPA rate in the cell, c, in kbps ( R Inst ( c ) )
This is the number of kilobits per second that the cell supports on downlink to provide simultaneous connected HSDPA bearer
users with an HSDPA bearer. We will differentiate single-carrier users (Ms) from dual-cell users (Md-HSDPA, Md-HSPA and Md-
HSPA-CBR stand for packet (HSDPA) service users, packet (HSPA) service users and packet (HSPA-Constant Bit Rate) service
users, respectively).
DL DL DL
R obtained ( M s ) + ( R nominal ( R99 Bearer ) + R RLC – peak ( M d – HSDPA ) )
Ms ∈ c
M d – HSDPA ∈ c
c is the anchor cell
DL
+ R RLC – peak ( M d – HSDPA ) +
M d – HSDPA ∈ c
c is the secondary cell
DL DL
( R nominal ( R99 Bearer ) + R RLC – peak ( M d – HSPA ) )
DL
R Inst ( cell ) = Md – HSPA ∈ c
c is the anchor cell
DL DL
R RLC – peak ( M d – HSPA ) + R Guaranteed ( M d – HSPA – CBR )
M d – HSPA ∈ c
c is the secondary cell M d – HSPA – CBR ∈ c
cis the secondary cell
DL DL
+ ( R nominal ( R99 Bearer ) + R Guaranteed ( M d – HSPA – CBR ) )
M d – HSPA – CBR ∈ c
c is the anchor cell
DL
R RLC – peak is the RLC peak rate provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource control.
239
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
DL
R nominal ( R99 Bearer ) is the nominal rate of the ADPCH radio bearer if the user is a packet (HSDPA) service user. For packet
(HSPA) and packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users, it corresponds to the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer.
DL
• The instantaneous HSDPA MAC Throughput in the cell, c, in kbps ( T MAC ( c ) )
S block ( M b )
DL
T MAC ( c ) = ---------------------------------------
-
T TTI × Δ TTI ( M b )
Mb ∈ c
Where,
S block ( M b ) is the transport block size (in kbits) of the HSDPA bearer selected by the user; it is defined for each HSDPA bearer
in the HSDPA Radio Bearers table.
ΔTTI ( M b ) is the minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used; it is defined in the terminal user
equipment category properties.
–3
T TTI is the TTI duration, i.e. 2 ×10 s (2000 TTI in one second). This value is specified by the 3GPP.
DL
• The average instantaneous HSDPA rate in the cell, c, in kbps ( R Av – Inst ( c ) )
DL
DL R Inst ( c )
R Av – Inst ( c ) = ------------------
nM
b
DL
• The HSDPA application throughput in the cell, c, in kbps ( T application ( c ) )
DL
R RLC – peak ( M b ) × ( 1 – BLER HSDPA ) × SF Rate – ΔR
DL
Either T application ( c ) = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- if the scheduling algorithm is Round Robin or
ΔTTI
M ∈c
b
Proportional Fair,
DL
DL R RLC – peak ( M b ( maxC ⁄ I ) ) × ( 1 – BLER HSDPA ) × SF Rate – ΔR
Or T application ( c ) = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- if the scheduling algorithm is Max C/I.
ΔTTI
DL
R RLC – peak is the RLC peak rate provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource control.
BLER HSDPA is read in the quality graph defined for the triplet “reception equipment-selected bearer-mobility” (HSDPA Quality
Graphs tab in the Reception equipment properties). This graph describes the variation of BLER as a function of the measured
quality (HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt). Knowing the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt, Atoll calculates the corresponding BLER.
SF Rate and ΔR respectively represent the scaling factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control)
throughput and the throughput offset. These two parameters model the header information and other supplementary data
that does not appear at the application level. They are defined in the service properties.
ΔTTI is the minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used; it is defined in the terminal user
equipment category properties.
DL
• The minimum HSDPA RLC peak rate in kbps ( min ( R RLC – peak ( M b ) ) )
M b ∈ cell
It corresponds to the lowest of RLC peak rates obtained by HSDPA bearer users connected to the cell.
DL
• The maximum HSDPA RLC peak rate in kbps ( max ( R RLC – peak ( M b ) ) )
M b ∈ cell
It corresponds to the highest of RLC peak rates obtained by HSDPA bearer users connected to the cell.
• The number of HSUPA users in the cell ( n M ):
c
UL UL
T application ( c ) = T application ( M b )
Mb ∈ c
240
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
UL
• The uplink cell load factor due to HSUPA traffic ( X HSUPA ( c ) ):
UL
UL ( I tot ( c ) ) HSUPA
X HSUPA ( c ) = ---------------------------------
UL
N tot ( c )
Where
UL
( I tot ( c ) ) HSUPA is the total interference at transmitter received from HSUPA bearer users.
DL DL
R Inst ( site ) = R Inst ( c )
c ∈ site
DL
• The instantaneous HSDPA MAC Throughput carried by the site in kbps ( T MAC ( site ) in kbps)
DL DL
T MAC ( site ) = T MAC ( c )
c ∈ site
UL
• The HSUPA rate carried by the site in kbps ( R ( site ) )
UL UL
R ( site ) = R obtained ( M c )
M c ∈ site
4.4.4 Appendices
4.4.4.1 Admission Control in the R99 Part
During admission control in the R99 part of the simulation, Atoll calculates the uplink load factor of a considered cell assuming
the mobile concerned is connected to it. Here, activity status assigned to users is not taken into account. So even if the mobile
is not active on UL, it can be rejected due to cell load saturation. To calculate the cell UL load factor, either Atoll takes into
account the mobile power determined during power control if mobile was connected in previous iteration, or it estimates a
UL
load rise due to the mobile and adds it to the current load. The load rise ( ΔX ) is calculated as follows:
UL 1
ΔX = ----------------------------------------------
W
1 + ------------------------------------
UL UL
Q req × R nominal
241
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
If the cell supports HSDPA, Atoll reserves for potential HSDPA bearer users:
Codes – HS – PDSCH
• The minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes defined for the cell, N min . They are 16-bit length OVSF codes
Codes – HS – PDSCH
(i.e. thirty-two 512 bit-length OVSF codes). Therefore, Atoll will take 32 × N min 512-bit-length codes,
• A 128 bit-length code per HS-SCCH channel (i.e. four 512 bit-length OVSF codes), for each cell. Therefore, Atoll will
take 4 × n HS – SCCH 512-bit-length codes,
Then, it allocates to the cell OVSF codes to support R99 bearers required by users:
• A 256 bit-length code per common channel (i.e. two 512 bit-length OVSF codes), for each cell. Therefore, Atoll will
Overhead – Codes
take 2 × N 512-bit-length codes,
• A code per cell-receiver link, for TCH (traffic channels). The length of code to be allocated, Code_Length, depends on
the user activity. We have:
DL
Either Code_Length = F spreading ( Active user ) when the user is active,
DL
Or Code_Length = F spreading ( Inactive user ) if the user is inactive.
Codes-TCH
The number of 512 bit-length OVSF codes needed N is calculated from the length of the code to be allocated as
follows:
Codes-TCH 512
N = -------------------------------
Code_Length
Figure 4.13: OVSF Code Tree Indices (Not OVSF Code Numbers)
The OVSF code allocation follows the “Buddy” algorithm, which guarantees that:
• If a k-length OVSF code is used, all of its children with lengths 2k, 4k, …, cannot be used as they will not be orthogonal.
• If a k-length OVSF code is used, all of its ancestors with lengths k/2, k/4, …, cannot be used as they will not be
orthogonal.
Example: We consider a user with a service requiring the UDD64 R99 radio bearer. This user is active on DL while connected
to a cell (which does not support HSDPA). The spreading factor for active users has been set to 64 and site equipment requires
four overhead downlink channel elements per cell. Atoll will consume four 256 bit-length OVSF codes for common channels
(i.e. eight 512 bit-length OVSF codes) and a 64 bit-length OVSF code for traffic channels (i.e. eight additional 512 bit-length
OVSF codes).
• In the R99 part, the OVSF code allocation follows the mobile connection order (mobile
order in the Mobiles tab).
• In dual-cell HSDPA, A-DPCH is only transmitted in the anchor carrier. Therefore, a
dual-cell HSDPA user requires R99 resources in the best serving cell only and
consumes the same amount of R99 resources as a single-cell HSDPA user.
• The OVSF code and channel element management is differently dealt with in case of
“softer” handover. Atoll allocates OVSF codes for each cell-mobile link while it
globally assigns channel elements to a site.
In the HSDPA part, packet (HSDPA), packet (HSPA) and packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users are assigned an HSDPA
bearer (Fast link adaptation).
Therefore, Atoll allocates to the cell:
242
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
• 16-bit length OVSF codes per cell-HSDPA receiver, for HS-PDSCH. This figure depends on the HSDPA bearer assigned
to the user and on the type of service.
Codes – HS – PDSCH
For packet (HSDPA) and packet (HSPA) service users, Atoll needs 32 × N 512-bit-length codes for each
Codes – HS – PDSCH
user connected to the cell. N is the number of HS-PDSCH channels required by the HSDPA bearer.
Codes – HS – PDSCH
For packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users, Atoll needs 32 × N × C HSDPABearer 512-bit-length
Codes – HS – PDSCH
codes for each user connected to the cell. N is the number of HS-PDSCH channels required by the
HSDPA bearer.
Dual-cell HSDPA users have two HSDPA bearers, one for each serving cell. Therefore, one dual-cell HSDPA user
consumes OVSF codes in both cells.
When HSDPA bearer users (at least one) are connected to the cell, Atoll gives the cell
Codes – HS – PDSCH
back the minimum number of OVSF codes reserved for HS-PDSCH ( N min ).
On the other hand, if no HSDPA bearer user is connected, Atoll still keeps these codes
and the codes for HS-SCCH too. This is the same with HSUPA bearer users. Even if no
HSUPA bearer user is connected to the cell, Atoll still keeps the codes for E-HICH, E-RGCH
and E-AGCH channels.
CE – UL
Therefore, the number of channel elements required in the uplink at the site level, N ( N I ) , is:
N
CE – UL CE – UL
N ( NI ) = (j)
j ∈ NI
CE – DL
In the downlink, Atoll consumes N ( j ) channel elements for each cell j on a site NI. This figure includes:
• Channel elements for R99 bearers
Overhead – CE – DL
• N channel elements for control channels (Pilot channel, Synchronisation channel, common
channels),
R99 – T CH – CE – DL
• N per cell-receiver link, for R99 TCH (traffic channels).
CE – DL
Therefore, the number of channel elements required in the downlink at the site level, N ( N I ) , is:
N
CE – DL CE – DL
N ( NI ) = (j)
j ∈ NI
243
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
UL
Therefore, the Iub backhaul throughput required on uplink at the site level, T Iub ( N I ) , is:
TIub ( j )
UL UL
T Iub ( N I ) =
j ∈ NI
DL
In the downlink, the Iub backhaul throughput consumed by each cell j on a site NI, T Iub ( j ) , includes:
HSDPA DL HSDPA DL
With T Iub = R RLC – peak + Overhead Iub × R RLC – peak
DL
Therefore, the Iub backhaul throughput required on downlink at the site level, T Iub ( N I ) , is:
TIub ( j )
DL DL
T Iub ( N I ) =
j ∈ NI
244
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
DL DL
G p and Q req are the processing gain on downlink and the Eb/Nt target on downlink respectively.
In case of soft-handoff, required quality is limited to the effective contribution of the transmitter.
Ptch ( c )
DL
P tx ( c ) = P pilot ( c ) + P SCH ( c ) + P otherCCH ( c ) +
tch
Ptch ( c )
DL ortho nonOrtho
P tx ( c ) = P CCH ( c ) + P CCH (c) +
tch
where
ortho
P CCH ( c ) = P pilot ( c ) + P otherCCH ( c )
nonOrtho
P CCH ( c ) = P SCH ( c )
DL
With r = 1 when the user is active on the downlink and r = r c when the user is inactive. In case of an HSDPA bearer user,
DL
r = f act – ADPCH .
I extra ( c ) + I inter – carrier ( c ) + I inter – techno log y ( c )
P tch ( c ) = CI req × ( P tx ( c ) – P CCH
DL nonOrtho
( c ) – P tch ( c ) ) P CCH (c)
nonOrtho ×L ×r
T
- + ------------------------------ + N term
+ ( 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS ) × ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0
LT LT
DL
( I extra ( c ) + I inter – carrier ( c ) + I inter – techno log y ( c ) ) × L T × r + ( 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS ) × P tx ( c ) × r
+
nonOrtho term
F ortho × ρ BTS × P CCH ( c ) × r + N0 × LT × r
P tch ( ic ) = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
-------------------- + ( 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS )
CIreq × r
I intra ( c ) is the total power received at the receiver from the cell with which it is connected.
I extra ( c ) is the total power received at the receiver from other cells.
I inter – techno log y ( c ) is the inter-technology interference received at the terminal from an external transmitter.
We have:
ortho nonOrtho
P CCH ( c ) + P CCH (c)
245
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
nonOrtho term
F ortho × ρ BTS × P CCH ( c ) × r + N0 × LT × r
ortho nonOrtho
P CCH ( c ) + P CCH (c) + -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
-------------------- + ( 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS )
tch
DL CI req × r
P tx ( c ) = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
( I extra ( c ) + I inter – carrier ( c ) + I inter – techno log y ( c ) ) × L T × r
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- + 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS × r
DL
P tx ( c )
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1–
1 -
+ ( 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS )
tch -------------------
CI req × r
The downlink load factor represents the signal degradation in relation to the reference interference (thermal noise plus
synchronisation channel power).
UL
In this calculation, we assume that the cell UL reuse factor ( F ( txi, ic ) ) is constant.
The result depends on the option used to calculate Nt (Without useful signal or Total noise that you may select in Global
parameters).
UL
UL W ( P b ( k ) ) req
Q req ( k ) = --------------------------
UL
- × ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UL
-
tx
R nominal ( k ) I intra – ( P b ( k ) ) req + I extra + I inter – carrier + N 0
UL
UL W ( P b ( k ) ) req
Q req ( k ) = --------------------------
UL
- × ------------------------------------------------------------------------
UL UL
-
tx
R nominal ( k ) I intra × F – ( P b ( k ) ) req + N 0
246
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
UL UL
UL UL R nominal ( k ) R nominal ( k )
- = Q UL
( P b ( k ) ) req × 1 + Q req ( k ) × -------------------------- req ( k ) × --------------------------- × ( I intra × F
UL tx
+ N0 )
W W
UL UL
UL R nominal ( k ) R nominal ( k )
Q req ( k ) × -------------------------- - × I intra × F UL Q UL req ( k ) × --------------------------- × N 0
tx
UL W W
( P b ( k ) ) req = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UL
+ ------------------------------------------------------------------
UL
UL R nominal ( k ) UL R nominal ( k )
1 + Q req ( k ) × --------------------------- 1 + Q req ( k ) × -------------------------- -
W W
UL
req R nominal ( k )
We note ------ ( k )
Ec UL
= Q req ( k ) × --------------------------
-
Nt E – DPDCH W
UL tx
UL I intra × F N0
( P b ( k ) ) req = ------------------------------------------------------
- + ------------------------------------------------------
-
1 1
---------------------------------------- + 1 --------------------------------------- - + 1
Ec- req
----- - ( k )
Ec req
Nt ( k ) -----
Nt
E – DPDCH E – DPDCH
( Pb
UL
As I intra = ( k ) ) req , we have:
K
1 1
------------------------------------------------------
- + N 0 × -------------------------------------------------------
UL tx
I intra = I intra × F ×
K 1 K 1
---------------------------------------
req
- + 1 ---------------------------------------
req
- + 1
-----
Ec -----
Ec
Nt- ( k ) Nt- ( k )
E – DPDCH E – DPDCH
1
------------------------------------------------------
tx
N0 × -
K 1
---------------------------------------- + 1
Ec- req
-----
Nt ( k ) E – DPDCH
I intra = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
UL
1–F × -------------------------------------------------------
K 1
---------------------------------------
req
- + 1
------ ( k )
Ec
Nt
E – DPDCH
tx UL
N0 ⁄ F
I intra = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------- – 1
1
UL
F × -------------------------------------------------------
K 1
---------------------------------------
req
- + 1
------ ( k )
Ec
Nt
E – DPDCH
UL
UL I intra + I extra + I inter – carrier I intra × F 1
X = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
tx
= ---------------------------------------
UL tx
= ----------------------------------
tx
-
I intra + I extra + I inter – carrier + N 0 I intra × F + N 0 N0
1 + ------------------------ UL
-
I intra × F
Therefore, we have:
1
------------------------------------------------------
UL UL
X = F × -
K 1
---------------------------------------
req
- + 1
-----
Ec
Nt- ( k )
E – DPDCH
So, we can conclude that the contribution of one user to the UL load is defined as:
247
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
UL UL 1
ΔX k = F × -------------------------------------------------------
1
---------------------------------------
- + 1
Ec- req
-----
Nt ( k )
E – DPDCH
UL
UL W ( P b ( k ) ) req
Q req ( k ) = --------------------------
UL
- × -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
tx
R nominal ( k ) I intra + I extra + I inter – carrier + N 0
UL
UL W ( P b ( k ) ) req
Q req ( k ) = --------------------------
UL
- × ---------------------------------------
UL tx
R nominal ( k ) I intra × F + N 0
UL
UL UL R nominal ( k )
- × ( I intra × F UL + N tx
( P b ( k ) ) req = Q req ( k ) × -------------------------- 0 )
W
UL
req R nominal ( k )
We note ------ ( k )
Ec UL
= Q req ( k ) × --------------------------
-
Nt E – DPDCH W
req
( P b ( k ) ) req = ------ ( k )
UL Ec UL tx
× ( I intra × F + N 0 )
Nt E – DPDCH
( Pb
UL
As I intra = ( k ) ) req , we have:
K
req
-----
- ( k )
UL tx Ec
I intra = ( I intra × F + N0 ) ×
Nt E – DPDCH
K
req
-----
- ( k )
tx Ec
N0 ×
Nt E – DPDCH
K
I intra = -------------------------------------------------------------
UL
-
1–F
UL
UL I intra + I extra + I inter – carrier I intra × F 1
X = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
tx
= ---------------------------------------
UL tx
= ----------------------------------
tx
-
I intra + I extra + I inter – carrier + N 0 I intra × F + N 0 N0
1 + ------------------------ UL
-
I intra × F
Therefore, we have:
req
-----
- ( k )
UL UL Ec
X = F ×
Nt E – DPDCH
K
So, we can conclude that the contribution of one user to the UL load is defined as:
req
× ------ ( k )
UL UL Ec
ΔX k = F
Nt E – DPDCH
248
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
On c2, we have: P max ( Tx, c 2 ) = 43dBm , P tx – R99 ( Tx, c 2 ) = 36.1dBm and P Headroom ( Tx, c 2 ) = 0dB .
Therefore, P HSDPA ( Tx, c 2 ) = P max ( Tx, c 2 ) – P tx – R99 ( Tx, c 2 ) – P Headroom ( Tx, c 2 ) = 42dBm
On c2, we have: P max ( Tx, c 2 ) = 46dBm , P tx – R99 ( Tx, c 2 ) = 36.1dBm and P Headroom ( Tx, c 2 ) = 0dB .
Therefore, P HSDPA ( Tx, c 2 ) = P max ( Tx ) – P tx – R99 ( Tx, c 1 ) – P tx – R99 ( Tx, c 2 ) – P Headroom ( Tx, c 2 ) = 44.4dBm
[CDMA]
MultiBandSimu = 0
If a given carrier is specified for the service requested by Mb and if it is used by txi
EndFor
UL
BestCarrier k ( txi, M b ) is the carrier with the lowest X k ( txi, ic )
Calculation of
α × ρ BTS × P c ( txi, M b, BestCarrier )
Q pilot ( txi, BestCarrier ) = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
k
DL DL
P tot ( txi, BestCarrier k ( txi, M b ) ) + I extra ( BestCarrier k ( txi, M b ) ) +
DL DL Term
I inter – carrier ( BestCarrier k ( txi, M b ) ) + I inter – techno log y ( BestCarrier k ( txi, M b ) ) + N 0
249
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
max
If Q pilot ( txi, M b, BestCarrier ) > Q pilot ( M b )
k k
Admission control (If simulation respects a loading factor constraint and Mb was not connected in previous iteration).
UL UL
If X k ( txi, BestCarrier ( txi, M b ) ) > X max , then txi is rejected by Mb
Else
max
Q pilot ( M b ) = Q pilot ( txi, M b, BestCarrier )
k k
Tx BS ( M b ) = txi
Endif
EndFor
If no TxBS has been selected and Mb’s terminal can work on one frequency band only, Mb has failed to be connected to the
network and is rejected.
If no TxBS has been selected and Mb’s terminal can work on another frequency band.
Determination of BestCarrier k ( txi, M b ) for each station txi containing Mb in its calculation area and using another
frequency band supported by the Mb’s terminal (i.e. f1 or f2 for a dual-band terminal without any priority on frequency bands,
or f2 for a dual-band terminal with f2 as secondary frequency band)
If a given carrier is specified for the service requested by Mb and if it is used by txi
EndFor
UL
BestCarrier k ( txi, M b ) is the carrier with the lowest X k ( txi, ic )
Calculation of
250
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
max
If Q pilot ( txi, M b, BestCarrier ) > Q pilot ( M b )
k k
Admission control (If simulation respects a loading factor constraint and Mb was not connected in previous iteration).
UL UL
If X k ( txi, BestCarrier ( txi, M b ) ) > X max , then txi is rejected by Mb
Else
max
Q pilot ( M b ) = Q pilot ( txi, M b, BestCarrier )
k k
Tx BS ( M b ) = txi
Endif
EndFor
If no TxBS has been selected, Mb has failed to be connected to the network and is rejected.
251
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
3rd case: Analysis based on the best carrier of any frequency band (for dual-band terminals with priority defined on frequency
bands only)
The frequency band that can be used is fixed. Atoll determines the best carrier for each transmitter i containing the receiver
in its calculation area and using the selected frequency band. The best carrier selection depends on the option selected for
the site equipment (UL minimum noise, DL minimum power, random, sequential). Then, Atoll calculates the pilot quality at
the receiver from these transmitters on their best carriers (ic) and defines the best server (on its best carrier).
Let us assume that ic is either the best carrier or the selected carrier of a transmitter i containing the receiver in its radius
calculation and icadj is another carrier adjacent to ic. An interference reduction factor, RF ( ic, ic adj ) , is defined between ic and
icadj and set to a value different from 0.
Two ways may be used to calculate I0.
Option Total noise: Atoll considers the noise generated by all the transmitters and the thermal noise.
Option Without pilot: Atoll considers the total noise deducting the pilot signal.
Calculation option may be selected in Global parameters.
Therefore, we have:
ρ BTS × α × P c ( i, ic )
Q pilot ( i, ic ) = ---------------------------------------------
DL
I 0 ( ic )
With,
DL DL DL DL DL term
I 0 ( ic ) = P tot ( i, ic ) + I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N 0 for the total noise option,
And
DL DL DL DL DL term
I 0 ( ic ) = I intra ( ic ) + I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N 0 – ( 1 – α ) × ρ BTS × P c ( i, ic ) for the without
pilot option.
1st step: P c ( i, ic ) calculation for each cell (i,ic)
P pilot ( i, ic )
P c ( i, ic ) = -------------------------
-
LT
I
DL DL DL
2nd step: P tot ( j, ic ) , P tot ( i, ic ) and P tot ( j, ic adj ) calculations
We have:
DL DL
I extra ( ic ) = P tot ( j, ic )
txj, j ≠ i
P SCH ( ic )
I intra ( ic ) = P tot ( i, ic ) – ρ BTS × α × P tot ( i, ic ) – --------------------
DL DL DL
LT
252
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Ptot ( j, icadj )
DL
DL txj, ∀j
I inter – carrier ( ic ) = ----------------------------------------
-
RF ( ic, ic adj )
and
Tx
P Transmitted ( ic i )
-------------------------------------
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) = -
Tx Tx, m
L
ni total × ICP ic i, ic
DL
For each transmitter of the network, P tot ( ic ) is the total power received at the receiver from the transmitter on the best
carrier ic of the transmitter i.
DL P Tx ( ic )
P tot ( ic ) = ----------------
-
LT
P Tx ( ic ) is the total power transmitted by the transmitter on the best carrier. Total power transmitted by each cell is either a
simulation result (provided in Simulation properties (Cells tab)) or a value user-defined in Cell properties.
DL
For each transmitter of the network, P tot ( ic adj ) is the total power received at the receiver from the transmitter on the carrier
icadj. This carrier is adjacent to ic.
DL P Tx ( ic adj )
P tot ( ic adj ) = ----------------------
-
LT
P Tx ( ic adj ) is the total power transmitted by the transmitter on the carrier icadj. Total power transmitted by each cell is either
a simulation result (provided in Simulation properties (Cells tab)) or a value user-defined in Cell properties.
term
3rd step: N 0 calculation
term Tx, DL
N0 = NF Term × K × T × W × NR inter – techno log y
DL
4th step: I 0 ( ic ) and Q pilot ( i, ic ) evaluation using formulas described above
DL
5th step: G macro – diversity calculation
DL
The macro-diversity gain, G macro – diversity , models the decrease in shadowing margin due to the fact there are several
available pilot signals at the mobile.
DL npaths
G macro – diversity = M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io – M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io
npaths
M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io is the shadowing margin when the mobile receives n pilot signals (not necessarily from transmitters
belonging to the mobile active set).
This parameter is determined from cell edge coverage probability and Ec/I0 standard
deviation. When the Ec/I0 standard deviation is set to 0, the macro-diversity gain equals
0.
Resulting DL
Q pilot ( ic ) = G macro – diversity × max ( Q pilot ( i, ic ) )
253
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
Then, pilot qualities at the receiver from transmitters i (except the best server) on the best carrier of the best server, icBS, are
recalculated to determine the entire receiver active set (when active set size is greater than 1). Same formulas and calculation
DL
method are used to update I 0 ( ic BS ) value and determine Q pilot ( i, ic BS ) .
We have:
ρ BTS × α × P c ( i, ic )
Q pilot ( i, ic ) = ---------------------------------------------
DL
I 0 ( ic )
With,
DL DL DL DL DL term
I 0 ( ic ) = P tot ( i, ic ) + I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N 0 for the total noise option,
And
DL DL DL DL DL term
I 0 ( ic ) = I intra ( ic ) + I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N 0 – ( 1 – α ) × ρ BTS × P c ( i, ic ) for the without
pilot option.
Other cells (i,icBS) in the active set must satisfy the following criteria:
This is a user-specified input in the Terminal properties. It corresponds to the active set size.
Thermal Noise
I0 (Best Server)
I0 (Best server) is the total noise received at the receiver on icBS. The notation “Best server” refers to the best server of active
set. This is relevant when using the calculation option “Without pilot”. In this case, it informs that the pilot signal of the best
server (BS,icBS) is deducted from the total noise.
Eb/Nt Target
DL
Eb/Nt target ( Q req ) is defined for a given R99 bearer, a mobility type and a reception equipment. This parameter is available
in the R99 Bearer Selection table.
254
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
When compressed mode is activated, the downlink Eb/Nt target is increased by the value
DL
user-defined for the DL Eb/Nt target increase field (Global parameters), ΔQ req .
req
The calculation of the required transmitter power on traffic channels ( P tch ) may be divided into three steps.
DL
1st step: Q max ( k, ic BS ) evaluation for each cell
DL
Let us assume the following notation: Eb/Nt max corresponds to Q max
max
DL P tch
With P b – max ( k, ic BS ) = ----------
-
LT
k
DL DL DL DL DL term
and N tot ( ic BS ) = I intra ( ic BS ) + I extra ( ic BS ) + I inter – carrier ( ic BS ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic BS ) + N 0
Where
max
P tch is the maximum power allowed on traffic channels. This parameter is user-defined in the R99 Radio Bearers table.
DL
N tot ( ic BS ) is the total noise at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
DL
I intra ( ic BS ) is the intra-cell interference at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
P SCH ( k, ic BS )
I intra ( ic BS ) = P DL ( k, ic ) – ρ BTS × F ortho × P DL ( k, ic ) – ------------------------------
DL
tot BS tot BS L T
DL
I extra ( ic BS ) is the extra-cell interference at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
Ptot ( j, icBS )
DL DL
I extra ( ic BS ) =
j, j ≠ k
DL
I inter – carrier ( ic BS ) is the inter-carrier interference at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
Ptot ( j, icadj )
DL
DL , ∀j
I inter – carrier ( ic BS ) = txj
----------------------------------------
-
RF ( ic BS, ic adj )
RF ( ic BS, ic adj ) is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic BS ) is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
Tx
P Transmitted ( ic i )
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic BS ) = -----------------------------------------
Tx Tx, m
ni
L total × ICP ic , ic
i BS
255
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx, m
ICP ic , ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i BS
Qmax ( k, icBS )
DL DL DL
Q MAX ( ic BS ) = f rake efficiency ×
k
Where
DL
f rake efficiency is the downlink rake efficiency factor defined in Terminal properties.
req
3rd step: P tch calculation
DL
req Q req
- × P max
P tch = -------------------------- tch
DL
Q MAX ( ic BS )
When compressed mode is activated, the downlink Eb/Nt target is increased by the value
DL
user-defined for the DL Eb/Nt target increase field (Global parameters), ΔQ req . In this
DL DL
req Q req × ΔQ req
- × P max
case, we have: P tch = ------------------------------ tch
DL
Q MAX ( ic BS )
max
DL P tch
With P b – max ( k, ic BS ) = ----------
-
LT
k
DL DL DL DL DL term
N tot ( ic BS ) = I intra ( ic BS ) + I extra ( ic BS ) + I inter – carrier ( ic BS ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic BS ) + N 0
max req
P SCH ( k, ic BS ) P tch – P tch
I intra ( ic BS ) = P DL ( k, ic ) – ρ BTS × F ortho × P DL ( k, ic ) – ------------------------------ – ( 1 – ρ BTS ) × max (--------------------------
DL
-,0)
tot BS tot BS L T L Tk
Ptot ( j, icBS )
DL DL
I extra ( ic BS ) =
j, j ≠ k
256
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Ptot ( j, icadj )
DL
DL , ∀j
I inter – carrier ( ic BS ) = txj
----------------------------------------
-
RF ( ic BS, ic adj )
Tx
P Transmitted ( ic i )
L-----------------------------------------
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic BS ) =
Tx Tx, m
ni total × ICP ic i, ic BS
Where
req
P tch is the required transmitter power on traffic channels.
Eb/Nt Max
DL
Q MAX is the traffic channel quality at the receiver on icBS after signal combination of all the transmitters k of the active set.
Qmax ( k, icBS )
DL DL DL
Q MAX ( ic BS ) = f rake efficiency ×
k
Where
DL
f rake efficiency is the downlink rake efficiency factor defined in Terminal properties.
DL DL DL DL DL
Therefore, the service on the downlink traffic channel is available if Q MAX ( ic BS ) ≥ Q req (or Q MAX ( ic BS ) ≥ Q req × ΔQ req when
compressed mode is activated).
Effective Eb/Nt
DL
Q eff is the effective traffic channel quality at the receiver on icBS.
DL DL DL DL DL DL DL
Q eff = min ( Q MAX, Q req ) (or Q eff = min ( Q MAX, Q req × ΔQ req ) when compressed mode is activated).
DL
G SHO corresponds to the DL soft handover gain.
DL
DL Q MAX ( ic BS )
G SHO = ------------------------------------------------
DL
max ( Qmax ( k, ic BS ) )
DL DL
max ( Qmax ( k, ic BS ) ) corresponds to the highest Q max ( k, ic BS ) value.
• HSDPA-related Results
Atoll determines the best HSDPA bearer that the user can obtain. The HSDPA bearer user is processed as if he is the only user
in the cell i.e. he uses the entire HSDPA power available in the cell.
For dual-cell HSDPA users with an R99 connection to a dual-cell HSDPA transmitter, Atoll determines the best HSDPA bearers
that the user can obtain in the anchor and secondary cells. In each cell, the user is processed as if he is the only user in the cell.
For further information on the fast link adaptation modelling, see "Fast Link Adaptation Modelling" on page 208.
HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt
Atoll calculates the best HS-PDSCH quality (HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt). The way of calculating it depends on the selected option in the
transmitters global parameters (HSDPA part): CQI based on CPICH quality or CQI based on HS-PDSCH quality.
For dual-cell HSDPA users, Atoll determines the best HS-SCCH quality (HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt) for each serving cell (i.e., the anchor
and the secondary cells).
For further details on the HS-PDSCH quality calculation, see either "HS-PDSCH Quality Calculation" on page 210 if the selected
option is "CQI based on CPICH quality" or "HS-PDSCH Quality Calculation" on page 215 if the selected option is "CQI based on
HS-PDSCH quality".
257
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
HS-SCCH Ec/Nt
Atoll displays the obtained HS-SCCH quality. For dual-cell HSDPA users, it provides the HS-SCCH quality for each serving cell
(i.e., the anchor and the secondary cells).
When the HS-SCCH power allocation strategy is dynamic, this parameter corresponds to the HS-SCCH Ec/Nt threshold defined
for the selected mobility type.
When the HS-SCCH power allocation strategy is static, the HS-SCCH Ec/Nt is calculated from the fixed HS-SCCH power.
We have:
ρ BTS × P c ( ic )
-----
Ec-
( ic ) = i
-------------------------------
- for the total noise option,
Nt HS – SCCH DL
N tot ( ic )
And
ρ BTS × P c ( ic )
-----
Ec-
( ic )
i
- for the without useful signal option.
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nt HS – SCCH DL
N tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – F ortho ) × ( 1 – F MUD ) × ρ BTS × P c ( ic )
term
i
With
DL DL DL DL DL term
N tot ( ic ) = I intra ( ic ) + I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N 0
DL DL
I extra ( ic ) = P tot ( ic )
txj, j ≠ i
Ptot ( icadj )
DL
DL , ∀j
I inter – carrier ( ic ) = txj
------------------------------------
RF ( ic, ic adj )
RF ( ic, ic adj ) is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on ic.
Tx
P Transmitted ( ic i )
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) = --------------------------------------
Tx Tx, m
ni
L total × ICP ic , ic
i
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx, m
ICP ic , ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i
P HS – SCCH ( ic )
P c ( ic ) = -------------------------------
-
i LT
i
And
L path × L Tx × L term × L body × L indoor × M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io
L T = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
G Tx × G term
term term
ρ BTS , F ortho , F MUD and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 182.
CQI
It corresponds to the HS-PDSCH CQI. For dual-cell HSDPA users, Atoll determines the HS-PDSCH CQI for each serving cell (i.e.,
the anchor and the secondary cells).
258
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
The way of calculating it depends on the selected option in the transmitters global parameters (HSDPA part): CQI based on
CPICH quality or CQI based on HS-PDSCH quality.
For further details on the HS-PDSCH quality calculation, see either "HS-PDSCH CQI Determination" on page 212 if the selected
option is "CQI based on CPICH quality" or "HS-PDSCH CQI Determination" on page 218 if the selected option is "CQI based on
HS-PDSCH quality".
Knowing the HS-PDSCH CQI, Atoll calculates the best HSDPA bearer that can be used and selects a bearer compatible with cell
and terminal user equipment HSDPA capabilities. Once the bearer selected, Atoll determines the RLC peak rate that can be
DL
provided to the user R RLC – peak .
For dual-cell HSDPA users, Atoll determines the HSDPA bearers obtained in the two cells and displays the total data rate that
can be provided.
DL DL
R RLC – peak = R RLC – peak ( Txi, ic )
ic ∈ Txi
For further details on the HSDPA bearer selection, see "HSDPA Bearer Selection" on page 212.
Bearer Consumption
Atoll provides this result for packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users only. The minimum bit rate required by the service
is allocated to these users. Therefore, they parly consume the HSDPA bearer. The bearer consumption expressed in %,
C HSDPABearer , is calculated as follows:
DL
R Guaranteed
C HSDPABearer = ---------------------------------------------------------
DL
-
R RLC – peak ( I HSDPABearer )
max
Max terminal power ( P term ) is an input user-defined for each terminal. It corresponds to the terminal’s maximum power.
req
The calculation of the terminal power required to obtain an R99 bearer ( P term – R99 ) may be divided into three steps.
UL
1st step: Q max ( k, ic BS ) evaluation for each cell
max UL
UL P term × ( 1 – r c )
With P b – max ( k, ic BS ) = ---------------------------------------
-
LT
k
UL
N tot ( k, ic BS ) is the total noise at the transmitter on the best carrier of the best server. This value is calculated from the cell
UL
uplink load factor X ( k, ic BS ) .
tx
UL N0
N tot ( k, ic BS ) = ------------------------------------
UL
-
1 – X ( k, ic BS )
259
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
tx
N 0 is the transmitter thermal noise.
UL
( G macro – diversity ) 2 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
UL UL
max ( Q max ( k, ic BS ) ) corresponds to the highest Q max ( k, ic BS ) value.
UL
( G macro – diversity ) 3 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
For softer and softer-softer handoffs (1/2 and 1/3):
( Qmax ( k, icBS ) )
UL UL UL
Q MAX ( ic BS ) = f rake efficiency ×
k
For softer-soft handoffs (2/3), there are two possibilities. If the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters),
we have:
UL
UL UL UL UL
Q MAX ( ic BS ) = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max f rake efficiency × ( Q max ( k, ic BS ) ), Q max ( k, ic BS )
k on the same site
k on the same site
Else,
UL UL UL
Q MAX ( ic BS ) = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max ( Q max ( k, ic BS ) )
req
3rd step: P term – R99 calculation
req
P term – R99 is the required terminal power.
UL
req Q req
- × P max
P term – R99 = -------------------------- term
UL
Q MAX ( ic BS )
UL
Q req is the uplink traffic quality target defined by the user for a given reception equipment, a given R99 bearer and a given
mobility type. This parameter is available in the R99 Bearer Selection table.
260
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
When compressed mode is activated, the uplink Eb/Nt target is increased by the value
UL
user-defined for the UL Eb/Nt target increase field (Global parameters), ΔQ req . In this
UL UL
req Q req × ΔQ req
- × P max
case, we have: P term – R99 = ------------------------------ term
UL
Q MAX ( ic BS )
req max
Therefore, the service on the uplink traffic channel is available if P term – R99 ≤ P term .
Eb/Nt Max
max UL
UL P term × ( 1 – r c )
With P b – max ( k, ic BS ) = ---------------------------------------
-
LT
k
UL
N tot ( k, ic BS ) is the total noise at the transmitter on the best carrier of the best server. This value is calculated from the cell
UL
uplink load factor X ( k, ic BS ) .
tx max req
UL N0 P term – P term – R99
N tot ( k, ic BS ) = ------------------------------------
UL
- + ( 1 – ρ term ) × max (------------------------------------------ ,0)
1 – X ( k, ic BS ) LT
k
tx
N 0 is the transmitter thermal noise.
UL
Q MAX ( ic BS ) is the traffic channel quality at the transmitter on icBS after signal combination of all the transmitters k of the
active set.
UL UL
If there is no handoff (1/1): Q MAX ( ic BS ) = Q max ( k, ic BS )
UL
( G macro – diversity ) 2 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
UL UL
max ( Qmax ( k, ic BS ) ) corresponds to the highest Q max ( k, ic BS ) value.
UL
( G macro – diversity ) 3 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
For softer and softer-softer handoffs (1/2 and 1/3):
261
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
( Qmax ( k, icBS ) )
UL UL UL
Q MAX ( ic BS ) = f rake efficiency ×
k
For softer-soft handoffs (2/3), there are two possibilities. If the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters),
we have:
UL
UL UL UL UL
Q MAX ( ic BS ) = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max f rake efficiency × ( Q max ( k, ic BS ) ), Q max ( k, ic BS )
k on the same site
k on the same site
Else,
UL UL UL
Q MAX ( ic BS ) = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max ( Q max ( k, ic BS ) )
Effective Eb/Nt
UL
Q eff is the effective traffic channel quality at the transmitter on icBS.
UL UL UL UL UL UL UL
Q eff = min ( Q MAX, Q req ) (or Q eff = min ( Q MAX, Q req × ΔQ req ) when compressed mode is activated).
UL
G SHO corresponds to the uplink soft handover gain.
UL
UL Q MAX ( ic BS )
G SHO = ------------------------------------------------
UL
max ( Q max ( k, ic BS ) )
UL UL
max ( Q max ( k, ic BS ) ) corresponds to the highest Q max ( k, ic BS ) value.
• HSUPA-related Results
Atoll determines the best HSUPA bearer that the user can obtain. The HSUPA bearer user is processed as if he is the only user
in the cell i.e. he uses the entire remaining load of the cell.
For further information on the HSUPA bearer selection, see "HSUPA Bearer Allocation Process" on page 227.
req
It corresponds to the E-DPDCH Ec/Nt required to obtain the HSUPA bearer ( ------
Ec
). This value is defined for an HSUPA
Nt E – DPDCH
bearer ( Index HSUPABearer ) and a number of retransmissions ( N Rtx ) in the HSUPA Bearer Selection table.
req
From ------
Ec req
, Atoll calculates the terminal power required to obtain the HSUPA bearer, P term – HSUPA .
Nt E – DPDCH
Ec req
P term – HSUPA = ------
req UL
× L T × N tot
Nt E – DPDCH
With
UL intra UL extra
UL tx UL tx
N tot ( ic ) = ( 1 – F MUD × ρ term ) × I tot ( ic ) + I tot ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + N 0
UL intra UL extra
tx UL tx
ρ term , F MUD , I tot , I tot , I inter – carrier and N 0 are defined in "Inputs" on page 182.
Atoll selects the best HSUPA bearer from the HSUPA compatible bearers. This is the HSUPA bearer with the highest potential
UL
R RLC – peak ( Index HSUPABearer )
throughput ( ----------------------------------------------------------------------- ) where:
N Rtx ( Index HSUPABearer )
262
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Ec- req
----- Ec max
• ≤ ------
Nt E – DPDCH Nt E – DPDCH
req max
• And P term – HSUPA ≤ P term
With
max
-----
Ec-
Nt E – DPDCH : the maximum E-DPDCH Ec Nt allowed.
max
P term : the maximum terminal power allowed.
UL
After selecting the HSUPA bearer, Atoll determines the corresponding RLC peak rate, R RLC – peak .
Application Throughput
UL
Atoll displays the provided application throughput ( T application ). The application throughput represents the net throughput
after deduction of coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). This one is calculated as follows:
UL
UL R RLC –p eak × ( 1 – BLER HSUPA ) × SF Rate – ΔR
T application ( M b ) = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
N Rtx
Where:
BLER HSUPA is the residual BLER after N Rtx retransmissions. It is read in the quality graph defined for the quartet “reception
equipment-selected bearer-number of retransmissions-mobility” (HSUPA Quality Graphs tab in the Reception equipment
properties). This graph describes the variation of BLER as a function of the measured quality (E-DPDCH Ec/Nt). Knowing the E-
DPDCH Ec/Nt, Atoll finds the corresponding BLER.
SF Rate and ΔR respectively represent the scaling factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control)
throughput and the throughput offset. These two parameters model the header information and other supplementary data
that does not appear at the application level. They are defined in the service properties.
Bearer Consumption
Atoll provides this result for packet (HSPA - Constant Bit Rate) service users only. The minimum bit rate required by the service
is allocated to these users. Therefore, they parly consume the HSUPA bearer. The bearer consumption expressed in %,
C HSUPABearer , is calculated as follows:
UL
R Guaranteed
C HSUPABearer = ---------------------------------------------------------
UL
-
R RLC – peak ( I HSUPABearer )
Atoll displays the best pilot quality received with a fixed cell edge coverage probability.
263
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
Atoll proceeds as in point predictions. It determines the best carrier of each transmitter i containing the receiver in its
calculation area and using a frequency band supported by the receiver’s terminal. The best carrier selection depends on the
option selected for the site equipment (UL minimum noise, DL minimum power, random, sequential) and is based on the UL
load percentage and the downlink total power of cells (simulation results or cell properties). Atoll calculates the pilot quality
at the receiver from these transmitters on their best carriers and determines the best serving transmitter BS on its best carrier
icBS ( Q pilot ( ic BS ) ). Then, it calculates the best pilot quality received with a fixed cell edge coverage probability,
BS
Resulting
Q pilot ( ic BS ) .
Atoll displays the best pilot quality received with a fixed cell edge coverage probability.
3rd case: Analysis based on the best carrier of any frequency band (for dual-band terminals with priority defined on frequency
bands only)
The frequency band that can be used is fixed. Atoll determines the best carrier of each transmitter i containing the receiver
in its calculation area and using the selected frequency band. The best carrier selection depends on the option selected for
the site equipment (UL minimum noise, DL minimum power, random, sequential) and is based on the UL load percentage and
the downlink total power of cells (simulation results or cell properties). Then, Atoll calculates the pilot quality at the receiver
from these transmitters on their best carriers and determines the best serving transmitter BS on its best carrier icBS
Resulting
( Q pilot ( ic BS ) ). Then, it calculates the best pilot quality received with a fixed cell edge coverage probability, Q pilot ( ic BS ) .
BS
Atoll displays the best pilot quality received with a fixed cell edge coverage probability.
Resulting req
Atoll displays a coverage if Q pilot ( ic ) ≥ Q pilot . Coverage consists of a single layer with a unique colour
req
( ic = ic BS or ic given ). Q pilot is a target value defined in the Mobility table by the user.
Resulting req
Atoll displays a coverage if Q pilot ( ic ) ≥ Q pilot ( ic = ic BS or ic given ). Coverage consists of several layers with associated
colours. There is a layer per transmitter with no intersection between layers. Layer colour is the colour assigned to the best
serving transmitter BS.
This display option is available only if analysis is based on all simulations in a group (i.e. if you select a group of simulations
and the “All” option in the Condition tab of prediction properties). Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-
defined probability level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
Resulting req
Q pilot ( ic ) ≥ Q pilot ( ic = ic BS or ic given ) in the required number of simulations. Each layer is assigned a colour and
displayed with intersections between layers.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined cell edge coverage probability, p, defined in the Display tab
Resulting req
(Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q pilot ( ic, p ) ≥ Q pilot ( ic = ic BS or ic given ). Each layer is assigned
a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
264
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
Resulting
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q pilot ( ic ) ≥ ( Q pilot ) threshold ( ic = ic BS or ic given ). Each layer is assigned a
colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
Resulting req
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q pilot ( ic ) – Q pilot ≥ ( Q pilot ) m arg in ( ic = ic BS or ic given ). Each layer is
assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
Best server and active set determination is performed as in point prediction (AS analysis).
Atoll displays traffic channel quality at the receiver for transmitters in active set on the carrier ic ( ic BS or ic given ).
For further details of calculation formulas and methods, see "Downlink Sub-Menu" on page 254.
DL DL DL DL DL
Atoll displays a coverage with a unique colour if Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req (or Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req × ΔQ req if compressed mode is
activated).
DL
Q req is the downlink traffic quality target defined by the user for a given reception equipment, a given R99 bearer and a given
mobility type. This parameter is available in the R99 Bearer Selection table.
DL
ΔQ req is the DL Eb/Nt target increase; this parameter is user-defined in the Global parameters.
DL DL DL DL DL
Atoll displays a coverage if Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req (or Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req × ΔQ req if compressed mode is activated). Coverage
consists of several layers with associated colours. There is a layer per transmitter with no intersection between layers. Layer
colour is the colour assigned to best serving transmitter.
In this case, receiver is not completely defined and no mobility is assigned. Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per
DL DL
user-defined mobility defined in Mobility sub-folder. For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req (or
DL DL DL
Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req × ΔQ req if compressed mode is activated). Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections
between layers.
265
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
In this case, receiver is not completely defined and no service is assigned. Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per
DL DL
user-defined service defined in Services sub-folder. For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req (or
DL DL DL
Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req × ΔQ req if compressed mode is activated). Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections
between layers.
This display option is available only if analysis is based on all simulations in a group (i.e. if you select a group of simulations
and the “All” option in the Condition tab of prediction properties). Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-
DL DL
defined probability level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req
in the required number of simulations. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined cell edge coverage probability, p, defined in the Display tab
DL DL DL DL DL
(Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ( ic, p ) ≥ Q req (or Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req × ΔQ req if compressed
mode is activated). Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q eff ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
DL DL DL DL DL DL DL
intersections between layers. Q eff ( ic ) = min ( Q MAX ( ic ), Q req ) (or Q eff ( ic ) = min ( Q MAX ( ic ), Q req × ΔQ req ) when
compressed mode is activated).
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL DL DL DL DL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ( ic ) – Q req ≥ M arg in (or Q MAX ( ic ) – Q req × ΔQ req ≥ M arg in when
compressed mode is activated). Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
req
Atoll calculates the downlink required power, P tch ( ic ) , as follows:
DL
req Q req max
P tch ( ic ) = ----------------------
DL
× P tch
Q MAX ( ic )
Where
DL
Q req is the Eb/Nt target on downlink. This parameter, available in the R99 Bearer Selection table, is user-defined for a given
R99 bearer, a given reception equipment and a mobility type.
max
P tch is a user-defined input for each bearer related to a service. It corresponds to the maximum allowable traffic channel
power for a transmitter.
DL DL
req Q req × ΔQ req
- × P max
When compressed mode is activated, we have: P tch ( ic ) = ------------------------------ tch .
DL
Q MAX ( ic )
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined required power threshold defined in the Display tab
req
(Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if P tch ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed
with intersections between layers.
266
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined power margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
req max
properties). For each layer, area is covered if P tch ( ic ) – P tch ≥ M arg in . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
Best server and active set determination is performed as in point prediction (AS analysis).
Atoll displays traffic channel quality at transmitters in active set on the carrier ic ( ic BS or ic given ) received from the receiver.
For further details of calculations formulas and methods, see "Uplink Sub-Menu" on page 259.
UL UL UL UL UL
Atoll displays a coverage if Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req (or Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req × ΔQ req if compressed mode is activated). Coverage colour
is unique.
UL
Q req is defined for a reception equipment, a R99 bearer and a mobility type. This parameter is available in the R99 Bearer
Selection table.
UL
ΔQ req is the UL Eb/Nt target increase; this parameter is user-defined in the Global parameters.
UL UL UL UL UL
Atoll displays a coverage if Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req (or Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req × ΔQ req if compressed mode is activated). Coverage
consists of several layers with associated colours. There is a layer per transmitter with no intersection between layers. Layer
colour is the colour assigned to best server transmitter.
In this case, receiver is not completely defined and no mobility is assigned. Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per
UL UL
user-defined mobility defined in Mobility sub-folder. For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req (or
UL UL UL
Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req × ΔQ req if compressed mode is activated). Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections
between layers.
In this case, receiver is not completely defined and no service is assigned. Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per
UL UL
user-defined service defined in Services sub-folder. For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req (or
UL UL UL
Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req × ΔQ req if compressed mode is activated). Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections
between layers.
267
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
This display option is available only if analysis is based on all simulations in a group (i.e. if you select a group of simulations
and the “All” option in the Condition tab of prediction properties). Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-
UL UL
defined probability level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req
UL UL UL
(or Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req × ΔQ req if compressed mode is activated) in the required number of simulations. Each layer is assigned
a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q effective ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
UL UL UL UL UL UL UL
Q eff ( ic ) = min ( Q MAX ( ic ), Q req ) (or Q eff ( ic ) = min ( Q MAX ( ic ), Q req × ΔQ req ) when compressed mode is activated).
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL UL UL UL UL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ( ic ) – Q req ≥ M arg in (or Q MAX ( ic ) – Q req × ΔQ req ≥ M arg in if
compressed mode is activated). Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined power threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
req
properties). For each layer, area is covered if P term – R99 ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined power margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
req max
properties). For each layer, area is covered if P term – R99 ( ic ) – P term ≥ M arg in . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed
with intersections between layers.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per soft handover gain value defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
UL
For each layer, area is covered if G SHO ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between
layers.
Ptot ( icadj )
DL
Tx
P Transmitted ( ic i )
Ptot ( ic ) + ------------------------------------ + -------------------------------------- + N 0
DL DL txj, ∀j term
N tot ( ic ) =
RF ( ic, ic adj ) L
Tx
× ICP
Tx, m
txj, ∀j ni total ic i, ic
DL
Downlink noise rise, NR DL ( ic ) , is calculated from the downlink total noise, N tot , as follows:
term
N0
NR DL ( ic ) = – 10 log ------------
-
N DL tot
268
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined noise level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
DL
For each layer, area is covered if minNtot ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections
ic
between layers.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined noise level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
DL
For each layer, area is covered if maxN tot ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections
ic
between layers.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined noise level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
DL
For each layer, area is covered if averageN tot ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
ic
intersections between layers.
Atoll displays bins where minNR DL ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Coverage consists of several areas with an area per user-defined noise
ic
rise threshold defined in the Display tab. Each area is assigned a colour with intersections between areas.
Atoll displays bins where maxNR DL ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Coverage consists of several areas with an area per user-defined noise
ic
rise threshold defined in the Display tab. Each area is assigned a colour with intersections between areas.
Atoll displays bins where averageNR DL ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Coverage consists of several areas with an area per user-defined
ic
noise rise threshold defined in the Display tab. Each area is assigned a colour with intersections between areas.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined noise level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
DL
For each layer, area is covered if N tot ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections
between layers.
Atoll displays bins where NRDL ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Coverage consists of several areas with an area per user-defined noise rise
threshold defined in the Display tab. Each area is assigned a colour with intersections between areas.
269
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
270
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
When you calculate the study with the following display options, Atoll considers one user on each pixel and determines the
best HSDPA bearer that the user can obtain. For dual-cell HSDPA users, Atoll determines the best HSDPA bearers that the user
can obtain in the two cells. On each pixel, the user is processed as if he is the only user in the cell i.e. he uses the entire HSDPA
power available in the cell.
For further information on the fast link adaptation modelling, see "Fast Link Adaptation Modelling" on page 208.
• Colour per HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt
Atoll displays on each pixel the HS-PDSCH quality. For a dual-cell HSDPA user, it corresponds to the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt of the
best serving cell. Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per threshold. For each layer, area is covered if
-----
Ec-
Nt ( ic ) HS – PDSCH ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
S block ( c )
DL
R MAC = ---------------------
T TTI
c ∈ Serving cells
Where,
S block ( c ) is the transport block size (in kbits) of the HSDPA bearer selected in the cell, c, for the user; it is defined for each
HSDPA bearer in the HSDPA Radio Bearers table.
–3
T TTI is the TTI duration, i.e. 2 ×10 s (2000 TTI in one second). This value is specified by the 3GPP.
DL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible MAC rate ( R MAC ). For each layer, area is covered if the MAC rate
exceeds the user-defined thresholds. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per MAC Throughput
DL
Atoll displays the MAC throughput ( T MAC ) provided on each pixel. The MAC throughput is calculated as follows:
S block ( c )
DL
T MAC = --------------------------
-
T TTI × Δ TTI
c ∈ Serving cells
271
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
Where,
S block ( c ) is the transport block size (in kbits) of the selected HSDPA bearer in the cell, c; it is defined for each HSDPA bearer
in the HSDPA Radio Bearers table.
ΔTTI is the minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used; it is defined in the terminal user
equipment category properties.
–3
T TTI is the TTI duration, i.e. 2 ×10 s (2000 TTI in one second). This value is specified by the 3GPP.
DL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible MAC throughput ( T MAC ). For each layer, area is covered if the
MAC throughput exceeds the user-defined thresholds. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections
between layers.
• Colour per RLC Peak Rate
After selecting the bearer (two bearers can be selected in case of dual-cell HSDPA), Atoll reads the corresponding RLC peak
rate ( R DL ). This is the highest rate that the bearer can provide on each pixel. Then, it determines the
RLC – peak ( I HSDPABearer )
DL
RLC peak rate provided by the serving cell, c, in the downlink, R RLC – p eak ( c ) .
DL DL
For a single-carrier HSDPA user,we have: R RLC – p eak = R RLC – p eak ( c )
For dual-cell HSDPA users, the RLC peak rate provided to the user is calculated as follows:
DL DL
R RLC – peak = R RLC – peak ( c )
c ∈ Serving cell
DL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible RLC peak rate ( R RLC – p eak ). For each layer, area is covered if the
RLC peak rate can be provided. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per RLC Peak Throughput
DL
Atoll displays the RLC peak throughput ( T RLC –p eak ) provided on each pixel. The RLC peak throughput is calculated as follows:
DL
DL R RLC – p eak
T RLC –p eak = ---------------------
-
ΔTTI
Where ΔTTI is the minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used; it is defined in the terminal
user equipment category properties.
DL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible RLC peak throughput ( T RLC –p eak ). For each layer, area is covered
if the RLC peak throughput exceeds the user-defined thresholds. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
• Colour per Average RLC Throughput
DL
Atoll displays the average RLC throughput ( T RLC – Av ) provided on each pixel.
DL
( R RLC – peak ( c ) × ( 1 – BLER HSDPA ) )
DL ∈ Serving cells
T RLC – Av = c----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ΔTTI
Where,
BLER HSDPA is read in the quality graph defined for the triplet “reception equipment-selected bearer-mobility” (HSDPA Quality
Graphs tab in the Reception equipment properties). This graph describes the variation of BLER as a function of the measured
quality (HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt). Knowing the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt, Atoll finds the corresponding BLER.
ΔTTI is the minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used; it is defined in the terminal user
equipment category properties.
272
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
DL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible average RLC throughput ( T RLC – Av ). For each layer, area is covered
if the average RLC throughput exceeds the user-defined thresholds. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
• Colour per Application Throughput
DL
Atoll displays the application throughput ( T application ) provided on each pixel. The application throughput represents the net
throughput after deduction of coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.).
It is calculated as follows:
DL DL
T application = T RLC – Av × SF Rate – ΔR
Where:
DL
T RLC – Av is the average RLC throughput.
BLER HSDPA is read in the quality graph defined for the triplet “reception equipment-selected bearer-mobility” (HSDPA Quality
Graphs tab in the Reception equipment properties). This graph describes the variation of BLER as a function of the measured
quality (HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt). Knowing the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt, Atoll finds the corresponding BLER.
SF Rate and ΔR respectively represent the scaling factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control)
throughput and the throughput offset. These two parameters model the header information and other supplementary data
that does not appear at the application level. They are defined in the service properties.
ΔTTI is the minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used; it is defined in the terminal user
equipment category properties.
DL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible application throughput ( T application ). For each layer, area is
covered if the application throughput exceeds the user-defined thresholds. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
When you calculate the study with the following display options, Atoll considers several users per pixel and determines the
best HSDPA bearer that each user can obtain. In this case, the cell available HSDPA power is shared between HSDPA bearer
users. When the coverage prediction is not based on a simulation, the number of HSDPA bearer users is taken from the cell
properties. The displayed results of the coverage prediction will be an average result for one user.
For further information on the HSDPA bearer allocation process when there are several users, see "HSDPA Bearer Allocation
Process" on page 206 For further information on the fast link adaptation modelling, see "Fast Link Adaptation Modelling" on
page 208.
• Colour per MAC Throughput Per Mobile
DL
Atoll displays the average MAC throughput per mobile ( ( T MAC ) average ) provided on each pixel. The average MAC throughput
per mobile is calculated as follows:
n HSDPA
DL
T MAC ( x )
DL
( T MAC ) average = ----------------------------------------------
x=1 -
Max ( n HSDPA ( c ) )
c ∈ Serving cells ( x )
Where,
Serving cells ( x ) represents the set of serving cells for a user x. For a dual-cell HSDPA user, there are two serving cells.
DL
T MAC ( x ) is the MAC throughput of each HSDPA bearer user. For further information on the calculation of the MAC
throughput, see "Colour per MAC Throughput" on page 271.
DL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible average MAC throughput per mobile ( ( T MAC ) average ). For each
layer, area is covered if the average MAC throughput per mobile exceeds the user-defined thresholds. Each layer is assigned
a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per RLC Throughput Per Mobile
273
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
DL
Atoll displays the average RLC throughput per mobile ( ( T RLC ) average ) provided on each pixel. The average RLC throughput per
mobile is calculated as follows:
n
HSDPA
DL
T RLC –p eak ( x )
DL
( T RLC ) average = ---------------------------------------------
x=1 -
n HSDPA
Where,
n HSDPA is the number of HSDPA users within the cell.
DL
T RLC –p eak ( x ) is the RLC peak throughput of each HSDPA bearer user. For further information on the calculation of the RLC
peak throughput, see "Colour per RLC Peak Throughput" on page 272.
DL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible average RLC throughput per mobile ( ( T RLC ) average ). For each
layer, area is covered if the average RLC throughput per mobile exceeds the user-defined thresholds. Each layer is assigned a
colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per ApplicationThroughput Per Mobile
DL
Atoll displays the average application throughput per mobile ( ( T application ) average ) provided on each pixel. The average
application throughput per mobile is calculated as follows:
n HSDPA
DL
T application ( x )
DL
( T application ) average = -------------------------------------------------
x=1 -
n HSDPA
Where,
n HSDPA is the number of HSDPA users within the cell.
DL
T application ( x ) is the application throughput of each HSDPA bearer user. For further information on the calculation of the
application throughput, see "Colour per Application Throughput" on page 273.
DL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible average application throughput per mobile ( ( T application ) average ).
For each layer, area is covered if the average application throughput per mobile exceeds the user-defined thresholds. Each
layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
This result can be obtained only if you have selected an HSDPA radio bearer in the Condition tab.
• Colour per Cell Edge Coverage Probability
Atoll shows areas where the selected HSDPA radio bearer is available with different cell edge coverage probabilities. Coverage
consists of several layers with a layer per cell edge coverage probability defined in the Display tab. For each layer, area is
covered if the selected HSDPA radio bearer is available. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections
between layers.
274
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Atoll displays on each pixel the E-DPDCH Ec/Nt required to obtain the selected HSUPA bearer. Coverage consists of several
Ec req
layers with a layer per threshold. For each layer, area is covered if ------ ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour
Nt E – DPDCH
and displayed with intersections between layers.
Atoll displays on each pixel the terminal power required to obtain the selected HSUPA bearer. The required terminal power
is calculated from the required E-DPDCH Ec/Nt. Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per threshold. For each layer,
req
area is covered if P term ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
UL
Atoll displays the MAC rate ( R MAC ) provided on each pixel. The MAC rate is calculated as follows:
UL
UL S block
R MAC = ------------
-
T TTI
Where,
UL
S block is the transport block size (in kbits) for the selected HSUPA bearer; it is defined for each HSUPA bearer in the HSUPA
Radio Bearers table.
T TTI is the duration of one TTI for the selected HSUPA bearer; it is defined for each HSUPA bearer in the HSUPA Radio Bearers
table.
UL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible MAC rate ( R MAC ). For each layer, area is covered if the MAC rate
exceeds the user-defined thresholds. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
275
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
After selecting the HSUPA bearer, Atoll reads the corresponding RLC peak rate. This is the highest rate that the selected
HSUPA bearer can provide on each pixel.
UL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible RLC peak rate ( R RLC – p eak ). For each layer, area is covered if the
RLC peak rate can be provided. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
UL
Atoll displays the minimum RLC throughput ( T RLC – Min ) provided on each pixel. The minimum RLC throughput corresponds
to the RLC throughput obtained for a given BLER and the maximum number of retransmissions. It is calculated as follows:
UL
UL R RLC –p eak × ( 1 – BLER HSUPA )
T RLC – Min = --------------------------------------------------------------------
-
N Rtx
Where,
BLER HSUPA is the residual BLER for the selected uplink transmission format (HSUPA bearer with N Rtx retransmissions). It is
read in the quality graph defined for the quartet “reception equipment-selected bearer-number of retransmissions-mobility”
(HSUPA Quality Graphs tab in the Reception equipment properties). This graph describes the variation of BLER as a function
of the measured quality (E-DPDCH Ec/Nt). Knowing the E-DPDCH Ec/Nt, Atoll finds the corresponding BLER.
N Rtx is the maximum number of retransmissions for the selected HSUPA bearer. This figure is read in the HSUPA Bearer
Selection table.
DL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible minimum RLC throughput ( T RLC – Min ). For each layer, area is
covered if the minimum RLC throughput exceeds the user-defined thresholds. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed
with intersections between layers.
When HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) is used, the required average number of retransmissions is smaller and the
UL
RLC throughput is an average RLC throughput ( T RLC – Av ). This is the RLC throughput obtained for a given BLER and the average
number of retransmissions. It is calculated as follows:
UL
UL R RLC –p eak × ( 1 – BLER HSUPA )
T RLC – Av = --------------------------------------------------------------------
-
( N Rtx ) av
BLER HSUPA is the residual BLER for the selected uplink transmission format (HSUPA bearer with N Rtx retransmissions). It is
read in the quality graph defined for the quartet “reception equipment-selected bearer-number of retransmissions-mobility”
(HSUPA Quality Graphs tab in the Reception equipment properties). This graph describes the variation of BLER as a function
of the measured quality (E-DPDCH Ec/Nt). Knowing the E-DPDCH Ec/Nt, Atoll finds the corresponding BLER.
The average number of retransmissions ( ( N Rtx ) av ) is determined from early termination probabilities defined for the selected
HSUPA bearer (in the HSUPA Bearer Selection table). The Early Termination Probability graph shows the probability of early
termination ( p ) as a function of the number of retransmissions ( N Rtx ). Atoll calculates the average number of
retransmissions ( ( N Rtx ) av ) as follows:
( N Rtx )
max
DL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible average RLC throughput ( T RLC – Av ). For each layer, area is covered
if the minimum RLC throughput exceeds the user-defined thresholds. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
UL
Atoll displays the application throughput ( T application ) provided on each pixel. The application throughput represents the net
throughput after deduction of coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). This one is calculated as follows:
276
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
UL UL
T application ( M b ) = T RLC – Min × SF Rate – ΔR
Where:
SF Rate and ΔR respectively represent the scaling factor between the application throughput and the minimum RLC (Radio
Link Control) throughput and the throughput offset. These two parameters model the header information and other
supplementary data that does not appear at the application level. They are defined in the service properties.
UL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible application throughput ( T application ). For each layer, area is
covered if the application throughput exceeds the user-defined thresholds. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
UL
Atoll displays the average application throughput ( T application – Av ) provided on each pixel. It is calculated as follows:
UL UL
T application – Av ( M b ) = T RLC – Av × SF Rate – ΔR
Where:
SF Rate and ΔR respectively represent the scaling factor between the average application throughput and the average RLC
(Radio Link Control) throughput and the throughput offset. These two parameters model the header information and other
supplementary data that does not appear at the application level. They are defined in the service properties.
UL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible average application throughput ( T application – Av ). For each layer,
area is covered if the average application throughput exceeds the user-defined thresholds. Each layer is assigned a colour and
displayed with intersections between layers.
If no focus zone exists in the .atl document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
277
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
Atoll calculates the effective distance, which corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the
azimuths of antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter
Distance" on page 284.
• The calculation options,
Carriers: This option enables you to select the carrier(s) on which you want to run the allocation. You may choose one or more
carriers. Atoll will allocate neighbours to cells using the selected carriers.
Force co-site cells as neighbours: This option enables you to force cells located on the reference cell site in the candidate
neighbour list. This constraint can be weighted among the others and ranks the neighbours through the importance field (see
after).
Force adjacent cells as neighbours (only for intra-carrier neighbours): This option enables you to force cells geographically
adjacent to the reference cell in the candidate neighbour list.This constraint can be weighted among the others and ranks the
neighbours through the importance field (see after).
• When this option is checked, adjacent cells are sorted and listed from the most
adjacent to the least, depending on the above criterion. Adjacence is relative to the
number of pixels satisfying the criterion.
Force neighbour symmetry: This option enables user to force the reciprocity of a neighbourhood link. Therefore, if the
reference cell is a candidate neighbour of another cell, this one will be considered as candidate neighbour of the reference
cell.
Force exceptional pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbourhood relationships. Therefore, you may
force/forbid a cell to be candidate neighbour of the reference cell.
Delete existing neighbours: When selecting the Delete existing neighbours option, Atoll deletes all the current neighbours and
carries out a new neighbour allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept.
• There must be an overlapping zone ( S A ∩ S B ) with a given cell edge coverage probability:
• Intra-carrier neighbours: intra-carrier handover is a soft handover.
The reference cell A and the candidate cell B are located inside a continuous layer of cells with carrier c1 (c1 is the selected
carrier on which you run the allocation).
SA is the area where the cell A is the best serving cell. It means that the cell A is the first one in the active set.
• The pilot signal received from the cell A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level.
• The pilot quality from A exceeds a user-definable minimum value (minimum Ec/I0).
• The pilot quality from A is the best.
SB is the area where the cell B can enter the active set.
• The pilot signal received from the cell B is greater than the minimum pilot signal level.
• The pilot quality from B is greater than the pilot quality from A minus the Ec/I0 margin. The Ec/I0 margin has the
same meaning as the AS-threshold defined in the Cell properties. So, it should logically have the same value.
278
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
1st case: the reference cell A is located inside a continuous layer of cells with carrier c1 (c1 is the selected carrier on which you
run the allocation) and the candidate cell B belongs to a layer of cells with carrier c2.
SA is the area where the cell A is not the best serving cell of its layer but can enter the active set.
• The pilot signal received from the cell A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level.
• The pilot quality from A exceeds a user-definable minimum value (minimum Ec/I0).
• The pilot quality from A is not the highest one. It is strictly lower than the best pilot quality received and greater
than the best pilot quality minus the Ec/I0 margin.
SB is the area where the cell B is the best serving cell of its layer.
• The pilot signal received from the cell B is greater than the minimum pilot signal level.
• The pilot quality from B exceeds a user-definable minimum value (minimum Ec/I0).
• The pilot quality from B is the highest one.
2nd case: the reference cell A is located on the border of a layer with carrier c1 (c1 is the selected carrier on which you run the
allocation) and the candidate cell B belongs to a layer of cells with carrier c2.
279
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
SA is the area where the pilot quality from the cell A starts significantly decreasing but the cell A is still the best serving cell of
its layer (since it is on the border).
• The pilot signal received from the cell A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level.
• The pilot quality from A is the highest one
• The pilot quality from A is lower than a user-definable minimum value (minimum Ec/I0) plus the Ec/I0 margin.
SB is the area where the cell B is the best serving cell of its layer.
• The pilot signal received from the cell B is greater than the minimum pilot signal level.
• The pilot quality from B exceeds a user-definable minimum value (minimum Ec/I0).
• The pilot quality from B is the highest one.
SA ∩ SB
Atoll calculates the percentage of covered area ( ------------------ × 100 ) and compares this value to the % minimum covered area. If
SA
this percentage is not exceeded, the candidate neighbour B is discarded.
• The importance of neighbours.
For information on the importance calculation, see "Importance Calculation" on page 281.
Importance values are used by the allocation algorithm to rank the neighbours according to the allocation reason. Atoll lists
all neighbours and sorts them by importance value so as to eliminate some of them from the neighbour list if the maximum
number of neighbours to be allocated to each transmitter is exceeded. If we consider the case for which there are 15
candidate neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to the reference cell is 8. Among these 15
candidate neighbours, only 8 (having the highest importance values) will be allocated to the reference cell. Note that specific
maximum numbers of neighbours (maximum number of intra-carrier neighbours, maximum number of inter-carrier
neighbours) can be defined at the cell level (property dialogue or cell table). If defined there, this value is taken into account
instead of the default one available in the Neighbour Allocation dialogue.
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site, adjacent, coverage or symmetric. For neighbours accepted for co-site,
adjacency and coverage reasons, Atoll displays the percentage of area meeting the coverage conditions and the
corresponding surface area (km2), the percentage of area meeting the adjacency conditions and the corresponding surface
area (km2). Finally, if cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked as existing.
280
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
281
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers fourfactors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d
( Di ) = 1 – -----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter Distance" on
page 284.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours, adjacent neighbours, and neighbours allocated based on coverage
overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
• The default value of Min(O) = 1% ensures that neighbours selected for symmetry will
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selected for symmetry will have an importance field greater than 0% only if there is
some coverage overlapping.
282
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers threefactors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d
( Di ) = 1 – -----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter Distance" on
page 284.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours and neighbours allocated based on coverage overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
• The default value of Min(O) = 1% ensures that neighbours selected for symmetry will
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selected for symmetry will have an importance field greater than 0% only if there is
some coverage overlapping.
283
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
4.6.4 Appendices
4.6.4.1 Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter Distance
Atoll takes into account the real distance ( D in m) and azimuths of antennas in order to calculate the effective inter-
transmitter distance ( d in m).
d = D × ( 1 + x × cos β – x × cos α )
where x = 0.3% so that the maximum D variation does not exceed 1%.
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other will have a smaller effective distance than the real physical
distance. It is this effective distance that will be taken into account rather than the real distance.
If no focus zone exists in the .atl document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
284
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
• In the context of the primary scrambling code allocation, the term "neighbours" refers
to intra-carrier neighbours.
• Atoll can take into account inter-technology neighbour relations as constraints to
allocate different scrambling codes to the UMTS neighbours of a GSM transmitter. In
order to consider inter-technology neighbour relations in the scrambling code
allocation, you must make the Transmitters folder of the GSM .atl document
accessible in the UMTS .atl document. For information on making links between GSM
and UMTS .atl documents, see the User Manual.
• Atoll considers symmetry relationship between a cell, its first order neighbours, its
second order neighbours and its third order neighbours.
• Atoll considers either a percentage of the cell maximum powers or the total downlink
power used by the cells in order to evaluate I0. In this case, I0 equals the sum of total
transmitted powers. When this parameter is not specified in the cell properties, Atoll
uses 50% of the maximum power.
• Reuse distance,
• Exceptional pairs,
• Domains of scrambling codes,
When no domain is assigned to cells, Atoll considers the 512 primary scrambling codes
available.
• The number of primary scrambling codes per cluster. In Atoll, we call "cluster", a group of scrambling codes as defined
in 3GPP specifications. 3GPP specifications define 64 clusters consisting of 8 scrambling codes (in this case, clusters
are numbererd from 0 to 63). However, you can define another value (e.g. if you set the number of codes per cluster
to 4, scrambling codes will be distributed in 128 clusters).
When the allocation is based on a Distributed strategy (Distributed per Cell or Distributed per Site), this parameter can
also be used to define the interval between the primary scrambling codes assigned to cells on a same site. The defined
interval is applied by adding the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[PSC]
ConstantStep = 1
For more information about setting options in the atoll.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.
• The carrier on which the allocation is run: It can be a given carrier or all of them. In this case, either Atoll independently
plans scrambling codes for the different carriers, or it allocates the same primary scrambling code to each carrier of a
transmitter if the option "Allocate carriers identically" is selected.
• The possibility to use a maximum of codes from the defined domains (option "Use a Maximum of Codes"): Atoll will
try to spread the scrambling code spectrum the most.
• The "Delete All Codes" option: When selecting this option, Atoll deletes all the current scrambling codes and carries
out a new scrambling code allocation. If not selected, the existing scrambling codes are kept.
In addition, it depends on the selected allocation strategy. Allocation strategies can be:
285
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
• Clustered allocation: The purpose of this strategy is to choose for a group of mutually constrained cells, scrambling
codes among a minimum number of clusters. In this case, Atoll will preferentially allocate all the codes within the
same cluster.
• Distributed per cell allocation: This strategy consists in using as many clusters as possible. Atoll will preferentially
allocate codes from different clusters.
• One cluster per site allocation: This strategy allocates one cluster to each site, then, one code from the cluster to each
cell of each site. When all the clusters have been allocated and there are still sites remaining to be allocated, Atoll
reuses the clusters as far as possible at another site.
• Distributed per site allocation: This strategy allocates a group of adjacent clusters to each site, then, one cluster to
each transmitter on the site according to its azimuth and finally, one code from the cluster to each cell of each
transmitter. The number of adjacent clusters per group depends on the number of transmitters per site you have in
your network; this information is required to start allocation based on this strategy. When all the groups of adjacent
clusters have been allocated and there are still sites remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the groups of adjacent
clusters as far as possible at another site.
In the Results table, Atoll only displays scrambling codes allocated to TBA cells.
Atoll processes TBA cells according to their priority. It allocates scrambling codes starting with the highest priority cell and its
near cells, and continuing with the lowest priority cells not allocated yet and their near cells. For information on calculating
cell priority, see "Cell Priority" on page 288.
All sites which have constraints with the studied site are referred to as near sites.
Atoll assigns a cluster to each site, starting with the highest priority site and its near sites, and continuing with the lowest
priority sites not allocated yet and their near sites. When all the clusters have been allocated and there are still sites remaining
to be allocated, Atoll reuses the clusters at another site. When the Reuse Distance option is selected, the algorithm reuses
the clusters as soon as the reuse distance is exceeded. Otherwise, when the option is not selected, the algorithm tries to assign
reused clusters as spaced out as possible.
Then, Atoll allocates a primary scrambling code from the cluster to each cell located on the sites (codes belong to the assigned
clusters). It starts with the highest priority cell and its near cells and goes on with the lowest priority cells not allocated yet
and their near cells.
For information on calculating site priority, see "Site Priority" on page 290. For information on calculating cell priority, see
"Cell Priority" on page 288.
286
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
All sites which have constraints with the studied site are referred to as near sites.
Atoll assigns a group of adjacent clusters to each site, starting with the highest priority site and its near sites, and continuing
with the lowest priority sites not allocated yet and their near sites. When all the groups of adjacent clusters have been
allocated and there are still sites remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the groups of adjacent clusters at another site. When
the Reuse Distance option is selected, the algorithm reuses the groups of adjacent clusters as soon as the reuse distance is
exceeded. Otherwise, when the option is not selected, the algorithm tries to assign reused groups of adjacent clusters as
spaced out as possible. Then, Atoll assigns each cluster of the group to each transmitter of the site according to the
transmitter azimuth and selected neighbourhood constraints (options "Neighbours in Other Clusters" and "Secondary
Neighbours in Other Clusters"). Then, Atoll allocates a primary scrambling code to each cell located on the transmitters (codes
belong to the assigned clusters). It starts with the highest priority cell and its near cells and goes on with the lowest priority
cells not allocated yet and their near cells.
For information on calculating site priority, see "Site Priority" on page 290. For information on calculating cell priority, see
"Cell Priority" on page 288.
In order to determine the groups of adjacent clusters to be used, Atoll proceeds as follows: It defines theoretical groups of
adjacent clusters, independently of the defined domain, considering the 512 primary scrambling codes available and the
specified number of codes per cluster (if this one is set to 8, 64 clusters are supposed to be available). It starts the division in
group from the cluster 0 (hard coded) and takes into account the maximum number of transmitters per site user-specified in
order to determine the number of clusters in each group and then, the number of possible groups.
Let us assume that the number of codes per cluster is set to 8 and the maximum number of transmitters per site in the
network is 3. In this case, we have the following theoretical groups:
Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 ... Group 21
Cluster 0 Cluster 3 Cluster 6 Cluster 9 Cluster 61
Cluster 1 Cluster 4 Cluster 7 Cluster 10 ... Cluster 62
Cluster 2 Cluster 5 Cluster 8 Cluster 11 Cluster 63
If no domain is assigned to cells, Atoll can use all these groups for the allocation. On the other hand, if a domain is used, the
tool compares adjacent clusters really available in the assigned domain to the theoretical groups and only keeps adjacent
clusters mapping the theoretical groups.
Let us assume that we have a domain consisted of 12 clusters: clusters 1 to 8 and clusters 12 to 15.
Therefore, Atoll will be able to use the following groups of adjacent clusters:
• Group 2 with cluster 3, 4 and 5,
• Group 3 with cluster 6, 7 and 8,
• Group 6 with cluster 12, 13 and 14.
• The clusters 1, 2 and 15 will not be used.
If a domain does not contain any adjacent clusters, the user is warned through the 'Event Viewer'.
287
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
When cells, transmitters or sites have the same priority, processing is based on an
alphanumeric order.
When domains of scrambling codes are assigned to cells, each unavailable scrambling code generates a cost. The higher the
number of codes available in the domain, the less will be the cost due to this criterion. The cost is given as:
C i ( Dom ) = 512 – Number of scrambling codes in the domain
• Distance Criterion
The constraint level of any cell i depends on the number of cells (j) present within a radius of "reuse distance" from its centre.
The total cost due to the distance constraint is given as:
C i ( Dist ) = Cj ( Dist ( i ) )
j
Each cell j within the reuse distance generates a cost given as:
C j ( Dist ( i ) ) = w ( d ij ) × c dis tan ce
Where
w ( d ij ) is a weight depending on the distance between i and j. This weight is inversely proportional to the inter-cell distance.
For a reuse distance of 2000m, the weight for an inter-cell distance of 1500m is 0.25, the weight for co-site cells is 1 and the
weight for two cells spaced out 2100m apart is 0.
c dis tan ce is the cost of the distance constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
C i ( EP ) = cEP ( i – j )
j
Where
c EP is the cost of the exceptional pair constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
• Neighbourhood Criterion
The constraint level of any cell i depends on the number of its neighbour cells j, the number of second order neighbours k and
the number of third order neighbours l.
Let’s consider the following neighbour schema:
288
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Ci ( N ) =
Cj ( N1 ( i ) ) + Cj – j′ ( N1 ( i ) ) + Ck ( N2 ( i ) ) + Ck – k′ ( N2 ( i ) ) + Cl ( N3 ( i ) ) + Cl – l′ ( N3 ( i ) )
j j′ k k′ l l′
Where
I j is the importance of the neighbour cell j.
c N1 is the cost of the first order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Because two first order neighbours must not have the same scrambling code, Atoll considers the cost created by two first
order neighbours to be each other.
C j ( N1 ( i ) ) + C j′ ( N1 ( i ) )
C j – j′ ( N1 ( i ) ) = -----------------------------------------------------
-
2
Each second order neighbour cell k generates a cost given as:
C k ( N2 ( i ) ) = Max (( C j ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k ( N1 ( j ) ) ),( C j′ ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k ( N1 ( j′ ) ) )) × c N2
Where
c N2 is the cost of the second order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Because two second order neighbours must not have the same scrambling code, Atoll considers the cost created by two
second order neighbours to be each other.
C k ( N2 ( i ) ) + C k′ ( N2 ( i ) )
C k – k′ ( N2 ( i ) ) = -------------------------------------------------------
-
2
Each third order neighbour cell l generates a cost given as:
C ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k ( N1 ( j ) ) × C l ( N1 ( k ) ), C j′ ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k ( N1 ( j′ ) ) × C l N1 ( k ),
C l ( N3 ( i ) ) = Max j × c N3
( C j ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k′ ( N1 ( j ) ) ) × C l N1 ( k′ ), C j′ ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k′ ( N1 ( j′ ) ) × C l N1 ( k′ )
Where
c N3 is the cost of the third order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Because two third order neighbours must not have the same scrambling code, Atoll considers the cost created by two third
order neighbours to be each other.
C l ( N3 ( i ) ) + C l′ ( N3 ( i ) )
C l – l′ ( N3 ( i ) ) = -----------------------------------------------------
-
2
289
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
Atoll considers the highest cost of both links when a neighbour relation is symmetric and
the importance value is different.
And
C k ( N2 ( i ) ) = Max (C j ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k ( N1 ( j ) ),C j ( N1 ( k ) ) × C i ( N1 ( j ) )) × c N2
C i ( N 2G ) = cN2G ( j – Tx2G )
j
Where
cN is the cost of the GSM neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
2G
• Cluster Criterion
When the "Distributed per Site" allocation strategy is used, you can consider additional constraints on allocated clusters (one
cell, its first order neighbours and its second order neighbours must be assigned scrambling codes from different clusters). In
this case, the constraint level of any cell i depends on the number of first and second order neighbours, j and k. The total cost
due to the cluster constraint is given as:
Where
c Cluster is the cost of the cluster constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Therefore, the total cost due to constraints on any cell i is defined as:
C i = C i ( Dom ) + C i ( U )
With
C i ( U ) = C i ( Dist ) + C i ( EP ) + C i ( N ) + C i ( N 2G ) + C i ( Cluster )
With C Tx ( U ) = Max ( C ( U ) ) and C ( Dom ) = 512 – Number of scrambling codes in the domain
i ∈ Tx i Tx
Here, the domain available for the transmitter is the intersection of domains assigned to cells of the transmitter. The domain
constraint is mandatory and cannot be broken.
290
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Let us consider a site S with three transmitters; each of them has two cells using carriers 0 and 1. The cost due to constraints
on the site is given as:
C S = C S ( U ) + C S ( Dom )
With C S ( U ) = Max ( C ( U ) ) and C ( Dom ) = 512 – Number of scrambling codes in the domain
Tx ∈ S Tx S
Here, the domain considered for the site is the intersection of domains available for transmitters of the site. The domain
constraint is mandatory and cannot be broken.
Let Site0, Site1, Site2 and Site3 be four sites with 3 cells using carrier 0 whom scrambling codes have to be allocated out of
three clusters consisted of 8 primary scrambling codes. This implies that the domain of scrambling codes for the four sites is
from 0 to 23 (cluster 0 to cluster 2). The reuse distance is supposed to be less than the inter-site distance. Only co-site
neighbours exist.
The following section lists the results of each combination of options with explanation where necessary.
291
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
Atoll starts allocating the codes from the start of cluster 0 at As it is possible to use a maximum of codes, Atoll starts
each site. allocation at the start of a different cluster at each site. When
a cluster is reused, and there are non allocated codes left in
the cluster, Atoll first allocates those codes before reusing
the already used ones.
Atoll allocates codes from different clusters to each cell of Atoll allocates codes from different clusters to each site’s
the same site. Under given constraints of neighbourhood and cells. As it is possible to use a maximum of codes, Atoll
reuse distance, same codes can be allocated to each site’s allocates the codes so that there is least repetition of codes.
cells.
292
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
In this strategy, a cluster of codes is limited to be used at just When it is possible to use a maximum of codes, Atoll can
one site at a time unless all codes and clusters have been allocate different codes from a reused cluster at another site.
allocated and there are still sites remaining to be allocated. In
this case Atoll reuses the clusters as far as possible at another
site.
In this strategy, a group of adjacent clusters is limited to be When it is possible to use a maximum of codes, Atoll can
used at just one site at a time unless all codes and groups of allocate different codes from a reused group of adjacent
adjacent clusters have been allocated and there are still sites cluster at another site.
remaining to be allocated. In this case (here only one group
of adjacent clusters (clusters 0, 1 and 2) is available), Atoll
reuses the group at another site.
293
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
Atoll allocates one cluster at each site as detailed in the In this case, Atoll allocates one cluster at each site and then,
previous section. Then, it allocates a code from the cluster to one code to each transmitter so as to use a maximum of
each cell of the site so as to use a maximum of codes. codes. Then, the same code is given to each cell of the
transmitter.
In both cases (with and without ’Allocate Carriers Identically’), every site has the same priority. Then, cluster allocation to sites
is performed in an alphanumeric order.
294
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Where d is the effective distance between the UMTS reference cell and the GSM neighbour and d max is the maximum inter-
site distance.
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site, or distance. For neighbours accepted for distance reasons, Atoll
displays the distance from the reference cell (m). Finally, if cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked
as existing.
295
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
• 1st case: SA is the area where the cell A is the best serving cell of the UMTS network.
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level,
• The pilot quality from A exceeds a user-definable minimum value (minimum Ec/I0) and is the highest one.
In this case, the Ec/I0 margin must be equal to 0dB and the max Ec/I0 option disabled.
• 2nd case: SA represents the area where the pilot quality from the cell A strats decreasing but the cell A is still the
best serving cell of the UMTS network.
The Ec/I0 margin must be equal to 0dB, the max Ec/I0 option selected and a maximum Ec/I0 user-defined.
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level,
• The pilot quality from A exceeds the minimum Ec/I0 but is lower than the maximum Ec/I0.
• The pilot quality from A is the highest one.
• 3rd case: SA represents the area where the cell A is not the best serving cell but can enter the active set.
Here, the Ec/I0 margin has to be different from 0dB and the max Ec/I0 option disabled.
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level,
• The pilot quality from A is within a margin from the best Ec/I0, where the best Ec/I0 exceeds the minimum Ec/
I0.
• 4th case: SA represents the area where:
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level,
• The pilot quality from A is within a margin from the best Ec/I0 (where the best Ec/I0 exceeds the minimum Ec/
I0) and lower than the maximum Ec/I0.
In this case, the margin must be different from 0dB, the max Ec/I0 option selected and a maximum Ec/I0 user-
defined.
Two different cases may be considered for SB:
• 1st case: SB is the area where the cell B is the best serving cell of the GSM network.
In this case, the margin must be set to 0dB.
• The signal level received from B on the BCCH TRX type exceeds the user-defined minimum threshold and is the
highest one.
• 2nd case: The margin is different from 0dB and SB is the area where:
• The signal level received from B on the BCCH TRX type exceeds the user-defined minimum threshold and is
within a margin from the best BCCH signal level.
SA ∩ SB
- × 100 ) and compares this value to the % minimum covered area. If
Atoll calculates the percentage of covered area ( -----------------
SA
this percentage is not exceeded, the candidate neighbour B is discarded.
296
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks
Candidate neighbours fulfilling coverage conditions are sorted in descending order with respect to % of covered area.
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers threefactors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d
( Di ) = 1 – -----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter Distance" on
page 284.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
297
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4: UMTS HSPA Networks © Forsk 2011
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours and neighbours allocated based on coverage overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site or coverage. For neighbours accepted for co-site and coverage reasons,
Atoll displays the percentage of area meeting the coverage conditions and the corresponding surface area (km2). Finally, if
cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked as existing.
4.8.2.3 Appendices
4.8.2.3.1 Delete Existing Neighbours Option
As explained above, Atoll keeps the existing inter-technology neighbours when the Delete existing neighbours option is not
checked. We assume that we have an existing allocation of inter-technology neighbours.
A new TBA cell i is created in UMTS.atl. Therefore, if you start a new allocation without selecting the Delete existing
neighbours option, Atoll determines the neighbour list of the cell i.
If you change some allocation criteria (e.g. increase the maximum number of neighbours or create a new GSM TBC
transmitter) and start a new allocation without selecting the Delete existing neighbours option, it examines the neighbour list
of TBA cells and checks allocation criteria if there is space in their neighbour lists. A new GSM TBC transmitter can enter the
TBA cell neighbour list if allocation criteria are satisfied. It will be the first one in the neighbour list.
298
Chapter 5
LTE Networks
This chapter describes LTE calculations. In this chapter, the following are explained:
• "Definitions" on page 301
• "Point Analysis" on page 323
• "Coverage Predictions: Downlink Signal Level" on
page 324
• "Coverage Predictions: Effective Signal Analysis"
on page 325
• "Coverage Predictions: C/(I+N)-based" on
page 326
• "Calculations on Subscriber Lists" on page 328
• "Monte Carlo Simulations" on page 328
• "Downlink Transmission Powers Calculation" on
page 336
• "Signal Level and Signal Quality Calculations" on
page 346
• "Best Server Determination" on page 376
• "Service Area Calculation" on page 377
• "Throughput Calculation" on page 378
• "Scheduling and Radio Resource Management"
on page 389
• "Automatic Neighbour Planning" on page 397
• "Automatic Inter-technology Neighbour
Planning" on page 401
• "Automatic Frequency Planning Using the AFP"
on page 404
• "Automatic Physical Cell ID Planning Using the
AFP" on page 406
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
5 LTE Networks
This chapter describes all the calculations performed in Atoll LTE documents. The first part of this chapter lists all the input
parameters in the LTE documents, their significance, location in the Atoll GUI, and their usage. It also contains the lists of the
formulas used for the calculations.
The second part describes all the calculation processes, i.e., signal level coverage predictions, point analysis calculations,
signal quality coverage predictions, calculations on subscriber lists, and Monte Carlo simulations. The calculation algorithms
used by these calculation processes are available in the next part.
The third part describes all the calculation algorithms used in all the calculations. These algorithms include the calculation of
signal levels, noise, and interference for downlink and uplink considering power control, MIMO, smart antennas, and the radio
resource management algorithms used by the different available schedulers.
If you are new to LTE, you can also see the Glossary of LTE Terms in the User Manual for information on LTE terms and
concepts, especially in the context of their user in Atoll.
• All the calculations are performed on TBC (to be calculated) transmitters. For the
definition of TBC transmitters please refer to "Path Loss Matrices" on page 98.
• A cell refers to a transmitter-carrier (TX-c) pair. The cell being studied during a
calculation is referred to as TXi(ic) in this chapter.
• All the calculation algorithms in this section are described for two types of cells:
• A studied cell (represented by the subscript "i") comprising the studied transmitter
TXi and its carrier ic. It is the cell which is currently the focus of the calculation. For
example, a victim cell when calculating the interference it is receiving from other
cells.
• Other cells (represented by the subscript "j") comprising the other transmitter TXj
and its carrier jc. The other cells in the network can be interfering cells (downlink)
or the serving cells of interfering mobiles (uplink).
• All the calculation algorithms in this section are described for two types of receivers:
• Mi: A pixel (coverage predictions), subscriber (calculations on subscriber lists), or
mobile (Monte Carlo simulations) covered/served by the studied cell TXi(ic).
• Mj: A mobile (Monte Carlo simulations) covered/served by any other cell TXj(jc).
• Logarithms used in this chapter (Log function) are base-10 unless stated otherwise.
5.1 Definitions
This table lists the input to calculations, coverage predictions, and simulations.
W FB 3GPP parameter (Fixed to 180 kHz in Atoll) kHz Width of a resource/frequency block
N Slots ⁄ SF 3GPP parameter (Fixed to 2 in Atoll) None Number of slots per subframe
301
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
N FB × W FB
N SCa – Used Calculation result ( N SCa – Used = ------------------------- ) None Number of used subcarriers
ΔF
302
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
N Users – Max Cell parameter None Maximum number of users per cell
Number of users connected to the
N Users – DL Cell parameter None
cell in downlink
Number of users connected to the
N Users – UL Cell parameter None
cell in uplink
T AMS Cell parameter dB Adaptive MIMO switch threshold
303
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
Inter – Tech
NR UL Cell parameter dB Inter-technology uplink noise rise
UL
G Div Cell LTE equipment parameter dB Uplink diversity gain
DL
f Act Service parameter % Downlink activity factor
304
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
DL
G Div Terminal LTE equipment parameter dB Downlink diversity gain
UL
ΔG Div Clutter parameter dB Additional uplink diversity gain
DL
ΔG Div Clutter parameter dB Additional downlink diversity gain
a. Any interfering cell whose signal to thermal noise ratio is less than CNR Min will be discarded.
5.2 Formulas
The following tables list the formulas used in calculations.
TX ( ic )
if N Ant – TX = 1
i
8
Number of symbols reserved for
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic )
16 if N Ant – TX = 2 None downlink reference signals in one
i
N Res ⁄ SRB
scheduler resource block
TX ( ic )
if N Ant – TX = 4 or 8
i
24
305
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic )
if N Ant – TX = 1
i
8
Number of symbols for downlink
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic )
8 if N Ant – TX = 2 None reference signals in one scheduler
i
N DLRS ⁄ SRB
resource block
TX ( ic )
if N Ant – TX = 4 or 8
i
6
if ( N SD – PDCCH = 0 ) : 0
TX ( ic )
if ( N SD – PDCCH = 1 ) AND N Ant – TX = 4 or 8 :
i
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
N i i
SD – PDCCH × N SCa – FB – N Ant – TX × N FB × N SF – DL
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
+ NSD – PDCCH × N SCa – FB – N Ant – TX × N FB
i i None Number of symbols for the PDCCH
N Sym – PDCCH × N TDD – SSF
Otherwise:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
N i i
SD – PDCCH × N SCa – FB – 2 × N Ant – TX × N FB × N SF – DL
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
+ Min ( 2, N SD – PDCCH ) × N SCa – FB – 2 × N Ant – TX × N FB
i i
× N TDD – SSF
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
N Sym – PDSCH N Sym – DL – N Sym – Res – N Sym – SS – N Sym – PBCH – N Sym – PDCCH None Number of symbols for the PDSCH
306
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( ic )
P i
--------------------
Max
- TX ( ic )
10 × Log 10 × N SD ⁄ Slot × N Slot ⁄ SF × N SF – DL –
10 i
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
ΔEPRE SS
i
ΔEPRE PBCH
i
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) ----------------------------------- -----------------------------------
Energy per resource element for 1
10 × L og N Sym – DLRS+ N Sym – SS × 10
i i 10 10 dBm/Sym
EPRE DLRS + N Sym – PBCH × 10 modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of
the downlink reference signals
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
ΔEPRE ΔEPRE
------------------------------------
PDCCH PDSCH
------------------------------------
+ NSym – PDCCH × 10
10
+ N Sym – PDSCH × 10
10
Energy per resource element for 1
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
EPRE SS EPRE DLRS + ΔEPRE SS dBm/Sym modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of
the SS
Energy per resource element for 1
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i dBm/Sym modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of
EPRE PBCH EPRE DLRS + ΔEPRE PBCH
the PBCH
Energy per resource element for 1
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
EPRE PDCCH EPRE DLRS + ΔEPRE PDCCH dBm/Sym modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of
the PDCCH
Energy per resource element for 1
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
EPRE PDSCH EPRE DLRS + ΔEPRE PDSCH dBm/Sym modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of
the PDSCH
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Instantaneous transmission power of
P DLRS EPRE DLRS + 10 × Log 2 × N FB dBm
the downlink reference signals
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Instantaneous transmission power of
P SS EPRE SS + 10 × Log ( N SCa – FB × N FB – SS, PBCH ) dBm
the SS
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Instantaneous transmission power of
P PBCH EPRE PBCH + 10 × Log ( N SCa – FB × N FB – SS, PBCH ) dBm
the PBCH
TX ( ic )
TX i ( ic )
i
N Sym–PDCCH
TX i ( ic ) -
EPRE PDCCH + 10 × Log ------------------------------------------------- dBm
Average transmission power of the
P PDCCH TX ( ic )
i PDCCH
N SD – PDCCH × N SF – DL
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) N Sym–PDSCH
TX i ( ic ) -
EPRE PDSCH + 10 × Log --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- dBm
Average transmission power of the
P PDSCH TX i ( ic ) PDSCH
( N SD ⁄ Slot×N Slot ⁄ SF –N SD – PDCCH ) × N SF – DL
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
Min F End , F End – Max F Start , F Start
i j j i j i MHz Co-channel overlap bandwidth
W CCO
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) W CCO
i j ----------------------------------- None Co-channel overlap ratio
r CCO TX i ( ic )
W Channel
307
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j i j
r ACO r ACO + r ACO None Adjacent channel overlap ratio
L H
TX ( ic )
– f ACS
i
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) -----------------------
r i j i
+ r ACO
j
× 10
10
CCO
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) if W Channel ≥ W Channel
rO None Total overlap ratio
TX ( ic )
– f ACS
i
TX i ( ic )
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) ----------------------- W Channel
r i j i
+ r ACO
j
× 10
10
× TX ( jc )
---------------------
CCO j
W Channel
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
if W Channel < W Channel
308
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( ic ) M
i i
TX i ( ic ) EIRP1 PBCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G
C PBCH Mi Mi Mi
dBm Received PBCH signal level
–L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX ( ic ) TX TX
i i i
Without smart antennas: P PBCH + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic )
EIRP1 PBCH dBm PBCH EIRP
TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i TX i
With smart antennas: P PBCH + G Ant – L + 10 ⋅ Log E SA
TX i ( ic ) Mi
TX i ( ic ) EIRP1 PDCCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G
C PDCCH Mi Mi Mi
dBm Received PDCCH signal level
–L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: P PDCCH + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic )
EIRP1 PDCCH dBm PDCCH EIRP
TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i TX
+ 10 ⋅ Log E SA
i
With smart antennas: P PDCCH + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic ) Mi
TX i ( ic ) EIRP1 PDSCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G
C PDSCH Mi Mi Mi
dBm Received PDSCH signal level
–L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: P PDSCH + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic )
EIRP1 PDSCH dBm PDSCH EIRP
TX ( ic ) TX TX
i i i
With smart antennas: P PDSCH + G SA ( θ ) – L
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) EIRP2 DLRS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model Received downlink reference signal
E DLRS Mi Mi Mi Mi
dBm/Sym
energy per resource element
– L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EPRE DLRS + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic )
EIRP2 DLRS dBm/Sym RS EIRP
TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i TX i
With smart antennas: EPRE DLRS + G Ant – L + 10 ⋅ Log E SA
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) EIRP2 SS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model Received SS energy per resource
E SS Mi Mi Mi Mi
dBm/Sym
element
– L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EPRE SS + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic )
EIRP2 SS dBm/Sym SS EIRP
TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i TX
+ 10 ⋅ Log E SA
i
With smart antennas: EPRE SS + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic )
TX ( ic )
i EIRP2 PBCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model Received PBCH energy per resource
E PBCH M M M M
dBm/Sym
i i i i element
– L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EPRE PBCH + G Ant – L
TX ( ic )
i dBm/Sym PBCH EIRP
EIRP2 PBCH TX ( ic ) TX TX TX
+ 10 ⋅ Log E SA
i i i i
With smart antennas: EPRE PBCH + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) EIRP2 PDCCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model Received PDCCH energy per resource
E PDCCH Mi Mi Mi Mi
dBm/Sym
element
– L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
309
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic )
i
TX i ( ic ) EIRP2 PDSCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model Received PDSCH energy per resource
E PDSCH Mi Mi Mi Mi
dBm/Sym
element
– L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX ( ic ) TX TX
i i i
Without smart antennas: EPRE PDSCH + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic )
EIRP2 PDSCH dBm/Sym PDSCH EIRP
TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
With smart antennas: EPRE PDSCH + G SA ( θ ) – L
TX i
L Path L Model + L Ant dB Path loss
TX i TX i
L Path + L + L Indoor + M Shadowing – Model – G
L Total Mi Mi Mi Mi
dB Total losses
+L –G + L Ant + L Body
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi
n DLRS n 0 – DLRS + nf dBm Downlink reference signals noise
TX i ( ic )
n 0 – SS n 0 + 10 × Log ( N FB – SS, PBCH × W FB × 1000 ) dBm SS thermal noise
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) M
i i i dBm SS noise
n SS n 0 – SS + nf
TX i ( ic )
n 0 – PBCH n 0 + 10 × Log ( N FB – SS, PBCH × W FB × 1000 ) dBm PBCH thermal noise
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi
n PBCH n 0 – PBCH + nf dBm PBCH noise
TX i ( ic )
With static downlink ICIC using FFR: dBm PDCCH thermal noise
n 0 – PDCCH
TX i ( ic )
TX ( ic ) N FB – CE
n 0 + 10 × Log N FB
i
× W FB × 1000 × -----------------
TX i ( ic )
N FB
310
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX i ( ic )
With static downlink ICIC using FFR: dBm PDSCH thermal noise
n 0 – PDSCH
TX ( ic )
TX ( ic ) N FB – CE
i
n 0 + 10 × Log N FB
i
× W FB × 1000 × -----------------
TX ( ic )
i
N FB
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi
n PDSCH n 0 – PDSCH + nf dBm PDSCH noise
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
E j TX j ( jc ) E PDCCH
j
TX ( jc )
--------------------
DLRS
- N --------------------- N j
10 × Log 10
10 Sym – DLRS
× -------------------------
- + 10 10 Sym – PDCCH
× -----------------------------
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) Interfering energy per resource
N Sym – DL N Sym – DL element (dBm/Sym) received over
TX j ( jc )
ε DLRS dBm/Sym downlink reference signals
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
j
E PDSCH + f ICIC – DL
i j
TX ( jc )
TX j ( jc )
j Without smart antennas
----------------------------------------------------------------------- N Sym – PDSCH TX ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
+ 10
10
- × TL DL + f O i
× ---------------------------- + f MIMO
TX ( jc )
j
N Sym – DL
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
E j TX j ( jc ) E PDCCH
j
TX j ( jc )
--------------------
DLRS
- N --------------------- N Sym – PDCCH
10 × Log 10
10 Sym – DLRS
× -------------------------
- + 10 10
× -----------------------------
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
N Sym – DL N Sym – DL Interfering energy per resource
element (dBm/Sym) received over
TX j ( jc )
ε DLRS TX j ( jc ) TX j TX j TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
dBm/Sym downlink reference signals
E PDSCH + G SA ( ϕ ) – G SA ( θ ) + f ICIC – DL
TX j ( jc )
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 N Sym – PDSCH TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
With smart antennas
+ 10 × ----------------------------
TX j ( jc )
- + fO
N Sym – DL
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
ESS E PBCH
--------------------
10
- ---------------------
10
TX j ( jc )
10 × N Sym – SS + 10 × N Sym – PBCH TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
- × 1 – f DCi – SCa – Shift
10 × Log -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
j
311
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( jc )
j Interfering energy per resource
N Sym – SS + N Sym – PBCH
element (dBm/Sym) received over
TX j ( jc )
ε SS, PBCH dBm/Sym the SS and the PBCH
TX j ( jc ) TX j TX j
E PDSCH + G SA ( ϕ ) – G SA ( θ )
With smart antennas
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 TX
i
( ic ) – TX
j
( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
+ 10 × f DC – SCa – Shift + f O
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
E j TX j ( jc ) E PDCCH
j
TX ( jc )
--------------------
DLRS
- N --------------------- N j
10 × Log 10
10 Sym – DLRS
× -------------------------
- + 10 10 Sym – PDCCH
× -----------------------------
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) Interfering energy per resource
N Sym – DL N Sym – DL element (dBm/Sym) received over
TX j ( jc )
ε PDSCH, PDCCH dBm/Sym the PDSCH and the PDCCH
TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
E PDSCH + f ICIC – DL TX j ( jc )
----------------------------------------------------------------------- N Sym – PDSCH TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) Without smart antennas
+ 10
10
× - × TL DLj + f O i
---------------------------- + f
TX j ( jc ) MIMO
N Sym – DL
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
E j TX ( jc ) E PDCCH
j
TX ( jc )
--------------------
DLRS
- N j --------------------- N j
10 × Log 10
10 Sym – DLRS
× -------------------------
- + 10 10 Sym – PDCCH
× -----------------------------
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
Interfering energy per resource
N Sym – DL N Sym – DL
element (dBm/Sym) received over
TX j ( jc )
ε PDSCH, PDCCH TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
dBm/Sym the PDSCH and the PDCCH
TX j TX j
+ G ( ϕ ) – G ( θ ) + f
PDSCH SA
E
SA ICIC – DL TX j ( jc )
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 N Sym – PDSCH TX ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) With smart antennas
+ 10 - + fO i
× ----------------------------
TX j ( jc )
N Sym – DL
TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
EPDSCH + fICIC – DL
----------------------------------------------------------------------
10
- TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
10 × N Sym – PDSCH × TL DL
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
- × 10
10 × Log ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Interfering energy per frequency
N + N
Sym – PDSCH Sym – PDCCH block (dBm/RB) received over 1
TX j ( jc ) frequency block during an OFDM
ε RSSI dBm/RB
TX j ( jc ) symbol carrying reference signals
E PDCCH TX j ( jc )
---------------------
10
TX j ( jc ) E DLRS
10 × N Sym – PDCCH ---------------------
10 TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) Without smart antennas
+ -----------------------------------------------------------------
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
× 10 + 10 × 2 + fO + f MIMO
N Sym – PDSCH + N Sym – PDCCH
312
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
CNR SS E SS – n Sym dB SS C/N
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
CNR PBCH E PBCH – n Sym dB PBCH C/N
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
CNR PDCCH E PDCCH – n Sym dB PDCCH C/N
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
E PDSCH – n Sym
With Transmit Diversity:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) DL DL
CNR PDSCH = CNR PDSCH + G Div + ΔG Div dB PDSCH C/N
CNR PDSCH
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
With AMS if CNR DLRS < T AMS or CINR DLRS < T AMS :
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i DL DL
CNR PDSCH = CNR PDSCH + G Div + ΔG Div
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
ε j n Sym
i
TX i ( ic ) -------------------
DLRS -
TX i ( ic ) ---------------------
E DLRS – 10 × Log 10
+ 10 + NR
10 10 Inter – Tech dB Downlink reference signals C/(I+N)
CINR DLRS DL
All TXj ( jc )
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
ε j n Sym
i
TX i ( ic ) -------------------------
SS, PBCH-
TX i ( ic ) ---------------------
CINR SS E SS – 10 × Log 10 10 + 10 10 + NR Inter – Tech dB SS C/(I+N)
DL
All TXj ( jc )
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
ε j n Sym
i
TX i ( ic ) -------------------------
SS, PBCH
TX i ( ic ) - ---------------------
CINR PBCH E PBCH – 10 × Log 10 10 + 10 10 + NR Inter – Tech
dB PBCH C/(I+N)
DL
All TXj ( jc )
313
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
ε j n
i
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) -----------------------------------------
PDSCH, PDCCH
- ---------------------
Sym
– 10 × Log 10
+ 10 + NR
i i 10 10 Inter – Tech
dB PDCCH C/(I+N)
CINR PDCCH E PDCCH
DL
All TXj ( jc )
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
ε j n Sym
i
TX i ( ic ) -----------------------------------------
PDSCH, PDCCH
- ---------------------
10 Inter – Tech
10
E PDSCH – 10 × Log 10 + 10 + NR
DL
All TXj ( jc )
TX i ( ic ) With Transmit Diversity:
CINR PDSCH dB PDSCH C/(I+N)
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
DL DL
CINR PDSCH = CINR PDSCH + G Div + ΔG Div
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
With AMS if CNR DLRS < T AMS or CINR DLRS < T AMS :
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
DL DL
CINR PDSCH = CINR PDSCH + G Div + ΔG Div
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
ε j n Sym
i
-------------------
DLRS
- ---------------------
10 × Log 10 10 + 10 10
All TXj ( jc )
TX i ( ic ) dBm
Downlink reference signals total
( I + N ) DLRS noise (I+N)
TX i ( ic )
+ 10 × Log 2 × N FB
Inter – Tech
+ NR DL
314
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
ε j n
i
-------------------------
SS, PBCH
- ---------------------
Sym
10 × Log 10 + 10
10 10
All TXj ( jc )
TX i ( ic ) dBm SS and PBCH total noise (I+N)
( I + N ) SS, PBCH
Inter – Tech
+ NR DL + 10 × Log ( N SCa – FB × N FB – SS, PBCH )
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
ε j n Sym
i
-----------------------------------------
PDSCH, PDCCH-
---------------------
10 × Log 10 + 10 10
10
All TXj ( jc )
TX i ( ic ) dBm PDSCH and PDCCH total noise (I+N)
( I + N ) PDSCH, PDCCH
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
N
Sym – PDSCH + N Sym – PDCCH
+ 10 × Log -------------------------------------------------------------------
Inter – Tech
+ NR DL -
TX i ( ic )
N SD ⁄ Slot × N Slot ⁄ SF × N SF – DL
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
P O_PUSCH CINR PUSCH – Max + NR UL + n PUSCH, PUCCH – 10 × Log N FB dBm Nominal PUSCH power
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic )
n 0 + 10 × Log N FB × W FB × 1000
i dBm PUSCH and PUCCH thermal noise
n 0 – PUSCH, PUCCH
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i dBm PUSCH and PUCCH noise
n PUSCH, PUCCH n 0 – PUSCH, PUCCH + nf
315
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
M
j
IPUSCH, PUCCH TX i ( ic )
∀ non-ICIC M n
i
------------------------------------------------------------------------------ -------------------------------------------
PUSCH , PUCCH
10 × Log
10 10
10 + 10 Uplink noise rise for any mobile Mi
TX i ( ic )
All Mj
NRUL
dB covered by the non-ICIC zone in the
All TX ( jc ) interfered cell TXi(ic)
j
TX i ( ic )
Inter – Tech
+ NR UL – n PUSCH, PUCCH
M
j
IPUSCH, PUCCH TX i ( ic )
∀ ICIC M i n PUSCH, PUCCH
------------------------------------------------------------------
- -------------------------------------------
10 × Log
10 10
10 + 10
All Mj
Uplink noise rise for any mobile Mi
TX i ( ic )
dB covered by the ICIC zone in the
NRUL – ICIC
All TXj ( jc ) interfered cell TXi(ic)
TX i ( ic )
Inter – Tech
+ NR UL – n PUSCH, PUCCH
For any mobile Mi covered by the non-ICIC zone in the interfered cell
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i
TX i ( ic ) TXi(ic): NR UL + n PUSCH, PUCCH
( I + N ) PUSCH, PUCCH dBm PUSCH and PUCCH total noise (I+N)
For any mobile Mi covered by the ICIC zone in the interfered cell
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
TXi(ic): NRUL – ICIC + n PUSCH, PUCCH
316
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX i ( ic )
N TXi ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
N DLRS ⁄ DwPTS TX i ( ic )
-----------------------
DLRS ⁄ SRB
- × N Sym
- + ----------------------------- None Downlink reference signals overhead
O DLRS N Sym ⁄ SRB DwPTS – DL
N Sym ⁄ SSF
TX ( ic )
if N Ant – TX = 1
i
8
Number of symbols reserved for
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic )
16 if N Ant – TX = 2 None downlink reference signals in one
i
N DLRS ⁄ SRB
scheduler resource block
TX ( ic )
if N Ant – TX = 4 or 8
i
24
317
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
if ( N SD – PDCCH = 0 ) : 0
TX ( ic )
if ( N SD – PDCCH = 1 ) AND N Ant – TX = 4 or 8 :
i
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
N × N SCa – FB – N Ant – TX × N FB
i i
× N SF – DL
SD – PDCCH
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
+ NSD – PDCCH × N SCa – FB – N Ant – TX × N FB
i i i None PDCCH overhead
O PDCCH × N TDD – SSF
Otherwise:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
N × N SCa – FB – 2 × N Ant – TX × N FB
i i
× N SF – DL
SD – PDCCH
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
+ Min ( 2, N SD – PDCCH ) × N SCa – FB – 2 × N Ant – TX × N FB
i i
× N TDD – SSF
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) With smart antennas: 12 × N FB × N SF – DL UE-specific reference signals
O UERS None
overhead
Without smart antennas: 0
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
N i i Maximum downlink throughput
Max
TP UE – DL Max – DL SF – DL + N TDD – SSF bps
N TBB ⁄ TTI × ---------------------------------------------------- capacity of a UE category
D Frame
318
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
Max
With MIMO (AMS): η M = η M × ( 1 + f SU – MIMO ( G SU – MIMO – 1 ) )
i i
B DL B DL
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i i
if CNR DLRS > T AMS or CINR DLRS > T AMS
Mi M M
Cap P – DL × 1 – BLER BDL
i i kbps Downlink effective RLC cell capacity
Cap E – DL
M
Mi i
Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
kbps Downlink application cell capacity
Cap A – DL Cap E – DL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
M
i
Mi Cap P – DL Downlink peak RLC throughput
AUTP P – DL -----------------------
- kbps
TX ( ic ) averaged per user
i
N Users – DL
Mi
Mi Cap E – DL Downlink effective RLC throughput
AUTPE – DL -----------------------
- kbps
TX i ( ic ) averaged per user
N Users – DL
Mi
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi Downlink application throughput
AUTP A – DL AUTP E – DL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset kbps
100 averaged per user
319
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
if CNR DLRS > T AMS or CINR DLRS > T AMS
With MIMO (MU-MIMO) in uplink throughput coverage predictions:
TX i ( ic )
R UL ×η Mi
B TX ( ic )
UL i
--------------------------------- × G MU – MIMO
D Frame
Mi Mi TX i ( ic )
Cap P – UL CTP P – UL × TL UL – Max kbps Uplink peak RLC cell capacity
Mi M M
Cap P – UL × 1 – BLER B UL
i i kbps Uplink effective RLC cell capacity
Cap E – UL
Mi
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
Cap A – UL Cap E – UL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset kbps Uplink application cell capacity
100
Mi
Mi MiN FB – UL Uplink peak RLC allocated bandwidth
ABTP P – UL CTP P – UL × -----------------
TX i ( ic )
- kbps
throughput
N FB
Mi
Mi ABTP P – UL Downlink peak RLC throughput
AUTP P – DL ------------------------- kbps
TX i ( ic ) averaged per user
N Users – UL
Mi
Mi ABTP E – UL Downlink effective RLC throughput
AUTP E – UL ------------------------- kbps
TX i ( ic ) averaged per user
N Users – UL
Mi
Mi f TP – Scaling
Mi Mi Downlink application throughput
AUTP A – UL AUTPE – UL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset kbps
100 averaged per user
320
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
Sel
TX i ( ic ) Mi Remaining uplink cell resources after
TX i ( ic )
R Rem – UL
TL UL – Max – R Min – UL None allocation for minimum throughput
Sel demands
Mi
Sel Sel
Sel
Mi Mi Mi
Max Remaining throughput demand for a
TPD Rem – DL Min TPD Max – DL – TPD Min – DL, TP UE – DL kbps
mobile in downlink
Sel Sel
Sel
Mi Mi Mi
Max Remaining throughput demand for a
TPD Rem – UL Min TPD Max – UL – TPD Min – UL, TP UE – UL kbps
mobile in uplink
Sel TX i ( ic )
Mi R Rem – DL
Proportional Fair: Min RD Rem – DL, ---------------------
N
Sel TX i ( ic )
Mi R Rem – DL
Round Robin: Min RD Rem – DL, ---------------------
N
Sel
Sel
Mi Resources allocated to a mobile to
Mi TX i ( ic )
RD Rem – DL
Proportional Demand: R Eff – Rem – DL × ----------------------------------
- None satisfy its maximum throughput
R Max – DL Sel
Mi demand in downlink
RDRem – DL
Sel
Mi
Sel
M
i
TPD Rem – DL
Max C/I: ---------------------------
Sel
-
M
i
CTP P – DL
321
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
Sel TX ( ic )
i
Mi R Rem – UL
Proportional Fair: Min RD Rem – UL, --------------------
-
N
Sel TX ( ic )
i
Mi R Rem – DL
Round Robin: Min RD Rem – DL, --------------------
-
N
Sel
Sel
Mi Resources allocated to a mobile to
Mi TX i ( ic )
RD Rem – UL
Proportional Demand: R Eff – Rem – UL × ----------------------------------
- None satisfy its maximum throughput
R Max – UL Sel
Mi demand in uplink
RDRem – UL
Sel
Mi
Sel
Mi
TPD Rem – UL
Max C/I: ---------------------------
Sel
-
Mi
CTP P – UL
Sel
TXi ( ic ) Mi Effective remaining downlink
TX ( ic )
i
R Eff – Rem – DL
Min R Rem – DL,
RD Rem – DL
None resources in a cell
Sel
Mi (Proportional Demand)
Sel
TX i ( ic ) Mi Effective remaining uplink resources
TX i ( ic )
R Eff – Rem – UL
Min R Rem – UL,
RD Rem – UL
None in a cell
Sel
Mi (Proportional Demand)
Sel Sel
Sel
Mi Mi Mi Downlink effective RLC user
UTPE – DL UTP P – DL × 1 – BLER B DL kbps
throughput
Sel
Sel Mi
Mi Sel Sel Downlink application user
Mi f TP – Scaling Mi kbps
UTP A – DL UTP E – DL × ------------------------- – TP Offset throughput
100
Sel Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi
kbps Uplink peak RLC user throughput
UTP P – UL R UL × CTP P – UL
Sel Sel
Sel
Mi Mi Mi
UTP E – UL UTPP – UL × 1 – BLER B UL kbps Uplink effective RLC user throughput
Sel
Sel Sel Mi Sel
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi kbps Uplink application user throughput
UTP A – UL UTP E – UL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
322
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
Mi Mi Mi Mi
L ,G , L Ant , L Body , and f CP are not used in the calculations performed for the profile view.
323
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
Atoll uses parameters entered in the Condition tab of the coverage prediction properties dialogue to determine coverage
areas to display. There are three possibilities.
• All Servers
The coverage area of each cell TXi(ic) corresponds to the pixels where.
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
MinimumThreshold ≤ C DLRS or L Total or L Path < MaximumThreshold
i i i
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
MinimumThreshold ≤ C DLRS or L Total or L Path < MaximumThreshold
i i i
AND
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
C DLRS ≥ Best C DLRS – M
j≠i
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received downlink reference signal level from TXi(ic) is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received downlink reference signal level from TXi(ic) is either the
highest or within a 2 dB margin from the highest
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received downlink reference signal level from TXi(ic) is 2 dB higher
than the received downlink reference signal levels from the cells which are 2nd best servers
The coverage area of each cell TXi(ic) corresponds to the pixels where.
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
MinimumThreshold ≤ C DLRS or L Total or L Path < MaximumThreshold
i i i
AND
324
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( ic )
nd TX ( jc )
C DLRS ≥ 2 Best C DLRS – M
i j
j≠i
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received downlink reference signal level from TXi(ic) is the second
highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received downlink reference signal level from TXi(ic) is either the
second highest or within a 2 dB margin from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received downlink reference signal level from TXi(ic) is 2 dB higher
than the received downlink reference signal levels from the cells which are 3rd best servers.
A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the calculated value of the selected display parameter is greater than or equal to the
defined thresholds values. Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map.
It is possible to display the coverage predictions with colours depending on any transmitter or cell attribute, and other criteria
such as:
• Signal Level (dBm, dBµV, dBµV/m)
• Best Signal Level (dBm, dBµV, dBµV/m): Where cell coverage areas overlap, Atoll keeps the highest value of the signal
level.
• Path Loss (dB)
• Total Losses (dB)
• Best Server Path Loss (dB): Where cell coverage areas overlap, Atoll determines the best cell (i.e., the cell with the
highest downlink reference signal level) and evaluates the path loss from this cell.
• Best Server Total Losses (dB): Where cell coverage areas overlap, Atoll determines the best cell (i.e., the cell with the
highest downlink reference signal level) and evaluates the total losses from this cell.
• Number of Servers: Atoll evaluates the number of cells that cover a pixel (i.e., the pixel falls within the coverage areas
of these cells).
325
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
These coverage predictions are best server coverage predictions, i.e., the coverage area of each cell comprises the pixels
where the cell is the best server. Best server for each pixel is calculated as explained in "Best Server Determination" on
page 376.
A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the calculated value of the selected display type parameter is greater than or equal to
the defined thresholds values. Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map.
It is possible to display the Effective Signal Analysis (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Best RSRP (RS EPRE) Level (DL) (dBm)
• Best Reference Signal Level (DL) (dBm)
• Best SS Signal Level (DL) (dBm)
• Best PBCH Signal Level (DL) (dBm)
• Best PDCCH Signal Level (DL) (dBm)
• Best PDSCH Signal Level (DL) (dBm)
• Reference Signal C/N Level (DL) (dB)
• SS C/N Level (DL) (dB)
• PBCH C/N Level (DL) (dB)
• PDCCH C/N Level (DL) (dB)
• PDSCH C/N Level (DL) (dB)
TX ( jc )
j
• Delta Path Loss (dB): Atoll calculates the difference of the total losses from the second best serving cells ( L Total ) and
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic )
the total losses from the best serving cells ( L Total ) on each pixel of their coverage areas ( L Total – L Total ). Total
losses are calculated as explained in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 308.
It is possible to display the Effective Signal Analysis (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• PUSCH & PUCCH Signal Level (UL) (dBm)
• PUSCH & PUCCH C/N Level (UL) (dB)
326
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
• "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, and Average User Throughput Calculation" on
page 385.
For more information on coverage area determination and available display options, see:
• "Coverage Area Determination" on page 327.
• "Coverage Display Types" on page 327.
These coverage predictions are all best server coverage predictions, i.e., the coverage area of each cell comprises the pixels
where the cell is the best server. Best server for each pixel is calculated as explained in "Best Server Determination" on
page 376.
A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the calculated value of the selected display type parameter is greater than or equal to
the defined thresholds values. Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map.
It is possible to display the Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• RSRQ Level (DL) (dB)
• RSSI Level (DL) (dBm)
• Reference Signal C/(I+N) Level (DL) (dB)
• SS C/(I+N) Level (DL) (dB)
• PBCH C/(I+N) Level (DL) (dB)
• PDCCH C/(I+N) Level (DL) (dB)
• SS & PBCH Total Noise (I+N) (DL) (dBm)
• PDSCH C/(I+N) Level (DL) (dB)
• PDSCH & PDCCH Total Noise (I+N) (DL) (dBm)
It is possible to display the Service Area Analysis (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Best Bearer (DL)
• Modulation (DL): Modulation used by the best bearer
• Service
It is possible to display the Coverage by Throughput (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Peak RLC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps)
• Effective RLC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps)
• Application Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps)
• Peak RLC Cell Capacity (DL) (kbps)
• Effective RLC Cell Capacity (DL) (kbps)
• Application Cell Capacity (DL) (kbps)
• Peak RLC Throughput Averaged per User (DL) (kbps)
• Effective RLC Throughput Averaged per User (DL) (kbps)
• Application Throughput Averaged per User (DL) (kbps)
It is possible to display the Coverage by Quality Indicator (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following
display options:
• Quality indicators available in the document (Quality Indicators table): Atoll calculates the PDSCH C/(I+N) levels
received from the best serving cells at each pixel of their coverage areas. From the C/(I+N), Atoll determines the best
bearer available on each pixel. Then, for the calculated C/(I+N) and bearer, it determines the value of the selected
quality indicator from the quality graphs defined in the LTE equipment of the selected terminal.
It is possible to display the Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• PUSCH & PUCCH C/(I+N) Level (UL) (dB)
• PUSCH & PUCCH Total Noise (I+N) (UL) (dBm)
• Allocated Bandwidth (UL) (No. of Frequency Blocks)
Mi
• PUSCH & PUCCH C/(I+N) Level for 1 Frequency Block (UL) (dB): PUSCH & PUCCH C/(I+N) level with N FB – UL = 1
• Transmission Power (UL) (dBm)
It is possible to display the Service Area Analysis (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Best Bearer (UL)
• Modulation (UL): Modulation used by the best bearer
327
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
• Service
It is possible to display the Coverage by Throughput (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Peak RLC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Effective RLC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Application Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Peak RLC Cell Capacity (UL) (kbps)
• Effective RLC Cell Capacity (UL) (kbps)
• Application Cell Capacity (UL) (kbps)
• Peak RLC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Effective RLC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Application Allocated Bandwidth Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Peak RLC Throughput Averaged per User (UL) (kbps)
• Effective RLC Throughput Averaged per User (UL) (kbps)
• Application Throughput Averaged per User (UL) (kbps)
It is possible to display the Coverage by Quality Indicator (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following
display options:
• Quality indicators available in the document (Quality Indicators table): Atoll calculates the PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N)
levels received at the best serving cells from each pixel of their coverage areas. From the C/(I+N), Atoll determines the
best bearer available on each pixel. Then, for the calculated C/(I+N) and bearer, it determines the value of the selected
quality indicator from the quality graphs defined in the LTE equipment of the best serving cell.
328
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
Atoll determines the total number of users attempting connection in each simulation
based on the Poisson distribution. This may lead to slight variations in the total numbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulation of a group, add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0
5.8.1.1 Simulations Based on User Profile Traffic Maps and Subscriber Lists
User profile environment based traffic maps: Each pixel of the map is assigned an environment class which contains a list of
user profiles with an associated mobility type and a given density, i.e., number of users of a user profile per km².
User profile traffic maps: Each polygon or line of the map is assigned a density of users with a given user profile and mobility
type. If the map is composed of points, each point is assigned a number of users with given user profile and mobility type.
Fixed subscribers listed in subscriber lists have a user profile assigned to each of them.
User profiles model the behaviour of the different user categories. Each user profile contains a list of services and parameters
describing how these services are accessed by the user.
The number of users of each user profile is calculated from the surface area (SEnv) of each environment class map (or each
polygon) and the user profile density (DUP).
N Users = S Env × D UP
• In case of user profile traffic maps composed of lines, the number of users of each
user profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (DUP)
(users per km): N Users = L × D UP
• The number of users is a direct input when a user profile traffic map is composed of
points.
Atoll calculates the probability for a user being active at a given instant in the uplink and in the downlink according to the
service usage characteristics described in the user profiles, i.e., the number of voice calls or data sessions, the average
duration of each voice call, or the volume of the data transfer in the uplink and the downlink in each data session.
N Call × D Call
Calculation of the service usage duration per hour ( p 0 : probability of an active call): p 0 = -----------------------------
3600
The activity status of each user depends on the activity periods during the call, i.e., the uplink and downlink activity
UL DL
factors defined for the voice type service v, f Act and f Act .
UL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink: p Active = f Act × ( 1 – f Act )
DL DL UL
Probability of being active in the downlink: p Active = f Act × ( 1 – f Act )
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink and downlink both: p Active = f Act × f Act
329
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
UL UL
Number of users active in the uplink: n v – Active = n v × p Active
DL DL
Number of users active in the downlink: n v – Active = n v × p Active
UL + DL UL + DL
Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n v – Active = n v × p Active
Therefore, a connected user can be either active on both links, inactive on both links, active on UL only, or active on
DL only.
UL DL
Probability of being inactive: p Inactive = ( 1 – f ) × ( 1 – f )
UL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink: p Active = f × (1 – f )
DL DL UL
Probability of being active in the downlink: p Active = f × (1 – f )
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink and downlink both: p Active = f ×f
UL UL
Number of users active in the uplink: n d – Active = N Users × p Active
DL DL
Number of users active in the downlink: n d – Active = N Users × p Active
UL + DL UL + DL
Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n d – Active = N Users × p Active
Calculation of the number of active users trying to access the service d (nd):
UL DL UL + DL
n d = n d – Active + n d – Active + n d – Active
The user distribution per service and the activity status distribution between the users
are average distributions. The service and the activity status of each user are randomly
drawn in each simulation. Therefore, if you calculate several simulations at once, the
average number of users per service and average numbers of inactive, active on UL,
active on DL and active on UL and DL users, respectively, will correspond to calculated
distributions. But if you check each simulation, the user distribution between services as
well as the activity status distribution between users can be different in each of them.
330
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
UL
Where TP Cell is the total uplink throughput demand defined in the map for any service s for the coverage area of the
DL
transmitter, TP Cell is the total downlink throughput demand defined in the map for any service s for the coverage
UL DL
area of the transmitter, TPAverage is the average uplink requested throughput of the service s, and TP Average is the
average downlink requested throughput of the service s.
• Sector Traffic Maps (# Active Users)
UL DL
Atoll directly uses the defined N and N values, i.e., the number of active users on UL and DL in the transmitter
coverage area using the service s.
At any given instant, Atoll calculates the probability for a user being active in the uplink and in the downlink as follows:
UL DL
Users active in the uplink and downlink both are included in the N and N values. Therefore, it is necessary to
UL DL UL + DL
accurately determine the number of active users in the uplink ( n Active ), in the downlink ( n Active ), and both ( n Active ).
As for the other types of traffic maps, Atoll considers both active and inactive users.
The activity status of each user depends on the activity periods during the call, i.e., the uplink and downlink activity
UL DL
factors defined for the service, f Act and f Act .
UL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink: p Active = f Act × ( 1 – f Act )
DL DL UL
Probability of being active in the downlink: p Active = f Act × ( 1 – f Act )
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink and downlink both: p Active = f Act × f Act
Where, n is the total number of active users in the transmitter coverage area using the service.
Calculation of number of users per activity status:
UL UL + DL DL UL + DL
UL + DL N × p Active N × p Active
Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n Active = Min --------------------------------------- , --------------------------------------- or
p Active + p Active p Active + p UL
UL UL + DL DL + DL
Active
UL + DL UL DL DL UL
simply, n Active = Min ( N × f Act, N × f Act )
UL UL UL + DL
Number of users active in the uplink: n Active = N – n Active
DL DL UL + DL
Number of users active in the downlink: n Active = N – n Active
UL DL UL + DL
And, n = n Active + n Active + n Active
nv
- × p Inactive
Number of inactive users: n Inactive = ---------------------------
1 – p Inactive
331
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
The activity status distribution between users is an average distribution. In fact, in each
simulation, the activity status of each user is randomly drawn. Therefore, if you calculate
several simulations at once, average numbers of inactive, active on UL, active on DL and
active on UL and DL users correspond to the calculated distribution. But if you check each
simulation, the activity status distribution between users can be different in each of
them.
Where CINR PUSCH – Max is the maximum PUSCH C/(I+N), NRUL is the noise rise, n PUSCH, PUCCH is the uplink thermal
noise, α FPC is the fractional power control factor, and L Total are the total losses.
M
i
Transmitting P Allowed , a mobile Mi can access the highest bearer if:
Mi Mi
P Allowed – NR UL – n PUSCH, PUCCH – L Total = T B (2)
Mi
Where T B is the bearer selection thresholds of the highest bearer defined in the LTE equipment used by the cell
TXi(ic).
Mi
Combining equations (1) and (2), we get the CINR PUSCH – Max for each mobile Mi that ensures access to the highest
bearer:
M M TX ( ic )
CINR PUSCH – Max = T B + 1 – α FPC × L Total
i i i
332
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( ic ) M
CINR PUSCH – Max = Max CINR PUSCH – Max
i i
All M
i
10. Updates the traffic loads, and noise rise values of all the cells according to the resources in use and the total resources
as follows:
Calculation of Traffic Loads:
Atoll calculates the traffic loads for all the cells TXi(ic).
TX ( ic ) M TX ( ic ) M
RDL and TLUL RUL
i i i i
TL DL = =
Mi Mi
MU – MIMO
TX i ( ic ) Mi
For uplink MU-MIMO, TL UL = RC UL
MU – MIMO
Mi
333
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
ICIC
Mi
Where RDL is the sum of the percentages of the downlink cell resources allocated to mobiles in the ICIC part
ICIC
Mi
of the frame.
Calculation of Downlink AAS Usage:
Atoll calculates the downlink AAS usages for all the cells as follows:
Mi
R DL
AAS
TX i ( ic ) M
i
AAS
AU DL = -------------------------------
TX ( ic )
-
i
TL DL
M
i
Where R DL is the sum of the percentages of the downlink cell resources allocated to mobiles served by the
AAS
Mi
AAS
smart antennas.
Calculation of Uplink MU-MIMO Gain:
Atoll calculates the uplink MU-MIMO gain for all the cells as follows:
MU – MIMO
Mi
R UL
TX i ( ic ) MU – MIMO
Mi
G MU – MIMO = -------------------------------------------------------------
MU – MIMO
-
Mi
RC UL
MU – MIMO
Mi
MU – MIMO
Mi
Where R UL is the sum of the percentages of the uplink cell resources allocated to MU-MIMO
MU – MIMO
M
i
MU – MIMO
Mi
mobiles and RC UL is the sum of the real resource consumption of MU-MIMO mobiles.
MU – MIMO
Mi
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
ΔNR UL = NR UL – NR UL – Max
TX i ( ic )
Here NRUL is the uplink noise rise of the cell TXi(ic) calculated in step 10.
TX ( ic )
i
• If ΔNR UL > 0 , the cell TXi(ic) requests its neighbouring cells to decrease the uplink transmission powers of the
mobiles they serve (mobiles interfering TXi(ic)).
TX i ( ic )
• If 0 > ΔNR UL > M NRC , the cell TXi(ic) does not request any change.
334
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( ic )
i
• If ΔNR UL < M NRC , the cell TXi(ic) requests its neighbouring cells to increase the uplink transmission powers of
the mobiles they serve (mobiles interfering TXi(ic)).
Here M NRC is a noise rise control margin set to -1 dB by default. This value can be changed through Atoll.ini file by
adding the following lines and setting it to a value other than "1" (positive values are considered as negative margins):
[LTE]
NR_CONTROL_MARGIN_MIN = 1
The uplink transmission powers of the mobiles in neighbouring cells of the cell TXi(ic) are adjusted according to the
request in the next iteration by updating the maximum PUSCH C/(I+N) for the neighbouring cells TXj(jc):
TX j ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) TX ( jc )
= Min CINR PUSCH – Max , CINR PUSCH – Limit, CINR PUSCH – Max
j j
CINR PUSCH – Max – ΔNR UL
k k–1
TX ( jc )
j
Here CINR PUSCH – Max is the maximum PUSCH C/(I+N) for the neighbouring cell TXj(jc) in the current iteration k,
k
TX j ( jc )
CINR PUSCH – Max is the maximum PUSCH C/(I+N) for the neighbouring cell TXj(jc) in the previous iteration k,
k–1
TX j ( jc )
CINR PUSCH – Limit is an upper limit fixed at 50 dB, and CINR PUSCH – Max is the maximum PUSCH C/(I+N) for the
neighbouring cell TXj(jc) as calculated in step 5.
At most six neighbouring cells are considered in uplink noise rise control. These six
neighbouring cells are those whose served mobiles generate the highest interference for
the studied cell.
12. Performs the convergence test to see whether the differences between the current and the new loads are within the
convergence thresholds.
The convergence criteria are evaluated at the end of each iteration k, and can be written as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Max TL DL
i
ΔTL DL = – TL DL
k All TX ( ic )
k k – 1
i
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Max TL UL
i
ΔTL UL = – TL UL
k All TX ( ic )
k k – 1
i
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Max NR UL
i
ΔNR UL = – NR UL
k All TX ( ic ) k k – 1
i
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
If ΔTL DL , ΔTL UL , and ΔNR UL are the simulation convergence thresholds defined when creating
Req Req Req
the simulation, Atoll stops the simulation in the following cases.
Convergence: Simulation has converged between iteration k - 1 and k if:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
ΔTL DL ≤ ΔTL DL AND ΔTL UL ≤ ΔTL UL AND ΔNR UL ≤ ΔNR UL
k Req k Req k Req
No convergence: Simulation has not converged even after the last iteration, i.e., k = Max Number of Iterations defined
when creating the simulation, if:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
ΔTL DL > ΔTL DL OR ΔTL UL > ΔTL UL OR ΔNR UL > ΔNR UL
k Req k Req k Req
13. Repeats the above steps (from step 3.) for the iteration k+1 using the new calculated loads as the current loads.
Simulation Results
At the end of the simulation process, the main results obtained are:
• Downlink traffic loads
• Uplink traffic loads
• Uplink noise rise
• Downlink ICIC ratio
335
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
Input
336
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i
N SF – DL and N TDD – SSF are determined as follows:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
Configuration i i
N SF – DL N TDD – SSF
FDD 10 0
DSUUU-DSUUU 2 2
DSUUD-DSUUD 4 2
DSUDD-DSUDD 6 2
DSUUU-DSUUD 3 2
DSUUU-DDDDD 6 1
DSUUD-DDDDD 7 1
DSUDD-DDDDD 8 1
TX i ( ic )
• N Ant – TX : Number of transmission (downlink) antenna ports defined for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• P Max : Maximum transmission power of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• EPRE DLRS : Downlink reference signal EPRE of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
You can either set the P Max or EPRE DLRS for a cell.
TX i ( ic )
• ΔEPRE SS : Energy per resource element offset for the SS with respect to the downlink reference signals EPRE.
TX i ( ic )
• ΔEPRE PBCH : Energy per resource element offset for the PBCH with respect to the downlink reference signals EPRE.
TX i ( ic )
• ΔEPRE PDCCH : Energy per resource element offset for the PDCCH with respect to the downlink reference signals EPRE.
TX i ( ic )
• ΔEPRE PDSCH : Energy per resource element offset for the PDSCH with respect to the downlink reference signals EPRE.
Calculations
If you have directly entered the downlink reference signal EPRE for the cell, you can skip the section "Calculation of Downlink
Reference Signal EPRE" on page 337 and go directly to the section "Calculation of Other EPREs and Per-channel Powers" on
page 341.
Calculation of Downlink Reference Signal EPRE
In LTE, a resource block (RB) is defined as 1 frequency block by 1 slot. However, schedulers are able to perform resource
allocation every subframe (2 slots). 1 frequency block by 1 subframe (2 slots) is called a scheduler resource block (SRB) in the
calculations below.
The number of modulation symbols (resource elements) per scheduler resource block is calculated as follows:
N Sym ⁄ SRB = N SCa – FB × N SD ⁄ Slot × N Slot ⁄ SF
Where N SCa – FB is the number of subcarriers per frequency block calculated as follows:
W FB
N SCa – FB = ----------
ΔF
The number of modulation symbols (resource elements) corresponding to the DwPTS per scheduler resource block in the TDD
special subframes is calculated as follows:
DwPTS DwPTS
N Sym ⁄ SSF = N SCa – FB × N SD ⁄ SSF
DwPTS
Where N SD ⁄ SSF is the number of DwPTS symbol durations (OFDM symbols) per special subframe, determined from the TDD
special subframe configuration according to the 3GPP specifications as follows:
337
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
0 3 10 3 8
1 9 4 8 3
1
2 10 3 1 9 2
3 11 2 10 1
4 12 1 3 7
5 3 9 8 2 2
6 9 3 9 1
2
7 10 2
8 11 1
The total number of modulation symbols (resource elements) in downlink is calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
DwPTS
N Sym – DL = N FB × N Sym ⁄ SRB × N SF – DL + N FB × N TDD – SSF × N Sym ⁄ SSF
Out of the total number of modulation symbols, Atoll then determines the numbers of modulation symbols corresponding to
each control channel as follows:
The number of modulation symbols for the downlink reference signals
The number of modulation symbols reserved for downlink reference signal transmission in one scheduler resource
block depends on the number of transmission antenna ports:
TX ( ic )
if N Ant – TX = 1
i
8
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic )
For all subframes except the TDD special subframes: N Res ⁄ SRB = 16 if N Ant – TX = 2
i
TX ( ic )
if N Ant – TX = 4 or 8
i
24
1 2 1 2
2 4 2 4
0 3 3
4 8 4 8
8 8 8 8
1 6 1 6
2 12 2 12
1 9 8
4 20 4 20
8 20 8 20
1 6 1 6
2 12 2 12
2 10 9
4 20 4 20
8 20 8 20
1 6 1 8
2 12 2 16
3 11 10
4 20 4 24
8 20 8 24
338
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
1 8 1 2
2 16 2 4
4 12 3
4 24 4 8
8 24 8 8
1 2 1 6
2 4 2 12
5 3 8
4 8 4 20
8 8 8 20
1 6 1 6
2 12 2 12
6 9 9
4 20 4 20
8 20 8 20
1 6
2 12
7 10
4 20
8 20
1 6
2 12
8 11
4 20
8 20
The number of modulation symbols used for downlink reference signal transmission in one scheduler resource block
is:
TX ( ic )
if N Ant – TX = 1
i
8
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic )
For all subframes except the TDD special subframes: N DLRS ⁄ SRB = 8 if N Ant – TX = 2
i
TX ( ic )
if N Ant – TX = 4 or 8
i
6
1 2 1 2
2 2 2 2
0 3 3
4 2 4 2
8 2 8 2
1 6 1 6
2 6 2 6
1 9 8
4 5 4 5
8 5 8 5
339
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
1 6 1 6
2 6 2 6
2 10 9
4 5 4 5
8 5 8 5
1 6 1 8
2 6 2 8
3 11 10
4 5 4 6
8 5 8 6
1 8 1 2
2 8 2 2
4 12 3
4 6 4 2
8 6 8 2
1 2 1 6
2 2 2 6
5 3 8
4 2 4 5
8 2 8 5
1 6 1 6
2 6 2 6
6 9 9
4 5 4 5
8 5 8 5
1 6
2 6
7 10
4 5
8 5
1 6
2 6
8 11
4 5
8 5
This gives a number of downlink reference signal modulation symbols per frame:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
N Sym – DLRS = N SF – DL × N FB × N DLRS ⁄ SRB + N TDD – SSF × N FB × N DLRS ⁄ DwPTS
340
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
N Sym – PBCH = 4 × N SCa – FB – 2 × N Ant – TX × N FB – SS, PBCH for normal cyclic prefix
i i
if ( N SD – PDCCH = 0 ) :
TX i ( ic )
N Sym – PDCCH = 0
TX ( ic )
if ( N SD – PDCCH = 1 ) AND N Ant – TX = 4 or 8 :
i
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
N × N SCa – FB – N Ant – TX × N FB
i i
× N SF – DL
TX i ( ic ) SD – PDCCH
N Sym – PDCCH =
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
+ N SD – PDCCH × N SCa – FB – N Ant – TX × N FB
i i i
× N TDD – SSF
Otherwise:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
N × N SCa – FB – 2 × N Ant – TX × N FB
i i
× N SF – DL
TX i ( ic ) SD – PDCCH
N Sym – PDCCH =
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
+ Min ( 2, N SD – PDCCH ) × N SCa – FB – 2 × N Ant – TX × N FB
i i
× N TDD – SSF
The energy per resource element for 1 modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of the downlink reference signals is calculated as
follows:
TX ( ic )
P i
TX i ( ic ) --------------------
Max
- TX i ( ic )
EPRE DLRS
= 10 × Log 10
10
× N SD ⁄ Slot × N Slot ⁄ SF × N SF – DL –
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
ΔEPRE SS
i
ΔEPRE PBCH
i
TX ( ic ) ----------------------------------- -----------------------------------
10 × L og N Sym – DLRS + N Sym – SS × 10
i 10 10
+ N Sym – PBCH × 10
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
ΔEPRE PDCCH ΔEPRE PDSCH
------------------------------------ ------------------------------------
+ NSym – PDCCH × 10
10
+ N Sym – PDSCH × 10
10
Calculation of Other EPREs and Per-channel Powers
The energy per resource element for 1 modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of the SS is calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
EPRE SS = EPRE DLRS + ΔEPRE SS
The energy per resource element for 1 modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of the PBCH is calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
EPRE PBCH = EPRE DLRS + ΔEPRE PBCH
The energy per resource element for 1 modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of the PDCCH is calculated as follows:
341
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i
EPRE PDCCH = EPRE DLRS + ΔEPRE PDCCH
The energy per resource element for 1 modulation symbol (dBm/Sym) of the PDSCH is calculated as follows:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i
EPRE PDSCH = EPRE DLRS + ΔEPRE PDSCH
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
= EPRE DLRS + 10 × Log 2 × N FB
i i i
P DLRS
TX i ( ic )
Where 2 × N FB implies that at the instant when downlink reference signals are transmitted, they are transmitted using 2
subcarriers in each frequency block.
For more than one transmission antenna port, antenna ports 0 and 1 transmit reference
signals using different subcarriers during the same OFDM symbol. An Atoll.ini option lets
you include the subcarriers transmitted simultaneously on both antenna ports when
calculating the instantaneous reference signal power. This means that, with this option
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
set, Atoll will use 4 × N FB instead of 2 × NFB in the above equation.
The same Atoll.ini option lets you make Atoll apply the transmit diversity gains (the same
used for PDSCH) instead of doubling the number of subcarriers used for transmitting
reference signals when using more than one antenna port.
For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
Where N SCa – FB × N FB – SS, PBCH implies that at the instant when the SS and the PBCH are transmitted, they are transmitted
using all the subcarriers in the centre 6 consecutive frequency blocks.
The average PDCCH transmission power is calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic )
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) N Sym–PDCCH
i
P PDCCH =
i
EPRE PDCCH -
+ 10 × Log -------------------------------------------------
TX i ( ic )
N SD – PDCCH × N SF – DL
As the number of subcarriers used for the PDCCH and PDSCH transmission varies over time, i.e., from one symbol duration to
the next, the instantaneous powers of the PDCCH and the PDSCH also vary over time. This is why average transmission powers
are calculated and used in Atoll.
Output
TX i ( ic )
• EPRE DLRS : Energy per resource element of the downlink reference signals for cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• EPRE SS : Energy per resource element of the SS for cell TXi(ic).
TX ( ic )
i
• EPRE PBCH : Energy per resource element of the PBCH for cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• EPRE PDCCH : Energy per resource element of the PDCCH for cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• EPRE PDSCH : Energy per resource element of the PDSCH for cell TXi(ic).
342
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( ic )
i
• P DLRS : Instantaneous transmission power of the downlink reference signals for cell TXi(ic).
TX ( ic )
i
• P SS : Instantaneous transmission power of the SS for cell TXi(ic).
TX ( ic )
i
• P PBCH : Instantaneous transmission power of the PBCH for cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• P PDCCH : Average transmission power of the PDCCH for cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• P PDSCH : Average transmission power of the PDSCH for cell TXi(ic).
The following sections describe how the co- and adjacent channel overlaps are calculated between the channels used by any
studied cell TXi(ic) and any other cell TXj(jc) of the network. In terms of interference calculation, the studied cell can be
considered a victim of interference received from the other cells that might be interfering the studied cell.
TX ( ic )
i
If the studied cell is assigned a channel number N Channel , it receives co-channel interference on the channel bandwidth of
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
N Channel , and adjacent channel interference on the adjacent channel bandwidths, i.e., corresponding to N Channel – 1 and
TX i ( ic )
N Channel + 1 .
In order to calculate the co- and adjacent channel overlaps between two channels, it is necessary to calculate the start and
end frequencies of both channels (explained in "Conversion From Channel Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on
page 343). Once the start and end frequencies are known for the studied and other cells, the co- and adjacent overlaps and
the total overlap ratio are calculated as respectively explained in:
• "Co-Channel Overlap Calculation" on page 344.
• "Adjacent Channel Overlap Calculation" on page 345.
• "Total Overlap Ratio Calculation" on page 346.
TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
i j
• F Start – Band and F Start – Band : Start frequencies of the frequency bands assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
F Start – Band can be the start frequency of a TDD frequency band ( F Start – TDD ), or the uplink or the downlink start
frequency of an FDD frequency band ( F Start – FDD – UL or F Start – FDD – DL ).
343
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
First – TX ( ic ) First – TX ( jc )
i j
• N Channel and N Channel : First channel numbers the frequency band assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
i j
• N Channel and N Channel : Channel numbers assigned to cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
For FDD networks, Atoll considers that the same channel number is assigned to a cell in the downlink and uplink, i.e.,
the channel number you assign to a cell is considered for uplink and downlink both.
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• W Channel and W Channel : Bandwidths of the channels assigned to cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
Calculations
Channel numbers are converted into start and end frequencies as follows:
For cell TXi(ic):
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) First – TXi ( ic )
F Start = F Start – Band + W Channel × N Channel – N Channel
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) First – TXi ( ic )
= F Start – Band + W Channel × N Channel – N Channel + 1
i i i
F End
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) First – TX j ( jc )
F Start = F Start – Band + W Channel × N Channel – N Channel
TX j ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) First – TX j ( jc )
= F Start – Band + W Channel × N Channel – N Channel + 1
j j j
F End
Output
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• F Start and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
i j
• F End and F End : End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• F Start and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on page 343.
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• F End and F End
: End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on page 343.
TX i ( ic )
• W Channel : Bandwidth of the channel assigned to the studied cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
Atoll first verifies that co-channel overlap exists between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
Co-channel overlap exists if:
TX ( ic ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
i j i j
F Start < F End AND F End > F Start
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
= Min F End , F End – Max F Start , F Start
j i j i
W CCO
344
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) W CCO
i j
r CCO = ----------------------------------
TX ( ic )
-
i
W Channel
Output
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
• r CCO : Co-channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• F Start and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on page 343.
TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
i j
• F End and F End
: End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on page 343.
TX ( ic )
i
• W Channel : Bandwidth of the channel assigned to the studied cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
Atoll first verifies that adjacent channel overlaps exist between (the lower-frequency and the higher-frequency adjacent
channels of) the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
Adjacent channel overlap exists on the lower-frequency adjacent channel if:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
F Start – W Channel < F End AND F Start > F Start
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
= Min F End , F Start – Max F Start , F Start – W Channel
i j j i j i i
W ACO
L
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
= Min F End , F End + W Channel – Max F Start , F End
i j i
W ACO
H
345
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
Output
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
• r ACO : Adjacent channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
• r CCO : Co-channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co-Channel Overlap
Calculation" on page 344.
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
• r ACO : Adjacent channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Adjacent Channel
Overlap Calculation" on page 345.
TX i ( ic )
• f ACS : Adjacent channel suppression factor defined for the frequency band of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• W Channel and W Channel : Bandwidths of the channels assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
Calculations
TX ( ic )
– f ACS
i
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) ----------------------- TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
r i j i j 10 i j
+ r ACO × 10 if W Channel ≥ W Channel
CCO
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
rO =
TX ( ic )
– f ACS
i
TX i ( ic )
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) ----------------------- W Channel TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
r i j i
+ r ACO
j
× 10
10
× ---------------------
i j
if W Channel < W Channel
CCO TX j ( jc )
W Channel
TX ( ic )
i
W Channel
The multiplicative factor ---------------------
TX ( jc )
is used to normalise the transmission power of the interfering cell TXj(jc). This means that
j
W Channel
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
if the interfering cell transmits at X dBm over a bandwidth of W Channel , and it interferes over a bandwidth less than W Channel ,
TX i ( ic )
W Channel
the interference from this cell should not be considered at X dBm but less than that. The factor ---------------------
TX j ( jc )
converts X dBm over
W Channel
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
W Channel to Y dBm (which is less than X dBm) over less than W Channel .
Output
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
• rO : Total co- and adjacent channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
346
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX i ( ic )
• P Max : Max power of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• P DLRS : Transmission power of the downlink reference signals for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission
Powers Calculation" on page 336.
TX i ( ic )
• P SS : Transmission power of the SS for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers Calculation" on
page 336.
TX i ( ic )
• P PBCH : Transmission power of the PBCH for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers Calculation"
on page 336.
TX ( ic )
i
• P PDCCH : Transmission power of the PDCCH for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers Calculation"
on page 336.
TX ( ic )
i
• P PDSCH : Transmission power of the PDSCH for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers Calculation"
on page 336.
TX ( ic )
i
• EPRE DLRS : Energy per resource element of the downlink reference signals for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink
Transmission Powers Calculation" on page 336.
TX i ( ic )
• EPRE SS : Energy per resource element of the SS for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers
Calculation" on page 336.
TX i ( ic )
• EPRE PBCH : Energy per resource element of the PBCH for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers
Calculation" on page 336.
TX i ( ic )
• EPRE PDCCH : Energy per resource element of the PDCCH for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers
Calculation" on page 336.
TX i ( ic )
• EPRE PDSCH : Energy per resource element of the PDSCH for cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers
Calculation" on page 336.
TX i
• E SA : Number of antenna elements defined for the smart antenna equipment used by the transmitter TXi.
TX i
• G Ant : Transmitter antenna gain for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
TX i
• G SA ( θ ) : Smart antenna gain in the direction θ of the served pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi. For more information on
TX i
the calculation of G SA ( θ ) , see "Beamforming Smart Antenna Models" on page 41.
TX TX
i i
• L : Total transmitter losses for the transmitter TXi ( L = L Total – DL ).
• L Model : Loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated using a propagation model.
TX i
• L Ant : Antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns) calculated for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
• L Indoor : Indoor losses taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected.
Mi
• L : Receiver terminal losses for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• G : Receiver terminal’s antenna gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• L Ant : Receiver terminal’s antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
347
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
M
i
For calculating the useful signal level from the best serving cell, L Ant is determined in the direction (H,V) = (0,0) from
M
i
the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi. For calculating the interfering signal level from any interferer, L Ant
is determined in the direction of the interfering cell from the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi, while the
antenna is pointed towards Mi’s best serving cell.
Mi
• L Body : Body loss defined for the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi Mi Mi Mi
L , G , L Ant , and L Body are not used in the calculations performed for the point
analysis tool’s profile tab, delta path loss calculation, and the downlink reference signal
level based coverage predictions.
• D CP : Cyclic prefix duration defined for the network in the Global Parameters.
Calculations
The received signal levels (dBm) from any cell TXi(ic) are calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
C Max = EIRP Max – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EIRP Max = P Max + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i TX
+ 10 ⋅ Log E SA
i
With smart antennas: EIRP Max = P Max + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
C DLRS = EIRP1 DLRS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EIRP1 DLRS = P DLRS + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i TX
+ 10 ⋅ Log E SA
i
With smart antennas: EIRP1 DLRS = P DLRS + G Ant – L
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) M M M M
i i i i i i
C SS = EIRP1 SS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX TX
i i i i
Without smart antennas: EIRP1 SS = P SS + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i TX i
With smart antennas: EIRP1 SS = P SS + G Ant – L + 10 ⋅ Log E SA
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
C PBCH = EIRP1 PBCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EIRP1 PBCH = P PBCH + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i TX
+ 10 ⋅ Log E SA
i
With smart antennas: EIRP1 PBCH = P PBCH + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
C PDCCH = EIRP1 PDCCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EIRP1 PDCCH = P PDCCH + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i TX i
With smart antennas: EIRP1 PDCCH = P PDCCH + G Ant – L + 10 ⋅ Log E SA
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
C PDSCH = EIRP1 PDSCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
348
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX TX
i i i i
Without smart antennas: EIRP1 PDSCH = P PDSCH + G Ant – L
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX TX
i i i i
With smart antennas: EIRP1 PDSCH = P PDSCH + G SA ( θ ) – L
The energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received from any cell TXi(ic) are calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi
as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
E DLRS = EIRP2 DLRS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EIRP2 DLRS = EPRE DLRS + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i TX
+ 10 ⋅ Log E SA
i
With smart antennas: EIRP2 DLRS = EPRE DLRS + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
E SS = EIRP2 SS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EIRP2 SS = EPRE SS + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i TX i
With smart antennas: EIRP2 SS = EPRE SS + G Ant – L + 10 ⋅ Log E SA
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
E PBCH = EIRP2 PBCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EIRP2 PBCH = EPRE PBCH + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i TX i
With smart antennas: EIRP2 PBCH = EPRE PBCH + G Ant – L + 10 ⋅ Log E SA
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
E PDCCH = EIRP2 PDCCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
Without smart antennas: EIRP2 PDCCH = EPRE PDCCH + G Ant – L
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX TX TX
+ 10 ⋅ Log E SA
i i i i i
With smart antennas: EIRP2 PDCCH = EPRE PDCCH + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
E PDSCH = EIRP2 PDSCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX TX
i i i i
Without smart antennas: EIRP2 PDSCH = EPRE PDSCH + G Ant – L
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
With smart antennas: EIRP2 PDSCH = EPRE PDSCH + G SA ( θ ) – L
TX i
L Path = L Model + L Ant
Furthermore, the total losses between the cell and the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi can be calculated as follows:
TX i TX i Mi Mi Mi Mi
L Total = L Path + L + L Indoor + M Shadowing – Model – G +L –G + L Ant + L Body
f CP is the cyclic prefix factor, i.e., the ratio of the useful symbol energy to the total symbol energy.
The total symbol duration of a modulation symbol comprises the useful symbol duration, carrying the actual data bits, and a
cyclic prefix, added to the useful data bits as padding against multi-path to avoid inter-symbol interference. Hence, the total
energy within a modulation symbol belongs in part to the useful data bits and in part to the cyclic prefix. Once a modulation
symbol is received, only the energy of the useful data bits can be used for extracting the data. The energy belonging to the
cyclic prefix is lost once it has served its purpose of combatting inter-symbol interference. Therefore, f CP implies that the
energy belonging to the cyclic prefix is excluded from the useful signal level.
349
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
The cyclic prefix energy and the useful data bits energy are both taken into account when calculating interfering signal levels.
Output
TX i ( ic )
• C Max : Received max signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ( ic )
i
• C DLRS : Received downlink reference signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• C SS : Received SS signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• C PBCH : Received PBCH signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• C PDCCH : Received PDCCH signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• C PDSCH : Received PDSCH signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ( ic )
i
• E DLRS : Received downlink reference signal energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• E SS : Received SS energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ( ic )
i
• E PBCH : Received PBCH energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• E PDCCH : Received PDCCH energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• E PDSCH : Received PDSCH eneregy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
• L Path : Path loss between the cell TXi(ic) and the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
• L Total : Total losses between the cell TXi(ic) and the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Input
• K: Boltzmann’s constant.
• T: Temperature in Kelvin.
• ΔF : Subcarrier width (15 kHz).
• W FB : Width of a frequency block in the frequency domain (180 kHz).
• N FB – SS, PBCH : Number of frequency blocks that carry the SS and the PBCH (6).
TX i ( ic )
• N FB : Number of frequency blocks, defined in the frequency bands table, for the channel bandwidth used by the
cell TXi(ic).
TX ( ic )
i
• N FB – CE : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks (used in cell-edge areas in case of ICIC), determined from the list of
frequency blocks corresponding to the cell’s PSS ID (0, 1, or 2) defined in the ICIC configuration assigned to the cell
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) N FB
TXi(ic). By default (if no ICIC configuration is assigned to the cell), N FB – CE = ---------------- .
3
Mi
• nf : Noise figure of the terminal used for calculations by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
350
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
Calculations
The thermal noise for one resource element, i.e., over one subcarrier, is calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic )
n 0 – Sym = n 0 + 10 × Log ( ΔF )
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
n 0 – DLRS = n 0 + 10 × Log N FB × W FB × 1000
i i
TX i ( ic )
n 0 – SS = n 0 + 10 × Log ( N FB – SS, PBCH × W FB × 1000 )
TX i ( ic )
n 0 – PBCH = n 0 + 10 × Log ( N FB – SS, PBCH × W FB × 1000 )
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
n 0 – PDCCH = n 0 + 10 × Log N FB × W FB × 1000
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
n 0 – PDSCH = n 0 + 10 × Log NFB × W FB × 1000
The downlink noise is the sum of the thermal noise and the noise figure of the terminal used for the calculations by the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi. The downlink noise for one resource element, i.e., over one subcarrier, is calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi
n Sym = n 0 – Sym + nf
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi
n SS = n 0 – SS + nf
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi
n PBCH = n 0 – PBCH + nf
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi
n PDCCH = n 0 – PDCCH + nf
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi
n PDSCH = n 0 – PDSCH + nf
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic ) N FB – CE
n 0 – PDCCH
= n 0 + 10 × Log N FB
i
× W FB × 1000 × -----------------
TX i ( ic )
N FB
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic ) N FB – CE
n 0 – PDSCH
= n 0 + 10 × Log N FB
i
× W FB × 1000 × -----------------
TX i ( ic )
N FB
The SS and PBCH always use the centre six frequency blocks. Hence, there is no change in their noise levels.
351
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
Whether a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is covered by the ICIC part of the frame is determined as explained in "Best
Server Determination" on page 376.
Output
TX ( ic )
i
• n Sym : Downlink noise for one subcarrier.
TX i ( ic )
• n DLRS : Downlink noise for the downlink reference signals for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• n SS : Downlink noise for the SS for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• n PBCH : Downlink noise for the PBCH for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• n PDCCH : Downlink noise for the PDCCH for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• n PDSCH : Downlink noise for the PDSCH for the cell TXi(ic).
Input
TX j ( jc )
• E DLRS : Received downlink reference energy per resource element received from any interfering cell TXj(jc) as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347 at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the cell
TXi(ic).
TX j ( jc )
• E SS : Received SS energy per resource element received from any interfering cell TXj(jc) as calculated in "Signal
Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347 at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the cell TXi(ic).
TX j ( jc )
• E PBCH : Received PBCH energy per resource element received from any interfering cell TXj(jc) as calculated in "Signal
Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347 at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the cell TXi(ic).
TX j ( jc )
• E PDCCH : Received PDCCH energy per resource element received from any interfering cell TXj(jc) as calculated in "Signal
Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347 at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the cell TXi(ic).
TX j ( jc )
• E PDSCH : Received PDSCH energy per resource element received from any interfering cell TXj(jc) as calculated in "Signal
Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347 at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the cell TXi(ic).
TX j
• G SA ( θ ) : Smart antenna gain in the direction θ . For more information, see "Beamforming Smart Antenna Models" on
page 41.
TX j
• G SA ( ϕ ) : Smart antenna gain in the direction ϕ calculated from the average array correlation matrix:
H
G SA ( ϕ ) = g n ( ϕ ) ⋅ S ϕ ⋅ R Avg ⋅ S ϕ . For more information, see "Beamforming Smart Antenna Models" on page 41.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
• M Shadowing – C ⁄ I : Shadowing margin based on the C/I standard deviation.
In Monte Carlo simulations, the received energies per resource element from interferers already include
M Shadowing – Model , as explained in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347.
In coverage predictions, the ratio M Shadowing – Model – M Shadowing – C ⁄ I is applied to the interfering signals (for more
information, see "Shadow Fading Model" on page 85). As the received energies per resource element from interferers
already include M Shadowing – Model , M Shadowing – C ⁄ I is added to the received energies per resource element from
interferers in order to achieve the ratio M Shadowing – Model – M Shadowing – C ⁄ I :
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
j j
E = E + M Shadowing – C ⁄ I
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
352
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( jc )
j
• N Sym – DLRS : Number of downlink reference signal resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers
Calculation" on page 336.
• N Sym – SS : Number of SS resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers Calculation" on page 336.
TX ( jc )
j
• N Sym – PBCH : Number of PBCH resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers Calculation" on
page 336.
TX j ( jc )
• N Sym – PDCCH : Number of PDCCH resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers Calculation" on
page 336.
TX j ( jc )
• N Sym – PDSCH : Number of PDSCH resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers Calculation" on
page 336.
TX j ( jc )
• N Sym – DL : Total number of downlink resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers Calculation"
on page 336.
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
• rO : Total channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co- and Adjacent
Channel Overlaps Calculation" on page 343.
TX j ( jc )
• TL DL : Downlink traffic load of the interfering cell TXj(jc).
Traffic loads can either be calculated using Monte Carlo simulations, or entered manually for each cell. Calculation of
traffic loads is explained in "Simulation Process" on page 332.
F Start – Band can be the start frequency of a TDD frequency band ( F Start – TDD ), or the uplink or the downlink start
frequency of an FDD frequency band ( F Start – FDD – UL or F Start – FDD – DL ).
First – TX i ( ic ) First – TX j ( jc )
• N Channel and N Channel : First channel numbers the frequency band assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• N Channel and N Channel : Channel numbers assigned to cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
For FDD networks, Atoll considers that the same channel number is assigned to a cell in the downlink and uplink, i.e.,
the channel number you assign to a cell is considered for uplink and downlink both.
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• W Channel and W Channel : Bandwidths of the channels assigned to cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• ID ϕ and ID ϕ : Physical cell IDs of the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• r DL – ICIC and r DL – ICIC : ICIC ratios of the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX ( jc )
j
• N Ant – TX : Number of transmission (downlink) antenna ports defined for the cell TXj(jc).
353
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
Calculations
The interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over downlink reference signals from any cell TXj(jc) at a
pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
Without smart antennas:
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
E j TX ( jc ) E
j
TX ( jc )
TX j ( jc ) --------------------
DLRS - j
N Sym – DLRS
PDCCH
--------------------- j
N Sym – PDCCH
ε DLRS
= 10 × Log 10
10
× TX ( jc ) + 10
-------------------------
- 10
× -----------------------------
j
TX ( jc )
j
N Sym – DL N Sym – DL
TX j ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
E +f
i j
TX j ( jc )
TX j ( jc )
PDSCH ICIC – DL
----------------------------------------------------------------------- N Sym – PDSCH TX ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
+ 10
10
- × TL DL + f O i
× ---------------------------- + f MIMO
TX j ( jc )
N Sym – DL
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
E j TX j ( jc ) E PDCCH
j
TX ( jc )
TX j ( jc ) --------------------
DLRS -
N --------------------- N j
ε DLRS
= 10 × Log 10
10 Sym – DLRS
× -------------------------
- + 10 10 Sym – PDCCH
× -----------------------------
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
N Sym – DL N Sym – DL
TX j ( jc ) TX j TX j TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
E PDSCH + G SA ( ϕ ) – G SA ( θ ) + f ICIC – DL
TX j ( jc )
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 N Sym – PDSCH TX ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
+ 10 - + fO i
× ----------------------------
TX j ( jc )
N Sym – DL
The interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over the SS and the PBCH from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
Without smart antennas:
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
ESS E PBCH
--------------------
10
- ---------------------
10
TX j ( jc )
TX j ( jc ) 10 × N Sym – SS + 10 × N Sym – PBCH TX ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
ε SS, PBCH - × 1 – f DCi – SCa – Shift
= 10 × Log -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX j ( jc )
N Sym – SS + N Sym – PBCH
TX j ( jc )
E
TX j ( jc )
PDSCH
--------------------- TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
+ 10
10
× f DC – SCa – Shift × TL DL +f + f MIMO
O
The interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over the PDSCH and the PDCCH from any cell TXj(jc) at a
pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
Without smart antennas:
354
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
E j TX ( jc ) E
j
TX ( jc )
TX ( jc ) --------------------
DLRS
- N
j PDCCH
--------------------- j
N Sym – PDCCH
j
ε PDSCH, PDCCH
= 10 × Log 10
10 Sym – DLRS
× -------------------------
- + 10 10
× -----------------------------
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
j j
N Sym – DL N Sym – DL
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
j
E PDSCH + f ICIC – DL
i j
TX j ( jc )
----------------------------------------------------------------------- N Sym – PDSCH TX j ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
+ 10
10
- × TL DL + f O i
× ---------------------------- + f MIMO
TX j ( jc )
N Sym – DL
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
E j TX j ( jc ) E
j
TX j ( jc )
TX j ( jc ) --------------------
DLRS
- N
PDCCH
--------------------- N Sym – PDCCH
ε PDSCH, PDCCH
= 10 × Log 10
10 Sym – DLRS
× -------------------------
- + 10 10
× -----------------------------
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
N Sym – DL N Sym – DL
TX ( jc ) TX TX TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
j
E PDSCH + G SA ( ϕ ) – G ( θ ) + f
j j i j
SA ICIC – DL TX j ( jc )
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 N Sym – PDSCH TX ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
+ 10 - + fO i
× ----------------------------
TX j ( jc )
N Sym – DL
E-UTRA carrier RSSI is measured on the OFDM symbols that contain reference signals. Therefore, the interfering energy per
frequency block (dBm/RB) received from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi over 1 frequency block during an
OFDM symbol carrying reference signals, is given as follows:
Without smart antennas:
TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
EPDSCH + fICIC – DL
----------------------------------------------------------------------
10
- TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
TX j ( jc ) 10 × N Sym – PDSCH × TL DL
ε RSSI = 10 × Log ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
- × 10
N + N
Sym – PDSCH Sym – PDCCH
TX j ( jc )
E PDCCH TX j ( jc )
---------------------
10
TX j ( jc ) E DLRS
10 × N Sym – PDCCH ---------------------
10 TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
+ -----------------------------------------------------------------
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
× 10 + 10 × 2 + fO + f MIMO
N Sym – PDSCH + N Sym – PDCCH
In OFDM symbols that contain reference signals, 2 subcarriers are used to transmit reference signals and 10 are used to
transmit either PDCCH or PDSCH.
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
Where f DC – SCa – Shift is the DC subcarrier shift factor. This factor represents the difference in the DC subcarrier frequencies
of the interfered and interfering cells with respect to the SS and the PBCH bandwidth. The DC subcarrier shift factor is
calculated as follows:
355
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j F Centre – F Centre
i j
f DC – SCa – Shift = Min 1, ---------------------------------------------
-
N FB – SS, PBCH × W FB
TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
i j
Where F Centre and F Centre are the centre frequencies of the channels used by TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) respectively. These are the
frequencies where the DC subcarrier is located. The centre frequencies are calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) First – TX i ( ic )
For cell TXi(ic): F Centre = F Start – Band + W Channel × N Channel – N Channel + ---
1
2
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) First – TX ( jc )
For cell TXj(jc): F Centre = F Start – Band + W Channel × N Channel – N Channel + ---
j j j j j 1
2
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
f MIMO is the interference increment due to more than one transmission antenna port: f MIMO = 10 × Log N Ant – TX
j j j
TX j ( jc )
If you do not wish to apply f MIMO , add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[LTE]
MultiAntennaInterference = 0
Interference reduction due to the co- and adjacent channel overlap between the studied and the interfering cells:
Interference reduction due to the co- and adjacent channel overlap between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) is calculated
as follows:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
fO = 10 × Log r O
Interference reduction due to static downlink ICIC using fractional frequency reuse:
If the cell supports Static DL ICIC, it means that a part of the LTE frame may use a fraction of the channel bandwidth.
There are two effects:
1. Power concentration, which means that the spectral density of the power transmitted over a fraction of the channel
is higher than the spectral density of the same power transmitted over the entire channel bandwidth. The effect of
power concentration is visible when calculating the C/N and C/(I+N). The increase in power due to this power
concentration is equivalent to a reduction in noise and interference. Hence, in case of static downlink ICIC using FFR,
the interference at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi that is allocated to the ICIC part of the LTE frame is reduced.
2. Collision probability between the subcarriers used by the fractions of the channels being used by the interfered and
interfering cells. The following paragraphs explain how the collision probability is calculated.
The ICIC Ratio ratio is the percentage of the total downlink traffic load present in the ICIC part of the frame. For
example, if the downlink traffic load is 80 %, and the ICIC ratio is 50 %, then this means that the downlink traffic load
of the ICIC part of the frame is 40 % (i.e., 50 % of 80 %), and the downlink traffic load of the non-ICIC part of the frame
is 40 %.
In coverage predictions, Atoll uses the ICIC ratios stored in the cell properties for determining the interference. In
simulations, Atoll resets the ICIC ratios for all the cells to 0, and then calculates them according to the traffic loads of
the mobiles allocated to the ICIC and non-ICIC parts of the frame.
Atoll determines the switching point between the ICIC and the non-ICIC parts of the frame using the ICIC ratio. The
switching points between the ICIC and non-ICIC parts of the frame of the victim and interfering cells, TXi(ic) and TXj(jc)
respectively, are calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
TX i ( ic ) r DL – ICIC TX ( jc ) r DL – ICIC
SP - and SP j
= ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) N TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) N
r DL – ICIC + 1 – r DL – ICIC × ----------------- r DL – ICIC + 1 – r DL – ICIC × -----------------
FB – CE FB – CE
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
N FB N FB
356
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
Where, SP is the switching point between the ICIC and the non-ICIC parts of the frame, and r DL – ICIC is the downlink
ICIC ratios of the cells.
If the downlink ICIC ratio is set to 0, it means that the ICIC part of the frame does not exist. Setting it to 0 gives SP = 0,
and setting it to 1 gives SP = 1 (or 100%), which shows how the switching point varies with the ICIC ratio.
The ICIC ratio is used to partition the total downlink traffic load into ICIC and non-ICIC
parts of the frame. Therefore, the switching point formula is derived from the equation:
r DL – ICIC × TL DL ( 1 – r DL – ICIC ) × TL DL
---------------------------------------------------------- = -------------------------------------------------
-
N FB – CE ( 1 – SP ) × W Channel
SP × WChannel × -----------------
N FB
With cells using static downlink ICIC, there can be four different interference scenarios.
a. Between the ICIC part of the victim and the ICIC part of the interferer.
b. Between the ICIC part of the victim and the non-ICIC part of the interferer.
c. Between the non-ICIC part of the victim and the ICIC part of the interferer.
d. Between the non-ICIC part of the victim and the non-ICIC part of the interferer.
Therefore, Atoll calculates the probabilities of collision for each scenario and weights the total interference according
to the total collision probability. The probability of collision p Coll for each scenario is:
Common
N FB – CE
a ICIC ICIC ---------------------
TX i ( ic )
N FB – CE
TX i ( ic )
Common
Where, N FB – CE is the number of cell-edge frequency blocks common in TXi(ic) and TXj(jc), and N FB – CE is the
number of cell-edge frequency blocks in the cell TXi(ic).
TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic )
a
p Coll If SP ≥ SP
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
p Collision = a
+ p Coll × SP
b
p Coll × SP
– SP
TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic )
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX i ( ic )
If SP < SP
SP
• Case 2: If the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is covered by the non-segmented zone of TXi(ic), the total collision
probability for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
d
TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic )
p Coll If SP ≤ SP
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
p Collision = p dColl × 1 – SP j + p cColl × SP j – SP i
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- If SP j > SP i
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
TX i ( ic )
1 – SP
357
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
The interference reduction factor due to static downlink ICIC using fractional frequency reuse for the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
= 10 × Log p Collision
i j i j
f ICIC – DL
Whether a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is covered by the ICIC part of the frame is determined as explained in "Best
Server Determination" on page 376.
Output
TX j ( jc )
• ε DLRS : Interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over downlink reference signals from any cell
TXj(jc) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic).
TX j ( jc )
• ε SS, PBCH : Interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over the SS and the PBCH from any cell TXj(jc)
at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic).
TX j ( jc )
• ε PDSCH, PDCCH : Interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over the PDSCH and the PDCCH from any
cell TXj(jc) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic).
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
ε DLRS and ε PDSCH, PDCCH are the same.
TX ( jc )
j
• ε RSSI : Interfering energy per frequency block (dBm/RB) received from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi over 1 frequency block during an OFDM symbol carrying reference signals.
TX i ( ic )
• E DLRS : Received downlink reference signal energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi as calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347.
TX i ( ic )
• E SS : Received SS energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347.
TX i ( ic )
• E PBCH : Received PBCH energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347.
TX ( ic )
i
• E PDCCH : Received PDCCH energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347.
TX i ( ic )
• E PDSCH : Received PDSCH energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347.
TX i ( ic )
• n Sym : Downlink noise for one subcarrier for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Calculation (DL)" on page 350.
TX i ( ic )
• CINR DLRS : Downlink reference signal C/(I+N) from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "C/
(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (DL)" on page 360.
TX i ( ic )
• T AMS : AMS threshold defined for the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• T B : Bearer selection thresholds of the bearers defined in the LTE equipment used by Mi’s terminal.
Mi
• B DL – Highest ( Service ) : Highest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
Mi
• B DL – Lowest ( Service ) : Lowest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• N Ant – TX : Number of transmission (downlink) antenna ports defined for the cell TXi(ic).
358
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
M
i
• N Ant – RX : Number of reception (downlink) antenna ports defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
• Mobility ( M i ) : Mobility used for the calculations.
M
BLER B DL : Downlink block error rate read from the graphs available in the LTE equipment assigned to the terminal
i
•
used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Calculations
The C/N for cell TXi(ic) are calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i
CNR DLRS = E DLRS – n Sym
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i
CNR SS = E SS – n Sym
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
CNR PBCH = E PBCH – n Sym
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
CNR PDCCH = E PDCCH – n Sym
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
CNR PDSCH = E PDSCH – n Sym
Bearer Determination:
The bearers available for selection in the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi’s LTE equipment are the ones:
• Which are common between Mi’s and TXi(ic)’s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
defined in both equipment), if the corresponding option has been set in the Atoll.ini file. For more information,
see the Administrator Manual.
• Whose indexes are within the range defined by the lowest and the highest bearer indexes defined for the service
being accessed by Mi.
Mi TX i ( ic )
• Whose selection thresholds are less than the PDSCH C/N at Mi: T B < CNR PDSCH
DL
If the cell supports Transmit Diversity or AMS, the transmit diversity gain, G Div , corresponding to the bearer is
applied to its selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the LTE equipment assigned to the pixel,
TX ( ic ) M M
subscriber, or mobile Mi for N Ant – TX , N Ant – RX , Mobility ( M i ) , BLER B DL .
i i i
DL
The additional downlink diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi ΔG Div is
also applied. Therefore, the bearers available for selection are all the bearers defined in the LTE equipment for
which the following is true:
In case of Transmit Diversity:
Mi TX i ( ic )
DL DL
T B – G Div – ΔG Div < CNR PDSCH
In case of AMS:
Mi DL DL TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
T B – G Div – ΔG Div < CNR PDSCH if CNR DLRS < T AMS
The bearer selected for data transfer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic).
• Bearer Index
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest index.
• Peak RLC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest downlink peak RLC
channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, and
Average User Throughput Calculation" on page 385.
• Effective RLC Throughput
359
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest downlink effective
RLC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput,
and Average User Throughput Calculation" on page 385.
MIMO – Transmit Diversity Gain:
Once the bearer is known, the PDSCH C/N calculated above become:
In case of Transmit Diversity:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i DL DL
CNR PDSCH = CNR PDSCH + G Div + ΔG Div
In case of AMS:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
DL DL
CNR PDSCH = CNR PDSCH + G Div + ΔG Div if CNR DLRS < T AMS or CINRDLRS < T AMS
DL
Where G Div is the transmit diversity gain corresponding to the selected bearer.
Output
TX ( ic )
i
• CNR DLRS : Downlink reference signal C/N from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• CNR SS : SS C/N from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• CNR PBCH : PBCH C/N from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• CNR PDCCH : PDCCH C/N from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• CNR PDSCH : PDSCH C/N from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Input
TX i ( ic )
Configuration N SF – DL
FDD 10
360
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( ic )
Configuration i
N SF – DL
DSUUU-DSUUU 2
DSUUD-DSUUD 4
DSUDD-DSUDD 6
DSUUU-DSUUD 3
DSUUU-DDDDD 6
DSUUD-DDDDD 7
DSUDD-DDDDD 8
TX i ( ic )
• E DLRS : Received downlink reference signal energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi as calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347.
TX i ( ic )
• E SS : Received SS energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347.
TX i ( ic )
• E PBCH : Received PBCH energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347.
TX i ( ic )
• E PDCCH : Received PDCCH energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347.
TX i ( ic )
• E PDSCH : Received PDSCH energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347.
TX i
• G SA ( θ ) : Smart antenna gain in the direction θ . For more information, see "Beamforming Smart Antenna Models" on
page 41.
TX
i
• G SA ( ϕ ) : Smart antenna gain in the direction ϕ calculated from the average array correlation matrix:
H
G SA ( ϕ ) = g n ( ϕ ) ⋅ S ϕ ⋅ R Avg ⋅ S ϕ . For more information, see "Beamforming Smart Antenna Models" on page 41.
TX i ( ic )
• N Sym – DLRS : Number of downlink reference signal resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers
Calculation" on page 336.
TX i ( ic )
• N Sym – PDCCH : Number of PDCCH resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers Calculation" on
page 336.
TX i ( ic )
• N Sym – PDSCH : Number of PDSCH resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers Calculation" on
page 336.
TX i ( ic )
• N Sym – DL : Total number of downlink resource elements as calculated in "Downlink Transmission Powers Calculation"
on page 336.
TX i ( ic )
• TL DL : Downlink traffic load of the interfering cell TXi(ic).
Traffic loads can either be calculated using Monte Carlo simulations, or entered manually for each cell. Calculation of
traffic loads is explained in "Simulation Process" on page 332.
TX i ( ic )
• n Sym : Downlink noise for one subcarrier for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Calculation (DL)" on page 350.
TX j ( jc )
• ε DLRS : Interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over downlink reference signals from any cell
TXj(jc) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Interference Calculation (DL)" on
page 352.
TX j ( jc )
• ε SS, PBCH : Interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over the SS and the PBCH from any cell TXj(jc)
at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Interference Calculation (DL)" on page 352.
TX j ( jc )
• ε PDSCH, PDCCH : Interfering energy per resource element (dBm/Sym) received over the PDSCH and the PDCCH from any
cell TXj(jc) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Interference Calculation (DL)"
on page 352.
361
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
j j
ε DLRS and ε PDSCH, PDCCH are the same.
TX ( jc )
j
• ε RSSI : Interfering energy per frequency block (dBm/RB) received over 1 frequency block during an OFDM symbol
carrying reference signals from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Interference
Calculation (DL)" on page 352.
Inter – Tech
• NRDL : Inter-technology downlink noise rise.
TX i ( ic )
• CNR DLRS : Downlink reference signal C/N from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "C/N
Calculation (DL)" on page 358.
TX i ( ic )
• T AMS : AMS threshold defined for the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• T B : Bearer selection thresholds of the bearers defined in the LTE equipment used by Mi’s terminal.
Mi
• B DL – Highest ( Service ) : Highest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
Mi
• B DL – Lowest ( Service ) : Lowest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• N Ant – TX : Number of transmission (downlink) antenna ports defined for the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• N Ant – RX : Number of reception (downlink) antenna ports defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
• Mobility ( M i ) : Mobility used for the calculations.
M
BLER BDL : Downlink block error rate read from the graphs available in the LTE equipment assigned to the terminal
i
•
used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Calculations
The downlink reference signal C/(I+N) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
ε j n Sym
i
TX i ( ic ) -------------------
DLRS
TX i ( ic ) - ---------------------
10 10 Inter – Tech
CINR DLRS = E DLRS – 10 × Log
10
+ 10
+ NR DL
All TXj ( jc )
The SS C/(I+N) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
ε j n Sym
i
TX i ( ic ) -------------------------
SS, PBCH
TX i ( ic ) - ---------------------
– 10 × Log 10 + 10 + NR
10 10 Inter – Tech
CINR SS = E SS
DL
All TXj ( jc )
The PBCH C/(I+N) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
ε j n Sym
i
TX i ( ic ) -------------------------
SS, PBCH
TX i ( ic ) - ---------------------
CINR PBCH = E PBCH – 10 × Log 10 10 + 10 10 + NR Inter – Tech
DL
All TXj ( jc )
The PDCCH C/(I+N) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
ε j n i
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) -----------------------------------------
PDSCH, PDCCH- Sym -
--------------------
= E PDCCH – 10 × Log 10
+10 + NR
10 10 Inter – Tech
CINR PDCCH DL
All TXj ( jc )
The PDSCH C/(I+N) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
362
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
ε j n i
TX ( ic ) -----------------------------------------
PDSCH, PDCCH
---------------------
Sym
TX ( ic ) -
= E PDSCH – 10 × Log 10
+10 + NR
i i 10 10 Inter – Tech
CINR PDSCH
DL
All TXj ( jc )
The downlink reference signal received quality (RSRQ) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
RSRQ = 10 × Log N FB + E i – RSSI
DLRS
TX ( ic )
i
Where RSSI is the received signal strength indicator, i.e., the received signals from the server (TXi(ic)), and all the
interfering cells (TXj(jc)), calculated as follows:
Without smart antennas:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
EPDSCH E PDCCH
--------------------
10
- TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) ---------------------
10
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) 10 × N Sym – PDSCH × TL DL + 10 × N Sym – PDCCH TX i ( ic )
RSSI = 10 × Log ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
× 10 × N Ant – TX
N + N
Sym – PDSCH Sym – PDCCH
TX i ( ic ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
E ε j n
i
DLRS
-------------------- TX i ( ic ) -------------------
RSSI
-
Sym
--------------------- TX i ( ic )
10
× 12 + NRDL + 10 × Log N FB
10 10 Inter – Tech
+ 10 × 2 × N Ant – TX + 10 + 10
All TX j ( jc )
The downlink reference signal total noise (I+N) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
ε j n
i
TX i ( ic ) -------------------
DLRS
- ---------------------
Sym
TX ( ic )
( I + N ) DLRS = 10 × Log 10 10 + 10 10 + NR Inter – Tech + 10 × Log 2 × N i
DL FB
All TXj ( jc )
The SS and PBCH total noise (I+N) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
ε j n Sym
i
TX i ( ic ) -------------------------
SS, PBCH
- ---------------------
( I + N ) SS, PBCH = 10 × Log 10 10 + 10 10 + NR Inter – Tech + 10 × Log ( N
SCa – FB × N FB – SS, PBCH )
DL
All TX j ( jc )
The PDSCH and PDCCH total noise (I+N) for cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
363
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
ε j n
i
TX ( ic ) -----------------------------------------
PDSCH, PDCCH
- ---------------------
Sym
= 10 × Log 10
+ 10 + NR Inter – Tech
i 10 10
( I + N ) PDSCH, PDCCH
DL
All TXj ( jc )
N TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i
Sym – PDSCH + N Sym – PDCCH
+ 10 × Log -------------------------------------------------------------------
-
TX i ( ic )
N SD ⁄ Slot × N Slot ⁄ SF × N SF – DL
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
With N SCa – FB , N Sym–PDSCH , and N Sym–PDCCH calculated as explained in "Downlink Transmission Powers Calculation" on
page 336.
Bearer Determination:
The bearers available for selection in the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi’s LTE equipment are the ones:
• Which are common between Mi’s and TXi(ic)’s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
defined in both equipment), if the corresponding option has been set in the Atoll.ini file. For more information,
see the Administrator Manual.
• Whose indexes are within the range defined by the lowest and the highest bearer indexes defined for the service
being accessed by Mi.
Mi TX i ( ic )
• Whose selection thresholds are less than the PDSCH C/(I+N) at Mi: T B < CINR PDSCH
DL
If the cell supports Transmit Diversity or AMS, the transmit diversity gain, G Div , corresponding to the bearer is
applied to its selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the LTE equipment assigned to the pixel,
TX ( ic ) M M
subscriber, or mobile Mi for N Ant – TX , N Ant – RX , Mobility ( M i ) , BLER B DL .
i i i
DL
The additional downlink diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi ΔG Div is
also applied. Therefore, the bearers available for selection are all the bearers defined in the LTE equipment for
which the following is true:
In case of Transmit Diversity:
Mi TX i ( ic )
DL DL
T B – G Div – ΔG Div < CINR PDSCH
In case of AMS:
Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
DL DL
T B – G Div – ΔG Div < CINR PDSCH if CNR DLRS < T AMS or CINR DLRS < T AMS
The bearer selected for data transfer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic).
• Bearer Index
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest index.
• Peak RLC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest downlink peak RLC
channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, and
Average User Throughput Calculation" on page 385.
• Effective RLC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest downlink effective
RLC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput,
and Average User Throughput Calculation" on page 385.
MIMO – Transmit Diversity Gain:
Once the bearer is known, the PDSCH C/(I+N) calculated above become:
In case of Transmit Diversity:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
DL DL
CINR PDSCH = CINR PDSCH + G Div + ΔG Div
In case of AMS:
364
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i DL DL i i i i
CINR PDSCH = CINR PDSCH + G Div + ΔG Div if CNR DLRS < T AMS or CINR DLRS < T AMS
DL
Where G Div is the transmit diversity gain corresponding to the selected bearer.
Output
TX ( ic )
i
• CINR DLRS : Downlink reference signal C/(I+N) from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• CINR SS : SS C/(I+N) from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• CINR PBCH : PBCH C/(I+N) from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• CINR PDCCH : PDCCH C/(I+N) from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• CINR PDSCH : PDSCH C/(I+N) from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ( ic )
i
• RSRQ : Downlink reference signal received quality from cell TXi(ic) at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ( ic )
i
• RSSI : Received signal strength indicator, i.e., the received signals from the server (TXi(ic)), and all the interfering
cells (TXj(jc)), at pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• ( I + N ) DLRS : Downlink reference signals total noise from the interfering cells TXj(jc) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• ( I + N ) SS, PBCH : SS and PBCH total noise from the interfering cells TXj(jc) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered
by a cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• ( I + N ) PDSCH, PDCCH : PDSCH and PDCCH total noise from the interfering cells TXj(jc) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• B DL : Bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the downlink.
TX i ( ic )
• CINR PUSCH – Max : Maximum PUSCH C/(I+N) defined for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• NR UL : Uplink noise rise of the cell TXi(ic). This value can be user-defined or calculated as explained in "Interference
Calculation (UL)" on page 367.
TX i ( ic )
• NR UL – ICIC : ICIC uplink noise rise of the cell TXi(ic). This value can be user-defined or calculated as explained in
"Interference Calculation (UL)" on page 367.
TX i ( ic )
• n PUSCH, PUCCH : Uplink noise for the PUSCH and the PUCCH for the cell TXi(ic).
TX ( ic )
i
• N FB : Number of frequency blocks, defined in the frequency bands table, for the channel bandwidth used by the
cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• α FPC : Fractional uplink power control factor defined for the cell TXi(ic).
M
i
• P Max : Maximum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• P Eff : Effective transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi after power control
adjustment as calculated in "C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (UL)" on page 373.
TX i
• G Ant : Transmitter antenna gain for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
TX i TX i
• L : Total transmitter losses for the transmitter TXi ( L = L Total – UL ).
TX i
• L Path : Path loss ( L Path = L Model + L Ant ).
• L Total : Total loss calculated as explained in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347.
365
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
• L Model : Loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated using a propagation model.
TX
i
• L Ant : Antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns) calculated for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
• L Indoor : Indoor losses taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected.
Mi
• L : Receiver terminal losses for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• G : Receiver terminal’s antenna gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• L Ant : Receiver terminal’s antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
For calculating the useful signal level from the best serving cell, L Ant is determined in the direction (H,V) = (0,0) from
Mi
the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi. For calculating the interfering signal level from any interferer, L Ant
is determined in the direction of the interfering cell from the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi, while the
antenna is pointed towards Mi’s best serving cell.
Mi
• L Body : Body loss defined for the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
• D CP : Cyclic prefix duration defined for the network in the Global Parameters.
Calculations
Atoll first calculates the allowed maximum transmission power for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
This power is calculated by performing fractional power control.
Fractional Power Control:
Fractional power control imposes a limitation on the maximum transmission power of the terminal. A nominal PUSCH
power is indicated by the cell to all the pixels, subscribers, or mobiles. This nominal PUSCH power is calculated as
follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
P O_PUSCH = CINR PUSCH – Max + NRUL + n PUSCH, PUCCH – 10 × Log N FB for the non-ICIC zone.
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
P O_PUSCH = CINR PUSCH – Max + NRUL – ICIC + n PUSCH, PUCCH – 10 × Log NFB for the ICIC zone.
i i i i i
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
Where n PUSCH, PUCCH – 10 × Log N FB
i i
corresponds to the uplink noise over 1 frequency block.
Next, the maximum allowed transmission power for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is
calculated as follows:
Mi Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
P Allowed = Min P Max, 10 × Log NFB + P O_PUSCH + α FPC × L Total
Once the maximum allowed power has been calculated, it is used as an upper limit for transmission power in all the remaining
calculations.
The received PUSCH and PUCCH signal level (dBm) from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at its serving cell TXi(ic) is calculated
as follows:
M M TX TX M M
i i i i i i
C PUSCH, PUCCH = EIRP PUSCH, PUCCH – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G Ant – L – L Ant – L Body + f CP
Where EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the terminal calculated as follows:
Mi Mi Mi Mi
EIRP PUSCH, PUCCH = P +G –L
Mi Mi Mi Mi
With P = P Allowed without power control adjustment at the start of the calculations, and is P = P Eff after power control
adjustment.
366
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
f CP is the cyclic prefix factor, i.e., the ratio of the useful symbol energy to the total symbol energy.
The total symbol duration of a modulation symbol comprises the useful symbol duration, carrying the actual data bits, and a
cyclic prefix, added to the useful data bits as padding against multi-path to avoid inter-symbol interference. Hence, the total
energy within a modulation symbol belongs in part to the useful data bits and in part to the cyclic prefix. Once a modulation
symbol is received, only the energy of the useful data bits can be used for extracting the data. The energy belonging to the
cyclic prefix is lost once it has served its purpose of combatting inter-symbol interference. Therefore, f CP implies that the
energy belonging to the cyclic prefix is excluded from the useful signal level.
The cyclic prefix energy and the useful data bits energy are both taken into account when calculating interfering signal levels.
Output
Mi
• C PUSCH, PUCCH : Received PUSCH and PUCCH signal level from the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at a cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• P Allowed : Maximum allowed transmission power for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Input
• K: Boltzmann’s constant.
• T: Temperature in Kelvin.
• W FB : Width of a frequency block in the frequency domain (180 kHz).
TX i ( ic )
• N FB : Number of frequency blocks, defined in the frequency bands table, for the channel bandwidth used by the
cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• nf : Noise figure of the cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
The thermal noise for the PUSCH and the PUCCH is calculated as:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
n 0 – PUSCH, PUCCH = n 0 + 10 × Log N FB × W FB × 1000
The uplink noise is the sum of the thermal noise and the noise figure of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
n PUSCH, PUCCH = n 0 – PUSCH, PUCCH + nf
Output
TX i ( ic )
• n PUSCH, PUCCH : Uplink noise for the PUSCH and the PUCCH for the cell TXi(ic).
367
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
The interference received by a cell TXi(ic) from an interfering mobile covered by a cell TXj(jc) can be defined as the PUSCH and
PUCCH signal level received from the interfering mobile Mj depending on the overlap that exists between the channels used
by the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) and on the traffic load of the interfering mobile Mj.
The calculation of uplink interference can be divided into two parts:
• Calculation of the uplink interference from each individual interfering mobile as explained in "Interfering Signal Level
Calculation (UL)" on page 368.
• Calculation of the uplink noise rise which represents the total uplink interference from all interfering mobiles as
explained in "Noise Rise Calculation (UL)" on page 369.
TX i ( ic )
• N FB : Number of frequency blocks, defined in the frequency bands table, for the channel bandwidth used by the
cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• N FB – CE : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks (used in cell-edge areas in case of ICIC), determined from the list of
frequency blocks corresponding to the cell’s PSS ID (0, 1, or 2) defined in the ICIC configuration assigned to the cell
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) N FB
TXi(ic). By default (if no ICIC configuration is assigned to the cell), N FB – CE = ---------------- .
3
TX j ( jc )
• N FB – CE : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks (used in cell-edge areas in case of ICIC), determined from the list of
frequency blocks corresponding to the cell’s PSS ID (0, 1, or 2) defined in the ICIC configuration assigned to the cell
TX ( jc )
j
TX j ( jc ) N FB
TXj(jc). By default (if no ICIC configuration is assigned to the cell), N FB – CE -.
= ----------------
3
Mj
• C PUSCH, PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH signal level received at a cell TXi(ic) from an interfering mobile Mj covered by a cell
TXj(jc) as calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (UL)" on page 365.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
• M Shadowing – C ⁄ I : Shadowing margin based on the C/I standard deviation.
In Monte Carlo simulations, interfering signal levels already include M Shadowing – Model , as explained in "Signal Level
Calculation (UL)" on page 365.
In coverage predictions, the ratio M Shadowing – Model – M Shadowing – C ⁄ I is applied to the interfering signals (for more
information, see "Shadow Fading Model" on page 85). As the interfering signal levels already include
M Shadowing – Model , M Shadowing – C ⁄ I is added to the received interfering signal levels in order to achieve the ratio
M Shadowing – Model – M Shadowing – C ⁄ I :
Mj Mj
C PUSCH, PUCCH = C PUSCH, PUCCH + M Shadowing – C ⁄ I
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
• rO : Total channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co- and Adjacent
Channel Overlaps Calculation" on page 343.
Mj
• TL UL : Uplink traffic load of the interfering mobile Mj.
Traffic loads are calculated during Monte Carlo simulations as explained in "Scheduling and Radio Resource
Allocation" on page 389.
Calculations
The uplink interference received at a cell TXi(ic) from an interfering mobile Mj covered by a cell TXj(jc) is calculated as follows:
Mj Mj TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) Mj TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
I PUSCH, PUCCH = C PUSCH, PUCCH + f O + f TL – UL + f ICIC – UL
Mj
Where f TL – UL is an interference reduction factor due to the uplink traffic load of the interfering mobile Mj, calculated as
follows:
368
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
M M
f TL – UL = 10 × Log TL UL
j j
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
Calculations for the interference reduction factors due to channel overlapping ( f O ) and static uplink ICIC using
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
fractional frequency reuse ( f ICIC – UL ) are explained below:
Interference reduction due to the co- and adjacent channel overlap between the studied and the interfering cells:
Interference reduction due to the co- and adjacent channel overlap between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) is calculated
as follows:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
fO = 10 × Log r O
Interference reduction due to static uplink ICIC using fractional frequency reuse:
If the cell supports Static UL ICIC, it means that a part of the LTE frame may use a fraction of the channel bandwidth.
The interference reduction factor due to static uplink ICIC using fractional frequency reuse is calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
f ICIC – UL = 10 × Log p Collision
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
Where p Collision is the collision probability between the subcarriers used by the fractions of the channels being
used by the interfered and interfering cells. It is determined during Monte Carlo simulations as follows:
Common
N FB – CE
a ICIC ICIC ---------------------
TX i ( ic )
N FB – CE
TX i ( ic )
Common
Where, N FB – CE is the number of cell-edge frequency blocks common in TXi(ic) and TXj(jc), and N FB – CE is the
number of cell-edge frequency blocks in the cell TXi(ic).
Whether a pixel, subscriber, or mobile is covered by the ICIC part of the frame is determined as explained in "Best
Server Determination" on page 376.
In Monte Carlo simulations, Atoll calculates two separate noise rise values; for the mobiles located in the ICIC zone of
the interfered cell Atoll calculates the ICIC UL Noise Rise, and for the mobiles located in the non-ICIC zone of the
interfered cell Atoll calculates the UL Noise Rise.
In coverage predictions, point analysis, and calculations on subscriber lists, according to the zone, ICIC or non-ICIC,
that covers the pixel, receiver, or subscriber, Atoll uses either the ICIC UL Noise Rise or the UL Noise Rise to calculate
the PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N). For more information on the calculation of the uplink noise rise, see "Noise Rise
Calculation (UL)" on page 369.
Output
Mj
• I PUSCH, PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH interference signal level received at a cell TXi(ic) from an interfering mobile Mj
covered by a cell TXj(jc).
369
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
Input
M
j
• I PUSCH, PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH interference signal levels received at a cell TXi(ic) from interfering mobiles Mj
covered by other cells TXj(jc) as calculated in "Interfering Signal Level Calculation (UL)" on page 368.
TX ( ic )
i
• n PUSCH, PUCCH : Uplink noise for the PUSCH and the PUCCH for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Calculation (UL)"
on page 367.
Inter – Tech
• NRUL : Inter-technology uplink noise rise.
Calculations
For any mobile Mi covered by the non-ICIC zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates the UL Noise Rise as follows:
M
j
I PUSCH, PUCCH TX i ( ic )
∀ non-ICIC M i n PUSCH, PUCCH
TX ( ic ) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
- ------------------------------------------- TX ( ic )
= 10 × Log + NR Inter – Tech – n i
i 10 10
NR UL 10 + 10 UL PUSCH, PUCCH
All M j
All TXj ( jc )
For any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the non-ICIC zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates the PUSCH
and PUCCH total noise (I+N) as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
( I + N ) PUSCH, PUCCH = NR UL + n PUSCH, PUCCH
For any mobile Mi covered by the ICIC zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates the ICIC UL Noise Rise as follows:
M
j
IPUSCH, PUCCH TX i ( ic )
∀ ICIC M i n PUSCH, PUCCH
TX i ( ic ) ------------------------------------------------------------------
- ------------------------------------------- TX ( ic )
= 10 × Log + NR Inter – Tech – n i
10 10
NR UL – ICIC
10 + 10 UL PUSCH, PUCCH
All Mj
All TXj ( jc )
For any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the ICIC zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates the the PUSCH
and PUCCH total noise (I+N) as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
( I + N ) PUSCH, PUCCH = NR UL – ICIC + n PUSCH, PUCCH
Output
TX i ( ic )
• NRUL : Uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• NRUL – ICIC : ICIC uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic).
TX ( ic )
i
• ( I + N ) PUSCH, PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH total noise for a cell TXi(ic) calculated for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• C PUSCH, PUCCH : Received PUSCH and PUCCH signal level from the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at its serving cell TXi(ic)
as calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (UL)" on page 365.
TX i ( ic )
• n PUSCH, PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH noise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Calculation (UL)" on page 367.
TX i ( ic )
• CNR DLRS : Downlink reference signal C/N from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in
"C/N Calculation (DL)" on page 358.
TX i ( ic )
• CINR DLRS : Downlink reference signal C/(I+N) from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated
in "C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (DL)" on page 360.
TX ( ic )
i
• T AMS : AMS threshold defined for the cell TXi(ic).
370
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( ic )
i
• N FB : Number of frequency blocks, defined in the frequency bands table, for the channel bandwidth used by the
cell TXi(ic).
TX ( ic )
i
• N FB – CE : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks (used in cell-edge areas in case of ICIC), determined from the list of
frequency blocks corresponding to the cell’s PSS ID (0, 1, or 2) defined in the ICIC configuration assigned to the cell
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) N FB
TXi(ic). By default (if no ICIC configuration is assigned to the cell), N FB – CE = ---------------- .
3
TX i ( ic )
• T B – Lowest : Bearer selection threshold of the lowest bearer in the LTE equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• P Allowed : Maximum allowed transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (UL)" on page 365.
Mi
• P Min : Minimum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
• M PC : Power control adjustment margin defined in the Global Parameters.
Mi
• T B : Bearer selection thresholds of the bearers defined in the LTE equipment used bythe cell TXi(ic).
M
i
• B UL – Highest ( Service ) : Highest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
Mi
• B UL – Lowest ( Service ) : Lowest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
Mi
• N Ant – TX : Number of transmission (uplink) antenna ports defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• N Ant – RX : Number of reception (uplink) antenna ports defined for the cell TXi(ic).
• Mobility ( M i ) : Mobility used for the calculations.
M
BLER B UL : Uplink block error rate read from the graphs available in the LTE equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
i
•
Calculations
The PUSCH and PUCCH C/N from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at its serving cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows:
Mi Mi TX i ( ic )
CNR PUSCH, PUCCH = C PUSCH, PUCCH – n PUSCH, PUCCH
Bearer Determination:
The bearers available for selection in the cell TXi(ic)’s LTE equipment are the ones:
• Which are common between Mi’s and TXi(ic)’s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
defined in both equipment), if the corresponding option has been set in the Atoll.ini file. For more information,
see the Administrator Manual.
• Whose indexes are within the range defined by the lowest and the highest bearer indexes defined for the service
being accessed by Mi.
Mi Mi
• Whose selection thresholds are less than the PUSCH and PUCCH C/N at Mi: T B < CNR PUSCH, PUCCH
UL
If the cell supports Receive Diversity or AMS, the Receive Diversity gain, G Div , corresponding to the bearer is
applied to its selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the LTE equipment assigned to the cell
M TX ( ic ) M
TXi(ic) for N Ant – TX , N Ant – RX , Mobility ( M i ) , BLER B UL .
i i i
UL
The additional uplink diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi ΔG Div is also
applied. Therefore, the bearers available for selection are all the bearers defined in the LTE equipment for which
the following is true:
In case of Receive Diversity:
Mi Mi
UL UL
T B – G Div – ΔG Div < CNR PUSCH, PUCCH
371
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
In case of AMS:
M M TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i UL UL i i i i i
T B – G Div – ΔG Div < CNR PUSCH, PUCCH if CNR DLRS < T AMS or CINRDLRS < T AMS
The bearer selected for data transfer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic).
• Bearer Index
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest index.
• Peak RLC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest uplink peak RLC
channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, and
Average User Throughput Calculation" on page 385.
• Effective RLC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest uplink effective
RLC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput,
and Average User Throughput Calculation" on page 385.
MIMO – Receive Diversity Gain:
Once the bearer is known, the PUSCH and PUCCH C/N calculated above become:
In case of Receive Diversity:
Mi Mi
UL UL
CNR PUSCH, PUCCH = CNR PUSCH, PUCCH + G Div + ΔG Div
In case of AMS:
Mi Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
UL UL
CNR PUSCH, PUCCH = CNR PUSCH, PUCCH + G Div + ΔG Div if CNR DLRS < T AMS or CINR DLRS < T AMS
UL
Where G Div is the receive diversity gain corresponding to the selected bearer.
372
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
M M N TX i ( ic )
10 × Log -----------------
-
i i FB
CNR PUSCH, PUCCH = CNR PUSCH, PUCCH + M
i
Final All FB
N FB – UL
M TX ( ic )
i i
Where N FB – UL < N FB for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the non-ICIC zone in the interfered cell
M TX ( ic )
TXi(ic), and N FB – UL < Cieling N FB – CE for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the ICIC zone in the
i i
interfered cell TXi(ic).
The pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi reduces its transmission power so that the PUSCH and PUCCH C/N from it at its cell
is just enough to get the selected bearer.
Mi Mi Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
If with P = P Allowed AND CNR PUSCH, PUCCH > T Mi + M PC , where T Mi is the bearer selection threshold, from
B UL B UL
the LTE equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic), for the bearer selected for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
The transmission power of Mi is reduced to determine the effective transmission power from the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi as follows:
Mi Mi Mi TXi ( ic ) Mi
P Eff = Max P Allowed – CNR PUSCH, PUCCH – T M + M PC , P Min
B i
UL
Mi Mi
CNR PUSCH, PUCCH is calculated again using P Eff .
Output
Mi
• CNR PUSCH, PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH C/N from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at it serving cell TXi(ic).
Input
Mi
• CNR PUSCH, PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH C/N from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at it serving cell TXi(ic) as calculated
in "C/N Calculation (UL)" on page 370.
TX i ( ic )
• NR UL : Uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Rise Calculation (UL)" on page 369.
TX i ( ic )
• NR UL – ICIC : ICIC uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Rise Calculation (UL)" on page 369.
TX i ( ic )
• CNR DLRS : Downlink reference signal C/N from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in
"C/N Calculation (DL)" on page 358.
TX i ( ic )
• CINR DLRS : Downlink reference signal C/(I+N) from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated
in "C/N Calculation (DL)" on page 358.
373
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic )
i
• T AMS : AMS threshold defined for the cell TXi(c).
TX ( ic )
i
• N FB : Number of frequency blocks, defined in the frequency bands table, for the channel bandwidth used by the
cell TXi(ic).
TX ( ic )
i
• N FB – CE : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks (used in cell-edge areas in case of ICIC), determined from the list of
frequency blocks corresponding to the cell’s PSS ID (0, 1, or 2) defined in the ICIC configuration assigned to the cell
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) N FB
TXi(ic). By default (if no ICIC configuration is assigned to the cell), N FB – CE = ---------------- .
3
TX i ( ic )
• T B – Lowest : Bearer selection threshold of the lowest bearer in the LTE equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• P Allowed : Maximum allowed transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (UL)" on page 365.
Mi
• P Min : Minimum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
• M PC : Power control adjustment margin defined in the Global Parameters.
M
i
• T B : Bearer selection thresholds of the bearers defined in the LTE equipment used bythe cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• B UL – Highest ( Service ) : Highest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
M
i
• B UL – Lowest ( Service ) : Lowest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
Mi
• N Ant – TX : Number of transmission (uplink) antenna ports defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• N Ant – RX : Number of reception (uplink) antenna ports defined for the cell TXi(ic).
• Mobility ( M i ) : Mobility used for the calculations.
M
BLER BUL : Uplink block error rate read from the graphs available in the LTE equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
i
•
Calculations
For any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the non-ICIC zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates the PUSCH
and PUCCH C/(I+N) as follows:
Mi Mi TX i ( ic )
CINR PUSCH, PUCCH = CNR PUSCH, PUCCH – NR UL
For any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the ICIC zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates the PUSCH and
PUCCH C/(I+N) as follows:
Mi Mi TX i ( ic )
CINR PUSCH, PUCCH = CNR PUSCH, PUCCH – NR UL – ICIC
Bearer Determination:
The bearers available for selection in the cell TXi(ic)’s LTE equipment are the ones:
• Which are common between Mi’s and TXi(ic)’s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
defined in both equipment), if the corresponding option has been set in the Atoll.ini file. For more information,
see the Administrator Manual.
• Whose indexes are within the range defined by the lowest and the highest bearer indexes defined for the service
being accessed by Mi.
Mi Mi
• Whose selection thresholds are less than the PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N) at Mi: T B < CINR PUSCH, PUCCH
UL
If the cell supports Receive Diversity or AMS, the Receive Diversity gain, G Div , corresponding to the bearer is
applied to its selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the LTE equipment assigned to the cell
M TX ( ic ) M
TXi(ic) for N Ant – TX , N Ant – RX , Mobility ( M i ) , BLER B UL .
i i i
374
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
UL
The additional uplink diversity gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi ΔG Div is also
applied. Therefore, the bearers available for selection are all the bearers defined in the LTE equipment for which
the following is true:
In case of Receive Diversity:
Mi Mi
UL UL
T B – G Div – ΔG Div < CINR PUSCH, PUCCH
In case of AMS:
Mi Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
UL UL
T B – G Div – ΔG Div < CINR PUSCH, PUCCH if CNR DLRS < T AMS or CINR DLRS < T AMS
The bearer selected for data transfer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic).
• Bearer Index
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest index.
• Peak RLC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest uplink peak RLC
channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, and
Average User Throughput Calculation" on page 385.
• Effective RLC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest uplink effective
RLC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, Allocated Bandwidth Throughput,
and Average User Throughput Calculation" on page 385.
MIMO – Receive Diversity Gain:
Once the bearer is known, the PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N) calculated above become:
In case of Receive Diversity:
Mi Mi
UL UL
CINR PUSCH, PUCCH = CINR PUSCH, PUCCH + G Div + ΔG Div
In case of AMS:
Mi Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
UL UL
CINR PUSCH, PUCCH = CINR PUSCH, PUCCH + G Div + ΔG Div if CNR DLRS < T AMS or CINR DLRS < T AMS
UL
Where G Div is the receive diversity gain corresponding to the selected bearer.
375
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
The definition of the best bearer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic),
i.e., bearer with the highest index, with the highest peak RLC throughput, or with the highest effective RLC
throughput.
The uplink bandwidth allocation may result in the use of a number of frequency blocks which is less than the number
of frequency blocks associated with the channel bandwidth of the cell. The gain related to this bandwidth reduction
is applied to the PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N):
Mi Mi N TX i ( ic )
= CINR PUSCH, PUCCH + 10 × Log -----------------
-
FB
CINR PUSCH, PUCCH
Mi
Final All FB
N FB – UL
Mi TX i ( ic )
Where N FB – UL < N FB for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the non-ICIC zone in the interfered cell
M TX ( ic )
TXi(ic), and N FB – UL < Cieling N FB – CE for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the ICIC zone in the
i i
The pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi reduces its transmission power so that the PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N) from it at its
cell is just enough to get the selected bearer.
M M M TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i i i
If with P = P Allowed AND CINR PUSCH, PUCCH > T M + M PC , where T M is the bearer selection threshold, from
i i
B UL B UL
the LTE equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic), for the bearer selected for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
The transmission power of Mi is reduced to determine the effective transmission power from the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi as follows:
Mi Mi Mi TXi ( ic ) Mi
P Eff = Max PAllowed – CINR PUSCH, PUCCH – T M + M PC , P Min
B i
UL
Mi Mi
CINR PUSCH, PUCCH is calculated again using P Eff .
Output
Mi
• CINR PUSCH, PUCCH : PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N) from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at it serving cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• N FB – UL : Number of frequency blocks used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi after uplink bandwidth allocation.
M
i
• P Eff : Effective transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• B UL : Bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the uplink.
Input
TX i ( ic )
• C DLRS : Downlink reference signal level received from any cell TXi(ic) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated
Mi Mi Mi Mi
in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347 using the terminal and service parameters ( L ,G , L Ant , and L Body )
of Mi.
376
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
Calculations
The best server of any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi, BSM , is the cell from which the received downlink reference signal level
i
is the highest among the downlink reference signal levels received from all the cells. The best server is determined as follows:
BSM = TX i ( ic )
i TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
C DLRS = Best C
All TX i ( ic ) DLRS
Here ic is the cell of the transmitter TXi with the highest downlink reference signal power. However, if more than one cell of
the same transmitter covers the pixel, subscriber, or mobile, the final reference cell ic might be different from the initial cell
ic (the one with the highest power) depending on the serving cell selection method:
• Random: In coverage prediction calculations and in calculations on subsriber lists, the cell of the lowest layer is
selected as the serving (reference) cell. In Monte Carlo simulations, a random cell is selected as the serving (reference)
cell.
• Distributive: In coverage prediction calculations and in calculations on subsriber lists, the cell of the lowest layer is
selected as the serving (reference) cell. In Monte Carlo simulations, mobiles are distributed among cell layers one by
one, i.e., if more than one cell layer covers a set of mobiles, the first mobile is assigned to the lowest cell layer, the
2nd mobile to the second lowest cell layer, and so on.
When using either the Random or the Distributive cell selection method, the reference cell once assigned to a mobile
does not change during Monte Carlo simulations.
In case the cell supports static downlink ICIC using fractional frequency reuse, Atoll determines whether the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi is covered by the ICIC part of the frame or by the non-ICIC part of the frame. A pixel, subscriber, or mobile is
covered by the ICIC part of the frame if it is considered to be at the cell edge, and it is covered by the non-ICIC part otherwise.
Whether a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is at cell edge is determined by calculating the difference between the path loss
from the second best server and the best server, and comparing it with the delta path loss threshold defined for the best
server of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Therefore, a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is considered to be a cell edge if
2ndBS M BS M – 2ndBS M BS M BS M BS M
Log r O
i i i i i i
L Total + 10 × – L Total ≤ ΔL Path , and it is considered to be not at cell edge otherwise. Here, L Total is the
2ndBS M
i
total loss from Mi’s best server and L Total is the total loss from Mi’s second best server calculated as explained in "Signal
Level Calculation (DL)" on page 308. The second best server for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
2ndBS M = TX i ( ic )
i TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
C = 2ndBest C
DLRS All TX ( ic ) DLRS
i
BSM – 2ndBS M
i i
rO is the total channel overlap ratio between the best server and the second best server as calculated in "Co- and
BS M
i
Adjacent Channel Overlaps Calculation" on page 343. ΔL Path is the delta path loss threshold defined for the best server of
the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Output
Input
TX ( ic )
i
• E DLRS : Downlink reference signal energy per resource element from the cell TXi(ic) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi as calculated in "Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 347.
TX i ( ic )
• T RSRP : Minimum RSRP defined for the cell TXi(ic).
377
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
Calculations
A pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is within the service area of its best serving cell TXi(ic) if:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i
E DLRS ≥ T RSRP
Output
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Configuration N SF – DL N TDD – SSF
FDD 10 0
DSUUU-DSUUU 2 2
DSUUD-DSUUD 4 2
DSUDD-DSUDD 6 2
DSUUU-DSUUD 3 2
DSUUU-DDDDD 6 1
378
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
Configuration i i
N SF – DL N TDD – SSF
DSUUD-DDDDD 7 1
DSUDD-DDDDD 8 1
TX i ( ic )
• N Ant – TX : Number of transmission (downlink) antenna ports defined for the cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
In LTE, a resource block (RB) is defined as 1 frequency block by 1 slot. However, schedulers are able to perform resource
allocation every subframe (2 slots). 1 frequency block by 1 subframe (2 slots) is called a scheduler resource block (SRB) in the
calculations below.
The number of modulation symbols (resource elements) per scheduler resource block is calculated as follows:
N Sym ⁄ SRB = N SCa – FB × N SD ⁄ Slot × N Slot ⁄ SF
Where N SCa – FB is the number of subcarriers per frequency block calculated as follows:
W FB
N SCa – FB = ---------
-
ΔF
The number of modulation symbols (resource elements) corresponding to the DwPTS per scheduler resource block in the TDD
special subframes is calculated as follows:
DwPTS DwPTS
N Sym ⁄ SSF = N SCa – FB × N SD ⁄ SSF
DwPTS
Where N SD ⁄ SSF is the number of DwPTS symbol durations (OFDM symbols) per special subframe, determined from the TDD
special subframe configuration according to the 3GPP specifications as follows:
0 3 10 3 8
1 9 4 8 3
1
2 10 3 1 9 2
3 11 2 10 1
4 12 1 3 7
5 3 9 8 2 2
6 9 3 9 1
2
7 10 2
8 11 1
The total number of modulation symbols (resource elements) in downlink is calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
DwPTS
N Sym – DL = N FB × N Sym ⁄ SRB × N SF – DL + N FB × N TDD – SSF × N Sym ⁄ SSF
TX i ( ic )
The total downlink cell resources, i.e., R DL , are calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
R DL = N Sym – DL – O DLRS – O PSS – O SSS – O PBCH – O PDCCH – O UERS
TX i ( ic )
Where O DLRS is the overhead corresponding to the downlink reference signals, O PSS is the overhead corresponding to the
TX i ( ic )
primary synchronisation signals, O SSS is the overhead corresponding to the secondary synchronisation signals, O PBCH is the
TX i ( ic )
overhead corresponding to the physical broadcast channel, and O PDCCH is the overhead corresponding to the physical
TX i ( ic )
downlink control channel. O UERS is the overhead corresponding to the UE-specific reference signals transmitted on the
logical antenna port 5 when a user is served using smart antennas.
379
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic ) N TXi ( ic ) TX ( ic )
N DLRS ⁄ DwPTS
i
TX ( ic )
i
O DLRS DLRS ⁄ SRB
= ------------------------ + -----------------------------
i
- × N Sym
N Sym ⁄ SRB DwPTS – DL
N Sym ⁄ SSF
TX ( ic )
if N Ant – TX = 1
i
8
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic )
Where N DLRS ⁄ SRB = 16 if N Ant – TX = 2
i
TX ( ic )
if N Ant – TX = 4 or 8
i
24
TX i ( ic )
And N DLRS ⁄ DwPTS is determined from the table below:
1 2 1 2
2 4 2 4
0 3 3
4 8 4 8
8 8 8 8
1 6 1 6
2 12 2 12
1 9 8
4 20 4 20
8 20 8 20
1 6 1 6
2 12 2 12
2 10 9
4 20 4 20
8 20 8 20
1 6 1 8
2 12 2 16
3 11 10
4 20 4 24
8 20 8 24
1 8 1 2
2 16 2 4
4 12 3
4 24 4 8
8 24 8 8
1 2 1 6
2 4 2 12
5 3 8
4 8 4 20
8 8 8 20
1 6 1 6
2 12 2 12
6 9 9
4 20 4 20
8 20 8 20
380
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
1 6
2 12
7 10
4 20
8 20
1 6
2 12
8 11
4 20
8 20
PBCH overhead
The physical broadcast channel is transmitted on four symbol durations in the 1st downlink subframe over the center
6 frequency blocks. The physical broadcast channel overlaps with the downlink reference signals, therefore, some
downlink reference signal modulation symbols are subtracted:
TX ( ic )
i
TX i ( ic ) N DLRS ⁄ SRB
O PBCH = 4 × N SCa – FB – -----------------------
- × N FB – SS, PBCH for extended cyclic prefix
2
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
O PBCH = 4 × N SCa – FB – 2 × N Ant – TX × N FB – SS, PBCH for normal cyclic prefix
i i
PDCCH overhead
The physical downlink control channel can be transmitted over up to 3 symbol durations in each subframe. The
number of symbol durations for the PDCCH is defined in the global parameters. The PDCCH overlaps some downlink
reference signal symbols. These downlink reference signal symbols are subtracted from the PDCCH overhead:
if ( N SD – PDCCH = 0 ) :
TX i ( ic )
O PDCCH = 0
TX ( ic )
if ( N SD – PDCCH = 1 ) AND N Ant – TX = 4 or 8 :
i
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
N × N SCa – FB – N Ant – TX × N FB
i i
× N SF – DL
TX i ( ic ) SD – PDCCH
O PDCCH =
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
+ N SD – PDCCH × N SCa – FB – N Ant – TX × N FB
i i i
× N TDD – SSF
Otherwise:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
N × N SCa – FB – 2 × N Ant – TX × N FB
i i
× N SF – DL
TX i ( ic ) SD – PDCCH
O PDCCH =
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
+ Min ( 2, N SD – PDCCH ) × N SCa – FB – 2 × N Ant – TX × N FB
i i i
× N TDD – SSF
381
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i
With smart antennas: O UERS = 12 × N FB × N SF – DL
TX ( ic )
i
Without smart antennas: O UERS = 0
Output
TX i ( ic )
• R DL : Amount of downlink resources in the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Configuration N SF – UL N TDD – SSF
FDD 10 0
DSUUU-DSUUU 6 2
DSUUD-DSUUD 4 2
DSUDD-DSUDD 2 2
DSUUU-DSUUD 5 2
DSUUU-DDDDD 3 1
DSUUD-DDDDD 2 1
DSUDD-DDDDD 1 1
UpPTS is used for SRS (sounding reference signals) if the UpPTS duration is 1 OFDM
symbol, and for SRS and PRACH if the UpPTS duration is 2 OFDM symbols. Therefore, the
uplink cell capacity can be determined without considering the UpPTS symbols.
Calculations
In LTE, a resource block (RB) is defined as 1 frequency block by 1 slot. However, schedulers are able to perform resource
allocation every subframe (2 slots). 1 frequency block by 1 subframe (2 slots) is called a scheduler resource block (SRB) in the
calculations below.
The number of modulation symbols (resource elements) per resource block is calculated as follows:
N Sym ⁄ SRB = N SCa – FB × N SD ⁄ Slot × N Slot ⁄ SF
Where N SCa – FB is the number of subcarriers per frequency block calculated as follows:
382
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
W FB
N SCa – FB = ---------
-
ΔF
The total number of modulation symbols (resource elements) in uplink is calculated as follows:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
N Sym – UL = N FB – N FB – PUCCH × N Sym ⁄ SRB × N SF – UL
i i i
TX i ( ic )
The total uplink cell resources, i.e., R UL , are calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
R UL = N Sym – UL – O ULSRS – O ULDRS
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Where O ULSRS is the overhead corresponding to the uplink sounding reference signals, and O ULDRS is the overhead
corresponding to the uplink demodulation reference signals. These control channel overheads are calculated as follows:
Calculations of uplink control channel overheads
The uplink sounding reference signals are transmitted on 1 symbol duration in each uplink subframe. Therefore,
TX i ( ic ) N SCa – FB TX i ( ic )
- × N Sym
O ULSRS = --------------------- – UL
N Sym ⁄ SRB
The uplink demodulation reference signals are transmitted on two symbol durations in each uplink subframe.
Therefore,
TX i ( ic ) N SCa – FB TX i ( ic )
O ULDRS = 2 × ---------------------
- × N Sym – UL
N Sym ⁄ SRB
Output
TX i ( ic )
• R UL : Amount of uplink resources in the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Configuration N SF – DL N TDD – SSF
FDD 10 0
DSUUU-DSUUU 2 2
DSUUD-DSUUD 4 2
DSUDD-DSUDD 6 2
DSUUU-DSUUD 3 2
383
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
Configuration i i
N SF – DL N TDD – SSF
DSUUU-DDDDD 6 1
DSUUD-DDDDD 7 1
DSUDD-DDDDD 8 1
Calculations
In LTE, the maximum throughput that can be supported by a user equipment is defined through its UE category parameter
Transport Block Size. This is the maximum number of transport block bits that the UE can carry per subframe.
The downlink UE capacity in terms of the maximum throughput supported by a UE in downlink is calculated as follows:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
N i i
Max Max – DL SF – DL + N TDD – SSF
TP UE – DL = N TBB ⁄ TTI × ----------------------------------------------------
D Frame
The maximum transport block sizes defined by the 3GPP for different UE categories correspond to the following maximum
throughput capacities in FDD:
UE Category 1 2 3 4 5
Max – DL
N TBB ⁄ TTI (bits/TTI) 10296 51024 102048 150752 299552
Max
TP UE – DL (Mbps) 10.296 51.024 102.048 150.752 299.552
Output
Max
• TP UE – DL : Maximum downlink throughput capacity of a UE category.
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Configuration N SF – UL N TDD – SSF
FDD 10 0
DSUUU-DSUUU 6 2
DSUUD-DSUUD 4 2
DSUDD-DSUDD 2 2
DSUUU-DSUUD 5 2
DSUUU-DDDDD 3 1
DSUUD-DDDDD 2 1
DSUDD-DDDDD 1 1
Calculations
In LTE, the maximum throughput that can be supported by a user equipment is defined through its UE category parameter
Transport Block Size. This is the maximum number of transport block bits that the UE can carry per subframe.
384
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
The uplink UE capacity in terms of the maximum throughput supported by a UE in uplink is calculated as follows:
TX ( ic )
i
Max Max – UL N SF – UL
TP UE – UL = N TBB ⁄ TTI × -----------------
D Frame
The maximum transport block sizes defined by the 3GPP for different UE categories correspond to the following maximum
throughput capacities in FDD:
UE Category 1 2 3 4 5
Max – UL
N TBB ⁄ TTI (bits/TTI) 5160 25456 51024 51024 75376
Max
TP UE – UL (Mbps) 5.16 25.456 51.024 51.024 75.376
Output
Max
• TP UE – UL : Maximum uplink throughput capacity of a UE category.
Input
TX ( ic )
i
• TL DL – Max : Maximum downlink traffic load for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• TL UL – Max : Maximum uplink traffic load for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• R DL : Amount of downlink resources in the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Total Cell Resources" on
page 378.
TX i ( ic )
• R UL : Amount of uplink resources in the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Total Cell Resources" on
page 378.
• η M : Bearer efficiency (bits/symbol) of the bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the downlink in
i
B DL
385
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
M
i
• f TP – Scaling : Throughput scaling factor defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi.
M
i
• TP Offset : Throughput offset defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ( ic )
i
• N FB : Number of frequency blocks, defined in the frequency bands table, for the channel bandwidth used by the
cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• N FB – UL : Number of frequency blocks used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi after uplink bandwidth allocation as
calculated in "C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (UL)" on page 373.
TX i ( ic )
• N FB – CE : Number of cell-edge frequency blocks (used in cell-edge areas in case of ICIC), determined from the list of
frequency blocks corresponding to the cell’s PSS ID (0, 1, or 2) defined in the ICIC configuration assigned to the cell
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) N FB
TXi(ic). By default (if no ICIC configuration is assigned to the cell), N FB – CE = ---------------- .
3
TX i ( ic )
• N Users – DL : Number of users connected to the cell TXi(ic) in downlink.
TX i ( ic )
• N Users – UL : Number of users connected to the cell TXi(ic) in uplink.
Calculations
Downlink:
TX ( ic )
i
R DL ×η M
i
Mi B DL
• Peak RLC Channel Throughput: CTP P – DL = ---------------------------------
D Frame
In the above formula, the actual value of D Frame is used to calculate the channel throughput for coverage predictions,
while D Frame = 1 sec for Monte Carlo simulations.
TX i ( ic )
• N Ant – TX : Number of transmission (downlink) antenna ports defined for the cell TXi(ic).
M
i
• N Ant – RX : Number of reception (downlink) antenna ports defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
• Mobility ( M i ) : Mobility used for the calculations.
M
i
• B DL : Bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the downlink as explained in "C/(I+N) and Bearer
Calculation (DL)" on page 360.
M
BLER B DL : Downlink block error rate read from the graphs available in the LTE equipment assigned to the
i
•
TX ( ic )
i
terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi. BLER is determined for CINR PDSCH .
Atoll also takes into account the SU-MIMO Gain Factor f SU – MIMO defined for the clutter class where the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi is located.
386
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
Max
In case of SU-MIMO: η M = η M × ( 1 + f SU – MIMO ( G SU – MIMO – 1 ) )
i i
B B
DL DL
In case of AMS:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
Max i i i i
η M = η M × ( 1 + f SU – MIMO ( G SU – MIMO – 1 ) ) if CNR DLRS > T AMS or CINRDLRS > T AMS
i i
B DL B DL
If the Max SU-MIMO Gain for the exact value of the C/(I+N) is not availabe in the table, it is interpolated from the gain
values available for the C/(I+N) just less than and just greater than the actual C/(I+N).
M M M
Effective RLC Channel Throughput: CTP E – DL = CTP P – DL × 1 – BLER B DL
i i i
•
Mi
Mi f TP – Scaling
Mi Mi
• Application Channel Throughput: CTP A – DL = CTP E – DL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Mi Mi TX i ( ic )
• Peak RLC Cell Capacity: Cap P – DL = CTP P – DL × TL DL – Max
M M M
Effective RLC Cell Capacity: Cap E – DL = Cap P – DL × 1 – BLER B DL
i i i
•
Mi
Mi Mif TP – Scaling Mi
• Application RLC Capacity: Cap A – DL = Cap E – DL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Mi
Mi Cap P – DL
• Peak RLC Throughput Averaged per User: AUTPP – DL = -----------------------
TX i ( ic )
-
N Users – DL
Mi
M
i Cap E – DL
• Effective RLC Throughput Averaged per User: AUTP E – DL = -----------------------
TX i ( ic )
-
N Users – DL
Mi
i
M
i
M f TP – Scaling M
i
• Application Throughput Averaged per User: AUTPA – DL = AUTP E – DL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Uplink:
TX i ( ic )
R UL ×η M
i
Mi B UL
• Peak RLC Channel Throughput: CTP P – UL = ---------------------------------
D Frame
In the above formula, the actual value of D Frame is used to calculate the channel throughput for coverage predictions,
while D Frame = 1 sec for Monte Carlo simulations.
M
i
• N Ant – TX : Number of transmission (uplink) antenna ports defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• N Ant – RX : Number of reception (uplink) antenna ports defined for the cell TXi(ic).
• Mobility ( M i ) : Mobility used for the calculations.
Mi
• B UL : Bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the uplink as explained in "C/(I+N) and Bearer
Calculation (UL)" on page 373.
M
BLER B UL : Uplink block error rate read from the graphs available in the LTE equipment assigned to the cell
i
•
Mi
TXi(ic). BLER is determined for CINR PUSCH, PUCCH .
Atoll also takes into account the SU-MIMO Gain Factor f SU – MIMO defined for the clutter class where the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi is located.
387
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
Max
In case of SU-MIMO: η M = η M × ( 1 + fSU – MIMO ( G SU – MIMO – 1 ) )
i i
B B
UL UL
In case of AMS:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
Max i i i i
η M = η M × ( 1 + f SU – MIMO ( G SU – MIMO – 1 ) ) if CNR DLRS > T AMS or CINR DLRS > T AMS
i i
B UL B UL
If the Max SU-MIMO Gain for the exact value of the C/(I+N) is not availabe in the table, it is interpolated from the gain
values available for the C/(I+N) just less than and just greater than the actual C/(I+N).
MIMO – MU-MIMO Gain (for uplink throughput coverage predictions only):
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i i
If the cell supports MU-MIMO and CNR DLRS > T MU – MIMO and N Ant – RX ≥ 2 , the MU-MIMO gain G MU – MIMO is
applied to the channel throughput. The MU-MIMO gain is read from the properties of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
R UL ×η Mi
Mi B UL TX ( ic )
i
CTP P – UL = --------------------------------- × G MU – MIMO
D Frame
M M M
Effective RLC Channel Throughput: CTP E – UL = CTP P – UL × 1 – BLER B UL
i i i
•
Mi
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
• Application Channel Throughput: CTP A – UL = CTP E – UL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Mi Mi TX i ( ic )
• Peak RLC Cell Capacity: Cap P – UL = CTP P – UL × TL UL – Max
M M M
Effective RLC Cell Capacity: Cap E – UL = Cap P – UL × 1 – BLER B UL
i i i
•
Mi
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
• Application Cell Capacity: Cap A – UL = Cap E – UL × ------------------------
- – TPOffset
100
Mi
Mi Mi N FB – UL
• Peak RLC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput: ABTP P – UL = CTP P – UL × -----------------
TX i ( ic )
-
N FB
M M M
Effective RLC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput: ABTP E – UL = ABTP P – UL × 1 – BLER B UL
i i i
•
Mi
Mi f TP – Scaling
Mi Mi
• Application Allocated Bandwidth Throughput: ABTP A – UL = ABTP E – UL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Mi
Mi ABTP P – UL
• Peak RLC Throughput Averaged per User: AUTP P – UL = ------------------------
TX i ( ic )
-
N Users – UL
M
i
Mi ABTP E – UL
• Effective RLC Throughput Averaged per User: AUTP E – UL = ------------------------
TX i ( ic )
-
N Users – UL
M
i
Mi f TP – Scaling
Mi Mi
• Application Throughput Averaged per User: AUTP A – UL = AUTP E – UL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Output
Mi
• CTP P – DL : Downlink peak RLC channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP E – DL : Downlink effective RLC channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP A – DL : Downlink application channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• Cap P – DL : Downlink peak RLC cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• Cap E – DL : Downlink effective RLC cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
388
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
M
i
• Cap A – DL : Downlink application cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• AUTP P – DL : Downlink peak RLC throughput averaged per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• AUTP E – DL : Downlink effective RLC throughput averaged per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• AUTP A – DL : Downlink application throughput averaged per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP P – UL : Uplink peak RLC channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP E – UL : Uplink effective RLC channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP A – UL : Uplink application channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• Cap P – UL : Uplink peak RLC cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• Cap E – UL : Uplink effective RLC cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• Cap A – UL : Uplink application cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• ABTP P – UL : Uplink peak RLC allocated bandwidth throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• ABTP E – UL : Uplink effective RLC allocated bandwidth throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• ABTP A – UL : Uplink application allocated bandwidth throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• AUTP P – UL : Uplink peak RLC throughput averaged per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• AUTP E – UL : Uplink effective RLC throughput averaged per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• AUTP A – UL : Uplink application throughput averaged per user at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• TL DL – Max : Maximum downlink traffic load for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• TL UL – Max : Maximum uplink traffic load for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• N Users – Max : Maximum number of users defined for the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• p : Priority of the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
Mi
• TPD Min – DL : Downlink minimum throughput demand for the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
M
i
• TPD Min – UL : Uplink minimum throughput demand for the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
Mi
• TPD Max – DL : Downlink maximum throughput demand for the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
Mi
• TPD Max – UL : Uplink maximum throughput demand for the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
M TX ( ic )
BLER B DL : Downlink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR PDSCH graph available in the LTE equipment
i i
•
assigned to the terminal used by the mobile Mi.
389
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
M M
BLER BUL : Uplink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR PUSCH, PUCCH graph available in the LTE equipment
i i
•
assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
M
i
• f TP – Scaling : Throughput scaling factor defined in the properties of the service used by the mobile Mi.
Mi
• TP Offset : Throughput offset defined in the properties of the service used by the mobile Mi.
M
i
• CTP P – DL : Downlink peak RLC channel throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 378.
M
i
• CTP P – UL : Uplink peak RLC channel throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 378.
Mi
• ABTP P – UL : Uplink peak RLC allocated bandwidth throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput
Calculation" on page 378.
Max
• TP UE – DL : Maximum downlink throughput capacity of the UE category of the mobile Mi as calculated in "Calculation
of Downlink UE Capacity" on page 383.
Max
• TP UE – UL : Maximum uplink throughput capacity of the UE category of the mobile Mi as calculated in "Calculation of
Uplink UE Capacity" on page 384.
Calculations
The following calculations are described for any cell TXi(ic) containing the users Mi for which it is the best server.
Mobile Selection:
TX i ( ic )
The scheduler selects N Users mobiles for the scheduling and RRM process. If the Monte Carlo user distribution has generated
TX i ( ic )
a number of users which is less than N Users – Max , the scheduler keeps all the mobiles generated for the cell TXi(ic).
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
N Users = Min N Users – Max, N Users – Generated
i i i
TX i ( ic )
Sel
For a cell, mobiles M i ∈ N Users are selected for RRM by the scheduler.
Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi
Uplink: TPD Min – UL , Min TPD Max – UL, ABTP P – UL
Sel
Sel Mi Mi
Sel i
M Sel Min TPD Max – UL, ABTP P – UL
Mi TPD Min – UL Mi
Uplink: TPD Min – UL = ---------------------------------------------- , TPD Max – UL = -------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
1 – BLER B UL 1 – BLER B UL
390
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
Sel Sel
Sel M M Sel M M
i i i i
i
M TPD Min – DL + TP Offset i
M TPD Max – DL + TP Offset
Downlink: TPD Min – DL = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ , TPD Max – DL = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi Mi
1 – BLER B DL × f TP – Scaling 1 – BLER B DL × f TP – Scaling
Sel
Sel Mi Mi
Mi TPD Min – UL + TP Offset
Uplink: TPD Min – UL = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-,
Sel
Mi Mi
1 – BLER BUL × f TP – Scaling
Sel
M
i
M
i
M
i
Sel Min TPD Max – UL, ABTP P – UL + TP Offset
Mi
TPD Max–UL = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sel
Mi Mi
1 – BLER B UL × f TP – Scaling
The Min() function selects the lower of the two values. This calculation is performed in order to limit the maximum uplink
throughput demand to the maximum throughput that a user can get in uplink using the allocated bandwidth (number of
frequency blocks) calculated for it in "C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (UL)" on page 373.
Resource Allocation for Minimum Throughput Demands:
Sel
TX ( ic ) M
Sel i i
1. Atoll sorts the M i ∈ N Users in order of decreasing service priority, p .
TX ( ic )
Sel Sel i
2. Starting with M i = 1 up to M i = N Users , Atoll allocates the downlink and uplink resources required to satisfy
each user’s minimum throughput demands in downlink and uplink as follows:
Sel Sel
Sel Mi Sel Mi
Mi TPD Min – DL Mi TPD Min – UL
R Min – DL Sel
- and R Min
= -------------------------- – UL = --------------------------
Sel
-
Mi Mi
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
6. Mobiles which are active UL and whose minimum throughput demand in UL is higher than the uplink allocated
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
bandwidth throughput ( TPD Min – UL > ABTP P – UL ) are rejected due to Resource Saturation.
391
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
Sel Sel
M TX ( ic ) M TX ( ic )
i i i i
7. If R Min – DL < TL DL – Max or R Min – UL < TL UL – Max , and all the minimum throughput resources demanded by
Sel Sel
M M
i i
the mobiles have been allocated, Atoll goes to the next step for allocating resources to satisfy the maximum
throughput demands.
The remaining cell resources available for the next step are:
Sel
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi
Downlink: R Rem – DL = TL DL – Max – R Min – DL
Sel
Mi
Sel
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi
Uplink: R Rem – UL = TL UL – Max – R Min – UL
Sel
M
i
For the remaining throughput demands of the mobiles, the following resource allocation methods are available:
1. Proportional Fair:
The goal of this scheduling method is to distribute resources among users fairly in such a way that, on the average,
each user gets the highest possible throughput that it can get under the radio conditions at its location.
Sel
Let the total number of users be N ∈ M i .
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
a. Each user’s channel throughput is increased by the multi-user diversity gain G MUG – DL or G MUG – UL read from the
Sel
scheduler properties for the Mobility ( M i ) assigned to mobile M i and the number of connected users, DL or
UL, in the cell TXi(ic) in the iteration k-1.
Sel Sel Sel Sel
Mi Mi TX i ( ic ) Mi Mi TX i ( ic )
CTP P – DL = CTP P – DL × G MUG – DL and CTP P – UL = CTP P – UL × G MUG – UL
Without MUG Without MUG
Sel Sel
TX i ( ic ) Mi TX i ( ic ) Mi
Max Max
G MUG – DL = 1 if CINR PDSCH ≥ CINR MUG and G MUG – UL = 1 if CINR PUSCH, PUCCH ≥ CINR MUG .
If the multi-user diversity gain for the exact value of the number of connected users is not availabe in the graph,
it is interpolated from the gain values available for the numbers of users just less than and just greater than the
actual number of users.
b. Atoll divides the remaining resources in the cell into equal parts for each user:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
R Rem – DL R Rem – UL
--------------------- and --------------------
-
N N
c. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel Sel
Sel Mi Sel Mi
Mi TPD Rem – DL Mi TPD Rem – UL
RD Rem – DL Sel
- and RD Rem
= --------------------------- – UL = ---------------------------
Sel
-
Mi Mi
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
Remaining resource demands of a user are given by the ratio between its remaining throughput demands and the
peak channel throughputs at the user’s location.
392
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
d. The resources allocated to each user by the Proportional Fair scheduling method for satisfying its maximum
throughput demands are:
Each user gets either the resources it needs to achieve its maximum throughput demands or an equal share from
the remaining resources of the cell, whichever is smaller.
e. Atoll stops the resource allocation in downlink or uplink,
Sel
M TX ( ic )
i i
• When/If in downlink R Max – DL = R Rem – DL , i.e., the resources available in downlink have been used up
Sel
Mi
Sel Sel
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) M M
i i i i
R Rem – UL = TL UL – Max – R Min – UL – R Max – UL
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
h. Atoll repeats the all the above steps for the users whose maximum throughput demands have not been satisfied
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
until either R Rem – DL = 0 and R Rem – UL = 0 , or all the maximum throughput demands are satisfied.
2. Round Robin:
The goal of this scheduling method is to allocate equal resources to users fairly.
Sel
Let the total number of users be N ∈ M i .
a. Atoll divides the remaining resources in the cell into equal parts for each user:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
R Rem – DL R Rem – UL
--------------------- and --------------------
-
N N
b. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel Sel
Sel Mi Sel Mi
Mi TPD Rem – DL Mi TPD Rem – UL
RD Rem – DL Sel
- and RD Rem
= --------------------------- – UL = ---------------------------
Sel
-
Mi Mi
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
Remaining resource demands of a user are given by the ratio between its remaining throughput demands and the
peak channel throughputs at the user’s location.
c. The resources allocated to each user by the Round Robin scheduling method for satisfying its maximum
throughput demands are:
Each user gets either the resources it needs to achieve its maximum throughput demands or an equal share from
the remaining resources of the cell, whichever is smaller.
393
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
Sel Sel
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi Mi
R Rem – UL = TL UL – Max – R Min – UL – R Max – UL
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
g. Atoll repeats the all the above steps for the users whose maximum throughput demands have not been satisfied
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
until either R Rem – DL = 0 and R Rem – UL = 0 , or all the maximum throughput demands are satisfied.
3. Proportional Demand:
The goal of this scheduling method is to allocate resources to users weighted according to their remaining throughput
demands. Therefore, the user throughputs for users with high throughput demands will be higher than those with low
throughput demands. In other words, this scheduler distributes channel throughput between users proportionally to
their demands.
a. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel Sel
Sel M Sel M
i i
Mi TPD Rem – DL Mi TPD Rem – UL
RD Rem – DL Sel
- and RD Rem
= --------------------------- – UL = ---------------------------
Sel
-
M M
i i
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
Remaining resource demands of a user are given by the ratio between its remaining throughput demands and the
peak channel throughputs at the user’s location.
b. Atoll calculates the amount of effective remaining resources of the cell to distribute among the users as follows:
Sel Sel
TX i ( ic ) TXi ( ic ) Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi
R Eff – Rem – DL = Min R Rem – DL,
RD Rem – DL and R Eff – Rem – UL = Min R Rem – UL,
RD Rem – UL
Sel
Mi Sel
Mi
c. The resources allocated to each user by the Proportional Demand scheduling method for satisfying its maximum
throughput demands are:
Sel Sel
Sel Mi Sel Mi
M TX ( ic ) RD Rem – DL M TX ( ic ) RD Rem – UL
i i i i
R Max – DL = R Eff – Rem – DL × ----------------------------------
Sel
- and R Max – UL = R Eff – Rem – UL × ----------------------------------
Sel
-
Mi Mi
RDRem – DL RDRem – UL
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
4. Max C/I:
The goal of this scheduling method is to achieve the maximum aggregate throughput for the cells. This is done by
allocating as much resources as needed to mobiles with high C/(I+N) conditions. As mobiles with high C/(I+N) can get
394
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
higher bearers, and therefore require less amount of resources, more mobiles can therefore be allocated resources
in the same frame, and the end-throughput for each cell will be the highest compared to other types of schedulers.
TX ( ic )
Sel i
a. Atoll sorts the M i ∈ N Users in order of decreasing PDSCH, or PUSCH and PUCCH C/(I+N), depending on whether
the allocation is being performed for the downlink or for the uplink.
b. Starting with the mobile with the highest rank, Atoll allocates the downlink and uplink resources required to
satisfy each user’s remaining throughput demands in downlink and uplink as follows:
Sel Sel
Sel Mi Sel Mi
Mi TPD Rem – DL Mi TPD Rem – UL
R Max – DL = ---------------------------
Sel
- and R Max – UL = ---------------------------
Sel
-
Mi Mi
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
MU – MIMO
The virtual resources made available by the mobile M i are given by:
MU – MIMO
Mi TX i ( ic )
Saturation occurs when RC UL = TL UL – Max .
395
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
M1 10 0 10 10
M2 5 5 0 5
M3 20 5 15 15
M4 40 15 25 25
… … … … …
Output
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
Sel
• TL DL = R DL : Downlink traffic load or the amount of downlink resources allocated to the mobile M i .
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
Sel
• TL UL = R UL : Uplink traffic load or the amount of uplink resources allocated to the mobile M i .
Input
Sel
Mi
Sel
• R DL : Amount of downlink resources allocated to the mobile M i as calculated in "Scheduling and Radio Resource
Allocation" on page 389.
Sel
Mi Sel
• R UL : Amount of uplink resources allocated to the mobile M i as calculated in "Scheduling and Radio Resource
Allocation" on page 389.
Sel
Mi
Sel
• CTP P – DL : Downlink peak RLC channel throughput at the mobile M i as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 378.
Sel
Mi
Sel
• CTP P – UL : Uplink peak RLC channel throughput at the mobile M i as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 378.
Sel
Mi TX i ( ic )
• BLER BDL : Downlink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR PDSCH graph available in the LTE equipment
Sel
assigned to the terminal used by the mobile M i .
Sel
Mi Mi
• BLER BUL : Uplink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR PUSCH, PUCCH graph available in the LTE equipment
assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
Sel
Mi
Sel
• f TP – Scaling : Throughput scaling factor defined in the properties of the service used by the mobile M i .
Sel
Mi
Sel
• TP Offset : Throughput offset defined in the properties of the service used by the mobile M i .
396
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
Calculations
Downlink:
Sel Sel Sel
M M M
i i i
• Peak RLC User Throughput: UTP P – DL = R DL × CTP P – DL
Sel Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi
• Effective RLC User Throughput: UTP E – DL = UTP P – DL × 1 – BLER B DL
Sel
Sel Sel Mi Sel
i
M
i
M f TP – Scaling M
i
• Application User Throughput: UTP A – DL = UTP E – DL × ------------------------
- – TPOffset
100
Uplink:
Sel Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi
• Peak RLC User Throughput: UTP P – UL = R UL × CTP P – UL
Sel Sel Sel
Mi
Mi Mi
• Effective RLC User Throughput: UTP E – UL = UTP P – UL × 1 – BLER B UL
Sel
Sel Sel M Sel
i
Mi f TP – Scaling
Mi Mi
• Application User Throughput: UTP A – UL = UTP E – UL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Output
Sel
Mi
Sel
• UTP P – DL : Downlink peak RLC user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
Sel
M
i Sel
• UTP E – DL : Downlink effective RLC user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
Sel
Mi
Sel
• UTP A – DL : Downlink application user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
Sel
Mi
Sel
• UTP P – UL : Uplink peak RLC user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
Sel
M
i Sel
• UTP E – UL : Uplink effective RLC user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
Sel
Mi
Sel
• UTP A – UL : Uplink application user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
397
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
If no focus zone exists in the ATL document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
We assume a reference cell TXi(ic) and a candidate neighbour cell TXj(jc). When automatic allocation starts, Atoll checks the
following conditions:
1. The distance between both cells must be less than the user-definable maximum inter-site distance. If the distance
between the reference cell and the candidate neighbour is greater than this value, then the candidate neighbour is
discarded.
Atoll calculates the effective distance between the reference cell and its candidate neighbour from the real distance
between them and the azimuths of their antennas:
Where x = 0.3% so that the maximum variation in D does not to exceed 1%. D is stated in m.
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other have a smaller effective distance than the actual distance.
Candidate neighbours are ranked in the order of increasing effective distance from the reference cell.
2. The calculation options,
• Force Co-site Cells as Neighbours: If selected, Atoll adds all the cells located on the same site as the reference cell
to the candidate neighbour list. The weight of this constraint can be defined. It is used to calculate the rank of each
neighbour, and its importance.
• Force Adjacent Cells as Neighbours: If selected, Atoll adds all the cells geographically adjacent to the reference
cell to the candidate neighbour list. The weight of this constraint can be defined. It is used to calculate the rank of
each neighbour, and its importance.
Determination of Adjacent Cells: Geographically adjacent cells are determined on the basis of their best server
coverage areas. A candidate neighbour cell TXi(ic) is considered adjacent to the reference cell TXi(ic) if there exists
at least one pixel of TXj(jc)’s best server coverage area where TXi(ic) is the second best server. The ranking of
adjacent neighbour cells increases with the number of such pixels. Adjacent cells are sorted in the order of
decreasing rank.
• Force Neighbour Symmetry: If selected, Atoll adds the reference cell to the candidate neighbour list of the its
candidate neighbour.
A symmetric neighbour relation is allowed only if the neighbour list of the reference cell is not already full. If TXj(jc)
is a neighbour of TXi(ic) but TXi(ic) is not a neighbour of TXj(jc), there can be two possibilities:
398
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
i. The neighbour list of TXj(jc) is not full, Atoll will add TXi(ic) to the end of the list.
ii. The neighbour list of TXj(jc) is full, Atoll will not be able to add TXi(ic) to the list, so it will also remove TXj(jc)
from the neighbour list of TXi(ic).
• Force Exceptional Pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbour relations. Exceptional pairs are
pairs of cells which will always or never be neighbours of each other.
If you select "Force exceptional pairs" and "Force symmetry", Atoll considers the constraints between exceptional
pairs in both directions so as to respect symmetry condition. On the other hand, if neighbourhood relationship is
forced in one direction and forbidden in the other, symmetry cannot be respected. In this case, Atoll displays a
warning in the Event viewer.
• Delete Existing Neighbours: If selected, Atoll deletes all the current neighbours and carries out a new neighbour
allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept in the list.
3. The coverage areas of TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) must have an overlap ( S TX ( ic ) ∩ S TX ( jc ) ).
i j
• Here S TX ( ic ) is the surface area covered by the cell TXi(ic) that comprises all the pixels where:
i
• The received reference signal energy per resource element is greater than or equal to the minimum RSRP:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
E DLRS ≥ T RSRP
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
• S TX ( ic ) is the surface area covered by TXi(ic) within E DLRS and E DLRS + M RSRP . M RSRP is the RSRP margin
i
with respect to the best downlink reference signal energy per resource element at which the handover ends.
• S TX ( jc ) is the coverage area where the candidate cell TXj(jc) is the best server.
j
For calculating the overlapping coverage areas, Atoll uses the service with the lowest
body loss, the terminal that has the highest difference between gain and losses, and the
shadowing margin calculated using the defined cell edge coverage probability, if the
option is selected. The service and terminal are selected such that the selection gives the
largest possible coverage areas for the cells.
S TX ( ic ) ∩ S TX ( jc )
i j
- × 100 ),
When the above conditions are met, Atoll calculates the percentage of the coverage area overlap ( --------------------------------------
S TX ( ic )
i
and compares this value with the % Min Covered Area. TXj(jc) is considered a neighbour of TXi(ic) if
S TX ( ic ) ∩ S TX ( jc )
i j
- × 100 ≥ % Min Coverage Area .
--------------------------------------
S TX ( ic )
i
Next, Atoll calculates the importance of the automatically allocated neighbours. Atoll sorts the neighbours by decreasing
importance in order to keep the ones with high importance. If the maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to each
cell is exceeded, Atoll keeps the ones with high importance.
399
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
The neighbour importance depends on the distance from the reference transmitter and on the neighbourhood cause (cf. table
below); this value varies between 0 and 100%.
Neighbourhood cause When Importance value
Only if the Delete Existing Neighbours option is not selected
Existing neighbour Existing importance
and in case of a new allocation
Exceptional pair Only if the Force Exceptional Pairs option is selected 100 %
Only if the Force Co-site Cells as Neighbours option is
Co-site cell Importance Function (IF)
selected
Only if the Force Adjacent Cells as Neighbours option is
Adjacent cell Importance Function (IF)
selected
Neighbourhood relationship that
Only if the % Min Covered Area is exceeded Importance Function (IF)
fulfils coverage conditions
Symmetric neighbourhood
Only if the Force Neighbour Symmetry option is selected Importance Function (IF)
relationship
The importance is evaluated using an Importance Function (IF), which takes into account the following factors:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d
( Di ) = 1 – -----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance ( D in m) weighted by the
azimuths of antennas.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
400
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours, adjacent neighbours, and neighbours allocated based on coverage
overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
• The default value of Min(O) = 1% ensures that neighbours selected for symmetry will
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selected for symmetry will have an importance field greater than 0% only if there is
some coverage overlapping.
• By adding an option in the atoll.ini file, the neighbour allocation and importance
calculation can be based on the distance criterion only. For more information, see the
Administrator Manual.
In the results, Atoll lists only the cells for which it finds new neighbours. Cells whose channels have the same centre frequency
are listed as intra-carrier neighbours. Otherwise, neighbour cells are listed as inter-carrier neighbours.
If no focus zone exists in the ATL document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
We assume a reference cell A and a candidate neighbour B. When automatic allocation starts, Atoll checks following
conditions:
1. The distance between reference cell and the candidate neighbour must be less than the user-definable maximum
inter-site distance. If the distance is greater than this value, the candidate neighbour is discarded.
Atoll calculates the effective distance between the reference cell and its candidate neighbour from the real distance
between them and the azimuths of their antennas:
Where x = 0.3% so that the maximum variation in D does not to exceed 1%. D is stated in m.
401
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other have a smaller effective distance than the actual distance.
Candidate neighbours are ranked in the order of increasing effective distance from the reference cell.
2. The calculation options:
• CDMA Carriers: This option is available when an LTE network is being co-planned with a UMTS, CDMA, or TD-
SCDMA network. This option enables you to select the CDMA carrier(s) that you want Atoll to consider as potential
neighbours of LTE cells. You may choose one or more carriers. Atoll will allocate only the cells using the selected
carriers as neighbours.
• Force co-site cells as neighbours: If selected, Atoll adds all the transmitters/cells located on the same site as the
reference cell in its candidate neighbour list. The weight of this constraint can be defined. It is used to calculate
the rank of each neighbour and its importance.
• Force exceptional pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbour relations. Exceptional pairs are
pairs of cells which will always or never be neighbours of each other.
• Delete existing neighbours: If selected, Atoll deletes all the current neighbours and carries out a new neighbour
allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept in the list.
3. Neighbour relation criterion:
• Allocation based on distance:
The allocation algorithm is based on the effective distance between the reference cell and its candidate
neighbour.
• Algorithm based on coverage overlapping:
The coverage areas of the reference cell A and the candidate neighbour B must overlap ( S A ∩ S B ).
• 1st case: SA is the area where the cell A is the best serving cell, with a 0 dB margin.
This means that the reference signal energy per resource element received from A is greater than the
minimum required (Min RSRP), and is the highest one. .
• 2nd case: The margin is other than 0 dB. SA is the area where:
The reference signal energy per resource element received from A exceeds the minimum required (Min RSRP)
and is within a margin from the highest signal level.
Two cases may exist for SB:
• 1st case: SB is the area where the candidate neighbour is the best server. In this case, the margin must be set
to 0dB.
The signal level received from B exceeds the minimum required, and is the highest one.
• 2nd case: The margin is other than 0dB. SB is the area where:
The signal level received from B exceeds the minimum required and is within a margin from the best signal
level.
SA ∩ SB
- × 100 ) and compares this value with the %
Atoll calculates the percentage of the coverage area overlap ( -----------------
SA
SA ∩ SB
- × 100 ≥ % Min Covered Area .
Min Covered Area. B is considered a neighbour of A if -----------------
SA
Candidate neighbours are ranked in the order of decreasing coverage area overlap percentages.
Next, Atoll calculates the importance of the automatically allocated neighbours. Atoll sorts the neighbours by decreasing
importance in order to keep the ones with high importance. If the maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to each
cell is exceeded, Atoll keeps the ones with high importance.
The importance (%) of neighbours depends on the distance and on the reason of allocation:
• For allocation based on distance:
402
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
d is the effective distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and d max is the maximum inter-site
distance.
• For allocation based on coverage overlapping:
The importance is evaluated using an Importance Function (IF), which takes into account the following factors:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d
( Di ) = 1 – -----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours and neighbours allocated based on coverage overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
In the results, Atoll displays only the cells for which it finds new neighbours.
403
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
If no focus zone exists in the ATL document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
The above separation constraint is studied between each TBA cell and its related cells. Atoll calculates the cost between each
individual TBA and related cell, and then the overall cost for the TBA cell.
Related cells of a TBA cell are:
• Its neighbours, if the check box "Take Neighbours into Account" is selected,
Assigned weight ω Neighbour = 0.5
• Cells that are listed in the interference matrix of the TBA cell,
Assigned weight ω IM = 0.3
• Cells within the cell’s (or the default) minimum reuse distance, if the check box "Take Min Reuse Distance into
Account" is selected,
Assigned weight ω Dis tan ce = 0.2
Λ TXi ( ic ) – TXj ( jc ) – Λ TXi ( ic ) – TXj ( jc )
2
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) --------------------------------------------------------------------------
Req if Λ < Λ Req
VL Sep = TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
Λ Req
0 Otherwise
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
Where Λ Req is the required separation, and Λ is the actual separation between channels used by
TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) calculated as follows:
404
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) j i
i j F Start – F Start
Λ = ------------------------------------
-
TX ( ic )
i
W Channel
TX ( jc )
j
Where F Start is the start frequency of the channel used by TXj(jc) calculated as follows:
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
F Start = F Start – Band + W Channel × N Channel
TX i ( ic )
F Start is the start frequency of the channel used by TXi(ic) calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
F Start = F Start – Band + W Channel × N Channel
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
Where F Start – Band and F Start – Band are the start frequencies of the frequency bands assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc)
respectively. F Start – Band can be the start frequency of a TDD frequency band ( F Start – TDD ), or the downlink start frequency
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
of an FDD frequency band ( F Start – FDD – DL ). N Channel and N Channel are the channel numbers assigned to cells TXi(ic) and
TXj(jc) respectively. For FDD networks, Atoll considers that the same channel number is assigned to a cell in the downlink and
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
uplink, i.e., the channel number you assign to a cell is considered for uplink and downlink both. And, W Channel and W Channel
are the bandwidths of the channels assigned to cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) respectively.
The cost of the relation between the TBA cell and its related cell is calculated next:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
$ = VL Sep × ω Neighbour × ι Neighbour + ω Dis tan ce × ι Dis tan ce +ω ×ι i
IM IM
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j i j
Where ι Neighbour is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related neighbour cell. ι Neighbour
is calculated during automatic neighbour planning by Atoll as explained in "Automatic Neighbour Planning" on page 397. For
manual neighbour planning, this value is equal to 1.
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
ι IM is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related interfering cell. ι IM is
calculated during interference matrix calculation as explained in "Interference Matrix Calculation" on page 408.
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
ι Dis tan ce is the importance of the relationship between the TBA and its related cell with respect to the distance between
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
them. ι Dis tan ce is calculated as explained in "Distance Importance Calculation" on page 409.
Atoll calculates the quality reduction factor for the TBA cell and its related cell from the cost calculated above as follows:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
QRF = 1–$
The quality reduction factor is a measure of the cost of an individual relation.
The total cost of the current frequency plan for any TBA cell is given as follows, considering all the cells with which the TBA
cell has relations:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
$ Total = 1 – ∏ QRF
TX ( jc )
j
And, the total cost of the current frequency plan for the entire network is simply the sum of the total TBA cell costs calculated
above, i.e.,
TX i ( ic )
$ Total = $ Total
TX i ( ic )
405
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
• Stops when it is unable to improve the cost of the network, and proposes the last known best frequency plan as the
solution.
If no focus zone exists in the ATL document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
The above constraints are studied between each TBA cell and its related cells. Atoll calculates the cost between each
individual TBA and related cell, and then the overall cost for the TBA cell.
Related cells of a TBA cell are:
• Its neighbours, if the check box "Take Neighbours into Account" is selected,
Assigned weight ω Neighbour = 0.35
Neighbours of a TBA cell are also related to each other through the TBA cell. This relation is also taken into account,
406
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
You can choose to not take into account the inter-neighbour physical cell ID collision by adding an option in the
Atoll.ini file (see the Administrator Manual). If inter-neighbour collision is not taken into account, the weight assigned
to the neighbour relation alone is ω Neighbour = 0.5 and that of the inter-neighbour collision is of course
ω Inter – Neighbour = 0 .
By adding an option in the Atoll.ini file (see the Administrator Manual), second-order neighbours can also be taken
into account. In this case, the assigned weights are: ω Neighbour = 0.25 , ω 2nd – Neighbour = 0.15 , and
ω Inter – Neighbour = 0.10 .
• Cells that are listed in the interference matrix of the TBA cell,
Assigned weight ω IM = 0.3
• Cells within the cell’s (or the default) minimum reuse distance, if the check box "Take Min Reuse Distance into
Account" is selected,
Assigned weight ω Dis tan ce = 0.2
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
Where ω ID , ω PSS , and ω SSS are the weights assigned to the physical cell ID, PSS ID, and SSS ID constraints. r O is
the total channel overlap ratio between the TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co- and Adjacent Channel Overlaps Calculation"
on page 343.
TX ( ic )
i
TX ( jc )
j
ID ID 1 if ID ϕ = ID ϕ
p Coll is the physical cell ID collision probability given by p Coll = .
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
0 if ID ϕ ≠ ID ϕ
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
PSS PSS 1 if ID PSS = ID PSS
p Coll is the PSS ID collision probability given by p Coll = .
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
0 if ID PSS ≠ ID PSS
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
SSS SSS ≠ ID SSS
p Penalty is the SSS ID penalty given by p Penalty = 1 if ID SSS AND Site = Site if the SSS ID
0 Otherwise
SSS
planning strategy is set to "Same per site", and by p Penalty = 0 if the SSS ID planning strategy is set to "Free". The SSS penalty
models the SSS ID allocation constraint.
Next, Atoll calculates the importance of the relation between the TBA cell and its related cell.
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
ι Total = ω Neighbour × ι Neighbour + ω Inter – Neighbour × ι Inter – Neighbour + ω 2nd – Neighbour × ι 2nd – Neighbour +
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
ω IM × ι IM + ω Dis tan ce × ι Dis tan ce
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
Where ι Neighbour is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related neighbour cell. ι Neighbour
is calculated during automatic neighbour planning by Atoll as explained in "Automatic Neighbour Planning" on page 397. For
manual neighbour planning, this value is equal to 1.
ι Inter – Neighbour is calculated from the neighbour relationship importance values calculated during automatic neighbour
planning. If two neighbours of the TBA cell have the same physical cell ID assigned, the importance of the inter-neighbour
physical cell ID collision is the average of their neighbour importance values with the TBA cell. If more than one pair of
407
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
neighbours of the TBA cell has the same physical cell ID assigned, then the importance is the highest value among all the
averages:
TX ( ic ) – TX ( j1c ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( j2c )
i j1 i j2
ι Neighbour + ι Neighbour
ι Inter – Neighbour = Max ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
All Neighbour Pairs 2
with ID Collisions
Where TX j1 ( j1c ) and TX j2 ( j2c ) are two neighbours of the TBA cell TX i ( ic ) that have the same physical cell ID assigned.
ι 2nd – Neighbour is calculated from the neighbour relationship importance values calculated during automatic neighbour
planning. If two second-order neighbours have the same physical cell ID assigned, the importance of the physical cell ID
collision is the multiple of the neighbour importance values. If more than one pair of second-order neighbours has the same
physical cell ID assigned, then the importance is the highest value among all the multiples:
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) – TX k ( kc )
ι 2nd – Neighbour = Max ι i j
× ι Neighbour
All Neighbour Pairs
Neighbour
with ID Collisions
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j i j
ι IM is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related interfering cell. ι IM is
calculated during interference matrix calculation as explained in "Interference Matrix Calculation" on page 408.
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
ι Dis tan ce is the importance of the relationship between the TBA and its related cell with respect to the distance between
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
them. ι Dis tan ce is calculated as explained in "Distance Importance Calculation" on page 409.
From the constraint violation level and the total importance of the relation between the TBA and its related cell, Atoll
calculates the quality reduction factor for the pair as follows:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
QRF = 1 – VL × ι Total
And, the total cost of the current physical cell ID plan for the entire network is simply the sum of the total TBA cell costs
calculated above, i.e.,
TX i ( ic )
$ Total = $ Total
TX i ( ic )
5.10.5 Appendices
5.10.5.1 Interference Matrix Calculation
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
The importance of an interference matrix entry ( ι IM ) is equal to the co- or adjacent chanenl interference probability
calculated by taking the ratio of the interfered surface area to the total surface area of a cell.
The co-channel interference probability is calculated as follows:
408
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 5: LTE Networks
S TX ( ic )
i
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
j i
C Max + M Quality n
DLRS
TX ( ic ) ----------------------------------------------------
- -
-------------------- TX ( ic )
i 10 10 i
10 × Log 10
< T RSRP + 174 – 10 × Log ( 15000 )
C + 10
DLRS –
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
S TX ( ic )
i
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
For frequencies farther than the adjacent channel, ι IM = 0.
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Here S TX ( ic ) is the best server coverage area of the cell TXi(ic), that comprises all the pixels where E DLRS ≥ T RSRP as
i
calculated in "Service Area Calculation" on page 377. S TX ( ic ) is the best server coverage area of the cell TXi(ic) where
i Condition
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
the given condition is true. C DLRS is the received downlink reference signal level from the cell TXi(ic). C Max is the received
TX ( ic )
i
maximum signal level from the cell TXj(jc) calculated using the Max Power defined for this cell. n DLRS is the downlink noise
for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Calculation (DL)" on page 350. M Quality is the quality margin used for the
TX i ( ic )
interference matrices calculation. And, f ACS is the adjacent channel suppression factor defined for the frequency band of
the cell TXi(ic).
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
1 if D
i j
<1
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) D Reuse 2
ι Dis tan ce = Log ---------------------------------
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
D
--------------------------------------------------------- Otherwise
Log ( D Reuse )
2
Where D Reuse is the minimum reuse distance, either defined for each TBA cell individually or set for all the TBA cells in the
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
AFP dialogue, and D is the weighted distance between the TBA cell TXi(ic) and its related cell TXj(jc) calculated as
follows:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
D = d × ( 1 + x × ( cos ( β ) – cos ( α ) – 2 ) )
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
D is weighted according to the azimuths of the TBA cell and its related cell with respect to the straight line joining
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
them. d is the distance between the two cells considering any offsets with respect to the site locations. x is set
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
to 15 % so that the maximum variation in D due to the azimuths does not exceed 60 %. α and β are calculated
from the azimuths of the two cells as shown in Figure 5.7 on page 410.
409
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5: LTE Networks © Forsk 2011
The above formula implies that two cells facing each other will have a shorter effective distance between them than the real
distance, and two cells pointing in opposite directions will have a greater effective distance.
The importance of the distance relation is explained in Figure 5.8 on page 410. This figure shows that cells that are located
near (based on the effective distance which is weighted by the orientations of the cells) have high importance, which is
interpreted as a high cost, and cells that are located far have low importance. Cells that are further than the reuse distance
do not have any cost related to the distance relation.
410
Chapter 6
3GPP Multi-RAT
Networks
This chapter describes 3GPP Multi-RAT calculations. In this chapter, the following are explained:
• "Simulations in Multi-RAT Projects" on page 413
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 6: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks
6.1.1 Inputs
This table lists simulation and prediction inputs (calculation options, quality targets, active set management conditions, etc.).
413
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 6: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks © Forsk 2011
Atoll determines the total number of users attempting connection in each simulation
based on the Poisson distribution. This may lead to slight variations in the total numbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulation of a group, add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0
N Users = S Env × D UP
• In case of user profile traffic maps composed of lines, the number of users of each
user profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (DUP)
(users per km): N Users = L × D UP
• The number of users is a direct input when a user profile traffic map is composed of
points.
Atoll calculates the probability for a user being active at a given instant in the uplink and in the downlink according to the
service usage characteristics described in the user profiles, i.e., the number of service sessions, the average duration of each
constant bit rate service session, or the volume of the data transfer in the uplink and the downlink in each variable bit rate
service session.
414
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 6: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks
The number of users and their distribution per activity status is determined as follows:
• Calculation of the service usage duration per hour ( p 0 : probability of a connection):
N call × d
p o = -------------------
-
3600
n i = N Users × p 0
Next, we can take into account activity periods during the connection in order to determine the activity status of each user.
• Calculation of activity probabilities:
UL DL
Probability of being inactive on UL and DL: p inactive = ( 1 – f act ) × ( 1 – f act )
UL DL
Probability of being active on UL only: p UL = f act × ( 1 – f act )
DL UL
Probability of being active on DL only: p DL = f act × ( 1 – f act )
UL DL
Probability of being active both on UL and DL: p UL + DL = f act × f act
UL DL
Where, f act and f act are respectively the UL and DL activity factors defined for the constant bit rate service i.
Therefore, a user when he is connected can have four different activity status: either active on both links, or inactive on both
links, or active on UL only, or active on DL only.
The number of users and their distribution per activity status is determined as follows:
UL DL
UL N Session × V × 8 N Session × V × 8
• Calculation of activity probabilities: f - and f DL = ------------------------------------------
= ------------------------------------------ -
UL DL
TP Average × 3600 TP Average × 3600
UL DL
Probability of being inactive: p Inactive = ( 1 – f ) × ( 1 – f )
UL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink: p Active = f × (1 – f )
DL DL UL
Probability of being active in the downlink: p Active = f × (1 – f )
415
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 6: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks © Forsk 2011
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink and downlink both: p Active = f ×f
UL UL
Number of users active in the uplink: n d – Active = N Users × p Active
GSM or LTE
DL DL
Number of users active in the downlink: n d – Active = N Users × p Active
GSM or LTE
UL + DL UL + DL
Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n d – Active = N Users × p Active
GSM or LTE
• Calculation of the number of active users trying to access the service d (nd):
UL DL UL + DL
nd = n d – Active + n d – Active + n d – Active
GSM or LTE GSM or LTE GSM or LTE GSM or LTE
For variable bit rate services which can be managed by UMTS, a packet session consists of several packet calls separated by a
reading time. Each packet call is defined by its size and may be divided in packets of fixed size (1500 Bytes) separated by an
inter arrival time.
In Atoll, a UMTS packet session is described by following parameters:
UL
N packet –c all : Average number of packet calls on the uplink during a session,
DL
N packet –c all : Average number of packet calls on the downlink during a session,
UL
ΔT packet – call : Average time (millisecond) between two packets calls on the uplink ,
DL
ΔT packet – call : Average time (millisecond) between two packets calls on the downlink ,
UL
ΔT packet : Average time (millisecond) between two packets on the uplink ,
DL
ΔT packet : Average time (millisecond) between two packets on the downlink ,
UL
S packet : Packet size (Bytes) on uplink,
DL
S packet : Packet size (Bytes) on downlink.
The number of users and their distribution per activity status is determined as follows:
• Calculation of the average packet call size (kBytes):
416
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 6: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks
UL V UL DL V DL
S packet –c all = ----------------------------------------
UL UL
and S packet –c all = ----------------------------------------
DL DL
N packet –c all × f eff N packet –c all × f eff
UL DL
Where f eff and f eff are the UL and DL efficiency factors defined for the packet switched service j.
UL DL
For packet (HSDPA) and packet (HSPA) services, f eff and f eff are set to 1.
1kBytes = 1024Bytes.
UL N sess N sess
- × D UL
p Connection = -----------
DL DL
Connection and p Connection = ------------ × D Connection
3600 3600
• Calculation of the probability of being connected:
UL DL
p Connected = 1 – ( 1 – p Connection ) × ( 1 – p Connection )
Therefore, the number of users who want to get the service j is:
nj = N Users × p Connected
UMTS
As you can see on the picture above, we have to consider three possible cases when a user is connected:
• 2nd case: At a given time, packet are uploaded (no packet is downloaded).
Here, the probability of being connected is:
417
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 6: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks © Forsk 2011
UL DL
UL p Connection × ( 1 – p Connection )
p Connected = -----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
p Connected
• 3rd case: At a given time, packet are downloaded (no packet is uploaded).
In this case, the probability of being connected is:
DL UL
DL p Connection × ( 1 – p Connection )
p Connected = -----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
p Connected
Now, we have to take into account activity periods during the connection in order to determine the activity status of
each user.
• Calculation of the probability of being active:
UL DL
UL ( D Activity ) session DL ( D Activity ) session
f = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
UL UL
and f = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DL DL
( ( D Inactivity ) session + ( D Activity ) session ) ( ( D Inactivity ) session + ( D Activity ) session )
Therefore, we have:
The user can be active on DL and inactive on UL; this probability is:
1 DL UL UL + DL
p DL = f × ( 1 – f ) × p Connected
• 2nd case: At a given time, packet are uploaded (no packet is downloaded).
The user can be active on UL and inactive on DL; this probability is:
2 UL UL
p UL = f × p Connected
• 3rd case: At a given time, packet are downloaded (no packet is uploaded).
The user can be active on DL and inactive on UL; this probability is:
3 DL DL
p DL = f × p Connected
1 2
Number of users active on UL and inactive on DL: n j ( UL ) = nj × ( p UL + p UL )
UMTS UMTS
1 3
Number of users active on DL and inactive on UL: n j ( DL ) = nj × ( p DL + p DL )
UMTS UMTS
1
Number of users active on UL and DL: n j ( UL + DL ) = nj × p UL + DL
UMTS UMTS
418
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 6: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks
Therefore, a user when he is connected can have four different activity status: either active on both links, or inactive
on both links, or active on UL only, or active on DL only.
Assuming several number of users are calculated for several technologies, the final numbers of users are obtains as follows:
The user distribution per service and the activity status distribution between the users
are average distributions. The service and the activity status of each user are randomly
drawn in each simulation. Therefore, if you calculate several simulations at once, the
average number of users per service and average numbers of inactive, active on UL,
active on DL and active on UL and DL users, respectively, will correspond to calculated
distributions. But if you check each simulation, the user distribution between services as
well as the activity status distribution between users can be different in each of them.
Atoll calculates the number of users active in uplink and in downlink in the Txi cell using the service (NUL and NDL) as follows:
UL DL
Rt Rt
N UL = ------------------
UL
- and N DL = ------------------
DL
-
R average R average
UL
Rt is the kbits per second transmitted in UL in the Txi cell to supply the service.
DL
Rt is the kbits per second transmitted in DL in the Txi cell to supply the service.
DL
R average is the downlink average requested throughput defined for the service,
UL
R average is the uplink average requested throughput defined for the service.
UL DL
Probability of being active in UL only: p UL = f act × ( 1 – f act )
419
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 6: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks © Forsk 2011
DL UL
Probability of being active in DL only: p DL = f act × ( 1 – f act )
UL DL
Probability of being active both in UL and DL: p UL + DL = f act × f act
UL DL
Where, f act and f act are respectively the UL and DL activity factors defined for the service i.
( p DL + p UL + DL ) × ( n j ( UL ) + n j ( DL ) + n j ( UL + DL ) ) = N DL
Therefore, we have:
N UL × p UL + DL N DL × p UL + DL
Number of users active in UL and DL both: n i ( UL + DL ) = min ---------------------------------, --------------------------------
p UL + p UL + DL p DL + p UL + DL
inactive ( n j ( UL ) + n j ( DL ) + n j ( UL + DL ) )
Number of inactive users in UL and DL: n i - × p inactive
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 – p inactive
Therefore, a connected user can have four different activity status: either active in both links, or inactive in both links, or active
in UL only, or active in DL only.
Atoll takes into account activity periods during the connection in order to determine the activity status of each user.
Activity probabilities are calculated as follows:
UL DL
Probability of being inactive in UL and DL: p inactive = ( 1 – f act ) × ( 1 – f act )
UL DL
Probability of being active in UL only: p UL = f act × ( 1 – f act )
DL UL
Probability of being active in DL only: p DL = f act × ( 1 – f act )
UL DL
Probability of being active both in UL and DL: p UL + DL = f act × f act
UL DL
Where, f act and f act are respectively the UL and DL activity factors defined for the service i.
Therefore, a connected user can have four different activity status: either active in both links, or inactive in both links, or active
in UL only, or active in DL only.
420
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 6: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks
The activity status distribution between users is an average distribution. In fact, in each
simulation, the activity status of each user is randomly drawn. Therefore, if you compute
several simulations at once, average numbers of inactive, active on UL, active on DL and
active on UL and DL users correspond to the calculated distribution. But if you check each
simulation, the activity status distribution between users is different in each of them.
421
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 6: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks © Forsk 2011
In case of BBH, assuming TRXs belong to the same TRX type, we have:
Therefore, from the point of view of a mobile station, BBH and SFH work in the same way. An MSA will be attached to each
mobile considered during the simulation and the level of interference will be evaluated on this MSA.
422
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 6: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks
423
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 6: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks © Forsk 2011
Subcell i
If ΔTL DL – GSM is the simulation convergence thresholds defined when creating the simulation, Atoll stops the
Req
simulation in the following cases.
Subcell i Subcell i
Convergence: Simulation has converged between iteration k - 1 and k if: ΔTL DL – GSM ≤ ΔTL DL – GSM .
k Req
No convergence: Simulation has not converged even after the last iteration, i.e., k = Max Number of Iterations defined
Subcell i Subcell i
when creating the simulation, if: ΔTL DL – GSM > ΔTL DL – GSM .
k Req
7. Repeats the above steps (from step 2.) for the iteration k+1 using the new calculated loads as the current loads until
convergence.
424
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 6: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks
When serving a circuit-switched user, depending on the computed radio conditions at the server location, a codec mode is
assigned to a user. Depending on this codec mode, the user will use either an entire timeslot (any AMR, EFR or FR codec mode)
or half a timeslot (HR codec mode).
As explained in "MSA Definition" on page 422, the resource element assigned to a mobile station is an MSA. Depending on
the assigned MSA, the level of quality at the mobile might be different, and consequently, its served codec mode so as the
required number of timeslots.
Assuming a server is selected for each mobile, several MSAs are candidate. For each candidate MSA, a codec mode study is
run, using the computed C/(I+N) and based on the user terminal and mobility (See "Calculations Based on C/(I+N)" on
page 131 for more information). For each MSA, a codec mode is obtained. For each mobile, the list of candidate codec modes
is saved.
At the beginning of a simulation iteration, no traffic is attached to MSAs. Their load starts from 0 and is increased as traffic
increases and mobiles are attached to them. For a given user, within his MSA list, the MSA having currently the lowest load is
selected and, as a consequence, the load of this MSA is now increased. The effect of this mechanism results in a load balancing
of MSAs within a transmitter.
When MSAs are almost full, Atoll selects the MSAs the most optimised in term of timeslot occupancy. As an example, to
optimise the resource allocation, a codec mode costing half a timeslot might be chosen instead of a codec mode costing an
entire timeslot in the case the MSA with the lowest cost would have been chosen.
This mechanism is then reproduced for all the users requesting a circuit-switched service.
i
For each MSA k, the assigned codec mode i corresponds to a quality target : ( C ⁄ I ) Target . Due to the radio conditions, and using
k
the victim max power, a ( C ⁄ I ) Max is obtained.
k i
If ( C ⁄ I ) Max < ( C ⁄ I ) Target , no codec mode can be served and the mobile is rejected with the condition "No Service".
k i
If ( C ⁄ I ) Max > ( C ⁄ I ) Target , the corresponding codec mode is assigned to the mobile. If the MSA is on the BCCH, no power
k
control is applied. For any other TRX type, Atoll evaluates the minimum required power P Min in order to reduce the quality
i
at the user’s terminal to ( C ⁄ I ) Target for the assigned MSA k.
To summarise, at this step, each circuit-switched user is assigned a MSA, a codec mode, a corresponding number of timeslots
i
(0.5 or 1) and a corresponding minimum required power to get the ( C ⁄ I ) Target of the served MSA.
Then, if the user has been dropped as inactive at the beginning of the simulation, his corresponding number of timeslots is
consumed but no DL power is considered for this specific user. Inactive users only participate in the timeslot management but
do not affect DL power.
Finally, if the user has been dropped as active at the beginning of the simulation, both timeslots and powers have to be
considered to make him connected.
425
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 6: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks © Forsk 2011
For a given user, within his MSA list, the MSA having currently the lowest load is selected and, as a consequence, the load of
this MSA is now increased. In the same way than for circuit traffic, the effect of this mechanism results in a load balancing of
MSAs within a transmitter.
This mechanism is then reproduced for all the users requesting a packet-switched service. At this step, each packet-switched
service has a coding scheme and, ideally, is supposed to be served his DL minimum throughput demand.
The second step of resources allocation for packet-switched traffic is to share the remaining resources between connected
users in order they get their maximum throughput demand. As an example, let’s imagine than a MSA is already occupied as
follows:
• 2 TS for circuit-switched service users (3 users : 2 HR codec modes + 1 FR codec mode)
• 2.4 TS for packet-switched service users after the first step (2 users).
If this MSA is defined over a TCH subcell, its capacity is 8 TS. In other words, 4.4 TS have been used, and 3.6 TS remain. The
two packet-switched users have obtained their minimum throughput demand. In order to reach their maximum throughput
demand, the remaining TS are equally shared between the two connected users: 1.8 TS per user. If the first user can get his
maximum throughput demand with only 1.5 TS, the remaining 0.3 TS will be able to be used by the user. As a consequence,
this second user could benefit of 2.1 TS in order to get his maximum demand. If, finally, he only needs 1.3 TS to get this
demand, 0.8 TS remain unused for that MSA.
This mechanism of equally share of remaining resources is then applied for all the connected packet-switched service users
over all their MSAs.
j
For each MSA k, the assigned coding scheme j corresponds to a quality target : ( C ⁄ I ) Target . Due to the radio conditions, and
k
using the victim max power, a ( C ⁄ I ) Max is obtained.
k j
If ( C ⁄ I ) Max < ( C ⁄ I ) Target , no coding scheme can be served and the mobile is rejected with the condition "No Service".
k j
If ( C ⁄ I ) Max > ( C ⁄ I ) Target , the corresponding coding scheme is assigned to the mobile. If the MSA is on the BCCH, no power
k
control is applied. For any other TRX type, Atoll evaluates the minimum required power P Min in order to reduce the quality
j
at the user’s terminal to ( C ⁄ I ) Target for the assigned MSA k.
To summarise, at this step, each packet-switched user is assigned a MSA, a coding scheme, a corresponding number of
j
timeslots (which might not be an integer value) and a corresponding minimum required power to get the ( C ⁄ I ) Target of the
served MSA.
TS used
MSA TP
i
TL TP = --------------------------------------------
- where the number of TS available for a BCCH subcell is 7 and 8 for any other subcell.
i
TS available
MSA TP
i
The traffic load value is then assigned to all the subcells of a same traffic pool.
426
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 6: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks
HR users
MSA
TP
i
HR RATIO TP = ------------------------------------
-. users represents HR and FR circuit-switched service users.
i
users MSATP i
MSA
TP
i
The Half-Rate traffic ratio is then assigned to all the subcells of a same traffic pool.
∈S
i--------------------------------
- = P Moy where i are the mobiles connected to the subcell S, over its MSAs
S
TS i
i
P Max
S
The ratio --------------- (in dB), where P Max is the max power of the considered subcell, represents the mean power control gain,
P Moy S
S
due to active and inactive users, which can be assigned to the subcell.
It is essential to note that there is no power control on the BCCH and, consequently, the mean power control gain on the BCCH
is 0.
active
P Min × TS i
active
i active ∈ S
------------------------------------------------------------ = P Moy where i active are the circuit-switched active mobiles connected to the subcell S, over
S active
TS i
active
i active
its MSAs
P Moy
S
The ratio -------------------------- (in dB), where P Moy is average requested power defined in "DL Power Control Gain Management" on
P Moy S
S active
page 427 above, represents the DTX gain, due to circuit-switched active users, which can be assigned to the subcell.
427
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 6: 3GPP Multi-RAT Networks © Forsk 2011
cannot be allocated a sufficient number of resources to obtain its codec mode or coding scheme, the cause of rejection is
"Resource Saturation," i.e., all of the cell’s resources were used up by other users.
Considering only the connected traffic at the end of the GSM part of the simulation process, the main results obtained are:
• Subcell traffic loads
• DL Power control gains
• DTX gains
• Half-rate traffic ratios
Subcell traffic loads and DL Power control gains can be used as input for GSM quality-based coverage predictions.
428
Chapter 7
CDMA2000 Networks
This chapter describes CDMA2000 calculations. In this chapter, the following are explained:
• "General Prediction Studies" on page 431
• "Definitions and Formulas" on page 434
• "Active Set Management" on page 451
• "Simulations" on page 452
• "CDMA2000 Prediction Studies" on page 485
• "Automatic Neighbour Allocation" on page 515
• "PN Offset Allocation" on page 522
• "Automatic GSM-CDMA Neighbour Allocation"
on page 529
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
7 CDMA2000 Networks
7.1 General Prediction Studies
7.1.1 Calculation Criteria
Three criteria can be studied in point analysis (Profile tab) and in common coverage studies. Study criteria are detailed in the
table below:
Total losses ( L total ) in dBm L total = ( L path + L Tx + L term + L indoor + M Shadowing – model ) – ( G Tx + G term )
where,
EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the transmitter,
ic is a carrier number,
L model is the loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated by the propagation model,
M Shadowing – model is the shadowing margin. This parameter is taken into account when the option “Shadowing taken into
account” is selected,
L Indoor are the indoor losses, taken into account when the option “Indoor coverage” is selected,
L Tx is the transmitter loss ( L Tx = L total – DL ). For information on calculating transmitter loss, "UMTS, CDMA2000, TD-SCDMA,
WiMAX, and LTE Documents" on page 26.
431
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
• For a selected transmitter, it is also possible to study the path loss, L path , or the total
losses, L total . Path loss and total losses are the same on any carrier.
• For a selected transmitter, it is also possible to study the path loss, L path , or the total
losses, L total . Path loss and total losses are the same on any carrier.
• You can use a value other than 30 dB for the margin from the best server signal level,
for example a smaller value for improving the calculation speed. For more
information on defining a different value for this margin, see the Administrator
Manual.
And
Txi Txj
P rec ( ic ) ≥ Best ( P rec ( ic ) ) – M
j≠i
432
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
• If the margin equals 0 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received from
Txi is the highest.
• If the margin is set to 2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
from Txi is either the highest or 2dB lower than the highest.
• If the margin is set to -2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
from Txi is 2dB higher than the signal levels from transmitters, which are 2nd best
servers.
And
Txi nd Txj
P rec ( ic ) ≥ 2 Best ( P rec ( ic ) ) – M
j≠i
• If the margin equals 0 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received from
Txi is the second highest.
• If the margin is set to 2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
from Txi is either the second highest or 2dB lower than the second highest.
• If the margin is set to -2 dB, Atoll will consider bins where the signal level received
from Txi is 2dB higher than the signal levels from transmitters, which are 3rd best
servers.
Atoll calculates signal level received from the transmitter on each bin of each transmitter service area. A bin of a service area
is coloured if the signal level is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (bin colour depends on signal level).
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers
as transmitter service areas. Each layer shows the different signal levels available in the transmitter service area.
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each bin of each transmitter service area. Where other service
areas overlap the studied one, Atoll chooses the highest value. A bin of a service area is coloured if the signal level is greater
than or equal to the defined thresholds (the bin colour depends on the signal level). Coverage consists of several independent
layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer
corresponds to an area where the signal level from the best server exceeds a defined minimum threshold.
Atoll calculates path loss from the transmitter on each bin of each transmitter service area. A bin of a service area is coloured
if path loss is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (bin colour depends on path loss). Coverage consists
of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as service areas.
Each layer shows the different path loss levels in the transmitter service area.
433
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
Atoll calculates total losses from the transmitter on each bin of each transmitter service area. A bin of a service area is
coloured if total losses is greater than or equal to the defined minimum thresholds (bin colour depends on total losses).
Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers
as service areas. Each layer shows the different total losses levels in the transmitter service area.
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each bin of each transmitter service area. Where other service
areas overlap the studied one, Atoll determines the best transmitter and evaluates path loss from the best transmitter. A bin
of a service area is coloured if the path loss is greater than or equal to the defined thresholds (bin colour depends on path
loss). Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many
layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the path loss from the best server exceeds a defined
minimum threshold.
Atoll calculates signal levels received from transmitters on each bin of each transmitter service area. Where service areas
overlap the studied one, Atoll determines the best transmitter and evaluates total losses from the best transmitter. A bin of
a service area is coloured if the total losses is greater than or equal to the defined thresholds (bin colour depends on total
losses). Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many
layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the total losses from the best server exceed a defined
minimum threshold.
Number of Servers
Atoll evaluates how many service areas cover a bin in order to determine the number of servers. The bin colour depends on
the number of servers. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed.
There are as many layers as defined thresholds. Each layer corresponds to an area where the number of servers is greater than
or equal to a defined minimum threshold.
On each bin of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels where the signal level from this
transmitter fulfils signal conditions defined in Conditions tab with different Cell edge coverage probabilities. There is one
coverage area per transmitter in the explorer.
On each bin of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels where the best signal level received fulfils
signal conditions defined in Conditions tab. There is one coverage area per cell edge coverage probability in the explorer.
434
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
DL E b
----
FCH – DL
Eb/Nt target for FCH channel on
( Q req ) FCH -
N t req
(Service, Terminal, Mobility) parameter None
downlink
E bSCH – DL
----
- Eb/Nt target for SCH channel on
DL
( Q req ) SCH N t req None
downlink
(Service, Terminal, Mobility, SCH rate multiple) parameter
UL E b
----
FCH – UL
Eb/Nt target for FCH channel on
( Q req ) FCH -
N t req (Service, Terminal, Mobility) parameter None
uplink
E b
----
SCH – UL
- Eb/Nt target for SCH channel on
UL
( Q req ) SCH N t req None
uplink
(Service, Terminal, Mobility, SCH rate multiple) parameter
CE – U L Number of channel elements
N max ( N I ) Site parameter None
available for a site on uplink
CE – D L Number of channel elements
N max ( N I ) Site parameter None
available for a site on downlink
CE – U L Number of channel elements of a
N ( NI ) Simulation result None
site consumed by users on uplink
CE – D L Number of channel elements of a
N ( NI ) Simulation result None
site consumed by users on downlink
Number of channel elements used by
Overhead – C E – UL Site equipment parameter None the cell for common channels on
N
uplink
Number of channel elements used by
Overhead –C E – DL Site equipment parameter None the cell for common channels on
N
downlink
FCH – C E – UL Number of channel elements used
N (Terminal, site equipment) parameter None
for FCH on uplink
FCH –C E – DL Number of channel elements used
N (Terminal, site equipment) parameter None
for FCH on downlink
Codes Maximum number of Walsh codes
N max ( txi, ic ) Simulation constraint None
available per cell (128)
Codes Number of Walsh codes used by the
N ( txi, ic ) Simulation result None
cell
NF term Terminal parameter None Terminal Noise Figure
Transmitter parameter (user-defined or calculated from transmitter
NF Tx None Transmitter Noise Figure
equipment characteristics)
K 1.38 10-23 J/K Boltzman constant
435
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
DL
%Powermax Simulation constraint (global parameter or cell parameter) % Maximum percentage of used power
Tx Tx, UL
N0 NF Tx × K × T × W × NR inter – techno log y W Thermal noise at transmitter
Term Tx, DL
N0 NF Term × K × T × W × NR inter – techno log y W Thermal noise at terminal
DL DL DL
R SCH R FCH × Frate SCH bps Downlink SCH bit rate
UL UL UL
R SCH R FCH × Frate SCH bps Uplink SCH bit rate
DL
AF FCH Service parameter None Downlink activity factor on FCH
UL
AF FCH Service parameter None Uplink activity factor on FCH
436
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
max
P FCH Service parameter W Maximum power allowed for FCH
min
P SCH Service parameter W Minimum power allowed for SCH
max
P SCH Service parameter W Maximum power allowed for SCH
P FCH ( txi, ic ) P FCH ( txi, ic, tch ) W Total FCH power on carrier ic
tch ( FCH ( ic ) )
P pilot ( txi, ic ) + P Sync ( txi, ic ) + P paging ( txi, ic ) + P SCH ( txi, ic ) Transmitter total transmitted power
P tx ( txi, ic ) W
+ P FCH ( txi, ic ) on carrier ic
min
P term Terminal parameter W Minimum terminal power allowed
max
P term Terminal parameter W Maximum terminal power allowed
437
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and DL Eb/Nt DL Eb/Nt Shadowing margin
DL
None
standard deviation Only used in prediction studies
M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and UL Eb/Nt UL Eb/Nt Shadowing margin
UL
None
standard deviation Only used in prediction studies
UL npaths
G macro – diversity = M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) – M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt )
UL UL UL UL quality gain due to signal diversity
G macro – diversity None
n=2 or 3 in soft handoffc.
Global parameter (default value)
Random shadowing error drawn
E Shadowing Simulation result None during Monte-Carlo simulation
Only used in simulations
In prediction studiesd
P pilot ( txi, ic )
P c ( txi, ic ) ------------------------------- W Chip power received at terminal
LT
FCH – DL P FCH ( txi, ic, tch ) Bit received power at terminal for
Pb ( txi, ic, tch ) ----------------------------------------- W
LT FCH on carrier ic
SCH – DL P SCH ( txi, ic, tch ) Bit received power at terminal for
Pb ( txi, ic, tch ) ----------------------------------------- W
LT SCH on carrier ic
SCH
SCH – UL P term Bit received power at transmitter for
Pb ( ic ) ------------ W
LT SCH on carrier ic
UL UL
P c ( ic ) p × P tot ( ic ) W Chip received power at transmitter
438
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
a. L Tx = L total – UL on uplink and L Tx = L total – DL on downlink. For information on calculating transmitter losses on uplink and downlink,
see "UMTS, CDMA2000, TD-SCDMA, WiMAX, and LTE Documents" on page 26.
npaths
b. M Shadowing –Ec ⁄ Io corresponds to the shadowing margin evaluated from the shadowing error probability density function (n paths) in case
of downlink Ec/I0 modelling.
npaths
c. M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) corresponds to the shadowing margin evaluated from the shadowing error probability density function (n paths) in
UL
case of uplink soft handoff modelling.
d. In uplink prediction studies, only carrier power level is downgraded by the shadowing margin ( M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) ). In downlink
UL
prediction studies, carrier power level and intra-cell interference are downgraded by the shadowing model ( M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) or
DL
M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io ) while extra-cell interference level is not. Therefore, M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) or M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io is set to 1 in downlink
DL
extra-cell interference calculation.
DL Downlink extra-cell interference at
DL
I extra ( ic ) P tot ( txj, ic ) W
terminal on carrier ic
txj, j ≠ i
Tx Downlink inter-technology
P Transmitted ( ic i )
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) --------------------------------------
Tx
L total × ICP ic , ic
Tx, m W interference at terminal on carrier ic
n i a
i
E ρ BTS × α × P c ( txi, ic )
Q pilot ( txi, ic ) ⇔ ----c --------------------------------------------------
- Quality level at terminal on pilot for
I0 DL None
I 0 ( ic ) carrier ic
a. In the case of an interfering GSM external network in frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional load.
Term
b. In an active set, N 0 is calculated for all its members with Inter-technology downlink noise rise of the best server.
DL Downlink extra-cell interference at
DL
I extra ( ic ) P tot ( txj, ic ) W
terminal on carrier ic
txj, j ≠ i
439
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
DL
DL Q SCH ( ic ) Downlink soft handover gain for SCH
( G SHO ) SCH ----------------------------------------------------
- None
DL
Q SCH ( BestServer, ic ) channel on carrier ic
DL
( Q req )FCH Required transmitter FCH traffic
req
P FCH ( txi, ic ) - × P FCH ( txi, ic )
---------------------- W channel power to achieve Eb/Nt
DL
Q FCH ( ic ) target at terminal on carrier ic
DL
( Q req ) SCH Required transmitter SCH traffic
req
P SCH ( txi, ic ) - × P SCH ( txi, ic )
---------------------- W channel power to achieve Eb/Nt
DL
Q SCH ( ic ) target at terminal on carrier ic
req req req Required transmitter traffic channel
P tch ( txi, ic ) P FCH ( txi, ic ) + P SCH ( txi, ic ) W
power on carrier ic
a. In the case of an interfering GSM external network in frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional load.
b. Calculation option may be selected in the Global parameters tab. The chosen option will be taken into account only in simulations. In point
analysis and coverage studies, Atoll uses the option “Total noise” to evaluate DL and UL Eb/Nt.
c. Calculation option may be selected in the Global parameters tab. The chosen option will be taken into account only in simulations. In point
analysis and coverage studies, Atoll uses the option “Total noise” to evaluate DL and UL Eb/Nt.
440
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
( Pb
UL UL
( ic ) + P c ( ic ) ) Total power received at transmitter
UL
intra W from intra-cell terminals using carrier
I tot ( txi, ic ) term
txi
ic
UL
( P b ( ic ) + P c ( ic ) )
UL Total power received at transmitter
UL extra
I tot ( txi, ic ) W from extra-cell terminals using
term
txj, j ≠ i
carrier ic
( Pb
UL UL
( ic adj ) + P c ( ic adj ) )
UL Uplink inter-carrier interference at
I inter – carrier ( txi, ic ) term W
txj, ∀j
terminal on carrier ic
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
RF ( ic, ic adj )
UL
No HO: Q tch ( txi, ic )
UL UL
Softer HO: f rake efficiency × Q tch ( txk, ic )
tx k ∈ ActiveSet
( samesite )
UL
× G macro – diversity
UL
UL Q FCH ( ic ) Uplink soft handover gain for FCH
( G SHO ) FCH ----------------------------------------------------
- None
UL
Q FCH ( BestServer, ic ) channel on carrier ic
441
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
UL
( Q req ) FCH Required terminal power to achieve
FCH – req
P term ( ic ) - × P FCH
---------------------- term ( ic ) W Eb/Nt target at transmitter for FCH
UL
Q FCH ( ic ) on carrier ic
UL
( Q req ) SCH Required terminal power to achieve
SCH – req
P term ( ic ) ----------------------- × P SCH
term ( ic ) W Eb/Nt target at transmitter for SCH
UL
Q SCH ( ic ) on carrier ic
req FCH – req SCH – req Required terminal power on carrier
P term ( ic ) P term ( ic ) + P term ( ic ) W
ic
tx
a. In an active set, N 0 is calculated for all its members with Inter-technology uplink noise rise of the best server.
b. Calculation option may be selected in the Global parameters tab. The chosen option will be taken into account only in simulations. In point
analysis and coverage studies, Atoll uses the option “Total noise” to evaluate DL and UL Eb/Nt.
c. Calculation option may be selected in the Global parameters tab. The chosen option will be taken into account only in simulations. In point
analysis and coverage studies, Atoll uses the option “Total noise” to evaluate DL and UL Eb/Nt.
DL Downlink extra-cell interference at
DL
I extra ( ic ) P tot ( txj, ic ) W
terminal on carrier ic
txj, j ≠ i
Tx Downlink inter-technology
P Transmitted ( ic i )
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) --------------------------------------
Tx
L total × ICP ic , ic
Tx, m W interference at terminal on carrier ic
n i a
i
( Pb
UL UL
( ic ) + P c ( ic ) ) Total power received at transmitter
UL intra
I tot ( txi, ic ) W from intra-cell terminals using carrier
term
ic
txi
UL
( P b ( ic ) + P c ( ic ) )
UL Total power received at transmitter
UL extra
I tot ( txi, ic ) W from extra-cell terminals using
term
txj, j ≠ i
carrier ic
( Pb
UL UL
( ic adj ) + P c ( ic adj ) )
UL Uplink inter-carrier interference at
I inter – carrier ( txi, ic ) term W
txj, ∀j terminal on carrier ic
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
RF ( ic, ic adj )
442
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
UL
I tot ( txi, ic )
UL
F ( txi, ic ) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- None Cell uplink reuse factor on carrier ic
UL intra
Tx
I tot ( txi, ic ) × ( 1 – F MUD × ρ term )
P tx ( txi, ic )
----------------------------- Percentage of max transmitter
DL
%Power ( txi, ic ) - × 100 None
P max ( txi, ic ) power used.
DL
DL
I tot ( ic )
F ( txi, ic ) -----------------------------
DL
- None Downlink reuse factor on a carrier ic
I intra ( txi, ic )
DL DL
NR ( txi, ic ) – 10 log ( 1 – X ( txi, ic ) ) dB Noise rise on downlink
UL UL
NR ( txi, ic ) – 10 log ( 1 – X ( txi, ic ) ) dB Noise rise on uplink
a. In the case of an interfering GSM external network in frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional load.
443
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
Ec UL Parameter read in the 1xEV-DO Radio Bearer Selection (Uplink) table Minimum pilot quality level required
----
- None
N t min for 1xEV-DO Rev. A and Rev. B users to obtain a radio bearer in the uplink
444
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
Tx Tx, UL
N0 NF Tx × K × T × W × NR inter – techno log y W Thermal noise at transmitter
Term Tx, DL
N0 NF Term × K × T × W × NR inter – techno log y W Thermal noise at terminal
DL
R avg Simulation result bps Downlink average cell data rate
445
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
max
P term Terminal parameter W Maximum terminal power allowed
G RRI Terminal parameter (for 1xEV-DO Rev A terminals only) None Reverse Rate Indicator Channel gain
G Auxiliary – pilot Terminal parameter (for 1xEV-DO Rev A terminals only) None Auxiliary Pilot Channel gain
M Shadowing – ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and UL Eb/Nt UL Eb/Nt Shadowing margin
UL
None
standard deviation Only used in prediction studies
446
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
UL
NR threshold ( txi, ic ) Cell parameter dB Cell uplink noise rise threshold
prediction studies, carrier power level and intra-cell interference are downgraded by the shadowing model ( M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io ) while
extra-cell interference level is not. Therefore, M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io is set to 1 in downlink extra-cell interference calculation.
447
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
Tx Downlink inter-technology
P Transmitted ( ic i )
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) --------------------------------------
Tx
L total × ICP ic , ic
Tx, m W interference at terminal on carrier ic
n i a
i
DL DL DL
DL P tot ( txi, ic, b pilot ) + I extra ( ic, b pilot ) + I inter – carrier ( ic, b pilot ) Total noise based on pilot received at
I 0 ( ic, b pilot ) W
DL term terminal on carrier ic
+ I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N0
DL DL DL
DL P tot ( txi, ic, b traffic ) + I extra ( ic, b traffic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic, b traffic ) Total noise based on traffic received
I 0 ( ic, b traffic ) W
DL term at terminal on carrier ic
+ I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N0
Q pilot ( txi, ic ) DL
ρ BTS × α × P tot ( txi, ic, b pilot ) Pilot quality level at terminal on
E ---------------------------------------------------------------------- None
⇔ ----c ( txi, ic, b pilot )
DL
I 0 ( ic, b pilot ) carrier ic
I0
DL
E ρ BTS × α × P tot ( txi, ic, b pilot ) Pilot quality level at terminal on
----c- ( txi, ic, b pilot ) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- None
Nt DL
N tot ( ic, b pilot ) + ( 1 – ρ BTS ) × P tot ( txi, ic, b pilot )
DL carrier ic
DL
E ρ BTS × α × P tot ( txi, ic, b traffic ) Traffic quality level at terminal on
----c- ( txi, ic, b traffic ) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- None
Nt DL
N tot ( ic, b traffic ) + ( 1 – ρ BTS ) × P tot ( txi, ic, b traffic )
DL carrier ic
a. In the case of an interfering GSM external network in frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional load.
Pb
UL
( ic ) Total power received at transmitter
UL intra
I tot ( txi, ic ) W from intra-cell terminals using carrier
term
txi
ic
UL
P b ( ic ) Total power received at transmitter
UL extra
I tot ( txi, ic ) W from extra-cell terminals using
term
txj, j ≠ i
carrier ic
448
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
Pb
UL
( ic adj )
UL Uplink inter-carrier interference at
I inter – carrier ( txi, ic ) term W
txj, ∀j
terminal on carrier ic
-----------------------------------
-
RF ( ic, ic adj )
UL
No HO: Q ( txi, ic )
UL UL
Softer HO: f rake efficiency × Q tch ( txk, ic )
tx k ∈ ActiveSet
( samesite )
UL
× G macro – diversity
UL
UL Q total ( ic ) Uplink soft handover gain on carrier
G SHO -------------------------------------------------
- None
UL
Q ( BestServer, ic ) ic
Q req
UL Required terminal power to achieve
req
P term ( ic ) - × P term
---------------------- W Eb/Nt target at transmitter on carrier
UL
Q total ( ic ) ic
449
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
a. Calculation option may be selected in the Global parameters tab. The chosen option will be taken into account only in simulations. In point
analysis and coverage studies, Atoll uses the option “Total noise” to evaluate DL and UL Eb/Nt.
b. In simulations, the uplink Eb/Nt target is calculated without considering the aknowledgement signal.
Tx Downlink inter-technology
P Transmitted ( ic i )
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic ) -------------------------------------
L
Tx
× ICP
Tx, m
- W interference at terminal on carrier ic
ni total n i, ic a
Pb
UL
( ic ) Total power received at transmitter
UL intra
I tot ( txi, ic ) W from intra-cell terminals using carrier
term
txi
ic
UL
P b ( ic ) Total power received at transmitter
UL extra
I tot ( txi, ic ) W from extra-cell terminals using
term
txj, j ≠ i
carrier ic
Pb
UL
( ic adj )
UL Uplink inter-carrier interference at
I inter – carrier ( txi, ic ) term W
txj, ∀j
terminal on carrier ic
-----------------------------------
-
RF ( ic, ic adj )
450
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
UL
I tot ( txi, ic )
UL
F ( txi, ic ) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- None Cell uplink reuse factor on carrier ic
UL intra
Tx
I tot ( txi, ic ) × ( 1 – F MUD × ρ term )
a. In the case of an interfering GSM external network in frequency hopping, the ICP value is weighted according to the fractional load.
451
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
7.4 Simulations
The simulation process is divided into two steps:
1. Obtaining a realistic user distribution
Atoll generates a user distribution using a Monte-Carlo algorithm, which requires traffic maps and data as input. The
resulting user distribution complies with the traffic database and maps provided to the algorithm.
Each user is assigned a service, a mobility type, and an activity status by random trial, according to a probability law
that uses the traffic database.
The user activity status is an important output of the random trial and has direct consequences on the next step of
the simulation and on the network interferences. A user may be either active or inactive. Both active and inactive
users consume radio resources and create interference.
Additionally, each 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 user is assigned a transition flag ("True" or "False") for each possible data rate
transition (from 9.6 to 19.2 kbps, 19.2 to 38.4 kbps, 38.4 to 76.8 kbps, and 76.8 to 153.6 kbps for data rate upgrading
and from 153.6 to 76.8 kbps, 76.8 to 38.4 kbps, 38.4 to 19.2 kbps, and 19.2 to 9.6 kbps for data rate downgrading).
These transition flags are based on the data rate downgrading and upgrading probabilities. If a transition flag is "True,"
the user data rate can be downgraded or upgraded if necessary.
Then, Atoll randomly assigns a shadowing error to each user using the probability distribution that describes the
shadowing effect.
Finally, another random trial determines user positions in their respective traffic zone and whether they are indoors
or outdoors (according to the clutter weighting and the indoor ratio per clutter class defined for the traffic maps).
2. Modelling the network regulation mechanism
This algorithm depends on the network. Atoll uses a power control algorithm in case of CDMA2000 1xRTT networks
and a different algorithm, which mixes data rate control on downlink and power control on uplink, for CDMA2000
1xEV-DO networks.
Atoll determines the total number of users attempting connection in each simulation
based on the Poisson distribution. This may lead to slight variations in the total numbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulation of a group, add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0
• In case of user profile traffic maps composed of lines, the number of subscribers (X)
per user profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (D)
(nb of subscribers per km) as follows: X = L × D
• The number of subscribers (X) is an input when a user profile traffic map is composed
of points.
452
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
For each behaviour described in a user profile, according to the service, frequency use and exchange volume, Atoll calculates
the probability for the user being connected in uplink and in downlink at an instant t.
• Calculation of the service usage duration per hour ( p 0 : probability of a connection):
N call × d
p 0 = -------------------
-
3600
where N call is the number of calls per hour and d is the average call duration (in second).
Then, Atoll calculates the total number of users trying to access a certain service.
• Calculation of the number of users trying to access the service j ( n j ):
nj = X × p0
n j = n j ( UL ) + n j ( DL ) + n j ( UL + DL ) + n j ( inactive ) = n j ( UL + DL )
• Voice Users
Voice users are active on uplink and downlink. However, the FCH can have inactivity periods on both links. This is modelled by
UL DL
the FCH activity factor, AF FCH and AF FCH . Therefore, all voice service users try to access the service with the following FCH
UL UL DL DL
rates, R FCH × AF FCH on uplink and R FCH × AF FCH on downlink.
UL DL
R FCH and R FCH are respectively the uplink and downlink FCH nominal rates.
• Data Users
Data service users are active on uplink and downlink. FCH is always allocated but can have inactivity periods on both links; this
UL DL
is modelled by the FCH activity factor, AF FCH and AF FCH . SCH may be allocated with four possible rates (2x, 4x, 8x and 16xFCH
nominal rate).
Therefore, data service users can access the service with different rates. Possible rates are detailed in the table below:
Allocated rates
SCH rate factor r k
On UL On DL
UL UL DL DL
Only FCH is used - R FCH × AF FCH R FCH × AF FCH
453
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
Allocated rates
SCH rate factor r k
On UL On DL
UL UL DL DL
2x R FCH × ( AF FCH + 2) R FCH × ( AF FCH + 2 )
UL UL DL DL
4x R FCH × ( AF FCH + 4 ) R FCH × ( AF FCH + 4 )
Both FCH and SCH are used
UL UL DL DL
8x R FCH × ( AF FCH + 8 ) R FCH × ( AF FCH + 8 )
UL UL DL DL
16x R FCH × ( AF FCH + 16 ) R FCH × ( AF FCH + 16 )
UL DL
R FCH and R FCH are respectively the uplink and downlink FCH nominal rates.
Then, Atoll determines the distribution of users between the different possible rates.
UL DL
In case of a data service, j, several data rate probabilities, P k and P k , can be assigned to different rate factors, r k , for SCH
channel.
For data service users, a random trial compliant with data rate probabilities is performed for each link in order to determine
the rate for each user.
On uplink, we have:
rk
UL UL
For each SCH rate factor, r k , the number of users n j with the data rate R FCH × ( AF FCH + r k ) is calculated as follows,
rk
UL
nj = Pr × nj
k
FCH UL UL
Therefore, the number of users n j with the data rate, R FCH × AF FCH , is:
rk
nj
FCH
nj = nj –
r
k
On downlink, we have:
rk
DL DL
For each SCH rate factor, r k , the number of users, n j with the data rate, R FCH × ( AF FCH + r k ) , is calculated as follows,
rk
DL
nj = Pr × nj
k
FCH DL DL
Therefore, the number of users n j with the data rate, R FCH × AF FCH , is:
rk
nj
FCH
nj = nj –
rk
Pk
UL UL
Probability of being active on UL: p UL = ( Rk )
UL
Rk
454
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
Pk
UL UL
Probability of being inactive: p inactive = 1 – ( Rk )
UL
R
k
Therefore, we have:
Number of users active on UL: n j ( UL ) = n j × p UL
n j = n j ( UL ) + n j ( DL ) + n j ( UL + DL ) + n j ( inactive ) = n j ( UL ) + n j ( inactive )
UL
Then, Atoll determines the distribution of users between the different possible rates, R k . The number of users with the data
UL UL
rate R k , n j ( R k ) , is calculated as follows:
UL UL
nj ( Rk ) = P k × nj
• The user distribution per service is an average distribution and the service of each
user is randomly drawn in each simulation. Therefore, if you compute several
simulations at once, the average number of users per service will correspond to the
calculated distribution. But if you check each simulation, the user distribution
between services is different in each of them.
• It is the same for the SCH rate distribution between 1xRTT data service users and the
traffic data rate distribution between 1xEV-DO data service users.
• In calculations detailed above, we assume that the sum of data rate probabilities is
less than or equal to 1. If the sum of data rate probabilities exceeds 1, Atoll considers
normalised data rate probabilities values, P r ⁄ P r , instead of specified data rate
k k
rk
probabilities P r .
k
Atoll calculates the number of users active in UL and DL using the voice service in the Txi cell as follows:
UL DL
Rt Rt
N UL = -------
UL
- and N DL = -------
DL
-
Rj Rj
Where,
UL
Rt is the number of kbits per second transmitted in UL in the Txi cell to provide the service j to the users (user-
defined value in the traffic map properties)
455
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
DL
Rt is the number of kbits per second transmitted in DL in the Txi cell to provide the service j to the users (user-
defined value in the traffic map properties).
UL DL
Rj and R j correspond to the UL and DL rates of a user. FCH is always allocated to active users but can have
UL UL UL UL
inactivity periods on both links. Therefore, we have R j = R FCH × AF FCH (where R FCH is the service FCH nominal
UL DL DL DL DL
rate on UL and AF FCH corresponds to the FCH activity factor on UL) and R j = R FCH × AF FCH (where R FCH is the
DL
service FCH nominal rate on DL and AF FCH corresponds to the FCH activity factor on DL).
Users are always active on FCH for both links. Therefore, we have following activity probabilities.
inactive
Number of inactive users in UL and DL: n j = 0
• When selecting Total Number of Users (All Activity Statuses), you can input the number of connected users for
each sector ( n j ).
Users are always active on FCH for both links. Therefore, we have following activity probabilities.
• When selecting Number of Users per Activity Status, you can directly input the number of users active in the
uplink and downlink ( n j ( UL + DL ) ), for each sector.
UL UL DL DL
Voice service users try to access the service with the FCH rates, R FCH × AF FCH on uplink and R FCH × AF FCH on downlink.
All user characteristics determined, a second random trial is performed to obtain their geographical positions.
• Data Service Users (j)
456
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
FCH is always allocated to active users but can have inactivity periods on both links. This is modelled by the FCH activity factors,
UL DL
AF FCH and AF FCH . SCH may be allocated with four possible rates (2x, 4x, 8x, 16xFCH nominal rate). Several data rate
UL DL
probabilities, P k and P k , can be assigned to different rates factor, r k , for SCH channel.
Atoll calculates the number of users active in UL and DL using the service in the Txi cell as follows:
UL DL
Rt Rt
N UL = -------
UL
- and N DL = -------
DL
-
Rj Rj
Where,
UL
Rt is the number of kbits per second transmitted in UL in the Txi cell to provide the service j to the users (user-
defined value in the traffic map properties)
DL
Rt is the number of kbits per second transmitted in DL in the Txi cell to provide the service j to the users (user-
defined value in the traffic map properties).
UL DL
Rj and R j correspond to uplink and downlink rates of a user.
( r k + AF FCH ) × R FCH × P r + 1 – P r × R FCH × AF FCH
UL UL UL UL UL UL UL
Rj =
k k
rk rk
( r k + AF FCH ) × R FCH × P r + 1 – P r × R FCH × AF FCH
DL DL DL DL DL DL DL
Rj =
k k
rk rk
UL DL
R FCH and R FCH are the uplink and downlink FCH nominal rates respectively.
• In calculations detailed above, we assume that the sum of data rate probabilities is
less than or equal to 1. If the sum of data rate probabilities exceeds 1, Atoll considers
normalised data rate probabilities values, P r ⁄ P r , instead of specified data rate
k k
rk
probabilities P r .
k
Users are always active on FCH for both links. Therefore, we have following activity probabilities.
Then, Atoll calculates the number of users per activity status and the total number of users:
457
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
inactive
Number of inactive users in UL and DL: n j = 0
• When selecting Total Number of Users (All Activity Statuses), you can input the number of connected users for
each sector ( n j ).
Users are always active on FCH for both links. Therefore, we have following activity probabilities.
• When selecting Number of Users per Activity Status, you can directly input the number of users active in the
uplink and downlink ( n i ( UL + DL ) ), for each sector.
As explained above, data service users can access the service with different rates. Possible rates are detailed in the table
below:
Allocated rates
SCH rate factor r k
On UL On DL
UL UL DL DL
Only FCH is used - R FCH × AF FCH R FCH × AF FCH
UL UL DL DL
2x R FCH × ( AF FCH + 2 ) R FCH × ( AF FCH + 2 )
UL UL DL DL
4x R FCH × ( AF FCH + 4 ) R FCH × ( AF FCH + 4 )
Both FCH and SCH are used
UL UL DL DL
8x R FCH × ( AF FCH + 8 ) R FCH × ( AF FCH + 8 )
UL UL DL DL
16x R FCH × ( AF FCH + 16 ) R FCH × ( AF FCH + 16 )
Atoll determines the distribution of users with the different possible rates. A random trial compliant with data rate
probabilities is performed for each link in order to determine the data rate of each user.
On uplink, we have,
rk
UL UL
For each SCH rate factor, r k , the number of users n j with the data rate R FCH × ( AF FCH + r k ) is calculated as follows,
rk
UL
nj = Pr × nj
k
FCH UL UL
Therefore, the number of users n j with the data rate, R FCH × AF FCH , is,
rk
nj
FCH
nj = nj –
rk
On downlink, we have,
458
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
r
k DL DL
For each SCH rate factor, r k , the number of users, n j with the data rate, R FCH × ( AF FCH + r k ) , is calculated as follows,
k DL
nj = Pk × nj
FCH DL DL
Therefore, the number of users n j with the data rate, R FCH × AF FCH , is,
rk
nj
FCH
nj = nj –
rk
As power control is performed in the uplink only, 1xEV-DO data service users will be considered either active in the uplink or
inactive. 1xEV-DO data Rev. 0 service users can access the service with uplink rates of 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 76.8 and 153.6 kbps.
1xEV-DO data Rev. A and Rev. B service users can access the service with uplink rates of 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 76.8, 115.2, 153.6,
230.4, 307.2, 460.8, 614.4, 921.6, 1,228.8 and 1,848.2 kbps.
UL UL
For each service, j, several data rate probabilities, P k , can be assigned to different uplink rates R k . The number of users
active in uplink ( n j ( UL ) ) and the number of inactive users ( n j ( inactive ) ) are calculated into several steps. First of all, Atoll
determines the number of users active in UL using the service j in the Txi cell.
For each transmitter, Txi, and each service j:
UL
• When selecting Throughputs in Uplink and Downlink, you can input the throughput demands in UL ( R t ) for each
sector.
Atoll calculates the number of users active in UL using the service j in the Txi cell as follows:
UL
Rt
N UL = -------
UL
-
Rj
UL
Where R t is the number of kbits per second transmitted on UL in the Txi cell to provide the service j (user-defined
value in the traffic map properties).
UL
Rj corresponds to the uplink data rate for a user.
Pk
UL UL UL
Rj = × Rk
k
In the above calculations, we assume that the sum of data rate probabilities is less than
or equal to 1. If the sum of data rate probabilities exceeds 1, Atoll considers normalised
data rate probabilities values, P r ⁄ P r , instead of specified data rate probabilities
k k
rk
Pr .
k
Pk
UL UL
Probability of being active in UL: p UL = ( Rk )
UL
Rk
Pk
UL UL
Probability of being inactive: p inactive = 1 – ( Rk )
UL
Rk
Therefore, we have:
459
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
• When selecting Total Number of Users (All Activity Statuses), you can input the number of connected users for
each sector ( n j ).
Pk
UL UL
Probability of being active in UL: p UL = ( Rk )
UL
R
k
Pk
UL UL
Probability of being inactive: p inactive = 1 – ( Rk )
UL
Rk
Therefore, we have:
• When selecting Number of Users per Activity Status, you can directly input the number of inactive users
( n j ( inactive ) ) and the number of users active in the uplink ( n j ( UL ) ), for each sector.
n j = n j ( UL ) + n j ( inactive )
UL
Then, Atoll determines the distribution of users with the different possible rates. The number of users with the data rate R k ,
UL
n j ( R k ) , is calculated as follows:
UL UL
nj ( Rk ) = Pk × nj
The user distribution per service is an average distribution and the service of each user is
randomly drawn In each simulation. Therefore, if you compute several simulations at
once, the average number of users per service will correspond to the calculated
distribution. But if you check each simulation, the user distribution between services is
different in each of them.
It is the same for the SCH rate distribution between 1xRTT data service users and the
traffic data rate distribution between 1xEV-DO data service users.
460
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
The following table shows the data rate changes that are possible when a data rate is upgraded or downgraded. The
probabilities are defined with a number from 1 to 255 for each data rate.
Possible Data Rate Changes During Possible Data Rate Changes During
Upgrading Downgrading
From To From To
9.6 kbps 19.2 kbps 153.6 kbps 76.8 kbps
19.2 kbps 38.4 kbps 76.8 kbps 38.4 kbps
38.4 kbps 76.8 kbps 38.4 kbps 19.2 kbps
76.8 kbps 153.6 kbps 19.2 kbps 9.6 kbps
During the generation of the user distribution, each 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 user is assigned a random number between 1 and 255 for
each possible data rate transition. When this number is lower or equal to the value of the probability, the transition flag for
this data rate transition is set to "True" meaning that this data rate transition can be performed if necessary.
UL
The number of 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 users with a certain data rate that can be downgraded ( n j ( R k ) Downg ) and upgraded
UL
( n j ( R k ) Upg ) are calculated as follows:
UL UL UL
UL P Upg – k ( R k ) × n j ( R k )
n j ( R k ) Upg = ------------------------------------------------------
-
255
And
UL UL UL
UL P Downg – k ( R k ) × n j ( R k )
n j ( R k ) Downg = ------------------------------------------------------------
-
255
The number of users with a certain data rate that can be downgraded or upgraded is an
average. Therefore, if you compute several simulations at once, the average number of
users with a certain data rate that can be downgraded or upgraded will correspond to the
calculated value. But if you check each simulation, this number is different in each of
them.
461
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
UL UL
intra extra UL
Uplink received powers on carrier ic, I tot ( ic ) , I tot ( ic ) and I inter – carrier ( ic ) , at base station Sj are initialised to 0 W
(no connected mobile).
UL
UL I tot ( S j, ic )
⇔ X k ( S j, ic ) = -------------------------
UL
- = 0
N tot ( S j, ic )
For each transmitter Sj containing Mi in its calculation area and working on the main frequency band supported by the Mi’s
terminal (i.e. either f1 for a single frequency band network, or f1 or f2 for a dual-band terminal with the configuration 1, or f1
for a dual-band terminal with the configuration 2).
α × ρ BTS × P c ( Sj, M i, ic )
Calculation of Q pilot ( Sj, ic, M i ) = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Term
-
k DL DL DL DL
P tot ( Sj, ic ) + I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N 0
For each carrier ic, selection of the transmitter with the highest Q pilot ( Sj, M i, ic ) , ( S BS, ic ) ( M i ) .
k
462
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
Rejection of bad candidate cells if the pilot is not received or if the uplink load factor is exceeded during the admission load
control (if simulation respects a loading factor constraint and Mb was not connected in previous iteration)
pilot
If Q pilot ( S BS, M i, ic ) < Q req then (SBS,ic) is rejected by Mi
k
UL UL
If X k ( S BS, ic ) > X max , then (SBS,ic) is rejected by Mi
Else
Keep (SBS,ic) as good candidate cell
For dual band terminals with the configuration 1 or terminals working on one frequency band only, if no good candidate cell
has been selected, Mi has failed to be connected to the network and is rejected.
For dual band terminals with the configuration 2, if no good candidate cell has been selected, try to connect Mi to transmitters
txi containing Mi in their calculation area and working on the secondary frequency band supported by the Mi’s terminal (i.e.
f2). If no good candidate cell has been selected, Mi has failed to be connected to the network and is rejected.
Determination of the best carrier, icBS.
If a given carrier is specified for the service requested by Mi
Else the carrier selection mode defined for the site equipment is considered.
If carrier selection mode is “Min. UL Load Factor”
UL
ic BS ( M i ) is the cell with the lowest X k ( S BS, ic )
Endif
Determination of the best serving cell, (SBS,icBS).
max
(S BS,ic BS) k ( M i ) is the best serving cell ( BestCell k ( M i ) ) and its pilot quality is Q pilot ( M i ) .
k
In the following lines, we will consider ic as the carrier used by the best serving cell.
For each station Sj containing Mi in its calculation area, using ic, and if neighbours are used, neighbour of BestCell k ( M i )
α × ρ BTS × P c ( M i, S j )
Calculation of Q pilot ( M i, S j, ic ) = -------------------------------------------------
DL
-
k
I 0 ( ic )
463
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
EndFor
req
Calculation of the required power for Mi, P term ( M i, ic ) k
FCH – U L
UL ρ term × P b ( M i, S j, ic )
- × G FCH
Q FCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- p
– UL
( Service )
UL FCH – U L SCH – U L
N tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – F MUD ) × ρ term × ( P b ( M i, S j, ic ) + P b ( M i, S j, ic ) )
SCH – U L
UL ρ term × P b ( M i, S j, ic )
- × G SCH
Q SCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- p
– UL
( Service )
UL FCH – U L SCH – U L
N tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – F MUD ) × ρ term × ( P b ( M i, S j, ic ) + P b ( M i, S j, ic ) )
SCH – U L
UL ρ term × P b ( M i, S j, ic )
- × G SCH
Q SCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k = -------------------------------------------------------------- p
– UL
( Service )
UL
N tot ( ic )
End For
If (Mi is not in handoff)
UL UL UL UL
Q FCH ( M i ) = Q FCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k and Q SCH ( M i ) = Q SCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k
k k
UL UL UL
Q FCH ( M i ) = f rake efficiency × Q FCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k
k
S ∈ ActiveSet
j
UL UL UL
Q SCH ( M i ) = f rake efficiency × Q SCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k
k
S j ∈ ActiveSet
UL UL UL
Q SCH ( M i ) = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × Max ( Q SCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k )
k S j ∈ ActiveSet
UL UL UL
Q SCH ( M i ) = ( G macro – diversity ) 3 links × Max ( Q SCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k )
k S j ∈ ActiveSet
464
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
( M i ) = Max f rake efficiency × ( ic ) × ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links
UL UL UL UL UL
Q FCH Q FCH ( ic ), Q FCH
k
i ∈ ActiveSet other site
AS
(same site)
= Max f rake efficiency × ( ic ) × ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links
UL UL UL UL UL
Q SCH ( M i ) Q SCH ( ic ), Q SCH
k
i AS ∈ ActiveSet other site
(same site)
EndIf
UL
FCH – r eq ( Q req ( Service ( M i ), Term ( M i ), Mobility ( M i ) ) ) FCH
P term - × P FCH
( M i, ic ) k = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- term
– r eq
( M i, ic ) k – 1
UL
Q FCH ( M i )
k
UL
SCH – r eq ( Q req ( Service ( Mi ), Term ( M i ), Mobility ( M i ), SCH_rate_multiple ) ) SCH
P term - × P SCH
( M i, ic ) k = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- term
– r eq
( M i, ic ) k – 1
UL
Q SCH ( M i )
k
req min
If P term ( M i, ic ) k < P term ( M i ) then
min
FCH – r eq P term ( M i, S j )
P term - × P FCH
( M i, ic ) k = ------------------------------ term
– r eq
( M i, ic ) k
req
P term ( M i ) k
min
SCH – r eq P term ( M i, S j )
P term - × P SCH
( M i, ic ) k = ------------------------------ term
– r eq
( M i, ic )k
req
P term ( M i ) k
EndIf
FCH – r eq max
If P term ( M i, ic ) k > P term ( M i ) then Mi cannot select any station and its active set is cleared
req max
If P term ( M i, ic ) k > P term ( M i ) and Mi uses SCH then:
UL
UL R SCH ( Service ( M i ) )
R SCH ( Service ( M i ) ) > ----------------------------------------------
-
2
SCH – r eq
SCH – r eq P term ( M i, ic ) UL
( Q req ( Service ( M i ), Term ( M i ), Mobility ( M i ), R SCH ( Service ( M i ) ) ) ) SCH
UL
P term ( M i, ic ) k = -----------------------------------------k × ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 UL
( Q ( Service ( M ), Term ( M ), Mobility ( M ), R ( Service ( M ) × 2 ) ) )
UL
req i i i SCH i SCH
EndWhile
req max
If P term ( M i, ic ) k > P term ( M i ) then Mi will not use SCH
Endif
Endif
If the required number of channel elements exceeds the available quantity in the site of Sj (Best server of Mi) and Mi uses SCH
then:
Downgrading the service SCH rate:
CE – U L CE – U L UL UL
While N ( M i ) > N max ( S j ) and R SCH ( Service ( M i ) ) > R FCH ( Service ( M i ) ) × 2
465
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
UL
UL R SCH ( Service ( M i ) )
R SCH ( Service ( M i ) ) > ----------------------------------------------
-
2
CE – U L
CE – U L N SCH ( M i ) k
N SCH ( M i ) k = -----------------------------
-
2
SCH – r eq
SCH – r eq P term ( M i, ic ) SCH – UL
Q req ( Service ( M i ), Term ( M i ), Mobility ( M i ), R SCH ( Service ( M i ) ) )
UL
P term ( M i, ic ) k = -----------------------------------------k × -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Q
SCH – UL
( Service ( M ), Term ( M ), Mobility ( M ), R ( Service ( M ) × 2 ) )
UL
req i i i SCH i
CE – U L CE – U L CE – U L
N ( M i ) k = N SCH ( M i ) k + N FCH ( M i ) k
EndWhile
Endif
FCH – D L
DL ρ BTS × P b ( M i, S j )
- × G FCH
Q FCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- p
– DL
( Service ( M i ) )
DL DL
N tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – F ortho ) × ρ BTS × P b ( M i, S j, ic )
SCH – D L
DL ρ BTS × P b ( M i, S j )
- × G SCH
Q SCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- p
– DL
( Service ( Mi ) )
DL DL
N tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – F ortho ) × ρ BTS × P b ( M i, S j, ic )
EndIf
End For
Recombination of the first f active set links (f is the number of fingers of the Mi terminal): only quality levels from the first f
cells (Sf,ic) of active set are recombined.
DL DL DL
Q FCH ( M i ) = f rake efficiency × Q FCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k
k
S f ∈ ActiveSet ( FCH )
DL DL DL
Q SCH ( M i ) = f rake efficiency × Q SCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k
k
S f ∈ ActiveSet ( SCH )
Do
466
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
req max
If P FCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k > P FCH ( Service ( M i ) ) then ( S j, ic ) is excluded from Mi active set
DL
Recalculation of a decreased Q req
Downgrading the service SCH rate (only for (Sj,ic) best server cell of Mi):
req max DL
While P SCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k > P SCH ( Service ( M i ), R SCH ( Service ( M i ) ) )
req DL DL
Or P tx ( S j, ic ) k + P tch ( M i, S j, ic ) k > P max ( S j, ic ) and R SCH ( Service ( M i ) ) > R FCH ( Service ( M i ) ) × 2
DL
DL R SCH ( Service ( M i ) )
R SCH ( Service ( M i ) ) = ----------------------------------------------
-
2
req DL DL
req P SCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k ( Q req ( Service ( M i ), Term ( M i ), Mobility ( M i ), R SCH ( Service ( M i ) ) ) ) SCH
P SCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k = -------------------------------------- × ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 DL
( Q ( Service ( M ), Term ( M ), Mobility ( M ), R ( Service ( M ) × 2 ) ) )
DL
req i i i SCH i SCH
EndWhile
req max req
If P SCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k > P SCH ( Service ( M i ) ) or P tx ( S j, ic ) k + P tch ( M i, S j, ic ) k > P max ( S j, ic ) then Mi will not use SCH
Endif
CE – D L CE – D L DL DL
While N ( M i ) > N max ( S j ) and R SCH ( Service ( M i ) ) > R FCH ( Service ( M i ) ) × 2
DL
DL R SCH ( Service ( M i ) )
R SCH ( Service ( M i ) ) = ----------------------------------------------
-
2
CE – D L
CE – D L N SCH ( M i ) k
N SCH ( M i ) k = -----------------------------
-
2
req DL DL
req P SCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k ( Q req ( Service ( M i ), Term ( M i ), Mobility ( M i ), R SCH ( Service ( M i ) ) ) ) SCH
P SCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k = -------------------------------------- × ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 DL
( Q ( Service ( M ), Term ( M ), Mobility ( M ), R ( Service ( M ) × 2 ) ) )
DL
req i i i SCH i SCH
CE – D L CE – D L CE – D L
N ( M i ) k = N SCH ( M i ) k + N FCH ( M i ) k
EndWhile
CE – D L CE – D L
If N ( M i ) > N max ( S j ) then Mi will not use SCH
Endif
Codes Codes DL DL
While N ( M i ) > N max ( S j, ic ) and R SCH ( Service ( M i ) ) > R FCH ( Service ( M i ) ) × 2
DL
DL R SCH ( Service ( M i ) )
R SCH ( Service ( M i ) ) = ----------------------------------------------
-
2
467
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
Codes
Codes N SCH ( M i ) k
N SCH ( M i ) k = ----------------------------
-
2
req DL DL
req P SCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k ( Q req ( Service ( M i ), Term ( M i ), Mobility ( M i ), R SCH ( Service ( M i ) ) ) ) SCH
P SCH ( M i, S j, ic ) k = -------------------------------------- × ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 DL
( Q ( Service ( M ), Term ( M ), Mobility ( M ), R ( Service ( M ) × 2 ) ) )
DL
req i i i SCH i SCH
EndWhile
Codes Codes
If N ( M i ) > N max ( S j ) then Mi will not use SCH
Endif
Endif
EndFor
Recombination of the first f active set links (f is the number of fingers of the Mi terminal): only quality levels from the first f
cells (Sf,ic) of active set are recombined.
DL DL DL
Q FCH ( M i ) = f rake efficiency × Q FCH ( M i, S f, ic ) k
k
S f ∈ ActiveSet ( FCH )
DL DL DL
Q SCH ( M i ) = f rake efficiency × Q SCH ( M i, S f, ic ) k
k
S f ∈ ActiveSet ( SCH )
DL DL
While Q k ( M i ) < Q req ( Service ( M i ), Mobility ( M i ) ) and Mi FCH active set is not empty
DL DL
And Q k ( M i ) < Q req ( Service ( M i ), Mobility ( M i ) ) (if SCH active set is not empty)
Endif
Update of interference on active mobiles only (old contributions of mobiles and stations are replaced by the new ones)
For each cell (Sj,ic)
UL
Update of N tot ( S j, ic )
EndFor
For each mobile Mi
DL
Update of N tot ( ic )
EndFor
Control of Radio Resource Limits (Walsh Codes, Cell Power and Site Channel Elements)
P tx ( S j, ic ) DL
While -------------------------k > %Power max
P max
req
Rejection of mobile with highest P tch ( S j, M b, ic ) k for the lowest service priority
EndWhile
EndFor
For each site Nl
468
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
Activation of power pooling between transmitters for each cell (Sj,ic) containing rejected users
Control of the available power for the other cells (Si,ic) of the site where power pooling between transmitters is not activated
DL
If ( %Power max × P max – P tx ( S i, ic ) k ) > 0
( S , ic )
i
S ∈N
i l
Then, the power unused by the cells (Si,ic) of the site can be allocated to cells (Sj,ic)
Sort of all the rejected mobiles by priority in a descending order and by simulation rank in a descending order
For the first mobile Mb of the list ( M b ∈ L rejected ( N l ) )
req DL
If P tx ( S j, ic ) k + P tch ( S j, M b, ic ) k < %Power max × P max + M Pooling ( S j, ic )
Mb is reconnected
EndIf
EndFor
EndIf
EndFor
For each cell (Sj,ic)
Codes Codes
While N ( S j, ic ) k > N max ( S j, ic )
req
Rejection of mobile with highest P tch ( M i, S j ) k for the lowest service priority
CE – UL CE – UL
While N ( N I ) k > N max ( NI )
req
Rejection of mobile with highest P term ( M i, ic ) k for the lowest service priority
EndFor
UL UL
For each cell (Sj,ic) with X ( S j, ic ) > X max
P tx ( ic ) k – P tx ( ic ) k – 1 DL DL
N user ( ic ) k – N user ( ic ) k – 1
Δ DL = max int ma x ------------------------------------------------- × 100 , int ma x ------------------------------------------------------------ × 100
Stations P tx ( ic ) k Stations N
DL
( ic )
user k
UL UL
I tot ( ic ) k – I tot ( ic ) k – 1 UL UL
N user ( ic ) k – N user ( ic ) k – 1
Δ UL = max int ma x -------------------------------------------------- × 100 , int ma x ------------------------------------------------------------ × 100
Stations UL
I ( ic ) Stations N
UL
( ic )
tot k user k
1st case: Between two successive iterations, Δ UL and Δ DL are lower ( ≤ ) than their respective thresholds (defined when
creating a simulation).
The simulation has reached convergence.
469
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
Example: Let us assume that the maximum number of iterations is 100, UL and DL convergence thresholds are set to 5. If
Δ UL ≤ 5 and Δ DL ≤ 5 between the 4th and the 5th iteration, Atoll stops the algorithm after the 5th iteration. Convergence has
been achieved.
2nd case: After 30 iterations, Δ UL or/and Δ DL are still higher than their respective thresholds and from the 30th iteration, Δ UL
or/and Δ DL do not decrease during the next 15 successive iterations.
1. After the 30th iteration, Δ UL and/or Δ DL equal 100 and do not decrease during the next 15 successive iterations: Atoll stops
the algorithm at the 46th iteration. Convergence has not been achieved.
2. After the 30th iteration, Δ UL and/or Δ DL equal 80, they start decreasing slowly until the 40th iteration (without going under
the thresholds) and then do not change during the next 15 successive iterations: Atoll stops the algorithm at the 56th iteration
without achieving convergence.
In a CDMA2000 1xEV-DO system, power control is performed in the uplink only. In the downlink, the transmitter transmits at
the full power (Pmax) when a connection is established. Instead of power control, there is a data rate control based on the C/
I ratio calculated at the mobile. For each distribution of users, Atoll simulates the power control mechanism for the UL and
the data rate control for the DL.
The simulation uses an iterative algorithm, where in each iteration, all the 1xEV-DO data service users selected during the user
distribution generation (1st step) try to connect to network active transmitters with a calculation area. Atoll considers the
guaranteed bit rate service users first, in the order established during the generation of the user distribution, and then, it
processes the variable bit rate service users, in the order established during the generation of the user distribution.
The process is repeated from iteration to iteration until convergence is achieved. The algorithm steps are detailed below.
470
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
E UL
In the algorithm, ----c- is the minimum pilot quality level required in the uplink to operate 1xEV-DO Rev. 0. This
N t min – Rev0
threshold depends on the user mobility type and is defined in the Mobility parameters table.
Ec UL
----
- is the minimum pilot quality level required in the uplink to operate EV-DO multi-carrier. This threshold is
N t min – RevB
defined in the Transmitter properties dialogue.
E c UL
For 1xEV-DO Rev. A and Rev. B users, the value of ----- depends on the user requested data rate. This data rate can be
N t min
Ec UL
obtained by using a certain uplink 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index UL – Bearer ) in a certain number of subframes ( n SF ). -----
N t min
is the value defined in the 1xEV-DO Radio Bearer Selection (Uplink) table for the combination (radio bearer Index, mobility
and number of subframe) providing the user requested data rate. Two values are available for this parameter, one when the
service uplink mode is "Low Latency" and another one for high capacity services.
All variables are described in Definitions and formulas part (see "Definitions and Formulas" on page 434).
The algorithm applies to single frequency band networks and to dual-band networks. Dual-band terminals can have the
following configurations:
• Configuration 1: The terminal can work on f1 and f2 without any priority (select "All" as main frequency band in
the terminal property dialogue).
• Configuration 2: The terminal can work on f1 and f2 but f1 has a higher priority (select "f1" as main frequency band
and "f2" as secondary frequency band in the terminal property dialogue).
For each mobile Mi
For each transmitter Sj containing Mi in its calculation area and working on the main frequency band supported by the Mi’s
terminal (i.e. either f1 for a single frequency band network, or f1 or f2 for a dual-band terminal with the configuration 1, or f1
for a dual-band terminal with the configuration 2).
α × ρ BTS × P c ( Sj, M i, ic ,b pilot )
Calculation of Q pilot ( Sj, ic, M i ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Term
k DL DL DL
P tot ( Sj, ic ,b pilot ) + I extra ( ic ,b pilot ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ,b pilot ) + N 0
For each carrier ic, selection of the transmitter with the highest Q pilot ( Sj, M i, ic ) , ( S BS, ic ) ( M i ) .
k
Rejection of bad candidate cells if the pilot is not received or if the uplink load factor is exceeded during the admission load
control (if simulation respects a loading factor constraint and Mb was not connected in previous iteration)
pilot
If Q pilot ( S BS, M i, ic ) < Q req then (SBS,ic) is rejected by Mi
k
UL UL
If X k ( S BS, ic ) > X max , then (SBS,ic) is rejected by Mi
471
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
Else
Keep (SBS,ic) as good candidate cell
For dual band terminals with the configuration 1 or terminals working on one frequency band only, if no good candidate cell
has been selected, Mi has failed to be connected to the network and is rejected.
For dual band terminals with the configuration 2, if no good candidate cell has been selected, try to connect Mi to transmitters
txi containing Mi in their calculation area and working on the secondary frequency band supported by the Mi’s terminal (i.e.
f2). If no good candidate cell has been selected, Mi has failed to be connected to the network and is rejected.
Determination of the best carrier, icBS.
If a given carrier is specified for the service requested by Mi
Else the carrier selection mode defined for the site equipment is considered.
If carrier selection mode is “Min. UL Load Factor”
UL
ic BS ( M i ) is the cell with the lowest X k ( S BS, ic )
Endif
Determination of the best serving cell, (SBS,icBS).
max
(S BS,ic BS) k ( M i ) is the best serving cell ( BestCell k ( M i ) ) and its pilot quality is Q pilot ( M i ) .
k
In the following lines, we will consider ic as the carrier used by the best serving cell.
For each station Sj containing Mi in its calculation area, using ic, and if neighbours are used, neighbour of SBS(Mi)
DL
ρ BTS × α × P tot ( M i, S j, ic, b pilot )
Calculation of Q pilot ( M i, S j, ic ) = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
DL
-
k I 0 ( ic, b pilot )
EndFor
Determination of the Sub-active Sets of a EVDO Multi-carrier User
For multi-carrier EV-DO Rev.B service users with a 1xEV-DO Rev. B capable terminal, calculation of the quality level received
by the best serving cell (SBS,ic)
max
Ec UL ρ term × P term ( M i )
----
- ( S BS, ic ) = ------------------------------------------
-
N t UL
L T × N tot ( S BS, ic )
E c UL E c UL
If ----- ( S BS, ic ) < ----- ( S BS ) then EV-DO multi-carrier is not activated.
N t N t min
472
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
For each transmitter Sj containing Mi in its calculation area and using other EV-DO carriers, icn (either icn belongs to f1 for a
single frequency band network, or it belongs to f1 or f2 for a dual-band terminal)
Calculation of Q pilot ( Sj, ic n, M i )
k
Ranking of carriers, icn,according to Q pilot ( Sj, ic n, M i ) , from the highest to the lowest value.
k
Determination of the best transmitter of the sub-active set, based on the received pilot quality, Q pilot ( Sj, ic n, M i ) .
k
Determination of the other transmitters of the sub-active set, based on the received pilot quality, Q pilot ( Sj, ic n, M i ) .
k
Calculation of the quality level received by the best serving cell (SBS,icn)
max
Ec UL ρ term × P term ( M i )
----
- ( S BS, ic n ) = ------------------------------------------
-
N t UL
L T × N tot ( S BS, ic n )
E UL E UL
If ----c- ( S BS, ic n ) < ----c- ( S BS ) , then no sub-active set is associated with icn
N t N t min
If the user terminal supports the ’Locked’ mode, analysis of the sub-active set
If a transmitter of the studied sub-active set does not belong to the sub-active set associated with the best carrier, then it is
removed.
If the studied sub-active set does not contain the same transmitters as the sub-active set associated with the best carrier, then
the studied sub-active set is removed.
EndIf
Endwhile
EndFor
req
Calculation of the required power for Mi, P term ( M i, ic ) k
For each cell (Sj,ic) present in the Mi active set or sub-active set
Calculation of quality level on Mi traffic channel at (Sj,ic), with the minimum power allowed on traffic channel for the Mi
service
req
UL P term ( M i, ic ) k – 1
P b ( M i, S j, ic ) = ---------------------------------------
-
L T ( M i, S j )
UL
UL ρ term × P b ( M i, S j, ic )
- × G UL
Q ( M i, S j, ic ) k = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- p ( Service )
UL Tx UL
N tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – F MUD ) × ρ term × P b ( M i, S j, ic )
If the user selects the option “Total noise”
UL
UL ρ term × P b ( M i, S j, ic )
- × G UL
Q ( M i, S j, ic ) k = ---------------------------------------------------- p ( Service )
UL
N tot ( ic )
End For
If (Mi is not in handoff)
UL UL
Q total ( M i ) = Q ( M i, S j, ic )
k
UL UL UL
Q total ( M i ) = f rake efficiency × Q ( M i, S j, ic ) k
k
S j ∈ ActiveSet
473
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
= Max f rake efficiency × × ( G UL
UL UL UL UL
Q total ( M i ) Q ( M i, S j, ic ) k, Q ( M i, S j, ic ) k macro – diversity ) 2 links
k
i AS ∈ ActiveSet othersite
(same site)
EndIf
UL
req Q req ( Service ( M i ), Term ( M i ), Mobility ( M i ) )
- × P req
P term ( M i, ic ) k = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- term ( M i, ic ) k – 1
UL
Q total ( M i )
k
DL
Calculation of the maximum data rate supplied to Mi, R max ( M i, S k )
If Mi is a 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 service user, determination of the maximum data rate from the graph (Max rate=f(C/I)) specified for
the mobility type of Mi
E
R max ( M i, S k ) = f ----c- ( M i, S k, ic, b pilot )
DL
Nt
If Mi is a 1xEV-DO Rev. A service user, selection of the downlink 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index DL – Bearer ): Index DL – Bearer
Ec Ec DL
where ----- ( M i, S k, ic, b pilot ) ≥ ----- ( Index DL – Bearer )
Nt Nt min
If Mi is a 1xEV-DO Rev. B service user, selection of the downlink 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index DL – Bearer ): Index DL – Bearer
E E DL
where ----c- ( M i, S k, ic, b pilot ) ≥ ----c- ( Index DL – Bearer ) and the modulation scheme is supported by the terminal.
Nt Nt min
DL
DL R RLC – Peak ( Index DL – Bearer )
Determination of the maximum data rate: R max ( M i, S k ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------
n TS ( Index DL – Bearer )
DL DL
R application ( M i, S k ) = R max ( M i, S k ) × SF rate ( Service ( Mi ) ) – ΔR ( Service ( Mi ) )
UL
Determination of the uplink data rate due to TCP acknowledgements, R TCP – ACK ( M i, S k ) from the graph (UL Thr due to
TCP=f(DL Thr) specified for the service of Mi
UL DL
R TCP – ACK ( M i, S k ) = f ( R application ( M i, S k ) )
474
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
UL UL UL
Determination of the nearest lower and higher supported rates ( R low and R high ) for R TCP – ACK ( M i, S k )
UL UL UL UL UL UL
For R low and R high , calculation of CI req ( R low ) and CI req ( R high )
E UL
CI req = ----c-
UL
× ( 1 + G DRC + G TCH ) for DO Rev.0 terminals
N t min
And
E UL
CI req = ----c-
UL
× ( 1 + G DRC + G TCH + G RRI + G Auxiliary – pilot ) for DO Rev.A and DO Rev.B terminals
N t min
EndFor
UL UL UL UL UL UL
Linear interpolation of CI req ( R TCP – ACK ) between CI req ( R low ) and CI req ( R high )
UL UL UL UL UL
CI req = CI req ( R ) + CI req ( R TCP – ACK )
UL UL W
Q req = CI req × -----------------------------------------
UL UL
-
( R + R TCP – ACK )
EndIf
req req min
P term ( M i, ic ) k = Max ( P term ( M i, ic ) k, P term ( M i, S j ) )
And
UL
R ( Service ( M i ) ) ≥ 9.6kbps for 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 users,
UL
R ( Service ( M i ) ) ≥ 4.8kbps for (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Variable bit rate) service users,
UL
R ( Service ( M i ) ) ≥ 4.8kbps for single-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B service users,
UL UL
R ( Service ( M i ) ) ≥ R Guaranteed ( Service ( M i ) ) for (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Guaranteed bit rate) service users,
req
req P term ( M i, ic ) k
P term ( M i, - × R UL
ic ) k = -------------------------------------------
UL
low ( Service ( M i ) ) ( R low ( Service ( M i ) ) is the nearest lower supported data rate)
UL
R ( Service ( M i ) )
For 1xEV-DO Rev. 0, (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Variable bit rate) and single-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B service users,
UL UL
R ( Service ( M i ) ) = R low ( Service ( M i ) )
UL UL
For (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Guaranteed bit rate) service users, R ( Service ( M i ) ) = R Guaranteed ( Service ( M i ) )
EndWhile
req max
If P term ( M i, ic ) k > P term ( M i ) then Mi is rejected
For 1xEV-DO Rev. 0, (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Variable bit rate) and single-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B service users,
req
P term ( M i, ic ) = P term ( M i, ic ) k
req
For (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Guaranteed bit rate) service users, P term ( M i, ic ) = P term ( M i, ic ) k × C UL – Bearer
Endif
Endif
For multi-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B service users, load balancing between carriers is performed. The available terminal power is
equally shared between each carrier:
475
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
max
req P term ( M i )
If P term ( M i, ic ) k > -----------------------------
carriers
- , then:
n ( Mi )
Downgrading the traffic data channel data rate
max
req P term ( M i )
- and R UL ( Service ( ( M i ), ic ) ) > 153, 6kbps
While P term ( M i, ic ) k > -----------------------------
carriers
n ( Mi )
req
req P term ( M i, ic ) k
- × R UL
P term ( M i, ic ) k = -------------------------------------------------------
UL
low ( Service ( M i ) ) ( R low ( Service ( M i ) ) is the nearest lower supported data
UL
R ( Service ( ( M i ), ic ) )
rate)
UL UL
R ( Service ( ( M i ), ic ) ) = R low ( Service ( M i ) )
EndWhile
max
req P term ( M i )
If P term ( M i, ic ) k > -----------------------------
carriers
- , then Mi is not connected to cells of the sub-active set.
n ( Mi )
Endif
If no sub-active set can be used, then Mi is rejected.
Endif
UL
Calculation of R ( Service ( M i ) ) for each combination of carriers
R
UL UL
R ( Service ( M i ) ) = ( Service ( ( Mi ), ic ) ) where n corresponds to the number of carriers in the combination.
ic = 1
UL
Selection of the configuration providing the highest total throughput, Max ( R ( Service ( M i ) ) ) .
UL UL UL
If Max ( R ( Service ( M i ) ) ) > R high ( Service ( Mi ) ) ( R high ( Service ( Mi ) ) is the nearest supported data rate higher than the
requested data rate)
Downgrading the traffic data channel rate
UL UL UL
While Max ( ( R ( Service ( Mi ) ) ) > R high ( Service ( M i ) ) ) and R ( Service ( ( M i ), ic ) ) > 153, 6kbps
EndWhile
EndIf
Endfor
Update of interference on active mobiles only (old contributions of mobiles and stations are replaced by the new ones)
For each cell (Sj,ic)
UL
Update of N tot ( S j, ic )
EndFor
Control of Radio Resource Limits (Number of EVDO users, MAC Indices and Site Channel Elements)
476
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
UL UL UL
For each cell (Sj,ic) with NR ( S j, ic ) > NR threshold ( S j, ic ) + ΔNRthreshold ( S j, ic )
UL UL UL
While NR ( S j, ic ) > NR threshold ( S j, ic ) + ΔNRthreshold ( S j, ic ) and there is at least one mobile that can be downgraded
Downgrading the traffic data channel rate for all 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 mobiles for which the data rate transition flag is set to "True".
UL
Update of N tot ( S j, ic )
Endwhile
UL UL UL
For each cell (Sj,ic) with NR ( S j, ic ) < NR threshold ( S j, ic ) – ΔNRthreshold ( S j, ic )
UL UL UL
While NR ( S j, ic ) < NR threshold ( S j, ic ) – ΔNRthreshold ( S j, ic ) and there is at least one mobile that can be upgraded
Upgrading the traffic data channel rate for all 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 mobiles for which the data rate transition flag is set to "True".
(only 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 mobiles which have not been downgraded can be upgraded. In addition, the upgraded data rate cannot
exceed the initial user data rate drawn by the Monte-Carlo algorithm. This means that only mobiles downgraded during the
uplink power control step can be upgraded).
UL
Update of N tot ( S j, ic )
Endwhile
UL UL
For each cell (Sj,ic) with X ( S j, ic ) > X max
EndFor
EndFor
DL
Calculation of the maximum data rate supplied to Mi, R max
For the Mi’s best server cell (Sk,ic) (in the active set or each sub-active set)
Calculation of pilot quality level at Mi
477
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
DL
E P tot ( M i, S k, ic, b pilot )
----c- ( M i, S k, ic, b pilot ) = --------------------------------------------------
-
Nt DL
N tot ( ic, b pilot )
If Mi is a 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 service user, determination of the maximum data rate from the graph (Max rate=f(C/I)) specified for
the mobility type of Mi
E
R max ( M i, S k ) = f ----c- ( M i, S k, ic, b pilot )
DL
Nt
If Mi is a 1xEV-DO Rev. A service user, selection of the downlink 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index DL – Bearer ) for which
E E DL
----c- ( M i, S k, ic, b pilot ) ≥ ----c- ( Index DL – Bearer )
Nt Nt min
If Mi is a 1xEV-DO Rev. B service user, selection of the downlink 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index DL – Bearer ) for which
E E DL
----c- ( M i, S k, ic, b pilot ) ≥ ----c- ( Index DL – Bearer ) and the modulation is supported by Mi’s terminal.
Nt Nt min
DL DL
If Mi is a (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Guaranteed bit rate) service user and R RLC – peak ( Index DL – Bearer ) < R Guaranteed ( Service ( M i ) ) , Mi
is rejected.
DL
DL R RLC – Peak ( Index DL – Bearer )
Determination of the maximum data rate: R max ( M i, S k, ic ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------
n TS
For 1xEV-DO Rev. 0, (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Variable bit rate) and single-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B service users,
DL DL
R max ( M i ) = R max ( M i, S k, ic )
DL DL
For (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Guaranteed bit rate) service users, R max ( M i ) = R Guaranteed ( Service ( M i ) )
DL DL
For multi-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B service users, R max ( M i ) = R max ( M i, S k, ic )
( S k, ic )
For (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Guaranteed bit rate) service users, calculation of C DL – Bearer
EndFor
DL
Calculation of the average cell data rate, R av
G MU is determined from the graph (MUG table=f(nb users)) specified for (Sj,ic). If the transmitter supports the multi-carrier
EV-DO mode, G MU is determined from the graph (MUG table=f(nb users)) specified for Sj.
G MU ( N mobiles ( S j, ic ) ) ×
R max ( M i, S j, ic )
DL
M i ∈ NVBR –m obiles ( Sj, ic )
----------------------------------------------------------------------------- × 1 – C DL – Bearer ( M k, S j, ic )
N VBR – m obiles ( S j, ic )
M k ∈ N GBR – m obiles ( S j, ic )
DL
R av ( S j, ic ) = ×
R Guaranteed ( M k )
DL
M k ∈ NGBR –m obiles ( Sj, ic )
+ --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ×
N GBR –m obiles ( S j, ic ) C DL – Bearer ( M k, S j, ic )
M ∈ N ( S , ic )
k GBR – m obiles j
N mobiles
1 – ( ER ( S , ic ) ) × ( 1 – TS
DRC j BCMCS ( S j, ic ) – TS EVDO – CCH ( S j, ic ) ) + R BCMCS ( S j, ic ) × TS BCMCS ( S j, ic )
478
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
EndIf
EndFor
UL UL
I tot ( ic ) k – I tot ( ic ) k – 1 UL UL
N user ( ic ) k – N user ( ic ) k – 1
Δ UL = max int ma x -------------------------------------------------- × 100 , int ma x ------------------------------------------------------------ × 100
Stations UL
I ( ic ) Stations N
UL
( ic )
tot k user k
1st case: Between two successive iterations, Δ UL is lower ( ≤ ) than the threshold (defined when creating a simulation).
2nd case: After 30 iterations, Δ UL is still higher than the threshold and from the 30th iteration, Δ UL does not decrease during
the next 15 successive iterations.
The simulation has not reached convergence (specific divergence symbol).
Examples: Let us assume that the maximum number of iterations is 100, UL convergence threshold is set to 5.
1. After the 30th iteration, Δ UL equals 100 and do not decrease during the next 15 successive iterations: Atoll stops the
algorithm at the 46th iteration. Convergence has not been achieved.
2. After the 30th iteration, Δ UL equals 80, it starts decreasing slowly until the 40th iteration (without going under the
threshold) and then does not change during the next 15 successive iterations: Atoll stops the algorithm at the 56th iteration
without achieving convergence.
7.4.3 Appendices
7.4.3.1 Admission Control
During admission control, Atoll calculates the uplink load factor of a considered cell assuming the mobile concerned is
connected with it. Here, activity status assigned to users is not taken into account. So even if the mobile is not active on UL,
it can be rejected due to cell load saturation. To calculate the cell UL load factor, either Atoll takes into account the mobile
power determined during power control if mobile was connected in previous iteration, or it estimates a load rise due to the
UL
mobile and adds it to the current load. The load rise ( ΔX ) is calculated as follows:
UL 1
ΔX = -----------------------------------
W
1 + UL ------------------------
UL
-
Q req × R
479
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
Figure 7.3: Walsh Code Tree Indices (Not Walsh Code Numbers)
128 128-bit-length Walsh codes per cell are available in CDMA2000 documents.
During the resource control, Atoll determines the number of 128-bit-length Walsh codes that will be consumed by each cell.
Therefore, it allocates :
• A code with the longest length (i.e. a 128 bit-length code) per common channel for each cell. The number of common
channels per cell corresponds to the value defined for the DL overhead resources for common channels per cell
parameter available in the site equipment properties.
• Two 128 bit-length codes per cell-receiver link for FCH in RC1, RC2, RC3 or RC5 and only one for FCH in RC4.
• The number of 128 bit-length codes to be allocated per cell-receiver link for SCH (in case SCH is supported by the user
Walsh codes
radio configuration), N 128 bits , is determined as follows:
Walsh codes DL
N 128 bits = Frate SCH × 2 for RC1, RC2, RC3 and RC5,
And
Walsh codes DL
N 128 bits = Frate SCH for RC4.
Where
DL
Frate SCH is the SCH rate factor.
The Walsh code allocation follows the “Buddy” algorithm, which guarantees that:
• If a k-length Walsh code is used, all of its children with lengths 2k, 4k, …, cannot be used as they are not orthogonal.
• If a k-length Walsh code is used, all of its ancestors with lengths k/2, k/4, …, cannot be used as they are not orthogonal.
• The Walsh code allocation follows the mobile connection order (mobile order in the
Mobiles tab).
• The Walsh code and channel element management is dealt with differently in case of
“softer” handoff. Atoll allocates Walsh codes for each transmitter-receiver link while
it assigns channel elements globally to a site.
CE – UL
Therefore, the number of channel elements required on uplink at the site level, N ( N I ) , is:
N
CE – UL CE – UL
N ( NI ) = (j)
j ∈ NI
480
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
CE – DL
In the downlink, Atoll consumes N ( j ) channel elements for each cell j on a site NI. This figure includes:
Overhead – CE – DL
• N channel elements for control channels (Pilot channel, Synchronisation channel, Paging channel),
FCH – CE – DL DL
• N × ( 1 + Frate SCH ) per cell-receiver link, for TCH (TCH correspond to Traffic channels i.e. FCH and SCH).
CE – DL
Therefore, the number of channel elements required on downlink at the site level, N ( N I ) , is:
N
CE – DL CE – DL
N ( NI ) = (j)
j∈N
I
In case of “softer” handover (the mobile has several links with co-site cells), Atoll
allocates channel elements for the best serving cell-mobile link only.
CE – UL
In the uplink, Atoll consumes N ( j ) channel elements for each cell j on a site NI. This figure includes:
• 2 channel elements for control channels (Pilot channel, Data Rate Control channel, etc ). This value is fixed and hard-
coded.
TCH – CE – UL
• N per cell-receiver link, for (EV-DO - Variable bit rate) service users.
TCH – CE – UL
• N × C UL – Bearer per cell-receiver link, for (EV-DO - Guaranteed bit rate) service users.
CE – UL
Therefore, the number of channel elements required on uplink at the site level, N ( N I ) , is:
N
CE – UL CE – UL
N ( NI ) = (j)
j ∈ NI
In the downlink, only one user can be served by a cell at a time, so this resource is not limited.
FCH SCH
So, we have CI req = CI req + CI req
In case of soft handoff, required quality is limited to the effective contribution of the transmitter.
Ptch ( ic )
DL ortho
P tx ( ic ) = P pilot ( ic ) + P sync ( ic ) + P paging ( ic ) + P SCH ( ic ) + P FCH ( ic ) = P CCH ( ic ) +
tch
where
ortho
P CCH ( ic ) = P pilot ( ic ) + P sync ( ic ) + P paging ( ic )
481
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
DL term
( I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) ) × L T + ( 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS ) × P tx ( ic ) + N 0 × L T
P tch ( ic ) = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1
----------- + ( 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS )
CIreq
where
DL
I intra ( ic ) is the total power received at receiver from the cell to which it is connected.
DL
I extra ( ic ) is the total power received at receiver from other cells.
(I
extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) ) × L T
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DL
P tx ( ic )
DL term
+ ( 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS ) × P tx ( ic ) + N 0 × L T
DL ortho
P tx ( ic ) = P CCH ( ic ) + --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
tch ----------- + ( 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS )
CI req
(---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) ) × L T
+ 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS
tch
DL
P tx ( ic )
DL DL
P tx ( ic ) – --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ P tx ( ic )
1
----------- + ( 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS )
CI req
term
ortho N0 × LT
= P CCH ( ic ) +
---------------------------------------------------------------
1
tch ----------- + ( 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS )
CI req
term
ortho N0 × LT
CCH
P ( ic ) + --------------------------------------------------------------
1
-
tch ----------- + ( 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS )
DL
CI req
P tx ( ic ) = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
( I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) ) × L T
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS
DL
P tx ( ic )
1 –
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
-
tch ----------- + ( 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS )
CI req
482
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
(---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) ) × L T
+ 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS
P
DL
( ic )
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
DL tx
X =
1
tch ----------- + ( 1 – F ortho × ρ BTS )
CI req
The downlink load factor represents the signal degradation in relative to the reference interference (thermal noise).
EndFor
UL
BestCarrier k ( S j, M i ) is the carrier with the lowest X k ( S j, ic )
α × ρ BTS × P c ( M i, S j, BestCarrier )
Calculation of Q pilot ( M i, S j, BestCarrier ) = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DL
-
k I 0 ( BestCarrier k ( S j, M i ) )
max
If Q pilot ( M i, S j, BestCarrier ) > Q pilot ( M i )
k k
483
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
Admission control (If simulation respects a load factor constraint and Mi was not connected in previous iteration).
UL UL
If X k ( S j, BestCarrier k ( S j, M i ) ) > X max , then Sj is rejected by Mi
Else
max
Q pilot ( M i ) = Q pilot ( M i, S j, BestCarrier )
k k
S BS ( M i ) = S j
Endif
EndFor
If no SBS has been selected and Mi’s terminal can work on one frequency band only, Mi has failed to be connected to the
network and is rejected.
If no SBS has been selected and Mi’s terminal can work on another frequency band.
Determination of BestCarrier k ( Sj, M i ) for each station txj containing Mi in its calculation area and using another frequency
band supported by the Mi’s terminal (i.e. f1 or f2 for a dual-band terminal without any priority on frequency bands, or f2 for
a dual-band terminal with f2 as secondary frequency band)
If a given carrier is specified for the service requested by Mi and if it is used by Sj
EndFor
UL
BestCarrier k ( S j, M i ) is the carrier with the lowest X k ( S j, ic )
α × ρ BTS × P c ( M i, S j, BestCarrier )
Calculation of Q pilot ( M i, S j, BestCarrier ) = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DL
-
k
I 0 ( BestCarrier k ( S j, M i ) )
max
If Q pilot ( M i, S j, BestCarrier ) > Q pilot ( M i )
k k
Admission control (If simulation respects a load factor constraint and Mi was not connected in previous iteration).
UL UL
If X k ( S j, BestCarrier k ( S j, M i ) ) > X max , then Sj is rejected by Mi
Else
max
Q pilot ( M i ) = Q pilot ( M i, S j, BestCarrier )
k k
S BS ( M i ) = S j
484
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
Endif
EndFor
If no SBS has been selected, Mi has failed to be connected to the network and is rejected.
We assume that ic is the best carrier of a transmitter i containing the receiver in its calculation radius.
For CDMA2000 1xRTT users we have,
ρ BTS × α × P c ( i, ic )
Q pilot ( i, ic ) = ---------------------------------------------
DL
I 0 ( ic )
DL DL DL DL DL term
with I 0 ( ic ) = P tot ( i, ic ) + I extra ( ic ) + I inter – carrier ( ic ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N 0
DL DL DL DL DL term
With I 0 ( ic, b pilot ) = P tot ( i, ic, b pilot ) + I extra ( ic, b pilot ) + I inter – carrier ( ic, b pilot ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic ) + N 0
The calculation of Q pilot ( i, ic ) can be divided into 6 steps explained in the table below.
485
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
DL
P pilot ( i, ic ) P tot ( i, ic, b pilot ) = -----------------------------------
-
P c ( i, ic ) = -------------------------- LT
I
LT
I and
P tx ( i, ic, b pilot ) = P max ( i, ic )
We have,
Ptot ( j, ic )
DL DL
I extra ( ic ) = DL DL
I extra ( ic, b pilot ) and I inter – carrier ( ic, b pilot ) calculation
j, j ≠ i
DL
For each transmitter of the network, P tot ( j, ic ) is the total power We have,
received at the receiver from the transmitter j on the best carrier ic
of the transmitter i.
Ptot ( j, ic, bpilot )
DL DL
P tx ( j, ic ) I extra ( ic, b pilot ) =
DL
P tot ( j, ic ) = -------------------- j, j ≠ i
2nd step
LT
N0 calculation
Tx, DL
NF Term × K × T × W × NR inter – techno log y
4th step
DL
I 0 ( ic ) and Q pilot ( i, ic ) evaluation based on formulas defined above
DL
G macro – diversity calculation
DL
The macro-diversity gain, G macro – diversity , models the decrease in shadowing margin due to the fact there are several pilot signals at the
mobile.
5th step
DL npaths
G macro – diversity = M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io – M Shadowing –Ec ⁄ Io
npaths
M Shadowing – Ec ⁄ Io is the shadowing margin for the mobile receiving n pilot signals (not necessarily from transmitters belonging to the
mobile active set).
Note: This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage probability and the model standard deviation. When the model
standard deviation is set to 0, the macro-diversity gain equals 0.
486
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
BS will be the one used by other transmitters of active set (when active set size is greater than 1). Pilot is available.
Resulting req
If Q pilot ( ic ) < Q pilot , no cell (i,ic) can enter the active set. Pilot is unavailable.
Then, pilot qualities at the receiver from transmitters i (other than the best server) on the best carrier of the best server, icBS, are
recalculated to determine the entire receiver active set (when active set is greater than 1). Same formulas and calculation method are
used to update
DL
I 0 ( ic BS ) and determine Q pilot ( i, ic BS ) .
Other cells (i,icBS) in active set must fulfill the following criteria:
pilot
Q pilot ( i, ic BS ) ≥ Q min
( i, ic BS ) ∈ neighbour list ( BS, ic BS ) (optional)
For multi-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev.B service users, these results are detailed for each sub-active set. For each carrier, Atoll displays
the thermal noise, I0 (Best server), the pilot quality from the best server and from the other servers of the sub-active set, and
the downlink macro-diversity gain. They are calculated as described above.
• Number of cells in active set
This is a user-defined input in the terminal properties. It corresponds to the active set size.
• Number of fingers
The number of fingers, f, of the rake receiver. This parameter is defined in the terminal properties. It is relevant in CDMA2000
1xRTT only11. This is the maximum number of active set links that the terminal (rake) can combine.
• Thermal noise
487
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
Atoll calculates the traffic channel quality on SCH from each cell (k,icBS). No power control is performed as in simulations.
Here, Atoll determines the downlink traffic channel quality on SCH at the receiver for the maximum traffic channel power per
transmitter allowed on SCH. This value depends on the downlink data rate specified in the analysis. Then, after combination,
the total downlink traffic channel quality on SCH is evaluated and compared with the specified target quality.
• Eb/Nt target on FCH and Eb/Nt target on SCH
DL
Eb/Nt target on FCH ( ( Q req ) FCH ) is the downlink traffic data quality target on the fundamental channel (FCH). This value is
user-defined for a given service and terminal.
DL
Eb/Nt target on SCH ( ( Q req ) SCH ) is the downlink traffic data quality target on the supplemental channel (SCH). This value is
specified for a given service, terminal and SCH rate.
• Required transmitter powers on FCH and SCH
req req
The calculation of the required transmitter powers on FCH and SCH ( P FCH and P SCH ) may be divided into three steps.
1st step: Eb/Nt max for the first f (number of fingers) cells of active set
DL DL
Let us assume the following notations: Eb/Nt max on FCH and SCH respectively correspond to ( Q max ) FCH and ( Q max ) SCH .
And
DL – SCH
DL ρ BTS × P b –max ( k, ic BS )
- × G DL
( Q max ( k, ic BS ) ) SCH = -------------------------------------------------------- p
– SCH
DL
N tot ( ic BS )
max max
DL – FCH P FCH DL – SCH P SCH
With P b ( k, ic BS ) = ----------
- , P b –max ( k, ic BS ) = ----------
-
LT LT
k k
DL DL DL DL DL term
And N tot ( ic BS ) = I intra ( ic BS ) + I extra ( ic BS ) + I inter – carrier ( ic BS ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic BS ) + N 0
Where
max
P FCH is the maximum power allowed on FCH. This parameter is user-defined in the Services table for a certain terminal.
max
P SCH is the maximum power allowed on SCH for the specified downlink data rate. This parameter is user-defined in the
Services table for a certain terminal and SCH rate.
L T is the total loss between the transmitter i and the receiver.
k
DL
N tot ( ic BS ) is the total noise at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
With
DL
I intra ( ic BS ) = ( 1 – ρ BTS × F ortho ) × P DL ( k, ic )
tot BS
And
Ptot ( j, icBS )
DL DL
I extra ( ic BS ) =
j, j ≠ k
DL
For each transmitter in the network, P tot ( ic BS ) is the total power received at the receiver from this transmitter on icBS.
DL
I inter – carrier ( ic BS ) is the inter-carrier interference at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
488
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
Ptot ( j, icadj )
DL
DL , ∀j
I inter – carrier ( ic BS ) = txj
----------------------------------------
-
RF ( ic BS, ic adj )
RF ( ic BS, ic adj ) is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic BS ) is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
Tx
P Transmitted ( ic i )
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic BS ) = -----------------------------------------
Tx Tx, m
ni
L total × ICP ic , ic
i BS
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx, m
ICPic , ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i BS
2nd step: Calculation of the total traffic channel quality on FCH and SCH
DL
( Q MAX ) FCH is the traffic channel quality on FCH at the receiver on icBS after combining the signal from each cell (k,icBS).
Where
DL
f rake efficiency is the downlink rake efficiency factor defined in Terminal properties.
DL
( Q MAX ) SCH is the traffic channel quality on SCH at the receiver on icBS after combining the signal from each cell (k,icBS).
req req
3rd step: P FCH and P SCH calculation
DL
req ( Q req ) FCH
- × P max
P FCH = --------------------------------------- FCH
DL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) FCH
DL
req ( Q req ) SCH
- × P max
P SCH = --------------------------------------- SCH
DL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) SCH
• Eb/Nt max on FCH for the first f (number of fingers) cells of active set
DL
Let us assume the following notation: Eb/Nt max on FCH corresponds to ( Q max ) FCH .
489
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
max
DL – FCH P FCH
- and N DL
With P b –max ( k, ic BS ) = ----------
DL DL DL term
tot ( ic BS ) = I intra ( ic BS ) + I extra ( ic BS ) + I inter – carrier ( ic BS ) + N 0
LT
k
Where
max
P FCH is the maximum power allowed on FCH. This parameter is user-defined in the Services table for a certain terminal.
DL
N tot ( ic BS ) is the total noise at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
With
max req
DL
I intra ( ic BS ) = ( 1 – ρ BTS × F ortho ) × P DL P FCH – P FCH
tot ( k, ic BS ) – ( 1 – ρ BTS ) × max (----------------------------,0)
LT
k
And
Ptot ( j, icBS )
DL DL
I extra ( ic BS ) =
j, j ≠ k
DL
For each transmitter in the network, P tot ( ic BS ) is the total power received at the receiver from the transmitter on icBS.
DL
I inter – carrier ( ic BS ) is the inter-carrier interference at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
Ptot ( j, icadj )
DL
DL txj, ∀j
I inter – carrier ( ic BS ) = ----------------------------------------
-
RF ( ic BS, ic adj )
RF ( ic BS, ic adj ) is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic BS ) is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
Tx
P Transmitted ( ic i )
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic BS ) = -----------------------------------------
Tx Tx, m
ni
L total × ICP ic , ic
i BS
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx, m
ICP ic , ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i BS
• Eb/Nt max on SCH for the first f (number of fingers) cells of active set
DL
Let us assume the following notation: Eb/Nt max on SCH corresponds to ( Q max ) SCH .
max
DL – SCH P SCH
With P b –max ( k, ic BS ) = -----------
LT
k
DL DL DL DL DL term
and N tot ( ic BS ) = I intra ( ic BS ) + I extra ( ic BS ) + I inter – carrier ( ic BS ) + I inter – techno log y ( ic BS ) + N 0
Where
490
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
max
P SCH is the maximum power allowed on SCH for the specified downlink data rate. This parameter is user-defined in the
Services table for a certain terminal and SCH rate.
L T is the total loss between the transmitter i and the receiver.
k
DL
N tot ( ic BS ) is the total noise at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
With
max req
DL
I intra ( ic BS ) = ( 1 – ρ BTS × F ortho ) × P DL P SCH – P SCH
tot ( k, ic BS ) – ( 1 – ρ BTS ) × max (----------------------------,0)
LT
k
And
Ptot ( j, icBS )
DL DL
I extra ( ic BS ) =
j, j ≠ k
DL
For each transmitter in the network, P tot ( ic BS ) is the total power received at the receiver from the transmitter on icBS.
DL
I inter – carrier ( ic BS ) is the inter-carrier interference at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
Ptot ( j, icadj )
DL
DL , ∀j
I inter – carrier ( ic BS ) = txj
----------------------------------------
-
RF ( ic BS, ic adj )
RF ( ic BS, ic adj ) is the interference reduction factor, defined between ic and icadj and set to a value different from 0.
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic BS ) is the inter-technology interference at the receiver on the best carrier of the best server.
Tx
P Transmitted ( ic i )
DL
I inter – techno log y ( ic BS ) = -----------------------------------------
Tx Tx, m
ni
L total × ICP ic , ic
i BS
th
ic i is the i interfering carrier of an external transmitter
Tx, m
ICPic , ic is the inter-technology Channel Protection between the signal transmitted by Tx and received by m assuming the
i BS
Where
DL
f rake efficiency is the downlink rake efficiency factor defined in Terminal properties.
DL
( Q MAX ) SCH is the traffic channel quality on SCH at the receiver on icBS after combining the signal from each cell (k,icBS).
491
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
DL DL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) SCH = ( Q max ( k, ic BS ) ) SCH
DL DL
Therefore, the service on the downlink traffic channel is available if ( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) FCH ≥ ( Q req ) FCH and
DL DL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) SCH ≥ ( Q req ) SCH .
DL DL DL
( Q eff ) FCH = min ( ( Q MAX ) FCH, ( Q req ) FCH )
And
DL DL DL
( Q eff ) SCH = min ( ( Q MAX ) SCH, ( Q req ) SCH )
• Downlink soft handover gain on FCH and downlink soft handover gain on SCH
DL DL
( G SHO ) FCH and ( G SHO ) SCH respectively correspond to DL soft handover gains on FCH and SCH.
DL
DL ( Q MAX ( ic BS ) )FCH
( G SHO ) FCH = --------------------------------------------------------------
DL
-
max ( ( Q max ( k, ic BS ) ) FCH )
k
And
DL
DL ( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) SCH
( G SHO ) SCH = --------------------------------------------------------------
DL
-
max ( ( Q max ( k, ic BS ) ) SCH )
k
DL DL
max ( Q max ( k, ic BS ) ) corresponds to the highest Q max ( k, ic BS ) value.
k
For 1xEV-DO Rev.0 and 1xEV-DO Rev. A users, Atoll displays the following results:
• Required rate
DL
The required rate, R req , is the downlink data rate selected for the analysis.
• Required C/I
For 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 users, the required C/I ( --- ) is determined from the graph “Max Rate=f(C/I)” defined for the mobility
C
I req
type selected in the analysis. It corresponds to the value read in the graph “Max Rate=f(C/I) (Rev0)” for the specified required
DL
rate, R req .
DL
For 1xEV-DO Rev. A users, the required data rate ( R req ) is obtained by using a certain downlink transmission format (i.e. a
1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index DL – Bearer ) with a certain number of timeslots ( n TS )). It is calculated as follows:
DL
DL R RLC – peak ( Index DL – Bearer )
R req = ------------------------------------------------------------------
n TS
492
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
C
--- is the value defined in the 1xEV-DO Radio Bearer Selection (Downlink) table for this downlink transmission format
I req
(radio bearer Index, mobility and number of timeslots). It corresponds to the C/I required to obtain the defined required rate,
DL
R req .
• Effective C/I
Ec
Let ----- ( ic BS, b pilot ) be the effective C/I at the receiver on icBS.
Nt
For the best cell (BS,icBS) of the receiver active set, we have:
pilot
E α × Q resulting ( ic BS )
----c- ( ic BS, b pilot ) = ---------------------------------------------
-
Nt pilot
α – Q resulting ( ic BS )
Where
pilot DL
Q resulting ( ic BS ) = G macro – diversity × Q pilot ( ic BS )
BS
DL
For 1xEV-DO Rev. A users, the effective data rate ( R ) provided on downlink depends on the downlink transmission format,
i.e the radio bearer index ( Index DL – Bearer ) with the number of timeslots ( n TS ). For the defined mobility type, Atoll selects
E
the downlink transmission format where ----c- ( ic BS, b pilot ) ≥ --- . Then, it determines the downlink effective data rate as
C
Nt I req
follows:
DL
DL R RLC – peak ( Index DL – Bearer )
R = ------------------------------------------------------------------
n TS
DL DL
The traffic data channel in downlink is available if R ≥ R req .
• Bearer Consumption
For (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Guaranteed bit rate) service users, Atoll calculates the 1xEV-DO bearer consumption.
DL
R Guaranteed
C DL – Bearer = ------------------------------------------------------------------
DL
R RLC – peak ( Index DL – Bearer )
DL
Where R Guaranteed corresponds to the minimum bit rate required by the service in the downlink.
For single-carrier and multi-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B users, Atoll displays the following results:
• Required rate
DL
The required rate, R req , is the downlink data rate selected for the analysis.
R
DL DL
R = ( ic )
ic
DL DL
The traffic data channel on downlink is available if R ≥ R req .
• For each sub-active set, Atoll indicates the effective C/I and the effective data rate:
493
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
E
Let ----c- ( ic, b pilot ) be the effective C/I at the receiver on ic, the carrier associated with the sub-active set.
Nt
For the best cell (BS,ic) of the receiver sub-active set, we have:
pilot
E α × Q resulting ( ic )
----c- ( ic, b pilot ) = -----------------------------------------
Nt pilot
α – Q resulting ( ic )
Where
pilot DL
Q resulting ( ic ) = G macro – diversity × Q pilot ( ic )
BS
DL
The effective data rate ( R ( ic ) ) provided on downlink depends on the downlink transmission format, i.e the radio bearer
index ( Index DL – Bearer ) with the number of timeslots ( n TS ). For the defined mobility type, Atoll selects the downlink
Ec
transmission format where ----- ( ic, b pilot ) ≥ ---
C
and whose modulation scheme is supported by the terminal.
Nt I req
C
---
I req is the value defined in the 1xEV-DO Radio Bearer Selection (Downlink) table for this downlink transmission format
(radio bearer Index, mobility and number of timeslots). It corresponds to the C/I required to obtain the defined required rate,
DL
R req .
We have:
max max
( P term ) pilot = p × P term
Where p is the percentage of the terminal power dedicated to pilot. This parameter is user-defined in the terminal properties.
And
max UL UL UL
( P term ) FCH ( Q req ) FCH R FCH × AF FCH
- × -------------------------------
------------------------- = ----------------------
max UL UL
( P term ) SCH ( Q req ) SCH R SCH
Therefore,
max
max ( 1 – p ) × P term
( P term ) FCH = ----------------------------------------------------------------------
UL UL
-
( Q req ) SCH × R SCH
1 + ------------------------------------------------------------
UL UL UL
-
( Q req ) FCH × R FCH × AF FCH
And
494
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
max
max ( 1 – p ) × P term
( P term ) SCH = ----------------------------------------------------------------------
UL UL UL
-
( Q req ) FCH × R FCH × AF FCH
1 + ------------------------------------------------------------
UL UL
-
( Q req ) SCH × R SCH
UL UL
1st step: Evaluation of uplink traffic channel qualities on FCH and SCH, ( Q max ( ic BS ) ) and ( Q max ( ic BS ) ) , for each cell
i FCH i SCH
of active set.
For each cell (i,icBS), we have:
UL – FCH
UL ρ term × P b –max ( i, ic BS )
- × G UL
( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) FCH = --------------------------------------------------------- p
– FCH
UL
N tot ( i, ic BS )
And
UL – SCH
UL ρ term × P b –max ( i, ic BS )
( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) SCH - × G UL
= --------------------------------------------------------- p
– SCH
UL
N tot ( i, ic BS )
max max
UL – FCH ( P term ) FCH ( P term ) SCH
- and P UL
With P b –max ( i, ic BS ) = ------------------------
– SCH
b – max ( i, ic BS ) = -------------------------
LT LT
i i
UL
N tot ( i, ic BS ) is the total noise at the transmitter on the best carrier of the best server. This value is deduced from the cell
UL
uplink load factor X ( i, ic BS ) .
tx
UL N0
N tot ( i, ic BS ) = -----------------------------------
UL
-
1 – X ( i, ic BS )
tx
N 0 is the transmitter thermal noise.
UL UL
2nd step: Calculation of FCH and SCH total traffic channel qualities at the transmitter on icBS, ( Q MAX ) FCH and ( Q max ) SCH ,
based on the receiver handover status.
If there is no handoff, we have:
UL UL UL UL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) )FCH = ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) FCH and ( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) SCH = ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) SCH
And
UL UL UL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) )SCH = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max ( ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) SCH )
i
UL
( G macro – diversity ) 2 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
UL UL
max ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) corresponds to the highest Q max ( i, ic BS ) value.
i
495
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
And
UL UL UL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) SCH = ( G macro – diversity ) 3 links × max ( ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) SCH )
i
UL
( G macro – diversity ) 3 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain.This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
For softer and softer-softer handovers, we have:
For softer-soft handover, there are two possibilities. If the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters), we
have:
UL
UL UL UL UL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) FCH = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max f rake efficiency × ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) FCH, ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) )
i on the other site FCH
i on the same site
And
UL
UL UL UL UL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) SCH = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max f rake efficiency × ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) SCH, ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) )
i on the other site SCH
i on the same site
otherwise,
UL UL UL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) FCH = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max ( ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) FCH )
i
And
UL UL UL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) SCH = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max ( ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) SCH )
i
req req
3rd step: Calculation of ( P term ) FCH and ( P term ) SCH
UL UL
req ( Q req ) FCH ( Q req ) SCH
- × ( P max
( P term ) FCH = ---------------------------------------
req
- × ( P max
term ) FCH and ( P term ) SCH = --------------------------------------- term ) SCH
UL UL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) FCH ( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) SCH
Where
UL
( Q req ) FCH is the user-defined uplink data traffic quality target on FCH for a given service and a terminal. This parameter is
available in the Services table.
UL
( Q req ) SCH is the user-defined uplink data traffic quality target on SCH for a given service, terminal and SCH rate. This
parameter is available in the Services table.
req
Then, from the required terminal power on FCH and SCH, Atoll determines the total terminal power required ( P term ).
req req
As ( P term ) pilot = p × P term , we have:
req req
req ( P term ) FCH + ( P term ) SCH
P term = ---------------------------------------------------------
1–p
req max
Therefore, the service on the uplink data traffic channel is available if P term ≤ P term .
496
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
max
UL – FCH ( P term ) FCH
With P b –max ( i, ic BS ) = ------------------------
-
LT
i
UL
N tot ( i, ic BS ) is the total noise at the transmitter on the best carrier of the best server. This value is deduced from the cell
UL
uplink load factor X ( i, ic BS ) .
tx max req
UL N0 P FCH – P FCH
N tot ( i, ic BS ) = -----------------------------------
UL
- + ( 1 – ρ term ) × max (---------------------------
-,0)
1 – X ( i, ic BS ) LT
i
tx
N 0 is the transmitter thermal noise.
max
UL – SCH ( P term ) SCH
With P b –max ( i, ic BS ) = -------------------------
LT
i
UL
N tot ( i, ic BS ) is the total noise at the transmitter on the best carrier of the best server. This value is deduced from the cell
UL
uplink load factor X ( i, ic BS ) .
tx max req
UL N0 P SCH – P SCH
N tot ( i, ic BS ) = -----------------------------------
UL
- + ( 1 – ρ term ) × max (---------------------------
-,0)
1 – X ( i, ic BS ) LT
i
tx
N 0 is the transmitter thermal noise.
And
UL UL UL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) )SCH = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max ( ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) SCH )
i
UL
( G macro – diversity ) 2 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
UL UL
max ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) corresponds to the highest Q max ( i, ic BS ) value.
i
497
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
And
UL UL UL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) SCH = ( G macro – diversity ) 3 links × max ( ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) SCH )
i
UL
( G macro – diversity ) 3 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
For softer and softer-softer handovers, we have:
For softer-soft handover, there are two possibilities. If the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters), we
have:
UL
UL UL UL UL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) FCH = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max f rake efficiency × ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) FCH, ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) )
i on the other site FCH
i on the same site
And
UL
UL UL UL UL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) SCH = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max f rake efficiency × ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) SCH, ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) )
i on the other site SCH
i on the same site
otherwise,
UL UL UL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) FCH = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max ( ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) FCH )
i
And
UL UL UL
( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) SCH = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max ( ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) SCH )
i
UL
( Q eff ) SCH is the uplink effective traffic channel quality on SCH at the receiver on icBS.
UL UL UL UL UL UL
( Q eff ) FCH = min ( ( Q MAX ) FCH, ( Q req ) FCH ) and ( Q eff ) SCH = min ( ( Q MAX ) SCH, ( Q req ) SCH )
UL
( G SHO ) SCH corresponds to the UL soft handover gain on SCH.
UL UL
UL ( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) FCH ( Q MAX ( ic BS ) ) SCH
- and ( G UL
( G SHO ) FCH = ------------------------------------------------------------ SHO ) SCH = ------------------------------------------------------------
-
UL UL
max ( ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) )FCH ) max ( ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) SCH )
I I
UL UL
max ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) corresponds to the highest Q max ( i, ic BS ) value.
I
For each cell (l,icBS) in the receiver active set, Atoll calculates the uplink quality level from the receiver. No power control is
performed as in simulations. Here, Atoll determines the uplink quality level at the cell for the maximum terminal power
498
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
allowed. Then, the total uplink quality level is evaluated with respect to the receiver handover status. From this value, Atoll
calculates the required terminal power and compares it with the maximum terminal power allowed.
• Max terminal power
max
The Max terminal power parameter ( P term ) is user-defined for each terminal. It corresponds to the maximum terminal power
allowed.
• Required terminal power with ACK
req
The required terminal power ( P term ) calculation may be divided into four steps:
UL
1st step: Evaluation of the uplink quality, Q max ( i, ic BS ) , for each cell of active set
max
UL P term
With P b –max ( i, ic BS ) = ------------
LT
i
UL
N tot ( i, ic BS ) is the total noise at the transmitter on the best carrier of the best server. This value is deduced from the cell
UL
uplink load factor X ( i, ic BS ) .
tx max req
UL N0 P term – P term
N tot ( i, ic BS ) = -----------------------------------
UL
- + ( 1 – ρ term ) × max (------------------------------
-,0)
1 – X ( i, ic BS ) LT
i
tx
N 0 is the transmitter thermal noise.
UL
2nd step: Calculation of the total quality at the transmitter on icBS ( Q MAX ) based on the receiver handover status.
UL
( G macro – diversity ) 2 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain.This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
UL UL
max ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) corresponds to the highest Q max ( i, ic BS ) value.
i
UL
( G macro – diversity ) 3 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
For softer and softer-softer handovers, we have:
Qmax ( i, icBS )
UL UL UL
Q MAX ( ic BS ) = f rake efficiency ×
i
499
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
For softer-soft handover, there are two possibilities. If the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters), we
have:
UL
Qmax ( i, icBS ), Qmaxi on the other site ( i, icBS )
UL UL UL UL
Q MAX ( ic BS ) = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max f rake efficiency ×
i on the same site
otherwise,
UL UL UL
Q MAX ( ic BS ) = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) )
i
UL
3rd step: Evaluation of the required quality level on uplink, Q req
Where
Ec
----
UL
- is the minimum pilot quality level on uplink. This parameter is available in the Mobility types table.
N t min
G ACK , G DRC and G TCH are respectively acknowledgement, data rate control and traffic data gains relative to the pilot. They
are defined in the terminal properties (1xEV-DO Rev. 0 tab).
In case of a 1xEV-DO Rev. A capable terminal, we have:
E UL
Q req = ----c-
UL UL
× G p × ( 1 + G ACK + G DRC + G TCH + G RRI + G Auxiliary – pilot )
N t min
Where
Ec
----
UL
UL
- is the minimum pilot quality level required on uplink to obtain the defined data rate, R req . The required data rate,
N t min
UL
R req (i.e. the uplink data rate selected for the analysis) is obtained by using a certain uplink transmission format (i.e. 1xEV-DO
radio bearer ( Index UL – Bearer ) with a certain number of subframes ( n SF )) and calculated as follows:
UL
UL R RLC – peak ( Index UL – Bearer )
R req = ------------------------------------------------------------------
-
n SF
Ec
----
UL
-
N t min is the value defined in the 1xEV-DO Radio Bearer Selection (Uplink) table for this uplink transmission format (radio
bearer Index, mobility and number of subframe). Two values are available for this parameter, one when the service uplink
mode is "Low Latency" and another one for high capacity services.
G ACK , G DRC , G TCH , G RRI and G Auxiliary – pilot are respectively acknowledgement, data rate control, traffic data channel,
reverse rate indicator and auxiliary pilot channel gains relative to the pilot. They are defined in the terminal properties (1xEV-
DO Rev. A tab). Two values of G TCH are available, one when the service uplink mode is "Low Latency" and another one for
high capacity services.
req
4th step: Calculation of P term
UL
req Q req
- × P max
P term = -------------------------- term
UL
Q MAX ( ic BS )
req max
Therefore, the service on the uplink traffic data channel is available if P term ≤ P term .
500
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
And
E UL
( Q req ) withoutACK = ----c-
UL UL
× G p × ( 1 + G DRC + G TCH + G RRI + G Auxiliary – pilot ) for 1xEV-DO Rev. A capable terminals
N t min
And then,
UL
req ( Q req ) withoutACK
- × P max
( P term ) withoutACK = -------------------------------------- term
UL
Q MAX ( ic BS )
• UL SHO gain
UL
1st step: Evaluation of the uplink quality, Q max ( i, ic BS ) , for each cell of active set.
max
UL P term
With P b –max ( i, ic BS ) = ------------
LT
i
UL
N tot ( i, ic BS ) is the total noise at the transmitter on the best carrier of the best server. This value is deduced from the cell
UL
uplink load factor X ( i, ic BS ) .
tx max req
UL N0 P term – P term
N tot ( i, ic BS ) = -----------------------------------
UL
- + ( 1 – ρ term ) × max (------------------------------
-,0)
1 – X ( i, ic BS ) LT
i
tx
N 0 is the transmitter thermal noise.
UL
2nd step: Calculation of the total quality at the transmitter on icBS ( Q MAX ) based on the receiver handover status.
UL
Q MAX ( ic BS ) is the traffic channel quality at the transmitter on icBS after signal combination of all the transmitters of the active
set.
If there is no handoff, we have:
UL UL
Q MAX ( ic BS ) = Q max ( i, ic BS )
UL
( G macro – diversity ) 2 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
UL UL
max ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) ) corresponds to the highest Q max ( i, ic BS ) value.
i
UL
( G macro – diversity ) 3 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
For softer and softer-softer handovers, we have:
501
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
Qmax ( i, icBS )
UL UL UL
Q MAX ( ic BS ) = f rake efficiency ×
i
For softer-soft handover, there are two possibilities. If the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters), we
have:
UL
Qmax ( i, icBS ), Qmaxi on the other site ( i, icBS )
UL UL UL UL
Q MAX ( ic BS ) = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max f rake efficiency ×
i on the same site
otherwise,
UL UL UL
Q MAX ( ic BS ) = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) )
i
UL
UL Q MAX ( ic BS )
G SHO = -----------------------------------------------
UL
-
max ( Q max ( i, ic BS ) )
i
• Bearer Consumption
For (1xEV-DO Rev. A - Guaranteed bit rate) service users, Atoll calculates the 1xEV-DO bearer consumption.
UL
R Guaranteed
C UL – Bearer = ------------------------------------------------------------------
UL
-
R RLC – peak ( Index UL – Bearer )
UL
Where R Guaranteed corresponds to the minimum bit rate required by the service in the uplink.
For multi-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B users, Atoll models load balancing between carriers. Atoll equally shares the available
terminal power between each carrier and determines the uplink 1xEV-DO radio bearer obtained on each carrier. Then, it
selects the best configuration among all combinations of carriers, i.e., the combination which provides the highest effective
rate.
The following results are displayed:
• For each carrier used in the selected configuration, Atoll indicates the UL SHO Gain, the effective data rate and the
required power.
The calculations can be divided into four steps:
UL
1st step: Evaluation of the uplink quality, Q max ( i, ic ) , for each cell of the sub-active set
max carriers
UL P term ⁄ n
With P b –max ( i, ic ) = -----------------------------------
LT
i
carriers
n is the number of carriers in the user active set.
UL UL
N tot ( i, ic ) is the total noise at the transmitter on the carrier ic. This value is deduced from the cell uplink load factor X ( i, ic ) .
502
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
tx
N 0 is the transmitter thermal noise.
UL
2nd step: Calculation of the total quality at the transmitter on ic ( Q MAX ) based on the receiver handover status.
UL
( G macro – diversity ) 2 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain.This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
UL UL
max ( Q max ( i, ic ) ) corresponds to the highest Q max ( i, ic ) value.
i
UL
( G macro – diversity ) 3 links is the uplink macro-diversity gain. This parameter is determined from the fixed cell edge coverage
probability and the uplink Eb/Nt standard deviation. When the option “Shadowing taken into account” is not selected
(Prediction properties), Atoll considers the uplink macro-diversity gain defined by the user in Global parameters.
For softer and softer-softer handovers, we have:
Qmax ( i, ic )
UL UL UL
Q MAX ( ic ) = f rake efficiency ×
i
For softer-soft handover, there are two possibilities. If the MRC option is selected (option available in Global parameters), we
have:
UL
Qmax ( i, ic ), Qmaxi on the other site ( i, ic )
UL UL UL UL
Q MAX ( ic ) = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max f rake efficiency ×
i on the same site
otherwise,
UL UL UL
Q MAX ( ic ) = ( G macro – diversity ) 2 links × max ( Q max ( i, ic ) )
i
UL
3rd step: Calculation of the UL SHO gain ( G SHO )
UL
UL Q MAX ( ic )
G SHO = -------------------------------------------
UL
max ( Q max ( i, ic ) )
i
Where
Ec
----
UL
- is the minimum pilot quality level required in the uplink to obtain the 1xEV-DO radio bearer. The values are defined
N t min
in the 1xEV-DO Radio Bearer Selection (Uplink) table for each uplink transmission format (radio bearer Index, mobility and
number of subframe). Two values are available, one when the service uplink mode is "Low Latency" and another one for high
capacity services.
G ACK , G DRC , G TCH , G RRI and G Auxiliary – pilot are respectively acknowledgement, data rate control, traffic data channel,
reverse rate indicator and auxiliary pilot channel gains relative to the pilot. They are defined in the terminal properties (1xEV-
503
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
DO Rev. A tab). Two values of G TCH are available, one when the service uplink mode is "Low Latency" and another one for
high capacity services.
And
UL max
req Q req P term
P term ( ic ) = ---------------------
UL
- × ------------------
carriers
Q MAX ( ic ) n
Then, Atoll selects the best 1xEV-DO radio bearer. This is the 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index UL – Bearer ) with the highest
UL
UL R RLC – peak ( Index UL – Bearer )
effective rate ( R ( ic ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------- ) where:
n SF ( Index UL – Bearer )
max
req P term
• P term ( ic ) ≤ ------------------
carriers
,
n
• And the required modulation scheme is supported by the terminal.
n SF is the number of subframes associated with the 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index UL – Bearer ).
• Effective Rate
Atoll calculates the total rate for all combinations of carriers.
m
R
UL UL
R total = ( ic ) where m corresponds to the number of carriers in the combination.
ic = 1
UL
The effective rate ( R ) corresponds to the best configuration among all combinations of carriers, i.e., the combination which
UL
provides the highest total rate, Max ( R total ) .
UL UL
The traffic data channel is available in uplink if R ≥ R req .
Pterm ( ic )
req req
P term =
ic = 1
504
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
transmitter BS on its best carrier icBS ( Q pilot ( ic BS ) ). Then, it deduces the best pilot quality received with a fixed cell edge
BS
Resulting
coverage probability, Q pilot ( ic BS ) .
Atoll displays the best pilot quality received with a fixed cell edge coverage probability.
Atoll displays the best pilot quality received with a fixed cell edge coverage probability.
• Single colour
Resulting req
Atoll displays a coverage if Q pilot ( ic ) ≥ Q pilot . Coverage consists of a single layer with a unique colour.
ic = ic BS or ic given
505
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
channel power per transmitter allowed on the fundamental channel (FCH). Then, the total downlink quality on FCH
DL
( ( Q MAX ( ic ) ) FCH ) is evaluated after recombination.
Atoll displays total traffic channel quality at the receiver on the carrier ic ( ic BS or ic given ).
For further details on formulas, see "Definitions and Formulas" on page 434. For further details on calculation, see "Downlink
Sub-Menu" on page 487.
You may choose following display options:
• Single colour
DL DL DL
Atoll displays a coverage with a unique colour if ( Q MAX ( ic ) ) FCH ≥ ( Q req ) FCH . ( Q req ) FCH is the downlink traffic data quality
target on the fundamental channel (FCH). This parameter is user-defined for a given service and a terminal in the Services sub-
folder.
• Colour per transmitter
DL DL
Atoll displays a coverage if ( Q MAX ( ic ) ) FCH ≥ ( Q req ) FCH . Coverage consists of several layers with associated colours. There is
a layer per transmitter with no intersection between layers. Layer colour is the colour assigned to best serving transmitter.
• Colour per mobility
In this case, receiver is not completely defined and no mobility is assigned. Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per
DL DL
user-defined mobility defined in Mobility sub-folder. For each layer, area is covered if ( Q MAX ( ic ) ) FCH ≥ ( Q req ) FCH . Each layer
is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per service
In this case, receiver is not completely defined and no service is assigned. Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per
DL DL
user-defined service defined in Services sub-folder. For each layer, area is covered if ( Q MAX ( ic ) ) FCH ≥ ( Q req ) FCH . Each layer
is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per probability
This display option is available only if analysis is based on all simulations in a group (i.e. if you select a group of simulations
and the “All” option in the Condition tab of prediction properties).
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined probability level defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL DL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if ( Q MAX ( ic ) ) FCH ≥ ( Q req ) FCH in the required number of simulations. Each layer is
assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per cell edge coverage probability
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined cell edge coverage probability, p, defined in the Display tab
DL DL
(Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if ( Q MAX ( ic, p ) ) FCH ≥ ( Q req ) FCH . Each layer is assigned a colour and
displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per maximum quality level (max Eb/Nt)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if ( Q MAX ( ic ) ) FCH ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
• Colour per effective quality level (Effective Eb/Nt)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if ( Q eff ( ic ) ) FCH ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
• Colour per quality margin (Eb/Nt margin)
506
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
DL DL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if ( Q MAX ( ic ) ) FCH – ( Q req ) FCH ≥ M arg in . Each layer is assigned a colour and
displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per required power
req
Atoll calculates the downlink power required on FCH, P FCH ( ic ) , as follows:
DL
req ( Q req )FCH
- × P max
P FCH ( ic ) = ---------------------- FCH
DL
Q MAX ( ic )
max
Where P FCH is a user-defined input for a given service and terminal. It corresponds to the maximum traffic data power
allowed on FCH for a transmitter.
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined required power threshold defined in the Display tab
req
(Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if P FCH ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed
with intersections between layers.
• Colour per required power margin
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined power margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
max req
properties). For each layer, area is covered if P FCH – P FCH ( ic ) ≥ M arg in . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
• Colour per data rate
DL DL DL
This display option is relevant for CDMA2000 1xRTT data services only. For each possible data rate, R ( R FCH × AF FCH ,
DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL
R FCH × ( AF FCH + 2 ) , R FCH × ( AF FCH + 4 ) , R FCH × ( AF FCH + 8 ) , R FCH × ( AF FCH + 16 ) ), Atoll calculates traffic channel quality
at the receiver for each cell (k,ic) (with ic=icBS or icgiven). Downlink traffic channel quality at the receiver is evaluated from a
maximum traffic channel power per transmitter allowed for the corresponding data rate. Then, the total downlink traffic
DL DL
channel quality ( Q MAX ( ic, R ) ) is calculated after recombination.
DL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible data rate, R . For each layer, area is covered if
DL DL DL DL
Q MAX ( ic, R )≥ Q req ( R ) . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
DL DL DL
Q req ( R ) is the downlink traffic data quality target for the data rate, R . This parameter is user-defined for a given service,
terminal and data rate in the Services sub-folder.
DL
For 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 users (users with EV-DO Rev. 0-capable terminals and EV-DO Rev. 0 services), the effective data rate ( R )
provided on downlink is determined from the graph “Max Rate=f(C/I) (Rev0)” defined for the mobility type selected in the
DL
Condition tab (Prediction properties). R is the value read in the graph “Max Rate=f(C/I) (Rev0)” for the calculated effective
Ec
pilot quality level, ----- ( ic BS, b pilot ) .
Nt
DL
For 1xEV-DO Rev. A users (users with EV-DO Rev. A-capable terminals and EV-DO Rev. A services), the effective data rate ( R )
provided on downlink depends on the downlink transmission format, i.e the radio bearer index ( Index DL – Bearer ) with the
507
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
E
number of timeslots ( n TS ). Atoll selects the downlink transmission format where ----c- ( ic BS, b pilot ) ≥ --- . Then, it
C
Nt I req
determines the downlink effective data rate as follows:
DL
DL R RLC – peak ( Index DL – Bearer )
R = ------------------------------------------------------------------ .
n TS
The effective data rate corresponds to the guaranted data rate after a certain number of retransmissions (i.e. the number of
timeslots, n TS ).
When HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) is used, the required average number of retransmissions is smaller and the
DL
data rate is an average data rate ( R av ) calculated as follows:
DL
DL R RLC – peak ( Index DL – Bearer )
R av = ---------------------------------------------------------------------
DL
-
( n Rtx (Index DL – Bearer,n TS) ) av
DL
The average number of retransmissions ( ( n Rtx ) av ) is determined from early termination probabilities defined for the selected
downlink transmission format. The Early Termination Probability graph shows the probability of early termination ( p ) as a
DL DL
function of the number of retransmissions ( n Rtx ). Atoll calculates the average number of retransmissions ( ( n Rtx )av ) as
follows:
n DL
Rtx max
DL DL DL
( p ( n Rtx ) – p ( n Rtx – 1 ) ) × n Rtx
DL
DL n =1
( n Rtx ) av = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rtx
DL
-
p ( ( n Rtx ) max )
Single-carrier EV-DO Rev. B service users are managed as 1xEV-DO Rev. A service users.
DL
For multi-carrier EV-DO Rev. B service users, the effective data rate ( R ) provided in the downlink corresponds to the sum
of the effective data rates obtained on each carrier.
DL
The effective data rate ( R ( ic ) ) obtained on a carrier depends on the downlink transmission format, i.e the radio bearer
index ( Index DL – Bearer ) with the number of timeslots ( n TS ). Atoll selects the downlink transmission format where
E
----c- ( ic, b pilot ) ≥ ---
C
and whose modulation scheme is supported by the terminal.
Nt I req
The downlink effective data rate corresponds to the guaranted data rate after a certain number of retransmissions (i.e. the
number of timeslots, n TS ). It is determined as follows:
DL
DL R RLC – peak ( Index DL – Bearer )
R ( ic ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------
n TS
When HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) is used, the required average number of retransmissions is smaller and the
DL
data rate on a carrier is an average data rate ( R av ( ic ) ) calculated as follows:
DL
DL R RLC – peak ( Index DL – Bearer )
R av ( ic ) = ---------------------------------------------------------------------
DL
-
( n Rtx (Index DL – Bearer,n TS) ) av
DL
The average number of retransmissions ( ( n Rtx ) av ) is determined from early termination probabilities defined for the selected
downlink transmission format. The Early Termination Probability graph shows the probability of early termination ( p ) as a
DL DL
function of the number of retransmissions ( n Rtx ). Atoll calculates the average number of retransmissions ( ( n Rtx )av ) as
follows:
508
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
n DL
Rtx max
DL DL DL
( p ( n Rtx ) – p ( n Rtx – 1 ) ) × n Rtx
DL
DL n =1
( n Rtx )av = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rtx
DL
-
p ( ( n Rtx ) max )
DL
The average data rate ( R av ) provided on downlink corresponds to the sum of the average data rates obtained on each carrier.
Display Options
Best server and active set determination is performed as in point prediction (AS analysis).
Atoll displays uplink quality on FCH at transmitters in active set on the carrier ic ( ic BS or ic given ) received from the receiver.
For further details on formulas, see "Definitions and Formulas" on page 434. For further details on calculations, see "Uplink
Sub-Menu" on page 494.
• Single colour
UL UL UL
Atoll displays a coverage if ( Q MAX ( ic ) ) FCH ≥ ( Q req ) FCH . Coverage colour is unique. ( Q req ) FCH is the uplink data traffic quality
target on the fundamental channel (FCH). This parameter is user-defined for a given service and a terminal in the Services sub-
folder.
• Colour per transmitter
UL UL
Atoll displays a coverage if ( Q MAX ( ic ) ) FCH ≥ ( Q req ) FCH . Coverage consists of several layers with associated colours. There is
a layer per transmitter with no intersection between layers. Layer colour is the colour assigned to best server transmitter.
• Colour per mobility
509
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
In this case, receiver is not completely defined and no mobility is assigned. Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per
UL UL
user-defined mobility defined in Mobility sub-folder. For each layer, area is covered if ( Q MAX ( ic ) ) FCH ≥ ( Q req ) FCH . Each layer
is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per service
In this case, receiver is not completely defined and no service is assigned. Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per
UL UL
user-defined service defined in Services sub-folder. For each layer, area is covered if ( Q MAX ( ic ) ) FCH ≥ ( Q req ) FCH . Each layer
is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per probability
This display option is available only if analysis is based on all simulations in a group (i.e. if you select a group of simulations
and the “All” option in the Condition tab of prediction properties). Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-
defined probability level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if
UL UL
( Q MAX ( ic ) ) FCH ≥ ( Q req ) FCH in the required number of simulations. Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
• Colour per cell edge coverage probability
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined cell edge coverage probability, p, defined in the Display tab
UL UL
(Prediction properties). For each layer, area is covered if ( Q MAX ( ic, p ) ) FCH ≥ ( Q req ) FCH . Each layer is assigned a colour and
displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per maximum quality level (Max Eb/Nt)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if ( Q MAX ( ic ) ) FCH ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
• Colour per effective quality level (Effective Eb/Nt)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if ( Q effective ( ic ) ) FCH ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed
with intersections between layers.
• Colour per quality margin (Eb/Nt margin)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL UL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if ( Q MAX ( ic ) ) FCH – ( Q req ) FCH ≥ M arg in . Each layer is assigned a colour and
displayed with intersections between layers.
• Colour per required power
FCH – re q
The required terminal power, P term , is calculated as described in the Point analysis – AS analysis tab – Uplink sub-menu
part. Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined power threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
FCH –re q
properties). For each layer, area is covered if P term ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
• Colour per required power margin
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined power margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
max FCH –re q
properties). For each layer, area is covered if P term – P term ( ic ) ≥ M arg in . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed
with intersections between layers.
• Colour per rate
UL UL UL
This display option is relevant for CDMA2000 1xRTT data services only. For each possible data rate, R ( R FCH × AF FCH ,
UL UL UL UL UL UL UL UL
R FCH × ( AF FCH + 2 ) , R FCH × ( AF FCH + 4 ) , R FCH × ( AF FCH + 8 ) , R FCH × ( AF FCH + 16 ) ), Atoll calculates the total uplink traffic
UL UL UL
channel quality ( Q MAX ( ic, R ) ). Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible data rate, R . For each layer,
UL UL UL UL
area is covered if Q MAX ( ic, R )≥ Q req ( R ) . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
UL UL UL
Q req ( R ) is the uplink traffic data quality target for the data rate, R . This parameter is user-defined for the service, a given
terminal and data rate in the service properties.
510
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
Best server and active set determination is performed as in point prediction (AS analysis).
Atoll displays the uplink quality at transmitters in active set on the carrier ic ( ic BS or ic given ) received from the receiver. For
multi-carrier EV-DO users, Atoll considers the best sub-active set.
For further details on formulas, see "Definitions and Formulas" on page 434. For further details on calculations, see "Uplink
Sub-Menu" on page 494.
• Single colour
UL UL UL
Atoll displays a coverage if Q MAX ( ic ) ≥ Q req . Coverage colour is unique. For 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 users, Q req is the quality required
UL
on uplink for a 9.6 kbps data channel rate. For 1xEV-DO Rev. A and 1xEV-DO Rev. B users, Q req is the quality required on uplink
for a 4.8 kbps data channel rate. This parameter is calculated from the minimum uplink pilot quality and gains on the different
uplink channels.
We have:
E UL
Q req = ----c-
UL UL
× G p × ( 1 + G ACK + G DRC + G TCH ) for 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 terminals,
N t min
And
E UL
Q req = ----c-
UL UL
× G p × ( 1 + G ACK + G RRI + G DRC + G TCH + G Auxiliary – Pilot ) for 1xEV-DO Rev. A and 1xEV-DO Rev. B terminals.
N t min
511
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
UL
Here, Atoll calculates the total uplink traffic channel quality ( ( Q MAX ( ic ) ) TCH ).
UL
UL ( Q req ) TCH
- × P max
( Q MAX ( ic ) ) TCH = ---------------------- term
req
P term
With
E UL
( Q req ) TCH = ----c-
UL UL
× G p × G TCH
N t min
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if ( Q MAX ( ic ) ) TCH ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
intersections between layers.
• Colour per effective quality level (Effective Eb/Nt)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined quality threshold defined in the Display tab (Prediction
UL
properties). For each layer, area is covered if ( Q effective ( ic ) ) TCH ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed
with intersections between layers.
UL UL UL
( Q effective ( ic ) ) TCH = min ( ( Q MAX ( ic ) ) TCH, ( Q req ) TCH )
And
req
TCH – re q P term
P term - × G TCH for 1xEV-DO Rev. A terminals.
= -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 + G ACK + G RRI + G DRC + G TCH + G Auxiliary – Pilot
512
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
UL UL UL
For each possible data rate, R , Atoll calculates the total uplink quality ( Q MAX ( ic, R ) ). Coverage consists of several layers
UL UL UL UL
with a layer per possible data rate. For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ( ic, R ) ≥ Q req ( R ) . Each layer is assigned a colour
and displayed with intersections between layers.
UL UL UL
Q req ( R ) is the uplink quality required to obtain the data rate, R .
UL
The possible data rates on uplink, R , are: 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 76.8 and 153.6 kbps
E UL
Q req = ----c-
UL UL
× G p × ( 1 + G ACK + G DRC + G TCH )
N t min
Where
Ec
----
UL
-
N t min is the minimum pilot quality level on uplink. This parameter is available in the Mobility types table.
G ACK , G DRC and G TCH are respectively acknowledgement, data rate control and traffic data gains relative to the pilot. They
are defined in the terminal properties (1xEV-DO Rev. 0 tab).
1xEV-DO Rev. A and single-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B service users
UL UL UL
For each possible data rate, R , Atoll calculates the total uplink quality ( Q MAX ( ic, R ) ). Coverage consists of several layers
UL UL UL UL
with a layer per possible data rate. For each layer, area is covered if Q MAX ( ic, R ) ≥ Q req ( R ) . Each layer is assigned a colour
and displayed with intersections between layers.
UL UL UL
Q req ( R ) is the uplink quality required to obtain the data rate, R .
UL
The data rate, R is obtained when a certain uplink transmission format (i.e. 1xEV-DO radio bearer ( Index UL – Bearer ) with a
certain number of subframes ( n SF )) is used. It is calculated as follows:
UL
UL R RLC – peak ( Index UL – Bearer )
R req = ------------------------------------------------------------------
-
n SF
E UL
Q req = ----c-
UL UL
× G p × ( 1 + G ACK + G DRC + G TCH + G RRI + G Auxiliary – pilot )
N t min
Where
Ec
----
UL
UL
-
N t min is the minimum pilot quality level required on uplink to obtain the data rate, R . The value is defined in the 1xEV-
DO Radio Bearer Selection (Uplink) table for the uplink transmission format (radio bearer Index, mobility and number of
subframe). Two values are available for this parameter, one when the service uplink mode is "Low Latency" and another one
for high capacity services.
G ACK , G DRC , G TCH , G RRI and G Auxiliary – pilot are respectively acknowledgement, data rate control, traffic data channel,
reverse rate indicator and auxiliary pilot channel gains relative to the pilot. They are defined in the terminal properties (1xEV-
DO Rev. A tab). Two values of G TCH are available, one when the service uplink mode is "Low Latency" and another one for
high capacity services.
Multi-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B service users
For multi-carrier 1xEV-DO Rev. B users, Atoll models load balancing between carriers. Atoll equally shares the available
terminal power between each carrier and determines the uplink 1xEV-DO radio bearer obtained on each carrier. Then, it
selects the best configuration among all combinations of carriers, i.e., the combination which provides the highest data rate.
UL UL
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per possible data rate. For each layer, area is covered if R ≥ R req . Each layer
is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
UL
R req is the uplink data rate associated with the layer.
UL
R corresponds to the data rate of the best configuration, i.e., the combination which provides the highest total rate.
• Colour per average rate
513
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
This display option is available for 1xEV-DO Rev. A and 1xEV-DO Rev. B users only. When HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat
UL
Request) is used, the required average number of retransmissions is smaller and the data rate is an average data rate ( R av )
calculated as follows:
UL
UL R RLC – peak ( Index UL – Bearer )
R av = -----------------------------------------------------------------------
UL
-
( n Rtx ( Index UL – Bearer, n SF ) ) av
UL
The average number of retransmissions ( ( n Rtx ) av ) is determined from early termination probabilities defined for the selected
uplink transmission format (i.e. the radio bearer index ( Index UL – Bearer ) with the number of subframes ( n SF )). The Early
Termination Probability graph shows the probability of early termination ( p ) as a function of the number of retransmissions
UL UL
( n Rtx ). Atoll calculates the average number of retransmissions ( ( n Rtx ) av ) as follows:
n UL
Rtx max
UL UL UL
( p ( n Rtx ) – p ( n Rtx – 1 ) ) × n Rtx
UL
UL n =1
( n Rtx ) av = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rtx
UL
-
p ( ( n Rtx ) max )
UL
R req is the uplink data rate associated with the layer.
UL
For the selected configuration (i.e., the combination of carriers which provides the highest total data rate), R av corresponds
to the sum of the average data rates obtained on each carrier of the configuration.
Ptot ( icadj )
DL
Ptot ( ic ) + ------------------------------------
DL DL txj, ∀j term
N tot ( ic ) = + N0
RF ( ic, ic adj )
txj, ∀j
term
DL N0
Downlink noise rise, NR DL ( ic ) , is calculated from the downlink total noise, N tot , as: NR DL ( ic ) = – 10 log ------------
-
N DL tot
514
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined noise level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
DL
For each layer, area is covered if min NR tot ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
ic
intersections between layers.
• Colour per maximum noise level
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined noise level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
DL
For each layer, area is covered if max NR tot ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections
ic
between layers.
• Colour per average noise level
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined noise level defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
DL
For each layer, area is covered if average NRtot ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with
ic
intersections between layers.
• Colour per minimum noise rise
Atoll displays bins where min NR DL ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Coverage consists of several areas with an area per user-defined noise
ic
rise threshold defined in the Display tab. Each area is assigned a colour with intersections between areas.
• Colour per maximum noise rise
Atoll displays bins where max NR DL ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Coverage consists of several areas with an area per user-defined noise
ic
rise threshold defined in the Display tab. Each area is assigned a colour with intersections between areas.
• Colour per average noise rise
Atoll displays bins where average NRDL ( ic ) ≥ Threshold . Coverage consists of several areas with an area per user-defined
ic
noise rise threshold defined in the Display tab. Each area is assigned a colour with intersections between areas.
515
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
If no focus zone exists in the .atl document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
Adjacence criterion: Let CellB be a candidate neighbour cell of CellA. CellB is considered
adjacent to CellA if there exists at least one pixel in the CellA Best Server coverage area
where CellB is Best Server (if several cells have the same best server value) or CellB is the
second best server that enters the Active Set (respecting the T_Drop of the allocation).
When this option is checked, adjacent cells are sorted and listed from the most adjacent
to the least, depending on the above criterion. Adjacence is relative to the number of
pixels satisfying the criterion.
• There must be an overlapping zone ( S A ∩ S B ) with a given cell edge coverage probability:
• Intra-carrier neighbours: intra-carrier handover is a soft handover.
The reference cell A and the candidate cell B are located inside a continuous layer of cells with carrier c1 (c1 is the selected
carrier on which you run the allocation).
SA is the area where the cell A is the best serving cell. It means that the cell A is the first one in the active set.
• The pilot signal received from the cell A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level.
• The pilot quality from A exceeds Min. Ec/I0.
• The pilot quality from A is the best.
SB is the area where the cell B can enter the active set.
• The pilot signal received from the cell B is greater than the minimum pilot signal level.
• The pilot quality from B is greater than T_Drop.
516
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
• Inter-carrier neighbours: inter-frequency handover is a hard handover. It is needed in a multi-carrier (1xRTT and 1xEV-
DO carriers) CDMA network:
• To balance loading between carriers and layers (1st case),
• To make a coverage reason handover from micro cell frequency to macro cells (2nd case).
1st case: the reference cell A is located inside a continuous layer of cells with carrier c1 (c1 is the selected carrier on which you
run the allocation) and the candidate cell B belongs to a layer of cells with carrier c2.
SA is the area where:
• The pilot signal received from the cell A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level.
• The pilot signal from A is not the highest one. It is strictly lower than the best pilot signal received and higher than
the best pilot signal minus the margin.
SB is the area where:
• The pilot signal received from the cell B is greater than the minimum pilot signal level.
• The pilot signal from B is the highest one.
2nd case: the reference cell A is located on the border of a layer with carrier c1 (c1 is the selected carrier on which you run the
allocation) and the candidate cell B belongs to a layer of cells with carrier c2.
SA is the area where:
• The pilot signal received from the cell A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level.
• The pilot signal from A is the highest one
• The pilot signal from A is lower than the minimum pilot signal level plus the margin.
SB is the area where:
• The pilot signal received from the cell B is greater than the minimum pilot signal level.
• The pilot signal from B is the highest one.
517
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
SA ∩ SB
- × 100 ) and compares this value to the % minimum covered area. If
Atoll calculates the percentage of covered area ( -----------------
SA
this percentage is not exceeded, the candidate neighbour B is discarded.
The coverage condition can be weighted among the others and ranks the neighbours through the importance field (see after).
• The importance of neighbours.
For information on the importance calculation, see "Importance Calculation" on page 519.
Importance values are used by the allocation algorithm to rank the neighbours. Atoll lists all neighbours and sorts them by
importance value so as to eliminate some of them from the neighbour list if the maximum number of neighbours to be
allocated to each transmitter is exceeded. If we consider the case for which there are 15 candidate neighbours and the
maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to the reference cell is 8. Among these 15 candidate neighbours, only 8
(having the highest importance values) will be allocated to the reference cell. Note that specific maximum numbers of
neighbours (maximum number of intra-carrier neighbours, maximum number of inter-carrier neighbours) can be defined at
the cell level (property dialogue or cell table). If defined there, this value is taken into account instead of the default one
available in the Neighbour Allocation dialogue.
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site, adjacent, coverage or symmetric. For neighbours accepted for co-site,
adjacency and coverage reasons, Atoll displays the percentage of area meeting the coverage conditions and the
corresponding surface area (km2), the percentage of area meeting the adjacency conditions and the corresponding surface
area (km2). Finally, if cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked as existing.
518
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
519
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers the following factors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d
( Di ) = 1 – -----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter Distance" on
page 522.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours, adjacent neighbours, and neighbours allocated based on coverage
overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
• The default value of Min(O) = 1% ensures that neighbours selected for symmetry will
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selected for symmetry will have an importance field greater than 0% only if there is
some coverage overlapping.
520
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers the following factors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d
( Di ) = 1 – -----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter Distance" on
page 522.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours and neighbours allocated based on coverage overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
• The default value of Min(O) = 1% ensures that neighbours selected for symmetry will
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selected for symmetry will have an importance field greater than 0% only if there is
some coverage overlapping.
521
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
7.6.4 Appendices
7.6.4.1 Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter Distance
Atoll takes into account the real distance ( D in m) and azimuths of antennas in order to calculate the effective inter-
transmitter distance ( d in m).
d = D × ( 1 + x × cos β – x × cos α )
where x = 0.3% so that the maximum D variation does not exceed 1%.
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other will have a smaller effective distance than the real physical
distance. It is this effective distance that will be taken into account rather than the real distance.
If no focus zone exists in the .atl document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
522
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
• In the context of the PN Offset allocation, the term "neighbours" refers to intra-
carrier neighbours.
• Atoll can take into account inter-technology neighbour relations as constraints to
allocate different PN Offsets to the CDMA neighbours of a GSM transmitter. In order
to consider inter-technology neighbour relations in the PN Offset allocation, you must
make the Transmitters folder of the GSM .atl document accessible in the CDMA .atl
document. For information on making links between GSM and CDMA .atl documents,
see the User Manual.
• Atoll considers symmetry relationship between a cell, its first order neighbours, its
second order neighbours and its third order neighbours.
Atoll considers either a percentage of the cell maximum powers or the total downlink
power used by the cells in order to evaluate I0. In this case, I0 equals the sum of total
transmitted powers. When this parameter is not specified in the cell properties, Atoll
uses 50% of the maximum power.
PN offset reuse distance can be defined at cell level. If this value is not defined, then Atoll
will use the default reuse distance defined in the PN offset Automatic Allocation
dialogue.
• PN-cluster size. Within the context of PN offset allocation, the term "PN-cluster" refers to a sub-group of PN offsets.
• Exceptional pairs,
• Domains of PN Offsets,
When no domain is assigned to cells, Atoll considers the PILOT_INC parameter only to
determine available PN offsets (e.g., If PILOT_INC is set to 4, all PN offsets from 4 to 508
with a separation interval of 4 can be allocated).
• The carrier on which the allocation is run: It can be a given carrier or all of them. In this case, either Atoll independently
plans PN Offsets for the different carriers, or it allocates the same PN Offset to each carrier of a transmitter if the
option "Allocate carriers identically" is selected.
• The possibility to use a maximum of PN offsets (option "Use a Maximum of PN Offsets"): Atoll will try to spread the
PN offset spectrum the most.
• The "Delete All Codes" option: When selecting this option, Atoll deletes all the current PN Offsets and carries out a
new PN Offset allocation. If not selected, the existing PN Offsets are kept.
In addition, it depends on the selected allocation strategy. Allocation strategies can be:
• PN offset per cell: The purpose of this strategy is to reduce the spectrum of allocated PN offsets the maximum
possible. Atoll will allocate the first possible PN offsets in the domain.
• Adjacent PN-Clusters per site: This strategy consists of allocating one cluster of adjacent PN offsets to each site, then,
one PN offset of the cluster to each cell of each transmitter according to its azimuth. When all the clusters have been
allocated and there are still sites remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the clusters at another site.
• Distributed PN-clusters per site: This strategy consists of allocating one cluster of PN offsets to each site in the
network, then, one PN offset of the cluster to each cell of each transmitter according to its azimuth. With this strategy,
the cluster is made of PN offsets separated as much as possible. When all the clusters have been allocated and there
are still sites remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the clusters at another site.
In the Results table, Atoll only displays PN offsets allocated to TBA cells.
523
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
Atoll processes TBA cells according to their priority. It allocates PN Offsets starting with the highest priority cell and its near
cells, and continuing with the lowest priority cells not allocated yet and their near cells. For information on calculating cell
priority, see "Cell Priority" on page 525.
All sites which have constraints with the studied site are referred to as near sites.
Atoll assigns a PN-cluster of adjacent PN offsets to each site, starting with the highest priority site and its near sites, and
continuing with the lowest priority sites not allocated yet and their near sites. When all the clusters have been allocated and
there are still sites remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the clusters at another site. When the Co-PN Reuse Distance option
is selected, the algorithm reuses the clusters as soon as the Co-PN reuse distance is exceeded. Otherwise, when the option is
not selected, the algorithm tries to assign reused clusters as spaced out as possible.
Then, Atoll allocates a PN offset from the cluster to each cell of each transmitter located on the sites according to the
transmitter azimuth. It starts with the highest priority cell and its near cells and goes on with the lowest priority cells not
allocated yet and their near cells.
For information on calculating site priority, see "Site Priority" on page 527. For information on calculating cell priority, see
"Cell Priority" on page 525.
All sites which have constraints with the studied site are referred to as near sites.
Atoll assigns one cluster to each site, starting with the highest priority site and its near sites, and continuing with the lowest
priority sites not allocated yet and their near sites. When all the clusters have been allocated and there are still sites remaining
to be allocated, Atoll reuses the clusters at another site. When the Co-PN Reuse Distance option is selected, the algorithm
reuses the clusters as soon as the Co-PN reuse distance is exceeded. Otherwise, when the option is not selected, the algorithm
tries to assign reused clusters as spaced out as possible.
Then, Atoll assigns a PN offset from the cluster to each cell of each transmitter located on the sites according to the
transmitter azimuth. It starts with the highest priority cell and its near cells and goes on with the lowest priority cells not
allocated yet and their near cells.
For information on calculating site priority, see "Site Priority" on page 527. For information on calculating cell priority, see
"Cell Priority" on page 525.
524
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
When the option is not selected, algorithm works for each strategy, as explained above. On the other hand, when the option
is selected, allocation order changes. It is no longer based on the cell priority but depends on the transmitter priority. All
transmitters which have constraints with the studied transmitter will be referred to as near transmitters.
In case of a "Per cell" strategy (PN offset per cell), Atoll starts PN offset allocation with the highest priority transmitter and its
near transmitters and continues with the lowest priority transmitters not allocated yet and their near transmitters. The same
PN offset is assigned to each cell of the transmitter.
In case of a "Per site" strategy (Adjacent and Distributed PN-clusters per site strategies), Atoll assigns a cluster to each site
and then, allocates a PN offset to each transmitter. It starts with the highest priority transmitter and its near transmitters and
continues with the lowest priority transmitters not allocated yet and their near transmitters. The same PN offset is assigned
to each cell of the transmitter.
For information on calculating cell priority, see "Cell Priority" on page 525. For information on calculating transmitter priority,
see "Transmitter Priority" on page 527.
When cells, transmitters or sites have the same priority, processing is based on an
alphanumeric order.
When domains of PN Offsets are assigned to cells, each unavailable PN Offset generates a cost. The higher the number of
codes available in the domain, the less will be the cost due to this criterion. The cost is given as:
C i ( Dom ) = 512 – Number of PN Offsets in the domain
• Distance Criterion
The constraint level of any cell i depends on the number of cells (j) present within a radius of "reuse distance" from its centre.
The total cost due to the distance constraint is given as:
C i ( Dist ) = Cj ( Dist ( i ) )
j
Each cell j within the reuse distance generates a cost given as:
C j ( Dist ( i ) ) = w ( d ij ) × c dis tan ce
Where
525
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
w ( d ij ) is a weight depending on the distance between i and j. This weight is inversely proportional to the inter-cell distance.
For a reuse distance of 2000m, the weight for an inter-cell distance of 1500m is 0.25, the weight for co-site cells is 1 and the
weight for two cells spaced out 2100m apart is 0.
c dis tan ce is the cost of the distance constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
C i ( EP ) = cEP ( i – j )
j
Where
c EP is the cost of the exceptional pair constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
• Neighbourhood Criterion
The constraint level of any cell i depends on the number of its neighbour cells j, the number of second order neighbours k and
the number of third order neighbours l.
Let’s consider the following neighbour schema:
Ci ( N ) =
Cj ( N1 ( i ) ) + Cj – j′ ( N1 ( i ) ) + Ck ( N2 ( i ) ) + Ck – k′ ( N2 ( i ) ) + Cl ( N3 ( i ) ) + Cl – l′ ( N3 ( i ) )
j j′ k k′ l l′
Where
I j is the importance of the neighbour cell j.
c N1 is the cost of the first order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Because two first order neighbours must not have the same PN Offset, Atoll considers the cost created by two first order
neighbours to be each other.
C j ( N1 ( i ) ) + C j′ ( N1 ( i ) )
C j – j′ ( N1 ( i ) ) = -----------------------------------------------------
-
2
Each second order neighbour cell k generates a cost given as:
C k ( N2 ( i ) ) = Max (( C j ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k ( N1 ( j ) ) ),( C j′ ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k ( N1 ( j′ ) ) )) × c N2
Where
c N2 is the cost of the second order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Because two second order neighbours must not have the same PN Offset, Atoll considers the cost created by two second
order neighbours to be each other.
C k ( N2 ( i ) ) + C k′ ( N2 ( i ) )
C k – k′ ( N2 ( i ) ) = -------------------------------------------------------
-
2
Each third order neighbour cell l generates a cost given as:
526
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
C ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k ( N1 ( j ) ) × C l ( N1 ( k ) ), C j′ ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k ( N1 ( j′ ) ) × C l N1 ( k ),
C l ( N3 ( i ) ) = Max j × c N3
( C j ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k′ ( N1 ( j ) ) ) × C l N1 ( k′ ), C j′ ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k′ ( N1 ( j′ ) ) × C l N1 ( k′ )
Where
c N3 is the cost of the third order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Because two third order neighbours must not have the same PN Offset, Atoll considers the cost created by two third order
neighbours to be each other.
C l ( N3 ( i ) ) + C l′ ( N3 ( i ) )
C l – l′ ( N3 ( i ) ) = -----------------------------------------------------
-
2
Atoll considers the highest cost of both links when a neighbour relation is symmetric and
the importance value is different.
.
In this case, we have:
C j ( N1 ( i ) ) = Max ( I i – j, I j – i ) × c N1
And
C k ( N2 ( i ) ) = Max (C j ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k ( N1 ( j ) ),C j ( N1 ( k ) ) × C i ( N1 ( j ) )) × c N2
C i ( N 2G ) = cN2G ( j – Tx2G )
j
Where
cN is the cost of the GSM neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
2G
Therefore, the total cost due to constraints on any cell i is defined as:
C i = C i ( Dom ) + C i ( U )
With
C i ( U ) = C i ( Dist ) + C i ( EP ) + C i ( N ) + C i ( N 2G )
Here, the domain available for the transmitter is the intersection of domains assigned to cells of the transmitter. The domain
constraint is mandatory and cannot be broken.
527
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
Let us consider a site S with three transmitters; each of them has two cells using carriers 0 and 1. The site constraint is given as:
C S = C S ( U ) + C S ( Dom )
Here, the domain considered for the site is the intersection of domains available for transmitters of the site.
Let Site0, Site1, Site2 and Site3 be four sites with 3 cells using carrier 0 whom PN Offsets have to be allocated. The PILOT_INC
parameter has been set to 4 and the PN Cluster Size is 3. Therefore, all PN offsets from 4 to 508 with a separation interval of
4 can be allocated. The reuse distance is supposed to be lower than the inter-site distance. Only co-site neighbours exist and
all of them have the same importance.
The following section lists the results of each combination of options with explanation where necessary.
Atoll allocates the first three PN offsets in the domain (4, 8 Atoll allocates the first three PN offsets in the domain (4, 8
and 12) to the Site0’s cells. Under given constraints of and 12) to the Site0’s cells. As it is allowed to use a maximum
neighbourhood and reuse distance, same PN offsets can be of PN offsets, Atoll allocates different PN offsets to each
allocated to each site’s cells. site’s cells so that there is least repetition.
528
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
Atoll allocates a PN cluster of adjacent PN offsets to Site0 and As it is possible to use a maximum of PN offsets, Atoll
then, one PN offset of the PN cluster to each cell. Under given allocates different PN clusters of adjacent PN offsets to sites
constraints of neighbourhood and reuse distance, the same so that there is least repetition of PN offsets.
PN cluster can be allocated to each site and same PN offsets
to each site’s cells.
Atoll allocates a PN cluster of distributed PN offsets to Site0 As it is possible to use a maximum of PN offsets, Atoll
and then, one PN offset of the PN cluster to each cell. Under allocates different PN clusters of distributed PN offsets to
given constraints of neighbourhood and reuse distance, the sites so that there is least repetition of PN offsets.
same PN cluster can be allocated to each site and same PN
offsets to each site’s cells.
529
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
• When the CDMA coverage is not continuous. In this case, the CDMA coverage is extended by CDMA-GSM handover
into the GSM network,
• And in order to balance traffic and service distribution between both networks.
Note that the automatic inter-technology neighbour allocation algorithm takes into account both cases.
In order to be able to use the inter-technology neighbour allocation algorithm, you must have:
• An .atl document containing the GSM/TDMA network, GSM.atl, and another one containing the CDMA2000 network,
CDMA.atl,
• An existing link on the Transmitters folder of GSM.atl into CDMA.atl.
The external neighbour allocation algorithm takes into account all the GSM TBC transmitters. It means that all the TBC
transmitters of GSM.atl are potential neighbours. The cells to be allocated will be called TBA cells which, being cells of
CDMA.atl, fulfill following conditions:
• They are active,
• They satisfy the filter criteria applied to Transmitters folder,
• They are located inside the focus zone,
• They belong to the folder for which allocation has been executed. This folder can be either the Transmitters folder or
a group of transmitters subfolder.
Only CDMA TBA cells may be assigned neighbours.
530
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
Where d is the effective distance between the CDMA reference cell and the GSM neighbour and d max is the maximum inter-
site distance.
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site, or distance. For neighbours accepted for distance reasons, Atoll
displays the distance from the reference cell (m). Finally, if cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked
as existing.
• 1st case: SA is the area where the cell A is the best serving cell of the CDMA network.
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level,
• The pilot quality from A exceeds a user-definable minimum value (minimum Ec/I0) and is the highest one.
In this case, the Ec/I0 margin must be equal to 0dB and the max Ec/I0 option disabled.
• 2nd case: SA represents the area where the pilot quality from the cell A strats decreasing but the cell A is still the
best serving cell of the CDMA network.
The Ec/I0 margin must be equal to 0dB, the max Ec/I0 option selected and a maximum Ec/I0 user-defined.
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level,
• The pilot quality from A exceeds the minimum Ec/I0 but is lower than the maximum Ec/I0.
• The pilot quality from A is the highest one.
• 3rd case: SA represents the area where the cell A is not the best serving cell but can enter the active set.
Here, the Ec/I0 margin has to be different from 0dB and the max Ec/I0 option disabled.
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level,
• The pilot quality from A is within a margin from the best Ec/I0, where the best Ec/I0 exceeds the minimum Ec/
I0.
• 4th case: SA represents the area where:
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level,
531
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
• The pilot quality from A is within a margin from the best Ec/I0 (where the best Ec/I0 exceeds the minimum Ec/
I0) and lower than the maximum Ec/I0.
In this case, the margin must be different from 0dB, the max Ec/I0 option selected and a maximum Ec/I0 user-
defined.
Two different cases may be considered for SB:
• 1st case: SB is the area where the cell B is the best serving cell of the GSM network.
In this case, the margin must be set to 0dB.
• The signal level received from B on the BCCH TRX type exceeds the user-defined minimum threshold and is the
highest one.
• 2nd case: The margin is different from 0dB and SB is the area where:
• The signal level received from B on the BCCH TRX type exceeds the user-defined minimum threshold and is
within a margin from the best BCCH signal level.
SA ∩ SB
- × 100 ) and compares this value to the % minimum covered area. If
Atoll calculates the percentage of covered area ( -----------------
SA
this percentage is not exceeded, the candidate neighbour B is discarded.
Candidate neighbours fulfilling coverage conditions are sorted in descending order with respect to percentage of covered
area.
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers the following factors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d
( Di ) = 1 – -----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter Distance" on
page 522.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
532
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours and neighbours allocated based on coverage overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site or coverage. For neighbours accepted for co-site and coverage reasons,
Atoll displays the percentage of area meeting the coverage conditions and the corresponding surface area (km2). Finally, if
cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked as existing.
533
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7: CDMA2000 Networks © Forsk 2011
534
Chapter 8
TD-SCDMA Networks
This chapter describes TD-SCDMA calculations. In this chapter, the following are explained:
• "Definitions and Formulas" on page 537
• "Signal Level Based Calculations" on page 544
• "Monte Carlo Simulations" on page 549
• "TD-SCDMA Prediction Studies" on page 568
• "Smart Antenna Modelling" on page 580
• "N-Frequency Mode and Carrier Allocation" on
page 592
• "Neighbour Allocation" on page 593
• "Scrambling Code Allocation" on page 598
• "Automatic GSM/TD-SCDMA Neighbour
Allocation" on page 608
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
8 TD-SCDMA Networks
This chapter describes in detail the algorithms, calculation parameters, and processes of the coverage predictions and the
simulations available in TD-SCDMA documents. The first part of this chapter lists all the input and output parameters in the
TD-SCDMA documents, their significance, location in the Atoll GUI, and their usage. Detailed explanation of the basic coverage
predictions, which do not require simulation results, is provided in the second part. The third part describes the traffic
scenario generation and Montel Carlo simulation algorithms including smart antenna modelling and dynamic channel
allocation. The next sections are dedicated to TD-SCDMA coverage predictions which can be based on results obtained from
simulations. The last three sections describe in detail the allocation of frequencies, i.e., master and slave carriers, the
allocation of neigbours, and the allocation of scrambling codes.
8.1.1 Inputs
This table lists the inputs to computations, coverage predictions, and simulations.
Spread
F Max Global parameter None Maximum spreading factor (16)
Proc
G P – CCPCH Global parameter None P-CCPCH processing gain (13.8 dB)
537
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX
F MCJD Site equipment parameter None Multi-Cell Joint Detection factor
Transmitter parameter
TX (user-defined or calculated from transmitter equipment None BTS Noise Figure
NF
characteristics)
Transmitter loss
Transmitter parameter
TX (user-defined or calculated from transmitter equipment None L Tx = L Total – UL on uplink
L
characteristics) L Tx = L Total – DL on downlink
Req
RU DL Cell parameter None Required resource units in downlink
538
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
DL
S Packet Service parameter (packet session modelling) Bytes Packet size on downlink
539
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
Nom
R UL R99 bearer parameter kbps Uplink nominal bit rate
W-
G DL
Proc R99 bearer parameter (Can be calculated as -----------
Nom
) None Downlink processing gain
R DL
W
G UL
Proc R99 bearer parameter (Can be calculated as -----------
Nom
-) None Uplink processing gain
R UL
TS
N UL R99 bearer parameter None Number of uplink timelots
E b Req C Req
Req
Q TCH – UL R99 bearer parameter per mobility ( ----- or --- ) None Eb/Nt or C/I target on uplink
N t TCH – UL I TCH – UL
E Req C Req
Req
Q TCH – DL R99 bearer parameter per mobility ( ----b- or --- ) None Eb/Nt or C/I target on downlink
N t TCH – DL I TCH – DL
Req
RSCP TCH – UL R99 bearer parameter per mobility W Target RSCP on uplink TCH
Req
RSCP TCH – DL R99 bearer parameter per mobility W Target RSCP on downlink TCH
Div
G DL R99 bearer parameter per mobility None Downlink diversity gain
Div
G UL R99 bearer parameter per mobility None Uplink diversity gain
Term
P Max Terminal parameter W Maximum terminal power
Term
P Min Terminal parameter W Minimum terminal power
Req
RSCP UpPCH Mobility parameter W Required RSCP threshold for UpPCH
E Req C Req
Mobility parameter ( ----b- or ---
Req Required quality threshold for P-
Q P – CCPCH ) None
N t P – CCPCH I P – CCPCH CCPCH
E Req
Mobility parameter ( ----c-
Req Required quality threshold for HS-
Q HS – SCCH ) None
N t HS – SCCH SCCH
540
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
E P – CCPCH
Mobility parameter ( ----c-
Req Required quality threshold for P-
Q HS – SICH ) None
N t HS – SICH CCPCH
Req
Mobility parameter ( ---
Req C Required quality threshold for
Q DwPCH ) None
I DwPCH DwPCH
Model
σ Clutter class parameter None Model standard deviation
Eb/Nt
σ P – CCPCH or P-CCPCH Eb/Nt or C/I standard
Clutter class parameter None
C⁄I deviation
σ P – CCPCH
Ortho
F UL Clutter class parameter None Uplink orthogonality factor
N0
Term
NF Term × K × T × BW W Thermal noise at terminal
Model Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and model Model shadowing margin used in
M Shadowing None
standard deviation coverage predictions
P – CCPCH Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and P-CCPCH P-CCPCH Eb/Nt shadowing margin
M Shadowing None
Eb/Nt standard deviation used in coverage predictions
( Eb ⁄ Nt ) DL Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and DL Eb/Nt DL Eb/Nt shadowing margin used in
M Shadowing None
standard deviation coverage predictions
( Eb ⁄ Nt ) UL Result calculated from cell edge coverage probability and UL Eb/Nt UL Eb/Nt shadowing margin used in
M Shadowing None
standard deviation coverage predictions
For RSCP calculation Transmitter-terminal total loss in
L Path × L × L
TX Term
×L
Body
× L Indoor ×
Model
M Shadowing coverage predictions
Model
LT = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX Term
-
G ×G In UL, only carrier power is
( Eb ⁄ Nt ) UL
For P-CCPCH Eb/Nt calculation attenuated by M Shadowing .
TX Term Body P – CCPCH
( Eb ⁄ Nt ) P L Path × L × L ×L × L Indoor × M Shadowing
LT = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX Term
-
G ×G In DL, carrier power and intra-cell
LT None interference are attenuated by
For DL Eb/Nt calculation ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) DL
P – CCPCH
TX Term Body ( Eb ⁄ Nt )DL M Shadowing or M Shadowing while
( Eb ⁄ Nt ) DL L Path × L × L ×L × L Indoor × M Shadowing
LT = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX Term
- extra-cell interference is not.
G ×G
( Eb ⁄ Nt ) DL
For UL Eb/Nt calculation Therefore, M Shadowing or
TX Term Body ( Eb ⁄ Nt )UL
( Eb ⁄ Nt )
UL L Path × L × L ×L × L Indoor × M Shadowing P – CCPCH
M Shadowing are set to 1 in DL extra-
LT = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX Term
-
G ×G cell interference calculation.
541
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX i TX i ( ic )
TX ( ic ) ρ × RSCP P – CCPCH
i
C
--- ------------------------------------------------ None P-CCPCH C/I for the cell TX i ( ic )
I P – CCPCH TX i ( ic )
N Tot – DL
TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i ( ic ) TX i
RSCP P – CCPCH × β × γ + RSCP OCCH – TS0 × γ
TX i TX i
TX i ( ic ) With γ = ρ × ( 1 – F DL
Ortho
) × ( 1 – F JD
Term
) and Downlink intra-cell interference for
I Intra – DL W
the cell TX i ( ic )
β = 0 Without Useful Signal
1 Total Noise
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
TX ( ic ) TX
i i
RSCP DwPCH × β × γ
TX i TX i
TX i ( ic ) With γ = ρ × ( 1 – F DL
Ortho
) × ( 1 – F JD
Term
) and Intra-cell interference for the cell
W
I Intra – DL TX i ( ic )
β = 0 Without Useful Signal
1 Total Noise
TX j ( jc )
542
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX i TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) ρ × RSCP TCH – DL
C
--- ---------------------------------------------- × G Div None Downlink TCH C/I for the cell TX i ( ic )
I TCH – DL TX i ( ic ) DL
N Tot – DL
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
Term TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) ρ × RSCP TCH – UL
E b
----
- - × G Proc
------------------------------------------------- Div
UL × G UL None Uplink TCH Eb/Nt for the cell TX i ( ic )
N t TCH – UL TX i ( ic )
N Tot – UL
Term TX i ( ic )
TX ( ic )
i ρ × RSCP TCH – UL
C
--- - × G Div
------------------------------------------------- None Uplink TCH C/I for the cell TX i ( ic )
I TCH – UL TX i ( ic ) UL
N Tot – UL
Req Req
Term Q TCH – UL Q TCH – UL
Term - or P Term
P Max × --------------------------- Max × -------------------------
- Uplink required power for the
P Req TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) W
E b
---- C terminal
- --
-
N t TCH – UL I TCH – UL
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic )
TX i X TS1 – UL
N0 × ---------------------------------- W UpPCH interference
I TS1 – UL TX ( ic )
1 – X i
TS1 – UL
543
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic )
Ec
---- i
M
i M
i
N t HS – SICH × N Tot – UL – β × γ × RSCP HS – SICH
Mi -
W HS-SICH power
P HS – SICH -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- × L Model
T
Mi
ρ
TX i
Path loss ( L Path ) in dB L Path = L Model + L Ant
TX i TX i
Total losses ( L T ) in dB L T = L Path + L
Model
+ L Indoor + M Shadowing – G
Where,
RSCP is the received signal code power for the P-CCPCH.
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the transmitter. EIRP = P P – CCPCH + G –L .
ic is a carrier number
L Model is the loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated by the propagation model
TX
i
L Ant is the transmitter antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns)
Model
M Shadowing is the shadowing margin. This parameter is taken into account when the option “Shadowing taken into account”
is selected
L Indoor are the indoor losses, taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected
TX
i
G is the transmitter antenna gain
TX i TX i
L is the transmitter loss ( L = L Total – DL )
544
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
It is possible to analyse the best carrier. In this case, Atoll takes the highest P-CCPCH
power of cells to calculate the signal level received from a transmitter.
For a selected transmitter, it is also possible to study the path loss, L Path , or the total
losses, L T . Path loss and total losses are the same on any carrier.
You can use a value other than 30 dB for the margin from the best server signal level, for
example a smaller value for improving the calculation speed. For more information on
defining a different value for this margin, see the Administrator Manual.
Where,
RSCP is the received signal code power. RSCP can be calculated for P-CCPCH, DwPCH, or the downlink TCH.
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX TX
i i i i
EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the transmitter. EIRP P – CCPCH = P P – CCPCH + G –L ,
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
EIRP DwPCH = P DwPCH + G –L , or EIRP DL – TCH = P DL – TCH + G –L .
ic is a carrier number
TX i
L Path = L Model + L Ant
L Model is the loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated by the propagation model
545
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX
i
L Ant is the transmitter antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns)
Model
M Shadowing is the shadowing margin. This parameter is taken into account when the option “Shadowing taken into account”
is selected
L Indoor are the indoor losses, taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected
Term
L is the terminal loss
Term
G is the receiver total gain
TX i
G is the transmitter antenna gain
TX i TX i
L is the transmitter loss ( L = L Total – DL )
546
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
RSCP P – CCPCH ≥ Best RSCP P – CCPCH – M
j≠i
547
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic )
i
Atoll calculates the best RSCP DwPCH received from each transmitter TX i ( ic ) on each pixel.. Where other service
areas overlap the studied one, Atoll chooses the highest RSCP. A pixel of a service area is coloured if
TX ( ic )
i Req
RSCP DwPCH ≥ RSCP DwPCH ( Mobility ) . The pixel colour depends on the RSCP level. Coverage consists of several
independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as defined thresholds.
Each layer corresponds to an area where the RSCP from the best server exceeds a defined minimum threshold.
• RSCP Margin (dB)
Coverage consists of several layers with a layer per user-defined RSCP margin defined in the Display tab (Prediction
TX i ( ic )
Req RSCP
properties). For each layer, area is covered if RSCP DwPCH – RSCP DwPCH ( Mobility ) ≥ M DwPCH . Each layer is assigned
a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Cell edge coverage probability (%)
TX i ( ic )
On each pixel of each transmitter service area, the coverage corresponds to the pixels where the RSCP DwPCH from
TX ( ic )
i
the transmitter TX i ( ic ) exceeds RSCP DwPCH defined in the mobility selected in the Conditions tab, with different cell
edge coverage probabilities. There is one coverage area per transmitter in the explorer.
548
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
RSCP P – CCPCH ≥ Best RSCP P – CCPCH – M
j≠i
549
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
Atoll generates user distributions as part of the Monte Carlo algorithm based on traffic data. The resulting user
distribution complies with the traffic database and maps selected when creating simulations.
• Dynamic channel allocation and power control as explained under "Power Control Simulation" on page 555.
Atoll determines the total number of users attempting connection in each simulation
based on the Poisson distribution. This may lead to slight variations in the total numbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulation of a group, add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0
Each user is randomly assigned a service, a terminal, and a mobility type. The activity status is determined based on the
calculations of activity probabilities using the traffic inputs.
The user activity status influences the next step of the simulation, i.e., the interference in the network. Both active and
inactive users use radio resources and generate interference.
Once all the user characteristics have been determined, a second random trial is performed to obtain their geographical
locations weighted according to the clutter classes, and whether they are indoor or outdoor according to the percentage of
indoor users per clutter class defined for the traffic maps.
Atoll also calculates the shadowing margin for each user based on the standard deviations defined for the clutter class of each
user.
In TD-SCDMA networks users accessing packet-switched services can transmit either on uplink or on downlink, but never on
both simultaneously. Users accessing circuit-switched services transmit on both uplink and downlink simultaneously. Circuit-
switched service users, mobiles connected in uplink and downlink both, are modelled in Atoll by two mobiles generated at
the same location with one connected on the uplink and the other on the downlink. If one of these two mobiles is rejected
for some reason, the other is also rejected due to the same reason.
N Users = S Env × D UP
• In case of user profile traffic maps composed of lines, the number of users per user
profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (DUP) (users
per km): N Users = L × D UP
• The number of users is an input when a user profile traffic map is composed of points.
At any given instant, Atoll calculates the probability for a user being active in the uplink and in the downlink according to the
service usage characteristics described in the user profiles, i.e., the number of voice calls or data sessions, the average
duration of each voice call, or the volumes of the data exchanged in the uplink and the downlink in each data session.
550
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
The number of users and their distribution per activity status is determined as follows:
• Calculation of the service usage duration per hour ( p 0 : probability of a connection):
N call × d
p o = -------------------
-
3600
n i = N Users × p 0
The activity status of each user depends on the activity periods during the connection, i.e., the uplink and downlink activity
UL DL
factors defined for the circuit switched service i, f Act and f Act .
UL UL DL
Probability of being active on UL: p Active = f Act × ( 1 – f Act )
DL DL UL
Probability of being active on DL: p Active = f Act × ( 1 – f Act )
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active both on UL and DL: p Active = f Act × f Act
UL UL
Number of users active in the uplink: n i – Active = n i × p Active
DL DL
Number of users active in the downlink: n i – Active = n i × p Active
UL + DL UL + DL
Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n i – Active = n i × p Active
Therefore, a connected user can be either active on both links, inactive on both links, active on UL only, or active on DL only.
551
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
UL DL
In case of HSDPA services, f Eff and f Eff are the uplink and downlink A-DPCH activity factors, respectively.
DL DL DL
( D Inactivity ) Session = N PacketCall × ( D Inactivity ) PacketCall
DL DL
DL DL N Packet × S Packet × 8
( D Activity ) Session = N PacketCall × ------------------------------------------------
DL
-
R Nom × 1000
UL N Sess N Sess
- × D UL
p Connection = -----------
DL DL
Connection and p Connection = ------------ × D Connection
3600 3600
n j = N Users × p Connected
As Figure 8.1 on page 551 shows, there can be three possible cases when a user is connected:
552
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
DL UL
DL p Connection × ( 1 – p Connection )
The probability of being connected is: p Connected = -----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
p Connected
Therefore, we have:
DL DL UL UL + DL
The probability of the user being active on DL and inactive on UL: p1 Active = f × ( 1 – f ) × p Connected
UL + DL UL DL UL + DL
The probability of the user being active on both UL and DL: p1 Active = f ×f × p Connected
UL DL UL + DL
The probability of the user being inactive on both UL and DL: p1 Inactive = ( 1 – f ) × ( 1 – f ) × p Connected
UL UL
The probability of the user being inactive on both UL and DL: p2 Inactive = ( 1 – f ) × p Connected
DL DL
The probability of the user being inactive on both UL and DL: p3 Inactive = ( 1 – f ) × p Connected
UL UL UL
Number of users active on UL and inactive on DL: n j – Active = n j × ( p1 Active + p2 Active )
DL DL DL
Number of users active on DL and inactive on UL: n j – Active = n j × ( p1 Active + p3 Active )
UL + DL UL + DL
Number of users active on UL and DL: n j – Active = n j × ( p1 Active )
Therefore, a connected user can be active on both links, inactive on both links, active on UL only, or active on DL only.
The user distribution per service, and the activity status distribution between the users
are average distributions. The service and the activity status of each user are random in
each simulation. Therefore, if you compute several simulations at once, the average
number of users per service and average numbers of inactive, active on UL, active on DL,
and active on UL and DL users, will correspond to calculated distributions. But, if you
compare each simulation, you will observe that the user distribution between services as
well as the activity status distribution between users is different in each simulation.
553
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
Atoll calculates the number of users active in uplink and in downlink in the Txi cell using the service (NUL and NDL) as follows:
UL DL
UL RS RS
N - and N DL = -----------
= ----------- - for R99 circuit and packet switched services
UL DL
R Nom R Nom
DL
DL RS
N = ----------
DL
for HSDPA service
R Avg
UL DL
R S and R S are the uplink and downlink rates for service S in the TXi cell from the traffic map.
Atoll takes into account activity periods during the connection in order to determine the activity status of each user.
Activity probabilities are calculated as follows:
UL DL
Probability of being inactive in UL and DL: p Inactive = ( 1 – f Act ) × ( 1 – f Act )
UL UL DL
Probability of being active in UL only: p Active = f Act × ( 1 – f Act )
DL DL UL
Probability of being active in DL only: p Active = f Act × ( 1 – f Act )
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active both in UL and DL: p Active = f Act × f Act
UL DL
Where, f Act and f Act are respectively the UL and DL activity factors defined for the service i.
DL UL + DL UL DL UL + DL
( p Active + p Active ) × ( n i – Active + n i – Active + n i – Active ) = N DL
Therefore, we have:
UL + DL UL + DL
UL + DL N UL × p Active N DL × p Active
Number of users active in UL and DL both: n i – Active = min --------------------------------------- , ---------------------------------------
p Active + p Active p Active + p UL
UL UL + DL DL + DL
Active
UL UL + DL
Number of users active in UL and inactive in DL: n i – Active = N UL – n i – Active
DL UL + DL
Number of users active in DL and inactive in UL: n i – Active = N DL – n i – Active
UL DL UL + DL
( n i – Active + n i – Active + n i – Active )
Number of inactive users in UL and DL: n i – Inactive = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- × p inactive
1 – p inactive
Therefore, a connected user can have four different activity status: either active in both links, or inactive in both links, or active
in UL only, or active in DL only.
Atoll takes into account activity periods during the connection in order to determine the activity status of each user.
Activity probabilities are calculated as follows:
UL DL
Probability of being inactive in UL and DL: p Inactive = ( 1 – f Act ) × ( 1 – f Act )
UL UL DL
Probability of being active in UL only: p Active = f Act × ( 1 – f Act )
554
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
DL DL UL
Probability of being active in DL only: p Active = f Act × ( 1 – f Act )
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active both in UL and DL: p Active = f Act × f Act
UL DL
Where, f Act and f Act are respectively the UL and DL activity factors defined for the service i.
UL UL
Number of users active in UL and inactive in DL: n i – Active = n i × p Active
DL DL
Number of users active in DL and inactive in UL: n i – Active = n i × p Active
UL + DL UL + DL
Number of users active in UL and DL both: n i – Active = n i × p Active
Therefore, a connected user can have four different activity status: either active in both links, or inactive in both links, or active
in UL only, or active in DL only.
The activity status of users is based on an average distribution. The activity status of each
user is random in each simulation. Therefore, if you compute several simulations at once,
the average numbers of inactive, active on UL, active on DL, and active on UL and DL
users, will correspond to calculated distributions. But, if you compare each simulation,
you will observe that the activity status distribution between users is different in each
simulation.
555
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
556
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX TX M M M
i i i i Model i i i
RSCP P – CCPCH = P P – CCPCH + G –L – L Path – M Shadowing – L Body – L Indoor + G –L in dBm
Where,
TX
i
L Path = L Model + L Ant
L Model is the loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated by the propagation model
TX i
L Ant is the transmitter antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns)
Model
M Shadowing is the shadowing margin. This parameter is taken into account when the option “Shadowing taken into account”
is selected
L Indoor are the indoor losses, taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected
Mi
L is the los of the terminal used by Mi
Mi
L Body is the body loss defined in the service used by Mi
Mi
G is the receiver gain of the terminal user by Mi
TX
i
G is the transmitter antenna gain
TX i TX i
L is the transmitter loss ( L = L Total – DL )
A cell TX i ( ic ) is considered the best server of a mobile Mi if it satisfies the following conditions:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i
RSCP P – CCPCH ≥ TAdd P – CCPCH ( Mobility ) and RSCP P – CCPCH =
i Best RSCP TX j ( jc ) .
j = All
P – CCPCH
The best server is determined once for the whole simulation during the first iteration, i.e., k = 0, because the best server does
not change during the simulation and smart antennas do not influence this step.
Mi is considered unable to connect to the network if no best server has been selected. In this case, Mi is rejected for the reason
P-CCPCH RSCP < Min P-CCPCH RSCP. If Mi has no best server, it is not taken into account in the next steps.
DCA TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
DCA
Where, X = X DL = N Tot – DL if the mobile is connected in the downlink.
557
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic, TS ( M ) )
i i
DCA DCA N Tot – UL
And, X = X UL - × ΔX DCA if the mobile is connected in the uplink.
= -----------------------------------------------
TX ( ic, TS ( M ) ) TX
i i i
N Tot – UL + N0
DCA
ΔX is the load increment given by:
Mi TX i
ρ × ( 1 – f UL ) × 1 – f JD
Ortho
DCA
ΔX = ----------------------------------------------------------------------
1-
1 + ----------Req
Q UL
E b Req
-----
Req N t UL
Where Q UL = ---
Req C Proc
= ------------------ is the uplink required signal quality. The uplink processing gain G UL calculated
I UL G UL
Proc
from the service parameters, if no smart antenna is used by the transmitter in the uplink.
If a smart antenna is used by the transmitter in the uplink, the smart antenna gain is taken into account in calculating
Req
Q UL .
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
• N Tot – UL is described in "Uplink Power Control" on page 559.
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
• N Tot – DL is described in "Downlink Power Control" on page 560.
• The carrier is the same in the uplink and in the downlink for mobiles accessing circuit-
switched services.
Timeslot selection by Load: From the selected carrier, Atoll selects the timeslots which are the least loaded and have
enough resource units for the service being accessed by Mi.
2. Available RUs
Carrier selection by Available RUs: The DCA determines the carrier which has the highest number of available
resource units with enough timeslots to accomodate the service being used by each mobile Mi. The best carrier for a
mobile is the one that has the highest number of resource units:
Timeslot selection by Available RUs: From the selected carrier, Atoll selects the timeslots which have the highest
numbers of available resource units.
3. Direction of Arrival
Carrier selection by Direction of Arrival: The DCA determines the direction of arrival of the signal from the served user
Mi and checks whether there is an interfering mobile in the same direction as Mi. Atoll searches for interfering mobiles
within the angle defined by the Angular Step. For example, if you enter an angular step of 15 degrees, Atoll searches
for interfering mobiles within 15 degrees to the right and to the left of the served user, and allocates a different carrier
than the ones used by any interfering mobiles found. The best carrier for a mobile is the one which is not interfered
by another mobile in the direction of the mobile Mi.
In other words, the direction of arrival for the served user Mi should not be the direction of arrival of an interfering
mobile.
Timeslot selection by Direction of Arrival: From the selected carrier, Atoll selects the timeslots which are not being
used by any other mobile Mj located in the same direction as the served user Mi.
4. Sequential
Sequential carrier selection: The DCA allocates carriers to served users Mi in a sequential order.
Sequential timeslot selection: From the selected carrier, Atoll allocates timeslots to served users Mi in a sequential
order.
At the end of the DCA, each admitted mobile has an associated carrier and timeslots. In case of N-frequency mode compatible
transmitters, an admitted mobile can have associated timeslots over more than one slave carrier.
558
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
If the mobile Mi is connected (active or inactive) in the uplink and has a best server TX i ( ic ) assigned to it, Atoll calculates the
signal quality on the uplink timeslots allocated to Mi by the DCA:
Mi TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) Mi TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
E b
---- ρ × RSCP TCH – UL C ρ × RSCP TCH – UL
- - × G Proc
= ------------------------------------------------------- × G
Div
or --- - × G Div
= -------------------------------------------------------
N t TCH – UL TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) UL UL I TCH – UL TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) UL
N Tot – UL N Tot – UL
The uplink total noise is calculated for the uplink connection between each mobile Mi and its best server TX i ( ic ) .
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) TX i
N Tot – UL = I Tot – UL + N0
Where
M M
i i
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) RSCP TCH – UL ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) ) × β × γ +
I Tot – UL = Mj Mi
RSCP TCH – UL ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) ) × γ +
M j ∈ TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
Mj ≠ Mi
M M
1 – ρ j × RSCP j
TCH – UL ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) ) +
M ∈ TX ( ic, TS ( M ) )
j i i
Mj ≠ Mi
M TX
RSCP TCH – UL ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) ) × 1 – F MCJD
j i
M j ∉ TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
Mi Mi TX i
) × 1 – F JD and β = 0 Without Useful Signal
Ortho
γ = ρ × ( 1 – F UL
1 Total Noise
The above formula gives the value of I Tot – UL for the uplink connection between Mi and TX i ( ic ) , taking into account the
interference received from other mobiles, Mj, which are located in the Mi best server coverage area, as well as located in the
coverage areas of other cells. The mobile Mi is the focus, i.e., the mobile that is listened to by the transmitter TX i ( ic ) .
• The useful signal for which the received mobile is the focus (Mi).
• The intra-cell interference for which the best-server is the same for the received mobile Mj and the focus Mi, TX i ( ic ) .
Mi
M P Req ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) )
i k–1
The uplink received signal code power is: RSCP TCH – UL ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) ) = ---------------------------------------------------------------
Model
-
LT
TX i Mi Mi
Model
Model L Path × L × L × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing Mi
LT = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX M
- and P Req ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) ) is the uplink required mobile power
i i
G ×G
Mi Mi
calculated for the timeslot allocated to Mi. If Mi is an HSDPA user, P Req ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) ) = 0.1 × P Req ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) )
559
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX TX
Model i SA i SA
In L T , G = G UL and L = L UL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for
M TX TX
i i i
P Req ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) ) , if a smart antenna is available in the uplink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main antenna
model.
Interference is updated only for active mobiles on the uplink for circuit- and packet-
switched services. However, if these mobiles are rejected, they are considered in the
number of rejected mobiles.
Mi
Calculation of Uplink Required Power ( P Req ):
Req
C---
Mi Mi I TCH – UL
or P Req ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) ) = P Req ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) ) × ------------------------------------
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
-
k k–1
C ---
I TCH – UL
Mi Mi Mi Mi
And if P Req ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) ) < P Min then P Req ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) ) = P Min
Mi Mi
If P Req ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) ) > P Max then the mobile Mi is rejected for the reason "Pmob > PmobMax", and
Mi
P Req ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) ) is set to 0.
Mi Mi
P Min and P Max are set in the properties of the terminal used by the mobile Mi.
Mi
TX ( ic, TS ( M ) ) P Req ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) )
i i k–1
Where RSCP TCH – UL = ---------------------------------------------------------------
Model
-
LT
TX M M
i i i Model
Model L Path × L × L × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing Mi
LT = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX M
- and P Req ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) ) is the uplink required mobile
i i k–1
G ×G
power for iteration k - 1 transmitted on the timeslot allocated to Mi.
TX TX
Model i SA i SA
In L T , G = G UL and L = L UL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for
Mi TX i TX i
P Req ( TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) ) , if a smart antenna is available in the uplink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main antenna
model.
The uplink required powers for mobiles inactive in the uplink accessing circuit- or packet-
switched services are calculated for information only. However, if these mobiles are
rejected, they are considered in the number of rejected mobiles.
If the mobile Mi is connected (active or inactive) in the downlink and has a best server TX i ( ic ) assigned to it, Atoll calculates
the signal quality on the uplink timeslots allocated to Mi by the DCA:
560
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX TX ( ic, TS ( M ) ) TX TX ( ic, TS ( M ) )
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) i i i TX ( ic, TS ( M ) ) i i i
E b
---- ρ × RSCP TCH – DL C
i i ρ × RSCP TCH – DL
- - × G Proc
= -------------------------------------------------------- × G
Div
or --
- - × G Div
= --------------------------------------------------------
N t TCH – DL TX ( ic, TS ( M ) )
i i
DL DL I TCH – DL
TX ( ic, TS ( M ) )
i i
DL
N Tot – DL N Tot – DL
The downlink total noise is calculated for the downlink connection between each mobile Mi and its best server TX i ( ic ) .
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) Mi
N Tot – DL = I Tot – DL + I IC – DL ( ic, jc ) + I MM ( M i, M j ) + N 0
Where
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) TX i
TX ( ic, TS ( M ) )
i i
RSCP Tot – DL ( Mi ) × β × γ +
I Tot – DL = TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) TX i
RSCP Tot – DL ( Mj ) × γ +
M j ∈ TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
Mj ≠ Mi
TX TX ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
1 – ρ i × RSCP i
Tot – DL ( Mj ) +
M j ∈ TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
Mj ≠ Mi
TX j ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
RSCP Tot – DL ( Mj )
M j ∉ TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
• The useful signal for which the received mobile is the focus (Mi).
• The intra-cell interference for which the best-server is the same for the received mobile Mj and the focus Mi, TX i ( ic ) .
TX j ( jc, TS ( M i ) )
RSCPTot – DL ( Mi )
All TX j
I IC – DL ( ic, jc ) = ----------------------------------------------------------------
F IRF ( ic, jc )
TX i TX i Mi
) × 1 – F JD and β = 0 Without Useful Signal
Ortho
γ = ρ × ( 1 – F DL
1 Total Noise
I IC – DL ( ic, jc ) is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced by the
interference reduction factor F IRF ( ic, jc ) defined for the pair (ic, jc).
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) TX ( ic, TS ( M ) )
TX ( ic, TS ( M ) ) P TCH – DL TX ( ic, TS ( M ) ) P OCCH
i i
i i k–1 i i
With RSCP TCH – DL = -----------------------------------------
Model
- and RSCP OCCH = -------------------------------
Model
LT LT
TX M M
i i i Model
Model L Path × L × L × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing TX ( ic, TS ( M ) )
LT - and P TCHi – DL i
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ is the downlink traffic power transmitted
TX M k–1
i i
G ×G
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
on the timeslot allocated to Mi during the iteration k - 1. If Mi is an HSDPA user, P TCH – DL = 0.1 × P TCH – DL
561
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX TX
Model i SA i SA
In L T , G = G DL and L = L DL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for
TX ( ic, TS ( M ) ) TX ( ic, TS ( M ) ) TX TX
i i i i i i
P TCH – DL only and not for P OCCH , if a smart antenna is available in the downlink. Otherwise, G and L are
read from the main antenna model.
M
RSCPTCH – UL ( Mi )
j
M
I MM ( M i, M j ) = -------------------------------------------------
j
is the interference from each mobile Mj transmitting in the uplink on the same
F IRF ( ic, jc )
timeslots as those on which the mobile Mi is receiving in the downlink. Mj can interfere Mi directly if and only if:
Mi – Mj
• The distance between Mi and Mj ( d ) is less than the Max Distance between interfering mobiles defined by the
user when starting the simulation, and
• The downlink timeslot of Mi (TSMi) is the same as the uplink timeslot of Mj, (TSMj).
The interference received from the mobile Mj at the mobile Mi is calculated using either the free-space propagation model or
the Xia model.
Mj
Mj P TCH – UL
RSCP TCH – UL ( M i ) = -------------------
-
L MM
Mi – Mj
32.4 + 20 × Log ( F Avg ) + 20 × Log ( d ) If d ≤3m
L MM = with F Avg being the average frequency in MHz of the
Mi – Mj
49 + 30 × Log ( F Avg ) + 40 × Log ( d ) If d >3m
frequency band used by the best server of the mobile Mi, and d is the distance between the mobiles Mi and Mj in km.
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
Calculation of Downlink Required Power ( P Req ):
Req
C---
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) I TCH – DL
or P Req = P Req × ------------------------------------
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
-
k k–1
C ---
I TCH – DL
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
Min Min
And if P Req < P TCH – DL ( Service ) then P Req = P TCH – DL ( Service )
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
Max
If P Req > P TCH – DL ( Service ) then the mobile Mi is rejected for the reason "Ptch > PtchMax", and P Req is set
to 0.
Min Max
P TCH – DL ( Service ) and P TCH – DL ( Service ) are set in the properties of the R99 bearer associated with the service used by the
mobile Mi.
TX ( ic, TS ( M ) ) TX ( ic, TS ( M ) ) TX ( ic, TS ( M ) )
i i i i i i
Otherwise, the downlink traffic power is incremented P TCH – DL = P TCH – DL + P Req
For each mobile, Atoll also calculates the downlink traffic power for the different values of the Angular Step θ Step .
SA
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) G DL
RSCP TCH – DL = RSCP TCH – DL × ------------------------
θ Step SA
L DL ( θ Step )
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) P Req
k–1
Where RSCP TCH – DL = -----------------------------------------
Model
-
LT
562
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX M M
i i i Model
Model L Path × L × L × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing TX ( ic, TS ( M ) )
LT - and P Reqi
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
i
is the downlink traffic power for iteration k
TX M k–1
i i
G ×G
- 1 transmitted on the timeslot allocated to Mi.
TX TX
Model i SA i SA
In L T , G = G DL and L = L DL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for
TX ( ic, TS ( M ) ) TX TX
i i i i
P Req , if a smart antenna is available in the downlink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main antenna
model.
The downlink power for mobiles inactive in the downlink accessing circuit- or packet-
switched services are calculated for information only.
TX ( ic, TS ( M ) )
i i
For each mobile Mi interfered by Mj in the uplink by the connection between Mj and TX j ( ic ) , Atoll updates RSCP TCH – UL .
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
For each mobile interfered by Mi, Atoll updates RSCP TCH – DL
Where TX i ( ic ) is the transmitter considered and Mi is the focus, i.e., the mobile that is the target for TX i ( ic ) .
8.3.2.2.7 Control of Radio Resource Limits (Downlink Traffic Power and Uplink Load)
This step checks whether the downlink traffic powers of the downlink timeslots and the uplink loads of the uplink timeslots
of all the cells satisfy the conditions defined globally or per cell and timeslot.
Atoll verifies that the total R99 power transmitted by any cell on any timeslot does not exceed the effective maximum cell
power per timeslot. The effective maximum cell traffic power per timeslot is calculated as:
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
P Max – DL – Eff = P Max – DL × %P Max – DL
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
Where P Max – DL is the maximum cell power per timeslot defined per cell, and %P Max – DL is the maximum allowed
downlink load either taken from the properties of each cell or from the simulation properties if a global value is defined.
For each transmitter TXi, carrier ic, and downlink timeslot TS M ,
i
563
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic, TS ( M ) ) TX ( ic, TS ( M ) )
i i i i
If P R99 – DL > P Max – DL – Eff the mobile with the lowest service priority is rejected for the reason "DL Load Saturation".
Atoll verifies that the uplink load of any cell on any timeslot does not exceed the maximum uplink cell load allowed per
timeslot.
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
The maximum allowed uplink cell load, X Max – UL , is either taken from the properties of each cell or from the simulation
properties if a global value is defined.
For each transmitter TXi, carrier ic, and uplink timeslot TS M ,
i
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
If X UL > X Max – UL the mobile with the lowest service priority is rejected for the reason "UL Load Saturation".
If a smart antenna is used by the transmitter in the uplink, the smart antenna gain is taken into account in the calculation of
uplink load.
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
P Tot – DL = P R99 – DL + P HR + P HS – SCCH + P HS – PDSCH
The HSDPA powers, i.e., the HS-SCCH and HS-PDSCH powers are calculated as follows:
• HS-SCCH Power:
HS-SCCH channels are transmitted on DL traffic timeslots. The maximum number of supported HS-SCCH channels is
defined per cell. Power can be allocated to HS-SCCH statically or dynamically:
• Static Allocation
The static HS-SCCH power is defined in the properties of the HSDPA cell.
• Dynamic Allocation
E c TXi ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
HS-SCCH power is calculated for -----
Req
= Q HS – SCCH ( Mobility ) so that P HS – SCCH < P Available – HS – SCCH .
N t HS – SCCH
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Where P Available – HS – SCCH = P Max – DL – Eff – P R99 – DL – P HR is the power available for HS-SCCH in the cell
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) , and P R99 – DL = P TCH – DL + P OCCH .
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
The effective maximum cell traffic power per timeslot is calculated as: P Max – DL – Eff = P Max – DL × %P Max – DL .
TX i ( ic )
P Max – DL is the maximum power defined per cell, and %P Max – DL is the maximum allowed downlink load either
taken from the properties of each cell or from the simulation properties if a global value is defined.
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
Ec
---- i
TX i i
N t HS – SCCH × N Tot – DL – β × γ × RSCP HS – SCCH
-
TX i ( ic )
Model
P HS – SCCH = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX
× LT
i
ρ
564
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX ( ic )
i
Where N Tot – DL is the downlink total noise calculated in "Downlink Power Control" on page 560,
TX TX M
) × 1 – F JD and β = 0 Without Useful Signal
i i Ortho i
γ = ρ × ( 1 – F DL
1 Total Noise
TX i Mi Mi
Model
Model L Path × L × L × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing TX ( ic )
LT - and P HSi – SCCH is the HS-SCCH power calculated for the
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX i Mi
G ×G
timeslots allocated to Mi.
TX i TX i
Model SA SA
In L T ,G = G DL and L = L DL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for
TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
P HS – SCCH , if a smart antenna is available in the downlink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main
antenna model.
• HS-PDSCH Power:
HS-PDSCH channels are transmitted on DL traffic timeslots. Power can be allocated to HS-PDSCH statically or
dynamically:
• Static Allocation
The static HS-PDSCH power is defined in the properties of the HSDPA cell.
• Dynamic Allocation
HS-PDSCH power is calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
P HS – PDSCH = P Max – DL – Eff – P R99 – DL – P HR – P HS – SCCH
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Where P R99 – DL = P TCH – DL + P OCCH . The effective maximum cell traffic power per timeslot is calculated as:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i
P Max – DL – Eff = P Max – DL × %P Max – DL . P Max – DL is the maximum power defined per cell, and %P Max – DL is the
maximum allowed downlink load either taken from the properties of each cell or from the simulation properties
if a global value is defined.
The HS-SICH power is calculated as follows:
• HS-SICH Power:
HS-SICH channels can be transmitted on any UL traffic timeslot. The maximum number of supported HS-SICH channels
is defined per cell. Power can be allocated to HS-SICH statically or dynamically:
• Static Allocation
The static HS-SICH power is defined in the properties of the terminal used by the HSDPA mobile Mi.
• Dynamic Allocation
E TXi ( ic ) M TX ( ic )
HS-SICH power is calculated for ----c-
Req i i
N t HS – SICH = Q HS – SICH ( Mobility )
so that P HS – SICH < P Max – HS – SICH and
Mi Mi
P HS – SICH < P Max – HS – SICH .
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic )
Ec
---- i
M
i
M
i
N t HS – SICH × N Tot – UL – β × γ × RSCP HS – SICH
-
Mi
P HS – SICH - × L Model
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- T
Mi
ρ
TX i ( ic )
Where N Tot – UL is the uplink total noise calculated in "Uplink Power Control" on page 559,
Mi Mi TX i
) × 1 – F JD and β = 0 Without Useful Signal
Ortho
γ = ρ × ( 1 – F UL
1 Total Noise
TX i Mi Mi
Model
Model L Path × L × L × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing M
LT - and P HSi – SICH is the HS-SICH power calculated for the
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX i Mi
G ×G
timeslots allocated to Mi.
565
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX TX
Model i SA i SA
In L T ,G = G UL and L = L UL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used,
M TX TX
i i i
for P HS – SICH , if a smart antenna is available in the uplink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main
antenna model.
TX ( ic )
i
The total transmitted power of the cell ( P Tot – DL ) is the sum of the R99 transmitted power and the HSDPA powers.
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
P Tot – DL = P R99 – DL + P HR + P HS – SCCH + P HS – PDSCH
HS-SCCH admission control is performed for active HSDPA users connected to A-DCH bearers on the downlink and having an
HS-SCCH sub-connection status. Each cell is able to manage a maximum number of HS-SCCH channels, n HS – SCCH . During the
R99 part, the DCA provides a DL timeslot with one SF16 resource unit that has the downlink Ec/Nt higher than the required
quality. If no cell with such a resource unit is available, the user is rejected.
HS-SICH
HS-SICH admission control is performed for active HSDPA users connected to A-DCH bearers on the uplink and having an HS-
SICH sub-connection status. Each cell is able to manage a maximum number of HS-SICH channels, n HS – SICH . During the R99
part, the DCA provides an UL timeslot with one SF16 resource unit that has the uplink Ec/Nt higher than the required quality.
If no cell with such a resource unit is available, the user is rejected.
HS-PDSCH
Scheduling is performed for active HSDPA users connected to A-DCH bearers on the downlink and having an HS-PDSCH sub-
connection status. The scheduling is performed as follows:
1. Each HS-PDSCH user is considered as the only served user. The scheduler allocates the best available HSDPA bearer to
each user. The best available HSDPA bearer is selected depending on the user’s Ec/Nt. If no bearer can be allocated
due to low Ec/Nt, the user is rejected for the reason "HSDPA Scheduler Saturation".
The required HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt value is read from receiver equipment properties. For each bearer, Atoll checks that the
Ec/Nt reaches the quality target. HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt is calculated by taking into account all intra and extra cells
interferences.
2. The scheduler sorts the HS-PDSCH users to whom bearers have been assigned in the order of decreasing RLC peak
rates. If two users have the same bearer, the user with the higher Ec/Nt has the higher rank.
3. The scheduler considers the group of HS-PDSCH users to whom bearers, HS-SCCH, and HS-SICH have been assigned.
The number of HS-PDSCH users cannot exceed the maximum number of HSDPA users ( n Max ) supported by the cell. If
there are enough HSDPA power and resource units available in order to obtain a HSDPA bearer, the users will be
connected. Otherwise, they will be delayed and their connection status will be “HSDPA Delayed”.
4. Other HS-PDSCH users will be rejected for the reason "HSDPA Scheduler Saturation".
For N-frequency mode compatible transmitters, the resource units available in the master and slave carriers can be shared,
i.e., a mobile can be connected to timeslots belonging more than one carrier.
566
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
Max N Tot – UL – N Tot – UL
Δ UL = Int k k – 1 × 100
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
All TX i TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
N Tot – UL
k
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
Where, P Err is given by:
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
TX ( ic, TS ( M ) ) Max P Rec – P Rec
i i θ Step, k θ Step, k – 1
P Err = - with smart antennas.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0° ≤ θ Step < 360° TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
P Rec
θ Step, k
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) ) P Rec – P Rec
P Err k k – 1 without smart antennas.
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
TX i ( ic, TS ( M i ) )
P Rec
k
• Divergence: After 30 iterations, Δ DL and/or Δ UL are still higher than their respective thresholds and from the 30th
iteration, Δ DL and/or Δ UL do not decrease during the next 15 successive iterations.
567
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
Examples: Let us assume that the maximum number of iterations is 100, and the UL and DL convergence thresholds
are set to 5 %.
a. After the 30th iteration, Δ DL and/or Δ DL equal 100 and do not decrease during the next 15 successive iterations.
Atoll stops the algorithm at the 46th iteration. The simulation has not converged.
b. After the 30th iteration, Δ DL and/or Δ UL equal 80, they start decreasing slowly until the 40th iteration (without
going under the thresholds) and then, do not change during 15 successive iterations. Atoll stops the algorithm at
the 56th iteration without converging.
• Last Iteration: If Δ DL and/or Δ UL are still much higher than their respective thresholds after the last iteration, the
simulation has not converged. If Δ DL and Δ UL are lower than their respective thresholds, the simulation has reached
convergence.
TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Eb
The pixels in the TX i ( ic ) coverage area where RSCP P – CCPCH ≥ TAdd P – CCPCH ( Mobility ) and -----
i Req
≥ Q P – CCPCH or
N t P – CCPCH
TX ( ic )
i
C
--- Req
I P – CCPCH ≥ Q P – CCPCH are covered and coloured according to the selected display option.
TX i TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i ( ic )
E b TXi ( ic ) ρ × RSCP P – CCPCH TX i ( ic )
ρ × RSCP P – CCPCH
Where ----- C
---
Proc
= ------------------------------------------------
TX i ( ic )
× G P – CCPCH and I P – CCPCH =
------------------------------------------------
TX i ( ic )
N t P – CCPCH
N Tot – DL N Tot – DL
TX ( ic )
i
TX i ( ic ) P P – CCPCH
RSCP P – CCPCH = ----------------------
LT
Where
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i ( ic ) TX i
I Intra – DL = RSCP P – CCPCH × β × γ + RSCP OCCH – TS0 × γ
568
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX TX
) and β = 0 Without Useful Signal
i i Ortho Term
With γ = ρ × ( 1 – F DL ) × ( 1 – F JD
1 Total Noise
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
RSCPP – CCPCH + RSCPOCCH – TS0
i j j
I Extra – DL =
j≠i
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
RSCPP – CCPCH + RSCPOCCH – TS0
TX
I IC – DL ( ic, jc ) = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
j -
F IRF ( ic, jc )
I IC – DL ( ic, jc ) is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced by the
interference reduction factor F IRF ( ic, jc ) defined for the pair (ic, jc).
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) P OCCH – TS0
RSCP OCCH – TS0 = ------------------------
-
LT
TX i
Term Eb ⁄ Nt
L Path × L × L × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing
L T = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX i
-
Term
G ×G
TX i
Term
ρ and N 0 are defined in "Definitions and Formulas" on page 537.
Coverage Display
It is possible to colour the transmitter service areas using a unique colour per transmitter, or colour the pixels in the coverage
areas by any transmitter attribute or other criteria such as:
• Eb/Nt or C/I (dB)
Atoll calculates the Eb/Nt or C/I on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel colour depends on
the Eb/Nt or C/I level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be
managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, a
E b TXi ( ic ) C i
TX ( ic )
pixel is covered if ----- ≥ Threshold or --- ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and
N t P – CCPCH I P – CCPCH
displayed with intersections between layers.
• Eb/Nt Margin or C/I Margin (dB)
Atoll calculates the Eb/Nt or C/I margin on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel colour
depends on the Eb/Nt or C/I margin value. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the
workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Eb
For each layer, a pixel is covered if ----- – Q P – CCPCH ≥ M P – CCPCH or ---
Req Eb ⁄ Nt C Req C⁄I
– Q P – CCPCH ≥ M P – CCPCH .
N t P – CCPCH I P – CCPCH
Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Cell Edge Coverage Probability (%)
Atoll calculates the cell edge coverage probability on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel
colour depends on the cell edge coverage probability value. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose
visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab
TX i ( ic )
E b
---- Req
(Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is covered if - ≥ Q P – CCPCH or
N t P – CCPCH
CECP
TX i ( ic )
C
--- Req
≥ Q P – CCPCH . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
I P – CCPCH
CECP
569
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in
case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier.
If the selected carrier does not exist on a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you perform
this coverage prediction for the best carrier, Atoll calculates the C/I considering:
• the preferred carrier of the selected service, or
• the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, if no preferred carrier is defined for the service, or
• the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i
The pixels in the TX i ( ic ) coverage area where RSCP P – CCPCH ≥ TAdd P – CCPCH ( Mobility ) and ---
i C Req
≥ Q DwPCH are
I DwPCH
covered and coloured according to the selected display option.
TX TX ( ic )
TX ( ic ) i i
C i ρ × RSCP DwPCH
Where --- = ------------------------------------------
-
I DwPCH TX i ( ic )
N Tot – DL
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) P DwPCH
RSCP DwPCH = -----------------
LT
Where
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i
I Intra – DL = RSCP DwPCH × β × γ
TX i TX i
) and β = 0 Without Useful Signal
Ortho Term
With γ = ρ × ( 1 – F DL ) × ( 1 – F JD
1 Total Noise
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( ic )
I Extra – DL = RSCPDwPCH
j≠i
TX j ( jc )
RSCPDwPCH
TX
I IC – DL ( ic, jc ) = ----------------------------------------
j -
F IRF ( ic, jc )
I IC – DL ( ic, jc ) is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced by the
interference reduction factor F IRF ( ic, jc ) defined for the pair (ic, jc).
TX i
Term Eb ⁄ Nt
L Path × L × L × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing
L T = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX i
-
Term
G ×G
TX
i Term
ρ and N 0 are defined in "Definitions and Formulas" on page 537.
Coverage Display
It is possible to colour the transmitter service areas using a unique colour per transmitter, or colour the pixels in the coverage
areas by any transmitter attribute or other criteria such as:
• C/I (dB)
Atoll calculates the C/I on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel colour depends on the C/I
level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as
many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is covered if
TX ( ic )
i
C
---
I DwPCH ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
570
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is
TX ( ic )
C i
covered if ---
Req C⁄I
– Q DwPCH ≥ M DwPCH . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between
I DwPCH
layers.
• Cell Edge Coverage Probability (%)
Atoll calculates the cell edge coverage probability on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel
colour depends on the cell edge coverage probability value. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose
visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab
TX ( ic )
C i
(Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is covered if ---
Req
≥ Q DwPCH . Each layer is assigned a colour
I DwPCH
CECP
and displayed with intersections between layers.
TX i ( ic )
Where RSCP TCH – DL is given by:
Max
TX i ( ic ) P TCH – DL ( Service )
RSCP TCH – DL = -------------------------------------------
Model
-
LT
TX i
Term Model
Model L Path × L × L × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing
LT - and P Max
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TCH – DL ( Service ) is the maximum downlink traffic power
TX i Term
G ×G
defined for the selected service.
TX i TX i
Model SA SA
In L T , G = G DL and L = L DL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for
TX i TX i
Max
P TCH – DL ( Service ) , if a smart antenna is available in the downlink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main antenna
model.
Coverage Display
It is possible to colour the transmitter service areas using a unique colour per transmitter, or colour the pixels in the coverage
areas by any transmitter attribute or other criteria such as:
• DL TCH RSCP (dBm)
Atoll calculates the DL TCH RSCP on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel colour depends on
the RSCP level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed.
There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is
TX i ( ic )
covered if RSCP TCH – DL ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
571
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, a
TX ( ic )
i Req RSCP
pixel is covered if RSCP TCH – DL – RSCP TCH – DL ( Service, Mobility ) ≥ M TCH – DL . Each layer is assigned a colour and
displayed with intersections between layers.
• Cell Edge Coverage Probability (%)
Atoll calculates the cell edge coverage probability on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel
colour depends on the cell edge coverage probability value. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose
visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab
TX i ( ic )
Req
(Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is covered if RSCP TCH – DL ≥ RSCP TCH – DL ( Service, Mobility ) .
CECP
Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
TX ( ic )
i
Where RSCP TCH – UL is given by:
Term
TX i ( ic ) P Max
RSCP TCH – UL = --------------
Model
-
LT
TX i
Term Model
Model L Path × L × L × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing
LT - and P Term
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Max is the maximum uplink traffic power defined for the
TX i
Term
G ×G
selected terminal.
TX i TX i
Model SA SA Term
In L T ,G = G UL and L = L UL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for P Max , if
TX i TX i
a smart antenna is available in the uplink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main antenna model.
Coverage Display
It is possible to colour the transmitter service areas using a unique colour per transmitter, or colour the pixels in the coverage
areas by any transmitter attribute or other criteria such as:
• UL TCH RSCP (dBm)
Atoll calculates the UL TCH RSCP on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel colour depends on
the RSCP level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed.
There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is
TX i ( ic )
covered if RSCP TCH – UL ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
572
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
Term
Total downlink noise is given by: N Tot – DL = ( RSCP TCH – DL + RSCP OCCH ) + N 0
All TX, c, and TS
P TCH – DL P OCCH
With RSCP TCH – DL = -------------------
Model
- and RSCP OCCH = --------------
Model
-
LT LT
TX i
Term Model
Model L Path × L × L × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing
LT = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX i
- and P TCH – DL and P TCH – DL are respectively the downlink traffic
Term
G ×G
power and the other common control channel power for the selected timeslot.
TX i TX i
Model SA SA
In L T , G = G DL and L = L DL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for
TX i TX i
Max
P TCH – DL ( Service ) , if a smart antenna is available in the downlink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main antenna
model.
573
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
Max
TX ( ic )
i P TCH – DL ( Service )
With RSCP TCH – DL = -------------------------------------------
( Eb ⁄ Nt )
-
DL
LT
TX
i Term ( Eb ⁄ Nt )
DL
L Path × L × L
( Eb ⁄ Nt )
DL × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing
LT - and P Max
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TCH – DL ( Service ) is the maximum downlink traffic
TX
i Term
G ×G
power defined for the selected service.
( Eb ⁄ Nt ) DL TX i TX i
SA SA
In L T , G = G DL and L = L DL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for
TX i TX i
Max
P TCH – DL ( Service ) , if a smart antenna is available in the downlink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main antenna
model.
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Term
N Tot – DL = I Intra – DL + I Extra – DL + I IC – DL ( ic, jc ) + N 0
Where
TX i ( ic ) TXi TX i TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
I Intra – DL = ρ × ( 1 – F DL ) × ( 1 – F JD ) + 1 – ρ × RSCP TCH – DL + RSCP OCCH
Ortho Term
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) P OCCH
With RSCP OCCH = ----------------------
( Eb ⁄ Nt ) DL
-
LT
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( ic ) TX j ( ic )
I Extra – DL = RSCPTCH – DL + RSCPOCCH
j≠i
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
RSCPTCH – DL + RSCPOCCH
TX
I IC – DL ( ic, jc ) = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
j -
F IRF ( ic, jc )
I IC – DL ( ic, jc ) is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced by the
interference reduction factor F IRF ( ic, jc ) defined for the pair (ic, jc).
Coverage Display
It is possible to colour the transmitter service areas using a unique colour per transmitter, or colour the pixels in the coverage
areas by any transmitter attribute or other criteria such as:
• Max Eb/Nt or Max C/I (dB)
Atoll calculates the Eb/Nt or C/I on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel colour depends on
the Eb/Nt or C/I level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be
managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, a
E b TXi ( ic ) C i
TX ( ic )
pixel is covered if ----- ≥ Threshold or --- ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed
N t TCH – DL I TCH – DL
with intersections between layers.
• Effective Eb/Nt or Effective C/I (dB)
Atoll calculates the effective Eb/Nt or C/I on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel colour
depends on the effective Eb/Nt or C/I level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the
workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
E TXi ( ic )
Min ----b-
Req
For each layer, a pixel is covered if , Q TCH – DL ≥ Threshold or
N
t TCH – DL
C TXi ( ic )
Min ---
Req
, Q TCH – DL ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between
I TCH – DL
layers.
• Eb/Nt Margin or C/I Margin (dB)
574
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
Atoll calculates the Eb/Nt or C/I margin on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel colour
depends on the Eb/Nt or C/I margin value. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the
workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic )
E i
For each layer, a pixel is covered if ----b- – Q TCH – DL ≥ M TCH – DL or ---
Req Eb ⁄ Nt C Req C⁄I
– Q TCH – DL ≥ M TCH – DL . Each
N t TCH – DL I TCH – DL
layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Required Power (dBm)
Atoll calculates the downlink required power on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel colour
depends on the required power level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the
workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
Req
Req Req Q TCH – DL
- × P Max
For each layer, a pixel is covered if P TCH – DL ≥ Threshold , where P TCH – DL = --------------------------- TCH – DL ( Service ) or
TX ( ic )
E
----b-
i
N t TCH – DL
Req
Req Q TCH – DL Max
P TCH – DL = -------------------------
TX i ( ic )
× P TCH – DL ( Service ) . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections
C ---
I TCH – DL
between layers.
• Required Power Margin (dB)
Atoll calculates the downlink required power margin on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel
colour depends on the required power margin value. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility
in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction
Req Max
properties). For each layer, a pixel is covered if P TCH – DL – P TCH – DL ( Service ) ≥ M arg in , where
Req Req
Req Q TCH – DL Q TCH – DL
- × P Max
P TCH – DL = ---------------------------
Req
TCH – DL ( Service ) or P TCH – DL = -------------------------
Max
× P TCH – DL ( Service ) . Each layer is assigned
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
E b C
----- ---
N t TCH – DL I TCH – DL
a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Cell Edge Coverage Probability (%)
Atoll calculates the cell edge coverage probability on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel
colour depends on the cell edge coverage probability value. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose
visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab
TX i ( ic )
E b
---- Req
(Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is covered if - ≥ Q TCH – DL or
N t TCH – DL
CECP
TX i ( ic )
C
--- Req
≥ Q TCH – DL . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
I TCH – DL
CECP
575
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic )
i
The pixels in the TX i ( ic ) coverage area where RSCP P – CCPCH ≥ TAdd P – CCPCH ( Mobility ) ,
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
E i i
RSCP TCH – UL ≥ RSCP TCH – UL ( Service, Mobility ) , and ----b- ≥ Q TCH – UL or ---
i Req Req C Req
≥ Q TCH – UL are covered and
N t TCH – UL I TCH – UL
coloured according to the selected display option.
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
E TXi ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Term Term
ρ × RSCP TCH – UL ρ × RSCP TCH – UL
Where ----b- - × G Proc C
Div
= ------------------------------------------------- UL × G UL and --- - × G Div
= -------------------------------------------------
N t TCH – UL TX i ( ic ) I TCH – UL TX i ( ic ) UL
N Tot – UL N Tot – UL
TX i
Term ( Eb ⁄ Nt ) UL
( Eb ⁄ Nt ) UL L Path × L × L × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing
LT - and P Term
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Max is the maximum power defined for the selected
TX i Term
G ×G
terminal.
( Eb ⁄ Nt ) TX TX
UL i SA i SA Term
In L T ,G = G UL and L = L UL are calculated according to the smart antenna modelling method used, for P Max ,
TX i TX i
if a smart antenna is available in the uplink. Otherwise, G and L are read from the main antenna model.
Coverage Display
It is possible to colour the transmitter service areas using a unique colour per transmitter, or colour the pixels in the coverage
areas by any transmitter attribute or other criteria such as:
• Max Eb/Nt or Max C/I (dB)
Atoll calculates the Eb/Nt or C/I on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel colour depends on
the Eb/Nt or C/I level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be
managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, a
E b TXi ( ic ) C i
TX ( ic )
pixel is covered if ----- ≥ Threshold or --- ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed
N t TCH – UL I TCH – UL
with intersections between layers.
• Effective Eb/Nt or Effective C/I (dB)
Atoll calculates the effective Eb/Nt or C/I on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel colour
depends on the effective Eb/Nt or C/I level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the
workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
E TXi ( ic )
Min ----b-
Req
For each layer, a pixel is covered if , Q TCH – UL ≥ Threshold or
N
t TCH – UL
C TXi ( ic )
Min ---
Req
, Q TCH – UL ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between
I TCH – UL
layers.
• Eb/Nt Margin or C/I Margin (dB)
Atoll calculates the Eb/Nt or C/I margin on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel colour
depends on the Eb/Nt or C/I margin value. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the
workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
E b TX i ( ic ) C i
TX ( ic )
For each layer, a pixel is covered if ----- – Q TCH – UL ≥ M TCH – UL or ---
Req Eb ⁄ Nt Req C⁄I
– Q TCH – UL ≥ M TCH – UL . Each
N t TCH – UL I TCH – UL
layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
• Required Power (dBm)
Atoll calculates the uplink required power on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel colour
depends on the required power level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the
workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
576
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
Req
Term Term Q TCH – UL
For each layer, a pixel is covered if P Req ≥ Threshold , where - × P Term
P Req = --------------------------- or
TX ( ic ) Max
E
----b-
i
N t TCH – UL
Req
Term Q TCH – UL
- × P Term
P Req = ------------------------- Max . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
TX i ( ic )
---
C
I TCH – UL
577
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
E b
----
i i
≥ Q TCH – UL or ---
Req C Req
• - ≥ Q TCH – UL for any of the 6 timeslots
N t TCH – UL I TCH – UL
TX j ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
TX j ( ic ) P TCH – DL ( θ ) TX j ( jc ) P TCH – DL ( θ )
Where RSCP TCH – DL = ---------------------------
- and RSCP TCH – DL = ---------------------------
- using a smart antenna, and
LT LT
TX j ( ic ) TX j TX j ( jc ) TX j
TX j ( ic ) P TCH – DL G Ant TX j ( jc ) P TCH – DL G Ant
RSCP TCH – DL = -------------------- × ---------- and RSCP TCH – DL = -------------------- × ---------- otherwise.
LT TX
j LT TX j
L Ant L Ant
TX j ( ic ) TX j TX j ( jc ) TX j
TX j ( ic ) P OCCH G Ant TX j ( jc ) P OCCH G Ant
RSCP OCCH = ---------------- × ---------- and RSCP OCCH = ---------------- × ---------- otherwise.
LT TX j LT TX j
L Ant L Ant
TX j TX i
ITU526 – 5
L T = L Path × L TX × L RX
ITU526 – 5
L Path is the path loss calculated using the ITU526-5 propagation model without antenna loss.
TX
j
G Ant is the main antenna gain.
Atoll calculates the cell to cell interference on each pixel of the TX i ( ic ) best server coverage area. The pixel colour depends
on the cell to cell interference level. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be
managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties). For each layer, a pixel is
covered if I C2C ( TX i, TX j ) ≥ Threshold . Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
578
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX i ( ic )
• RSCP P – CCPCH ≥ TAdd P – CCPCH ( Mobility ) ,
TX i ( ic )
E C
---- Req
• - ≥ Q HS – PDSCH , and
N t HS – PDSCH
TX i ( ic )
E C
----
• -
N t HS – PDSCH is enough to select a bearer for the pixels.
For more information on HSDPA bearer selection, see "HSDPA Part of the Algorithm" on page 564.
Coverage Display
It is possible to colour the pixels in the coverage areas by criteria such as:
TX i ( ic )
• Min HS-PDSCH RSCP: On each pixel, Atoll calculates RSCP HS – SCCH for all timeslots and selects the lowest value.
TX i ( ic )
• Average HS-PDSCH RSCP: On each pixel, Atoll calculates RSCP HS – SCCH for all timeslots and calculates the average of
these values.
TX i ( ic )
• Max HS-PDSCH RSCP: On each pixel, Atoll calculates RSCP HS – SCCH for all timeslots and selects the highest value.
E C TXi ( ic )
• Min HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt: On each pixel, Atoll calculates ----- for all timeslots and selects the lowest value.
N t HS – PDSCH
579
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
E TXi ( ic )
• Average HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt: On each pixel, Atoll calculates ----C- for all timeslots and calculates the average
N t HS – PDSCH
of these values.
TX ( ic )
E i
• Max HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt: On each pixel, Atoll calculates ----C- for all timeslots and selects the highest value.
N t HS – PDSCH
• RLC Peak Rate: After selecting the bearer, Atoll reads the corresponding RLC peak rate. This is the highest rate that
the bearer can provide on each pixel. The pixel colour depends on the RLC peak rate. Coverage consists of several
independent layers whose visibility in the workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined
in the Display tab (Prediction properties). Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between
layers.
MAC
• MAC Rate: Atoll displays the MAC rate ( R DL ) provided on each pixel. The MAC rate is calculated as follows:
MAC
R DL = S Block × 500
Where, S Block is the transport block size (in kbits) of the selected HSDPA bearer; it is defined for each HSDPA bearer
in the related table. The value 500 corresponds to the number of blocks per second (there are 4 blocks per TTI and
2000
2000 TTI in one second, i.e ------------ blocks per second).
4
The pixel colour depends on the MAC rate. Coverage consists of several independent layers whose visibility in the
workspace can be managed. There are as many layers as thresholds defined in the Display tab (Prediction properties).
Each layer is assigned a colour and displayed with intersections between layers.
E b TXi ( ic, TS )
• Max DL A-DPCH Eb/Nt: Atoll displays the A-DPCH Eb/Nt at the receiver ( ----- ) for the best server and the
N t TCH – DL – Max
selected timeslot. No power control is performed as in simulations. Here, Atoll determines downlink traffic channel
quality at the receiver for a maximum traffic channel power allowed for the best server.
E b TX i ( ic, TS )
• Max UL A-DPCH Eb/Nt: Atoll displays the A-DPCH Eb/Nt at the best server ( ----- ) and the selected
N t TCH – UL – Max
timeslot. No power control is performed as in simulations. Here, Atoll determines uplink traffic channel quality for the
maximum terminal power allowed.
TX i ( ic )
• HS-SCCH Power: On each pixel, Atoll calculates P HS – SCCH for the selected timeslot.
TX i ( ic )
• HS-SCCH RSCP: On each pixel, Atoll calculates RSCP HS – SCCH for the selected timeslot.
E c TX i ( ic )
• HS-SCCH Ec/Nt: On each pixel, Atoll calculates ----- for the selected timeslot.
N t HS – SCCH
Mi
• HS-SICH Power: On each pixel, Atoll calculates P HS – SICH for the selected timeslot.
Mi
• HS-SICH RSCP: On each pixel, Atoll calculates RSCP HS – SICH for the selected timeslot.
Ec Mi
• HS-SICH Ec/Nt: On each pixel, Atoll calculates ----- for the selected timeslot.
N t HS – SICH
TX i ( ic )
• HS-PDSCH RSCP: On each pixel, Atoll calculates RSCP HS – PDSCH for the selected timeslot.
TX ( ic )
E i
• HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt: On each pixel, Atoll calculates ----c- for the selected timeslot.
N t HS – PDSCH
580
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
TX SA TX SA TX SA TX SA
G UL = G UL , L UL = L UL and G DL = G DL , L DL = L DL
H V
Where G Beam , L Beam , and L Beam are the gains, horizontal, and vertical attenuations of the beams of the GOB. In words, the
best beam is the one among all the beams of a GOB that has the highest difference between gain, and horizontal and vertical
SA SA SA SA
attenuations. The gains and losses of the GOB ( G DL , G UL , L DL , and L UL ) are determined from the selected best beam.
The following example shows how Atoll calculates the GOB gains and losses.
Example:
Let us assume a GOB with 5 beams that have the same vertical patterns, and whose horizontal patterns are pointed towards
different directions as shown in the figure below:
Let us assume that all the beams and the main antenna have the same 18 dBi gain, and the vertical attenuation at the user
location is 15 dB, which is also the same for all the beams because we assume that the vertical patterns are the same.
If the user is located at α = 70° azimuth, as shown in the figure below, Atoll determines the best beam, which has the
highest gain towards α , as follows:
581
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
Transmitter
In our example, the total gain of the beam at 60° is the highest. Therefore this beam is selected as the best beam.
If this beam has been selected in the downlink,
SA SA H V
G DL = 18 dB and L DL = L Beam + L Beam = 17.21 dB
The following example shows how Atoll calculates the adaptive beam gains and losses.
Example:
Let us assume an adaptive beam smart antenna selected for a transmitter along with a main antenna. Let us assume that the
adaptive beam and the main antenna have the same 18 dBi gain, and the vertical attenuation at the user location is 15 dB.
If the user is located at α = 60° azimuth, as shown in the figure below:
582
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
Transmitter
If the adaptive beam smart antenna is selected in the downlink, the gain and losses of the adaptive beam at α are:
SA SA H V
G DL = 18 dB and L DL = L Beam + L Beam = 15 dB
If the adaptive beam smart antenna is selected in the uplink, the gain and losses of the adaptive beam at α are:
SA SA H V
G UL = 18 dB and L UL = L Beam + L Beam = 15 dB
H
In fact, as the ideal beam steering algorithm steers the beam towards the served user, L Beam = 0 . These values are used in
interference calculation to determine the downlink interfering signal due to transmission towards the served user, as well as
for calculating the uplink interfering signals received at transmitter when decoding signal received from the served user.
You can assign a spreading angle to each clutter class in your document. Atoll reads the clutter class in which the served user
is located to determine the spreading angle. Different clutter types have different spreading effects on the propagation of
radio waves. Urban and dense urban clutter types introduce more multipath and spread the signal at a wider angle than an
open or rural clutte type.
Once you have assigned the spreading angles to clutter classes, you can enter the C/I gains and their cumulative probabilities
for each spreading angle, in the smart antenna equipment based on the statistical model. For each smart antenna equipment
SA
based on statistical modelling, you can set a probability threshold, TProb .
To find the smart antenna gain, Atoll determines the clutter class of the served user, it reads the spreading angle from the
clutter class properties, it reads the probability threshold from the smart antenna properties, and reads the smart antenna C/
SA
I gain defined for the Probability = 1 – TProb corresponding to the spreading angle.
The following example shows how Atoll calculates the statistical C/I gains and losses.
Example:
Let us assume that the served user is located at a an urban clutter class with θ Spread = 10° . The smart antenna equipment
SA SA
has TProb = 80 % . Atoll will read the smart antenna C/I gain G for Prob = 20 % . If a gain for the exact probability
value of 20% is not defined, Atoll linearly interpolates the gain value from the two surrounding values.
SA SA SA
If G Prob = 19%
= 4.6298 dB and G Prob = 20.4%
= 4.7196 dB , then G Prob = 20%
= 4.6941 dB
The smart antenna gains are the same for uplink and downlink. Their are no losses for this type of smart antenna equipment.
Negative values of C/I gains are considered as losses.
583
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
Example:
Let us assume a smart antenna equipment using adaptive beam modelling. The angular step defined for the simulations is
θ Step = 30° . Therefore, the results are calculated for each point located at regular steps of 30° , i.e., 12 points. The downlink
traffic power at the served user (W) with the adaptive beam pointing in the user’s direction is P W . The downlink traffic
powers, using the same adaptive beam pointed towards the served user, at the 12 other points are also determined.
The resulting geographic distribution is formed by linearly joining the obtained results.
584
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
The accuracy of the geographic distribution depends upon the value of the angular step. A radiation pattern created at a 1°
step will be much more accurate than one created at 45° , for example. But, the latter will be computed 45 times faster than
the first. The value of the Angular Step should be the best possible compromise between calculation speed and accuracy.
The uplink load and the downlink traffic power at a given pixel are determined by calculating the angle α of that pixel with
respect to the transmitter azimuth, and reading the uplink load and downlink traffic power from the geographic distribution
results. If an exact value for the angle is not available, the load and power are determined using linear interpolation for the
given angle between two available values.
For example, the figure below shows the distribution of downlink traffic power and uplink traffic load results from a
DL – ∠315° UL – ∠315°
simulation. For a pixel located at α = 315° , the downlink traffic power P Traffic and the uplink load X are read
DL – ∠315° UL – ∠315°
from these results. In this example, P Traffic ≈ 30 dBm , and X = 2.75 % .
For each pixel, Atoll determines the downlink traffic powers and the uplink loads from all the transmitters.
585
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
Figure 8.8: Geographic Distribution of downlink traffic power and uplink load
Two options, available in Global Parameters, may be used to calculate Nt: option Without useful signal or option Total noise.
Therefore, we have:
TXi
-----
Ec- ρ BTS × α × RSCP P – CCPCH ( ic )
Nt ( ic ) P – CCPCH =
--------------------------------------------------------------------- for the total noise option,
DL
N Tot ( ic )
And
TXi
----- ρ BTS × α × RSCP P – CCPCH ( ic )
( ic )
Ec- - for the without useful signal option.
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nt P – CCPCH DL
N Tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – α ) × ρ BTS × RSCP P – CCPCH ( ic )
TXi
With
586
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
DL DL DL DL Term
N Tot ( ic ) = I Intra ( ic ) + I Extra ( ic ) + I Inter – Carrier ( ic, jc ) + N 0
DL
I Inter – Carrier ( ic, jc ) is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced
by the interference reduction factor F IRF ( ic, jc ) defined for the pair (ic, jc).
TXi P P – CCPCH ( ic )
RSCP P – CCPCH ( ic ) = -------------------------------
-
LT
C⁄I
L Path × L TX × L Term × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing
L T = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
G TX × G Term
Term
ρ BTS , α and N 0 are defined in "Definitions and Formulas" on page 537.
Let us assume the following notation: CQI P – CCPCH corresponds to the P-CCPCH CQI. CQIP – CCPCH is deduced from the table
CQIP – CCPCH = f ------ ( ic ) . This table is defined for the terminal reception equipment and the specified mobility.
Ec
Nt P – CCPCH
P HSDPA ( ic ) is the power available for HSDPA on the carrier ic. This parameter is a user-defined cell input.
Therefore, we have:
P HS – PDSCH ( ic ) = P HSDPA ( ic ) – n HS – SCCH × P HS – SCCH ( ic )
n HS – SCCH is the number of HS-SCCH channels and P HS – SCCH ( ic ) is the HS-SCCH power on carrier ic. It is either fixed by the
Req
user. P HS – SCCH ( ic ) is controlled so as to reach the required HS-SCCH Ec/Nt ( ------ ( ic )
Ec
). It is specified in mobility
Nt HS – SCCH
properties.
We have:
TXi
-----
Ec- ρ BTS × RSCP HS – SCCH ( ic )
Nt ( ic ) HS – SCCH =
----------------------------------------------------------
- for the total noise option,
DL
N Tot ( ic )
And
TXi
-----
Ec- ρ BTS × RSCP HS – SCCH ( ic )
Nt ( ic ) HS – SCCH = DL
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- for the without useful signal option.
DL Term TXi
N Tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – F Ortho ) × ( 1 – F JD ) × ρ BTS × RSCP HS – SCCH ( ic )
With
DL DL DL DL Term
N Tot ( ic ) = I Intra ( ic ) + I Extra ( ic ) + I Inter – Carrier ( ic, jc ) + N 0
DL
I Inter – Carrier ( ic, jc ) is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced
by the interference reduction factor F IRF ( ic, jc ) defined for the pair (ic, jc).
TXi P HS – SCCH ( ic )
RSCP HS – SCCH ( ic ) = -------------------------------
-
LT
and
C⁄I
L Path × L TX × L Term × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing
L T = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
G TX × G Term
Term Term
ρ BTS , F Ortho , F JD and N 0 are defined in "Definitions and Formulas" on page 537.
587
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
Therefore,
Req
-----
Ec-
( ic ) × N Tot ( ic )
DL
TXi Nt HS – SCCH
RSCP HS – SCCH ( ic ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------- × L T for the total noise option,
ρ BTS
And
Req
-----
Ec-
( ic )
DL
× N Tot ( ic )
TXi Nt HS – SCCH
RSCP HS – SCCH ( ic ) = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Req
× L T for the without useful signal option.
ρ × 1 + (1 – F DL
) × ( 1 – F
Term
) × ------ ( ic )
Ec
BTS Ortho JD Nt HS – SCCH
Therefore, we have:
TXi
-----
Ec- ρ BTS × RSCP HS – PDSCH ( ic )
Nt ( ic ) HS – PDSCH =
-------------------------------------------------------------- for the total noise option,
DL
N Tot ( ic )
And
TXi
----- ρ BTS × RSCP HS – PDSCH ( ic )
( ic )
Ec- - for the without useful signal option.
= -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nt HS – PDSCH TXi
RSCP HS – PDSCH ( ic )
DL DL Term
N Tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – F Ortho ) × ( 1 – F JD ) × ρ BTS × ---------------------------------------------
n
Here, Atoll works on the assumption that five HS-PDSCH channels are used (n=5).
With
DL DL DL DL Term
N Tot ( ic ) = I Intra ( ic ) + I Extra ( ic ) + I Inter – Carrier ( ic, jc ) + N 0
DL
I Inter – Carrier ( ic, jc ) is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced
by the interference reduction factor F IRF ( ic, jc ) defined for the pair (ic, jc).
TXi P HS – PDSCH ( ic )
RSCP HS – PDSCH ( ic ) = ----------------------------------
-
LT
And
C⁄I
L Path × L TX × L Term × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing
L T = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
G TX × G Term
Term Term
ρ BTS , F Ortho , F JD and N 0 are defined in "Definitions and Formulas" on page 537.
The best bearer that can be used depends on the HS-PDSCH CQI. Let us assume the following notation: CQI HS – PDSCH
corresponds to the HS-PDSCH CQI. Atoll deduces CQI HS – PDSCH as follows:
Bearer Selection
Knowing the HS-PDSCH CQI, Atoll finds the best bearer that can be used in the table Best Bearer=f(HS-PDSCH CQI). This table
is defined for the terminal reception equipment and the specified mobility.
Then, Atoll checks if best bearer characteristics are compliant with cell and user equipment category capabilities. Atoll selects
the bearer which is the best bearer compliant with the cell and UE category capabilities.
Bearer characteristics are provided in the HSDPA Bearer table. Assuming the best bearer = 23. Characteristics of this bearer
are:
• Transport block size: 9719 Bytes
588
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
589
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
• The transport block size (7168 Bytes) does not exceed the maximum transport block size (7298 Bytes) the terminal can
carried.
• 16QAM modulation is supported by the terminal.
Once the bearer selected, Atoll knows the number of HS-PDSCH channels. Therefore, when the method “Without useful
signal” is used, Atoll can recalculate the HS-PDSCH quality with the real number of HS-PDSCH channels (A default value of 5
was taken into account in the first HS-PDSCH quality calculation).
P HSDPA ( ic ) is the power available for HSDPA on the carrier ic. This parameter is a user-defined cell input.
Therefore, we have:
P HS – PDSCH ( ic ) = P HSDPA ( ic ) – n HS – SCCH × P HS – SCCH ( ic )
n HS – SCCH is the number of HS-SCCH channels and P HS – SCCH ( ic ) is the HS-SCCH power on carrier ic fixed by the user. The HS-
Req
SCCH power is controlled so as to reach the required HS-SCCH Ec/Nt ( ------ ( ic )
Ec
) specified in mobility properties.
Nt HS – SCCH
We have:
TXi
----- ρ BTS × RSCP HS – SCCH ( ic )
( ic )
Ec- - for the total noise option,
= ----------------------------------------------------------
Nt HS – SCCH DL
N ( ic ) Tot
And
TXi
----- ρ BTS × RSCP HS – SCCH ( ic )
( ic )
Ec-
- for the without useful signal option.
= --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nt HS – SCCH DL DL Term
N Tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – F Ortho ) × ( 1 – F JD ) × ρ BTS × RSCP HS – SCCH ( ic )
TXi
With
DL DL DL DL Term
N Tot ( ic ) = I Intra ( ic ) + I Extra ( ic ) + I Inter – Carrier ( ic, jc ) + N 0
DL
I Inter – Carrier ( ic, jc ) is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced
by the interference reduction factor F IRF ( ic, jc ) defined for the pair (ic, jc).
TXi P HS – SCCH ( ic )
RSCP HS – SCCH ( ic ) = -------------------------------
-
LT
i
And
C⁄I
L Path × L TX × L Term × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing
L T = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
G TX × G Term
Term Term
ρ BTS , F Ortho , F JD and N 0 are defined in "Definitions and Formulas" on page 537.
Therefore,
Req
-----
Ec-
( ) DL
HS – SCCH × N Tot ( ic )
ic
Nt
P HS – SCCH ( ic ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------
- × L T for the total noise option,
ρ BTS
And
590
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
Req
-----
Ec-
( ic )
DL
× N Tot ( ic )
Nt HS – SCCH
P HS – SCCH ( ic ) = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Req
× L T for the without useful signal option.
ρ × 1 + (1 – F DL Term Ec
BTS Ortho ) × ( 1 – F JD ) × -----
- ( ic )
Nt HS – SCCH
Two options, available in Global parameters, may be used to calculate Nt: option Without useful signal or option Total noise.
We have:
TXi
----- ρ BTS × RSCP HS – PDSCH ( ic )
( ic )
Ec- - for the total noise option,
= -------------------------------------------------------------
Nt HS – PDSCH DL
N ( ic ) Tot
And
TXi
----- ρ BTS × RSCP HS – PDSCH ( ic )
( ic )
Ec- - for the without useful signal option.
= -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nt HS – PDSCH TXi
RSCP HS – PDSCH ( ic )
DL DL Term
N Tot ( ic ) – ( 1 – F Ortho ) × ( 1 – F JD ) × ρ BTS × ---------------------------------------------
n
Here, Atoll works on the assumption that five HS-PDSCH channels are used (n=5). Then, it deduces the HS-PDSCH CQI and the
bearer to be used. Once the bearer selected, Atoll exactly knows the number of HS-PDSCH channels and recalculates the HS-
PDSCH quality with the real number of HS-PDSCH channels.
With
DL DL DL DL Term
N Tot ( ic ) = I Intra ( ic ) + I Extra ( ic ) + I Inter – Carrier ( ic, jc ) + N 0
DL
I Inter – Carrier ( ic, jc ) is the inter-carrier interference from a carrier jc to another carrier ic on the downlink, which is reduced
by the interference reduction factor F IRF ( ic, jc ) defined for the pair (ic, jc).
TXi P HS – PDSCH ( ic )
RSCP HS – PDSCH ( ic ) = ----------------------------------
-
LT
And
C⁄I
L Path × L TX × L Term × L Body × L Indoor × M Shadowing
L T = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
G TX × G Term
Term Term
ρ BTS , F Ortho , F JD and N 0 are defined in "Definitions and Formulas" on page 537.
Let us assume the following notation: CQIHS – PDSCH corresponds to the HS-PDSCH CQI. CQI HS – PDSCH is deduced from the
table CQI HS – PDSCH = f ------ ( ic ) . This table is defined for the terminal reception equipment and the specified
Ec
Nt HS – PDSCH
mobility.
Bearer Selection
591
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
The above formula implies that two transmitters facing each other will have a shorter weighted distance between them than
the real distance, and two transmitters pointing in opposite directions will have a greater weighted distance.
592
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
Atoll assigns one master carrier to each transmitter TXi, such that the master carrier of TXi is different from the master carrier
of TXj, where TXj belongs to the list of "near" transmitters. The master carrier is one of the cells defined in the transmitter. All
the other cells of the transmitter are assigned the carrier-type "slave".
For transmitters that support the N-frequency mode and have master carriers properly assigned, Atoll performs the
neighbour and scrambling code allocation for the master carrier only.
If no focus zone exists in the .atl document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
593
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
• When this option is selected, adjacent cells are sorted and listed from the most
adjacent to the least, depending on the above criterion. Adjacency is relative to the
number of pixels satisfying the criterion.
Force neighbour symmetry: This option enables you to force the reciprocity of a neighbourhood link. Therefore, if the
reference cell is a candidate neighbour of another cell, the later will be considered as candidate neighbour of the
reference cell.
Force exceptional pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbourhood relationships. Therefore, you
may force/forbid a cell to be candidate neighbour of the reference cell.
Delete existing neighbours: When selecting the Delete existing neighbours option, Atoll deletes all the current
neighbours and carries out a new neighbour allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept.
3. There must be an overlapping zone ( S A ∩ S B ) with a given cell edge coverage probability.
N-frequency handover is a baton handover. Assuming that the reference cell A and the candidate cell B are located
inside a continuous layer of cells:
SA is the area where the cell A is the best serving cell.
• The P-CCPCH RSCP from the cell A is greater than the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Add.
• The P-CCPCH RSCP from the cell A is greater than the P-CCPCH RSCP from all other cells.
SB is the area where the cell B can enter the handover set.
• The P-CCPCH RSCP from the cell B is greater than the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Drop.
• The P-CCPCH RSCP from the cell B is greater than the P-CCPCH RSCP from the cell A minus the P-CCPCH RSCP
T_Comp.
594
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
SA ∩ SB
- × 100 ), which it compares with the % minimum covered
Atoll calculates the percentage of covered area ( -----------------
SA
area. If this percentage is not exceeded, the candidate neighbour B is discarded.
The coverage condition can be weighted among the others and ranks the neighbours through the importance field.
: Overlapping Coverages
595
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
values) will be allocated to the reference cell. Note that maximum numbers of neighbours can be defined at the cell
level (properties dialogue or Cells table). If defined there, this value is taken into account instead of the default one
available in the dialogue.
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours, and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason, i.e., a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site, adjacent, coverage, or symmetric. For neighbours accepted for co-site,
adjacency, and coverage reasons, Atoll displays the percentage of area that satisfies the coverage conditions and the
corresponding surface area (km2), the percentage of area that satisfies the adjacency conditions and the corresponding
surface area (km2). Finally, if cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked as existing.
596
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers the following factors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d
( Di ) = 1 – -----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Appendix: Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter
Distance" on page 598.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
597
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours, adjacent neighbours, and neighbours allocated based on coverage
overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
• The default value of Min(O) = 1% ensures that neighbours selected for symmetry will
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selected for symmetry will have an importance field greater than 0% only if there is
some coverage overlapping.
• By adding an option in the atoll.ini file, the neighbour allocation and importance
calculation can be based on the distance criterion only. For more information, see the
Administrator Manual.
d = D × ( 1 + x × cos β – x × cos α )
where x = 0.3% so that the maximum D variation does not exceed 1%.
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other will have a smaller effective distance than the real physical
distance. It is this effective distance that will be taken into account rather than the real distance.
598
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
If no focus zone exists in the .atl document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
[PSC]
ConstantStep=1
For more information about setting options in the atoll.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.
5. Atoll can use a maximum of codes
Use a Maximum of Codes: If you choose to use a maximum of codes, Atoll will try to spread the allocated spectrum of
scrambling codes as much as possible.
6. Existing allocation
Delete All Codes: If you select this option, Atoll will delete any existing scrambling code allocation and perform a fresh
allocation. Otherwise, Atoll keeps the existing allocation.
599
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
Same carriers must be assigned different scrambling codes. Different carriers of the same
site can be assigned the same scrambling code. Therefore, cells of a transmitter (i.e.
different carriers) are assigned the same scrambling code, if the scrambling code
domains associated with the carriers have a common cluster or enough codes in one
cluster.
• Distributed per site: This strategy allocates a group of adjacent clusters, i.e., consecutive SYNC_DL codes, to each site,
then one cluster, or SYNC_DL code, to each transmitter on the site according to its azimuth, and finally one scrambling
code from each cluster to each cell of each transmitter. The number of adjacent clusters, or consecutive SYNC_DL
codes, depends on the number of transmitters per site. When all the sites have been allocated adjacent clusters, and
there are still sites remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the adjacent clusters as far as possible at another site.
In the Results table, Atoll only displays scrambling codes and SYNC_DL codes allocated to TBA cells.
Atoll processes TBA cells according to their priority. It allocates scrambling codes starting with the highest priority cell and its
near cells, and continuing with the lowest priority cells not allocated yet and their near cells. For information on calculating
cell priority, see "Cell Priority" on page 602.
All sites which have constraints with the studied site are referred to as near sites.
Atoll assigns a cluster, i.e., a SYNC_DL code, to each site, starting with the highest priority site and its near sites, and continuing
with the lowest priority sites not allocated yet and their near sites. When all the clusters have been allocated but there are
still sites remaining, Atoll reuses the clusters at the other sites. When the Reuse Distance option is selected, the algorithm
reuses the clusters as soon as the reuse distance is exceeded. Otherwise, when the option is not selected, the algorithm tries
to assign reused clusters as spaced out as possible.
600
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
Then, Atoll allocates a scrambling code from the cluster to each cell located on the sites (codes belong to the assigned
clusters). It starts with the highest priority cell and its near cells and goes on with the lowest priority cells not allocated yet
and their near cells.
For information on calculating site priority, see "Site Priority" on page 605. For information on calculating cell priority, see
"Cell Priority" on page 602.
All sites which have constraints with the studied site are referred to as near sites.
Atoll assigns a group of adjacent clusters, i.e., SYNC_DL codes, to each site, starting with the highest priority site and its near
sites, and continuing with the lowest priority sites not allocated yet and their near sites. When all the sites have been allocated
adjacent clusters, and there are still sites remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the adjacent clusters at other sites. When
the Reuse Distance option is selected, the algorithm reuses the clusters as soon as the reuse distance is exceeded. Otherwise,
when the option is not selected, the algorithm tries to assign reused clusters as spaced out as possible.
Then, Atoll assigns each cluster of the group to each transmitter of the site according to the transmitter azimuth and selected
neighbourhood constraints (options "Neighbours in Other Clusters" and "Secondary Neighbours in Other Clusters"). Then,
Atoll allocates a scrambling code to each cell located on the transmitters (codes belong to the assigned clusters). It starts with
the highest priority cell and its near cells and goes on with the lowest priority cells not allocated yet and their near cells.
For information on calculating site priority, see "Site Priority" on page 605. or information on calculating cell priority, see "Cell
Priority" on page 602.
If no domain is assigned to cells, Atoll can use all these groups for the allocation. On the other hand, if a domain is used, Atoll
compares adjacent clusters actually available in the assigned domain with the theoretical groups and only keeps adjacent
clusters common with the theoretical groups.
If we have a domain comprising 12 clusters: clusters 1 to 8 and clusters 12 to 15. In this case, Atoll will use the following groups
of adjacent clusters:
• Group 2 with cluster 3, 4 and 5
• Group 3 with cluster 6, 7 and 8
• Group 6 with cluster 12, 13 and 14
The clusters 1, 2 and 15 will not be used.
If a domain does not contain any adjacent clusters, Atoll displays a warning message in the Event Viewer.
601
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
In case of the "Distributed per site" strategy, Atoll assigns a group of adjacent clusters, i.e., SYNC_DL codes, to each site, then
a cluster to each transmitter and finally, allocates a scrambling code to each transmitter. It starts with the highest priority
transmitter and its near transmitters and continues with the lowest priority transmitters not allocated yet and their near
transmitters. The same scrambling code is assigned to each cell of the transmitter.
For information on calculating transmitter priority, see "Transmitter Priority" on page 604.
When cells, transmitters or sites have the same priority, processing is based on an
alphanumeric order.
With
C i ( U ) = C i ( Dist ) + C i ( EP ) + C i ( N ) + C i ( N 2G ) + C i ( Cluster ) + C i ( CN )
When domains of scrambling codes are assigned to cells, each unavailable scrambling code generates a cost. The higher the
number of codes available in the domain, the less will be the cost due to this criterion. The cost is given as:
C i ( Dom ) = 128 – Number of scrambling codes in the domain
• Distance Criterion
The constraint level of any cell i depends on the number of cells (j) present within a radius of "reuse distance" from its centre.
The total cost due to the distance constraint is given as:
C i ( Dist ) = Cj ( Dist ( i ) )
j
Each cell j within the reuse distance generates a cost given as:
C j ( Dist ( i ) ) = w ( d ij ) × c dis tan ce
Where
w ( d ij ) is a weight depending on the distance between i and j. This weight is inversely proportional to the inter-cell distance.
For a reuse distance of 2000m, the weight for an inter-cell distance of 1500m is 0.25, the weight for co-site cells is 1 and the
weight for two cells spaced out 2100m apart is 0.
c dis tan ce is the cost of the distance constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
C i ( EP ) = cEP ( i – j )
j
Where
602
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
c EP is the cost of the exceptional pair constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
• Neighbourhood Criterion
The constraint level of any cell i depends on the number of its neighbour cells j, the number of second order neighbours k and
the number of third order neighbours l.
Let’s consider the following neighbour schema:
Ci ( N ) =
Cj ( N1 ( i ) ) + Cj – j′ ( N1 ( i ) ) + Ck ( N2 ( i ) ) + Ck – k′ ( N2 ( i ) ) + Cl ( N3 ( i ) ) + Cl – l′ ( N3 ( i ) )
j j′ k k′ l l′
Where
I j is the importance of the neighbour cell j.
c N1 is the cost of the first order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Because two first order neighbours must not have the same scrambling code, Atoll considers the cost created by two first
order neighbours to be each other.
C j ( N1 ( i ) ) + C j′ ( N1 ( i ) )
C j – j′ ( N1 ( i ) ) = -----------------------------------------------------
-
2
Each second order neighbour cell k generates a cost given as:
C k ( N2 ( i ) ) = Max (( C j ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k ( N1 ( j ) ) ),( C j′ ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k ( N1 ( j′ ) ) )) × c N2
Where
c N2 is the cost of the second order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Because two second order neighbours must not have the same scrambling code, Atoll considers the cost created by two
second order neighbours to be each other.
C k ( N2 ( i ) ) + C k′ ( N2 ( i ) )
C k – k′ ( N2 ( i ) ) = -------------------------------------------------------
-
2
Each third order neighbour cell l generates a cost given as:
C ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k ( N1 ( j ) ) × C l ( N1 ( k ) ), C j′ ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k ( N1 ( j′ ) ) × C l N1 ( k ),
C l ( N3 ( i ) ) = Max j × c N3
( C j ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k′ ( N1 ( j ) ) ) × C l N1 ( k′ ), C j′ ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k′ ( N1 ( j′ ) ) × C l N1 ( k′ )
Where
c N3 is the cost of the third order neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
Because two third order neighbours must not have the same scrambling code, Atoll considers the cost created by two third
order neighbours to be each other.
C l ( N3 ( i ) ) + C l′ ( N3 ( i ) )
C l – l′ ( N3 ( i ) ) = -----------------------------------------------------
-
2
603
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
Atoll considers the highest cost of both links when a neighbour relation is symmetric and
the importance value is different.
And
C k ( N2 ( i ) ) = Max (C j ( N1 ( i ) ) × C k ( N1 ( j ) ),C j ( N1 ( k ) ) × C i ( N1 ( j ) )) × c N2
I + 1 – ----------- di – j
i–j Max
d CN
C i ( CN ) = ----------------------------------------- × c CN
2
j
Where
c CN is the cost of the close neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
C i ( N 2G ) = cN2G ( j – Tx2G )
j
Where
cN is the cost of the GSM neighbour constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
2G
• Cluster Criterion
When the "Distributed per Site" allocation strategy is used, you can consider additional constraints on allocated clusters (one
cell, its first order neighbours and its second order neighbours must be assigned scrambling codes from different clusters). In
this case, the constraint level of any cell i depends on the number of first and second order neighbours, j and k. The total cost
due to the cluster constraint is given as:
Where
c Cluster is the cost of the cluster constraint. This value can be defined in the Constraint Cost dialogue.
604
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
With C Tx ( U ) = Max ( C ( U ) ) and C ( Dom ) = 128 – Number of scrambling codes in the domain
i ∈ Tx i Tx
Here, the domain available for the transmitter is the intersection of domains assigned to cells of the transmitter. The domain
constraint is mandatory and cannot be broken.
With C S ( U ) = Max ( C ( U ) ) and C ( Dom ) = 128 – Number of scrambling codes in the domain
Tx ∈ S Tx S
Here, the domain considered for the site is the intersection of domains available for transmitters of the site. The domain
constraint is mandatory and cannot be broken.
Let Site0, Site1, Site2, and Site3 be four sites, with 3 transmitters each using carrier 0, to whom scrambling codes have to be
allocated out of 6 clusters of 4 scrambling codes. This implies that the domain of scrambling codes for the four sites is from 0
to 23 (cluster 0 to cluster 5). The reuse distance is supposed to be less than the inter-site distance. Only co-site neighbours
exist.
The following section shows the results of each combination of options with explanations where necessary.
605
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
606
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
607
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
Let Site0, Site1, Site2, and Site3 be four sites with 3 cells using carrier 0 and 3 cells using carrier 1. Scrambling codes have to
be allocated out of 6 clusters consisted of 4 scrambling codes. This implies that the domain of scrambling codes for the four
sites is from 0 to 23 (cluster 0 to cluster 5). The reuse distance is supposed to be less than the inter-site distance. Only co-site
neighbours exist. Every site has the same priority and the cluster allocation to sites is performed in an alphanumeric order.
Atoll allocates one cluster at each site and then, one code to each transmitter. Then, the same code is given to each cell of
the transmitter.
608
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
Where d is the effective distance between the TD-SCDMA reference cell and the GSM neighbour and d max is the
maximum inter-site distance.
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site, or distance. For neighbours accepted for distance reasons, Atoll
displays the distance from the reference cell (m). Finally, if cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked
as existing.
609
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
Delete existing neighbours: When selecting the Delete existing neighbours option, Atoll deletes all the current
neighbours and carries out a new neighbour allocation. If not selected, existing neighbours are kept.
3. There must be an overlapping zone ( S A ∩ S B ) with a given cell edge coverage probability.
• 1st case: SA is the area where the cell A is the best serving cell of the TD-SCDMA network.
• The pilot signal received from A is greater than the minimum pilot signal level and is the highest one.
• The margin is set to 0 dB.
• 2nd case: The margin is different from 0 dB and SA is the area where:
• The pilot signal level received from A exceeds the user-defined minimum pilot signal level and is within a
margin from the highest signal level.
Two different cases may be considered for SB:
• 1st case: SB is the area where the cell B is the best serving transmitter of the GSM network.
In this case, the margin must be set to 0 dB.
• The signal level received from B on the BCCH TRX type exceeds the user-defined minimum threshold and is the
highest one.
• 2nd case: The margin is different from 0 dB and SB is the area where:
• The signal level received from B on the BCCH TRX type exceeds the user-defined minimum threshold and is
within a margin from the best BCCH signal level.
SA ∩ SB
Atoll calculates the percentage of covered area ( ------------------ × 100 ) and compares this value to the % minimum covered
SA
area. If this percentage is less than the minimum, the candidate neighbour B is discarded.
Candidate neighbours fulfilling coverage conditions are sorted in descending order with respect to percentage of
covered area.
4. The importance of neighbours.
Next, Atoll calculates the importance of the automatically allocated neighbours. Atoll sorts the neighbours by
decreasing importance in order to keep the ones with high importance. If the maximum number of neighbours to be
allocated to each cell is exceeded, Atoll keeps the ones with high importance.
As indicated in the table below, the neighbour importance depends on the distance and on the neighbourhood cause;
this value varies between 0 to 100%.
Except the case of forced neighbours (importance = 100%), priority assigned to each neighbourhood cause is determined
using the Importance Function (IF). The IF considers the following factors for calculating the importance:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d
( Di ) = 1 – -----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas. For information on the effective distance calculation, see "Appendix: Calculation of the Inter-Transmitter
Distance" on page 598.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
610
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours and neighbours allocated based on coverage overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
In the Results part, Atoll provides the list of neighbours, the number of neighbours and the maximum number of neighbours
allowed for each cell. In addition, it indicates the importance (in %) of each neighbour and the allocation reason. Therefore, a
neighbour may be marked as exceptional pair, co-site or coverage. For neighbours accepted for co-site and coverage reasons,
Atoll displays the percentage of area meeting the coverage conditions and the corresponding surface area (km2). Finally, if
cells have previous allocations in the list, neighbours are marked as existing.
8.9.1.3 Appendices
8.9.1.3.1 Delete Existing Neighbours Option
As explained above, Atoll keeps the existing inter-technology neighbours when the Delete existing neighbours option is not
selected. If a new TBA cell i is created in TD-SCDMA.atl, you can run the automatic allocation with the Delete existing
neighbours option not selected, in order to allocate neighbours to the new cell i only.
If you change some allocation criteria (e.g., increase the maximum number of neighbours or create a new GSM TBC
transmitter) and start a new allocation without selecting the Delete existing neighbours option, Atoll examines the neighbour
list of the TBA cells and checks allocation criteria only if there is still space left in their neighbour lists. A new GSM TBC
transmitter can enter the TBA cell neighbour list if allocation criteria are satisfied. It will be the first one in the neighbour list.
611
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks © Forsk 2011
612
Chapter 9
WiMAX BWA Networks
This chapter describes WiMAX calculations. In this chapter, the following are explained:
• "Definitions" on page 615
• "Point Analysis" on page 631
• "Coverage Predictions: Preamble Signal Level"
on page 632
• "Coverage Predictions: Effective Signal Analysis"
on page 633
• "Coverage Predictions: C/(I+N)-based" on
page 634
• "Calculations on Subscriber Lists" on page 636
• "Monte Carlo Simulations" on page 637
• "Preamble Signal Level and Quality Calculations"
on page 648
• "Best Server Determination" on page 653
• "Service Area Calculation" on page 654
• "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 654
• "Traffic and Pilot Signal Level and Quality
Calculations" on page 655
• "Throughput Calculation" on page 681
• "Scheduling and Radio Resource Management"
on page 688
• "Automatic Neighbour Planning" on page 698
• "Automatic Inter-technology Neighbour
Planning" on page 701
• "Automatic Frequency Planning Using the AFP"
on page 704
• "Automatic Preamble Index Planning Using the
AFP" on page 706
• "Automatic Zone PermBase Planning Using the
AFP" on page 709
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
• All the calculations are performed on TBC (to be calculated) transmitters. For the
definition of TBC transmitters please refer to "Path Loss Matrices" on page 98.
• A cell refers to a transmitter-carrier (TX-c) pair. The cell being studied during a
calculation is referred to as TXi(ic) in this chapter.
• All the calculation algorithms in this section are described for two types of cells.
• A studied cell (represented by the subscript "i") comprising the studied transmitter
TXi and its carrier ic. It is the cell which is currently the focus of the calculation. For
example, a victim cell when calculating the interference it is receiving from other
cells.
• Other cells (represented by the subscript "j") comprising the other transmitter TXj
and its carrier jc. The other cells in the network can be interfering cells (downlink)
or the serving cells of interfering mobiles (uplink).
• All the calculation algorithms in this section are described for two types of receivers.
• Mi: A pixel (coverage predictions), subscriber (calculations on subscriber lists), or
mobile (Monte Carlo simulations) covered/served by the studied cell TXi(ic).
• Mj: A mobile (Monte Carlo simulations) covered/served by any other cell TXj(jc).
• Logarithms used in this chapter (Log function) are base-10 unless stated otherwise.
9.1 Definitions
This table lists the input to calculations, coverage predictions, and simulations.
UL
O Fixed Global parameter SD Fixed time-domain overhead (UL)
DL
O Variable Global parameter % Variable time-domain overhead (DL)
UL
O Variable Global parameter % Variable time-domain overhead (UL)
615
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
TDD
D RTG Global parameter ms Receive Time Guard (TDD only)
616
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
N Users – Max Cell parameter None Maximum number of users per cell
617
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
Inter – Tech
NR UL Cell parameter dB Inter-technology uplink noise rise
UL
G STTD Cell WiMAX equipment parameter dB Uplink STTD/MRC gain
QoS
f Bias Scheduler parameter % QoS class bias factor
DL
f Act Service parameter % Downlink activity factor
618
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
DL
G STTD Terminal WiMAX equipment parameter dB Downlink STTD/MRC gain
UL
ΔG STTD Clutter parameter dB Additional uplink STTD/MRC gain
DL
ΔG STTD Clutter parameter dB Additional downlink STTD/MRC gain
a. Any interfering cell whose signal to thermal noise ratio is less than CNR Min will be discarded.
9.2 Formulas
The following tables list the formulas used in calculations.
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
Min F End , F End – Max F Start , F Start
j i j i MHz Co-channel overlap bandwidth
W CCO
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) W CCO
r CCO ----------------------------------- None Co-channel overlap ratio
TX i ( ic )
W Channel
619
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j i j
r ACO r ACO + r ACO None Adjacent channel overlap ratio
L H
TDD
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
r DL – Frame
----------------------- if interferer uses a TDD frequency band and victim uses None FDD – TDD overlap ratio
r FDD – TDD 100
an FDD frequency band, 1 otherwise
TX ( ic )
–f
i
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) ----------------------------
ACS – FB
TX ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
r i j i
+ r ACO
j
× 10
10 ×r i
CCO FDD – TDD
TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
i j
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) if W Channel ≥ W Channel
rO None Total overlap ratio
TX ( ic )
–f
i TX ( ic )
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) ---------------------------
ACS – FB
- TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) W
i
r i j i
+ r ACO
j
×10
10 ×r FDD – TDD
Channel
× ---------------------
CCO TX ( jc )
j
W Channel
TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
i j
if W Channel < W Channel
TX i
L Path L Model + L Ant dB Path loss
TX TX M M
i i i i
L Path + L + L Indoor + M Shadowing – Model – G +L –G
L Total Mi Mi
dB Total losses
+ L Ant + L Body
620
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX ( ic )
TX ( ic ) N SCa – Preamble Preamble
i
TX ( ic )
i i
- × f Segment
n 0 + 10 × Log F Sampling × --------------------------------- dBm Preamble thermal noise for a cell
n 0 – Preamble TX i ( ic )
N SCa – Total
Preamble 1
f Segment --- None Preamble segmenting factor
3
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) M
i i i dBm Preamble noise for a cell
n Preamble n 0 – Preamble + nf
TX ( ic )
TXj ( jc ) n Preamble
i
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) IPreamble -
----------------------------
C Preamble – 10 × Log ---------------------------
- + NR Inter – Tech
10 dB Preamble C/(I+N) for a cell
CINR Preamble 10 + 10
10 DL
All TXj ( jc )
TX ( ic )
TXj ( jc ) n Preamble
i
TX i ( ic ) I Preamble -----------------------------
10 × Log ---------------------------
- + NR Inter – Tech
10 dBm Preamble Total Noise (I+N) for a cell
( I + N ) Preamble 10
10
+ 10
DL
All TXj ( jc )
621
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
EIRP Pilot P Pilot + G –L dBm Pilot EIRP of a cell
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
P Traffic P Preamble – ΔP Traffic dBm Traffic transmission power of a cell
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
P Pilot P Preamble – ΔP Pilot dBm Pilot transmission power of a cell
3 × PSG + 2 × SSG
f Segment – DL 1 without and --------------------------------------------- with downlink segmentation None Downlink segmenting factor
15
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi
n DL n 0 – DL + nf dBm Downlink noise for a cell
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
I j I
j
----------------------------
Non – AAS- Idle -
------------------
Monte Carlo Simulations: 10 × Log 10
10
+ 10
10
TX ( jc )
I j
------------------
AAS -
without smart antennas, or 10 × Log 10
TX j ( jc ) 10 Total interference generated by an
with smart
I Total dBm
interfering cell
antennas
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
I j I Idle
j
I AAS
j
----------------------------
Non – AAS
- ------------------- -------------------
Coverage Predictions: 10 × Log 10
10 10 10
+ 10 + 10
622
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX j TX j
EIRP Pilot P Pilot + G –L dBm Pilot EIRP of an interfering cell
TX ( jc )
I j TX ( jc )
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) -------------------
Traffic
- j
N SCa – Data
10 × Log TL DL
j
× 1 – AU DL
j
× 10
10
× ------------------------
-+
TX j ( jc )
Interference from the loaded part of
N SCa – Used
TX j ( jc ) dBm
the frame transmitted using the
I Non – AAS TX j ( jc ) transmitter antenna of an interfering
I TX ( jc )
Pilot
------------------- N
j cell
× 1 – ------------------------
-
10 SCa – Data
10
TX ( jc )
j
N SCa – Used
Monte Carlo Simulations:
TX j ( jc ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
EIRP AAS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
TX ( jc ) Coverage Predictions: Interference power of an interfering
j dBm
I AAS cell transmitted using smart antenna
TX j ( jc )
EIRP AAS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model + M Shadowing – C ⁄ I – L Indoor
Mi Mi Mi Mi
+G –L – L Ant – L Body
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX j TX j Traffic EIRP of an interfering cell
EIRP AAS P Traffic + G –L dBm
using smart antenna
Interference from empty part of the
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) Mi Mi Mi Mi frame transmitted using the
I Idle – Pilot EIRP Idle – Pilot – L Path – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body dBm
transmitter antenna of an interfering
cell
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX j TX j
EIRP Idle – Pilot P Idle – Pilot + G –L dBm Idle pilot EIRP of an interfering cell
TX ( jc )
I j TX ( jc )
Interference from the empty part of
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) ------------------------------
Idle – Pilot
N
j the frame transmitted using the
10 × Log 1 – TL DL × 10 × 1 – ------------------------
10 SCa – Data dBm
I Idle -
TX ( jc )
j transmitter antenna of an interfering
N SCa – Used cell
623
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) IDL n DL
C Traffic – 10 × Log ------------------
+ -------------------- + NR
- - Inter – Tech
10
10 10 10 DL
All TXj ( jc )
TX i ( ic )
CINR Traffic TX i ( ic ) dB Traffic C/(I+N) for a cell
DL DL
With MIMO (STTD/MRC): CINR Traffic + G STTD + ΔG STTD
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
With MIMO (AMS) if CNR Preamble < T AMS or
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i DL DL
CINR Preamble < T AMS : CINR Traffic + G STTD + ΔG STTD
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
I j n DL
i
TX i ( ic ) ------------------ ---------------------
DL
-
C Pilot – 10 × Log 10 10
+10 10 + NR Inter – Tech
DL
All TX j ( jc )
TX i ( ic )
CINR Pilot TX i ( ic ) dB Pilot C/(I+N) for a cell
DL DL
With MIMO (STTD/MRC): CINR Pilot + G STTD + ΔG STTD
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
With MIMO (AMS) if CNR Preamble < T AMS or
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
DL DL
CINR Preamble < T AMS : CINR Pilot + G STTD + ΔG STTD
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
I j n DL
i
TX i ( ic ) ------------------
DL
- ---------------------
10 × Log 10
+ 10 + NR Inter – Tech
10 10 dBm Traffic Total Noise (I+N) for a cell
( I + N ) DL DL
All TXj ( jc )
624
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
SC Com Uplink segmentation collision
------------------
- None
p Collision – UL TX i ( ic )
SC probability
IMj TX i ( ic )
UL n
TX i ( ic )
∀ non-seg M i
---------------------
UL
TX ( ic ) Non-segmented zone uplink noise at
10 × Log + NR Inter – Tech – n i dB
-------------------------------------------
- 10
NR UL 10 10 + 10 UL UL a cell without smart antennas
All M j
All TX j ( jc )
IMj TX ( ic )
UL ∀ seg M n UL
i
TX i ( ic )
--------------------- TX i ( ic )
i 10 Segmented zone uplink noise at a
--------------------------------- Inter – Tech
NRUL – Seg 10 × Log 10 10 + 10 + NR UL – n UL dB
cell without smart antennas
All M j
All TX j ( jc )
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
( I + N ) UL NR UL + n UL or NR UL – Seg + n UL dBm Total Noise (I+N) for a cell
2
I UL ( ϕ ) + σ n ⋅ I Uplink noise at a cell with smart
NR UL ( ϕ ) --------------------------------- dB
2
σn ⋅ I antenna
625
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX i ( ic ) 1
------------------- ms Useful symbol duration
D Sym – Useful TX i ( ic )
ΔF
r CP
D CP ------
- ms Cyclic prefix duration
ΔF
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
D Symbol D Sym – Useful + D CP ms Symbol duration
D Used
Floor -----------------
TX i ( ic ) Frame Frame duration in terms of symbol
- SD
N ( SD – Used ) ⁄ Frame TXi ( ic ) durations
D Symbol
626
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX ( ic )
R DL
i
= M
i DL Total downlink cell resources, i.e.,
TXi ( ic ) PZ
DL O Variable
TX ( ic )
Floor N ( SD – DL ) ⁄ Subframe × N SCa – Data × 1 – --------------------
- Symbols the number of symbols in the
i 100 downlink subframe
N ( Sym – DL ) ⁄ Subframe
If DL:UL ratio is defined in percentage:
TX ( ic )
RoundDown N( SD – Used ) ⁄ Frame × ( 1 – r DL – Frame ) – O Fixed
i TDD UL
TX i ( ic )
R UL = M
i UL Total uplink cell resources, i.e., the
TXi ( ic ) PZ UL O Variable
Floor N( SD – UL ) ⁄ Subframe × N SCa – Data × 1 – Symbols number of symbols in the uplink
100
TX i ( ic )
--------------------
-
N ( Sym – UL ) ⁄ Subframe subframe
Max
With MIMO (AMS): η Mi = η Mi × ( 1 + f SU – MIMO ( G SU – MIMO – 1 ) )
B DL B DL
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i i
if CNR Preamble > T AMS or CINR Preamble > T AMS
Mi M M
Cap P – DL × 1 – BLER BDL
i i kbps Downlink effective MAC cell capacity
Cap E – DL
M
Mi i
Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
kbps Downlink application cell capacity
Cap A – DL Cap E – DL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
627
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
if CNR Preamble > T AMS or CINR Preamble > T AMS
With MIMO (MU-MIMO) in uplink throughput coverage predictions:
TX i ( ic )
R UL ×η Mi
B TX ( ic )
UL i
--------------------------------- × G MU – MIMO
D Frame
Mi Mi TX i ( ic )
Cap P – UL CTP P – UL × TL UL – Max kbps Uplink peak MAC cell capacity
Mi M M
Cap P – UL × 1 – BLER B UL
i i kbps Uplink effective MAC cell capacity
Cap E – UL
Mi
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
Cap A – UL Cap E – UL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset kbps Uplink application cell capacity
100
Mi
Mi N SC – UL
M
i CTP P – UL × ----------------- Mi kbps
Uplink peak MAC allocated
ABTP P – UL bandwidth throughput
PZ UL
N SC
628
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
Sel TX i ( ic )
Mi R Rem – DL
Proportional Fair: Min RD Rem – DL, ---------------------
N
Sel
Mi
TX ( ic ) RD Rem – DL
i
Proportional Demand: R Eff – Rem – DL × ----------------------------------
Sel
-
Mi
RDRem – DL
Sel
Mi
Sel Resources allocated to a mobile to
M TX i ( ic )
i
Mi R QoS – DL
Sel None satisfy its maximum throughput
R Max – DL
Biased (QoS Class): Min RD Rem – DL, -------------------- demand in downlink
N QoS
Sel
Mi
TPD Rem – DL
Max Aggregate Throughput: ---------------------------
Sel
-
Mi
CTP P – DL
Sel TX i ( ic )
Mi R Rem – DL
Round Robin: Min RD Rem – DL, ---------------------
N
629
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
Sel TX ( ic )
i
Mi R Rem – UL
Proportional Fair: Min RD Rem – UL, --------------------
-
N
Sel
Mi
TX i ( ic )
RD Rem – UL
Proportional Demand: R Eff – Rem – UL × ----------------------------------
Sel
-
Mi
RDRem – UL
Sel
M
i
Sel Resources allocated to a mobile to
M TX i ( ic )
i
Mi
Sel
R QoS – UL None satisfy its maximum throughput
R Max – UL
Biased (QoS Class): Min RD Rem – UL, -------------------- demand in uplink
N QoS
Sel
Mi
TPD Rem – UL
Max Aggregate Throughput: ---------------------------
Sel
-
Mi
CTP P – UL
Sel TX i ( ic )
Mi R Rem – UL
Round Robin: Min RD Rem – UL, --------------------
-
N
Sel
TXi ( ic ) Mi Effective remaining downlink
TX i ( ic )
R Eff – Rem – DL
Min R Rem – DL,
RD Rem – DL
None resources in a cell
M
Sel (Proportional Demand)
i
Sel
TX i ( ic ) M Effective remaining uplink resources
TX i ( ic )
i
Min R Rem – UL, RD Rem – UL None in a cell
R Eff – Rem – UL
Sel
Mi (Proportional Demand)
r
1 QoS
N QoS × --- Remaining downlink cell resources
TX i ( ic ) β
TX i ( ic ) R Rem – DL × ------------------------------------------------------- None
after allocation for minimum
R QoS – DL r throughput demands for a QoS class
1 QoS
N QoS × --- (Biased (QoS Class))
β
All QoS
r
1 QoS
N QoS × --- Remaining downlink cell resources
TX i ( ic ) β
TX ( ic )
i R Rem – UL × ------------------------------------------------------- None
after allocation for minimum
R QoS – UL r throughput demands for a QoS class
1 QoS
N QoS × --- (Biased (QoS Class))
β
All QoS
630
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
Sel Sel
M
Sel
i
M Mi Downlink effective MAC user
i
UTP E – DL UTP P – DL × 1 – BLER B DL kbps
throughput
Sel
Sel Mi
M Sel Sel Downlink application user
i Mi f TP – Scaling Mi kbps
UTP A – DL UTP E – DL × ------------------------- – TP Offset throughput
100
Sel Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi
kbps Uplink peak MAC user throughput
UTP P – UL R UL × CTP P – UL
Sel Sel
Sel
Mi Mi Mi Uplink effective MAC user
UTP E – UL UTP P – UL × 1 – BLER B UL kbps
throughput
Sel
Sel Sel Mi Sel
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi kbps Uplink application user throughput
UTP A – UL UTP E – UL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Mi Mi Mi Mi
L ,G , L Ant , and L Body are not used in the calculations performed for the profile view.
631
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
• The different throughputs as explained in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, and Allocated Bandwidth Throughput
Calculation" on page 684.
Atoll uses parameters entered in the Condition tab of the coverage prediction properties dialogue to determine coverage
areas to display. There are three possibilities.
• All Servers
The coverage area of each cell TXi(ic) corresponds to the pixels where.
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
MinimumThreshold ≤ C Preamble or L Total or L Path < MaximumThreshold
i i i
632
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
The coverage area of each cell TXi(ic) corresponds to the pixels where.
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
MinimumThreshold ≤ C Preamble or L Total or L Path < MaximumThreshold
i i i
AND
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
C Preamble ≥ Best C Preamble – M
j≠i
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The Best function considers the highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received preamble signal level from TXi(ic) is the highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received preamble signal level from TXi(ic) is either the highest or
within a 2 dB margin from the highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received preamble signal level from TXi(ic) is 2 dB higher than the
received preamble signal levels from the cells which are 2nd best servers.
• Second Best Signal Level and a Margin
The coverage area of each cell TXi(ic) corresponds to the pixels where.
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
MinimumThreshold ≤ C Preamble or L Total or L Path < MaximumThreshold
i i i
AND
TX ( ic ) nd TX ( jc )
C Preamble ≥ 2 Best C Preamble – M
i j
j≠i
Where M is the specified margin (dB). The 2nd Best function considers the second highest value from a list of values.
• If M = 0 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received preamble signal level from TXi(ic) is the second highest.
• If M = 2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received preamble signal level from TXi(ic) is either the second highest
or within a 2 dB margin from the second highest.
• If M = -2 dB, Atoll considers pixels where the received preamble signal level from TXi(ic) is 2 dB higher than the
received preamble signal levels from the cells which are 3rd best servers.
A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the calculated value of the selected display parameter is greater than or equal to the
defined thresholds values. Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map.
It is possible to display the coverage predictions with colours depending on any transmitter or cell attribute, and other criteria
such as:
• Signal Level (dBm, dBµV, dBµV/m)
• Best Signal Level (dBm, dBµV, dBµV/m): Where cell coverage areas overlap, Atoll keeps the highest value of the signal
level.
• Path Loss (dB)
• Total Losses (dB)
• Best Server Path Loss (dB): Where cell coverage areas overlap, Atoll determines the best cell (i.e., the cell with the
highest preamble signal level) and evaluates the path loss from this cell.
• Best Server Total Losses (dB): Where cell coverage areas overlap, Atoll determines the best cell (i.e., the cell with the
highest preamble signal level) and evaluates the total losses from this cell.
• Number of Servers: Atoll evaluates the number of cells that cover a pixel (i.e., the pixel falls within the coverage areas
of these cells).
633
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
For these calculations, Atoll calculates the received signal level or C/N level at each pixel for the channel type being studied,
i.e., preamble, traffic, or pilot. Each pixel within the calculation area of TXi(ic) is considered a non-interfering receiver. The
properties of the non-interfering probe receiver are set by selecting a terminal, a mobility type, and a service.
These coverage predictions do not depend on the traffic input. Therefore, these calculations are of special interest before and
during the deployment stage of the network to study the coverage footprint of the system.
The resolution of the coverage prediction does not depend on the resolutions of the path loss matrices or the geographic data
and can be defined separately for each coverage prediction. Coverage predictions are generated using a bilinear interpolation
method from multi-resolution path loss matrices (similar to the one used to calculate site altitudes, see "Path Loss Calculation
Prerequisites" on page 53 for more information).
For more information on signal level calculations, see:
• "Preamble Signal Level Calculation" on page 648.
• "Traffic and Pilot Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 655.
• "Traffic Signal Level Calculation (UL)" on page 670
For more information on permutation zone selection, see "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 654.
For more information on C/N level calculations, see:
• "Preamble C/N Calculation" on page 652.
• "Traffic and Pilot C/N Calculation (DL)" on page 665
• "Traffic C/N Calculation (UL)" on page 674.
For more information on coverage area determination and available display options, see:
• "Coverage Area Determination" on page 634.
• "Coverage Display Types" on page 634.
These coverage predictions are all best server coverage predictions, i.e., the coverage area of each cell comprises the pixels
where the cell is the best server. Best server for each pixel is calculated as explained in "Best Server Determination" on
page 653.
A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the calculated value of the selected display type parameter is greater than or equal to
the defined thresholds values. Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map.
It is possible to display the Effective Signal Analysis (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Best Preamble Signal Level (DL) (dBm)
• Best Pilot Signal Level (DL) (dBm)
• Best Traffic Signal Level (DL) (dBm)
• Preamble C/N Level (DL) (dB)
• Pilot C/N Level (DL) (dB)
• Traffic C/N Level (DL) (dB)
• Permutation Zone (DL)
• Segment
It is possible to display the Effective Signal Analysis (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Signal Level (UL) (dBm)
• C/N Level (UL) (dB)
• Permutation Zone (UL)
634
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
M M M M
i i i i
These coverage predictions take into account the receiver characteristics ( L ,G , L Ant , and L Body ) when calculating the
required parameter. For these calculations, Atoll calculates the received signal level, noise, and interference at each pixel.
Each pixel within the calculation area of TXi(ic) is considered a non-interfering receiver. The properties of the non-interfering
probe receiver are set by selecting a terminal, a mobility type, and a service.
The downlink coverage predictions are based on the downlink traffic loads of the cells, and the uplink coverage predictions
are based on the uplink noise rise values. These parameters can either be calculated by Atoll during the Monte Carlo
simulations, or set manually by the user for all the cells.
The resolution of the coverage prediction does not depend on the resolutions of the path loss matrices or the geographic data
and can be defined separately for each coverage prediction. Coverage predictions are generated using a bilinear interpolation
method from multi-resolution path loss matrices (similar to the one used to calculate site altitudes, see "Path Loss Calculation
Prerequisites" on page 53 for more information).
For more information on C/(I+N), (I+N), and bearer calculations, see:
• "Preamble C/(I+N) Calculation" on page 652.
• "Traffic and Pilot C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (DL)" on page 667.
• "Traffic C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (UL)" on page 677.
• "Noise Rise Calculation (UL)" on page 673
For more information on thoughput calculations, see:
• "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, and Allocated Bandwidth Throughput Calculation" on page 684.
For more information on coverage area determination and available display options, see:
• "Coverage Area Determination" on page 635.
• "Coverage Display Types" on page 635.
These coverage predictions are all best server coverage predictions, i.e., the coverage area of each cell comprises the pixels
where the cell is the best server. Best server for each pixel is calculated as explained in "Best Server Determination" on
page 653.
A pixel of a coverage area is coloured if the calculated value of the selected display type parameter is greater than or equal to
the defined thresholds values. Coverage consists of several independent layers that can be displayed and hidden on the map.
It is possible to display the Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Preamble C/(I+N) Level (DL) (dB)
• Preamble Total Noise (I+N) (DL) (dBm)
• Traffic C/(I+N) Level (DL) (dB)
• Traffic Total Noise (I+N) (DL) (dBm)
• Pilot C/(I+N) Level (DL) (dB)
It is possible to display the Service Area Analysis (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Best Bearer (DL)
• Modulation (DL): Modulation used by the bearer
• Service
It is possible to display the Coverage by Throughput (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Peak MAC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps)
• Effective MAC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps)
• Application Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps)
• Peak MAC Cell Capacity (DL) (kbps)
• Effective MAC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps)
• Application Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps)
It is possible to display the Coverage by Quality Indicator (DL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following
display options:
• Quality indicators available in the document (Quality Indicators table): Atoll calculates the downlink traffic C/(I+N)
levels received from the best serving cells at each pixel of their coverage areas. From the C/(I+N), Atoll determines the
best bearer available on each pixel. Then, for the calculated C/(I+N) and bearer, it determines the value of the selected
quality indicator from the quality graphs defined in the WiMAX equipment of the selected terminal.
635
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
It is possible to display the Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• C/(I+N) Level (UL) (dB)
• Total Noise (I+N) (UL) (dBm)
• Allocated Bandwidth (UL) (No. of Subchannels)
• C/(I+N) Level for 1 Subchannel (UL) (dB)
• Transmission Power (UL) (dBm)
It is possible to display the Service Area Analysis (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Best Bearer (UL)
• Modulation (UL): Modulation used by the bearer
• Service
It is possible to display the Coverage by Throughput (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following display
options:
• Peak MAC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Effective MAC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Application Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Peak MAC Cell Capacity (UL) (kbps)
• Effective MAC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Application Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Peak MAC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Effective MAC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput (UL) (kbps)
• Application Allocated Bandwidth Throughput (UL) (kbps)
It is possible to display the Coverage by Quality Indicator (UL) coverage prediction with colours depending on the following
display options:
• Quality indicators available in the document (Quality Indicators table): Atoll calculates the uplink traffic C/(I+N) levels
received at the best serving cells from each pixel of their coverage areas. From the C/(I+N), Atoll determines the best
bearer available on each pixel. Then, for the calculated C/(I+N) and bearer, it determines the value of the selected
quality indicator from the quality graphs defined in the WiMAX equipment of the best serving cell.
636
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
Atoll determines the total number of users attempting connection in each simulation
based on the Poisson distribution. This may lead to slight variations in the total numbers
of users in different simulations. To have the same total number of users in each
simulation of a group, add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[Simulation]
RandomTotalUsers=0
9.8.1.1 Simulations Based on User Profile Traffic Maps and Subscriber Lists
User profile environment based traffic maps: Each pixel of the map is assigned an environment class which contains a list of
user profiles with an associated mobility type and a given density, i.e., number of users of a user profile per km².
User profile traffic maps: Each polygon or line of the map is assigned a density of users with a given user profile and mobility
type. If the map is composed of points, each point is assigned a number of users with given user profile and mobility type.
Fixed subscribers listed in subscriber lists have a user profile assigned to each of them.
User profiles model the behaviour of the different user categories. Each user profile contains a list of services and parameters
describing how these services are accessed by the user.
The number of users of each user profile is calculated from the surface area (SEnv) of each environment class map (or each
polygon) and the user profile density (DUP).
N Users = S Env × D UP
• In case of user profile traffic maps composed of lines, the number of users of each
user profile is calculated from the line length (L) and the user profile density (DUP)
(users per km): N Users = L × D UP
• The number of users is a direct input when a user profile traffic map is composed of
points.
Atoll calculates the probability for a user being active at a given instant in the uplink and in the downlink according to the
service usage characteristics described in the user profiles, i.e., the number of voice calls or data sessions, the average
duration of each voice call, or the volume of the data transfer in the uplink and the downlink in each data session.
N Call × D Call
Calculation of the service usage duration per hour ( p 0 : probability of an active call): p 0 = -----------------------------
3600
637
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
The activity status of each user depends on the activity periods during the call, i.e., the uplink and downlink activity
UL DL
factors defined for the voice type service v, f Act and f Act .
UL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink: p Active = f Act × ( 1 – f Act )
DL DL UL
Probability of being active in the downlink: p Active = f Act × ( 1 – f Act )
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink and downlink both: p Active = f Act × f Act
UL UL
Number of users active in the uplink: n v – Active = n v × p Active
DL DL
Number of users active in the downlink: n v – Active = n v × p Active
UL + DL UL + DL
Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n v – Active = n v × p Active
Therefore, a user can be either active on both links, inactive on both links, active on UL only, or active on DL only.
UL DL
Probability of being inactive: p Inactive = ( 1 – f ) × ( 1 – f )
UL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink: p Active = f × (1 – f )
DL DL UL
Probability of being active in the downlink: p Active = f × (1 – f )
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink and downlink both: p Active = f ×f
UL UL
Number of users active in the uplink: n d – Active = N Users × p Active
DL DL
Number of users active in the downlink: n d – Active = N Users × p Active
UL + DL UL + DL
Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n d – Active = N Users × p Active
Calculation of the number of active users trying to access the service d (nd):
UL DL UL + DL
n d = n d – Active + n d – Active + n d – Active
638
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
The user distribution per service and the activity status distribution between the users
are average distributions. The service and the activity status of each user are randomly
drawn in each simulation. Therefore, if you calculate several simulations at once, the
average number of users per service and average numbers of inactive, active on UL,
active on DL and active on UL and DL users, respectively, will correspond to calculated
distributions. But if you check each simulation, the user distribution between services as
well as the activity status distribution between users can be different in each of them.
UL
Where TP Cell is the total uplink throughput demand defined in the map for any service s for the coverage area of the
DL
transmitter, TP Cell is the total downlink throughput demand defined in the map for any service s for the coverage
UL DL
area of the transmitter, TPAverage is the average uplink requested throughput of the service s, and TP Average is the
average downlink requested throughput of the service s.
• Sector Traffic Maps (# Active Users)
UL DL
Atoll directly uses the defined N and N values, i.e., the number of active users on UL and DL in the transmitter
coverage area using the service s.
At any given instant, Atoll calculates the probability for a user being active in the uplink and in the downlink as follows:
UL DL
Users active in the uplink and downlink both are included in the N and N values. Therefore, it is necessary to
UL DL UL + DL
accurately determine the number of active users in the uplink ( n Active ), in the downlink ( n Active ), and both ( n Active ).
As for the other types of traffic maps, Atoll considers both active and inactive users.
The activity status of each user depends on the activity periods during the call, i.e., the uplink and downlink activity
UL DL
factors defined for the service, f Act and f Act .
UL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink: p Active = f Act × ( 1 – f Act )
DL DL UL
Probability of being active in the downlink: p Active = f Act × ( 1 – f Act )
UL + DL UL DL
Probability of being active in the uplink and downlink both: p Active = f Act × f Act
Where, n is the total number of active users in the transmitter coverage area using the service.
Calculation of number of users per activity status:
UL UL + DL DL UL + DL
UL + DL N × p Active N × p Active
Number of users active in the uplink and downlink both: n Active = Min --------------------------------------- , --------------------------------------- or
p Active + p Active p Active + p UL
UL UL + DL DL + DL
Active
UL + DL UL DL DL UL
simply, n Active = Min ( N × f Act, N × f Act )
639
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
UL UL UL + DL
Number of users active in the uplink: n Active = N – n Active
DL DL UL + DL
Number of users active in the downlink: n Active = N – n Active
UL DL UL + DL
And, n = n Active + n Active + n Active
nv
- × p Inactive
Number of inactive users: n Inactive = ---------------------------
1 – p Inactive
The activity status distribution between users is an average distribution. In fact, in each
simulation, the activity status of each user is randomly drawn. Therefore, if you calculate
several simulations at once, average numbers of inactive, active on UL, active on DL and
active on UL and DL users correspond to the calculated distribution. But if you check each
simulation, the activity status distribution between users can be different in each of
them.
The simulation process can be summed up into the following iterative steps.
For each simulation, the simulation process,
1. Generates mobiles according to the input traffic data as explained in "User Distribution" on page 637.
2. Sets initial values for the following parameters:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
• Cell transmission powers and reductions ( P Preamble , ΔP Traffic , ΔP Pilot , and ΔP Idle – Pilot ) are set to the values
defined by the user.
Mi
• Mobile transmission power is set to the maximum mobile power ( P Max ).
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i i i i
• Cell loads ( TL DL , TL UL , NRUL , NR UL – Seg , SU DL , and AU DL ) are set to their current values in the
Cells table.
3. Determines the best servers for all the mobiles generated for the simulation as explained in "Best Server
Determination" on page 653.
640
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX i ( ic ) Mi TX i ( ic ) Mi
TL DL = RDL and TLUL = RUL
Mi Mi
641
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
MU – MIMO
TX ( ic ) M
i i
For uplink MU-MIMO, TL UL = RC UL
MU – MIMO
M
i
M
i
Where R DL is the sum of the percentages of the downlink cell resources allocated to mobiles
M
i
Mi PZ DL = Seg
Mi
PZ DL = Seg
Mi
Where R DL
AAS
is the sum of the percentages of the downlink cell resources allocated to mobiles served by the
M
i
AAS
smart antennas.
Calculation of Uplink MU-MIMO Gain:
Atoll calculates the uplink MU-MIMO gain for all the cells as follows:
MU – MIMO
Mi
R UL
TX i ( ic ) MU – MIMO
Mi
G MU – MIMO = -------------------------------------------------------------
MU – MIMO
-
M
i
RC UL
MU – MIMO
Mi
MU – MIMO
Mi
Where R UL is the sum of the percentages of the uplink cell resources allocated to MU-MIMO
MU – MIMO
Mi
MU – MIMO
Mi
mobiles and RC UL is the sum of the real resource consumption of MU-MIMO mobiles.
MU – MIMO
Mi
11. Performs the convergence test to see whether the differences between the current and the new loads are within the
convergence thresholds.
The convergence criteria are evaluated at the end of each iteration k, and can be written as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Max TL DL
i
ΔTL DL = – TL DL
k All TX ( ic ) k k – 1
i
642
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
Max TL UL
i i i
ΔTL UL = – TL UL
k All TX ( ic ) k k – 1
i
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
Max NR UL
i i i
ΔNR UL = – NR UL
k All TX ( ic ) k k – 1
i
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
If ΔTL DL , ΔTL UL , and ΔNR UL are the simulation convergence thresholds defined when creating
Req Req Req
the simulation, Atoll stops the simulation in the following cases.
Convergence: Simulation has converged between iteration k - 1 and k if:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
ΔTL DL ≤ ΔTL DL AND ΔTL UL ≤ ΔTL UL AND ΔNR UL ≤ ΔNR UL
k Req k Req k Req
No convergence: Simulation has not converged even after the last iteration, i.e., k = Max Number of Iterations defined
when creating the simulation, if:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i i i i
ΔTL DL > ΔTL DL OR ΔTL UL > ΔTL UL OR ΔNR UL > ΔNR UL
k Req k Req k Req
12. Repeats the above steps (from step 3.) for the iteration k+1 using the new calculated loads as the current loads.
Simulation Results
At the end of the simulation process, the main results obtained are:
• Downlink traffic loads
• Uplink traffic loads
• Uplink noise rise received at the main antenna
• Ssegmented zone uplink noise rise received at the main antenna
• Angular distributions of downlink traffic power density for cells with smart antennas
• Angular distributions of uplink noise rise for cells with smart antennas
• Downlink AAS usage
• Downlink segmentation usage
• Uplink MU-MIMO capacity gain
These results can be used as input for C/(I+N)-based coverage predictions.
In addition to the above parameters, the simulations also list the connection status of each mobile. Mobiles can be rejected
due to:
• No Coverage: If the mobile does not have any best serving cell (step 3.) or if the mobile is not within the service area
of its best server (step 4.).
• No Service: If the mobile is not able to access a bearer in the direction of its activity (step 6.), i.e., UL, DL, or DL+UL.
• Scheduler Saturation: If the mobile is not in the list of mobiles selected for scheduling (step 8.)
• Resource Saturation: If all the cell resources are used up before allocation to the mobile or if, for a user active in
uplink, the minimum uplink throughput demand is higher than the uplink allocated bandwidth throughput (step 8.)
Connected mobiles (step 8.) can be:
• Connected UL: If a mobile active in UL is allocated resources in UL.
• Connected DL: If a mobile active in DL is allocated resources in DL.
• Connected DL+UL: If a mobile active in DL+UL is allocated resources in DL+UL.
643
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
The following sections describe how the co- and adjacent channel overlaps are calculated between the channels used by any
studied cell TXi(ic) and any other cell TXj(jc) of the network. In terms of interference calculation, the studied cell can be
considered a victim of interference received from the other cells that might be interfering the studied cell.
TX i ( ic )
If the studied cell is assigned a channel number N Channel , it receives co-channel interference on the channel bandwidth of
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
N Channel , and adjacent channel interference on the adjacent channel bandwidths, i.e., corresponding to N Channel – 1 and
TX i ( ic )
N Channel + 1 .
In order to calculate the co- and adjacent channel overlaps between two channels, it is necessary to calculate the start and
end frequencies of both channels (explained in "Conversion From Channel Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on
page 644). Once the start and end frequencies are known for the studied and other cells, the co- and adjacent overlaps and
the total overlap ratio are calculated as respectively explained in:
• "Co-Channel Overlap Calculation" on page 645.
• "Adjacent Channel Overlap Calculation" on page 645.
• "Total Overlap Ratio Calculation" on page 647.
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• F Start – FB and F Start – FB : Start frequency of the frequency band assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
F Start – FB can be the start frequency of a TDD frequency band ( F Start – FB – TDD ), or the uplink or the downlink start
frequency of an FDD frequency band ( F Start – FB – FDD – UL or F Start – FB – FDD – DL ).
First – TX ( ic ) First – TX ( jc )
i j
• N Channel and N Channel : First channel numbers the frequency band assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• N Channel and N Channel : Channel numbers assigned to cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
For FDD networks, Atoll considers that the same channel number is assigned to a cell in the downlink and uplink, i.e.,
the channel number you assign to a cell is considered for uplink and downlink both.
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• W Channel and W Channel : Bandwidths of the channels assigned to cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
Calculations
Channel numbers are converted into start and end frequencies as follows:
For cell TXi(ic):
644
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) First – TX ( ic )
F Start = F Start – FB + W Channel × N Channel – N Channel
i i i i i
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) First – TX ( ic )
= F Start – FB + W Channel × N Channel – N Channel + 1
i i i i i
F End
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) First – TX j ( jc )
F Start = F Start – FB + W Channel × N Channel – N Channel
TX j ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) First – TX j ( jc )
= F Start – FB + W Channel × N Channel – N Channel + 1
j j j
F End
Output
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• F Start and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
i j
• F End and F End : End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
F Start
Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on page 644.
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• F End and F End : End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on page 644.
TX i ( ic )
• W Channel : Bandwidth of the channel assigned to the studied cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
Atoll first verifies that co-channel overlap exists between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
Co-channel overlap exists if:
TX ( ic ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
i j i j
F Start < F End AND F End > F Start
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
= Min FEnd , F End – Max F Start , F Start
j i j i
W CCO
Output
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
• r CCO : Co-channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• and F Start : Start frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
F Start
Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on page 644.
645
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
i j
• F End and F End
: End frequencies for the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Conversion From Channel
Numbers to Start and End Frequencies" on page 644.
TX ( ic )
i
• W Channel : Bandwidth of the channel assigned to the studied cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
Atoll first verifies that adjacent channel overlaps exist between (the lower-frequency and the higher-frequency adjacent
channels of) the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
Adjacent channel overlap exists on the lower-frequency adjacent channel if:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
F Start – W Channel < F End AND F Start > F Start
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
= Min F End , F Start – Max F Start , F Start – W Channel
j i j i i
W ACO
L
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
= Min F End , F End + W Channel – Max F Start , F End
i j i
W ACO
H
Output
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
• r ACO : Adjacent channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
Input
TDD
• r DL – Frame : Downlink subframe ratio defined in the Global Parameters.
Calculations
The FDD – TDD overlap ratio is calculated as follows depending on the frequency bands assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc):
646
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
Frequency Band TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
TXi(ic) TXj(jc) Overlap Ratio r FDD – TDD
TDD TDD 1
TDD FDD 1
TDD
r DL – Frame
FDD TDD -----------------------
100
FDD FDD 1
Output
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
• r FDD – TDD : FDD – TDD overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
• r CCO : Co-channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co-Channel Overlap
Calculation" on page 645.
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
• r ACO : Adjacent channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Adjacent Channel
Overlap Calculation" on page 645.
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
• r FDD – TDD : FDD – TDD overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "FDD – TDD Overlap Ratio
Calculation" on page 646.
TX i ( ic )
• f ACS – FB : Adjacent channel suppression factor defined for the frequency band of the cell TXi(ic).
TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
i j
• W Channel and W Channel : Bandwidths of the channels assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
Calculations
TX ( ic )
i
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
–f
----------------------------
ACS – FB
TX ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
r i j i
+ r ACO
j
× 10
10 ×r i if W Channel ≥ W Channel
CCO FDD – TDD
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
rO =
TX ( ic )
–f
i TX ( ic )
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) ----------------------------
ACS – FB
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) W
i
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
r i j i
+ r ACO
j
× 10
10 × r FDD – TDD
Channel
× --------------------- if W Channel < W Channel
CCO TX j ( jc )
W Channel
TX i ( ic )
W Channel
The multiplicative factor ---------------------
TX j ( jc )
is used to normalise the transmission power of the interfering cell TXj(jc). This means that
W Channel
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
if the interfering cell transmits at X dBm over a bandwidth of W Channel , and it interferes over a bandwidth less than W Channel ,
TX i ( ic )
W Channel
the interference from this cell should not be considered at X dBm but less than that. The factor ---------------------
TX j ( jc )
converts X dBm over
W Channel
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
W Channel to Y dBm (which is less than X dBm) over less than W Channel .
Output
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
• rO : Total co- and adjacent channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
647
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX i ( ic )
• P Preamble : Preamble transmission power of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i
• E SA : Number of antenna elements defined for the smart antenna equipment used by the transmitter TXi.
TX i
• G : Transmitter antenna gain for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
TX i TX i
• L : Total transmitter losses for the transmitter TXi ( L = L Total – DL ).
• L Model : Loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated using a propagation model.
TX i
• L Ant : Antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns) calculated for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
• L Indoor : Indoor losses taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected.
Mi
• L : Receiver terminal losses for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• G : Receiver terminal’s antenna gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• L Ant : Receiver terminal’s antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
For calculating the useful signal level from the best serving cell, L Ant is determined in the direction (H,V) = (0,0) from
Mi
the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi. For calculating the interfering signal level from any interferer, L Ant
is determined in the direction of the interfering cell from the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi, while the
antenna is pointed towards Mi’s best serving cell.
Mi
• L Body : Body loss defined for the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi Mi Mi Mi
L , G , L Ant , and L Body are not used in the calculations performed for the point
analysis tool’s profile tab and the preamble signal level based coverage predictions.
Calculations
The received preamble signal level (dBm) from any cell TXi(ic) is calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
C Preamble = EIRP Preamble – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
Where EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the cell calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
• Without smart antennas: EIRP Preamble = P Preamble + G –L
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX TX TX
+ 10 ⋅ Log E SA
i i i i i
• With smart antennas: EIRP Preamble = P Preamble + G –L
648
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX
i
L Path = L Model + L Ant
Furthermore, the total losses between the cell and the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi can be calculated as follows:
TX TX M M M M
i i i i i i
L Total = L Path + L + L Indoor + M Shadowing – Model – G +L –G + L Ant + L Body
If you wish to exclude the the energy corresponding to the cyclic prefix part of the total
symbol duration from the useful signal level, you must add the following lines in the
Atoll.ini file:
[WiMAX]
ExcludeCPFromUsefulPower = 1
TX i ( ic )
When this option is active, the cyclic prefix energy is excluded from C Preamble . In other
TX i ( ic )
words, the factor 10 × Log ( 1 – r CP ) is added to C Preamble .
Independant of the option, interference levels are calculated for the total symbol
durations, i.e., the energy of the useful symbol duration and the cyclic prefix energy.
Output
TX i ( ic )
• C Preamble : Received preamble signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
• L Path : Path loss between the cell TXi(ic) and the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
• L Total : Total losses between the cell TXi(ic) and the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Input
• K: Boltzmann’s constant.
• T: Temperature in Kelvin.
TX ( ic )
i
• N SCa – Preamble : Number of subcarriers used by the preamble defined for the frame configuration of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• N SCa – Total : Total number of subcarriers defined for the frame configuration of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• F Sampling : Sampling frequency for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Sampling Frequency" on page 681.
Mi
• nf : Noise figure of the terminal used for calculations by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Calculations
The thermal noise over the preamble for a cell is calculated as:
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) TX ( ic ) N SCa – Preamble Preamble
n 0 – Preamble = n 0 + 10 × Log F Sampling × ---------------------------------
i
- × f Segment
TX i ( ic )
N SCa – Total
Effect of Segmentation:
The preamble is segmented and one of the three preamble carrier sets is used for transmission. Each preamble carrier
set uses 1/3rd of the total number of preamble subcarriers. The power transmitted over the preamble has higher
649
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
spectral density than the power transmitted over the entire channel bandwidth. This power concentration due to
segmentation on the C/N and C/(I+N) results in an increase in the coverage footprint of the preamble. Hence, the
Preamble 1
thermal noise at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the preamble is reduced by a factor of f Segment = --- .
3
The following table shows the different types of subcarriers and their numbers for preamble transmission in WiMAX.
The preamble noise is the sum of the thermal noise and the noise figure of the terminal used for the calculations by the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) M
i i i
n Preamble = n 0 – Preamble + nf
Output
TX i ( ic )
• n Preamble : Preamble noise for the cell TXi(ic).
Input
TX j ( jc )
• C Preamble : Preamble signal level received from an interfering cell TXj(jc) as calculated in "Preamble Signal Level
Calculation" on page 648 at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the cell TXi(ic).
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
• M Shadowing – C ⁄ I : Shadowing margin based on the C/I standard deviation.
In Monte Carlo simulations, interfering signal levels already include M Shadowing – Model , as explained in "Preamble
Signal Level Calculation" on page 620.
In coverage predictions, the ratio M Shadowing – Model – M Shadowing – C ⁄ I is applied to the interfering signals (for more
information, see "Shadow Fading Model" on page 85). As the received interfering signal levels already include
M Shadowing – Model , M Shadowing – C ⁄ I is added to the received interfering signal levels in order to achieve the ratio
M Shadowing – Model – M Shadowing – C ⁄ I :
650
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
j j
C Preamble = C Preamble + M Shadowing – C ⁄ I
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
• rO : Total channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co- and Adjacent
Channel Overlaps Calculation" on page 643.
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• N Seg and N Seg : Segment numbers assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) calculated from their respective
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
preamble indexes ( n Preamble and n Preamble ) as follows:
n Preamble N Seg
Inter – Tech
• f IRF : Inter-technology interference reduction factor.
Calculations
The received preamble interference (dBm) from any cell TXj(jc) is calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as follows:
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
j j i j i j Inter – Tech
I Preamble = C Preamble + f O + f Seg – Preamble + I DL
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
Where f O is the interference reduction factor due to channel overlap between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc),
calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
fO = 10 × Log r O
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
f Seg – Preamble is the interference reduction factor due to preamble segmentation, calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
f Seg – Preamble = 10 × Log p Collision
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
The probability of preamble subcarrier collision p Collision between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) is 0 if N Seg ≠ N Seg and
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
1 if N Seg = N Seg .
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
In case of smart antennas, C Preamble in I Preamble already includes the effect of the
TX
j
number of antenna elements ( E SA ). If you wish to include the effect of the number of
antennas in case of MIMO, you must add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[WiMAX]
MultiAntennaInterference
When the multi-antenna interference option is active, and TXj(jc) does not have a smart
antenna equipment assigned, the interference is incremented by
TX ( jc )
+ 10 × Log N Ant – TX .
j
TX ( jc )
j
Where N Ant – TX is the number of MIMO transmission (downlink) antennas defined for
the cell TXj(jc).
Inter – Tech
I DL is the inter-technology downlink interference from transmitters of an external network (linked document of any
technology) calculated as follows:
651
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
M M M M
Inter – Tech TX – External i i i i Inter – Tech
I DL = EIRP DL – L Path – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body – f IRF
All External TXs
TX – External
Where EIRP DL is the downlink EIRP of the external transmitter, L Path is the path loss from the external transmitters
to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile location, L Indoor is the indoor losses taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage"
Mi Mi
is selected, L is the receiver terminal losses for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi, G is the receiver terminal’s antenna
Mi
gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi, L Ant is the receiver terminal’s antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel,
M
i
subscriber, or mobile Mi, and L Body is the body loss defined for the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Output
TX j ( jc )
• I Preamble : Preamble interference received from any interfering cell TXj(jc) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi
covered by a cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• C Preamble : Received preamble signal level from the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Preamble Signal Level Calculation" on
page 648.
TX i ( ic )
• n Preamble : Preamble noise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Preamble Noise Calculation" on page 649.
Calculations
The preamble C/N for a cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
CNR Preamble = C Preamble – n Preamble
Output
TX i ( ic )
• CNR Preamble : Preamble C/N from the cell TXi(ic) at any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Input
TX i ( ic )
• C Preamble : Preamble signal level received from the cell TXi(ic) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in
"Preamble Signal Level Calculation" on page 648.
TX i ( ic )
• n Preamble : Preamble noise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Preamble Noise Calculation" on page 649.
TX j ( jc )
• I Preamble : Preamble interference received from any cell TXj(jc) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell
TXi(ic) as calculated in "Preamble Interference Calculation" on page 650.
Inter – Tech
• NRDL : Inter-technology downlink noise rise.
652
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
Calculations
The preamble C/(I+N) for a cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows at any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX ( ic )
TX j ( jc ) n
i
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) IPreamble -----------------------------
Preamble
= C Preamble – 10 × Log ---------------------------
- + NR Inter – Tech
i i 10
CINR Preamble 10 + 10
10 DL
All TX j ( jc )
The preamble total noise (I+N) for a cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX ( ic )
TXj ( jc ) n Preamble
i
TX i ( ic ) IPreamble -----------------------------
= 10 × Log ---------------------------
- + NR Inter – Tech
10
( I + N ) Preamble 10 + 10
10 DL
All TXj ( jc )
Output
TX i ( ic )
• CINR Preamble : Preamble C/(I+N) from the cell TXi(ic) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• ( I + N ) Preamble : Preamble total noise from the interfering cells TXj(jc) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered
by a cell TXi(ic).
This calculation also determines whether the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is within the coverage area of any transmitter or
not.
Input
TX i ( ic )
• C Preamble : Preamble signal level received from any cell TXi(ic) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in
Mi Mi Mi
"Preamble Signal Level Calculation" on page 648 using the terminal and service parameters ( L , G , L Ant , and
M
i
L Body ) of Mi.
Calculations
The best server of any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi, BSM , is the cell from which the received preamble signal level is the
i
highest among the preamble signal levels received from all the cells. The best server is determined as follows:
BSM = TX i ( ic )
i TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
C Preamble = Best C
All TX i ( ic ) Preamble
Here ic is the cell of the transmitter TXi with the highest preamble power. However, if more than one cell of the same
transmitter covers the pixel, subscriber, or mobile, the final reference cell ic might be different from the initial cell ic (the one
with the highest power) depending on the serving cell selection method:
• Random: In coverage prediction calculations and in calculations on subsriber lists, the cell of the lowest layer is
selected as the serving (reference) cell. In Monte Carlo simulations, a random cell is selected as the serving (reference)
cell.
• Distributive: In coverage prediction calculations and in calculations on subsriber lists, the cell of the lowest layer is
selected as the serving (reference) cell. In Monte Carlo simulations, mobiles are distributed among cell layers one by
one, i.e., if more than one cell layer covers a set of mobiles, the first mobile is assigned to the lowest cell layer, the
2nd mobile to the second lowest cell layer, and so on.
When using either the Random or the Distributive cell selection method, the reference cell once assigned to a mobile
does not change during Monte Carlo simulations.
653
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
Output
Input
TX i ( ic )
• CNR Preamble : Preamble C/N from the cell TXi(ic) at a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Preamble C/N
Calculation" on page 652.
TX i ( ic )
• T Preamble : Preamble C/N threshold defined for the cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
A pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is within the service area of its best serving cell TXi(ic) if:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
CNR Preamble ≥ T Preamble
Output
Input
TX ( ic )
i
• d Max – PZ : Maximum distance covered by a permutation zone of a cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• QT PZ : Minimum preamble C/N or C/(I+N) required at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi to connect to a
permutation zone of a cell TXi(ic).
TX ( ic )
i
• Speed Max – PZ : Maximum speed supported by a permutation zone of a cell TXi(ic).
M i – TX i ( ic )
• d : Distance between the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi and a cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• CNR Preamble : Preamble C/N from the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Preamble C/N Calculation" on page 652.
TX i ( ic )
• CINR Preamble : Preamble C/(I+N) from the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Preamble C/(I+N) Calculation" on page 652.
• Mobility ( M i ) : Speed of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Calculations
Mi is assigned the permutation zone with the highest priority among the permutation zones whose selection criteria Mi
satisfies. Mi satisfies the selection criteria of a permutation zone if:
• The distance between Mi and TXi(ic) is less than or equal to the maximum distance covered by the permutation zone:
M – TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i
d ≤ d Max – PZ
654
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
• The preamble C/N or C/(I+N) at Mi is better than or equal to the quality threshold defined for the permutation zone:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i i
CNR Preamble ≥ QT PZ or CINR Preamble ≥ QT PZ
• The mobility of Mi is less than or equal to the maximum mobile speed supported by the permutation zone:
TX ( ic )
i
Mobility ( M i ) ≤ Speed Max – PZ
Therefore, the permutation zones assigned to a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the downlink and uplink are:
Mi TX ( ic )
= Highest Priority PZ DL
i
PZ DL
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
CNR ≥ QT
M i – TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Preamble PZ TX i ( ic )
≤ d Max – PZ AND AND Mobility ( M ) ≤ Speed
d OR i Max – PZ
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
CINR
≥ QT
Preamble PZ
M TX ( ic )
= Highest Priority PZ UL
i i
PZ UL
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
CNR ≥ QT
M i – TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Preamble PZ TX i ( ic )
Max – PZ
d ≤d AND Mobility ( M ) ≤ Speed
Max – PZ
AND OR
i
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
CINR i
≥ QT
i
Preamble PZ
If more than 1 permutation zone satisfies the distance, speed, and quality threshold criteria, and all have the same priority,
the permutation zone assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile will be the first in the list of permutation zones (frame
configuration) among these zones.
Output
Mi Mi
• PZ DL and PZ UL : Downlink and uplink permutation zones assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• P Preamble : Preamble transmission power of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• ΔP Traffic : Traffic power reduction of the cell TXi(ic).
TX ( ic )
i
• ΔP Pilot : Pilot power reduction of the cell TXi(ic).
655
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX
i
• G : Transmitter antenna gain for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
TX TX TX
i i i
• Without smart antennas: G is the transmitter antenna gain, i.e., G = G Ant .
TX
i
• With smart antennas: G is the smart antenna gain in the direction of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi, i.e.,
TX i
G = G SA ( θ ) . Where θ is the direction in which Mi is located. For more information on the calculation of
G SA ( θ ) , refer to section "Beamforming Smart Antenna Models" on page 41.
TX i TX i
• L : Total transmitter losses for the transmitter TXi ( L = L Total – DL ).
TX
i
• L Path : Path loss ( L Path = L Model + L Ant ).
• L Model : Loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated using a propagation model.
TX i
• L Ant : Antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns) calculated for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
• L Indoor : Indoor losses taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected.
Mi
• L : Receiver terminal losses for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• G : Receiver terminal’s antenna gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• L Ant : Receiver terminal’s antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
For calculating the useful signal level from the best serving cell, L Ant is determined in the direction (H,V) = (0,0) from
Mi
the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi. For calculating the interfering signal level from any interferer, L Ant
is determined in the direction of the interfering cell from the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi, while the
antenna is pointed towards Mi’s best serving cell.
Mi
• L Body : Body loss defined for the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Calculations
The received traffic and pilot signal levels (dBm) from any cell TXi(ic) are calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as
follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
C Traffic = EIRP Traffic – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body and
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
C Pilot = EIRP Pilot – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
Where EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the cell calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i TX i
EIRP Traffic = P Traffic + G –L and EIRP Pilot = P Pilot + G –L
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
With P Traffic and P Pilot being the traffic and pilot transmission powers of the cell TXi(ic) calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
P Traffic = P Preamble – ΔP Traffic and P Pilot = P Preamble – ΔP Pilot
656
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
If you wish to exclude the the energy corresponding to the cyclic prefix part of the total
symbol duration from the useful signal level, you must add the following lines in the
Atoll.ini file:
[WiMAX]
ExcludeCPFromUsefulPower = 1
TX i ( ic )
When this option is active, the cyclic prefix energy is excluded from C Preamble . In other
TX i ( ic )
words, the factor 10 × Log ( 1 – r CP ) is added to C Preamble .
Independant of the option, interference levels are calculated for the total symbol
durations, i.e., the energy of the useful symbol duration and the cyclic prefix energy.
Output
TX i ( ic )
• C Traffic : Received traffic signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• C Pilot : Received pilot signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Input
• K: Boltzmann’s constant.
• T: Temperature in Kelvin.
Mi
PZ DL
• N SCa – Used : Number of subcarriers used by the downlink permutation zone of a cell TXi(ic) assigned to Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• N SCa – Total : Total number of subcarriers defined for the frame configuration of a cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• F Sampling : Sampling frequency for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Sampling Frequency" on page 681.
Mi
• nf : Noise figure of the terminal used for calculations by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Calculations
The downlink noise is the sum of the thermal noise and the noise figure of the terminal used for the calculations by the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi
n DL = n 0 – DL + nf
Effect of Segmentation:
If you select downlink segmentation support for the frame configuration used by the cell, it means that the first
downlink PUSC permutation zone is segmented. All other zones are pooled together to form a non-segmented zone.
The downlink segmenting factor, f Segment – DL , is calculated from the number of secondary subchannel groups
assigned to the permutation zone in the Permutation Zones table.
657
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
3 × PSG + 2 × SSG
f Segment – DL = ---------------------------------------------
15
Where, PSG is the number of primary subchannel groups and SSG is the number of used secondary subchannel groups.
The multiplicative coefficients of 3 and 2 are derived from the ratio of the numbers of
subchannels that belong to the primary and to the secondary subchannel gourps. For
example, for the FFT size of 1024 (or 2048), each primary subchannel group contains 6
(or 12) subchannels, and each secondary subchannel group contains 4 (or 8)
subchannels, which gives the ratio of 3:2. And, the denominator of 15 = 3 x 3 + 2 x 3.
f Segment – DL represents the fraction of the channel bandwidth used by a downlink segment. The power transmitted
1
over a segment has ---------------------------- times the spectral density of the power transmitted over the entire channel
f Segment – DL
1
bandwidth. When calculating the downlink C/N and C/(I+N) ratios, the increase in power by ---------------------------- due to this
f Segment – DL
power concentration is equivalent to a reduction in the noise level by f Segment – DL . Hence, if downlink segmentation
is used, the thermal noise power at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the downlink segmented
permutation zone is reduced by the factor f Segment – DL . Which means that the thermal noise for the a segment of the
channel used by a cell is calculated as:
Mi
PZ DL
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) N SCa – Used
n 0 – DL = n 0 + 10 × Log FSampling × -------------------------
TX i ( ic )
× f Segment – DL
N SCa – Total
Output
TX i ( ic )
• n DL : Downlink noise for the cell TXi(ic).
Input
TX j ( jc )
• P Preamble : Preamble transmission power of the cell TXj(jc).
TX j ( jc )
• ΔP Pilot : Pilot power reduction of the interfering cell TXj(jc).
TX j ( jc )
• ΔP Traffic : Traffic power reduction of the interfering cell TXj(jc).
TX j ( jc )
• ΔP Idle – Pilot : Idle pilot power reduction of the interfering cell TXj(jc).
TX TX
j j
• L : Total transmitter losses for the transmitter TXj ( L = L Total – DL ).
TX j
• L Path : Path loss ( L Path = L Model + L Ant ).
• L Model : Loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated using a propagation model.
658
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX
j
• L Ant : Antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns) calculated for the antenna used by the transmitter TXj.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
• M Shadowing – C ⁄ I : Shadowing margin based on the C/I standard deviation.
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
• L Indoor : Indoor losses taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected.
Mi
• L : Receiver terminal losses for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• G : Receiver terminal’s antenna gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• L Ant : Receiver terminal’s antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
L Ant is determined in the direction of TXj(jc) from the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi while the antenna
is pointed towards TXi(ic).
Mi
• L Body : Body loss defined for the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ( jc )
j
• TL DL : Downlink traffic load of the interfering cell TXj(jc).
Traffic loads can either be calculated using Monte Carlo simulations, or entered manually for each cell. Calculation of
traffic loads is explained in "Simulation Process" on page 640.
TX ( jc )
j
• AU DL : Downlink AAS usage ratio of the interfering cell TXj(jc).
Downlink AAS usage ratios are calculated using Monte Carlo simulations as explained in "Simulation Process" on
page 640.
TX j ( jc )
• N SCa – Used : Number of used subcarriers defined for the first downlink permutation zone in the frame configuration
assigned to the interfering cell TXj(jc).
TX j ( jc )
• N SCa – Data : Number of data subcarriers defined for the first downlink permutation zone in the frame configuration
assigned to the interfering cell TXj(jc).
Calculations
WiMAX cells can transmit different powers on pilot (NUsed – NData) and data (NData) subcarriers for the part of the frame with
traffic, and a different pilot power for the part of the frame that does not have traffic bursts. Data subcarriers are off during
the empty part of the frame. Therefore, the interference received from a cell depends on the traffic load and the different
powers of the cell, i.e., pilot, traffic, and idle pilot powers.
Monte Carlo simulations and coverage prediction calculations present different scenarios for interference calculations in the
case of smart antennas.
• Monte Carlo Simulations:
In the case of Monte Carlo simulations, the interferer is either using the transmitter antenna or the smart antenna at
any given moment. So, for each interfered pixel, subscriber, or mobile, Atoll already knows the type of the
interference source. Therefore, the interference received from any cell TXj(jc) can be given by:
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
I j I
j
TX j ( jc ) ----------------------------
Non – AAS
- -------------------
Idle
Without smart antennas: I Total
= 10 × Log 10
10
+ 10
10
TX ( jc )
I j
TX ( jc ) ------------------
AAS -
With smart antennas:
j
I Total
= 10 × Log 10
10
• Coverage Predictions:
659
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
In the case of coverage prediction calculations, the interferer could either be transmitting using the transmitter
antenna, or using the smart antenna, or it could be empty, or not transmitting.Therefore, the interference received
from any cell TXj(jc) can be given by:
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
I j I
j
I
j
TX ( jc ) ----------------------------
Non – AAS
-
Idle
------------------- -------------------
AAS
= 10 × Log 10
j 10 10 10
I Total + 10 + 10
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
I Pilot = EIRP Pilot – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
In coverage prediction:
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
I Traffic = EIRP Traffic – L Path – M Shadowing – Model + M Shadowing – C ⁄ I – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
I Pilot = EIRP Pilot – L Path – M Shadowing – Model + M Shadowing – C ⁄ I – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
Where EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the cell calculated as follows:
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX j TX j TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX j TX j
EIRP Traffic = P Traffic + G –L and EIRP Pilot = P Pilot + G –L
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
With P Traffic and P Pilot being the traffic and pilot transmission powers of the cell TXj(jc) calculated as follows:
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
j j j j j j
P Traffic = P Preamble – ΔP Traffic and P Pilot = P Preamble – ΔP Pilot
TX j TX j
And G = G Ant , i.e., the transmitter antenna gain for the antenna used by the transmitter TXj.
The interference from the loaded part of the frame transmitted using the main antenna is given as:
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
I j TX j ( jc ) I
j
TX j ( jc )
TX j ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) -------------------
Traffic-
N
Pilot -
------------------ N
= 10 × Log TL DL × 1 – AU DL × 10 × 1 – ------------------------
-
j 10 SCa Data 10 SCa Data
× ------------------------
– –
I Non – AAS - + 10
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
N SCa – Used N SCa – Used
If you wish to include the effect of the number of antennas in case of MIMO, you must
add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[WiMAX]
MultiAntennaInterference = 1
When the multi-antenna interference option is active, the interference is incremented by
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
+ 10 × Log N Ant – TX . Where N Ant – TX is the number of MIMO transmission
j j
(downlink) antennas defined for the cell TXj(jc).
660
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
The interference from the loaded part of the frame transmitted using the smart antenna is calculated as follows:
The received interfering traffic signal level (dBm) from any cell TXj(jc) is calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi
as follows:
In Monte Carlo simulations:
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
I AAS = EIRPAAS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
In coverage prediction:
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
I AAS = EIRPAAS – L Path – M Shadowing – Model + M Shadowing – C ⁄ I – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
Where EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the cell calculated as follows:
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX j TX j
EIRP AAS = P Traffic + G –L
TX j ( jc )
With P Traffic being the traffic transmission power of the cell TXj(jc) calculated as follows:
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
P Traffic = P Preamble – ΔP Traffic
TX j
And, G = G SA ( ϕ ) is the smart antenna gain in the direction of the victim mobile Mi, calculated from the angular
distributions of the downlink traffic power density of the interfering cells. The angular distribution of the downlink
traffic power density is determined from the array correlation matrices calculated during Monte Carlo simulations.
ϕ is the direction in which the victim pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is located. For more information on the
calculation of G SA ( ϕ ) , see "Beamforming Smart Antenna Models" on page 41.
The gain of the interfering signal, G SA ( ϕ ) , transmitted in the direction of each pixel ϕ is given by:
H
G SA ( ϕ ) = g n ( ϕ ) ⋅ S ϕ ⋅ R Avg ⋅ S ϕ
Where S ϕ is the steering vector in the direction ϕ (probe mobile/pixel), H denotes the Hilbert transform, R Avg is the
average array correlation matrix, and g n ( ϕ ) is the gain of the nth antenna element in the direction ϕ .
The interference from the empty, or idle, part of the frame transmitted using the transmitter antenna is calculated
as follows:
The received interfering pilot signal level (dBm) from any cell TXj(jc) is calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi
as follows:
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) Mi Mi Mi Mi
I Idle – Pilot = EIRP Idle – Pilot – L Path – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
Where EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the cell calculated as follows:
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX j TX j
EIRP Idle – Pilot = P Idle – Pilot + G –L
TX j ( jc )
With P Idle – Pilot being the idle pilot transmission power of the cell TXj(jc) calculated as follows:
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
P Idle – Pilot = P Preamble – ΔP Idle – Pilot
TX j TX j
And, G = G Ant , i.e., the transmitter antenna gain for the antenna used by the transmitter TXj.
The interference from the empty, or idle, part of the frame transmitted using the transmitter antenna is given as:
TX ( jc )
I j TX j ( jc )
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc )
Idle – Pilot
-----------------------------
- N
= 10 × Log 1 – TL DL × 10 × 1 – ------------------------
10 SCa – Data
I Idle -
TX j ( jc )
N SCa – Used
661
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
If you wish to include the effect of the number of antennas in case of MIMO, you must
add the following lines in the Atoll.ini file:
[WiMAX]
MultiAntennaInterference = 1
When the multi-antenna interference option is active, the interference is incremented by
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
+ 10 × Log N Ant – TX . Where N Ant – TX is the number of MIMO transmission
j j
(downlink) antennas defined for the cell TXj(jc).
Output
TX j ( jc )
• I Total : Interference received at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi from any interfering cell TXj(jc).
Input
TX j ( jc )
• I Total : Interference received at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi from any interfering cell TXj(jc) as calculated in
"Traffic and Pilot Interference Signal Levels Calculation (DL)" on page 658.
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
• rO : Total channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co- and Adjacent
Channel Overlaps Calculation" on page 643.
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
• SU DL and SU DL : Downlink segmentation usage ratios defined for cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc).
Calculations
The total traffic and pilot interference (dBm) from any cell TXj(jc) is calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as follows:
TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
Inter – Tech
I DL = I Total + f O + f Seg – DL + I DL
Calculations for the interference reduction factors due to channel overlapping and downlink segmentation are explained
below:
Interference reduction due to the co- and adjacent channel overlap between the studied and the interfering cells:
Interference reduction due to the co- and adjacent channel overlap between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) is calculated
as follows:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
fO = 10 × Log r O
662
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
interference by f Segment – DL . Hence, if downlink segmentation is used, the interference received at the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the segmented zone is reduced by a factor of f Segment – DL .
2. Collision probability between the subcarriers used by the subchannels belonging to the segment of the studied cell
and the subcarriers used by other sectors, segmented or not. The following paragraphs explain how the collision
probability is calculated.
The downlink segmentation usage (SU) ratio is the percentage of the total downlink traffic load present in the
segmented downlink PUSC zone. For example, if the downlink traffic load is 80 %, and the downlink segmentation
usage ratio is 50 %, then this means that the downlink traffic load of the segmented zone is 40 % (i.e., 50 % of 80 %),
and the downlink traffic load of the non-segmented zones is 40 %.
In coverage predictions, Atoll uses the downlink segmentation usage ratios stored in the cell properties for
determining the interference. In simulations, Atoll resets the downlink segmentation usage ratios for all the cells to
0, and then calculates the downlink segmentation usage ratios according to the traffic loads of the mobiles allocated
to the segmented zone and in the non-segmented zones.
Atoll determines the switching point between the segmented and the non-segmented zones using the downlink
segmentation usage ratio. The switching points between the segmented and non-segmented zones of the victim and
interfering cells, TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) respectively, are calculated as follows:
TX ( ic )
i
TX i ( ic ) SU DL
SP = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- and
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
SU DL + f Segment – DL × 1 – SU DL
TX ( jc )
j
TX j ( jc ) SU DL
SP = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
+ f Segment – DL × 1 – SU DL
j j j
SU DL
Where, SP is the switching point between the segmented and the non-segmented zones, SU is the downlink
segmentation usage ratios of the cells, and f Segment – DL is downlink segmenting factor, which gives the bandwidth
used by a segment.
The downlink segmenting factor, f Segment – DL , is calculated from the number of secondary subchannel groups
assigned to the first downlink PUSC permutation zone in the Permutation Zones table.
3 × PSG + 2 × SSG
f Segment – DL = ---------------------------------------------
15
Where, PSG is the number of primary subchannel groups and SSG is the number of secondary subchannel groups.
The multiplicative coefficients of 3 and 2 are derived from the ratio of the numbers of
subchannels that belong to the primary and to the secondary subchannel gourps. For
example, for the FFT size of 1024 (or 2048), each primary subchannel group contains 6
(or 12) subchannels, and each secondary subchannel group contains 4 (or 8)
subchannels, which gives the ratio of 3:2. And, the denominator of 15 = 3 x 3 + 2 x 3.
663
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
If the downlink segmentation usage ratio is set to 0, it means that the segmented zone does not exist. Setting SU to 0
gives SP = 0, and setting SU to 1 gives SP = 1 (or 100%), which shows how the switching point varies with the downlink
segmentation usage ratio.
Derivation of the switching point formula: The downlink segmentation usage ratio is used
to partition the total downlink traffic load into segmented and non-segmented zones.
Therefore, the switching point formula is derived from the equation:
SU DL × TL DL ( 1 – SU DL ) × TL DL
--------------------------------------------------------------------
- = -----------------------------------------------
-
SP × fSegment – DL × W Channel ( 1 – SP ) × W Channel
With cells using downlink segmentation, there can be four different interference scenarios.
• Between the segmented zone of the victim and the segmented zone of the interferer.
• Between the segmented zone of the victim and the non-segmented zone of the interferer.
• Between the non-segmented zone of the victim and the segmented zone of the interferer.
• Between the non-segmented zone of the victim and the non-segmented zone of the interferer.
Therefore, Atoll calculates the probabilities of collision for each scenario and weights the total interference according
to the total collision probability. The probability of collision p Coll for each scenario is given by the following formula:
Where, PSGCom is the number of primary subchannel groups common in TXi(ic) and TXj(jc), SSGCom is the number of
TX i ( ic )
secondary subchannel groups common in TXi(ic) and TXj(jc), PSG is the number of primary subchannel groups
TX i ( ic )
in the cell TXi(ic), and SSG is the number of secondary subchannel groups in the cell TXi(ic).
The segment numbers and the cell permutation base numbers (Cell PermBase) are determined from the cell’s
preamble index. The mapping between the preamble index, the segment number, and Cell PermBase is available in
the IEEE specifications. This mapping is performed in Atoll as follows:
Preamble Index ( PI )
PI < 96 96 ≤ PI < 114
Range: 0 to 113
Cell PermBase ( PB )
PI Modulo 32 PI – 96
Range: 0 to 31
Segment Number ( N Seg )
Floor ------
PI
( PI – 96 ) Modulo 3
Range: 0, 1, 2 32
664
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
• Case 1: If the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is covered by the segmented zone of TXi(ic), the total collision
probability for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
SS
p Coll If SP
j
≥ SP
i
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
p Collision – DL = SS
+ p Coll × SP
j SN i j
p Coll × SP
– SP
TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic )
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TX i ( ic )
If SP < SP
SP
• Case 2: If the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is covered by the non-segmented zone of TXi(ic), the total collision
probability for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated as follows:
NN
TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic )
p Coll If SP ≤ SP
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
= p NN + p NS × SP j – SP i
Coll × 1 – SP
p Collision – DL
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- If SP j > SP i
Coll TX ( jc ) TX ( ic )
TX ( ic )
1 – SP i
The interference reduction factor due to downlink segmentation for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is calculated
as follows:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
= 10 × Log p Collision – DL
i j
f Seg – DL
Inter – Tech
I DL is the inter-technology downlink interference from transmitters of an external network (linked document of any
technology) calculated as follows:
M M M M
Inter – Tech TX – External i i i i Inter – Tech
I DL = EIRP DL – L Path – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body – f IRF
All External TXs
TX – External
Where EIRP DL is the downlink EIRP of the external transmitter, L Path is the path loss from the external transmitters
to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile location, L Indoor is the indoor losses taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage"
Mi Mi
is selected, L is the receiver terminal losses for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi, G is the receiver terminal’s antenna
Mi
gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi, L Ant is the receiver terminal’s antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel,
Mi
subscriber, or mobile Mi, and L Body is the body loss defined for the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Output
TX j ( jc )
• I DL : Effective downlink traffic and pilot interference received at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi from any
interfering cell TXj(jc).
TX i ( ic )
• C Traffic : Received traffic signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Traffic
and Pilot Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 655.
TX i ( ic )
• C Pilot : Received pilot signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Traffic
and Pilot Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 655.
TX i ( ic )
• n DL : Downlink noise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Traffic and Pilot Noise Calculation (DL)" on page 657.
TX i ( ic )
• CNR Preamble : Preamble C/N from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Preamble C/N
Calculation" on page 652.
TX i ( ic )
• T AMS : AMS threshold defined for the cell TXi(ic).
665
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
M
i
• T B : Bearer selection thresholds of the bearers defined in the WiMAX equipment used by Mi’s terminal.
M
i
• B DL – Highest ( Service ) : Highest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
M
i
• B DL – Lowest ( Service ) : Lowest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• N Ant – TX : Number of MIMO transmission (downlink) antennas defined for the cell TXi(ic).
M
i
• N Ant – RX : Number of MIMO reception (downlink) antennas defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
• Mobility ( M i ) : Mobility used for the calculations.
M
i
• Subchannel allocation mode used by the downlink permutation zone PZ DL assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi as calculated in "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 654.
M
BLER BDL : Downlink block error rate read from the graphs available in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the
i
•
terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Calculations
The traffic and pilot C/N for a cell TXi(ic) are calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
CNR Traffic = C Traffic – n DL
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
CNR Pilot = C Pilot – n DL
Bearer Determination:
The bearers available for selection in the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi’s WiMAX equipment are the ones:
• Which are common between Mi’s and TXi(ic)’s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
defined in both equipment), if the corresponding option has been set in the Atoll.ini file. For more information,
see the Administrator Manual.
• Whose indexes are within the range defined by the lowest and the highest bearer indexes defined for the service
being accessed by Mi.
M TX ( ic ) M TX ( ic )
i i i i
• Whose selection thresholds are less than the traffic or pilot C/N at Mi: T B < CNR Traffic or T B < CNR Pilot
DL
If the cell supports STTD/MRC or AMS, the STTD/MRC gain, G STTD , corresponding to the bearer is applied to its
selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the WiMAX equipment assigned to the pixel,
TX ( ic ) M M
i i i
subscriber, or mobile Mi for N Ant – TX , N Ant – RX , the subchannel allocation mode of PZ DL , Mobility ( M i ) ,
M
BLER B DL .
i
DL
The additional STTD/MRC gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi ΔG STTD is also
applied. Therefore, the bearers available for selection are all the bearers defined in the WiMAX equipment for
which the following is true:
In case of STTD/MRC:
Mi TX i ( ic )
DL DL
T B – G STTD – ΔG STTD < CNR Traffic
Mi TX i ( ic )
DL DL
T B – G STTD – ΔG STTD < CNR Pilot
In case of AMS:
Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
DL DL
T B – G STTD – ΔG STTD < CNR Traffic if CNR Preamble < T AMS or CINR Preamble < T AMS
666
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
M TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i DL DL i i i i i
T B – G STTD – ΔG STTD < CNR Pilot if CNR Preamble < T AMS or CINR Preamble < T AMS
The bearer selected for data transfer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic).
• Bearer Index
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest index.
• Peak MAC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest downlink peak
MAC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, and Allocated Bandwidth
Throughput Calculation" on page 684.
• Effective MAC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest downlink effective
MAC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, and Allocated Bandwidth
Throughput Calculation" on page 684.
MIMO – STTD/MRC Gain:
Once the bearer is known, the traffic and pilot C/N calculated above become:
In case of STTD/MRC:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
DL DL
CNR Traffic = CNR Traffic + G STTD + ΔG STTD
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) DL DL
CNR Pilot = CNR Pilot + G STTD + ΔG STTD
In case of AMS:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
DL DL
CNR Traffic = CNR Traffic + G STTD + ΔG STTD if CNR Preamble < T AMS or CINR Preamble < T AMS
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i DL DL i i i i
CNR Pilot = CNR Pilot + G STTD + ΔG STTD if CNR Preamble < T AMS or CINR Preamble < T AMS
DL
Where G STTD is the STTD/MRC gain corresponding to the selected bearer.
Output
TX ( ic )
i
• CNR Traffic : Traffic C/N from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• CNR Pilot : Pilot C/N from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Input
TX ( ic )
i
• C Traffic : Received traffic signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Traffic
and Pilot Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 655.
TX ( ic )
i
• C Pilot : Received pilot signal level from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Traffic
and Pilot Signal Level Calculation (DL)" on page 655.
667
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic )
i
• n DL : Downlink noise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Traffic and Pilot Noise Calculation (DL)" on page 657.
TX ( jc )
j
• I DL : Effective downlink traffic and pilot interference from any cell TXj(jc) calculated for a pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi covered by a cell TXi(ic) as explained in "Traffic and Pilot Interference Calculation (DL)" on page 658.
Inter – Tech
• NRDL : Inter-technology downlink noise rise.
TX i ( ic )
• CNR Preamble : Preamble C/N from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Preamble C/N
Calculation" on page 652.
TX i ( ic )
• T AMS : AMS threshold defined for the cell TXi(ic).
M
i
• T B : Bearer selection thresholds of the bearers defined in the WiMAX equipment used by Mi’s terminal.
Mi
• B DL – Highest ( Service ) : Highest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
M
i
• B DL – Lowest ( Service ) : Lowest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• N Ant – TX : Number of MIMO transmission (downlink) antennas defined for the cell TXi(ic).
M
i
• N Ant – RX : Number of MIMO reception (downlink) antennas defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
• Mobility ( M i ) : Mobility used for the calculations.
M
i
• Subchannel allocation mode used by the downlink permutation zone PZ DL assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi as calculated in "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 654.
M
BLER BDL : Downlink block error rate read from the graphs available in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the
i
•
terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Calculations
The traffic and pilot C/(I+N) for a cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TXj ( jc ) TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) IDL n DL
= C Traffic – 10 × Log ------------------
10 +
--------------------- and
- Inter – Tech
CINR Traffic 10 + NR DL
10 10
All TXj ( jc )
TXj ( jc ) TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) IDL n DL
– 10 × Log ------------------
10 +
---------------------
- Inter – Tech
CINR Pilot = C Pilot 10 + NR DL
10 10
All TXj ( jc )
The Traffic Total Noise (I+N) for a cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi:
TX ( ic )
TX j ( jc ) n DL
i
TX i ( ic ) I DL ---------------------
= 10 × Log ------------------
- 10
Inter – Tech
( I + N ) DL + 10
10 10 + NR DL
All TX j ( jc )
Bearer Determination:
The bearers available for selection in the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi’s WiMAX equipment are the ones:
• Which are common between Mi’s and TXi(ic)’s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
defined in both equipment), if the corresponding option has been set in the Atoll.ini file. For more information,
see the Administrator Manual.
• Whose indexes are within the range defined by the lowest and the highest bearer indexes defined for the service
being accessed by Mi.
668
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
M TX ( ic ) M TX ( ic )
i i i i
• Whose selection thresholds are less than the traffic or pilot C/(I+N) at Mi: T B < CINR Traffic or T B < CINR Pilot
DL
If the cell supports STTD/MRC or AMS, the STTD/MRC gain, G STTD , corresponding to the bearer is applied to its
selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the WiMAX equipment assigned to the pixel,
TX ( ic ) M M
i i i
subscriber, or mobile Mi for N Ant – TX , N Ant – RX , the subchannel allocation mode of PZ DL , Mobility ( M i ) ,
M
BLER B DL .
i
DL
The additional STTD/MRC gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi ΔG STTD is also
applied. Therefore, the bearers available for selection are all the bearers defined in the WiMAX equipment for
which the following is true:
In case of STTD/MRC:
Mi TX i ( ic )
DL DL
T B – G STTD – ΔG STTD < CINR Traffic
Mi TX i ( ic )
DL DL
T B – G STTD – ΔG STTD < CINR Pilot
In case of AMS:
Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
DL DL
T B – G STTD – ΔG STTD < CINR Traffic if CNR Preamble < T AMS or CINR Preamble < T AMS
Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
DL DL
T B – G STTD – ΔG STTD < CINR Pilot if CNR Preamble < T AMS or CINR Preamble < T AMS
The bearer selected for data transfer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic).
• Bearer Index
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest index.
• Peak MAC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest downlink peak
MAC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, and Allocated Bandwidth
Throughput Calculation" on page 684.
• Effective MAC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest downlink effective
MAC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, and Allocated Bandwidth
Throughput Calculation" on page 684.
MIMO – STTD/MRC Gain:
Once the bearer is known, the traffic and pilot C/(I+N) calculated above become:
In case of STTD/MRC:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
DL DL
CINR Traffic = CINR Traffic + G STTD + ΔG STTD
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) DL DL
CINR Pilot = CINR Pilot + G STTD + ΔG STTD
In case of AMS:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
DL DL
CINR Traffic = CINR Traffic + G STTD + ΔG STTD if CNR Preamble < T AMS or CINR Preamble < T AMS
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) DL DL TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
CINR Pilot = CINR Pilot + G STTD + ΔG STTD if CNR Preamble < T AMS or CINR Preamble < T AMS
DL
Where G STTD is the STTD/MRC gain corresponding to the selected bearer.
Output
TX i ( ic )
• CINR Traffic : Traffic C/(I+N) from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
669
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic )
i
• CINR Pilot : Pilot C/(I+N) from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX ( ic )
i
• ( I + N ) DL : Traffic Total noise from the interfering cells TXj(jc) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a cell
TXi(ic).
M
i
• B DL : Bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the downlink.
Mi
• P Max : Maximum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi without power
control.
Mi
• P Eff : Effective transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi after power control as
calculated in "Traffic C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (UL)" on page 677.
TX i
• E SA : Number of antenna elements defined for the smart antenna equipment used by the transmitter TXi.
TX
i
• G : Transmitter antenna gain for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
TX i TX i TX i
• Without smart antennas: G is the transmitter antenna gain, i.e., G = G Ant .
TX i TX i TX i
• With smart antennas: G is the uplink smart antenna beamforming gain, i.e., G = G SA = 10 × Log E SA .
For more information on the calculation of G SA , refer to section "Beamforming Smart Antenna Models" on
page 41.
TX i TX i
• L : Total transmitter losses for the transmitter TXi ( L = L Total – UL ).
TX
i
• L Path : Path loss ( L Path = L Model + L Ant ).
• L Model : Loss on the transmitter-receiver path (path loss) calculated using a propagation model.
TX i
• L Ant : Antenna attenuation (from antenna patterns) calculated for the antenna used by the transmitter TXi.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
• L Indoor : Indoor losses taken into account when the option "Indoor coverage" is selected.
Mi
• L : Receiver terminal losses for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• G : Receiver terminal’s antenna gain for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• L Ant : Receiver terminal’s antenna attenuation calculated for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
For calculating the useful signal level from the best serving cell, L Ant is determined in the direction (H,V) = (0,0) from
Mi
the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi. For calculating the interfering signal level from any interferer, L Ant
is determined in the direction of the interfering cell from the antenna patterns of the antenna used by Mi, while the
antenna is pointed towards Mi’s best serving cell.
Mi
• L Body : Body loss defined for the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Calculations
The received traffic signal level (dBm) from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at its serving cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows:
Mi Mi TX i TX i Mi Mi
C UL = EIRP UL – L Path – M Shadowing – Model – L Indoor + G –L – L Ant – L Body
Where EIRP is the effective isotropic radiated power of the terminal calculated as follows:
670
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
M M M M
i i i i
EIRP UL = P +G –L
M M M M
i i i i
With P = P Max without power control at the start of the calculations, and is the P = P Eff after power control.
Output
Mi
• C UL : Received uplink signal level from the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at a cell TXi(ic).
Input
• K: Boltzmann’s constant.
• T: Temperature in Kelvin.
Mi
PZ UL
• N SCa – Used : Number of subcarriers used by the uplink permutation zone of a cell TXi(ic) assigned to Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• N SCa – Total : Total number of subcarriers defined for the frame configuration of a cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• F Sampling : Sampling frequency for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Sampling Frequency" on page 681.
TX i ( ic )
• nf : Noise figure of the cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
The uplink noise is the sum of the thermal noise and the noise figure of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
n UL = n 0 – UL + nf
Output
TX ( ic )
i
• n UL : Uplink noise for the cell TXi(ic).
671
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
• Calculation of the uplink noise rise which represents the total uplink interference from all the interfering mobiles as
explained in "Noise Rise Calculation (UL)" on page 673.
Mj
• C UL : Uplink signal level received at a cell TXi(ic) from an interfering mobile Mj covered by a cell TXj(jc) as calculated in
"Traffic Signal Level Calculation (UL)" on page 670.
• M Shadowing – Model : Shadowing margin based on the model standard deviation.
• M Shadowing – C ⁄ I : Shadowing margin based on the C/I standard deviation.
In Monte Carlo simulations, interfering signal levels already include M Shadowing – Model , as explained in "Traffic Signal
Level Calculation (UL)" on page 670.
In coverage predictions, the ratio M Shadowing – Model – M Shadowing – C ⁄ I is applied to the interfering signals (for more
information, see "Shadow Fading Model" on page 85). As the interfering signal levels already include
M Shadowing – Model , M Shadowing – C ⁄ I is added to the received interfering signal levels in order to achieve the ratio
M Shadowing – Model – M Shadowing – C ⁄ I :
Mj Mj
C UL = C UL + M Shadowing – C ⁄ I
In coverage predictions, shadowing margins are taken into account when the option "Shadowing taken into account"
is selected.
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
• rO : Total channel overlap ratio between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co- and Adjacent
Channel Overlaps Calculation" on page 643.
Mj
• TL UL : Uplink traffic load of the interfering mobile Mj.
Traffic loads are calculated during Monte Carlo simulations as explained in "Scheduling and Radio Resource
Allocation" on page 688.
Calculations
The uplink interference received at a cell TXi(ic) from an interfering mobile Mj covered by a cell TXj(jc) is calculated as follows:
Mj Mj TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) Mj TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
I UL = C UL + f O + f TL – UL + f Seg – UL
Calculations for the interference reduction factors due to channel overlapping, uplink traffic load, and uplink segmentation
are explained below:
Interference reduction due to the co- and adjacent channel overlap between the studied and the interfering cells:
Interference reduction due to the co- and adjacent channel overlap between the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) is calculated
as follows:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
fO = 10 × Log r O
M M
f TL – UL = 10 × Log TL UL
j j
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
= 10 × Log p Collision – UL
i j
f Seg – UL
672
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
Where p Collision – UL is the collision probability between the subcarriers of the uplink segments being used by the
interfered and interfering cells. It is determined during Monte Carlo simulations as follows:
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) SC Com
i j
p Collision – UL = ------------------
TX ( ic )
-
i
SC
TX i ( ic )
Where, SCCom is the number of subchannels common in TXi(ic) and TXj(jc), SC is the number of subchannels in
the cell TXi(ic).
The segment numbers and the cell permutation base numbers (Cell PermBase) are determined from the cell’s
preamble index. The mapping between the preamble index, the segment number, and Cell PermBase is available in
the IEEE specifications. This mapping is performed in Atoll as follows:
Preamble Index ( PI )
PI < 96 96 ≤ PI < 114
Range: 0 to 113
Cell PermBase ( PB )
PI Modulo 32 PI – 96
Range: 0 to 31
Segment Number ( N Seg )
Floor ------
PI
32 ( PI – 96 ) Modulo 3
Range: 0, 1, 2
In Monte Carlo simulations, Atoll calculates two separate noise rise values; for the mobiles served by the segmented
zone of the interfered cell Atoll calculates the uplink segmented noise rise, and for the mobiles served by the non-
segmented zones of the interfered cell Atoll calculates the uplink noise rise.
In coverage predictions, point analysis, and calculations on subscriber lists, according to the zone, segmented or non-
segmented, that covers the pixel, receiver, or subscriber, Atoll uses either the uplink segmented noise rise or the
uplink noise rise to calculate the C/(I+N). For more information on the calculation of the uplink noise rise, see "Noise
Rise Calculation (UL)" on page 673.
Output
Mj
• I UL : Uplink interference signal level received at a cell TXi(ic) from an interfering mobile Mj covered by a cell TXj(jc).
Input
Mj
• I UL : Uplink interference signal levels received at a cell TXi(ic) from interfering mobiles Mj covered by other cells TXj(jc)
as calculated in "Traffic Interference Signal Levels Calculation (UL)" on page 672.
TX i ( ic )
• n UL : Uplink noise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Traffic Noise Calculation (UL)" on page 671.
Inter – Tech
• NR UL : Inter-technology uplink noise rise.
Calculations
The uplink noise rise and total noise (I+N) for the cell TXi(ic) are calculated as follows:
• Without smart antennas:
For any mobile Mi covered by a non-segmented zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates the UL noise rise as
follows:
IMj TX ( ic )
UL n UL
i
TX i ( ic ) ∀ non-seg M i
--------------------- TX i ( ic )
= 10 × Log
10
-------------------------------------------- Inter – Tech
NR UL 10 10 + 10 + NRUL – n UL
All Mj
All TX
j
( jc )
673
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
For any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the non-segmented zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll
calculates the uplink total noise (I+N) as follows:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i
( I + N ) UL = NR UL + n UL
For any mobile Mi covered by the segmented zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates the segmented zone
UL noise rise as follows:
IMj TX i ( ic )
UL ∀ seg M n UL
TX i ( ic ) ---------------------------------i --------------------- TX i ( ic )
10
Inter – Tech
NRUL – Seg = 10 × Log 10 10 + 10 + NR UL – n UL
All Mj
All TXj ( jc )
For any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the segmented zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic), Atoll calculates
the uplink total noise (I+N) as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
( I + N ) UL = NR UL – Seg + n UL
TX i ( ic )
2
( I + N ) UL ( ϕ ) = I UL ( ϕ ) + σ n ⋅ I
Output
TX i ( ic )
• NRUL : Non-segmented uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• NRUL – Seg : Segmented uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic).
TX ( ic )
i
• NRUL ( ϕ ) : Angular distribution of the uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
• ( I + N ) UL or ( I + N ) UL ( ϕ ) : Total Noise for a cell TXi(ic) calculated for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• C UL : Received uplink signal level from the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at its serving cell TXi(ic) as calculated in
"Traffic Signal Level Calculation (UL)" on page 670.
TX i ( ic )
• n UL : Uplink noise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Traffic Noise Calculation (UL)" on page 671.
TX i ( ic )
• CNR Preamble : Preamble C/N from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Preamble C/N
Calculation" on page 652.
TX i ( ic )
• T AMS : AMS threshold defined for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• T B – Lowest : Bearer selection threshold of the lowest bearer in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
M
i
PZ UL
• N SC : Number of subchannels per channel defined for the uplink permutation zone assigned to the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi as calculated in "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 654.
Mi
PZ UL = 8
• N SC ⁄ Seg : Number of subchannels per segment for the first uplink PUSC permutation zone.
Mi
• P Max : Maximum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
674
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
M
i
• P Min : Minimum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
• M PC : Power control margin defined in the Global Parameters.
M
i
• T B : Bearer selection thresholds of the bearers defined in the WiMAX equipment used bythe cell TXi(ic).
M
i
• B UL – Highest ( Service ) : Highest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
Mi
• B UL – Lowest ( Service ) : Lowest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
Mi
• N Ant – TX : Number of MIMO transmission (uplink) antennas defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
TX ( ic )
i
• N Ant – RX : Number of MIMO reception (uplink) antennas defined for the cell TXi(ic).
• Mobility ( M i ) : Mobility used for the calculations.
Mi
• Subchannel allocation mode used by the uplink permutation zone PZ UL assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi as calculated in "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 654.
M
BLER B UL : Uplink block error rate read from the graphs available in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the cell
i
•
TXi(ic).
Calculations
The uplink C/N from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at its serving cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows:
Mi Mi TX i ( ic )
CNR UL = C UL – n UL
Bearer Determination:
The bearers available for selection in the cell TXi(ic)’s WiMAX equipment are the ones:
• Which are common between Mi’s and TXi(ic)’s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
defined in both equipment), if the corresponding option has been set in the Atoll.ini file. For more information,
see the Administrator Manual.
• Whose indexes are within the range defined by the lowest and the highest bearer indexes defined for the service
being accessed by Mi.
Mi Mi
• Whose selection thresholds are less than the uplink C/N at Mi: T B < CNR UL
UL
If the cell supports STTD/MRC or AMS, the STTD/MRC gain, G STTD , corresponding to the bearer is applied to its
selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the WiMAX equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic) for
M TX ( ic ) M M
N Ant – TX , N Ant – RX , the subchannel allocation mode of PZ UL , Mobility ( M i ) , BLER BUL .
i i i i
UL
The additional STTD/MRC gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi ΔG STTD is also
applied. Therefore, the bearers available for selection are all the bearers defined in the WiMAX equipment for
which the following is true:
In case of STTD/MRC:
Mi Mi
UL UL
T B – G STTD – ΔG STTD < CNR UL
In case of AMS:
Mi Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
UL UL
T B – G STTD – ΔG STTD < CNR UL if CNR Preamble < T AMS or CINR Preamble < T AMS
The bearer selected for data transfer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic).
• Bearer Index
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest index.
675
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
In case of AMS:
M M TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i UL UL i i i i
CNR UL = CNR UL + G STTD + ΔG STTD if CNR Preamble < T AMS or CINR Preamble < T AMS
UL
Where G STTD is the STTD/MRC gain corresponding to the selected bearer.
Uplink Subchannelisation:
The uplink subchannelisation depends on the uplink bandwidth allocation target defined for the scheduler used by the
cell TXi(ic). The uplink C/N calculated above is given for the total number of subchannels associated with the
Mi
PZ UL
permutation zone, i.e., N SC . Subchannelisation is performed for all the pixels, subscribers, or mobiles in the uplink,
and may reduce the number of used subchannels in order to satisfy the selected target.
• Full Bandwidth
Full channel width is used by each mobile in the uplink. As there is no reduction in the bandwidth used for
transmission, there is no gain in the uplink C/N.
• Maintain Connection
The bandwidth used for transmission by a mobile is reduced only if the uplink C/N is not enough to even access
the lowest bearer. For example, as a mobile moves from good to bad radio conditions, the number of subchannels
used by it for transmission in uplink are reduced one by one in order to improve the uplink C/N. The calculation of
the gain introduced by the subchannelisation is explained below.
• Best Bearer
The bandwidth used for transmission by a mobile is reduced in order to improve the uplink C/N enough to access
the best bearer. For example, if using 5 subchannels, a mobile is able to access the best bearer, and using 6 it would
only get access to the second best, it will be assigned 5 subchannels as the used uplink bandwidth. Although using
4 subchannels, its uplink C/N will be better than when using 5, the uplink bandwidth is not reduced to 4 because
it does not provide any gain in terms of the bearer, i.e., the mobile already has the best bearer using 5
subchannels. The calculation of the gain introduced by the bandwidth reduction is explained below.
The definition of the best bearer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic),
i.e., bearer with the highest index, with the highest peak MAC throughput, or with the highest effective MAC
throughput.
The uplink subchannelisation may result in the use of a number of subchannels which is less than the total number of
subchannels associated with the permutation zone. The gain related to this bandwidth reduction is applied to the
uplink C/N:
Mi
PZUL
Mi Mi N SC
CNR UL = CNR UL+ 10 × Log -----------------
Final All SC N Mi
SC – UL
676
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
M
i
M PZ
i UL
Where N SC – UL < N SC for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a non-segmented permutation zone in the
M
i
M PZ =8
i UL
interfered cell TXi(ic), and N SC – UL < N SC ⁄ Seg for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the segmented uplink
PUSC zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic).
The pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi reduces its transmission power so that the uplink C/N from it at its cell is just
enough to get the selected bearer.
Mi Mi Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
If with P = P Max AND CNR UL > T Mi + M PC , where T Mi is the bearer selection threshold, from the WiMAX
B UL B UL
equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic), for the bearer selected for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
The transmission power of Mi is reduced to determine the effective transmission power from the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi as follows:
M
i Mi M
i
TX ( ic )
i Mi
P Eff = Max P Max – CNR UL – T M + M PC , P Min
B i
UL
Mi Mi
CNR UL is calculated again using P Eff .
Output
M
i
• CNR UL : Uplink C/N from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at it serving cell TXi(ic).
Input
Mi
• CNR UL : Uplink C/N from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at it serving cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Traffic C/N
Calculation (UL)" on page 674.
TX i ( ic )
• NR UL : Non-segmented uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Rise Calculation (UL)" on
page 673.
TX i ( ic )
• NR UL – Seg : Segmented uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Rise Calculation (UL)" on page 673.
TX i ( ic )
• NR UL ( ϕ ) : Angular distribution of the uplink noise rise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Noise Rise Calculation
(UL)" on page 673.
TX i ( ic )
• CNR Preamble : Preamble C/N from the cell TXi(ic) at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi as calculated in "Preamble C/N
Calculation" on page 652.
677
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic )
i
• T AMS : AMS threshold defined for the cell TXi(ic).
TX ( ic )
i
• T B – Lowest : Bearer selection threshold of the lowest bearer in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
M
i
PZ
UL
• N SC : Number of subchannels per channel defined for the uplink permutation zone assigned to the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi as calculated in "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 654.
Mi
PZ =8
UL
• N SC ⁄ Seg : Number of subchannels per segment for the first uplink PUSC permutation zone.
Mi
• P Max : Maximum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• P Min : Minimum transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
• M PC : Power control margin defined in the Global Parameters.
Mi
• T B : Bearer selection thresholds of the bearers defined in the WiMAX equipment used bythe cell TXi(ic).
M
i
• B UL – Highest ( Service ) : Highest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
Mi
• B UL – Lowest ( Service ) : Lowest downlink bearer defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
Mi
• N Ant – TX : Number of MIMO transmission (uplink) antennas defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• N Ant – RX : Number of MIMO reception (uplink) antennas defined for the cell TXi(ic).
• Mobility ( M i ) : Mobility used for the calculations.
Mi
• Subchannel allocation mode used by the uplink permutation zone PZ UL assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi as calculated in "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 654.
M
BLER BUL : Uplink block error rate read from the graphs available in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the cell
i
•
TXi(ic).
Calculations
The uplink C/(I+N) for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at a cell TXi(ic) is calculated as follows:
• Without smart antennas:
For any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the non-segmented zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic):
Mi Mi TX i ( ic )
CINR UL = CNR UL – NRUL
For any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the segmented zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic):
Mi Mi TX i ( ic )
CINR UL = CNR UL – NRUL – Seg
Bearer Determination:
The bearers available for selection in the cell TXi(ic)’s WiMAX equipment are the ones:
• Which are common between Mi’s and TXi(ic)’s equipment (bearer indexes for which selection thresholds are
defined in both equipment), if the corresponding option has been set in the Atoll.ini file. For more information,
see the Administrator Manual.
678
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
• Whose indexes are within the range defined by the lowest and the highest bearer indexes defined for the service
being accessed by Mi.
M M M M
i i i i
• Whose selection thresholds are less than the uplink C/(I+N) at Mi: T B < CINR UL and T B < CINR UL ( ϕ )
UL
If the cell supports STTD/MRC or AMS, the STTD/MRC gain, G STTD , corresponding to the bearer is applied to its
selection threshold. The gain is read from the properties of the WiMAX equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic) for
M TX ( ic ) M M
N Ant – TX , N Ant – RX , the subchannel allocation mode of PZ UL , Mobility ( M i ) , BLER BUL .
i i i i
UL
The additional STTD/MRC gain defined for the clutter class of the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi ΔG STTD is also
applied. Therefore, the bearers available for selection are all the bearers defined in the WiMAX equipment for
which the following is true:
In case of STTD/MRC:
Mi Mi
UL UL
T B – G STTD – ΔG STTD < CINR UL and
Mi Mi
UL UL
T B – G STTD – ΔG STTD < CINR UL ( ϕ )
In case of AMS:
Mi Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
UL UL
T B – G STTD – ΔG STTD < CINR UL if CNR Preamble < T AMS or CINR Preamble < T AMS
and
Mi Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
UL UL
T B – G STTD – ΔG STTD < CINR UL ( ϕ ) if CNR Preamble < T AMS or CINR Preamble < T AMS
The bearer selected for data transfer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic).
• Bearer Index
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest index.
• Peak MAC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest uplink peak MAC
channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, and Allocated Bandwidth Throughput
Calculation" on page 684.
• Effective MAC Throughput
From among the bearers available for selection, the selected bearer is the one with the highest uplink effective
MAC channel throughput as calculated in "Channel Throughput, Cell Capacity, and Allocated Bandwidth
Throughput Calculation" on page 684.
MIMO – STTD/MRC Gain:
Once the bearer is known, the uplink C/(I+N) calculated above become:
In case of STTD/MRC:
Mi Mi
UL UL
CINR UL = CINR UL + G STTD + ΔG STTD and
Mi Mi
UL UL
CINR UL ( ϕ ) = CINR UL ( ϕ ) + G STTD + ΔG STTD
In case of AMS:
Mi Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
UL UL
CINR UL = CINR UL + G STTD + ΔG STTD if CNR Preamble < T AMS or CINR Preamble < T AMS
and
Mi Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
UL UL
CINR UL ( ϕ ) = CINR UL ( ϕ ) + G STTD + ΔG STTD if CNR Preamble < T AMS or CINR Preamble < T AMS
UL
Where G STTD is the STTD/MRC gain corresponding to the selected bearer.
Uplink Subchannelisation:
679
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
The uplink subchannelisation depends on the uplink bandwidth allocation target defined for the scheduler used by the
cell TXi(ic). The uplink C/(I+N) calculated above is given for the total number of subchannels associated with the
M
i
PZ
UL
permutation zone, i.e., N SC . Subchannelisation is performed for all the pixels, subscribers, or mobiles in the uplink,
and may reduce the number of used subchannels in order to satisfy the selected target.
• Full Bandwidth
Full channel width is used by each mobile in the uplink. As there is no reduction in the bandwidth used for
transmission, there is no gain in the uplink C/(I+N).
• Maintain Connection
The bandwidth used for transmission by a mobile is reduced only if the uplink C/(I+N) is not enough to even access
the lowest bearer. For example, as a mobile moves from good to bad radio conditions, the number of subchannels
used by it for transmission in uplink are reduced one by one in order to improve the uplink C/(I+N). The calculation
of the gain introduced by the subchannelisation is explained below.
• Best Bearer
The bandwidth used for transmission by a mobile is reduced in order to improve the uplink C/(I+N) enough to
access the best bearer. For example, if using 5 subchannels, a mobile is able to access the best bearer, and using
6 it would only get access to the second best, it will be assigned 5 subchannels as the used uplink bandwidth.
Although using 4 subchannels, its uplink C/(I+N) will be better than when using 5, the uplink bandwidth is not
reduced to 4 because it does not provide any gain in terms of the bearer, i.e., the mobile already has the best
bearer using 5 subchannels. The calculation of the gain introduced by the bandwidth reduction is explained below.
The definition of the best bearer depends on the bearer selection criterion of the scheduler used by the cell TXi(ic),
i.e., bearer with the highest index, with the highest peak MAC throughput, or with the highest effective MAC
throughput.
The uplink subchannelisation may result in the use of a number of subchannels which is less than the total number of
subchannels associated with the permutation zone. The gain related to this bandwidth reduction is applied to the
uplink C/(I+N):
Mi
PZUL
Mi Mi N SC
CINR UL = CINR UL+ 10 × Log -----------------
Final All SC N Mi
SC – UL
M
i
Mi PZ UL
Where N SC – UL < N SC for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by a non-segmented permutation zone in the
Mi
M PZ =8
i UL
interfered cell TXi(ic), and N SC – UL < N SC ⁄ Seg for any pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi covered by the segmented uplink
PUSC zone in the interfered cell TXi(ic).
The pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi reduces its transmission power so that the uplink C/(I+N) from it at its cell is just
enough to get the selected bearer.
Mi Mi Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
If with P = P Max AND CINR UL > T Mi + M PC , where T Mi is the bearer selection threshold, from the WiMAX
B UL B UL
equipment assigned to the cell TXi(ic), for the bearer selected for the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
The transmission power of Mi is reduced to determine the effective transmission power from the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi as follows:
Mi Mi M i TX i ( ic ) Mi
P Eff = Max PMax – CINR UL – T M + M PC , P Min
B i
UL
Mi Mi
CINR UL is calculated again using P Eff .
680
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
Output
M M
i i
• CINR UL or CINR UL ( ϕ ) : Uplink C/(I+N) from a pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi at it serving cell TXi(ic).
M
i
• N SC – UL : Number of subchannels used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the uplink after subchannelisation.
Mi
• P Eff : Effective transmission power of the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• B UL : Bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the uplink.
TX i ( ic )
• f Sampling : Sampling factor defined for the frequency band of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• W Channel : Channel bandwidth of the cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
Output
TX i ( ic )
• F Sampling : Sampling frequency for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• F Sampling : Sampling frequency for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Sampling Frequency" on page 681.
TX ( ic )
i
• N SCa – Total : Total number of subcarriers defined for the frame configuration of a cell TXi(ic).
• r CP : Cyclic prefix ratio defined for the network in the Global Parameters.
Calculations
681
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic ) 1
i
D Sym – Useful = -------------------
TX ( ic )
i
ΔF
And, the duration of the cyclic prefix.
r CP
D CP = ------
-
ΔF
Adding the Cyclic prefix ratio to the useful symbol duration, Atoll determines the total symbol duration.
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
D Symbol = D Sym – Useful + D CP
Output
TX i ( ic )
• D Symbol : Total symbol duration of one modulation symbol for a cell TXi(ic).
Calculations
The downlink and the uplink subframes of a TDD frame are separated in time by the TTG and the RTG time guards.
First of all, Atoll calculates the useful frame duration by removing the TTG and RTG from the frame duration:
Used TDD TDD
D Frame = D Frame – D TTG – D RTG
Then, Atoll calculates the frame duration in terms of number of symbol durations:
TX i ( ic ) D Used
N ( SD – Used ) ⁄ Frame = Floor -----------------
Frame
-
TXi ( ic )
D Symbol
Next, Atoll calculates the downlink and uplink cell capacities as follows:
Downlink Subframe:
Atoll calculates the number of symbol durations in the downlink subframe excluding the fixed overhead defined in the
Global Parameters:
682
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
N ( SD – DL ) ⁄ Subframe = RoundUp N ( SD – Used ) ⁄ Frame × r DL – Frame – O Fixed if DL:UL ratio is defined in percentage.
i i TDD DL
TDD
TX ( ic )
i TXi ( ic ) N SD – DL DL
Or N ( SD – DL ) ⁄ Subframe = RoundUp N ( SD – Used ) ⁄ Frame × ------------------------------------------
TDD TDD
– O Fixed if DL:UL ratio is defined in
N SD – DL + N SD – UL
fraction.
The RoundUp function rounds a float value up to the nearest integer value.
The total number of symbols in the downlink subframe after removing the variable overhead is:
M
i DL
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TXi ( ic ) PZ DL O Variable
R DL = N ( Sym – DL ) ⁄ Subframe = Floor N ( SD – DL ) ⁄ Subframe × N SCa – Data × 1 – ---------------------
100
Uplink Subframe:
Atoll calculates the number of symbol durations in the uplink subframe excluding the fixed overhead defined in the
Global Parameters:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
N ( SD – UL ) ⁄ Subframe = RoundDown N ( SD – Used ) ⁄ Frame × ( 1 – r DL – Frame ) – O Fixed
i i TDD UL
if DL:UL ratio is defined in
percentage.
TDD
TX i ( ic ) TXi ( ic ) N SD – UL UL
Or N ( SD – UL ) ⁄ Subframe = RoundDown N ( SD – Used ) ⁄ Frame × ------------------------------------------
TDD TDD
– O Fixed if DL:UL ratio is defined in
N SD – DL + N SD – UL
fraction.
The RoundDown function rounds a float value down to the nearest integer value.
The total number of symbols in the uplink subframe after removing the variable overhead is:
Mi
UL
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) PZ UL O Variable
R UL = N ( Sym – UL ) ⁄ Subframe = Floor N ( SD – UL ) ⁄ Subframe × N SCa – Data × 1 – ---------------------
100
Output
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
• R DL = N ( Sym – DL ) ⁄ Subframe : Amount of downlink resources in the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
• R UL = N ( Sym – UL ) ⁄ Subframe : Amount of uplink resources in the cell TXi(ic).
Input
Calculations
There are no transmit and receive time guards in FDD systems. Therefore, the downlink and the uplink subframe durations
are the same as the frame duration.
683
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
X
D Subframe = D Frame
The subframe durations in terms of the number of symbol durations excluding the fixed overheads are:
TX ( ic ) DX
N ( SD – X ) ⁄ Subframe = Floor ----------------------
i Subframe
- – O XFixed
TXi ( ic )
D Symbol
The total numbers of symbols in the downlink or uplink subframes after removing the variable overheads are:
Mi
X
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TXi ( ic ) PZ X O Variable
RX = N ( Sym – X ) ⁄ Subframe = Floor N ( SD – X ) ⁄ Subframe × N SCa – Data × 1 – ---------------------
100
Output
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
• RX = N ( Sym – X ) ⁄ Subframe : Amount of downlink or uplink resources in the cell TXi(ic).
Input
TX i ( ic )
• TL DL – Max : Maximum downlink traffic load for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• TL UL – Max : Maximum uplink traffic load for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• R DL : Amount of downlink resources in the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Total Cell Resources" on
page 681.
TX i ( ic )
• R UL : Amount of uplink resources in the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Calculation of Total Cell Resources" on
page 681.
• η M : Bearer efficiency (bits/symbol) of the bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the downlink in
i
B DL
"Traffic and Pilot C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (DL)" on page 667.
• η M : Bearer efficiency (bits/symbol) of the bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the uplink in
i
B UL
684
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
M
i
• f TP – Scaling : Throughput scaling factor defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile
Mi.
M
i
• TP Offset : Throughput offset defined in the properties of the service used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
PZ UL
• N SC : Number of subchannels per channel defined for the uplink permutation zone assigned to the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi as calculated in "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 654.
Mi
• N SC – UL : Number of uplink subchannels after subchannelisation with which the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi can get
the highest available bearer, as calculated in "Traffic C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (UL)" on page 677.
Calculations
Downlink:
TX i ( ic )
R DL ×η Mi
Mi B
DL
• Peak MAC Channel Throughput: CTP P – DL = ---------------------------------
D Frame
In the above formula, the actual value of D Frame is used to calculate the channel throughput for coverage predictions,
while D Frame = 1 sec for Monte Carlo simulations.
Downlink Segmentation:
Mi
If the permutation zone assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi is the first downlink PUSC zone ( PZ DL = 0 )
and it is segmented, the channel throughput is calculated as:
TX i ( ic )
R DL ×η Mi
Mi B DL
CTP P – DL = --------------------------------- × f Segment – DL
D Frame
TX i ( ic )
• N Ant – TX : Number of MIMO transmission (downlink) antennas defined for the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• N Ant – RX : Number of MIMO reception (downlink) antennas defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
• Mobility ( M i ) : Mobility used for the calculations.
Mi
• Subchannel allocation mode used by the downlink permutation zone PZ DL assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi as calculated in "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 654.
Mi
• B DL : Bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the downlink as explained in "Traffic and Pilot C/
(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (DL)" on page 667.
M
BLER B DL : Downlink block error rate read from the graphs available in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the
i
•
TX i ( ic )
terminal used by the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi. BLER is determined for CINR Traffic .
Atoll also takes into account the SU-MIMO Gain Factor f SU – MIMO defined for the clutter class where the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi is located.
Max
In case of SU-MIMO: η Mi = η Mi × ( 1 + f SU – MIMO ( G SU – MIMO – 1 ) )
B DL B DL
685
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
Max i i i i
In case of AMS: η M = η M × ( 1 + f SU – MIMO ( G SU – MIMO – 1 ) ) if CNR Preamble > T AMS or CINR Preamble > T AMS
i i
B B
DL DL
If the Max SU-MIMO Gain for the exact value of the C/(I+N) is not availabe in the table, it is interpolated from the gain
values available for the C/(I+N) just less than and just greater than the actual C/(I+N).
M M M
Effective MAC Channel Throughput: CTP E – DL = CTP P – DL × 1 – BLER B DL
i i i
•
Mi
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
• Application Channel Throughput: CTP A – DL = CTP E – DL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
M M TX ( ic )
i i i
• Peak MAC Cell Capacity: Cap P – DL = CTP P – DL × TL DL – Max
M M M
Effective MAC Cell Capacity: Cap E – DL = Cap P – DL × 1 – BLER B DL
i i i
•
Mi
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
• Application Cell Capacity: Cap A – DL = Cap E – DL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Uplink:
TX i ( ic )
R UL ×η Mi
Mi B UL
• Peak MAC Channel Throughput: CTP P – UL = ---------------------------------
D Frame
In the above formula, the actual value of D Frame is used to calculate the channel throughput for coverage predictions,
while D Frame = 1 sec for Monte Carlo simulations.
Mi
• N Ant – TX : Number of MIMO transmission (uplink) antennas defined for the terminal used by the pixel, subscriber,
or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• N Ant – RX : Number of MIMO reception (uplink) antennas defined for the cell TXi(ic).
• Mobility ( M i ) : Mobility used for the calculations.
Mi
• Subchannel allocation mode used by the uplink permutation zone PZ UL assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or
mobile Mi as calculated in "Permutation Zone Selection" on page 654.
Mi
• B UL : Bearer assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi in the uplink as explained in "Traffic C/(I+N) and Bearer
Calculation (UL)" on page 677.
M
BLER B UL : Uplink block error rate read from the graphs available in the WiMAX equipment assigned to the cell
i
•
Mi
TXi(ic). BLER is determined for CINR UL .
Atoll also takes into account the SU-MIMO Gain Factor f SU – MIMO defined for the clutter class where the pixel,
subscriber, or mobile Mi is located.
Max
In case of SU-MIMO: η Mi = η Mi × ( 1 + fSU – MIMO ( G SU – MIMO – 1 ) )
B B
UL UL
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Max
In case of AMS: η Mi = η Mi × ( 1 + f SU – MIMO ( G SU – MIMO – 1 ) ) if CNR Preamble > T AMS or CINR Preamble > T AMS
B UL B UL
If the Max SU-MIMO Gain for the exact value of the C/(I+N) is not availabe in the table, it is interpolated from the gain
values available for the C/(I+N) just less than and just greater than the actual C/(I+N).
686
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX i ( ic )
R UL ×η Mi
Mi B UL TX ( ic )
i
CTP P – UL = --------------------------------- × G MU – MIMO
D Frame
M M M
Effective MAC Channel Throughput: CTP E – UL = CTP P – UL × 1 – BLER B UL
i i i
•
Mi
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
• Application Channel Throughput: CTP A – UL = CTP E – UL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Mi Mi TX i ( ic )
• Peak MAC Cell Capacity: Cap P – UL = CTP P – UL × TL UL – Max
M M M
Effective MAC Cell Capacity: Cap E – UL = Cap P – UL × 1 – BLER B UL
i i i
•
Mi
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
• Application Cell Capacity: Cap A – UL = Cap E – UL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Mi
Mi Mi N SC – UL
• Peak MAC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput: ABTP P – UL = CTP P – UL × -----------------
M
i
PZ
UL
N SC
M M M
Effective MAC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput: ABTP E – UL = ABTP P – UL × 1 – BLER B UL
i i i
•
Mi
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
• Application Allocated Bandwidth Throughput: ABTPA – UL = ABTP E – UL × ------------------------
- – TPOffset
100
Output
M
i
• CTP P – DL : Downlink peak MAC channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP E – DL : Downlink effective MAC channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP A – DL : Downlink application channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• Cap P – DL : Downlink peak MAC cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• Cap E – DL : Downlink effective MAC cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• Cap A – DL : Downlink application cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP P – UL : Uplink peak MAC channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP E – UL : Uplink effective MAC channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP A – UL : Uplink application channel throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• Cap P – UL : Uplink peak MAC cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
M
i
• Cap E – UL : Uplink effective MAC cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• Cap A – UL : Uplink application cell capacity at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• ABTP P – UL : Uplink peak MAC allocated bandwidth throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
Mi
• ABTP E – UL : Uplink effective MAC allocated bandwidth throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
687
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
M
i
• ABTP A – UL : Uplink application allocated bandwidth throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi.
TX i ( ic )
• TL DL – Max : Maximum downlink traffic load for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• TL UL – Max : Maximum uplink traffic load for the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic )
• N Users – Max : Maximum number of users defined for the cell TXi(ic).
Mi
• QoS : QoS class of the service (UGS, ErtPS, rtPS, nrtPS, or Best Effort) accessed by a mobile Mi.
Mi
• p : Priority of the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
Mi
• TPD Min – DL : Downlink minimum throughput demand for the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
Mi
• TPD Min – UL : Uplink minimum throughput demand for the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
M
i
• TPD Max – DL : Downlink maximum throughput demand for the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
Mi
• TPD Max – UL : Uplink maximum throughput demand for the service accessed by a mobile Mi.
M TX ( ic )
BLER BDL : Downlink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR Traffic graph available in the WiMAX equipment
i i
•
assigned to the terminal used by the mobile Mi.
M M
BLER BUL : Uplink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR UL graph available in the WiMAX equipment assigned
i i
•
to the cell TXi(ic).
M
i
• f TP – Scaling : Throughput scaling factor defined in the properties of the service used by the mobile Mi.
Mi
• TP Offset : Throughput offset defined in the properties of the service used by the mobile Mi.
Mi
• CTP P – DL : Downlink peak MAC channel throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 681.
Mi
• CTP P – UL : Uplink peak MAC channel throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 681.
Mi
• ABTP P – UL : Uplink peak MAC allocated bandwidth throughput at the mobile Mi as calculated in "Throughput
Calculation" on page 681.
QoS
• f Bias : Bias factor defined for the Biased (QoS Class) scheduling method.
Calculations
The following calculations are described for any cell TXi(ic) containing the users Mi for which it is the best server.
Mobile Selection:
TX i ( ic )
The scheduler selects N Users mobiles for the scheduling and RRM process. If the Monte Carlo user distribution has generated
TX ( ic )
i
a number of users which is less than N Users – Max , the scheduler keeps all the mobiles generated for the cell TXi(ic).
688
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
N Users = Min N Users – Max, N Users – Generated
i i i
TX ( ic )
Sel i
For a cell, mobiles M i ∈ N Users are selected for RRM by the scheduler.
Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi
Uplink: TPD Min – UL , Min TPD Max – UL, ABTP P – UL
Sel
Sel Mi Mi
Sel i
M Sel Min TPD Max – UL, ABTP P – UL
i
M TPD Min – UL i
M
Uplink: TPD Min – UL = ---------------------------------------------- , TPD Max – UL = -------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sel Sel
i M Mi
1 – BLER BUL 1 – BLER B UL
Sel
Sel Mi Mi
Mi TPD Min – UL + TP Offset
Uplink: TPD Min – UL = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-,
Sel
Mi Mi
1 – BLER BUL × f TP – Scaling
Sel
Mi Mi Mi
Sel Min TPD Max – UL, ABTP P – UL + TP Offset
Mi
TPD Max – UL = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sel
Mi Mi
1 – BLER BUL × f TP – Scaling
The Min() function selects the lower of the two values. This calculation is performed in order to limit the maximum uplink
throughput demand to the maximum throughput that a user can get in uplink using the allocated bandwidth (number of used
subchannels) calculated for it in "Traffic C/(I+N) and Bearer Calculation (UL)" on page 677.
Resource Allocation for Minimum Throughput Demands:
TX i ( ic )
Sel
1. For the QoS classes UGS, ErtPS, rtPS, and nrtPS, Atoll sorts the M i ∈ N Users in order of decreasing service priority,
Sel
Mi
p :
689
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
Where N < N Users , if there are some Best Effort users, or N = N Users if there are no Best Effort users selected.
Sel Sel
2. Starting with M i = 1 up to M i = N , Atoll allocates the downlink and uplink resources required to satisfy each
user’s minimum throughput demands in downlink and uplink as follows:
Sel Sel
Sel M Sel M
i i
Mi TPD Min – DL Mi TPD Min – UL
R Min – DL Sel
- and R Min
= -------------------------- – UL = --------------------------
Sel
-
M M
i i
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
690
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
Sel Sel
M TX ( ic ) M TX ( ic )
i i i i
6. If R Min – DL < TL DL – Max or R Min – UL < TL UL – Max , and all the minimum throughput resources demanded by
Sel Sel
M M
i i
the mobiles have been allocated, Atoll goes to the next step for allocating resources to satisfy the maximum
throughput demands.
The remaining cell resources available for the next step are:
Sel
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi
Downlink: R Rem – DL = TL DL – Max – R Min – DL
Sel
Mi
Sel
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi
Uplink: R Rem – UL = TL UL – Max – R Min – UL
Sel
M
i
For the remaining throughput demands of the mobiles belonging to the QoS classes ErtPS, rtPS, nrtPS, and Best Effort, the
following resource allocation methods are available:
1. Proportional Fair:
The goal of this scheduling method is to distribute resources among users fairly in such a way that, on the average,
each user gets the highest possible throughput that it can get under the radio conditions at its location.
Sel
Let the total number of users belonging to the QoS classes ErtPS, rtPS, nrtPS, and Best Effort, be N ∈ M i .
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
a. Each user’s channel throughput is increased by the multi-user diversity gain G MUG – DL or G MUG – UL read from the
Sel
scheduler properties for the Mobility ( M i ) assigned to mobile M i and the number of connected users, DL or
UL, in the cell TXi(ic) in the iteration k-1.
Sel Sel Sel Sel
M M TX ( ic ) M M TX ( ic )
i i i i i i
CTP P – DL = CTP P – DL × G MUG – DL and CTP P – UL = CTP P – UL × G MUG – UL
Without MUG Without MUG
Sel Sel
TX i ( ic ) Mi TX i ( ic ) Mi
Max Max
G MUG – DL = 1 if CINR Traffic ≥ CINR MUG and G MUG – UL = 1 if CINR UL ≥ CINR MUG .
If the multi-user diversity gain for the exact value of the number of connected users is not availabe in the graph,
it is interpolated from the gain values available for the numbers of users just less than and just greater than the
actual number of users.
b. Atoll divides the remaining resources in the cell into equal parts for each user:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
R Rem – DL R Rem – UL
--------------------- and --------------------
-
N N
c. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel Sel
Sel M Sel M
i i
Mi TPD Rem – DL Mi TPD Rem – UL
RD Rem – DL Sel
- and RD Rem
= --------------------------- – UL = ---------------------------
Sel
-
Mi Mi
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
Remaining resource demands of a user are given by the ratio between its remaining throughput demands and the
peak channel throughputs at the user’s location.
691
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
d. The resources allocated to each user by the Proportional Fair scheduling method for satisfying its maximum
throughput demands are:
Each user gets either the resources it needs to achieve its maximum throughput demands or an equal share from
the remaining resources of the cell, whichever is smaller.
e. Atoll stops the resource allocation in downlink or uplink,
Sel
M TX ( ic )
i i
• When/If in downlink R Max – DL = R Rem – DL , i.e., the resources available in downlink have been used up
Sel
Mi
Sel Sel
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) M M
i i i i
R Rem – UL = TL UL – Max – R Min – UL – R Max – UL
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
h. Atoll repeats the all the above steps for the users whose maximum throughput demands have not been satisfied
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
until either R Rem – DL = 0 and R Rem – UL = 0 , or all the maximum throughput demands are satisfied.
2. Proportional Demand:
The goal of this scheduling method is to allocate resources to users weighted according to their remaining throughput
demands. Therefore, the user throughputs for users with high throughput demands will be higher than those with low
throughput demands. In other words, this scheduler distributes channel throughput between users proportionally to
their demands.
a. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel Sel
Sel Mi Sel Mi
Mi TPD Rem – DL Mi TPD Rem – UL
RD Rem – DL = ---------------------------
Sel
- and RD Rem – UL = ---------------------------
Sel
-
Mi Mi
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
Remaining resource demands of a user are given by the ratio between its remaining throughput demands and the
peak channel throughputs at the user’s location.
b. Atoll calculates the amount effective remaining resources for the cell of each user to distribute among the users
as follows:
Sel Sel
TX i ( ic ) TXi ( ic ) Mi TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi
R Eff – Rem – DL = Min R Rem – DL,
RD Rem – DL and R Eff – Rem – UL = Min R Rem – UL,
RD Rem – UL
Sel
Mi Sel
Mi
c. The resources allocated to each user by the Proportional Demand scheduling method for satisfying its maximum
throughput demands are:
692
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
Sel Sel
Sel M Sel M
i i
M TX ( ic ) RD Rem – DL M TX ( ic ) RD Rem – UL
i i i i
R Max – DL = R Eff – Rem – DL × ----------------------------------
Sel
- and R Max – UL = R Eff – Rem – UL × ----------------------------------
Sel
-
M M
RDRem – DL RDRem – UL
i i
Sel Sel
M M
i i
ErtPS 1
rtPS 2
nrtPS 3
Best Effort 4
The resources available for the users of each QoS class from among the remaining resources is calculated as follows:
r r
1 QoS 1 QoS
N QoS × --- N QoS × ---
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) β TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) β
R QoS – DL = R Rem – DL × ------------------------------------------------------- and R QoS – UL = R Rem – UL × -------------------------------------------------------
r r
1 QoS 1 QoS
N QoS × --- N QoS × ---
β β
All QoS All QoS
Resource Allocation:
Once the remaining resources available for the users of each QoS class have been determined, the allocation of
resources within each QoS class is performed as for the proportional fair scheduler.
Sel
Let the number of users belonging to a QoS class N QoS ∈ M i .
a. Atoll divides the remaining resources of the QoS class into equal parts for each user:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
R QoS – DL R QoS – UL
-------------------- and -------------------
-
N QoS N QoS
b. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel Sel
Sel Mi Sel Mi
Mi TPD Rem – DL TPD Rem – UL
Mi
RD Rem – DL = ---------------------------
Sel
- and RD Rem – UL = ---------------------------
Sel
-
Mi Mi
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
Remaining resource demands of a user are given by the ratio between its remaining throughput demands and the
peak channel throughputs at the user’s location.
c. The resources allocated to each user by the Biased scheduling method for satisfying its maximum throughput
demands are:
693
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
Each user gets either the resources it needs to achieve its maximum throughput demands or an equal share from
the remaining resources of the QoS class, whichever is smaller.
d. Atoll stops the resource allocation for a QoS class in downlink or uplink,
Sel
M TX ( ic )
i i
• When/If in downlink R Max – DL = R QoS – DL , i.e., the resources available in downlink for the QoS class have
Sel
Mi
been used up for satisfying the maximum throughput demands of the mobiles.
Sel
Mi TX i ( ic )
• When/If in uplink R Max – UL = R QoS – UL , i.e., the resources available in uplink for the QoS class have been
Sel
Mi
Sel Sel
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) M M
i i i i
R QoS – UL = TL UL – Max – R Min – UL – R Max – UL
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
g. Atoll repeats the all the above steps for the users of the QoS class whose maximum throughput demands have not
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
been satisfied until either R QoS – DL = 0 and R QoS – UL = 0 , or all the maximum throughput demands are
satisfied.
4. Max Aggregate Throughput:
The goal of this scheduling method is to achieve the maximum aggregate throughput for the cells. This is done by
allocating as much resources as needed to mobiles with high C/(I+N) conditions. As mobiles with high C/(I+N) can get
higher bearers, and therefore require less amount of resources, more mobiles can therefore be allocated resources
in the same frame, and the end-throughput for each cell will be the highest compared to other types of schedulers.
Sel TX i ( ic )
a. Atoll sorts the M i ∈ N Users in order of decreasing downlink or uplink traffic C/(I+N), depending on whether the
allocation is being performed for the downlink or for the uplink.
b. Starting with the mobile with the highest rank, Atoll allocates the downlink and uplink resources required to
satisfy each user’s remaining throughput demands in downlink and uplink as follows:
Sel Sel
Sel M Sel M
i i
Mi TPD Rem – DL Mi TPD Rem – UL
R Max – DL Sel
- and R Max
= --------------------------- – UL = ---------------------------
Sel
-
M M
i i
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
694
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
Sel
Let the total number of users belonging to the QoS classes ErtPS, rtPS, nrtPS, and Best Effort, be N ∈ M i .
a. Atoll divides the remaining resources in the cell into equal parts for each user:
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i
R Rem – DL R Rem – UL
--------------------- and --------------------
-
N N
b. Atoll converts the remaining throughput demands of all the users to their respective remaining resource
demands:
Sel Sel
Sel M Sel M
i i
Mi TPD Rem – DL Mi TPD Rem – UL
RD Rem – DL Sel
- and RD Rem
= --------------------------- – UL = ---------------------------
Sel
-
M M
i i
CTP P – DL CTP P – UL
Remaining resource demands of a user are given by the ratio between its remaining throughput demands and the
peak channel throughputs at the user’s location.
c. The resources allocated to each user by the Round Robin scheduling method for satisfying its maximum
throughput demands are:
Each user gets either the resources it needs to achieve its maximum throughput demands or an equal share from
the remaining resources of the cell, whichever is smaller.
d. Atoll stops the resource allocation in downlink or uplink,
Sel
Mi TX i ( ic )
• When/If in downlink R Max – DL = R Rem – DL , i.e., the resources available in downlink have been used up
Sel
Mi
Sel Sel
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) Mi Mi
R Rem – UL = TL UL – Max – R Min – UL – R Max – UL
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
g. Atoll repeats the all the above steps for the users whose maximum throughput demands have not been satisfied
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
until either R Rem – DL = 0 and R Rem – UL = 0 , or all the maximum throughput demands are satisfied.
695
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
MU-MIMO can be used if the permutation zone assigned to the pixel, subscriber, or mobile Mi supports MU-MIMO,
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i i
CNR Preamble > T MU – MIMO , and N Ant – RX ≥ 2 .
MU – MIMO
The virtual resources made available by the mobile M i are given by:
MU – MIMO
Mi TX i ( ic )
Saturation occurs when RC UL = TL UL – Max .
M1 10 0 10 10
M2 5 5 0 5
M3 20 5 15 15
M4 40 15 25 25
… … … … …
Output
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
Sel
• TL DL = R DL : Downlink traffic load or the amount of downlink resources allocated to the mobile M i .
Sel Sel
Mi Mi
Sel
• TL UL = R UL : Uplink traffic load or the amount of uplink resources allocated to the mobile M i .
696
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
Input
Sel
M
i Sel
• R DL : Amount of downlink resources allocated to the mobile M i as calculated in "Scheduling and Radio Resource
Allocation" on page 688.
Sel
M
i Sel
• R UL : Amount of uplink resources allocated to the mobile M i as calculated in "Scheduling and Radio Resource
Allocation" on page 688.
Sel
Mi
Sel
• CTP P – DL : Downlink peak MAC channel throughput at the mobile M i as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 681.
Sel
Mi
Sel
• CTP P – UL : Uplink peak MAC channel throughput at the mobile M i as calculated in "Throughput Calculation" on
page 681.
Sel
Mi TX i ( ic )
• BLER B DL : Downlink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR Traffic graph available in the WiMAX equipment
Sel
assigned to the terminal used by the mobile M i .
Sel
Mi Mi
• BLER B UL : Uplink block error rate read from the BLER vs. CINR UL graph available in the WiMAX equipment
assigned to the cell TXi(ic).
Sel
Mi
Sel
• f TP – Scaling : Throughput scaling factor defined in the properties of the service used by the mobile M i .
Sel
Mi
Sel
• TP Offset : Throughput offset defined in the properties of the service used by the mobile M i .
Calculations
Downlink:
Sel Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi
• Peak MAC User Throughput: UTP P – DL = R DL × CTP P – DL
Sel Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi
• Effective MAC User Throughput: UTP E – DL = UTP P – DL × 1 – BLER B DL
Sel
Sel Sel Mi Sel
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
• Application User Throughput: UTP A – DL = UTP E – DL × ------------------------
- – TPOffset
100
Uplink:
Sel Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi
• Peak MAC User Throughput: UTP P – UL = R UL × CTP P – UL
Sel Sel Sel
Mi Mi Mi
• Effective MAC User Throughput: UTP E – UL = UTP P – UL × 1 – BLER B UL
Sel
Sel Sel Mi Sel
Mi Mi f TP – Scaling Mi
• Application User Throughput: UTP A – UL = UTP E – UL × ------------------------
- – TP Offset
100
Output
Sel
Mi Sel
• UTP P – DL : Downlink peak MAC user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
Sel
Mi
Sel
• UTP E – DL : Downlink effective MAC user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
Sel
Mi
Sel
• UTP A – DL : Downlink application user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
Sel
Mi
Sel
• UTP P – UL : Uplink peak MAC user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
697
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
Sel
M
i Sel
• UTP E – UL : Uplink effective MAC user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
Sel
M
i Sel
• UTP A – UL : Uplink application user throughput at the pixel, subscriber, or mobile M i .
If no focus zone exists in the ATL document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
We assume a reference cell TXi(ic) and a candidate neighbour cell TXj(jc). When automatic planning starts, Atoll checks the
following conditions:
1. The distance between both cells must be less than the user-definable maximum inter-site distance. If the distance
between the reference cell and the candidate neighbour is greater than this value, then the candidate neighbour is
discarded.
Atoll calculates the effective distance between the reference cell and its candidate neighbour from the real distance
between them and the azimuths of their antennas:
Where x = 0.3% so that the maximum variation in D does not to exceed 1%. D is stated in m.
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other have a smaller effective distance than the actual distance.
Candidate neighbours are ranked in the order of increasing effective distance from the reference cell.
2. The calculation options,
698
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
• Force Co-site Cells as Neighbours: If selected, Atoll adds all the cells located on the same site as the reference cell
to the candidate neighbour list. The weight of this constraint can be defined. It is used to calculate the rank of each
neighbour, and its importance.
• Force Adjacent Cells as Neighbours: If selected, Atoll adds all the cells geographically adjacent to the reference
cell to the candidate neighbour list. The weight of this constraint can be defined. It is used to calculate the rank of
each neighbour, and its importance.
Determination of Adjacent Cells: Geographically adjacent cells are determined on the basis of their best server
coverage areas. A candidate neighbour cell TXi(ic) is considered adjacent to the reference cell TXi(ic) if there exists
at least one pixel of TXj(jc)’s best server coverage area where TXi(ic) is the second best server. The ranking of
adjacent neighbour cells increases with the number of such pixels. Adjacent cells are sorted in the order of
decreasing rank.
• Force Neighbour Symmetry: If selected, Atoll adds the reference cell to the candidate neighbour list of the its
candidate neighbour.
A symmetric neighbour relation is allowed only if the neighbour list of the reference cell is not already full. If TXj(jc)
is a neighbour of TXi(ic) but TXi(ic) is not a neighbour of TXj(jc), there can be two possibilities:
i. The neighbour list of TXj(jc) is not full, Atoll will add TXi(ic) to the end of the list.
ii. The neighbour list of TXj(jc) is full, Atoll will not be able to add TXi(ic) to the list, so it will also remove TXj(jc)
from the neighbour list of TXi(ic).
• Force Exceptional Pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbour relations. Exceptional pairs are
pairs of cells which will always or never be neighbours of each other.
If you select "Force exceptional pairs" and "Force symmetry", Atoll considers the constraints between exceptional
pairs in both directions so as to respect symmetry condition. On the other hand, if neighbourhood relationship is
forced in one direction and forbidden in the other, symmetry cannot be respected. In this case, Atoll displays a
warning in the Event viewer.
• Delete Existing Neighbours: If selected, Atoll deletes all the current neighbours and carries out a new neighbour
allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept in the list.
3. The coverage areas of TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) must have an overlap ( S TX ( ic ) ∩ S TX ( jc ) ).
i j
• Here S TX ( ic ) is the surface area covered by the cell TXi(ic) that comprises all the pixels where:
i
• The received preamble signal level is greater than or equal to the preamble signal level threshold. The received
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
preamble signal level ( C Preamble ) and the preamble signal level threshold are calculated from CNR Preamble
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
and T Preamble , respectively, by adding the value of the noise ( n Preamble ) to them.
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i
• S TX ( ic ) is the surface area covered by TXi(ic) within C Preamble + HO Start and C Preamble + HO End . HO Start is
i
the margin with respect to the best preamble signal level at which the handover starts, and HO End is the
margin with respect to the best preamble signal level at which the handover ends.
• S TX ( jc ) is the coverage area where the candidate cell TXj(jc) is the best server.
j
699
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic )
i
• If a global value of the preamble C/N threshold ( T Preamble ) is set in the coverage
conditions dialogue, for each cell, Atoll uses the higher of the two values, i.e., global
value and the value defined for that cell.
• For calculating the overlapping coverage areas, Atoll uses the service with the lowest
body loss, the terminal that has the highest difference between gain and losses, and
the shadowing margin calculated using the defined cell edge coverage probability, if
the option is selected. The service and terminal are selected such that the selection
gives the largest possible coverage areas for the cells.
•
S TX ( ic ) ∩ S TX ( jc )
i j
- × 100 ),
When the above conditions are met, Atoll calculates the percentage of the coverage area overlap ( --------------------------------------
S TX ( ic )
i
S TX ( ic ) ∩ S TX ( jc )
i j
TXj(jc) is considered a neighbour of TXi(ic) if --------------------------------------- × 100 ≥ % Min Coverage Area .
S TX ( ic )
i
Next, Atoll calculates the importance of the automatically allocated neighbours. Atoll sorts the neighbours by decreasing
importance in order to keep the ones with high importance. If the maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to each
cell is exceeded, Atoll keeps the ones with high importance.
The neighbour importance depends on the distance from the reference transmitter and on the neighbourhood cause (cf. table
below); this value varies between 0 and 100%.
Neighbourhood cause When Importance value
Only if the Delete Existing Neighbours option is not selected
Existing neighbour Existing importance
and in case of a new allocation
Exceptional pair Only if the Force Exceptional Pairs option is selected 100 %
Only if the Force Co-site Cells as Neighbours option is
Co-site cell Importance Function (IF)
selected
Only if the Force Adjacent Cells as Neighbours option is
Adjacent cell Importance Function (IF)
selected
Neighbourhood relationship that
Only if the % Min Covered Area is exceeded Importance Function (IF)
fulfils coverage conditions
Symmetric neighbourhood
Only if the Force Neighbour Symmetry option is selected Importance Function (IF)
relationship
The importance is evaluated using an Importance Function (IF), which takes into account the following factors:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
700
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
d
( Di ) = 1 – -----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance ( D in m) weighted by the
azimuths of antennas.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours, adjacent neighbours, and neighbours allocated based on coverage
overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
• The default value of Min(O) = 1% ensures that neighbours selected for symmetry will
have an importance greater than 0%. With a value of Min(O) = 0%, neighbours
selected for symmetry will have an importance field greater than 0% only if there is
some coverage overlapping.If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance
function factors overlap, the neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a
mix of the neighbourhood causes.
• By adding an option in the atoll.ini file, the neighbour planning and importance
calculation can be based on the distance criterion only. For more information, see the
Administrator Manual.
In the results, Atoll lists only the cells for which it finds new neighbours. Cells whose channels have the same start frequency,
the same channel width, and the same total number of subcarriers are listed as intra-carrier neighbours. Otherwise,
neighbour cells are listed as inter-carrier neighbours.
701
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
If no focus zone exists in the ATL document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
We assume a reference cell A and a candidate neighbour B. When automatic planning starts, Atoll checks following
conditions:
1. The distance between reference cell and the candidate neighbour must be less than the user-definable maximum
inter-site distance. If the distance is greater than this value, the candidate neighbour is discarded.
Atoll calculates the effective distance between the reference cell and its candidate neighbour from the real distance
between them and the azimuths of their antennas:
Where x = 0.3% so that the maximum variation in D does not to exceed 1%. D is stated in m.
The formula above implies that two cells facing each other have a smaller effective distance than the actual distance.
Candidate neighbours are ranked in the order of increasing effective distance from the reference cell.
2. The calculation options:
• CDMA Carriers: This option is available when an WiMAX network is being co-planned with a UMTS, CDMA, or TD-
SCDMA network. This option enables you to select the CDMA carrier(s) that you want Atoll to consider as potential
neighbours of WiMAX cells. You may choose one or more carriers. Atoll will allocate only the cells using the
selected carriers as neighbours.
• Force co-site cells as neighbours: If selected, Atoll adds all the transmitters/cells located on the same site as the
reference cell in its candidate neighbour list. The weight of this constraint can be defined. It is used to calculate
the rank of each neighbour and its importance.
• Force exceptional pairs: This option enables you to force/forbid some neighbour relations. Exceptional pairs are
pairs of cells which will always or never be neighbours of each other.
• Delete existing neighbours: If selected, Atoll deletes all the current neighbours and carries out a new neighbour
allocation. If not selected, the existing neighbours are kept in the list.
3. Neighbour relation criterion:
• Allocation based on distance:
The allocation algorithm is based on the effective distance between the reference cell and its candidate
neighbour.
• Algorithm based on coverage overlapping:
The coverage areas of the reference cell A and the candidate neighbour B must overlap ( S A ∩ S B ).
• 1st case: SA is the area where the cell A is the best serving cell, with a 0dB margin.
This means that the preamble signal received from A is greater than the minimum required (calculated from
the preamble C/N threshold), and is the highest one. .
702
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
• 2nd case: The margin is other than 0dB. SA is the area where:
The preamble signal level received from A exceeds the minimum required (calculated from the preamble C/N
threshold) and is within a margin from the highest signal level.
Two cases may exist for SB:
• 1st case: SB is the area where the candidate neighbour is the best server. In this case, the margin must be set
to 0dB.
The signal level received from B exceeds the minimum required, and is the highest one.
• 2nd case: The margin is other than 0dB. SB is the area where:
The signal level received from B exceeds the minimum required and is within a margin from the best signal
level.
SA ∩ SB
Atoll calculates the percentage of the coverage area overlap ( ------------------ × 100 ) and compares this value with the %
SA
SA ∩ SB
Min Covered Area. B is considered a neighbour of A if ------------------ × 100 ≥ % Min Covered Area .
SA
Candidate neighbours are ranked in the order of decreasing coverage area overlap percentages.
Next, Atoll calculates the importance of the automatically allocated neighbours. Atoll sorts the neighbours by decreasing
importance in order to keep the ones with high importance. If the maximum number of neighbours to be allocated to each
cell is exceeded, Atoll keeps the ones with high importance.
The importance (%) of neighbours depends on the distance and on the reason of allocation:
• For allocation based on distance:
d is the effective distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and d max is the maximum inter-site
distance.
• For allocation based on coverage overlapping:
The importance is evaluated using an Importance Function (IF), which takes into account the following factors:
• The distance factor (Di) denoting the distance between the possible neighbour transmitter and the reference
transmitter.
d
( Di ) = 1 – -----------
d max
d is the effective distance (in m). It corresponds to the real inter-transmitter distance weighted by the azimuths of
antennas.
d max is the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour.
703
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
Where
Delta(X)=Max(X)-Min(X)
• Set Min(Di) and Max(Di) to 0% if you do not want to take into account the distance
factor in the importance calculation.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors do not overlap,
the neighbours will be ranked by neighbour cause. With the default values for
minimum and maximum importance fields, neighbours will be ranked in this order:
co-site neighbours and neighbours allocated based on coverage overlapping.
• If the Min and Max value ranges of the importance function factors overlap, the
neighbours may be ranked differently. There can be a mix of the neighbourhood
causes.
In the results, Atoll displays only the cells for which it finds new neighbours.
If no focus zone exists in the ATL document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
The above separation constraint is studied between each TBA cell and its related cells. Atoll calculates the cost between each
individual TBA and related cell, and then the overall cost for the TBA cell.
704
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
• Cells that are listed in the interference matrix of the TBA cell,
Assigned weight ω IM = 0.3
• Cells within the cell’s (or the default) minimum reuse distance, if the check box "Take Min Reuse Distance into
Account" is selected,
Assigned weight ω Dis tan ce = 0.2
Λ TXi ( ic ) – TXj ( jc ) – Λ TXi ( ic ) – TXj ( jc )
2
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) --------------------------------------------------------------------------
Req if Λ < Λ Req
VL Sep = TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
Λ Req
0 Otherwise
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
Where Λ Req is the required separation, and Λ is the actual separation between channels used by
TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) calculated as follows:
TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic )
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) F Start – F Start
Λ = ------------------------------------
-
TX ( ic )
i
W Channel
TX ( jc )
j
Where F Start is the start frequency of the channel used by TXj(jc) calculated as follows:
TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( jc ) TX ( jc )
j j j j
F Start = F Start – FB + N Channel × W Channel
TX ( ic )
i
F Start is the start frequency of the channel used by TXi(ic) calculated as follows:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic )
F Start = F Start – FB + N Channel × W Channel
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
Where F Start – FB and F Start – FB are the start frequencies of the frequency bands assigned to the cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc)
respectively. F Start – FB can be the start frequency of a TDD frequency band ( F Start – FB – TDD ), or the downlink start frequency
TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
i j
of an FDD frequency band ( F Start – FB – FDD – DL ). N Channel and N Channel are the channel numbers assigned to cells TXi(ic) and
TXj(jc) respectively. For FDD networks, Atoll considers that the same channel number is assigned to a cell in the downlink and
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
uplink, i.e., the channel number you assign to a cell is considered for uplink and downlink both. And, W Channel and W Channel
are the bandwidths of the channels assigned to cells TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) respectively.
The cost of the relation between the TBA cell and its related cell is calculated next:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
$ = VL Sep × ω Neighbour × ι Neighbour + ω Dis tan ce × ι Dis tan ce +ω ×ι i
IM IM
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
Where ι Neighbour is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related neighbour cell. ι Neighbour
is calculated during automatic neighbour planning by Atoll as explained in "Automatic Neighbour Planning" on page 698. For
manual neighbour planning, this value is equal to 1.
705
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j i j
ι IM is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related interfering cell. ι IM is
calculated during interference matrix calculation as explained in "Interference Matrix Calculation" on page 712.
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
ι Dis tan ce is the importance of the relationship between the TBA and its related cell with respect to the distance between
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
them. ι Dis tan ce is calculated as explained in "Distance Importance Calculation" on page 712.
Atoll calculates the quality reduction factor for the TBA cell and its related cell from the cost calculated above as follows:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
QRF = 1–$
The quality reduction factor is a measure of the cost of an individual relation.
The total cost of the current frequency plan for any TBA cell is given as follows, considering all the cells with which the TBA
cell has relations:
TX i ( ic ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
$ Total = 1 – ∏ QRF
TX j ( jc )
And, the total cost of the current frequency plan for the entire network is simply the sum of the total TBA cell costs calculated
above, i.e.,
TX i ( ic )
$ Total = $ Total
TX ( ic )
i
Where PreambleCarrierSetn gives the subcarriers used by the preamble, n is the number of the preamble carrier set indexed
0, 1, or 2, k is a running index from 0 to 567 for FFT 2048, from 0 to 283 for FFT 1024, from 0 to 142 for FFT 512, and from 0
to 35 for FFT 128.
In a WiMAX network, each base station transmits a different PN sequence, out of the 114 available, on the preamble carrier
set. A mobile trying to connect to the network scans all the preamble subcarriers, listens to all the preambles (i.e., PN
sequences) from all the base stations it can receive, and compares the PN sequences it is receiving with the 114 stored in its
memory in order to detect the preamble index from the PN sequence.
It selects the base station as its server whose preamble it receives with either the highest signal level or the highest C/(I+N).
Once the best server is known, its PN sequence is used to identify its transmission. The PN sequence of the best server gives
the preamble index, which in turn gives the segment number, and the IDCell (DL PermBase of the first DL PUSC zone, referred
to as Cell PermBase in Atoll). Therefore, the mobile knows which subcarriers to listen to for the FCH, DCD, UCD, DL-MAP, and
UL-MAP.
706
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
As can be understood from the above description, if all the cells in the network transmit the same preamble index, the
network will have 100% interference on downlink preambles, and it will be impossible for a mobile to identify different cells.
Cell search and selection will be impossible. Therefore, it is important to intelligently plan preamble indexes to cells so as to
reduce preamble interference, and allow easy recognition of cells by mobiles.
The following describes the AFP’s automatic planning method for preamble indexes in a WiMAX network, which takes into
account interference matrices, neighbour relations, distance between transmitters, and the frequency plan of the network.
The AFP takes into account the cells of all the TBC transmitters. The cells to be allocated will be called TBA cells. They must
fulfil the following conditions:
• They are active,
• Their preamble index status or segment is not set to locked,
• They satisfy the filter criteria applied to the Transmitters folder,
• They are located inside the focus zone.
If no focus zone exists in the ATL document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
The above constraints are studied between each TBA cell and its related cells. Atoll calculates the cost between each
individual TBA and related cell, and then the overall cost for the TBA cell.
Related cells of a TBA cell are:
• Its neighbours, if the check box "Take Neighbours into Account" is selected,
Assigned weight ω Neighbour = 0.35
Neighbours of a TBA cell are also related to each other through the TBA cell. This relation is also taken into account,
You can choose to not take into account the inter-neighbour preamble index collision by adding an option in the
Atoll.ini file (see the Administrator Manual). If inter-neighbour collision is not taken into account, the weight assigned
to the neighbour relation alone is ω Neighbour = 0.5 and that of the inter-neighbour collision is of course
ω Inter – Neighbour = 0 .
By adding an option in the Atoll.ini file (see the Administrator Manual), second-order neighbours can also be taken
into account. In this case, the assigned weights are: ω Neighbour = 0.25 , ω 2nd – Neighbour = 0.15 , and
ω Inter – Neighbour = 0.10 .
• Cells that are listed in the interference matrix of the TBA cell,
Assigned weight ω IM = 0.3
• Cells within the cell’s (or the default) minimum reuse distance, if the check box "Take Min Reuse Distance into
Account" is selected,
Assigned weight ω Dis tan ce = 0.2
707
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
If TX i ( ic ) and TX j ( jc ) are co-transmitter cells, and the option Allocate Same Segment to Co-transmitter Cells has been
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
selected, and N Seg ≠ N Seg , then VL = 1 . Otherwise,
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
PI Seg PB
VL = rO × ( ω PI × p Coll + ω Seg × p Coll + ωPB × p Penalty )
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
Where r O is the total channel overlap ratio between the TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co- and Adjacent
Channel Overlaps Calculation" on page 643, ω PI , ω Seg , and ω PB are the weights assigned to the preamble index, segment
number, and cell permbase constraints.
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
p Coll is the preamble index collision probability given by p Coll = 1 if PI = PI
PI PI
.
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
0 if PI ≠ PI
Seg
p Coll is the segment number collision probability. If TX i ( ic ) and TX j ( jc ) are co-transmitter cells, and the option Allocate
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
Seg Seg 0 if N Seg = N Seg
Same Segment to Co-transmitter Cells has been selected, p Coll is given by p Coll = . Otherwise,
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
1 if N Seg ≠ N Seg
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
Seg 1 if N Seg = N Seg
p Coll = .
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
0 if N Seg ≠ N Seg
TX ( ic ) TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
1 if PB i ≠ PB j AND Site
i
= Site
j
PB PB
p Penalty is the cell permbase penalty given by p Penalty = TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc ) if the
0.001 if PB ≠ PB AND Site ≠ Site
0 Otherwise
PB
cell permbase planning strategy is set to "Same per site", and by p Penalty = 0 if the cell permbase planning strategy is set to
"Free". The cell permbase penalty models the cell permbase constraint.
Next, Atoll calculates the importance of the relation between the TBA cell and its related cell.
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
i j
ι Total = ω Neighbour × ι Neighbour + ω Inter – Neighbour × ι Inter – Neighbour + ω 2nd – Neighbour × ι 2nd – Neighbour +
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
ω IM × ι IM + ω Dis tan ce × ι Dis tan ce
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
Where ι Neighbour is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related neighbour cell. ι Neighbour
is calculated during automatic neighbour planning by Atoll as explained in "Automatic Neighbour Planning" on page 698. For
manual neighbour planning, this value is equal to 1.
ι Inter – Neighbour is calculated from the neighbour relationship importance values calculated during automatic neighbour
planning. If two neighbours of the TBA cell have the same preamble index assigned, the importance of the inter-neighbour
preamble index collision is the average of their neighbour importance values with the TBA cell. If more than one pair of
neighbours of the TBA cell has the same preamble index assigned, then the importance is the highest value among all the
averages:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j1 ( j1c ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j2 ( j2c )
ι Neighbour + ι Neighbour
ι Inter – Neighbour = Max ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
All Neighbour Pairs 2
with PI Collisions
708
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
Where TX j1 ( j1c ) and TX j2 ( j2c ) are two neighbours of the TBA cell TX i ( ic ) that have the same preamble index assigned.
ι 2nd – Neighbour is calculated from the neighbour relationship importance values calculated during automatic neighbour
planning. If two second-order neighbours have the same preamble index assigned, the importance of the preamble index
collision is the multiple of the neighbour importance values. If more than one pair of second-order neighbours has the same
preamble index assigned, then the importance is the highest value among all the multiples:
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) – TX k ( kc )
ι 2nd – Neighbour = Max ι i j
× ι Neighbour
All Neighbour Pairs
Neighbour
with PI Collisions
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
ι IM is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related interfering cell. ι IM is
calculated during interference matrix calculation as explained in "Interference Matrix Calculation" on page 712.
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
ι Dis tan ce is the importance of the relationship between the TBA and its related cell with respect to the distance between
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
them. ι Dis tan ce is calculated as explained in "Distance Importance Calculation" on page 712.
From the constraint violation level and the total importance of the relation between the TBA and its related cell, Atoll
calculates the quality reduction factor for the pair as follows:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
QRF = 1 – VL × ι Total
And, the total cost of the current preamble index plan for the entire network is simply the sum of the total TBA cell costs
calculated above, i.e.,
TX i ( ic )
$ Total = $ Total
TX ( ic )
i
709
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
The AFP takes into account the cells of all the TBC transmitters. The cells to be allocated will be called TBA cells. They must
fulfil the following conditions:
• They are active,
• Their zone permbase status is not set to locked,
• They satisfy the filter criteria applied to the Transmitters folder,
• They are located inside the focus zone.
• In the following description, ZPB is used for the downlink zone permbases ( ZPBDL )
and uplink zone permbases ( ZPBUL ) without distinction.
• If no focus zone exists in the ATL document, Atoll takes into account the computation
zone.
The above constraint is studied between each TBA cell and its related cells. Atoll calculates the cost between each individual
TBA and related cell, and then the overall cost for the TBA cell.
Related cells of a TBA cell are:
• Its neighbours, if the check box "Take Neighbours into Account" is selected,
Assigned weight ω Neighbour = 0.35
Neighbours of a TBA cell are also related to each other through the TBA cell. This relation is also taken into account,
You can choose to not take into account the inter-neighbour collision by adding an option in the Atoll.ini file (see the
Administrator Manual). If inter-neighbour collision is not taken into account, the weight assigned to the neighbour
relation alone is ω Neighbour = 0.5 and that of the inter-neighbour collision is of course ω Inter – Neighbour = 0 .
By adding an option in the Atoll.ini file (see the Administrator Manual), second-order neighbours can also be taken
into account. In this case, the assigned weights are: ω Neighbour = 0.25 , ω 2nd – Neighbour = 0.15 , and
ω Inter – Neighbour = 0.10 .
• Cells that are listed in the interference matrix of the TBA cell,
Assigned weight ω IM = 0.3
• Cells within the cell’s (or the default) minimum reuse distance, if the check box "Take Min Reuse Distance into
Account" is selected,
Assigned weight ω Dis tan ce = 0.2
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
Where r O is the total channel overlap ratio between the TXi(ic) and TXj(jc) as calculated in "Co- and Adjacent
Channel Overlaps Calculation" on page 643, and ω ZPB is the weight assigned to the zone permbase constraint.
710
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
i j
p Coll is the zone permbase collision probability given by p Coll = 1 if ZPB = ZPB
ZPB ZPB
.
TX ( ic ) TX ( jc )
i j
0 if ZPB ≠ ZPB
Next, Atoll calculates the importance of the relation between the TBA cell and its related cell.
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
i j
ι Total = ω Neighbour × ι Neighbour + ω Inter – Neighbour × ι Inter – Neighbour + ω 2nd – Neighbour × ι 2nd – Neighbour +
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
ω IM × ι IM + ω Dis tan ce × ι Dis tan ce
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
Where ι Neighbour is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related neighbour cell. ι Neighbour
is calculated during automatic neighbour planning by Atoll as explained in "Automatic Neighbour Planning" on page 698. For
manual neighbour planning, this value is equal to 1.
ι Inter – Neighbour is calculated from the neighbour relationship importance values calculated during automatic neighbour
planning. If two neighbours of the TBA cell have the same zone permbase assigned, the importance of the inter-neighbour
zone permbase collision is the average of their neighbour importance values with the TBA cell. If more than one pair of
neighbours of the TBA cell has the same zone permbase assigned, then the importance is the highest value among all the
averages:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j1 ( j1c ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j2 ( j2c )
ι Neighbour + ι Neighbour
ι Inter – Neighbour = Max ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
All Neighbour Pairs 2
with ZPB Collisions
Where TX j1 ( j1c ) and TX j2 ( j2c ) are two neighbours of the TBA cell TX i ( ic ) that have the same zone permbase assigned.
ι 2nd – Neighbour is calculated from the neighbour relationship importance values calculated during automatic neighbour
planning. If two second-order neighbours have the same zone permbase assigned, the importance of the zone permbase
collision is the multiple of the neighbour importance values. If more than one pair of second-order neighbours has the same
zone permbase assigned, then the importance is the highest value among all the multiples:
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX j ( jc ) – TX k ( kc )
ι 2nd – Neighbour = Max ι i j
× ι Neighbour
All Neighbour Pairs
Neighbour
with ZPB Collisions
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
ι IM is the importance of the relationship between the TBA cell and its related interfering cell. ι IM is
calculated during interference matrix calculation as explained in "Interference Matrix Calculation" on page 712.
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
ι Dis tan ce is the importance of the relationship between the TBA and its related cell with respect to the distance between
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
them. ι Dis tan ce is calculated as explained in "Distance Importance Calculation" on page 712.
From the constraint violation level and the total importance of the relation between the TBA and its related cell, Atoll
calculates the quality reduction factor for the pair as follows:
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
QRF = 1 – VL × ι Total
And, the total cost of the current zone permbase plan for the entire network is simply the sum of the total TBA cell costs
calculated above, i.e.,
TX i ( ic )
$ Total = $ Total
TX i ( ic )
711
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
9.10.6 Appendices
9.10.6.1 Interference Matrix Calculation
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
The importance of an interference matrix entry ( ι IM ) is equal to the co- or adjacent chanenl interference probability
calculated by taking the ratio of the interfered surface area to the total surface area of a cell.
The co-channel interference probability is calculated as follows:
S TX ( ic )
i
TX j ( jc ) TX i ( ic )
C Preamble + M Quality n Preamble
TX ( ic ) ------------------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------- TX ( ic )
i 10 10 <T i
C Preamble – 10 × Log 10 + 10 Preamble
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
S TX ( ic )
i
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
For frequencies farther than the adjacent channel, ι IM = 0.
TX ( ic ) TX ( ic )
i i
Here S TX ( ic ) is the best server coverage area of the cell TXi(ic), that comprises all the pixels where CNR Preamble ≥ T Preamble
i
as calculated in "Service Area Calculation" on page 654. S TX ( ic ) is the best server coverage area of the cell TXi(ic)
i Condition
TX i ( ic ) TX j ( jc )
where the given condition is true. C Preamble and C Preamble are the received preamble signal levels from the cells TXi(ic) and
TX i ( ic )
TXj(jc) respectively, n Preamble the preamble noise for the cell TXi(ic) as calculated in "Preamble Noise Calculation" on
TX i ( ic )
page 649, M Quality is the quality margin used for the interference matrices calculation, and f ACS – FB is the adjacent channel
suppression factor defined for the frequency band of the cell TXi(ic).
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
1 if D <1
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc ) D Reuse 2
ι Dis tan ce = Log ---------------------------------
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
D i j
--------------------------------------------------------
- Otherwise
Log ( D Reuse )
2
712
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
AT310_TRG_E1 Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
Where D Reuse is the minimum reuse distance, either defined for each TBA cell individually or set for all the TBA cells in the
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j
AFP dialogue, and D is the weighted distance between the TBA cell TXi(ic) and its related cell TXj(jc) calculated as
follows:
TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc ) TX ( ic ) – TX ( jc )
i j i j
D = d × ( 1 + x × ( cos ( β ) – cos ( α ) – 2 ) )
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
D is weighted according to the azimuths of the TBA cell and its related cell with respect to the straight line joining
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
them. d is the distance between the two cells considering any offsets with respect to the site locations. x is set
TX i ( ic ) – TX j ( jc )
to 15 % so that the maximum variation in D due to the azimuths does not exceed 60 %. α and β are calculated
from the azimuths of the two cells as shown in Figure 9.9 on page 713.
The above formula implies that two cells facing each other will have a shorter effective distance between them than the real
distance, and two cells pointing in opposite directions will have a greater effective distance.
The importance of the distance relation is explained in Figure 9.10 on page 713. This figure shows that cells that are located
near (based on the effective distance which is weighted by the orientations of the cells) have high importance, which is
interpreted as a high cost, and cells that are located far have low importance. Cells that are further than the reuse distance
do not have any cost related to the distance relation.
713
Atoll 3.1.0 Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks © Forsk 2011
714
Atoll 3.1.0
AT310_TRG_E1 Technical Reference Guide
715
Technical
Reference
Guide
version 3.1.0
AT310_TRG_E1
12 May 2011
Head Office
7, rue des Briquetiers
31700 Blagnac - France
Tel: +33 562 747 210
Fax: +33 562 747 211
US Office
200 South Wacker Drive - Suite 3100
Chicago, IL 60606 - USA
Tel: +1 312 674 4800
Fax: +1 312 674 4847
China Office
Suite 302, 3/F, West Tower,
Jiadu Commercial Building,
No. 66 Jianzhong Road,
Tianhe Hi-Tech Industrial Zone,
Guangzhou, 510665, P. R. of China
Tel: +86 20 8553 8938
Fax: +86 20 8553 8285
www.forsk.com